|
|
|
accept(1m) -- allow/prevent LP destination queuing requests
|
|
The accept command permits the lp command (see lp(1)) to accept printing requests for each named LP printer or printer class destination queue. The reject command causes the lp command to reject subsequent printing requests for each named destination queue. Requests already queued will continue to be processed for printing by the lpsched scheduler (see lpsched(1M)). Use the lpstat command (see lps... |
|
acct(1m) -- overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands
|
|
Accounting software is structured as a set of tools (consisting of both C programs and shell procedures) that can be used to build accounting systems. The shell procedures, described in acctsh(1M), are built on top of the C programs. Connect time accounting is handled by various programs that write records into the utmps database. The programs described in acctcon(1M) convert this file into sessio... |
|
|
acctcms(1m) -- command summary from per-process accounting records
|
|
acctcms reads one or more files, normally in the form described in acct(4). It adds all records for processes that executed identically-named commands, sorts them, and writes them to the standard output, normally using an internal summary format. |
|
acctcom(1m) -- search and print process accounting files
|
|
The acctcom command reads file, standard input, or /var/adm/pacct, in the form described in acct(4) and writes selected records to standard output. Each record represents the execution of one process. The output has the following column titles: |
|
acctcon(1m) -- connect-time accounting
|
|
The acctcon1 command converts a sequence of login/logoff records read from its standard input to a sequence of records, one per login session. Its input should normally be redirected from /var/adm/wtmp or /var/adm/wtmps. Its output is ASCII, giving device, user ID, login name, prime connect time (seconds), non-prime connect time (seconds), session starting time (numeric), and starting date and tim... |
|
acctcon1(1m) -- connect-time accounting
|
|
The acctcon1 command converts a sequence of login/logoff records read from its standard input to a sequence of records, one per login session. Its input should normally be redirected from /var/adm/wtmp or /var/adm/wtmps. Its output is ASCII, giving device, user ID, login name, prime connect time (seconds), non-prime connect time (seconds), session starting time (numeric), and starting date and tim... |
|
acctcon2(1m) -- connect-time accounting
|
|
The acctcon1 command converts a sequence of login/logoff records read from its standard input to a sequence of records, one per login session. Its input should normally be redirected from /var/adm/wtmp or /var/adm/wtmps. Its output is ASCII, giving device, user ID, login name, prime connect time (seconds), non-prime connect time (seconds), session starting time (numeric), and starting date and tim... |
|
acctdisk(1m) -- overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands
|
|
Accounting software is structured as a set of tools (consisting of both C programs and shell procedures) that can be used to build accounting systems. The shell procedures, described in acctsh(1M), are built on top of the C programs. Connect time accounting is handled by various programs that write records into the utmps database. The programs described in acctcon(1M) convert this file into sessio... |
|
acctdusg(1m) -- overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands
|
|
Accounting software is structured as a set of tools (consisting of both C programs and shell procedures) that can be used to build accounting systems. The shell procedures, described in acctsh(1M), are built on top of the C programs. Connect time accounting is handled by various programs that write records into the utmps database. The programs described in acctcon(1M) convert this file into sessio... |
|
acctmerg(1m) -- merge or add total accounting files
|
|
acctmerg reads its standard input and up to nine additional files, all in the tacct format (see acct(4)) or an ASCII version thereof. It merges these inputs by adding records whose keys (normally user ID and name) are identical, and expects the inputs to be sorted on those keys. |
|
accton(1m) -- overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands
|
|
Accounting software is structured as a set of tools (consisting of both C programs and shell procedures) that can be used to build accounting systems. The shell procedures, described in acctsh(1M), are built on top of the C programs. Connect time accounting is handled by various programs that write records into the utmps database. The programs described in acctcon(1M) convert this file into sessio... |
|
acctprc(1m) -- process accounting
|
|
acctprc1 reads input in the form described by acct(4), adds login names corresponding to user IDs, then writes for each process an ASCII line giving user ID, login name, prime CPU time (tics), non-prime CPU time (tics), and mean memory size (in memory segment units). If ctmp is given, it is expected to contain a list of login sessions in the form described in acctcon(1M), sorted by user ID and log... |
|
acctprc1(1m) -- process accounting
|
|
acctprc1 reads input in the form described by acct(4), adds login names corresponding to user IDs, then writes for each process an ASCII line giving user ID, login name, prime CPU time (tics), non-prime CPU time (tics), and mean memory size (in memory segment units). If ctmp is given, it is expected to contain a list of login sessions in the form described in acctcon(1M), sorted by user ID and log... |
|
acctprc2(1m) -- process accounting
|
|
acctprc1 reads input in the form described by acct(4), adds login names corresponding to user IDs, then writes for each process an ASCII line giving user ID, login name, prime CPU time (tics), non-prime CPU time (tics), and mean memory size (in memory segment units). If ctmp is given, it is expected to contain a list of login sessions in the form described in acctcon(1M), sorted by user ID and log... |
|
acctsh(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
acctwtmp(1m) -- overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands
|
|
Accounting software is structured as a set of tools (consisting of both C programs and shell procedures) that can be used to build accounting systems. The shell procedures, described in acctsh(1M), are built on top of the C programs. Connect time accounting is handled by various programs that write records into the utmps database. The programs described in acctcon(1M) convert this file into sessio... |
|
acl_edit(1m) -- Edits or lists an object's ACLs
|
|
The acl_edit command is a client program that, when invoked, binds to the specified object's ACL Manager (which is implemented in the object's server), and allows the user to manipulate the object's ACL through the standard DCE ACL interface. This interface is the sec_acl_...() interface documented in the OSF DCE Application Development Reference. The acl_edit command automatically binds to the... |
|
adb(1) -- absolute debugger
|
|
The adb command executes a general-purpose debugging program that is sensitive to the underlying architecture of the processor and operating system on which it is run It can be used to examine files and provide a controlled environment for executing HP-UX programs. adb inspects exactly one object file, referred to as the current object file, and one memory file, referred to as the current memory f... |
|
add_directory(1m) -- (including application-defined attributes) of a directory
|
|
The add directory command adds a value to a modifiable, set-valued attribute (including application-defined attributes) of a directory. If the attribute does not exist, this command creates it. Usually, this task is performed through the client application. See the DCE Administration Guide for more information about attributes. |
|
add_object(1m) -- (including application-defined attributes) of an object entry
|
|
The add object command adds a value to a modifiable, set-valued attribute (including application-defined attributes) of an object entry. If the attribute does not exist, this command creates it. Usually, this task is performed through the client application. See the DCE Administration Guide for more information about attributes. |
|
adjust(1) -- simple text formatter
|
|
The adjust command is a simple text formatter for filling, centering, left and right justifying, or only right justifying text paragraphs, and is designed for interactive use. It reads the concatenation of input files (or standard input if none are given) and produces on standard output a formatted version of its input, with each paragraph formatted separately. If - is given as an input filename, ... |
|
admin(1) -- create and administer SCCS files
|
|
The admin command is used to create new SCCS files and change the parameters of existing ones. Arguments to admin, which may appear in any order, ( unless -- is specified as an argument, in which case all arguments after -- are treated as files ) consist of option arguments, beginning with -, and named files (note that SCCS file names must begin with the characters s.). If a named file does not ex... |
|
advertise(1m) -- Configures the system as a global server by adding the server's entry to the cell profile
|
|
The advertise command causes DTS to forward the name and attributes of the server to CDS by binding the server's protocol tower to the CDS object and adding an entry for the server in the cell profile. Once the server's entry is in the cell profile, it is configured as a global server, and servers outside of the LAN can access it. |
|
alias(1) -- standard and restricted POSIX.2-conformant command shells
|
|
Shell Invocation Tilde Substitution Environment Options Command Substitution Functions rsh Restrictions Parameter Substitution Jobs Definitions Blank Interpretation Signals Commands File Name Generation Execution Simple Commands Quoting Command Reentry Compound Commands Arithmetic Evaluation Command Line Editing Special Commands Prompting emacs/gmacs Editing Mode Comments Conditional Expressions v... |
|
AM60Srvr(1m) -- disk array server daemon
|
|
AM60Srvr is the server portion of the Array Manager 60 management software. It monitors the operation and performance of the disk array, and services external requests from clients executing disk array commands. AM60Srvr monitors disk array performance and status, maintains disk array logs, and allows clients to examine and change disk array configuration. AM60Srvr must be running to allow managem... |
|
amcfg(1m) -- manages LUN (logical drive) configuration on the disk array
|
|
amcfg manages the LUN configuration on the disk array identified by ArrayID. This involves creating, deleting, replacing, and assigning ownership of all LUNS on the disk array. WARNING: Deleting a LUN will destroy all the data on the LUN. Backup all vital data before deleting a LUN. The ArrayID used to address the disk array can be the disk array serial number or name, if one has been assigned to ... |
|
amdload(1m) -- downloads new firmware to the disk array controllers, the disk system BCC controllers, and disks
|
|
amdload copies new firmware code to the disk array controllers, the disk system BCC controllers, or the disks in the disk array identified by ArrayID. The new code is stored in the file identified by codefile. The ArrayID used to address the disk array can be the disk array serial number or name, if one has been assigned to the disk array. |
|
amdsp(1m) -- display the status and operating configuration of the disk array
|
|
amdsp displays status and configuration information for the disk array identified by ArrayID. Logical configuration, physical configuration, and current status can all be displayed using amdsp. A list of all the disk arrays recognized by the host can also be displayed. The ArrayID used to address the disk array can be the disk array serial number or name, if one has been assigned to the disk array... |
|
amfmt(1m) -- disk format, not supported
|
|
The amfmt command is a data destructive command and is not supported. If an attempt is made to execute the amfmt command, data may be destroyed. |
|
amlog(1m) -- displays host-based controller log entries for a disk array
|
|
amlog displays the contents of the disk array controller logs maintained by the host. These logs contain information useful for diagnosing and troubleshooting the disk array. The host maintains multiple log files containing entries for each disk array. The ArrayID used to address the disk array must be the disk array ID. An alias name cannot be used because alias names are not recorded in the log. |
|
ammgr(1m) -- manages the operating characteristics of the disk array
|
|
ammgr manages the operating characteristics of the disk array by providing access to the settings used to control disk array operation. In most cases, these settings control the operation of the entire disk array; consequently, every LUN on the disk array will be affected by any changes made using this command. The exception is a parity scan, which impacts only the specified LUN. The ArrayID used ... |
|
amutil(1m) -- controls various disk array management functions
|
|
amutil controls a variety of management operations on the disk array identified by ArrayID. Locating hardware components and managing the rebuild process are done using amutil. The ArrayID used to address the disk array can be the disk array serial number or name, if one has been assigned to the disk array. |
|
answer(1) -- phone message transcription system
|
|
The answer interactive program helps you to transcribe telephone (and other) messages into electronic mail. The program uses your personal elm alias database and the system elm alias database, allowing you to use aliases to address the messages. |
|
ar(1) -- create and maintain portable archives and libraries
|
|
The ar command maintains groups of files combined into a single archive file. Its main use is to create and update library files as used by the link editor (see ld(1)). It can be used, however, for any similar purpose. The magic string and file headers used by ar consist of printable ASCII characters. If an archive is composed of printable files, the entire archive is printable. Individual files a... |
|
arp(1m) -- address resolution display and control
|
|
The arp command displays and modifies the Internet-to-Ethernet and Internet-to-Fibre Channel address translation tables used by the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP). |
|
as(1) -- assembler for Itanium-based systems
|
|
as assembles the named source file file, or the standard input if file is not specified. The output of the assembler is an ELF relocatable object file that must be processed by ld before it can be executed. Assembler output is stored in file outfile. If the -o outfile option is not specified, the assembler constructs a default name. If no source file is specified, outfile will be a.out; otherwise ... |
|
asa(1) -- interpret ASA carriage control characters
|
|
asa interprets the output of FORTRAN programs that utilize ASA carriage control characters. It processes either the files whose names are given as arguments, or the standard input if - is specified or if no file names are given. The first character of each line is assumed to be a control character. The following control characters are interpreted as indicated: (blank) Output a single new-line char... |
|
Asecure(1m) -- control access to Audio on a workstation
|
|
On Series 700 workstations, audio is secured so that only the user on the local workstation can access audio. You use the asecure command to modify audio security. This command does not apply to X stations; on an X station, access to audio is unrestricted. To modify audio security, become root on the local workstation where you want make a change. Then, use asecure as follows: /opt/audio/bin/asecu... |
|
asecure(1m) -- control access to Audio on a workstation
|
|
On Series 700 workstations, audio is secured so that only the user on the local workstation can access audio. You use the asecure command to modify audio security. This command does not apply to X stations; on an X station, access to audio is unrestricted. To modify audio security, become root on the local workstation where you want make a change. Then, use asecure as follows: /opt/audio/bin/asecu... |
|
Aserver(1m) -- start the audio server
|
|
The Aserver command starts the HP-UX Audio server, which can run on a system with audio hardware. See Audio(5) for information about which systems have audio hardware. The -f option forces the starting of the Audio server; this option is only needed if the Aserver has problems starting. |
|
aserver(1m) -- start the audio server
|
|
The Aserver command starts the HP-UX Audio server, which can run on a system with audio hardware. See Audio(5) for information about which systems have audio hardware. The -f option forces the starting of the Audio server; this option is only needed if the Aserver has problems starting. |
|
as_ia(1) -- assembler for Itanium-based systems
|
|
as assembles the named source file file, or the standard input if file is not specified. The output of the assembler is an ELF relocatable object file that must be processed by ld before it can be executed. Assembler output is stored in file outfile. If the -o outfile option is not specified, the assembler constructs a default name. If no source file is specified, outfile will be a.out; otherwise ... |
|
as_pa(1) -- assembler for PA-RISC systems
|
|
The as command assembles source text from files or standard input and produces a relocatable object file suitable for the link editor, ld (see ld(1)). Source text is read from standard input only if no file argument is given. Standard input cannot be a device file, such as a terminal. The option and file arguments can be intermingled on the command line. Every specified option applies to every spe... |
|
at(1) -- execute batched commands immediately or at a later time
|
|
The at and batch commands schedule jobs for execution by the cron daemon (see cron(1M)). at schedules a job for execution at a specified time. at can also list (-l) or remove (-r) existing scheduled at and batch jobs. batch schedules a job for execution immediately, or as soon as system load levels permit. You can enter commands into a job in one of the following ways: Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 ... |
|
attributes(1) -- describe an audio file
|
|
This command provides information about an audio file, including file format, data format, sampling rate, number of channels, data length and header length. |
|
audevent(1m) -- change or display event or system call audit status
|
|
audevent changes or displays the auditing status of the given events or system calls. The event is used to specify names associated with certain self-auditing commands; syscall is used to select related system calls. If neither -P, -p, -F, nor -f is specified, the current status of the selected events or system calls is displayed. If the -E option is supplied, it is redundant to specify events wit... |
|
audisp(1m) -- display the audit information as requested by the parameters
|
|
audisp analyzes and displays the audit information contained in the specified audit_filename audit files. The audit files are merged into a single audit trail in time order. Although the entire audit trail is analyzed, audisp allows you to limit the information displayed, by specifying options. This command is restricted to privileged users. Any unspecified option is interpreted as an unrestricted... |
|
auditd(1m) -- Starts the DCE Audit Daemon.
|
|
The auditd command starts the Audit daemon. The Audit daemon must be run on the host before the audit clients. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 auditd(1m) Open Software Foundation auditd(1m) The Audit daemon can only service audit clients that are on the host where it is running. Thus, an Audit daemon must be installed and run on every host in the cell that has audi... |
|
audomon(1m) -- audit overflow monitor daemon
|
|
audomon monitors the capacity of the current audit file and the file system on which the audit file is located, and prints out warning messages when either is approaching full. It also checks the audit file and the file system against 2 switch points: FileSpaceSwitch (FSS) and AuditFileSwitch (AFS) and if either is reached, audit recording automatically switches to the backup audit file if it is a... |
|
audsys(1m) -- start or halt the auditing system and set or display audit file information
|
|
audsys allows the user to start or halt the auditing system, to specify the auditing system "current" and "next" audit files (and their switch sizes), or to display auditing system status information. This command is restricted to super-users. The "current" audit file is the file to which the auditing system writes audit records. When the "current" file grows to either its Audit File Switc... |
|
audusr(1m) -- select users to audit
|
|
audusr is used to specify users to be audited or excluded from auditing. If no arguments are specified, audusr displays the audit setting of every user. audusr is restricted to super-users. |
|
auth.adm(1m) -- activate, deactivate, or query about HP-UX Integrated Login
|
|
The auth.adm command makes it easy to activate, deactivate or query about HP-UX Integrated Login. During activation, auth.adm sets up a machine to obtain integrated login behavior using any of the following commands: login, rlogin, telnet, dtlogin, su, passwd, and ftpd. auth.adm saves the Integrated Login configuration, specified by -l, -b and -a arguments, in the file /etc/auth.conf. This configu... |
|
authck(1m) -- check internal consistency of Authentication database
|
|
authck checks both the overall structure and internal field consistency of all components of the Authentication database. It reports all problems it finds. Only users who have the superuser capability can run this command. When pwck is used with the -s option, authck is run with the -p option automatically. |
|
automount(1m) -- install automatic mount points
|
|
The automount command installs autofs mount points and associates an automount map with each mount point. The autofs filesystem monitors attempts to access directories within it and notifies the automountd daemon (see automountd(1M)). The daemon uses the map to locate a filesystem, which it then mounts at the point of reference within the autofs filesystem. You can assign a map to an autofs mount ... |
|
automountd(1m) -- autofs mount/unmount daemon
|
|
automountd is an RPC server that answers file system mount and unmount requests from the autofs filesystem. It uses local files or name service maps to locate filesystems to be mounted. These maps are described with the automount command (see automount(1M)). The automountd daemon is automatically invoked if the AUTOFS variable is set to 1 in /etc/rc.config.d/nfsconf. |
|
autopush(1m) -- manage system database of automatically pushed STREAMS modules
|
|
autopush manages the system database that is used for automatic configuration of STREAMS devices. The command is used in three different ways as dictated by the -f, -g, and -r command-line options described below. |
|
auto_parms(1m) -- initial system configuration plus DHCP support command
|
|
The auto_parms command is a system initialization command that handles first-boot configuration, that is, the setting of unique system "initial identity parameters", and ongoing management of DHCP lease(s). The auto_parms command is invoked at boot time by the /sbin/rc command. Initially it loads a list of available ethernet interfaces and requests a DHCP lease on each interface. It stops when a... |
|
awk(1) -- pattern-directed scanning and processing language
|
|
awk scans each input file for lines that match any of a set of patterns specified literally in program or in one or more files specified as -f progfile. With each pattern there can be an associated action that is to be performed when a line in a file matches the pattern. Each line is matched against the pattern portion of every pattern-action statement, and the associated action is performed for e... |
|
backup(1m) -- backup or archive file system
|
|
The backup command uses find(1) and cpio(1) to save a cpio archive of all files that have been modified since the modification time of /var/adm/archivedate on the default tape drive (/dev/update.src). backup should be invoked periodically to ensure adequate file backup. The -A option suppresses warning messages regarding optional access control list entries. backup(1M) does not backup optional acc... |
|
banner(1) -- make posters in large letters
|
|
banner prints its arguments (each up to 10 characters long) in large letters on the standard output. Each argument is printed on a separate line. Note that multiple-word arguments must be enclosed in quotes in order to be printed on the same line. |
|
basename(1) -- extract portions of path names
|
|
basename deletes any prefix ending in / and the suffix (if present in string) from string, and prints the result on the standard output. If string consists entirely of slash characters, string is set to a single slash character. If there are any trailing slash characters in string, they are removed. If the suffix operand is present but not identical to the characters remaining in string, but it is... |
|
batch(1) -- execute batched commands immediately or at a later time
|
|
The at and batch commands schedule jobs for execution by the cron daemon (see cron(1M)). at schedules a job for execution at a specified time. at can also list (-l) or remove (-r) existing scheduled at and batch jobs. batch schedules a job for execution immediately, or as soon as system load levels permit. You can enter commands into a job in one of the following ways: Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 ... |
|
bc(1) -- arbitrary-precision arithmetic language
|
|
bc is an interactive processor for a language that resembles C but provides unlimited-precision arithmetic. It takes input from any files given, then reads the standard input. Options: bc recognizes the following command-line options: -c Compile only. bc is actually a preprocessor for dc which bc invokes automatically (see dc(1)). Specifying -c prevents invoking dc, and sends the dc input to stand... |
|
bdf(1m) -- report number of free disk blocks (Berkeley version)
|
|
The bdf command displays the amount of free disk space available either on the specified filesystem (/dev/dsk/c0d0s0, for example) or on the file system in which the specified file (such as $HOME), is contained. If no file system is specified, the free space on all of the normally mounted file systems is printed. The reported numbers are in kilobytes. |
|
bdftopcf(1) -- convert X font from Bitmap Distribution Format to Portable Compiled Format
|
|
Bdftopcf is a font compiler for the X server and font server. Fonts in Portable Compiled Format can be read by any architecture, although the file is structured to allow one particular architecture to read them directly without reformatting. This allows fast reading on the appropriate machine, but the files are still portable (but read more slowly) on other machines. |
|
bdiff(1) -- diff for large files
|
|
bdiff compares two files and produces output identical to what would be produced by diff (see diff(1)), specifying changes that must be made to make the files identical. bdiff is designed for handling files that are too large for diff, but it can be used on files of any length. bdiff processes files as follows: + Ignore lines common to the beginning of both files. + Split the remainder of each fil... |
|
bg(1) -- standard and restricted POSIX.2-conformant command shells
|
|
Shell Invocation Tilde Substitution Environment Options Command Substitution Functions rsh Restrictions Parameter Substitution Jobs Definitions Blank Interpretation Signals Commands File Name Generation Execution Simple Commands Quoting Command Reentry Compound Commands Arithmetic Evaluation Command Line Editing Special Commands Prompting emacs/gmacs Editing Mode Comments Conditional Expressions v... |
|
big5-cwin(1) -- Big5 UDF file format converter
|
|
big5-cwin is used to convert a HP 9000 Big5 code UDF file to PC CWindows UDF file |
|
big5-et(1) -- big5 UDF file format converter
|
|
big5-et is used to convert a hp9000 big5 UDF file to PC ET UDF file |
|
big5udf(1) -- HP 9000 Big5 code UDF utilities
|
|
CMEX <---> HP Big5 code UDF format converting tools description =============================================================== Hewlett Packard Taiwan, Solution Development Operation 1. Purpose : If user uses HP9000 system as the server, and uses a PC running ETen Chinese system, also connects through CTERM with the server. Owing to the PC's UDF file format is different from the server. So, there... |
|
big5udfdown(1) -- UDF download utility for big5 code
|
|
big5udfdown is used to download big5 UDF file to peripheral devices |
|
big5udfgen(1) -- HP 9000 Big5 code user defined font generating utility
|
|
_____________________________ | | | | | HP 9000 Big5 Code | | User Defined Font Generator | | | |_____________________________| User Defined Font Generating System User can execute the UDF generator on a HP9000 terminal. $ big5udfgen < return > The following messages will show on the screen : ******************************************************** * (c) HP-UX Big5 User Defined Font Generator Util... |
|
biod(1m) -- NFS daemons
|
|
nfsd starts the NFS server daemons that handle client file system requests (see nfs(7)). num_nfsd is the suggested number of file system request daemons that will start. One daemon will be started to support the kernel threads servicing TCP requests, and multiple additional daemons will be started to service UDP requests. At system boot time, num_nfsd is defined by the NUM_NFSD variable in the /et... |
|
boot(1m) -- bootstrap process
|
|
Itanium-based System Hardware The Itanium-based system's bootstrap process involves the execution of four software components: + CMOS + option ROM + EFI + Boot Manager + hpux.efi After the processor is reset, firmware initializes and tests processors and platform. During initialization, the firmware lets a user interrupt and configure CMOS and option ROMs. It then transfers control to EFI, the Ex... |
|
bootpd(1m) -- Internet Boot Protocol server
|
|
The bootpd daemon implements three functions: a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server as defined in RFC1541, an Internet Boot Protocol (BOOTP) server as defined in RFC951 and RFC1395, and a DHCP/BOOTP relay agent as defined in RFC1542. It also contains some of the useful fields as defined in RFC2132. bootpd is run through inetd (see inetd(1M)). It is run by /etc/inetd when the followin... |
|
bootpquery(1m) -- send BOOTREQUEST to BOOTP server
|
|
bootpquery is a diagnostic function used to check the configuration of the Internet Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) server, bootpd(1M). This function can only be run by the superuser, since it uses reserved ports. bootpquery constructs a boot request with the supplied parameters to send to the BOOTP server, and prints the contents of the BOOTP server reply (as shown in EXAMPLES, below). Note that bootp... |
|
bs(1) -- a compiler/interpreter for modest-sized programs
|
|
bs is a remote descendant of BASIC and SNOBOL4 with some C language added. bs is designed for programming tasks where program development time is as important as the resulting speed of execution. Formalities of data declaration and file/process manipulation are minimized. Line-at-a-time debugging, the trace and dump statements, and useful run-time error messages all simplify program testing. Furth... |
|
cachefsstat(1m) -- Cache File System statistics
|
|
The cachefsstat command displays statistical information about the cache filesystem mounted on path. The statistical information includes cache hits and misses, consistency checking, and modification operations. If path is not specified, all mounted cache filesystems are used. cachefsstat can also be used to reinitialize this information (see -z option). The statistical information has the followi... |
|
cal(1) -- print calendar
|
|
cal prints a calendar for the specified year. If a month is also specified, a calendar just for that month is printed. If neither is specified, a calendar for the present month is printed. year can be between 1 and 9999. month is a decimal number between 1 and 12. The calendar produced is a Gregorian calendar. |
|
calendar(1) -- reminder service
|
|
calendar consults the file calendar in the current directory and prints out lines containing today's or tomorrow's date anywhere in the line. On weekends, ``tomorrow'' extends through Monday. When a - command-line argument is present, calendar searches for the file calendar in each user's home directory, and sends any positive results to the user by mail (see mail(1)). Normally this is done d... |
|
cancel(1) -- print/alter/cancel requests on an LP destination
|
|
The lp command queues files for printing. The lpalt command changes information in a queued request. The cancel command deletes a queued request. lp Command The lp command arranges for the named files, file ..., and associated information (collectively called a request) to be queued for output to a destination in the LP (line printer) subsystem. The process is called printing, regardless of the ac... |
|
captoinfo(1m) -- convert a termcap description into a terminfo description
|
|
captoinfo looks in filenames for termcap(3X) descriptions. For each one found, an equivalent terminfo(4) description is written to standard output along with any comments found. The short two letter name at the beginning of the list of names in a termcap entry, a holdover from Version 6 UNIX, is removed. Any description that is expressed relative to another description (as specified in the termcap... |
|
cat(1) -- concatenate, copy, and print files
|
|
cat reads each file in sequence and writes it on the standard output. Thus: cat file prints file on the default standard output device; cat file1 file2 > file3 concatenates file1 and file2, and places the result in file3. If - is appears as a file argument, cat uses standard input. To combine standard input and other files, use a combination of - and file arguments. |
|
catman(1m) -- create the cat files for the manual
|
|
The catman command creates the formatted versions of the online manual from nroff(1)-compatible source files. Each manual entry in the man*.Z and man* directories is examined, and those whose formatted versions are missing or out-of-date are recreated. catman formats the most recent of the entries, compresses it, and puts it into the appropriate cat*.Z directory. If any changes are made, catman re... |
|
ccat(1) -- compact and uncompact files, and cat them
|
|
compact compresses the named files using an adaptive Huffman code. If no file names are given, standard input is compacted and sent to the standard output. compact operates as an on-line algorithm. Each time a byte is read, it is encoded immediately according to the current prefix code. This code is an optimal Huffman code for the set of frequencies seen so far. It is unnecessary to attach a decod... |
|
ccdc-et(1) -- ccdc UDF file format converter
|
|
ccdc-et is used to convert a hp9000 ccdc UDF file to PC ET UDF file |
|
ccdcudf(1) -- HP 9000 CCDC code UDF utilities
|
|
CMEX <---> HP CCDC code UDF format converting tools description =============================================================== Hewlett Packard Taiwan, Solution Development Operation 1. Purpose : If user uses HP9000 system as the server, and uses a PC running ETen Chinese system, also connects through CTERM with the server. Owing to the PC's UDF file format is different from the server. So, there... |
|
ccdcudfdown(1) -- UDF download utility for ccdc code
|
|
ccdcudfdown is used to download ccdc UDF file to peripheral devices |
|
ccdcudfgen(1) -- HP 9000 CCDC code user defined font generating utility
|
|
_____________________________ | | | | | HP 9000 CCDC Code | | User Defined Font Generator | | | |_____________________________| User Defined Font Generating System User can execute the UDF generator on a HP9000 terminal. $ ccdcudfgen < return > The following messages will show on the screen : ******************************************************** * (c) HP-UX CCDC User Defined Font Generator Util... |
|
cc_bundled(1) -- bundled C compiler
|
|
This manpage describes the Bundled C compiler. cc invokes the HP-UX bundled C compiler. C source code is compiled directly to object code. The command uses the ctcom (Itanium(R)-based systems) or ccom (PARISC, Precision Architecture) compiler for preprocessing, syntax and type checking, as well as for code generation. cc accepts several types of arguments as files: .c Suffix Arguments whose names ... |
|
cc_bundled_ia(1) -- bundled C compiler
|
|
This manpage describes the Bundled C compiler. cc invokes the HP-UX bundled C compiler. C source code is compiled directly to object code. The command uses the ctcom (Itanium(R)-based systems) or ccom (PARISC, Precision Architecture) compiler for preprocessing, syntax and type checking, as well as for code generation. cc accepts several types of arguments as files: .c Suffix Arguments whose names ... |
|
cc_bundled_pa(1) -- bundled C compiler
|
|
This manpage describes the Bundled C compiler. See cc(1), online only, for a description of the ANSI-compliant HP-UX manual page. This cc accepts several types of arguments as files: .c Suffix Arguments whose names end with .c are understood to be C source files. Each is compiled and the resulting object file is left in a file having the corresponding base name, .o instead of .c. However, if a sin... |
|
cd(1) -- change working directory
|
|
If directory is not specified, the value of shell parameter HOME is used as the new working directory. If directory specifies a complete path starting with /, ., or .., directory becomes the new working directory. If neither case applies, cd tries to find the designated directory relative to one of the paths specified by the CDPATH shell variable. CDPATH has the same syntax as, and similar semanti... |
|
cdc(1) -- change the delta commentary of an SCCS delta
|
|
The cdc command changes the delta commentary, for the SID specified by the -r option, of each named SCCS file. Delta commentary is defined to be the Modification Request (MR) and comment information normally specified via the delta(1) command (-m and -y options). If a directory is named, cdc behaves as if each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last c... |
|
cdsadv(1m) -- Starts the CDS client daemon
|
|
The cdsadv command starts the CDS client daemon. |
|
cdsbrowser(1m) -- Starts the CDS Browser utility on the local system
|
|
The cdsbrowser command starts the CDS Browser utility on the local system. This utility runs on workstations with windowing software based on the OSF/Motif graphical user interface. Using a mouse to manipulate pull-down menus, you can view the directory structure of a namespace, view child directories of a particular directory, view the object entries and soft links in a directory, and set a filte... |
|
cdsclerk(1m) -- Manages the interface between clients and the CDS server
|
|
The cdsclerk command manages the interface between clients and the CDS server. |
|
cdscp(1m) -- Starts the CDS control program
|
|
The Cell Directory Service (CDS) control program is a command line interface for managing the components of the Cell Directory Service and the contents of the namespace. You can use the control program commands from within the control program or from the system prompt. To use the control program commands from inside the control program, start the control program by using the cdscp command alone, w... |
|
cdsd(1m) -- Starts the CDS server
|
|
The cdsd command starts the CDS server. |
|
cds_intro(1m) -- Introduction to the CDS commands
|
|
The DCE Cell Directory Service provides the following management commands: o The cdsbrowser command starts the CDS Browser utility. This utility is based on the OSF/Motif graphical user interface. The Browser can display an overall directory structure as well as show the contents of directories. o The cdscp command starts the CDS control program. Use this command line interface to manage the CDS c... |
|
cfsadmin(1m) -- administer disk space used for caching file systems with
|
|
The cfsadmin command provides the following functions: + cache creation + deletion of cached file systems + listing of cache contents and statistics + resource parameter adjustment when the file system is unmounted. For each form of the command, with the exception of the -s form, you must specify a cache directory, that is, the directory under which the cache is actually stored. A path name in the... |
|
chacl(1) -- add, modify, delete, copy, or summarize access control lists (ACLs) of files
|
|
chacl extends the capabilities of chmod(1), by enabling the user to grant or restrict file access to additional specific users and/or groups. Traditional file access permissions, set when a file is created, grant or restrict access to the file's owner, group, and other users. These file access permissions (eg., rwxrw-r--) are mapped into three base access control list entries: one entry for the f... |
|
change(1m) -- Alters the epoch number and time on the local node
|
|
The change command sets the time and changes the epoch of the DTS server on which it is entered. Use this command to isolate a server from the rest of the servers in the network before changing the time. |
|
chargefee(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
chatr(1) -- change program's internal attributes
|
|
chatr allows you to change a program's internal attributes for 32-bit and 64-bit ELF files. There are two syntactic forms that can be used to invoke chatr. + Format 1 allows easy manipulation of ordinary files that have only a single text segment and a single data segment. + Format 2 allows explicit specification of the segments to be modified. Upon completion, chatr prints the file's old and ne... |
|
chatr_ia(1) -- change program's internal attributes
|
|
chatr allows you to change a program's internal attributes for 32-bit and 64-bit ELF files. There are two syntactic forms that can be used to invoke chatr. + Format 1 allows easy manipulation of ordinary files that have only a single text segment and a single data segment. + Format 2 allows explicit specification of the segments to be modified. Upon completion, chatr prints the file's old and ne... |
|
chatr_pa(1) -- change program's internal attributes
|
|
chatr allows you to change a program's internal attributes for 32-bit mode SOM and 64-bit mode ELF files. Upon completion, chatr prints the file's old and new values to standard output unless -s is specified. The +pd and +pi options only provide a hint for the virtual memory page size. The actual page sizes may vary. Under certain conditions, page size hints of L may result in better performance... |
|
checknr(1) -- check nroff/troff files
|
|
checknr searches a list of nroff or troff input files for certain kinds of errors involving mismatched opening and closing delimiters and unknown commands. If no files are specified, checknr searches the standard input. checknr looks for the following: + Font changes using \fx ... \fP. + Size changes using \sx ... \s0. + Macros that come in open ... close forms, such as the .TS and .TE macros,... |
|
chfn(1) -- change user information; used by finger
|
|
The chfn command changes the user information that is stored in the repository for the current logged-in user or for the user specified by login-name (see passwd(1)). The information is organized as four comma-separated subfields within the reserved (5th) field of the password file entry. It consists of the user's full name, location code, office phone number, and home phone number, in that order... |
|
chgrp(1) -- change file owner or group
|
|
The chown command changes the owner ID of each specified file to owner and optionally the group ID of each specified file to group. The chgrp command changes the group ID of each specified file to group. owner can be either a decimal user ID or a login name found in the /etc/passwd file. group can be either a decimal group ID or a group name found in the /etc/group file. In order to change the own... |
|
chkey(1) -- change user's secure RPC key pair
|
|
chkey is used to change a user's secure RPC public key and secret key pair. chkey prompts for the old secure-rpc password and verifies that it is correct by decrypting the secret key. If the user has not already keylogged in, chkey registers the secret key with the local keyserv(1M) daemon. If the secure-rpc password does not match the login password, chkey prompts for the login password. chkey u... |
|
chmod(1) -- change file mode access permissions
|
|
The chmod command changes the permissions of one or more files according to the value of symbolic_mode_list or numeric_mode. You can display the current permissions for a file with the ls -l command (see ls(1)). |
|
chnlspath(1m) -- configure message catalog path
|
|
chnlspath is used to modify the contents of the configuration file /etc/default/nlspath. chnlspath recognizes the following options and command-line arguments: |
|
chown(1) -- change file owner or group
|
|
The chown command changes the owner ID of each specified file to owner and optionally the group ID of each specified file to group. The chgrp command changes the group ID of each specified file to group. owner can be either a decimal user ID or a login name found in the /etc/passwd file. group can be either a decimal group ID or a group name found in the /etc/group file. In order to change the own... |
|
chroot(1m) -- change root directory for a command
|
|
The chroot command executes command relative to the newroot. The meaning of any initial slashes (/) in path names is changed for command and any of its children to newroot. Furthermore, the initial working directory is newroot. Note that command suffixes that affect input or output for the chroot command use the original root, not the new root. For example, the command: chroot newroot command > x ... |
|
chsh(1) -- change default login shell
|
|
The chsh command changes the login-shell for a user's login name in the repository (see passwd(1)). The DCE repository (-r dce) is only available if Integrated Login has been configured, see auth.adm(1M). If Integrated Login has been configured, other considerations apply. A user with appropriate DCE privileges is capable of modifying a user's shell; this is not dependent upon superuser privileg... |
|
ch_rc(1m) -- change system configuration file
|
|
ch_rc manages the addition, modification, removal, and retrieval of information stored in files having the format of those in the /etc/rc.config.d directory. Parameter names are treated as strings. Thus, X[0] has no special meaning to ch_rc in relation to other parameters named X[1] or X. |
|
ci(1) -- check in RCS revisions
|
|
ci stores new revisions into RCS files. Each file name ending in ,v is treated as an RCS file; all others are assumed to be working files. ci deposits the contents of each working file into the corresponding RCS file (see rcsintro(5)). If the RCS file does not exist, ci creates it and deposits the contents of the working file as the initial revision. The default number is "1.1". The access list ... |
|
ckconfig(1) -- verify the path names of all the FTP configuration files.
|
|
The ckconfig utility is used to verify the path names of the FTP configuration files, /etc/ftpd/ftpusers, /etc/ftpd/ftpaccess, /etc/ftpd/ftpconversions, /etc/ftpd/ftpgroups, /etc/ftpd/ftphosts, /var/adm/syslog/xferlog, and /etc/ftpd/pids/*. This utility checks to see that all the FTP configuration files are in the path specified. If it is not able to find the configuration files in the path, it wi... |
|
ckpacct(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
cksum(1) -- print file checksum and sizes
|
|
The cksum command calculates and prints to standard output a checksum for each named file, the number of octets in the file and the filename. cksum uses a portable algorithm based on a 32-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check. This algorithm finds a broader spectrum of errors than the 16-bit algorithms used by sum (see sum(1)). The CRC is the sum of the following expressions, where x is each byte of the fil... |
|
cleanup(1m) -- HP-UX patch cleanup utility
|
|
The cleanup command provides functions useful when dealing with HP-UX patches on HP-UX. The cleanup command logs all information to /var/adm/cleanup.log. |
|
clear(1) -- clear terminal screen
|
|
clear clears the terminal screen if it is possible to do so. It reads the TERM environment variable for the terminal type, then reads the appropriate terminfo database to determine how to clear the screen. |
|
clear_cached_server(1m) -- Removes knowledge of a server that you had specifically defined from the local clerk's cache
|
|
The clear cached server command removes knowledge of a server from the local clerk's cache. You can only clear servers that you have specifically created with the define cached server command. |
|
clear_clearinghouse(1m) -- Removes knowledge of the specified clearinghouse from the server's memory
|
|
The clear clearinghouse command removes knowledge of the specified clearinghouse from the server's memory. The clearinghouse files are not deleted. This ensures that the clearinghouse is not automatically enabled on server restarts. If you issue a list clearinghouse command, the clearinghouse will be listed. Before you can delete a cleared clearinghouse, you must use the create clearinghouse comm... |
|
clear_locks(1m) -- clear locks held on behalf of an NFS client
|
|
The clear_locks command removes all file, record, and share locks created by the hostname and held on the current host, regardless of which process created or owns the locks. This command can be run only by the super-user. This command should only be used to repair the rare case of a client crashing and failing to clear held locks. Clearing locks held by an active client may cause applications to ... |
|
closewtmp(1m) -- overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands
|
|
Accounting software is structured as a set of tools (consisting of both C programs and shell procedures) that can be used to build accounting systems. The shell procedures, described in acctsh(1M), are built on top of the C programs. Connect time accounting is handled by various programs that write records into the utmps database. The programs described in acctcon(1M) convert this file into sessio... |
|
clri(1m) -- clear inode
|
|
The clri command clears the inode i-number by filling it with zeros. special must be a special file name referring to a device containing a file system. For proper results, special should not be mounted (see WARNINGS below). After clri is executed, all blocks in the affected file show up as "missing" in an fsck of special (see fsck(1M)). This command should only be used in emergencies. Read and ... |
|
clri_hfs(1m) -- clear inode
|
|
The clri command clears the inode i-number by filling it with zeros. special must be a special file name referring to a device containing a file system. For proper results, special should not be mounted (see WARNINGS below). After clri is executed, all blocks in the affected file show up as "missing" in an fsck of special (see fsck(1M)). This command should only be used in emergencies. Read and ... |
|
clrsvc(1m) -- clear x25 switched virtual circuit
|
|
The uucp commands, including clrsvc, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. clrsvc clears any virtual circuit that might be established on the specified line. pad-type indicates to clrsvc what opx25 script to run from /usr/lbin/uucp/X25. |
|
cmp(1) -- compare two files
|
|
cmp compares two files (if file1 or file2 is -, the standard input is used). Under default options, cmp makes no comment if the files are the same; if they differ, it announces the byte and line number at which the difference occurred. If one file is an initial subsequence of the other, that fact is noted. skip1 and skip2 are initial byte offsets into file1 and file2, respectively; and maybe octal... |
|
co(1) -- check out RCS revisions
|
|
co retrieves revisions from RCS files. Each file name ending in ,v is taken to be an RCS file. All other files are assumed to be working files. co retrieves a revision from each RCS file and stores it in the corresponding working file (see also rcsintro(5)). Revisions of an RCS file can be checked out locked or unlocked. Locking a revision prevents overlapping updates. A revision checked out for r... |
|
coder(1) -- HP EUC-CNS code reference utility
|
|
coder is a EUC-CNS code reference utility, this utility has three functions, below is the description of them : 1. Dump all characters in certain EUC-CNS plane to a file. 2. Display character with EUC-CNS code. 3. Display EUC-CNS code with character. |
|
col(1) -- filter reverse line-feeds and backspaces
|
|
col reads from the standard input and writes onto the standard output. It performs the line overlays implied by reverse line feeds (ASCII code ESC-7), and by forward and reverse half-line feeds (ESC-9 and ESC-8). col is particularly useful for filtering multi-column output made with the nroff .rt command, and output resulting from use of the tbl preprocessor (see nroff(1) and tbl(1)). If the -b op... |
|
comb(1) -- combine SCCS deltas
|
|
The comb command generates a shell procedure (see sh(1)) which, when run, reconstructs the given SCCS files. The reconstructed files are usually smaller than the original files. Arguments can be specified in any order, but all options apply to all named SCCS files. If a directory is named, comb behaves as though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files ... |
|
comm(1) -- select or reject lines common to two sorted files
|
|
comm reads file1 and file2, which should be ordered in increasing collating sequence (see sort(1) and Environment Variables below), and produces a three-column output: Column 1: Lines that appear only in file1, Column 2: Lines that appear only in file2, Column 3: Lines that appear in both files. If - is used for file1 or file2, the standard input is used. Options 1, 2, or 3 suppress printing of th... |
|
command(1) -- execute a simple command
|
|
command enables the shell to treat the arguments as a simple command, suppressing the shell function lookup. If command_name is not the name of the function, the effect of command is the same as omitting command. |
|
compact(1) -- compact and uncompact files, and cat them
|
|
compact compresses the named files using an adaptive Huffman code. If no file names are given, standard input is compacted and sent to the standard output. compact operates as an on-line algorithm. Each time a byte is read, it is encoded immediately according to the current prefix code. This code is an optimal Huffman code for the set of frequencies seen so far. It is unnecessary to attach a decod... |
|
compress(1) -- compress and expand data
|
|
The following commands compress and uncompress files and directory subtrees as indicated: compress Reduce the size of the named files using adaptive Lempel-Ziv coding. If reduction is possible, each file is replaced by a new file of the same name with the suffix .Z added to indicate that it is a compressed file. Original ownership, modes, access, and modification times are preserved. If no file is... |
|
compressdir(1) -- compress and expand data
|
|
The following commands compress and uncompress files and directory subtrees as indicated: compress Reduce the size of the named files using adaptive Lempel-Ziv coding. If reduction is possible, each file is replaced by a new file of the same name with the suffix .Z added to indicate that it is a compressed file. Original ownership, modes, access, and modification times are preserved. If no file is... |
|
convert(1) -- convert an audio file
|
|
This command converts audio files from one supported file format, data format, sampling rate, and number of channels to another. The unconverted file is retained as a source file. -sfmt format -dfmt format are the file formats for the source and destination files. Each format can be one of these: au Sun file format snd NeXT file format wav Microsoft RIFF Waveform file format u MuLaw format al ALaw... |
|
convertfs(1m) -- convert an HFS file system to allow long file names
|
|
The convertfs command converts an existing HFS file system supporting the default maximum file name length of 14 characters into one that supports file names up to 255 characters long. Once an HFS file system is converted to long file names, it cannot be restored to its original state, since the longer file names require a directory representation that is incompatible with the default HFS director... |
|
convertfs_hfs(1m) -- convert an HFS file system to allow long file names
|
|
The convertfs command converts an existing HFS file system supporting the default maximum file name length of 14 characters into one that supports file names up to 255 characters long. Once an HFS file system is converted to long file names, it cannot be restored to its original state, since the longer file names require a directory representation that is incompatible with the default HFS director... |
|
convert_awk(1m) -- converts old sendmail.cf files to new format
|
|
convert_awk is an awk program that will convert pre-HP-UX 10.20 sendmail.cf files into the format required by sendmail 8.7 and up. To run it, use: awk -f convert_awk < old.cf > new.cf Note that the new sendmail.cf files offer a wealth of new options and features. You should STRONGLY consider making a new sendmail.cf file from the distribution version or from the m4 macros, which are provided in /u... |
|
cp(1) -- copy files and directory subtrees
|
|
cp copies: + file1 to new or existing new_file, + file1 to existing dest_directory, + file1, file2, ... to existing dest_directory, + directory subtree directory1, to new or existing dest_directory. or + multiple directory subtrees directory1, directory2, ... to new or existing dest_directory. cp fails if file1 and new_file are the same (be cautious when using shell metacharacters). When destinati... |
|
cpio(1) -- copy file archives in and out; duplicate directory trees
|
|
The cpio command saves and restores archives of files on magnetic tape, other devices, or a regular file, and copies files from one directory to another while replicating the directory tree structure. When cpio completes processing the files, it reports the number of blocks written. cpio -o (copy out, export) Read standard input to obtain a list of path names, and copy those files to standard outp... |
|
cplxmodify(1m) -- modify an attribute of a system complex
|
|
The cplxmodify command modifies attributes of the complex of a partitionable system. The command is the equivalent, at the complex level, of the parmodify command, which modifies attributes of an nPartition. The complex to be modified defaults to the local complex, the one on which the command is run. A remote complex can be identified by specifying either the -u or -g option in combination with t... |
|
cpp(1) -- the C language preprocessor
|
|
cpp is the C language preprocessor which is invoked as the first pass of any C compilation using the cc command (see cc(1)). Its purpose is to process #include and conditional compilation instructions and macros. Thus the output of cpp is designed to be in a form acceptable as input to the next pass of the C compiler. As the C language evolves, cpp and the rest of the C compilation package will be... |
|
cpset(1m) -- install object files in binary directories
|
|
The cpset command installs the specified object file in the given directory. The mode, owner, and group, of the destination file can be specified on the command line. If this data is omitted, two results are possible: + If you have administrative permissions (that is, your numerical ID is less than 100), the following defaults are provided: mode 0555 owner bin group bin + If you do not have admini... |
|
crashconf(1m) -- configure system crash dumps
|
|
crashconf displays and/or changes the current system crash dump configuration. The crash dump configuration consists of: + The crash dump device list. This list identifies all devices that can be used to store a crash dump. + The included class list. This list identifies all system memory classes that must be included in any crash dump. + The excluded class list. This list identifies all system me... |
|
crashutil(1m) -- manipulate crash dump data
|
|
crashutil copies and preserves crash dump data, and performs format conversions on it. Common uses of crashutil include: + Copying portions of a dump that still reside on a raw dump device into a crash dump directory. + Converting between different formats of crash dumps. + Copying crash dumps from one directory, or medium, to another. crashutil will write to its destination the crash dump it read... |
|
create(1m) -- Creates the DCE DTS entity on the specified node
|
|
The create command creates a time server or time clerk entity on the system where the command is entered. After the DTS entity is created, it is still in a non-functioning state. To put it into operation, you must invoke dtscp enable, which causes an immediate synchronization to take place. For more information, see the enable reference page in this chapter. |
|
create_child(1m) -- Creates a child pointer at the master replica of the parent directory
|
|
The create child command creates a child pointer at the master replica of the parent directory. When CDS looks up a name in the namespace, it uses child pointers to locate directory replicas. Use the set cdscp preferred clearinghouse command before issuing this command to ensure that the request is directed to the master replica. |
|
create_clearinghouse(1m) -- Creates a clearinghouse on the local server system or makes an existing clearinghouse available
|
|
The create clearinghouse command creates a clearinghouse on the local server system or makes an existing clearinghouse available. The server start-up command usually creates a new clearinghouse when you configure a new CDS server. Occasionally, you may need to create a second clearinghouse on a particular server; for example, if you are temporarily relocating a clearinghouse on a different server.... |
|
create_directory(1m) -- Creates a directory
|
|
The create directory command creates a directory with the name that you specify. If you do not specify a clearinghouse, CDS creates the master replica of the directory in the same clearinghouse as the new directory's parent directory. |
|
create_link(1m) -- Creates a soft link and optionally specifies an expiration time and an extension time
|
|
The create link command creates a soft link. If you specify the CDS_LinkTimeout attribute, you must specify an expiration time and an extension time. If you omit the CDS_LinkTimeout attribute, the soft link is permanent and must be explicitly deleted. |
|
create_object(1m) -- Creates an object entry
|
|
The create object command creates an object entry. This task is usually done through a client application. |
|
create_replica(1m) -- Creates a replica of an existing directory in the specified clearinghouse
|
|
The create replica command creates a replica of an existing directory in the specified clearinghouse. |
|
create_sysfile(1m) -- create a kernel system file
|
|
The create_sysfile command creates a kernel configuration description file (system file) which can be used as input to the commands kconfig(1M) or mk_kernel(1M). The system file that is generated is of type version 1 (see system(4)) and is built according to the drivers required by the current system hardware. This command is intended for use during the install process when the system does not hav... |
|
cron(1m) -- timed-job execution daemon
|
|
cron executes commands at specified dates and times. Regularly scheduled commands can be specified according to instructions placed in crontab files. Users can submit their own crontab files with a crontab command (see crontab(1)). Users can submit commands that are to be executed only once with an at or batch command. Since cron never exits, it should be executed only once. This is best done by r... |
|
crontab(1) -- user job file scheduler
|
|
The crontab command manages a crontab file for the user. You can use a crontab file to schedule jobs that are executed automatically by cron (see cron(1M)) on a regular basis. The command has four forms: crontab [file] Create or replace your crontab file by copying the specified file, or standard input if file is omitted or - is specified as file , into the crontab directory, /var/spool/cron/cront... |
|
crypt(1) -- encode/decode files
|
|
crypt reads from the standard input and writes on the standard output. password is a key that selects a particular transformation. If no password is given, crypt demands a key from the terminal and turns off printing while the key is being typed in. crypt encrypts and decrypts with the same key: crypt key cypher cypher crypt key |
|
csh(1) -- a shell (command interpreter) with C-like syntax
|
|
csh is a command language interpreter that incorporates a command history buffer, C-like syntax, and job control facilities. |
|
cslip(1) -- PPP daemon
|
|
pppd is a daemon process used in UNIX systems to manage connections to other hosts using PPP (Point to Point Protocol) or SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol). It uses the UNIX host's native serial ports. It communicates with the UNIX kernel's own TCP/IP implementation via the HP IP tunnel driver. The functionality supplied by this daemon supersedes that provided by ppl(1) in HP-UX prior to Rele... |
|
csplit(1) -- context split
|
|
csplit reads file, separates it into n+1 sections as defined by the arguments arg1 ... argn, and places the results in separate files. The maximum number of arguments (arg1 through argn) allowed is 99 unless the -n number option is used to allow for more output file names. If the -f prefix option is specified, the resulting filenames are prefix00 through 00 through prefixNN where NN is the two-dig... |
|
csrc(1m) -- Builds a DCE character and code set registry on a host
|
|
The Code Set Registry Compiler csrc creates a character and code set registry file from the information supplied in a character and code set registry source file. A code set registry source file is composed of a series of code set records. Each record describes, in human-readable form, the mapping between an OSF-registered or (optionally) a user-defined unique code set value and the character stri... |
|
cstm(1m) -- Support Tools Manager
|
|
The Support Tools Manager (STM) provides three interfaces that allow a user access to an underlying toolset, consisting of information modules, firmware update tools, verifiers, diagnostics, exercisers, expert tools, and utilities: XSTM - the graphical interface (for X11-based graphics terminals) MSTM - the menu-based interface (for non-X11-based, non-graphics terminals) CSTM - the command line in... |
|
ct(1) -- spawn getty to a remote terminal (call terminal)
|
|
ct dials telno, the telephone number of a modem that is attached to a terminal, and spawns a getty(1M) process to that terminal. ct tries each line listed in file /etc/uucp/Devices until it finds an available line with appropriate attributes or runs out of entries. If no lines are free, ct asks whether it should wait for a line, and if so, how many minutes it should wait before giving up. ct searc... |
|
ctags(1) -- create a tags file
|
|
ctags makes a tags file for ex(1) (or vi(1)) from the specified C, Pascal and FORTRAN sources. A tags file gives the locations of specified objects (for C, functions, macros with argments, and typedefs; Pascal, procedures, programs and functions; FORTRAN, subroutines, programs and functions) in a group of files. Each line of the tags file contains the object name, the file in which it is defined, ... |
|
cu(1) -- call another (UNIX) system; terminal emulator
|
|
cu calls up another system, which is usually a UNIX operating system, but can be a terminal or a non-UNIX operating system. cu manages all interaction between systems, including possible transfers of ASCII files. |
|
cut(1) -- cut out (extract) selected fields of each line of a file
|
|
cut cuts out (extracts) columns from a table or fields from each line in a file; in data base parlance, it implements the projection of a relation. Fields as specified by list can be fixed length (defined in terms of character or byte position in a line when using the -c or -b option), or the length can vary from line to line and be marked with a field delimiter character such as the tab character... |
|
cwin-big5(1) -- big5 UDF file format converter
|
|
cwin-big5 is used to convert a PC CWindows UDF file to HP 9000 Big5 code UDF file |
|
date(1) -- display or set the date and time
|
|
The date command displays or sets the current HP-UX system clock date and time. Since the HP-UX system operates in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), date automatically converts to and from local standard or daylight/summer time, based on your TZ environment variable. See Environment Variables in EXTERNAL INFLUENCES below. |
|
dc(1) -- desk calculator
|
|
dc is an arbitrary precision arithmetic package. Ordinarily it operates on decimal integers, but one may specify an input base, output base, and a number of fractional digits to be maintained. (See bc(1), a preprocessor for dc that provides infix notation and a C-like syntax that implements functions. bc also provides reasonable control structures for programs.) The overall structure of dc is a st... |
|
dcecp(1m) -- Administrative interface for DCE management tasks
|
|
The DCE control program, dcecp, is the primary DCE administration interface, providing local and remote access to routine DCE administrative functions from any DCE Version 1.1 and later platform. The DCE control program is built on a portable command language called the tool command language (Tcl). Tcl allows the use of variables, if statements, list processing functions, loop functions and many o... |
|
dcecp_account(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages an account in the DCE Security Service
|
|
The account object represents registry accounts. Although an account is associated with one principal, one group, and one organization, it is identified by the principal's primary name. Alias names are differentiated for principals, so one principal can have multiple accounts under different alias names. When this command executes, it attempts to bind to the registry server identified in the _s(s... |
|
dcecp_acl(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages DCE access control lists
|
|
The acl object represents an access control list (ACL), which may exist on any object such as a server, name service entry, container (directory), or file. ACLs consist of ACL entries. ACL entries are visible only as members of ACLs. There is no object that represents ACL entries, only the acl object representing an entire ACL. Most of the acl operations deal directly with the ACL. See DATA STRUCT... |
|
dcecp_attrlist(1m) -- A dcecp task object that manipulates attribute lists
|
|
The attrlist task object represents an attribute list as returned or accepted by many dcecp commands. Use this object to check or manipulate attribute lists so that they can be used by other commands, most commonly in scripts. |
|
dcecp_aud(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages the audit daemon on a DCE host
|
|
The aud object represents the audit daemon (called auditd in the reference implementation) on a host. The daemon creates audit trails on a single host. Using this command, you can enable or disable a Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 aud(1m) Open Software Foundation aud(1m) daemon, change how the daemon acts when the file system storage for its audit trail is full, a... |
|
dcecp_audevents(1m) -- A dcecp object that lists audit events on a DCE host
|
|
The audevents object represents the event classes that are recognized by an audit daemon on a host. Each event class is defined in an event class configuration file, and the filename is the symbolic name of the event class. This command operates only on the audit daemon on the local host. |
|
dcecp_audfilter(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages the event filters on a DCE host
|
|
The audfilter object represents audit event filters, which consist of a list of guides. Audit event filters are kept by the audit daemon and used to determine whether an auditable event should be logged. An audit filter name consists of a filter type and possibly a key (dependent on the type). This command operates on the audit daemon named by the _s(aud) convenience variable. If the variable is n... |
|
dcecp_audtrail(1m) -- A dcecp object that converts the audit trail into a readable format
|
|
The audtrail object represents an audit trail file. This command currently supports only one operation, which converts the audit trail into a human readable format. |
|
dcecp_cds(1m) -- A dcecp object that represents a Cell Directory Service server
|
|
The cds object allows some low-level control over a CDS server in the local cell. Using it, you can disable a running server, which causes it to shut down gracefully. This command will also display a limited set of the attribute and counter information currently known to the specified server. |
|
dcecp_cdsalias(1m) -- A dcecp object that lets you manipulate cell names in CDS
|
|
The cdsalias object represents cell names as known by the Cell Directory Service (CDS). This object lets you manipulate alias and preferred names of DCE cells. Each cell has one preferred name. Cells may also have alias names. This object affects only the CDS component. The security server and each host must also be informed of any new cell aliases. This object can also be used to define a hierarc... |
|
dcecp_cdscache(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a local CDS cache
|
|
The cdscache object represents the Cell Directory Service (CDS) cache on the local node. The CDS cache contains information about servers and clearinghouses known to the local machine, and also contains user data about CDS entries that have been read. The create and delete operations apply only to the server information. The show and dump operations can display additional information. |
|
dcecp_cdsclient(1m) -- A dcecp object that represents a Cell Directory Service client
|
|
The cdsclient object allows some low-level control over a CDS client in the local cell. Use it to disable a running client by shutting it down gracefully and to display a limited set of the attribute and counter information that is currently known to the client. |
|
dcecp_cell(1m) -- A dcecp task object that operates on a DCE cell
|
|
The cell task object represents a single DCE cell as a whole, including all machines, services, resources, principals, and so on. The optional cell_name argument is a single cell name (not a list of cell names). If omitted, the local cell (/.:) is the default. |
|
dcecp_cellalias(1m) -- A dcecp task object that manages cell name aliases
|
|
The cellalias task object allows you to create and display alternative names for cells, known as cell aliases. You can create multiple aliases for a single cell, but only one per cellalias command. When you create an alias, cellalias does the following: Creates a new principal to represent the cell alias in the registry. Performs a registry verify operation to ensure that all security replicas in ... |
|
dcecp_clearinghouse(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a clearinghouse in CDS
|
|
Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 clearinghouse(1m) Open Software Foundation clearinghouse(1m) The clearinghouse object represents Cell Directory Service (CDS) clearinghouses. Clearinghouses are databases located on CDS server machines that store data (directories, objects, and links) in CDS. The server machines hold files that contain the actual clearinghouse data. ... |
|
dcecp_clock(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages the clock on a local or remote host
|
|
The clock object represents the clock on a system and the time that it tells. This object has commands to display and set the time. The time setting functionality is provided by DTS, unless you specify either the -dced or -inetd option. The optional argument to the clock command is the name of a DCE Version 1.1 dtsd running on some machine. Without an argument, the _s(dts) convenience variable is ... |
|
dcecp_directory(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a CDS directory
|
|
The directory object represents Cell Directory Service (CDS) directories. CDS directories are containers for other objects, links, and other directories (as well as clearinghouses). Any of these items that reside in a directory are called children of that directory. Directories also contain attributes that may be viewed or modified. This object also represents CDS replicas. Replicas are read-only ... |
|
dcecp_dts(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a dtsd process
|
|
The dts object represents the dtsd (DTS daemon) process running on a host. The DTS process does not maintain stored data as some other objects do. Consequently, the dts object represents the information in and about a process rather than stored data. These commands all affect the local dtsd entity by default. Use the dts_server argument to operate on a remote DCE dtsd. This argument is a single se... |
|
dcecp_endpoint(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages endpoint information in local RPC endpoint maps
|
|
The endpoint object operates on remote procedure call (RPC) endpoint mappings on the local host. Endpoints contain an interface identifier and one or more string bindings; optionally, they contain object Universal Unique Identifiers (UUIDs) and an annotation. Endpoint mappings are stored in the endpoint map maintained by the DCE daemon (dced) for DCE Version 1.1 hosts. DCE Version 1.0 uses the RPC... |
|
dcecp_group(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a group in the DCE Security Service
|
|
The group object represents registry groups. Unless otherwise noted, all of the operations of this object take the names of the groups to act on as the argument. They must be group names, not the names of the database objects that contain registry information about groups (that is, the names must not begin with /.:/sec/group/). When this command executes, it attempts to bind to the registry server... |
|
dcecp_host(1m) -- A dcecp task object that manages host information in a DCE cell
|
|
The host task object represents DCE processes running on a machine in (or to be added to) a DCE cell. The host task object allows administrators to configure and start DCE on machines easily. The host task object can configure and start the core DCE services on a server or a client machine. The services include the DCE daemon (dced), the Cell Directory Service (CDS) daemons (cdsd and cdsadv), the ... |
|
dcecp_hostdata(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a DCE host's cell affiliation information
|
|
The hostdata object represents a hostdata entry stored by dced on a host that represents some data, usually a file. The data in the hostdata object is represented by the hostdata/data attribute of the hostdata entry. Remote manipulation of data in the hostdata object is accomplished by the hostdata command. The names of these hostdata objects are in the DCE namespace and are controlled by dced. Us... |
|
dcecp_hostvar(1m) -- A dcecp task object that manages the security binary compatibility attributes
|
|
The hostvar object allows you to easily set the security binary compatibility attributes for the current host and to display the local host's cellname, hostname, and security binary compatibility attributes that are stored by the dced in the hostdata/dce_cf.db object. The cell's security server uses these compatibility attributes to determine the mode and state in which the local machine is oper... |
|
dcecp_keytab(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages server passwords on DCE hosts
|
|
The keytab object represents key tables (usually files) that store server keys (and key version numbers) on hosts. These key tables are manipulated remotely by using dced. The keys are considered members of the key table container. The keytab names are in the form /.../cell_cell_name/hosts/hostname/config/keytab/name A key table has a set of keys. Each key contains a principal name, type, version,... |
|
dcecp_link(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a soft link in CDS
|
|
The link object represents a Cell Directory Service (CDS) soft link. A soft link in CDS contains an attribute that has a name that is the same as the name of the object the soft link points to. The soft link contains several built-in attributes, but users are free to add their own attributes. Softlinks can point to objects, directories, and other soft links. |
|
dcecp_log(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages serviceability routing and debug routing
|
|
The log object represents the current state of message routing for a given server. It supports routing for both serviceability and debug messages. Debug routing may be removed from production environment servers while still being used by application servers. The log command works on both local and remote servers. You can identify the target server by supplying either the server's entry in the nam... |
|
dcecp_name(1m) -- A dcecp object that compares and expands DCE names
|
|
The name object resolves, compares, and parses DCE names and string bindings. |
|
dcecp_object(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages an object in CDS
|
|
An object object represents an entity in CDS that has a name and attributes. An object identifies a resource such as a host system, a printer, an application, or a file. Attributes consist of a type and one or more values. Every object is the child of a CDS directory. |
|
dcecp_organization(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages an organization in the DCE Security Service
|
|
The organization object represents registry organizations. Unless otherwise noted, all organization operations take the names of the organizations to act on as an argument. When this command executes, it attempts to bind to the registry server identified in the _s(sec) variable. If that server cannot process the request or if the _s(sec) variable is not set, the command binds to either an availabl... |
|
dcecp_principal(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a principal in the DCE Security Service
|
|
The principal object represents registry principals. Unless otherwise noted, all of the operations of this object take the names of principals to act on as an argument. These must be principal names, not the names of the database objects that contain registry information about principals (that is, the names must not begin with /.:/sec/principal). When this command executes, it attempts to bind to ... |
|
dcecp_registry(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a registry in the DCE Security Service
|
|
The registry object represents a DCE Security Service registry. The registry is a replicated database: each instance of a registry server, secd, maintains a working copy of the database in virtual memory and on disk. One server, called the master replica, accepts updates and handles the subsequent propagation of changes to all other replicas. All other replicas are slave replicas, which accept onl... |
|
dcecp_rpcentry(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages an RPC entry in CDS
|
|
The rpcentry object represents a remote procedure call (RPC) server entry in the cell name service. Use the rpcentry commands to create, modify, display, and delete name service entries. |
|
dcecp_rpcgroup(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages an RPC group entry in CDS
|
|
The rpcgroup object represents a remote procedure call (RPC) group entry in the Cell Directory Service (CDS). Each RPC group is named in the DCE namespace; therefore, each operation takes as an argument a list of names of group entries to manipulate. An RPC group is a container that contains only the names of RPC server entries or the names of other RPC groups; it contains no other data. |
|
dcecp_rpcprofile(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages an RPC profile entry in CDS
|
|
The rpcprofile object represents a remote procedure call (RPC) profile entry in the Cell Directory Service (CDS). Each operation described below, except help and operations, takes as an argument a list of one or more names of RPC profiles to be operate on. An RPC profile consists of members (also known as elements in other DCE documentation). A member can be either RPC server entries, RPC groups, ... |
|
dcecp_secval(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages the security validation service on a host
|
|
The secval object represents the security validation service running on a host, as part of the dced server. This service is responsible Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 secval(1m) Open Software Foundation secval(1m) for maintaining the security credentials of the host machine. Access to the commands is based on the access control list (ACL) of the security validatio... |
|
dcecp_server(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages DCE application servers
|
|
The server object refers to servers residing on a host. This object can affect both the running daemons and the configuration information used by dced to start that daemon. The distinction is usually obvious by the definition of the operation or by the name given as an Hewlett-Packard Company - 2 - OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.9 server(1m) Open Software Foundation server(1m) argument. When this is not the... |
|
dcecp_user(1m) -- A dcecp task object that manipulates user information in a DCE cell
|
|
The user task object represents all of the data associated with a DCE user. This consists only of registry information in the current implementation. The user task object allows administrators to easily create principals and accounts, delete principals and accounts, and Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 user(1m) Open Software Foundation user(1m) view principal and ac... |
|
dcecp_utc(1m) -- A dcecp object that manipulates UTC timestamps
|
|
The utc object lets you add, compare, and convert timestamps in DTS and ISO formats. |
|
dcecp_uuid(1m) -- A dcecp object that generates and compares UUIDs
|
|
The uuid object generates and compares Universal Unique Identifiers (UUIDs). UUIDs uniquely identify DCE entities such as principals, RPC entries, Cell Directory Service (CDS) replicas, and so on. |
|
dcecp_xattrschema(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages schema information for ERAs
|
|
The xattrschema object represents the schema information for an extended registry attribute (ERA). This command manipulates the schema type that defines ERAs. Schema types are identified by name. Other dcecp commands manipulate individual instances of ERAs. ERA instances are an attribute of a given schema type that has been attached to an object and assigned a value. You can attach ERAs to princip... |
|
dced(1m) -- DCE Host daemon
|
|
The DCE Host daemon is a process that provides services for the local host, and is also the server used by remote applications to access these host services. The daemon can be invoked either as dced or as rpcd. When invoked as dced, it provides by default all of the services described below, and it requires that the local host be configured into a DCE cell. When invoked as rpcd, it provides only t... |
|
dceping(1m) -- test the ability to contact DCE services from a local DCE client.
|
|
dceping verifies that a local DCE client can communicate with DCE and other services. It uses the RPC management interface to determine if the DCE service is listening. The core DCE services that dceping checks include secd, cdsd, gdad, rpcd, cdsadv, dtsd, and sec_clientd. You can ping other DCE and non-DCE services by naming them in the file, /opt/dcelocal/hpadmin/etc/nondcesvc. If you want to de... |
|
dce_config(1m) -- Configures and starts up DCE
|
|
The dce_config shell command invokes a menu-driven interface that configures and starts up DCE. The dce_config command displays a hierarchy of menus and invokes individual configuration routines according to users' menu selections. The configuration menu consists of initial cell configuration, additional server configuration, and DCE client configuration. The security server and the first CDS ser... |
|
dce_intro(1m) -- Introduction to the general DCE administration tools
|
|
This section describes publicly accessible DCE administration commands that are general to DCE rather than specific to a particular component. These commands are as follows: csrc The csrc utility is the code set registry compiler, which builds a DCE character and code set registry on a host from a source file supplied by a cell administrator. Administrators run the csrc utility when they are build... |
|
dce_login(1m) -- Validates a principal's identity and obtains the principal's network credentials
|
|
The dce_login command is supplied for use in DCE configuration. It validates a principal's identity and obtains the principal's network credentials. If the -c option is supplied, the command also certifies the principal's identity, and, if the principal is able to be certified, creates an entry for the principal in the machine's local registry. If the principal is not able to be certified, the... |
|
dce_version(1m) -- print version information for HP DCE/9000 components
|
|
By default, dce_version prints the version of DCE that is currently installed. It can also print the what strings for one or more groups of ``interesting'' DCE files, list the available group names and descriptions, or search any specified file for DCE what strings. More than one action can be specified in a single invocation of dce_version. Filenames to be searched for DCE what strings should b... |
|
dcopy(1m) -- copy HFS file system with compaction.
|
|
The dcopy command copies an existing HFS file system (source_fs) to a new HFS file system (destination_fs), appropriately sized to hold the reorganized results. For best results, the source file system should be a raw device, and the destination file system should be a block device. Always run dcopy on unmounted file systems. (In the case of the root file system, copy it to a new minidisk.) If no ... |
|
dcopy_hfs(1m) -- copy HFS file system with compaction.
|
|
The dcopy command copies an existing HFS file system (source_fs) to a new HFS file system (destination_fs), appropriately sized to hold the reorganized results. For best results, the source file system should be a raw device, and the destination file system should be a block device. Always run dcopy on unmounted file systems. (In the case of the root file system, copy it to a new minidisk.) If no ... |
|
dd(1) -- convert, reblock, translate, and copy a (tape) file
|
|
dd copies the specified input file to the specified output file with possible conversions. The standard input and output are used by default. Input and output block size can be specified to take advantage of raw physical I/O. Upon completion, dd reports the number of whole and partial input and output records. |
|
define_cached_server(1m) -- Creates knowledge of a server in the local clerk's cache
|
|
The define cached server command creates knowledge of a server in the local clerk's cache. This command is typically used to manually provide configuration information to a clerk that cannot automatically configure itself. This is required, for instance, to give the clerk addressing information about a server across a WAN. Once the clerk knows about one server, it can find other servers through r... |
|
delete(1m) -- Deletes the DCE DTS entity
|
|
The delete command deletes the DCE DTS entity from the system where the command is entered. When delete is executed, the DTS daemon process completes execution. To restart the DTS daemon, use the dce_config shell command. |
|
delete_child(1m) -- Deletes a child pointer from the namespace
|
|
The delete child command deletes a child pointer from the namespace. |
|
delete_clearinghouse(1m) -- Deletes the specified clearinghouse from the local server system
|
|
The delete clearinghouse command deletes a clearinghouse from the local server system. CDS does not permit you to delete a cleared clearinghouse. Before you can delete a cleared clearinghouse, you must recreate it using the create clearinghouse command. The delete clearinghouse command automatically deletes all read-only replicas from a clearinghouse. CDS does not permit you to delete a clearingho... |
|
delete_directory(1m) -- Deletes a directory
|
|
The delete directory command deletes a directory. The directory cannot contain any object entries, soft links, or child pointers. The master replica must be the only remaining replica in the cell. Use the delete replica command if you need to remove read-only replicas. |
|
delete_link(1m) -- Deletes a soft link
|
|
The delete link command deletes a soft link. |
|
delete_object(1m) -- Deletes an object entry
|
|
The delete object command deletes an object entry. This task is usually done through the client application, except under certain circumstances (for example, if the application is obsolete or no longer has access to the namespace). |
|
delete_replica(1m) -- Deletes a read-only replica of a directory from a clearinghouse
|
|
The delete replica command deletes a read-only replica of a directory from a clearinghouse. Use the delete directory command to delete the master replica of the directory. |
|
delta(1) -- make a delta (change) to an SCCS file
|
|
The delta command is used to permanently introduce into the named SCCS file changes that were made to the file retrieved by get (called the g-file, or generated file). See get(1). delta makes a delta to each named SCCS file. If a directory is named, delta behaves as though each file in the directory was specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component of the path name does not... |
|
deroff(1) -- remove nroff, tbl, and neqn constructs
|
|
deroff reads each file in sequence and removes all nroff requests, macro calls, backslash constructs, neqn constructs (between .EQ and .EN lines, and between delimiters - see neqn(1)), and tbl descriptions (see tbl(1)), replacing them with white space (blanks and blank lines), and writes the remainder of the file on the standard output. deroff follows chains of included files (.so and .nx nroff/tr... |
|
devnm(1m) -- device name
|
|
For each name specified, the devnm command identifies the special file associated with the mounted file system where the named file or directory resides. |
|
df(1m) -- report number of free file system disk blocks
|
|
The df command displays the number of free 512-byte blocks and free inodes available for file systems by examining the counts kept in the superblock or superblocks. If a special or a directory is not specified, the free space on all mounted file systems is displayed. If the arguments to df are path names, df reports on the file systems containing the named files. If the argument to df is a special... |
|
df_cdfs(1m) -- report number of free CDFS, HFS, or NFS file system disk blocks
|
|
The df command displays the number of free 512-byte blocks and free inodes available for file systems by examining the counts kept in the superblock or superblocks. If a special or a directory is not specified, the free space on all mounted file systems is displayed. If the arguments to df are path names, df reports on the file systems containing the named files. If the argument to df is a special... |
|
df_hfs(1m) -- report number of free CDFS, HFS, or NFS file system disk blocks
|
|
The df command displays the number of free 512-byte blocks and free inodes available for file systems by examining the counts kept in the superblock or superblocks. If a special or a directory is not specified, the free space on all mounted file systems is displayed. If the arguments to df are path names, df reports on the file systems containing the named files. If the argument to df is a special... |
|
df_nfs(1m) -- report number of free CDFS, HFS, or NFS file system disk blocks
|
|
The df command displays the number of free 512-byte blocks and free inodes available for file systems by examining the counts kept in the superblock or superblocks. If a special or a directory is not specified, the free space on all mounted file systems is displayed. If the arguments to df are path names, df reports on the file systems containing the named files. If the argument to df is a special... |
|
df_vxfs(1m) -- report number of free disk blocks on a VxFS file system
|
|
df prints the number of free blocks and free inodes in VxFS file systems or directories based on the counts kept in the super-blocks. VxFS dynamically allocates inodes from a pool of free blocks. The number of free inodes and blocks reported by df is an estimate based on the number of free 8K or larger extents and the current ratio of allocated inodes to allocated blocks. (Extents smaller than 8K ... |
|
dgcfgbackup(1m) -- create or update VxVM volume group configuration backup file
|
|
The dgcfgbackup command saves the VxVM configuration for a disk group in a default or alternate configuration backup file (see the description of the-f option). By default, dgcfgbackup is run automatically each time that a VxVM command changes the VxVM configuration. In this case, it always uses the default configuration backup file. An existing default configuration backup file is renamed with an... |
|
dgcfgdaemon(1m) -- start the VxVM configuration backup daemon
|
|
The dgcfgdaemon script starts the VxVM configuration backup daemon. dgcfgdaemon monitors changes to the VxVM configuration, and saves this configuration each time that a VxVM configuration change occurs. dgcfgdaemon is is started from the vxvm-startup startup script. |
|
dgcfgrestor(1m) -- display or restore VxVM disk group configuration from backup file
|
|
The dgcfgrestore command may be used to restore configuration data to the only disk in a single-disk disk group, or to a disk in a multidisk disk group in which all other disks do not have a configuration data copy. dgcfgrestore is designed not to work if the disk being restored belongs to a multi-disk disk group and at least one of the other disks in the group is online and contains configuration... |
|
dhcpclient(1m) -- Client for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server
|
|
dhcpclient is used to obtain the configuration parameters from the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server (bootpd(1M)) to configure the host. Currently, dhcpclient supports 10bt (10BaseT) and 100bt (100BaseT) Ethernet networks only. It does not support FDDI and Token-Ring networks. dhcpclient is invoked by the auto_parms script (see auto_parms(1M)) at boot up. The /etc/rc.config.d/netco... |
|
dhcpdb2conf(1m) -- convert DHCP client database to config file parameters
|
|
The dhcpdb2conf command translates a client system's DHCP database parameters (from dhcpclient(1M)) into a set of standard configuration file parameters. This is an essential step for configuring a DHCP client system, and is invoked by auto_parms(1M) upon every reboot when DHCP is active. A DHCP client database can contain settings for such items as: hostname, IP address, and default gateway (a s... |
|
dhcptools(1m) -- command line tool for DHCP elements of bootpd
|
|
dhcptools is a command line tool that provides access to DHCP-related options for the bootpd server. The options provide control for dumping internal data structures, generating a hosts file, previewing client address assignment, reclaiming unused addresses, tracing packets, and validating configuration files. |
|
dhcpv6clientd(1m) -- DHCPv6 client daemon
|
|
dhcpv6clientd obtains the configuration parameters from the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCPv6) server to configure the host. See dhcpv6d(1M). |
|
dhcpv6client_ui(1) -- DHCPv6 client interface for requesting configuration parameters from the DHCPv6 server.
|
|
dhcpv6client_ui is the interface through which a user contacts the client daemon to obtain IP addresses and other configuration parameters from the server. The default configuration parameters are specified as command line options when the DHCPv6 client daemon is invoked. When dhcpv6client_ui requests for IP addresses or other configuration parameters, the client daemon obtains them from the serve... |
|
dhcpv6d(1m) -- Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server daemon for IPv6
|
|
The dhcpv6d server daemon is the IPv6 version of the bootpd daemon. This version supports the following features: + Dynamic renumbering + Relay preconfiguration with server addresses, or use of multicast addresses + Multiple IP addresses for an interface The dhcpv6d daemon is run as a stand-alone daemon and not spawned by inetd. |
|
dhcpv6db2conf(1m) -- DHCPv6 client database converter
|
|
dhcpv6db2conf provides a means of translating the DHCPv6 client database, /etc/dhcpv6client.data, into a set of standard configuration file variables. The client database consists of a series of records. Each record represents a unique lan interface and a list of attributes, which correspond to that interface. The attributes are configuration parameters like: host's IP address, NTP server address... |
|
diaglogd(1m) -- Support Tools Manager logging daemon
|
|
The Support Tools Manager (STM) uses a logging daemon ( diaglogd ) to read diagnostic events from the kernel via diag2 (diagnostic pseudo driver) and logs them in the system log files. diaglogd is launched automatically at boot by the STM daemon diagmond. The STM User Interface, xstm , mstm , or cstm , Daemon commands can also be used to launch the daemon as well as shut it down and view the daemo... |
|
diagmond(1m) -- Support Tools Manager daemon
|
|
The Support Tools Manager (STM) provides three interfaces that allow a user access to an underlying toolset, consisting of information modules, firmware update tools, verifiers, diagnostics, exercisers, expert tools, and utilities. STM uses a monitor ( diagmond ) to manage launching and controlling tools as well as remote file system accesses. Diagmond keeps track of the system hardware configurat... |
|
diff(1) -- differential file and directory comparator
|
|
Comparing Directories If both arguments are directories, diff sorts the contents of the directories by name, then runs the regular file diff algorithm (described below) on text files that have the same name in each directory but are different. Binary files that differ, common subdirectories, and files that appear in only one directory are listed. When comparing directories, the following options a... |
|
diff3(1) -- 3-way differential file comparison
|
|
diff3 compares three versions of a file, and prints disagreeing ranges of text flagged with these codes: ==== all three files differ ====1 file1 is different ====2 file2 is different ====3 file3 is different The type of change required to convert a given range of a given file to some other is indicated in one of these ways: f:n1a Text is to be appended after line number :n1a Text is to be appended... |
|
diffmk(1) -- mark changes between two different versions of a file
|
|
diffmk compares the previous version of a file with the current version and creates a file that includes nroff/troff ``change mark'' commands. prevfile is the name of the previous version of the file and currfile is the name of the current version of the file. diffmk generates markfile which contains all the lines of the currfile plus inserted formatter ``change mark'' (.mc) requests. When mar... |
|
dig(1m) -- domain information groper
|
|
dig (domain information groper) is a flexible tool for interrogating Domain Name System (DNS) servers. It performs DNS lookups and displays the answers that are returned from the name server(s) that were queried. Most DNS administrators use dig to troubleshoot DNS problems because of its flexibility, ease of use, and clarity of output. The dig command has two modes: simple command-line mode for si... |
|
dircmp(1) -- directory comparison
|
|
dircmp examines dir1 and dir2 and generates various tabulated information about the contents of the directories. Sorted listings of files that are unique to each directory are generated for all the options. If no option is entered, a sorted list is output indicating whether the filenames common to both directories have the same contents. -d Compare the contents of files with the same name in both ... |
|
dirname(1) -- extract portions of path names
|
|
basename deletes any prefix ending in / and the suffix (if present in string) from string, and prints the result on the standard output. If string consists entirely of slash characters, string is set to a single slash character. If there are any trailing slash characters in string, they are removed. If the suffix operand is present but not identical to the characters remaining in string, but it is... |
|
disable(1m) -- Stops the DCE DTS entity on the local node
|
|
The disable command turns off the DCE DTS entity on the system where the command is entered. When the command is executed, the status attribute state is set to off. |
|
disable(1) -- enable/disable LP printers
|
|
The enable command activates the named printers, enabling them to print requests taken by lp. Use lpstat to find the status of printers (see lp(1) and lpstat(1)). disable deactivates the named printers, disabling them from printing requests taken by lp. By default, any requests that are currently printing on the designated printers are reprinted in their entirety either on the same printer or on a... |
|
disable_clerk(1m) -- Stops the clerk on the local system
|
|
The disable clerk command stops the clerk on the local system, causing all active communication with any server to be aborted and all client calls in progress to fail. The clerk cache is copied to disk. |
|
disable_server(1m) -- Stops the server on the local system
|
|
The disable server command stops the server on the local system. The server is disabled after all transactions in progress are completed. |
|
diskinfo(1m) -- describe characteristics of a disk device
|
|
The diskinfo command determines whether the character special file named by character_devicefile is associated with a SCSI or floppy disk drive. If so, diskinfo summarizes the disk's characteristics. The diskinfo command displays information about the following characteristics of disk drives: Vendor name Manufacturer of the drive (SCSI only) Product ID Product identification number or ASCII name ... |
|
disksecn(1m) -- calculate default disk section sizes
|
|
disksecn is used to calculate the disk section sizes based on the Berkeley disk partitioning method. disksecn recognizes the following options: -p Produce tables suitable for inclusion in the device driver. -d Produce tables suitable for generating the disk description file /etc/disktab. -b block_size When generating the above tables, use a sector size of block_size bytes, where block_size can be ... |
|
diskusg(1m) -- generate disk accounting data by user ID
|
|
diskusg generates intermediate disk accounting information from data in files, or the standard input if omitted. diskusg outputs lines on the standard output, one per user, in the following format: uid login #blocks where: uid User's numerical user ID, login User's login name, and #blocks Total number of disk blocks allocated to this user. diskusg normally reads only the inodes of file systems f... |
|
divpage(1) -- filters invoked by lp interface scripts
|
|
Various filters are used by the lp subsystem to obtain specialized behavior for specific types of devices or data. This entry describes currently supported filters. A number of these filters use a specified username and filename to determine the location of the user who originated the print message. The filename is used to determine the hostname of the system where the request originated, and must... |
|
dmesg(1m) -- collect system diagnostic messages to form error log
|
|
dmesg looks in a system buffer for recently printed diagnostic messages and prints them on the standard output. The messages are those printed by the system when unusual events occur (such as when system tables overflow or the system crashes). If the - argument is specified, dmesg computes (incrementally) the new messages since the last time it was run and places these on the standard output. This... |
|
dmpxlt(1) -- dump iconv translation tables to a readable format
|
|
dmpxlt dumps the compiled version of the iconv codeset conversion tables into an ASCII-readable format that can be modified and used as input to genxlt(1) to regenerate the table for iconv(1). |
|
dnssec-keygen(1) -- key generation tool for DNSSEC
|
|
dnssec-keygen generates keys for Secure DNS (DNSSEC) as defined in RFC2535. It also generates keys for use in Transaction Signatures (TSIG) which is defined in RFC2845. |
|
dnssec-makekeyset(1) -- used to produce a set of DNSSEC keys
|
|
dnssec-makekeyset generates a key set from one or more keys created by dnssec-keygen. It creates a file containing KEY and SIG records for some zone which can then be signed by the zone's parent if the parent zone is DNSSEC-aware. keyfile should be a key identification string as reported by dnssec- keygen; such as, Knnnn.+nnnn.+aaa+iiiii, where nnnn is the name of the key, aaa is the encryption a... |
|
dnssec-signkey(1) -- DNSSEC keyset signing tool
|
|
dnssec-signkey is used to sign a key set for a child zone. Typically this would be provided by a .keyset file generated by the dnssec- makekeyset utility. This provides a mechanism for a DNSSEC-aware zone to sign the keys of any DNSSEC-aware child zones. The child zone's key set gets signed with the zone keys for its parent zone. keyset will be the pathname of the child zone's .keyset file. Each... |
|
dnssec-signzone(1) -- DNSSEC zone signing tool
|
|
dnssec-signzone is used to sign a zone. Any .signedkey files for the zone to be signed should be present in the current directory, along with the keys that will be used to sign the zone. |
|
dodisk(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
domainname(1) -- set or display name of Network Information Service domain
|
|
Network Information Service (NIS) uses domain names to refer collectively to a group of hosts. Without an argument, domainname displays the name of the NIS domain. Only superuser can set the domain name by providing name_of_domain. The domain name is usually set in the configuration file /etc/rc.config.d/namesvrs, by setting the NIS_DOMAIN variable. |
|
dos2ux(1) -- convert ASCII file format
|
|
dos2ux and ux2dos read each specified file in sequence and write it to standard output, converting to HP-UX format or to DOS format, respectively. Each file can be either DOS format or HP-UX format for either command. A DOS file name is recognized by the presence of an embedded colon (:) delimiter; see dosif(4) for DOS file naming conventions. If no input file is given or if the argument - is enco... |
|
doschmod(1) -- change attributes of a DOS file
|
|
The doschmod command is targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. doschmod is the DOS counterpart of chmod (see chmod(1)). |
|
doscp(1) -- copy to or from DOS files
|
|
The doscp command is targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. doscp is the DOS counterpart of cp (see cp(1)). doscp copies a DOS file to a DOS or HP-UX file, an HP-UX file to an HP-UX or DOS file, or HP-UX or DOS files to an HP-UX or DOS directory. The last name in the argument list is the destination file or directory. A DOS file name is recognized by the presence of an embedded c... |
|
dosdf(1) -- report number of free disk clusters
|
|
The dosdf command is targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. dosdf is the DOS counterpart of the df command (see df(1)). It prints the cluster size in bytes and the number of free clusters on the specified DOS volume. |
|
dosll(1) -- list contents of DOS directories
|
|
The dosls and dosll commands are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. dosls is the DOS counterpart of ls (see ls(1)). For each directory named, dosls lists the contents of that directory. For each file named, dosls repeats its name and any other information requested. If invoked by the name dosll, the -l (ell) option is implied. |
|
dosls(1) -- list contents of DOS directories
|
|
The dosls and dosll commands are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. dosls is the DOS counterpart of ls (see ls(1)). For each directory named, dosls lists the contents of that directory. For each file named, dosls repeats its name and any other information requested. If invoked by the name dosll, the -l (ell) option is implied. |
|
dosmkdir(1) -- make a DOS directory
|
|
The dosmkdir command is targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. dosmkdir is the DOS counterpart of the mkdir command (see mkdir(1)). It creates specified directories. The standard entries, . for the directory itself and .. for its parent, are made automatically. There is one option: -m In this case you may have a directory name same as DOS volume label. -u Disable argument case co... |
|
dosrm(1) -- remove DOS files or directories
|
|
The dosrm and dosrmdir commands are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. dosrm and dosrmdir are DOS counterparts of rm and rmdir (see rm(1) and rmdir(1), respectively). dosrm removes the entries for one or more files from a directory. If a specified file is a directory, an error message is printed unless the optional argument -r is specified (see below). dosrmdir removes entrie... |
|
dosrmdir(1) -- remove DOS files or directories
|
|
The dosrm and dosrmdir commands are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. dosrm and dosrmdir are DOS counterparts of rm and rmdir (see rm(1) and rmdir(1), respectively). dosrm removes the entries for one or more files from a directory. If a specified file is a directory, an error message is printed unless the optional argument -r is specified (see below). dosrmdir removes entrie... |
|
dpp(1m) -- dedicated ports parser used by DDFA software
|
|
The Dedicated Ports Parser command (dpp) is part of the Data Communications and Terminal Controller (DTC) Device File Access (DDFA) software. It parses the Dedicated Ports file (dp) and spawns an Outbound Connection Daemon (ocd) for each valid entry in the dp file. dpp can be run from the shell or it can be included in a system initialization script to automatically run the DDFA software each time... |
|
dtscp(1m) -- DTS control program
|
|
This section describes the commands for the DCE Distributed Time Service (DTS) control program (dtscp). The DTS control program is a command-line interface that enables you to synchronize, adjust, and maintain the system clocks in a distributed network. For a detailed explanation of system clock synchronization and management, see the OSF DCE Administration Guide. The DTS control program commands ... |
|
dtsd(1m) -- Restarts the DTS daemon
|
|
The dtsd command invokes the DTS daemon (clerk or server process). This command is usually executed as part of the overall DCE startup script, rc.dce. You can enter the command manually under the following conditions: + If a DTS daemon fails to start automatically upon reboot + If you want to restart a daemon that you shut down to perform a backup or do diagnostic work Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 ... |
|
dtsdate(1m) -- Sets local clock from a remote dtsd server host
|
|
The dtsdate command sets the local clock of a system to be the same as the host remote_host, running a dtsd server. The purpose of dtsdate is to ensure that clock skew is minimized at initial cell configuration or at host instantiation, because it is difficult to start DCE and its components if the skew is too great. Clocks among all DCE components must be within five minutes of each other, to pre... |
|
dts_intro(1m) -- Introduction to the DCE DTS commands
|
|
The DCE Distributed Time Service (DTS) provides the following facilities: + The dtsd daemon + The DTS control program (dtscp) + The DTS local clock setting program (dtsdate) The DTS is implemented in the dtsd process. Both clerks and servers use the same daemon. The behavior of the dtsd daemon is determined by the dtscp command. The dtscp control program allows you to synchronize, adjust, and main... |
|
dts_update(1m) -- Gradually adjusts the clock on the local node to the specified time
|
|
The update command gradually adjusts the system clock to a new time, beginning at the time specified in the argument. The difference between the current clock value and the absolute time specified in the argument is used to adjust the clock. |
|
du(1) -- summarize disk usage
|
|
The du command gives the number of 512-byte blocks allocated for all files and (recursively) directories within each directory and file specified by the name operands. The block count includes the indirect blocks of the file. A file with two or more links is counted only once. If name is missing, the current working directory is used. By default, du generates an entry only for the name operands an... |
|
dump(1m) -- incremental file system dump, local or across network
|
|
The dump and rdump commands copy to magnetic tape all files in the filesystem that have been changed after a certain date. This information is derived from the files /var/adm/dumpdates and /etc/fstab. option specifies the date and other options about the dump. option consists of characters from the set 0123456789bdfnsuWw. The dump and rdump commands work only on file systems of type hfs. If the gi... |
|
dumpfs(1m) -- dump file system information
|
|
The dumpfs command prints the super block and cylinder group information for an HFS file system to the standard output. The file system may be specified by its root directory or the name of the device special file on which it resides. The information is very long and detailed. This command can be used to find file system information such as the file system block size or the minimum free space perc... |
|
dumpfs_hfs(1m) -- dump file system information
|
|
The dumpfs command prints the super block and cylinder group information for an HFS file system to the standard output. The file system may be specified by its root directory or the name of the device special file on which it resides. The information is very long and detailed. This command can be used to find file system information such as the file system block size or the minimum free space perc... |
|
dumpmsg(1) -- create message catalog file for modification
|
|
The findmsg command extracts messages from a C program source file and writes them to the standard output in a format suitable for input to gencat (see gencat(1)). The input file will be preprocessed using cpp (see cpp(1)) in order to select print specifiers and handle ifdef, ifndef... conditional cpp primitives. If multiple input files are specified and the -a option is not used, the files are pr... |
|
dump_clerk_cache(1m) -- Displays the contents of the clerk cache
|
|
The dump clerk cache command displays the contents of the clerk cache on the screen. Use this command when solving CDS problems. |
|
echo(1) -- echo (print) arguments
|
|
echo writes its arguments separated by blanks and terminated by a new-line on the standard output. It also understands C-like escape conventions; beware of conflicts with the shell's use of \: \a write an alert character \b backspace \c print line without appending a new-line \f form-feed \n new-line \r carriage return \t tab \v vertical tab \\ backslash \n the 8-bit character whose A... |
|
ed(1) -- line-oriented text editor
|
|
The ed command executes a line-oriented text editor. It is most commonly used in scripts and noninteractive editing applications because, even though it can be used interactively, other editors such as vi and ex are typically easier to use in an interactive environment. If file is specified, ed performs an e command (see below) on the named file; that is to say, the file is read into ed's buffer ... |
|
edit(1) -- extended line-oriented text editor
|
|
The ex program is the line-oriented personality of a text editor that also supports screen-oriented editing (see vi(1)). (XPG4 only.) Certain block-mode terminals do not have all the capabilities necessary to support the complete ex definition, such as the full-screen editing commands (visual mode or open mode). When these commands cannot be supported on such terminals, this condition shall neithe... |
|
edquota(1m) -- edit user disk quotas
|
|
The edquota command is the quota editor. One or more user names can be specified on the command line. For each username, a temporary file is created with a textual representation of the current disk quotas for that user, and an editor is invoked on the file. The quotas can then be modified, new quotas added, etc. Upon leaving the editor, edquota reads the temporary file and modifies the binary quo... |
|
efi_cp(1m) -- copy to or from EFI file
|
|
efi_cp copies files between HP-UX and EFI file systems. The EFI file system is based on the FAT file system and used by the Itanium-based system BIOS to locate an HP-UX bootloader. See efi(4). Without the -u option, efi_cp copies from an HP-UX file system to the EFI volume specified by devicefile; in this case, the destination should be relative to the root of the EFI volume specified by devicefil... |
|
efi_fsinit(1m) -- write an EFI file system header on a device file
|
|
efi_fsinit writes an EFI file system header on a device file. The EFI file system is based on the FAT file system and used by the Itanium(R)-based system BIOS to locate an HP-UX bootloader. See efi(4). Before any other EFI commands can be run, efi_fsinit must be run to initialize the file system on a device file. |
|
efi_ls(1m) -- list EFI file information or contents of an EFI directory
|
|
efi_ls lists file information or contents of an EFI directory. The EFI file system is based on the FAT file system and used by the Itanium(R)-based system BIOS to locate an HP-UX bootloader. See efi(4). efi_ls lists filenames, last modified dates, and file sizes. devicefile should be a device file for an EFI volume. Given a path, efi_ls determines whether the path is a file or a directory. For a f... |
|
efi_mkdir(1m) -- make an EFI directory
|
|
efi_mkdir makes an EFI directory. The EFI file system is based on the FAT file system and used by the Itanium(R)-based system BIOS to locate an HP-UX bootloader. See efi(4). efi_mkdir creates directory dirname in the EFI volume specified by devicefile. If dirname already exists, efi_mkdir exits with a diagnostic message, and the directory is not changed. If more than one subdirectory needs to be c... |
|
efi_rm(1m) -- remove an EFI file
|
|
efi_rm removes an EFI file. The EFI file system is based on the FAT file system and used by the Itanium(R)-based system BIOS to locate an HP-UX bootloader. See efi(4). devicefile should be the device file for the EFI volume. If file is a directory, efi_rm prints a diagnostic message and returns without removing the directory; use efi_rmdir(1M) to remove EFI directories. file should be relative to ... |
|
efi_rmdir(1m) -- remove an EFI directory
|
|
efi_rmdir removes an EFI directory The EFI file system is based on the FAT file system and used by the Itanium(R)-based system BIOS to locate an HP-UX bootloader. See efi(4). devicefile should be the device file for the EFI volume. If directory is not a directory or the directory is not empty, efi_rmdir prints a diagnostic message and returns without removing the file; use efi_rm(1M) to remove EFI... |
|
egrep(1) -- search a file for a pattern
|
|
The grep command searches the input text files (standard input default) for lines matching a pattern. Normally, each line found is copied to the standard output. grep supports the Basic Regular Expression syntax (see regexp(5)). The -E option (egrep) supports Extended Regular Expression (ERE) syntax (see regexp(5)). The -F option (fgrep) searches for fixed strings using the fast Boyer-Moore string... |
|
elfdump(1) -- dump information contained in object files.
|
|
elfdump takes one or more object files or libraries and dumps information about them. The following options are supported: -a Dumps archive headers from an archive library. -c Dumps the string table(s). -C (Modifier) Demangles C++ symbol names before printing them. This modifier is valid with -c, -r, -s, and -t. If specified with -H, this modifier is ignored. If specified with -n name, the symbol ... |
|
elm(1) -- process electronic mail through a screen-oriented interface
|
|
The elm program is a screen-oriented electronic mail processing system. It supports the industry-wide MIME standard for nontext mail, a special forms message and forms reply mechanism, and an easy-to-use alias system for individuals and groups. elm operates in three principal modes: + Interactive mode, running as an interactive mail interface program. (First syntax.) + Message mode, sending a sing... |
|
elmalias(1) -- display and verify elm user and system aliases
|
|
The elmalias command displays and verifies user and system elm aliases. The system database must have been created by the newalias command (see newalias(1)). The user database must have been created by either the newalias command or the elm mail system (see elm(1)). If the same alias is in both databases, the user version is used. Missing database files are silently ignored. Each database entry ca... |
|
enable(1m) -- Starts the DTS entity on the local node.
|
|
After the DTS entity is created with the dtscp create command, it is still in a non-functioning state. To put it into operation, you must invoke dtscp enable, which causes an immediate synchronization to take place. When the command is executed, the status attribute state is set to on. In addition, you may use the enable command to activate a DTS entity that has previously been deactivated with th... |
|
enable(1) -- enable/disable LP printers
|
|
The enable command activates the named printers, enabling them to print requests taken by lp. Use lpstat to find the status of printers (see lp(1) and lpstat(1)). disable deactivates the named printers, disabling them from printing requests taken by lp. By default, any requests that are currently printing on the designated printers are reprinted in their entirety either on the same printer or on a... |
|
env(1) -- set environment for command execution
|
|
env obtains the current environment, modifies it according to its arguments, then executes the command with the modified environment. Arguments of the form name=value are merged into the inherited environment before the command is executed. The =value are merged into the inherited environment before the command is executed. The value are merged into the inherited environment before the command is ... |
|
envd(1m) -- system physical environment daemon
|
|
The envd daemon provides a means for the system to respond to environmental conditions detected by hardware. Such responses are typically designed to maintain file system integrity and prevent data loss. The environmental conditions currently recognized by envd are over-temperature and chassis fan failure. envd logs messages and then executes actions when a supported environmental event is detecte... |
|
et-big5(1) -- big5 UDF file format converter
|
|
et-big5 is used to convert a PC ET UDF file to hp9000 UDF file |
|
et-ccdc(1) -- ccdc UDF file format converter
|
|
et-ccdc is used to convert a PC ET UDF file to hp9000 UDF file |
|
eucset(1) -- sets and gets code widths for ldterm
|
|
The eucset command sets or gets (reports) the encoding and display widths of the Extended UNIX Code (EUC), and UCS Transformation Format (UTF8), and GB18030 characters processed by the current input terminal. EUC is an encoding method for codesets composed of single or multiple bytes. It permits applications and the terminal hardware to use the 7-bit US ASCII code and up to three single byte or mu... |
|
ex(1) -- extended line-oriented text editor
|
|
The ex program is the line-oriented personality of a text editor that also supports screen-oriented editing (see vi(1)). (XPG4 only.) Certain block-mode terminals do not have all the capabilities necessary to support the complete ex definition, such as the full-screen editing commands (visual mode or open mode). When these commands cannot be supported on such terminals, this condition shall neithe... |
|
exit(1m) -- Causes dtscp to complete execution.
|
|
The exit command causes the DTS control program (dtscp) to complete execution and returns operation to the parent process. |
|
expand(1) -- expand tabs to spaces, and vice versa
|
|
expand processes the named files or the standard input and writes to the standard output with tabs changed into spaces. Backspace characters are preserved in the output, and the column count is decreased by one column for tab calculations. For proper tab calculation, if a multi-column character is to be "backspace'd", it should be followed by multiple backspace characters which equal to it's c... |
|
expand_alias(1) -- recursively expands the sendmail aliases
|
|
Expand_alias is a shell script that recursively expands the sendmail aliases. Through use of telnet host 25 and the expn command, each alias is recursively expanded into its destination(s). Indentation is used to show each level of recursion. Because of the recursive use of telnet, expand_alias is slow. If the local telnet cannot directly connect to a remote system, due to a firewall configuration... |
|
exportfs(1m) -- export and unexport directories to NFS clients
|
|
The exportfs command makes a local directory or file available to NFS clients for mounting over the network. Directories and files cannot be NFS-mounted unless they are first exported by exportfs. exportfs is normally invoked at boot time by the /sbin/init.d/nfs.server script, and uses information contained in the /etc/exports file to export the file or file system named by each dir, which must be... |
|
expr(1) -- evaluate arguments as an expression
|
|
expr takes arguments as an expression, evaluates, then writes the result on the standard output. Terms in the expression must be separated by blanks. Characters special to the shell must be escaped. Note that 0, rather than the null string, is returned to indicate a zero value. Strings containing blanks or other special characters should be quoted. Integer-valued arguments can be preceded by a una... |
|
extendfs(1m) -- extend a file system size (generic)
|
|
If the original file system image created on special does not make use of all of the available space, extendfs can be used to increase the capacity of a file system by updating the file system structure to include the extra space. The command-line parameter special specifies the device special file of either a logical volume or a disk partition. The special must be un-mounted before extendfs can b... |
|
extendfs_hfs(1m) -- extend HFS file system size
|
|
If the original HFS file system image created on special does not make use of all of the available space, the extendfs command can be used to increase the capacity of an HFS file system by updating the file system structure to include the extra space. The command-line parameter special specifies the character device special file of either a logical volume or a disk partition. The special must be u... |
|
extendfs_vxfs(1m) -- extend VxFS file system size
|
|
If the VxFS file system image created on special does not use all of the available space, extendfs increases the capacity of a VxFS file system by updating the file system structure to include the extra space. special specifies the device special file of either a logical volume or a disk partition. If special refers to a mounted file system, you must unmount special before running extendfs (see mo... |
|
factor(1) -- factor a number, generate large primes
|
|
If no arguments are provided on the command line, factor waits for a number to be typed in. If a positive number is typed, it factors the number and print its prime factors; each one is printed the proper number of times. It then waits for another number. factor exits if it encounters a zero or any non-numeric character. If an argument is provided on the command line, factor factors the number as ... |
|
false(1) -- return exit status zero or one respectively
|
|
The command true does nothing, and returns exit code zero. The command false does nothing, and returns exit code one. They are typically used to construct command procedures. |
|
fastbind(1) -- Prepare an incomplete executable for faster program startup
|
|
fastbind is a tool that can improve the start-up time of programs that use shared libraries (incomplete executables) by storing information about needed shared library symbols in the executable file. fastbind performs analysis on the symbols used to bind an executable and all of it's dependent shared libraries, and stores this information in the executable file. The next time the executable is ru... |
|
fastmail(1) -- quick batch mail interface
|
|
The fastmail command is a simple interface to the mail system that allows you to send a message without the overhead of an interactive mailer. It is particularly efficient in batch-processing mail to very large groups of people. All addresses should be full e-mail addresses, sendmail aliases in the /etc/mail/aliases file, or local login names. |
|
fbackup(1m) -- selectively back up files
|
|
fbackup combines features of dump and ftio to provide a flexible, high-speed file system backup mechanism (see dump(1M) and ftio(1)). fbackup selectively transfers files to an output device. For each file transferred, the file's contents and all the relevant information necessary to restore it to an equivalent state are copied to the output device. The output device can be a raw magnetic tape dri... |
|
fc(1) -- standard and restricted POSIX.2-conformant command shells
|
|
Shell Invocation Tilde Substitution Environment Options Command Substitution Functions rsh Restrictions Parameter Substitution Jobs Definitions Blank Interpretation Signals Commands File Name Generation Execution Simple Commands Quoting Command Reentry Compound Commands Arithmetic Evaluation Command Line Editing Special Commands Prompting emacs/gmacs Editing Mode Comments Conditional Expressions v... |
|
fcdlist(1m) --
|
|
|
|
fcmsutil(1m) -- Fibre Channel Mass Storage Utility Command for TACHYON TL A5158A, A6684A, A6685A, TACHYON XL2 A6795A, DUAL POR
|
|
The fcmsutil command is a diagnostic tool to be used for TACHYON TL A5158A, A6684A, A6685A, TACHYON XL2 A6795A, DUAL PORT A6826A and FC/GigE Combo A9782A/A9784A Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters. This command provides the ability to perform Fibre Channel Test and Echo functionality, read the card's registers, etc. This command requires the use of a device file to indicate the interface over which t... |
|
fddipciadmin(1m) -- show PCI FDDI interface status, and/or change FDDI attributes
|
|
fddipciadmin displays information about the status of the PCI FDDI interface. The fddipciadmin utility first shows summary information about the PCI FDDI interface. It then displays a menu that allows the user to refresh statistics and display other interface attributes. The menu also allows the T_Req time (Token Request Time) and T_Notify time (Negotiated Target Token Rotation Time) to be changed... |
|
fdetach(1m) -- detach a STREAMS-based file descriptor from a filename
|
|
The fdetach command detaches or disassociates a file descriptor for an open STREAMS device or pipe from its filename in the file system. The path argument is the path that was previously associated with the file descriptor by the fattach() function. Operations on path will subsequently affect the file system node, not the STREAMS device or pipe. The permissions and status of the node are returned ... |
|
ff(1m) -- list file names and statistics for a file system
|
|
The ff command reads the i-list and directories of each special file, assuming it to be a file system, saving i-node data for files that match the selection criteria. Output consists of the path name for each saved i-node, plus any other file information requested with the -o option. Output fields are positional. The output is produced in i-node order; fields are separated by tabs. The default lin... |
|
ff_hfs(1m) -- list file names and statistics for HFS file system
|
|
The ff command reads the i-list and directories of each special file special, assuming it to be an HFS file system, saving i-node data for files that match the selection criteria. Output consists of the path name for each saved i-node, plus any other file information requested using the print options below. Output fields are positional. The output is produced in i-node order; fields are separated ... |
|
ff_vxfs(1m) -- fast find: list file names and statistics for a VxFS file system
|
|
ff reads the inode list and directories of each special file, assuming it to be a VxFS file system, and prints inode data for files that match the selection criteria. Output consists of the pathname for each saved inode, plus any other file information requested using the print options below. Output fields are positional. The output is produced in inode order; fields are separated by tabs. The def... |
|
fg(1) -- standard and restricted POSIX.2-conformant command shells
|
|
Shell Invocation Tilde Substitution Environment Options Command Substitution Functions rsh Restrictions Parameter Substitution Jobs Definitions Blank Interpretation Signals Commands File Name Generation Execution Simple Commands Quoting Command Reentry Compound Commands Arithmetic Evaluation Command Line Editing Special Commands Prompting emacs/gmacs Editing Mode Comments Conditional Expressions v... |
|
fgrep(1) -- search a file for a pattern
|
|
The grep command searches the input text files (standard input default) for lines matching a pattern. Normally, each line found is copied to the standard output. grep supports the Basic Regular Expression syntax (see regexp(5)). The -E option (egrep) supports Extended Regular Expression (ERE) syntax (see regexp(5)). The -F option (fgrep) searches for fixed strings using the fast Boyer-Moore string... |
|
file(1) -- determine file type
|
|
file performs a series of tests on each file in an attempt to classify it. If file appears to be an ASCII file, file examines the first 512 bytes and tries to guess its language. If file is an executable a.out file, file prints the version stamp, provided it is greater than 0 (see the description of the -V option in ld(1)). file uses the file /etc/magic to identify files that have some sort of mag... |
|
find(1) -- find files
|
|
The find command recursively descends the directory hierarchy for each path name in pathname_list (that is, one or more path names) seeking files that match a Boolean expression written in the primaries given below. By default, find does not follow symbolic links. The Boolean expression is evaluated using short-circuit evaluation. This means that whenever the result of a Boolean operation (AND or ... |
|
findmsg(1) -- create message catalog file for modification
|
|
The findmsg command extracts messages from a C program source file and writes them to the standard output in a format suitable for input to gencat (see gencat(1)). The input file will be preprocessed using cpp (see cpp(1)) in order to select print specifiers and handle ifdef, ifndef... conditional cpp primitives. If multiple input files are specified and the -a option is not used, the files are pr... |
|
findstr(1) -- find strings for inclusion in message catalogs
|
|
findstr examines files of C source code for uncommented string constants which it places, along with the surrounding quotes, on the standard output, preceding each by the file name, start position, and length. This information is used by insertmsg (see insertmsg(1)). findstr does not output strings that are parameters of the catgets() routine (see catgets(3C)). |
|
finger(1) -- user information lookup program
|
|
By default, finger lists for each user_name on the system: + Login name, + Full given name, + Terminal write status (if write permission is denied), + Idle time, + Login time, + User's home directory and login shell, + Any plan the user has placed in file .plan in their home directory, + Project on which they are working from the file .project, also in the home directory, + office location and ph... |
|
fingerd(1m) -- remote user information server
|
|
fingerd is the server for the RFC 742 Name/Finger protocol. It provides a network interface to finger, which gives a status report of users currently logged in on the system or a detailed report about a specific user (see finger(1)). The Internet daemon executes fingerd when it receives a service request at the port listed in the services data base for ``finger'' using ``tcp'' protocol; see in... |
|
fixman(1m) -- fix manual pages for faster viewing with man(1)
|
|
The fixman command is a shell script that processes man pages in the cat* directories to unexpand spaces to tabs where possible, and to remove all character-backspace pairs (which usually exist to cause overstriking or underscoring for printer output). Removal of unnecessary character sequences improves the speed of man(1), and reduces disk space consumption. The fixman command should be run after... |
|
fmt(1) -- format text
|
|
The fmt command is a simple text formatter that fills and joins lines to produce output lines of (up to) the number of characters specified in the -w width option. The default width is 72. fmt concatenates the file arguments. If none are given, fmt formats text from the standard input. Blank lines are preserved in the output, as is the spacing between words. fmt does not fill lines beginning with ... |
|
fold(1) -- fold long lines for finite width output device
|
|
The fold command is a filter that folds the contents of the specified files, breaking the lines to have a maximum of width column positions (or bytes, if the -b option is specified). The fold command breaks lines by inserting a newline character so that each output line is the maximum width possible that does not exceed the specified number of column positions (or bytes). A line cannot be broken i... |
|
fontdl(1) -- filters invoked by lp interface scripts
|
|
Various filters are used by the lp subsystem to obtain specialized behavior for specific types of devices or data. This entry describes currently supported filters. A number of these filters use a specified username and filename to determine the location of the user who originated the print message. The filename is used to determine the hostname of the system where the request originated, and must... |
|
forder(1) -- convert file data order
|
|
The text orientation (mode) of a file can be right-to-left (non-Latin) or left-to-right (Latin). This text orientation can affect the way data is arranged in the file. The data arrangements that result are called screen order and keyboard order. forder converts the order of characters in the file from screen order to keyboard order or vice versa. forder reads the concatenation of input files (or s... |
|
format(1m) -- format an HP SCSI disk array LUN
|
|
format formats one LUN of the HP SCSI disk array associated with device file, device_file. The format will usually be a soft or zeroing format, in which the controller writes zeroes to the data area and parity area, if any, of the LUN. NOTE: The above should always be true of a sub-LUN, but the controller might decide, based on certain conditions, to do a full format of a regular LUN, which consis... |
|
frecover(1m) -- selectively recover files
|
|
frecover reads media written by the fbackup command. Its actions are controlled by the selected function -r, -R, -x, -V, or -I. The function performed by frecover is specified by one of the following options: -r The backup media is read and the contents are loaded into the directories from which they were backed up. This option should only be used to recover a complete backup onto a clear director... |
|
from(1) -- who is my mail from?
|
|
from prints the mail header lines in your mailbox file to show who sent you mail. If user is specified, user's mailbox is examined instead of your own. If the -s option is given, only headers of mail from sender are printed. |
|
fruled(1) -- flash/turn off attention LEDs (cell, cabinet and I/O chassis attention LEDs)
|
|
The fruled command flashes/turns off attention LEDs of cells or I/O chassis in the local complex. The command can also be used to start flashing or stop flashing cabinet number LEDs. If either the -u option or the -g option is specified, the scope of the command will be the specified target complex. If a cell or I/O chassis attention LED is made to flash, the cabinet number LED of the cabinet that... |
|
frupower(1m) -- turn on/off or display current status of power for cells and I/O chassis
|
|
The frupower command turns power on or off, or displays the current status of power for cells and I/O chassis. The operations allowed by this command are subject to the following conditions: + An active cell cannot be powered off. An active cell is one that is assigned to a partition and that is being used by the partition. + The -i option can be used to display the power state of any I/O chassis,... |
|
fsadm(1m) -- a file system administration command
|
|
The fsadm command is designed to perform selected administration tasks on file systems. These tasks may differ between file system types. special is a device file containing an unmounted file system. However, if the file system is of the type that provides online administration capabilities the special could be a directory. directory must be the root of a mounted file system. Only a superuser can ... |
|
fsadm_hfs(1m) -- HFS file system administration command
|
|
The fsadm command is designed to perform selected administration tasks on HFS file systems. special is a device file containing an unmounted file system. Only a superuser can invoke fsadm. |
|
fsadm_vxfs(1m) -- resize or reorganize a VxFS file system
|
|
fsadm performs online administration functions on VxFS file systems, Storage Checkpoints, or individual files and directories. fsadm supports file-system resizing, extent reorganization, directory reorganization, and querying or changing the largefiles flag. fsadm operates on file systems mounted for read/write access, however, the -o option can also operate on a special device containing a clean,... |
|
fscat(1m) -- cat a VxFS file system
|
|
fscat provides an interface to a VxFS snapshot file system, similar to that provided by dd, invoked on the block or character special file of regular VxFS file systems. fscat works when executed on the special device of any VxFS file system. On most VxFS file systems, the block or character special file for the file system provides access to a raw image of the file system to back up the file syste... |
|
fscat_vxfs(1m) -- cat a VxFS file system
|
|
fscat provides an interface to a VxFS snapshot file system, similar to that provided by dd, invoked on the block or character special file of regular VxFS file systems. fscat works when executed on the special device of any VxFS file system. On most VxFS file systems, the block or character special file for the file system provides access to a raw image of the file system to back up the file syste... |
|
fsck(1m) -- file system consistency check and interactive repair
|
|
The fsck command audits and interactively repairs inconsistent conditions for HP-UX file systems on mass storage device files identified by special. If the file system is consistent, the number of files on that file system and the number of used and free blocks are reported. If the file system is inconsistent, fsck provides a mechanism to fix these inconsistencies, depending on which form of the f... |
|
fsck_cachefs(1m) -- check integrity of data cached with CacheFS
|
|
The CacheFS version of the fsck command checks the integrity of a cache directory. By default it corrects any CacheFS problems it finds. There is no interactive mode. The most likely invocation of fsck for CacheFS file systems is at boot time from an entry in the /etc/fstab file. |
|
fsck_hfs(1m) -- HFS file system consistency check and interactive repair
|
|
The fsck command audits and repairs inconsistent conditions for HFS file systems on mass storage device files identified by special. If the file system is consistent, the number of files on that file system and the number of used and free blocks are reported. If the file system is inconsistent, fsck provides a mechanism to fix these inconsistencies, depending on which form of the fsck command is u... |
|
fsck_vxfs(1m) -- check and repair a VxFS file system
|
|
fsck checks VxFS file systems for consistency. Because VxFS records pending file system updates in an intent log, fsck typically replays the intent log instead of doing a full structural file system check. You can use options (-o full or -y) to force a full structural file system check. special specifies one or more special character devices, for example, /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0. If multiple devices are ... |
|
fsclean(1m) -- determine the shutdown status of HFS file systems
|
|
The fsclean command determines the shutdown status of the HFS file system specified by special or, in the absence of special, the file systems listed in /etc/fstab of type hfs with the rw, default, or ro options set. All optional fields in /etc/fstab must be present for fsclean to be able to check each file system. fsclean reads the superblock to determine whether the file system's last shutdown ... |
|
fsclean_hfs(1m) -- determine the shutdown status of HFS file systems
|
|
The fsclean command determines the shutdown status of the HFS file system specified by special or, in the absence of special, the file systems listed in /etc/fstab of type hfs with the rw, default, or ro options set. All optional fields in /etc/fstab must be present for fsclean to be able to check each file system. fsclean reads the superblock to determine whether the file system's last shutdown ... |
|
fsdb(1m) -- file system debugger (generic)
|
|
The fsdb command can be used to patch up a damaged file system after a crash. It is intended for experienced users only. The file system type to be debugged is specified as FStype. Each file system type has a unique structure requiring different debugging capabilities. The manual entries for the file-system-specific fsdb should be consulted before attempting any debugging or modifications. |
|
fsdb_hfs(1m) -- HFS file system debugger
|
|
The fsdb command can be used to patch up a damaged file system after a crash. |
|
fsdb_vxfs(1m) -- VxFS file system debugger
|
|
fsdb can analyze VxFS file system problems or repair a damaged VxFS file system after a crash. A special device special specifies the file system to debug. The fsdb command is intended for experienced users only. fsdb can convert block and inumbers into their corresponding disk addresses. In addition, mnemonic offsets allow access to different parts of an inode. These greatly simplify the process ... |
|
fsirand(1m) -- install random inode generation numbers
|
|
fsirand installs random inode generation numbers on all the inodes on device special, and also installs a filesystem ID in the superblock. This process increases the security of filesystems exported by NFS. Use fsirand only on an unmounted filesystem that was checked with fsck (see fsck(1M)). The only exception is that it can be used on the root filesystem in single-user mode if the system is imme... |
|
fstobdf(1) -- generate BDF font from X font server
|
|
The fstobdf program reads a font from a font server and prints a BDF file on the standard output that may be used to recreate the font. This is useful in testing servers, debugging font metrics, and reproducing lost BDF files. |
|
fstyp(1m) -- determine file system type
|
|
The fstyp command allows the user to determine the file system type of a mounted or unmounted file system. special represents a device special file (for example: /dev/dsk/c1t6d0). The file system type is determined by reading the superblock of the supplied special file. If the superblock is read successfully, the command prints the file system type identifier on the standard output and exits with ... |
|
ftio(1) -- faster tape I/O
|
|
ftio is a tool designed specifically for copying files to tape drives. It performs faster than either cpio or tar in comparable situations (see cpio(1) and tar(1)). ftio uses multiple processes (to read/write the file system and to write/read the tape device), with large amounts of memory sharing between processes as well as a large block size for reading and writing to the tape. ftio is compatibl... |
|
ftp(1) -- file transfer program
|
|
ftp is a user interface to the File Transfer Protocol. ftp copies files over a network connection between the local ``client'' host and a remote ``server'' host. ftp runs on the client host. |
|
ftpcount(1) -- show current number of users for each class
|
|
The ftpcount command shows the current number of users (and the limit) for each class defined in the ftpaccess file. If the ftpaccess file does not exist, the ftpcount command will not display anything. However, if the ftpaccess file exists and it is of zero bytes, ftpcount will display an error message: ftpcount:no service classes defined, no usage count kept. The -V option causes the program to ... |
|
ftpd(1m) -- DARPA Internet File Transfer Protocol server
|
|
ftpd is the DARPA Internet File Transfer Protocol server. It expects to be run by the Internet daemon (see inetd(1M) and inetd.conf(4)). inetd runs ftpd when a service request is received at the port indicated in the ftp service specification in /etc/services (see services(4)). |
|
ftprestart(1) -- remove the shutdown message file created by ftpshut utility.
|
|
The ftprestart command removes all the shutdown message files from the real, anonymous, and virtual user accounts. The message files are created by the ftpshut utility in the path as specified by the `shutdown' directive in the /etc/ftpd/ftpaccess file (see ftpshut(1) for more details). This command is always used after the ftpshut command is executed. Note: For guest user accounts, the message f... |
|
ftpshut(1) -- create shutdown message file to shut down the ftp servers at a given time
|
|
The ftpshut command provides an automated shutdown procedure that a superuser can use to notify ftp users when the ftp server is shutting down. This command will create a shutdown message file in the path specified by the 'shutdown' directive in the /etc/ftpd/ftpaccess file in the real, anonymous and virtual user accounts. For guest accounts the system administrator must copy the message file cr... |
|
ftpwho(1) -- show current process information for each ftp user.
|
|
The ftpwho command shows the current process information for each user logged into the ftp server. If the ftpaccess file does not exist, this command will not display anything. However, if the ftpaccess file exists and it is of zero bytes then this command will display an error message: ftpwho: no service classes defined, no usage count kept. The -V option causes the program to display copyright a... |
|
fuser(1m) -- list processes using a file or file structure
|
|
The fuser command lists the process IDs of processes that have each specified file open. For block special devices, all processes using any file on that device are listed. The process ID may be followed by a letter, identifying how the file is being used, as follows: c file is current directory of the process. r file is the root directory of the process, as set up by the chroot command (see chroot... |
|
fwtmp(1m) -- manipulate connect accounting records
|
|
fwtmp fwtmp reads from the standard input and writes to the standard output, converting binary records of the type found in wtmps to formatted ASCII records. The ASCII version is useful to enable editing, via ed(1), bad records or for general purpose maintenance of the file. The argument -ic is used to denote that input is in ASCII form, and output is to be written in binary form. The arguments i ... |
|
gated(1m) -- gateway routing daemon
|
|
gated is a routing daemon that handles multiple routing protocols and replaces routed, egpup, and any routing daemon that speaks the HELLO routing protocol. gated currently handles the RIP, BGP, EGP, HELLO, and OSPF routing protocols. The gated process can be configured to perform all routing protocols or any subset of them (see WARNINGS below). |
|
gdc(1m) -- operational user interface for gated
|
|
gdc provides a user-oriented interface for the operation of the gated(1M) routing daemon. It provides support for starting and stopping the daemon, for the delivery of signals to manipulate the daemon when it is operating, for the maintenance and syntax checking of configuration files, and for the production and removal of state dumps and core dumps. gdc can reliably determine gated's running sta... |
|
gencat(1) -- generate a formatted message catalog file
|
|
Message catalogs allow a program to process input and produce output according to local customs and languages. For details, see Native Language Support Users Guide. The gencat command merges each message source msgfile into a formatted message catalog catfile that can be accessed by catgets() (see catgets(3C)). If catfile does not exist, it is created. If catfile exists, its messages are included ... |
|
genxlt(1) -- generate iconv translation tables
|
|
genxlt generates a compiled, non-readable binary version of the iconv table that is suitable for use by iconv(1) and iconv(3C). If input_filename or output_filename is not supplied, standard input and/or standard output will be used. Since the output of genxlt is a binary, non-readable file, if the -f option is not used, the redirection symbol > maybe used to redirect the standard output to a file... |
|
geocustoms(1m) -- configure system language on multi-language systems
|
|
The geocustoms command manages default selection and retention/removal of multiple languages installed on "ignited" (Instant Ignition) systems. The geocustoms command is executed at first-boot (see auto_parms(1M)) on ignited systems with multiple languages available. In subsequent sessions, invoking the command /usr/sbin/geocustoms starts geocustoms. When invoked with no options, geocustoms runs... |
|
get(1) -- get a version of an SCCS file
|
|
The get command generates an ASCII text file from each named SCCS file according to the specifications given by its option arguments, which begin with -. The arguments can be specified in any order, but all option arguments apply to all named SCCS files. If a directory is named, get behaves as if each file in the directory was specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component o... |
|
getaccess(1) -- list access rights to file(s)
|
|
getaccess lists for the specified files the effective access rights of the caller (that is, for their effective user ID, effective group ID, and supplementary groups list). By default, the command prints a symbolic representation of the user's access rights to the named file: r or - for read/no read, w or - for write/no write, and x or - for execute/no execute (for directories, search/no search),... |
|
getacl(1) -- list access control lists (ACLs) for files (JFS File Systems only)
|
|
For each argument that is a regular file, special file, or named pipe, getacl displays the owner, group, and the Access Control List (ACL). For each directory argument, getacl displays the owner, group, and the ACL and/or the default ACL. Only directories contain default ACLs. With the -a option specified, the filename, owner, group, and the ACL of the file will be displayed. With the -d option sp... |
|
getcellname(1m) -- Gets the primary name of the cell
|
|
The getcellname command prints the primary name of a cell to standard output. By default, this command returns the name of the local cell. Use the host argument to return the name of a cell on a remote host. If the command fails, it prints an error message to standard error. |
|
getconf(1) -- get system configuration values
|
|
The getconf command provides an interface to the confstr(3C), pathconf(2), and sysconf(2) library routines and system calls. The system_var argument specifies the configuration value desired in confstr(), pathconf(), or sysconf(). Use the first synopsis form, for inquiries involving confstr(), or sysconf() (in the first table below). Use the second synopsis form, for inquiries involving pathconf()... |
|
getext(1m) -- get VxFS extent attributes
|
|
getext displays extent attribute information associated with a set of files. |
|
getip(1m) -- Gets a host's IP address
|
|
The getip command prints the IP address of the machine indicated in the host argument. A machine may have more than one IP address associated with it; if so, getip prints one of the addresses. If the command fails, it returns a status of 1. |
|
getmemwindow(1m) -- extracts window ids of user processes from /etc/services.window
|
|
getmemwindow is the command used to extract window ids of user processes from the /etc/services.window file. User applications are encouraged to place a unique string defining an application and its associated window id in the /etc/services.window file and then extract that window id using the getmemwindow command. This allows for changing the application window id in one central location, rather ... |
|
getopt(1) -- parse command options
|
|
getopt is used to break up options in command lines for easy parsing by shell procedures and to check for legal options. optstring is a string of recognized option letters (see getopt(3C)). If a letter is followed by a colon, the option is expected to have an argument which may or may not be separated from it by white space. The positional parameters ($1 $2 ...) of the shell are reset so that each... |
|
getopts(1) -- parse utility (command) options
|
|
getopts is used to retrieve options and option-arguments from a list of parameters. Each time it is invoked, getopts places the value of the next option in the shell variable specified by the name operand and the index of the next argument to be processed in the shell variable OPTIND. Whenever the shell is invoked, OPTIND is initialized to 1. When the option requires an option-argument, getopts pl... |
|
getprivgrp(1) -- get special attributes for group
|
|
getprivgrp lists the access privileges of privileged groups set by setprivgrp (see setprivgrp(1M)). If group_name is supplied, access privileges are listed for that group only. If the caller is not a member of group_name, no information is displayed. If -g is used, getprivgrp lists access privileges that have been granted to all groups. Otherwise, access privileges are listed for all privileged gr... |
|
getprpw(1m) -- display protected password database
|
|
getprpw displays the user's protected password database settings. This command is available only to the superuser in a trusted system. Normally it is only used via SAM, see sam(1M). The database contains information for both local and NIS+ users. However, some NIS+ information is kept on the master. Since a user may be both local and NIS+, getprpw uses the nsswitch.conf(4) default if neither -l n... |
|
getty(1m) -- set terminal type, modes, speed, and line discipline
|
|
getty is a program that is invoked by init(1M). It is the second process in the series, (init-getty-login-shell) that ultimately connects a user with the HP-UX system. Initially, if /etc/issue exists, getty prints its contents to the user's terminal, followed by the login message field for the entry it is using from /etc/gettydefs. getty reads the user's login name and invokes the login(1) comma... |
|
getx25(1m) -- get x25 line
|
|
The uucp commands, including getx25, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. getx25 is functionally very similar to getty (see getty(1M)) but is used only for incoming lines that are connected to an X.25 PAD. It performs special functions such as setting up an initial PAD configuration. It also logs the number of the caller in /var/uucp/.Log/LOGX25. The third parameter is the ... |
|
gprof(1) -- display call graph profile data
|
|
The gprof command produces an execution profile of C++, C and FORTRAN programs. The effect of called routines is incorporated into the profile of each caller. Profile data is taken from the call graph profile file (gmon.out default) that is created by programs compiled with the -G option of aCC, cc, and f90. The -G option also links in versions of the library routines that are compiled for profili... |
|
grep(1) -- search a file for a pattern
|
|
The grep command searches the input text files (standard input default) for lines matching a pattern. Normally, each line found is copied to the standard output. grep supports the Basic Regular Expression syntax (see regexp(5)). The -E option (egrep) supports Extended Regular Expression (ERE) syntax (see regexp(5)). The -F option (fgrep) searches for fixed strings using the fast Boyer-Moore string... |
|
grget(1) -- get password and group information
|
|
pwget and grget locate and display information from /etc/passwd and /etc/group. The standard output of pwget contains lines of colon-separated password information whose format is the same as that used in the /etc/passwd file (see passwd(4)). The standard output of grget contains lines of colon-separated group information whose format is the same as that used in the /etc/group file (see group(4)).... |
|
groupadd(1m) -- add a new group to the system
|
|
The groupadd command creates a new group on the system by adding the appropriate entry to the /etc/group file. The groupadd command expects the group argument, which is the name of the new group. The name consists of a string of printable characters that may not include a colon (:) or newline (\n). |
|
groupdel(1m) -- delete a group from the system
|
|
The groupdel command deletes a group from the system by removing the appropriate entry from the /etc/group file. The groupdel command must be used with the group argument. group is the name of the group to be deleted, consisting of a string of printable characters. |
|
groupmod(1m) -- modify a group on the system
|
|
The groupmod command modifies a group on the system by altering the appropriate entry in the /etc/group file. The groupmod command must be used with the group argument, which is the name of the group to be modified. |
|
groups(1) -- show group memberships
|
|
groups shows the groups to which the caller or the optionally specified user belong. If invoked with no arguments, groups prints the current access list returned by getgroups() (see getgroups(2)). Each user belongs to a group specified in the password file /etc/passwd and possibly to other groups as specified in the files /etc/group and /etc/logingroup. A user is granted the permissions of those g... |
|
grpck(1m) -- password/group file checkers
|
|
pwck scans fields in the password and shadow files and reports any inconsistencies to standard error. The checks include validation of the number of fields, login name, user ID, group ID, and whether the login directory and optional program exist. In addition, if the root entry shows a program, it can only be one of: /sbin/sh, /usr/bin/csh, /usr/bin/ksh, or /usr/bin/sh. The criteria for validation... |
|
hashcheck(1) -- find spelling errors
|
|
The spell command collects words from the named files and looks them up in a spelling list. Words that neither occur among nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes, and/or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on the standard output. If no files are named, words are collected from the standard input. The spell command ignores most troff, tbl, and eqn constructio... |
|
hashmake(1) -- find spelling errors
|
|
The spell command collects words from the named files and looks them up in a spelling list. Words that neither occur among nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes, and/or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on the standard output. If no files are named, words are collected from the standard input. The spell command ignores most troff, tbl, and eqn constructio... |
|
head(1) -- give first few lines
|
|
head prints on standard output the first count lines of each of the specified files, or of the standard input. If count is omitted it defaults to 10. If multiple files are specified, head outputs before each file a line of this form: ==> file <== |
|
help(1m) -- Displays help information about dtscp commands.
|
|
The help command displays information about dtscp commands. |
|
host(1) -- DNS lookup utility
|
|
host is a simple utility for performing DNS lookups. It is normally used to convert names to IP addresses and vice versa. When no arguments or options are given, host prints a short summary of its command line arguments and options. |
|
hostname(1) -- set or display name of current host system
|
|
The hostname command displays the name of the current host, as given in the gethostname() system call (see gethostname(2)). Users who have appropriate privileges can set the hostname by giving the argument name_of_host; this is usually done in the startup script /sbin/init.d/hostname. The name_of_host argument is restricted to MAXHOSTNAMELEN characters as defined in . The system might... |
|
hosts_to_na(1m) -- translate host table to name server file format
|
|
hosts_to_named translates the host table, /etc/hosts, into files that are usable by the name server named(1M). The format of these files is defined in RFC 1035. The files are created in the current directory. Once the host table is translated, the name server files can be maintained directly, or the translation can be repeated after each change to the host table. If a line in the host table contai... |
|
hotplugd(1m) -- PCI I/O hotplug (attention button) events daemon
|
|
The hotplugd daemon handles PCI I/O hotplug (also known as attention button, AB, or doorbell) events that are generated by pressing the attention button corresponding to a PCI I/O slot. Only one attention button event is processed by the system at any point in time. If more than one attention button is pressed, the events are put in a queue within the kernel. This daemon invokes /usr/bin/olrad to ... |
|
hp(1) -- handle special functions of HP2640 and HP2621-series terminals
|
|
hp supports special functions of the Hewlett-Packard HP 2640 and HP 2621 series of terminals, with the primary purpose of producing accurate representations of most nroff output. A typical use is: nroff -h files ... | hp Regardless of the hardware options on a given terminal, hp tries to do sensible things with underlining and reverse line-feeds. If the terminal has the ``display enhancements'' ... |
|
hp-mc680x0(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hp-pa(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hp9000s200(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hp9000s300(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hp9000s400(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hp9000s500(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hp9000s700(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hp9000s800(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hpterm(1) -- X window system Hewlett-Packard terminal emulator.
|
|
The hpterm program is a terminal emulator for the X Window system. It provides a Term0 compatible terminal for programs that can't use the window system directly. It also emulates many of the block mode features of HP terminals. Refer to the WARNINGS section below for additional information about running block mode applications. |
|
hpux(1m) -- HP-UX bootstrap
|
|
hpux is the HP-UX specific secondary system loader (SSL) utility for bootstrap (see isl(1M) for the initial system loader). It supports the operations summarized below, as shown in the SYNOPSIS and detailed later in this DESCRIPTION. boot Loads an object file from an HP-UX file system or raw device and transfers control to the loaded image. (Note, the boot operation is position dependent). ll List... |
|
hpux.efi(1m) -- HP-UX bootstrap for Itanium-based systems
|
|
hpux.efi is the HP-UX-specific operating system loader utility for bootstrap. It is a native efi(4) application that can be run on the Itanium-based platform. hpux.efi supports the following options: -V Display the release and version numbers of the hpux utility. -tm Boot the system in tunable maintenance mode, also known as "failsafe boot" mode. This option will disregard the tunable settings a... |
|
hyphen(1) -- find hyphenated words
|
|
hyphen finds all the hyphenated words ending lines in files and prints them on the standard output. If no arguments are given, the standard input is used; thus, hyphen can be used as a filter. |
|
icodd(1m) -- instant Capacity on Demand (iCOD) daemon
|
|
icodd is installed and started as part of the iCOD software on all potential iCOD systems, and re-spawns itself if killed. Note that other iCOD commands fail if this daemon is not running because the operations this daemon performs are vital in keeping the complex wide view of the iCOD state current. The following entry is added to /etc/inittab (at the bottom) in order to have icodd start and re-s... |
|
icod_modify(1m) -- Activate and deactivate processors. Specify system
|
|
Use icod_modify to activate or deactivate processors, specify system contact or iCOD "from" e-mail address, apply codewords, change the system identifier, and change iCOD configuration information. icod_modify does not allow the activation of unlicensed iCOD components. Additional components are licensed after HP receives payment of an enablement fee (for the component) and the application of a ... |
|
icod_notify(1m) -- Test e-mail connectivity to HP for instant Capacity on
|
|
When specifying reply_address, icod_notify sends an asset report via e-mail to HP, root, and the specified e-mail address. Confirmation e-mail is sent from HP to the specified reply e-mail address indicating that HP received the asset report e-mail. For detailed information on e-mail configuration and requirements, see the iCOD User's Guide located at /usr/share/doc/icodUserGuide.pdf. |
|
icod_stat(1m) -- Display instant Capacity on Demand (iCOD) status and system information.
|
|
The icod_stat command displays the status and system information on an iCOD system. For further information see the iCOD User's Guide located at /usr/share/doc/icodUserGuide.pdf. If no options are specified icod_stat displays: Software version: This field displays the version of the iCOD client software. System ID: This field displays the user-specified system identifier that the iCOD system uses... |
|
iconv(1) -- code set conversion
|
|
iconv converts the encoding of characters in the input files from the fromcode code set to the tocode code set, and writes the results on standard output. If no input files are given, iconv reads from standard input. If - appears as an input file name, iconv reads standard input at that point. -- can be used to delimit the end of options (see getopt(3C)). |
|
id(1) -- print user and group IDs and names
|
|
The id command writes a message to standard output, giving the user and group IDs and names for the process. If the effective and real IDs are different, both are printed. If the process has supplementary group affiliations (see groups(1)), the supplementary group affiliations are also written. If the user operand is specified, the user and group IDs of the selected user are written. In this case,... |
|
ident(1) -- identify files in RCS
|
|
ident searches the named files for all occurrences of the pattern $keyword:...keyword:...:...$, where keyword is one of the following: Author Log Date Revision Header Source Locker State These patterns are normally inserted automatically by the RCS co command, but can also be inserted manually (see co(1)). ident works on text files as well as object files. For example, if the C program in file f.c... |
|
identd(1m) -- TCP/IP IDENT protocol server
|
|
identd is a server which implements the TCP/IP proposed standard IDENT user identification protocol as specified in the RFC 1413 document. identd operates by looking up specific TCP/IP connections and returning the user name of the process owning the connection. |
|
idisk(1m) -- create partitions for Itanium(R)-based system's disks
|
|
idisk creates operating system partitions on a disk that is to be used for Itanium-based systems. It reads in the partition information from a data file that may be specified in the command string or redirected from stdin. By default, idisk operates in read-only mode and displays the partition information that is currently on the disk. To write new partition information on the disk the user must s... |
|
idlookup(1) -- identify the user of a particular TCP connection
|
|
idlookup can be used to identify the user at the remote end of a TCP connection, assuming the host at the other end is running an Identification Server. host-or-ip-number is the name of the host at the other end of the connection, or its IP address. local-port and foreign-port are the port numbers, or service names of the ports at the two ends of the connection. |
|
ied(1) -- input editor and command history for interactive programs
|
|
ied is a utility command that is intended to act as an interface between the user and an interactive program such as bc, bs, or a shell, providing most of the line editing and history functionality found in the Korn shell. ied interprets the utility name as the command to be executed, and passes arguments as the arguments to the utility. Subsequent input to utility then has access to editing and h... |
|
ifconfig(1m) -- configure network interface parameters
|
|
The first form of the ifconfig command assigns an address to a network interface and/or configures network interface parameters. ifconfig must be used at boot time to define the network address of each interface present on a machine. It can also be used at other times to redefine an interface's address or other operating parameters. If the address_family is not specified, the address family defau... |
|
ilogind(1m) -- Interface for libpam_dce.sl and libnss_dce.sl with DCE
|
|
ilogind is an interface daemon for libpma_dce.sl (see pam_dce(5)),and libnss_dce.sl with DCE (/opt/dce/sbin/ilogind). ilogind starts up when integrated login is activated using the auth.adm utility. See auth.adm(5). For the services in /etc/pam.conf file that have libpam_dce.sl as the module to provide any of the authentication, account, management, session and password services libpam_dce.sl send... |
|
inetd(1m) -- Internet services daemon
|
|
The inetd daemon is the Internet superserver, which invokes Internet server processes as needed. It must be running before other hosts can connect to the local host through ftp, rcp, remsh, rlogin, and telnet. The inetd daemon also supports services based on the Remote Procedure Call (RPC) protocol (NFS), such as rwalld and rusersd. If RPC servers are started by inetd, the portmap server (see port... |
|
inetsvcs_sec(1m) -- enable/disable secure internet services
|
|
/usr/sbin/inetsvcs_sec is used to enable or disable secure internet services (SIS) by updating inetsvcs.conf(4) with the appropriate entry. SIS provide network authentication when used in conjunction with HP DCE security services, the HP Praesidium/Security Server, or other software products that provide a Kerberos V5 Network Authentication Services environment. |
|
infocmp(1m) -- compare or print out terminfo descriptions
|
|
infocmp can be used to compare a binary terminfo entry with other terminfo entries, rewrite a terminfo description to take advantage of the use= terminfo field, or print out a terminfo description from the binary file (term) in a variety of formats. In all cases, the boolean fields will be printed first, followed by the numeric fields, followed by the string fields. |
|
init(1m) -- process control initialization
|
|
The init daemon and command is a general process spawner. Its primary role is to create processes from a script stored in the file /etc/inittab (see inittab(4)). This file usually has init spawn a getty on each line where users can log in. It also controls autonomous processes required by any particular system. At boot time, init is started as a system daemon. While the system is running, a user-s... |
|
insertmsg(1) -- use findstr(1) output to insert calls to catgets(3C)
|
|
insertmsg examines the file stringlist, which is assumed to be the output of findstr after subsequent editing to remove any strings that do not need to be localized (see findstr(1)). If the -h option is specified, insertmsg places the following lines at the beginning of each file named in stringlist: #ifndef NLS #define catgets(i,sn,mn,s) (s) #else NLS #define NL_SETN number #include ... |
|
insf(1m) -- install special (device) files
|
|
The insf command installs special files in the devices directory, normally /dev. If required, insf creates any subdirectories that are defined for the resulting special file. If no options are specified, special files are created for all new devices in the system. New devices are those devices for which no special files have been previously created. A subset of the new devices can be selected with... |
|
install(1m) -- install commands
|
|
install is a command most commonly used in ``makefiles'' (see make(1)) to install a file (updated target file) in a specific place within a file system. Each file is installed by copying it into the appropriate directory, thereby retaining the mode and owner of the original command. The program prints messages telling the user exactly what files it is replacing or creating and where they are goi... |
|
intctl(1m) -- manage the interrupt configuration of the system
|
|
A processor receives an interrupt when either the processor's interrupt pin is asserted (for line based interrupts) or if a processor detects an interrupt message bus transaction on the system bus (for transaction based interrupts). Interrupts from the interface cards can be line or transaction based. Interrupts are routed to different processors during boot time. The intctl command is a tool tha... |
|
intro(1m) -- introduction to system maintenance commands and application programs
|
|
This section describes commands that are used chiefly for system maintenance and administration purposes. The commands in this section should be used in conjunction with other sections of this manual, as well as the HP-UX System Administration manuals for your system. |
|
intro(1) -- introduction to command utilities and application programs
|
|
This section describes commands accessible by users, as opposed to system calls in Section (2) or library routines in Section (3), which are accessible by user programs. |
|
inv(1) -- make unprintable and non-ASCII characters in a file visible or invisible
|
|
vis reads characters from each file in sequence and writes them to the standard output, converting those that are not printable or not ASCII into a visible form. inv performs the inverse function, reading printable characters from each file, returning them to non-printable or non-ASCII form, if appropriate, then writing them to standard output; Non-printable ASCII characters are represented using ... |
|
ioinit(1m) -- test and maintain consistency between the kernel I/O data structures and /etc/ioconfig
|
|
The ioinit command is invoked by the init process when the system is booted, based on the ioin entry in /etc/inittab: ioin::sysinit:/sbin/ioinitrc > /dev/console 2>&1 where ioinitrc is a script to invoke ioinit with the -i and -r options. Given the -i option, ioinit checks consistency between the kernel I/O data structures (initialized with /stand/ioconfig, which is accessible for NFS-diskless sup... |
|
ioscan(1m) -- scan I/O system
|
|
ioscan scans system hardware, usable I/O system devices, or kernel I/O system data structures as appropriate, and lists the results. For each hardware module on the system, ioscan displays by default the hardware path to the hardware module, the class of the hardware module, and a brief description. By default, ioscan scans the system and lists all reportable hardware found. The types of hardware ... |
|
iostat(1) -- report I/O statistics
|
|
iostat iteratively reports I/O statistics for each active disk on the system. Disk data is arranged in a four-column format: Column Heading Interpretation device Device name bps Kilobytes transferred per second sps Number of seeks per second msps Milliseconds per average seek If two or more disks are present, data is presented on successive lines for each disk. To compute this information, seeks, ... |
|
ipcrm(1) -- remove a message queue, semaphore set, or shared memory identifier
|
|
The ipcrm command removes one or more specified message queue, semaphore set, or shared memory identifiers. |
|
ipcs(1) -- report status of interprocess communication facilities
|
|
ipcs displays certain information about active interprocess communication facilities. With no options, ipcs displays information in short format for the message queues, shared memory segments, and semaphores that are currently active in the system. |
|
isl(1m) -- initial system loader
|
|
isl implements the operating system independent portion of the bootstrap process. It is loaded and executed after self-test and initialization have completed successfully. The processor contains special purpose memory for maintaining critical configuration related parameters (e.g. Primary Boot, Alternate Boot, and Console Paths). Two forms of memory are supported: Stable Storage and Non-Volatile M... |
|
itemap(1m) -- load an ITE (Internal Terminal Emulator) keyboard mapping.
|
|
The itemap command loads a keyboard mapping into the ITE (the graphics console driver), or displays ITE keyboard mappings. itemap is run by /etc/bcheckrc automatically. It is not usually explicitly invoked by the user. |
|
jobs(1) -- standard and restricted POSIX.2-conformant command shells
|
|
Shell Invocation Tilde Substitution Environment Options Command Substitution Functions rsh Restrictions Parameter Substitution Jobs Definitions Blank Interpretation Signals Commands File Name Generation Execution Simple Commands Quoting Command Reentry Compound Commands Arithmetic Evaluation Command Line Editing Special Commands Prompting emacs/gmacs Editing Mode Comments Conditional Expressions v... |
|
join(1) -- relational database operator
|
|
join forms, on the standard output, a join of the two relations specified by the lines of file1 and file2. If file1 or file2 is -, the standard input is used. file1 and file2 must be sorted in increasing collating sequence (see Environment Variables below) on the fields on which they are to be joined; normally the first in each line. The output contains one line for each pair of lines in file1 and... |
|
kcalarm(1m) -- add, delete, or list kernel tunable alarms, as well as turn kernel tunable monitoring on and off.
|
|
kcalarm is used to manage kernel tunable alarms and monitors; alarms and monitors are implemented in the kcmond(1M) daemon. Users can create, modify, delete, and list kernel tunable alarms. Alarms send a notification though various notification targets when a kernel tunable crosses a specified percentage threshold of its current setting. Monitoring is the process of collecting historical tunable d... |
|
kclog(1m) -- manage kernel configuration log file
|
|
kclog is the administrative command for the HP-UX kernel configuration log file. The log file is automatically maintained by all of the kernel configuration commands (kconfig(1M), kcmodule(1M), and kctune(1M)). Any change to any kernel configuration gets logged to this log file, which is located at /var/adm/kc.log. Note that this file is a plain text file which can be viewed and manipulated using ... |
|
kcmodule(1m) -- manage kernel modules and subsystems
|
|
kcmodule is the administrative command for HP-UX kernel modules. It gives information about kernel modules and their usage, and makes changes to their usage. This command can work with any saved kernel configuration, or with the currently running kernel configuration, depending on the use of the -c flag (see below). By default, changes to the currently running kernel configuration are applied imme... |
|
kcmond(1m) -- EMS Kernel Tunable Monitor daemon
|
|
The kcmond daemon monitors the consumption of kernel resources. It is an Event Monitoring Services (EMS - see ems(5)) monitor. The data collected by kcusage can be displayed by kcusage(1M). kcmond includes a resource dictionary file (/etc/opt/resmon/dictionary/kcmond_01.dict) which is used by EMS to identify resources for monitoring. Users can control the monitoring of each kernel tunable by setti... |
|
kconfig(1m) -- manage kernel configurations
|
|
kconfig is the administrative command for HP-UX kernel configurations. In the first form, kconfig will give summary information about the currently running kernel configuration. In the second form, kconfig will give information about saved kernel configurations. (If configuration names are listed on the command line, the output is restricted to those configurations.) In the other forms, kconfig su... |
|
kcpath(1m) -- print kernel configuration pathnames
|
|
kcpath prints the pathnames associated with a kernel configuration. If config is specified, kcpath gives information about the saved kernel configuration named config. Otherwise, kcpath gives information about the currently running configuration. See kconfig(5) for information on saved kernel configurations. |
|
kctune(1m) -- manage kernel tunable parameters
|
|
kctune is the administrative command for HP-UX kernel tunable parameters. It gives information about tunable parameters and their values, and makes changes to tunable values. This command can work with any saved kernel configuration, or with the currently running kernel configuration, depending on the use of the -c flag (see below). By default, changes to the currently running kernel configuration... |
|
kcusage(1m) -- query the usage of kernel resources
|
|
kcusage is used to query the usage of kernel resources controlled by various kernel tunables. The full list of tunables are given below, along with some indication on how to interpret the data on each tunable. When none of the options h, d, m, or y are given, data is displayed that reflects the currently running system. When any of these options are given, then historical data is displayed. When t... |
|
kcweb(1m) -- start the HP-UX kernel configuration tool (a Web interface)
|
|
The HP-UX Kernel Configuration tool (kcweb) user interface uses a Web browser. Executing the kcweb command without any options performs the following tasks: + create server certificates if needed + start the management Web server if it is not running + start a Web client (browser) An attempt will be made to connect to a Mozilla/Netscape Web browser running on the X server defined by the DISPLAY en... |
|
kdestroy(1m) -- Destroys a principal's login context and associated credentials
|
|
The kdestroy command destroys a principal's login context and the principal's credentials. Until the credentials are reestablished by either executing the dce_login command or the kinit command, the principal and any processes created by the principal will be limited to unauthenticated access. Specify the expiration period in the following format: {num{interval}}... where: num A number that spec... |
|
kdestroy(1) -- destroy Kerberos tickets
|
|
The kdestroy utility destroys the user's active Kerberos authorization tickets by writing zeros to the specified credentials cache that contains them. If the credentials cache is not specified, the default credentials cache is destroyed. |
|
kermit(1) -- C-Kermit 8.0 communications software for serial and network connections: modem dialing, file transfer and mana
|
|
Kermit is a family of file transfer, management, and communication software programs from the Kermit Project at Columbia University available for most computers and operating systems. The version of Kermit for Hewlett-Packard HP-UX, called C-Kermit, supports both serial connections (direct or dialed) and TCP/IP connections. C-Kermit can be thought of as a user-friendly and powerful alternative to ... |
|
keyenvoy(1m) -- talk to keyserver
|
|
keyenvoy is a setuid root process that is used by some RPC programs to intermediate between a user process and the keyserv process, keyserv(1M), which will not talk to anything but a root process. This program cannot be run interactively. |
|
keylogin(1) -- decrypt and store secret key with keyserv
|
|
The keylogin command prompts for a password, and uses it to decrypt the user's secret key. The key may be found in the /etc/publickey file (see publickey(4)) or the NIS map ``publickey.byname'' or the NIS+ table ``cred.org_dir'' in the user's home domain. The sources and their lookup order are specified in the /etc/nsswitch.conf file (see nsswitch.conf(4)). Once decrypted, the user's secret... |
|
keylogout(1) -- delete stored secret key with keyserv
|
|
keylogout deletes the key stored by the key server process keyserv(1M). Further access to the key is revoked; however, current session keys may remain valid until they expire or are refreshed. Deleting the keys stored by keyserv will cause any background jobs or scheduled at(1) jobs that need secure RPC services to fail. Since only one copy of the key is kept on a machine, it is a bad idea to plac... |
|
keyserv(1m) -- server for storing private encryption keys
|
|
keyserv is a daemon that is used for storing the private encryption keys of each user logged into the system. These encryption keys are used for accessing secure network services such as NIS+. Normally, root's key is read from the file /etc/.rootkey when the daemon is started. This is useful during power-fail reboots when no one is around to type a password. |
|
keysh(1) -- context-sensitive softkey shell
|
|
keysh is an extension of the standard Korn-shell (for a description of the basic Korn-shell functionality, see ksh(1)). keysh uses hierarchical softkey menus and context-sensitive help to aid users in building command-lines, combining the power of the Kornshell with the ease-of-use of a menu system. And keysh is entirely data-driven, allowing its menus and help to be easily extended as needed. Not... |
|
kill(1) -- send a signal to a process; terminate a process
|
|
The kill command sends a signal to each process specified by a pid process identifier. The default signal is SIGTERM, which normally terminates processes that do not trap or ignore the signal. |
|
killall(1m) -- kill all active processes
|
|
killall is a procedure used by /usr/sbin/shutdown to kill all active processes not directly related to the shutdown procedure. killall is chiefly used to terminate all processes with open files so that the mounted file systems are no longer busy and can be unmounted. killall sends the specified signal to all user processes in the system, with the following exceptions: the init process; all process... |
|
killsm(1m) -- kill the sendmail daemon
|
|
killsm reads the pid file to get the pid number of the currently running sendmail daemon, and then kills that daemon. The pid file is specified using the PidFile option in the /etc/mail/sendmail.cf file. If this option is not set, sendmail uses /etc/mail/sendmail.pid file as the default pid file. If the sendmail daemon is not killed instantaneously, killsm will not exit until the sendmail daemon i... |
|
kinit(1m) -- Obtains and caches ticket-granting ticket
|
|
The kinit command can be used to refresh a DCE credentials cache. When you invoke kinit, it prompts for your password. The ticket lifetime and renewable lifetime are set in the following format: {num {interval}}... where: num A number that specifies the number of the interval; interval can be specified by the following: + w - weeks + d - days + h - hours + m - minutes + s - seconds For example, to... |
|
kinit(1) -- obtain and cache the Kerberos ticket-granting ticket
|
|
kinit obtains and caches an initial ticket-granting ticket for the principal. |
|
kks(1) -- Kana Kanji conversion server
|
|
kks is a Kana Kanji conversion server which communicates with Kana Kanji conversion library. kks uses /usr/lib/asx/dict/japanese/j1_mphrase as the system dictionary. If a port-number is specified, kks uses the port to provide its service. If no port-number is specified, kks searches /etc/services and gets the value of nuekks as the port-number to be used. kks writes host-name and port-number into ... |
|
kkstat(1) -- Kana Kanji Conversion Server information
|
|
kkstat displays kks's information. kkstat is also used to stop Kana Kanji Conversion Server kks. |
|
kl(1m) -- control kernel logging
|
|
The kl command controls the operation of the Kernel Logging facility. Kernel Logging is a high-availability feature that gives system administrators the ability to collect the information necessary to diagnose problems with the HP-UX kernel while the system is running. kl is used to specify the levels of events to be logged and the kernel subsystems that will write messages to memory or disk. kl a... |
|
klist(1m) -- Lists cached tickets
|
|
The klist command lists the primary principal and tickets held in the default credentials cache, or in the cache identified by cachename if the -c option is used. The name of the default credentials cache can vary between systems. However, if the KRB5CCNAME environment variable is set, its value is used to name the default cache. If it is not set, the form of the name is /tmp/krb5cc_[unix_id], whe... |
|
klist(1) -- list cached Kerberos tickets
|
|
klist lists the Kerberos principal and Kerberos tickets held in a credentials cache, or the keys held in a keytab file. |
|
kmpath(1m) -- retrieve kernel name and associated kernel configuration information
|
|
The kmpath command is obsolete and superseded by the kcpat . The kmpath command will be removed in a future release of HP-UX. The behavior of some of kmpath's options have changed and they are noted in the appropriate sections below. kmpath retrieves the main kernel file name and path information of the currently running kernel. kmpath also retrieves the configuration directory of the current or ... |
|
kmtune(1m) -- query, set, or reset system parameters
|
|
kmtune is an obsolete command that is replaced by kctune(1M). Users are encouraged to migrate to kctune(1M). kmtune will be removed in a future release of HP-UX. The behavior of some of kmtune's options have changed and they are noted in the appropriate sections below. kmtune is used to query, set, or reset system parameters. kmtune displays the planned values of all system parameters when used w... |
|
kpasswd(1) -- change a user's Kerberos password
|
|
The kpasswd command is used to change a Kerberos principal's password. kpasswd prompts for the current Kerberos password, which is used to obtain a changepw ticket from the KDC (Key Distribution Center) for the user's Kerberos realm. If kpasswd successfully obtains the changepw ticket, the user is prompted twice for the new password, and the password is changed. If the principal is governed by a... |
|
krsd(1m) -- kernel registry services daemon
|
|
krsd saves data, flagged as persistent in the core kernel KRS tree, to files on disk. These files are read when the system is booted, in order to restore the aforementioned persistent data. When running in daemon mode, krsd sleeps, waking periodically to check if any persistent data have changed since the last save. If persistent data have changed, the new state of the data is saved to disk. Other... |
|
krs_flush(1m) -- flush kernel registry services data to disk
|
|
krs_flush causes persistent, in core, kernel KRS data to be flushed to files on disk. This command signals the KRS daemon, krsd(1M), causing it to save the KRS data to disk. The data will only be saved if it has changed from the time of the last save. |
|
ksh(1) -- shell, the standard/restricted command programming language
|
|
ksh is a command programming language that executes commands read from a terminal or a file. rksh is a restricted version of the command interpreter ksh, used to set up login names and execution environments whose capabilities are more controlled than those of the standard shell. See Invoking ksh and Special Commands sections later in this entry for details about command line options and arguments... |
|
ktutil(1) -- Kerberos keytab file maintenance utility
|
|
The ktutil command invokes a subshell from which an administrator can read, write, or edit entries in a Kerberos V5 keytab or V4 srvtab file. ktutil Commands list Display the current key list. Alias: l read_kt keytab_filename Read the Kerberos V5 keytab file, keytab_filename, into the current key list. Alias: rkt read_st srvtab_filename Read the Kerberos V4 srvtab file, srvtab_filename, into the c... |
|
kvno(1) -- print key version numbers of Kerberos principals
|
|
kvno acquires a service ticket for the specified Kerberos principals and prints out the key version numbers of each principal. |
|
l(1) -- list contents of directories
|
|
For each directory argument, the ls command lists the contents of the directory. For each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information requested. The output is sorted in ascending collation order by default (see Environment Variables below). When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. When several arguments are given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, bu... |
|
labelit(1m) -- copy a file system with label checking
|
|
The volcopy command makes a literal copy of the file system using a block size matched to the device. |
|
labelit_hfs(1m) -- copy an HFS file system with label checking
|
|
The volcopy command makes a literal copy of an HFS file system using a block size matched to the device. |
|
labelit_vxfs(1m) -- copy a VxFS file system with label checking
|
|
volcopy makes a literal copy of a VxFS file system using a block size matched to the device. |
|
lanadmin(1m) -- local area network administration program
|
|
The lanadmin program administers and tests the Local Area Network (LAN). For each interface card, it allows you to: + Display and change the station address. + Display and change the 802.5 Source Routing options (RIF). + Display and change the maximum transmission unit (MTU). + Display and change the speed setting. + Clear the network statistics registers to zero. + Display the interface statistic... |
|
landiag(1m) -- local area network administration program
|
|
The lanadmin program administers and tests the Local Area Network (LAN). For each interface card, it allows you to: + Display and change the station address. + Display and change the 802.5 Source Routing options (RIF). + Display and change the maximum transmission unit (MTU). + Display and change the speed setting. + Clear the network statistics registers to zero. + Display the interface statistic... |
|
lanscan(1m) -- display LAN device configuration and status
|
|
lanscan displays the following information about each LAN device and VLAN interface that have software support on the system: + Hardware Path. + Active Station Address (also known as Physical Address). + Card Instance Number. + Hardware State. + Network Interface ``NamePPA''. The Network Interface ``Name'' and the ``PPA'' (Physical Point of Attachment) number are concatenated together. A sin... |
|
last(1) -- indicate last logins of users and ttys
|
|
The last command searches backwards through the file /var/adm/wtmps (which contains a record of all logins and logouts) for information about a user, a tty, or any group of users and ttys. Arguments specify names of users or ttys of interest. The names of ttys can be given fully or abbreviated. For example, last 0 is the same as last tty0. If multiple arguments are given, the information that appl... |
|
lastb(1) -- indicate last logins of users and ttys
|
|
The last command searches backwards through the file /var/adm/wtmps (which contains a record of all logins and logouts) for information about a user, a tty, or any group of users and ttys. Arguments specify names of users or ttys of interest. The names of ttys can be given fully or abbreviated. For example, last 0 is the same as last tty0. If multiple arguments are given, the information that appl... |
|
lastcomm(1) -- show last commands executed in reverse order
|
|
lastcomm gives information on previously executed commands. If no arguments are specified, lastcomm prints information about all the commands recorded in the accounting file, /var/adm/pacct during the current accounting file's lifetime. If called with arguments, only accounting entries with a matching command name, user name, or terminal name are printed. For example, to produce a listing of all ... |
|
lastlogin(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
lbxproxy(1) -- Low BandWidth X proxy
|
|
Applications that would like to take advantage of the Low Bandwidth extension to X (LBX) must make their connections to an lbxproxy. These applications need to know nothing about LBX, they simply connect to the lbxproxy as if were a regular server. The lbxproxy accepts client connections, multiplexes them over a single connection to the X server, and performs various optimizations on the X protoco... |
|
lc(1) -- list contents of directories
|
|
For each directory argument, the ls command lists the contents of the directory. For each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information requested. The output is sorted in ascending collation order by default (see Environment Variables below). When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. When several arguments are given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, bu... |
|
ld(1) -- link editor
|
|
ld takes one or more object files or libraries as input and combines them to produce a single (usually executable) file. In doing so it resolves references to external symbols, assigns final addresses to procedures and variables, revises code and data to reflect new addresses (a process called "relocation") and updates symbolic debug information when present in the file. By default, ld produces ... |
|
ldd(1) -- list dynamic dependencies of executable files or shared libraries
|
|
ldd is a command that can list the dynamic dependencies of incomplete executable files or shared libraries. ldd lists verbose information about dynamic dependencies and symbol references. If the object file is an executable file, ldd lists all shared libraries that would be loaded as a result of executing the file. If it is a shared library, ldd lists all shared libraries that would be loaded as a... |
|
ldd_ia(1) -- list dynamic dependencies of executable files or shared libraries
|
|
ldd is a command that can list the dynamic dependencies of incomplete executable files or shared libraries. ldd lists verbose information about dynamic dependencies and symbol references. If the object file is an executable file, ldd lists all shared libraries that would be loaded as a result of executing the file. If it is a shared library, ldd lists all shared libraries that would be loaded as a... |
|
ldd_pa(1) -- list dynamic dependencies of executable files or shared libraries
|
|
ldd is a command that can list the dynamic dependencies of incomplete executable files or shared libraries. ldd lists verbose information about dynamic dependencies and symbol references. If the object file is an executable file, ldd lists all shared libraries that would be loaded as a result of executing the file. If it is a shared library, ldd lists all shared libraries that would be loaded as a... |
|
ld_ia(1) -- link editor
|
|
ld takes one or more object files or libraries as input and combines them to produce a single (usually executable) file. In doing so it resolves references to external symbols, assigns final addresses to procedures and variables, revises code and data to reflect new addresses (a process called "relocation") and updates symbolic debug information when present in the file. By default, ld produces ... |
|
ld_pa(1) -- link editor
|
|
ld takes one or more object files or libraries as input and combines them to produce a single (usually executable) file. In doing so it resolves references to external symbols, assigns final addresses to procedures and variables, revises code and data to reflect new addresses (a process called "relocation"), and updates symbolic debug information when present in the file. By default, ld produces... |
|
leave(1) -- remind you when you have to leave
|
|
The leave command waits until the specified time, then reminds you to leave. You are reminded 5 minutes and 1 minute before the actual time, at the time, and every minute thereafter. When you log off, leave exits. The time of day is in the form hhmm, where hh is a time in hours (which can range from 0 through 11 or 0 through 24 hours), and mm is the number of minutes after the specified hour. If t... |
|
libcadmin(1m) -- libc administration command
|
|
The libcadmin command is used to perform administrative functions for libc. Currently the only function that the command performs is to replace the shared 32-bit PA-RISC2.0 library in /usr/lib/libc.2 with the shared 32-bit PA-RISC1.1 version of that library. There are no required arguments or options used with this command. The /usr/lib/libc.a archive library and the libc.sl symbolic link are unaf... |
|
lifcp(1) -- copy to or from LIF files
|
|
lifcp copies a LIF file to an HP-UX file, an HP-UX file to a LIF file, or a LIF file to another LIF file. It also copies a list of (HPUX/LIF) files to a (LIF/HP-UX) directory. The last name on the argument list is the destination file or directory. Options can be used singly or combined in any order before the file names. The space between option and argument is optional. -Txxx Used only when copy... |
|
lifinit(1) -- write LIF volume header on file
|
|
lifinit writes a LIF volume header on a volume or file. |
|
lifls(1) -- list contents of a LIF directory
|
|
lifls lists the contents of a LIF directory on standard output. The default output format lists file names in multiple columns (similar to ls(1), except unsorted) if standard output is a character special file. If standard output is not a tty device, the output format is one file name per line. name is a path name to an HP-UX file containing a LIF volume and optional file name. If name is a volume... |
|
lifrename(1) -- rename LIF files
|
|
oldfile is a full LIF file specifier (see lif(4) for details) for the file to be renamed (e.g. liffile:A_FILE). newfile is new name to be given to the file (only the file name portion). This operation does not include copy or delete. Old file names must match the name of the file to be renamed, even if that file name is not a legal LIF name. Do not mount the special file while using lifrename. |
|
lifrm(1) -- remove a LIF file
|
|
lifrm removes one or more entries from a LIF volume. File name specifiers are as described in lif(4). Do not mount the special file while using lifrm. |
|
line(1) -- read one line from user input
|
|
line copies one line (up to a new-line) from the standard input and writes it on the standard output. It returns an exit code of 1 on EOF and always prints at least a new-line. It is often used within shell files to read from the user's terminal. |
|
link(1m) -- execute link() and unlink() system calls without error checking
|
|
The link and unlink commands perform their respective system calls (link() or unlink()) on their arguments, abandoning most error checking. These commands can be executed only by users who have appropriate privileges. |
|
linkloop(1m) -- verify LAN connectivity with link-level loopback
|
|
The linkloop command uses IEEE 802.2 link-level test frames to check connectivity within a local area network (LAN). linkaddr is the hardware station address of a remote node. Several addresses can be specified at one time. linkloop tests the connectivity of the local node and the remote node specified by each hardware station address. The hardware station address of a remote node can be found by ... |
|
listusers(1) -- display user login data
|
|
The listusers command displays data concerning user logins. The output shows the user login and the /etc/passwd comment field value (e.g., user name, etc.). The default displays data about all user logins. |
|
list_child(1m) -- Displays a list of all the child pointers whose names match the specified child name
|
|
The list child command displays a list of all the child pointers whose names match the specified child name. The last simple name can contain wildcard characters. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to child pointers whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must precede and follow the = (equals sign). |
|
list_clearinghouse(1m) -- Displays a list of all the clearinghouses whose names match the specified clearinghouse name
|
|
The list clearinghouse command displays a list of all the clearinghouses whose names match the specified name. The last simple name can contain wildcards. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to clearinghouses whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must precede and follow the = (equals sign). |
|
list_directory(1m) -- Displays a list of all the directories whose names match the specified directory name
|
|
The list directory command displays a list of all the directories whose names match the specified directory name. The last simple name can contain wildcards. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to directories whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must precede and follow the = (equals sign). |
|
list_link(1m) -- Displays a list of all the soft links whose names match the link name that you specify
|
|
The list link command displays a list of all the soft links whose names match the link name that you specify. The last simple name can contain wildcard characters. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to soft links whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must precede and follow the = (equals sign). This command does not list th... |
|
list_object(1m) -- Lists the specifies object entries (including clearinghouse object entries)
|
|
The list object command displays a list of all the object entries (including clearinghouse object entries) whose names match the object entry name that you specify. The last simple name can contain wildcard characters. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to object entries whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must precede an... |
|
ll(1) -- list contents of directories
|
|
For each directory argument, the ls command lists the contents of the directory. For each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information requested. The output is sorted in ascending collation order by default (see Environment Variables below). When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. When several arguments are given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, bu... |
|
ln(1) -- link files and directories
|
|
The ln command links: + file1 to a new or existing new_file, + file1 to a new or existing file named file1 in existing dest_directory, + file1, file2, ... to new or existing files of the same name in existing dest_directory, + directory1, directory2, ... to new directories of the same name in existing dest_directory, + or it creates symbolic links between files or between directories. If links are... |
|
locale(1) -- get locale-specific (NLS) information
|
|
The locale command displays information about the current locale or about available locales. When invoked without arguments, locale displays the name and actual or implied value of each of the locale-related environment variables in the order shown below, one per line: |
|
localedef(1m) -- generate a locale environment
|
|
localedef sets up the language environment for the named locale. localedef reads a locale definition file (see localedef(4) for a detailed description) from standard input (default) or from locale_definition file, creates a locale file with the same name as specified for the locale_name parameter, and optionally installs this locale in the appropriate directory. Installation of public locales (tho... |
|
lock(1) -- reserve a terminal
|
|
lock requests a password from the user, then prints LOCKED on the terminal and refuses to relinquish the terminal until the password is repeated. If the user forgets the password, the only recourse is to log in elsewhere and kill the lock process. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 |
|
lockd(1m) -- network lock daemon
|
|
lockd is an RPC server that processes NFS file locking requests from the local kernel or from another remote lock daemon. lockd forwards lock requests for remote data to the server site's lock daemon through the RPC/XDR package (see rpc(3N)). lockd then requests the status monitor daemon, statd for monitor service (see statd(1M)). The reply to the lock request is not sent to the kernel until the ... |
|
logger(1) -- make entries in the system log
|
|
The logger command provides a program interface to the syslog() system log module (see syslog(3C)). A message can be given on the command line, which is logged immediately, or a file is read and each line is logged. If no file or message is specified, the contents of the standard input are logged. |
|
login(1) -- sign on; start terminal session
|
|
The login command is used at the beginning of each terminal session to properly identify a prospective user. login can be invoked as a user command or by the system as an incoming connection is established. login can also be invoked by the system when a previous user shell terminates but the terminal does not disconnect. If login is invoked as a command, it must replace the initial command interpr... |
|
logins(1m) -- display system and user login data
|
|
logins displays data concerning system and user logins. The format and content of the output is controlled by command options and may include: system or user login, user ID number, /etc/passwd comment field value (e.g., user name, etc...), primary group name, primary group ID, supplementary group names, supplementary group IDs, home directory, login shell, user security level, user audit events, a... |
|
logname(1) -- get login name
|
|
logname writes the user's login name to standard output. The login name is equivalent to that returned by getlogin() (see getlogin(3C)). |
|
lorder(1) -- find ordering relation for an object library
|
|
The input consists of one or more object or archive library files (see ar(1)) placed on the command line or read from standard input. The standard output is a list of pairs of object file names, meaning that the first file of the pair refers to external identifiers defined in the second. Output can be processed by tsort to find an ordering of a library suitable for one-pass access by ld (see tsort... |
|
lp(1) -- print/alter/cancel requests on an LP destination
|
|
The lp command queues files for printing. The lpalt command changes information in a queued request. The cancel command deletes a queued request. lp Command The lp command arranges for the named files, file ..., and associated information (collectively called a request) to be queued for output to a destination in the LP (line printer) subsystem. The process is called printing, regardless of the ac... |
|
lpadmin(1m) -- configure the LP spooling system
|
|
lpadmin configures LP spooling systems to describe printers, classes and devices. It is used to add and remove destinations, change membership in classes, change devices for printers, change printer interface programs, and to change the system default destination. lpadmin cannot be used when the LP scheduler, lpsched(1M), is running, except where noted below. Exactly one of the -p, -x or -d option... |
|
lpalt(1) -- print/alter/cancel requests on an LP destination
|
|
The lp command queues files for printing. The lpalt command changes information in a queued request. The cancel command deletes a queued request. lp Command The lp command arranges for the named files, file ..., and associated information (collectively called a request) to be queued for output to a destination in the LP (line printer) subsystem. The process is called printing, regardless of the ac... |
|
lpana(1m) -- display LP spooler performance analysis information
|
|
lpana displays LP spooler performance information, which system administrators can use to optimize the configuration of the entire spooler system. |
|
lpfence(1m) -- start the LP request scheduler,
|
|
lpsched Schedules requests taken by lp(1) for printing on printers. lpsched(1M) is typically invoked in /sbin/rc. This creates a process which runs in the background until lpshut is executed. The activity of the process is recorded in /var/adm/lp/log. lpsched recognizes the following options: -v Write a verbose record of the lpsched process on /var/adm/lp/log. -a Write lpana(1M) logging data on /v... |
|
lpfilter(1) -- filters invoked by lp interface scripts
|
|
Various filters are used by the lp subsystem to obtain specialized behavior for specific types of devices or data. This entry describes currently supported filters. A number of these filters use a specified username and filename to determine the location of the user who originated the print message. The filename is used to determine the hostname of the system where the request originated, and must... |
|
lpmove(1m) -- start the LP request scheduler,
|
|
lpsched Schedules requests taken by lp(1) for printing on printers. lpsched(1M) is typically invoked in /sbin/rc. This creates a process which runs in the background until lpshut is executed. The activity of the process is recorded in /var/adm/lp/log. lpsched recognizes the following options: -v Write a verbose record of the lpsched process on /var/adm/lp/log. -a Write lpana(1M) logging data on /v... |
|
lprpp(1) -- filters invoked by lp interface scripts
|
|
Various filters are used by the lp subsystem to obtain specialized behavior for specific types of devices or data. This entry describes currently supported filters. A number of these filters use a specified username and filename to determine the location of the user who originated the print message. The filename is used to determine the hostname of the system where the request originated, and must... |
|
lpsched(1m) -- start the LP request scheduler,
|
|
lpsched Schedules requests taken by lp(1) for printing on printers. lpsched(1M) is typically invoked in /sbin/rc. This creates a process which runs in the background until lpshut is executed. The activity of the process is recorded in /var/adm/lp/log. lpsched recognizes the following options: -v Write a verbose record of the lpsched process on /var/adm/lp/log. -a Write lpana(1M) logging data on /v... |
|
lpshut(1m) -- start the LP request scheduler,
|
|
lpsched Schedules requests taken by lp(1) for printing on printers. lpsched(1M) is typically invoked in /sbin/rc. This creates a process which runs in the background until lpshut is executed. The activity of the process is recorded in /var/adm/lp/log. lpsched recognizes the following options: -v Write a verbose record of the lpsched process on /var/adm/lp/log. -a Write lpana(1M) logging data on /v... |
|
lpstat(1) -- report status information of the LP subsystem
|
|
The lpstat utility writes to standard output information about the current status of the LP subsystem. If no arguments are given, lpstat writes the status of all requests made to lp by the user that are still in the output queue. |
|
ls(1) -- list contents of directories
|
|
For each directory argument, the ls command lists the contents of the directory. For each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information requested. The output is sorted in ascending collation order by default (see Environment Variables below). When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. When several arguments are given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, bu... |
|
lsacl(1) -- list access control lists (ACLs) of files
|
|
lsacl lists access control lists (ACLs) of one or more files in symbolic, ``short'' form, one file's ACL per line of output, followed by the file name; see acl(5) for ACL syntax. |
|
lsdev(1m) -- list device drivers in the system
|
|
The lsdev command lists, one pair per line, the major device numbers and driver names of device drivers configured into the system and available for invocation via special files. A -1 in either the block or character column means that a major number does not exist for that type. If no arguments are specified, lsdev lists all drivers configured into the system. If the -h option is specified, lsdev ... |
|
lsf(1) -- list contents of directories
|
|
For each directory argument, the ls command lists the contents of the directory. For each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information requested. The output is sorted in ascending collation order by default (see Environment Variables below). When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. When several arguments are given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, bu... |
|
lsr(1) -- list contents of directories
|
|
For each directory argument, the ls command lists the contents of the directory. For each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information requested. The output is sorted in ascending collation order by default (see Environment Variables below). When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. When several arguments are given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, bu... |
|
lssf(1m) -- list a special file
|
|
lssf lists information about a special file. For each special_file name, lssf determines the major number of the special file and whether it is block or character (using stat(2)). It then scans the system for the device that is associated with the special file. When the device is found, the minor number of the special file is decoded. A mnemonic description of the minor number is printed on standa... |
|
lsx(1) -- list contents of directories
|
|
For each directory argument, the ls command lists the contents of the directory. For each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information requested. The output is sorted in ascending collation order by default (see Environment Variables below). When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. When several arguments are given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, bu... |
|
lvchange(1m) -- change LVM logical volume characteristics
|
|
The lvchange command changes certain characteristics of a logical volume. Other characteristics can be changed with the lvextend and lvreduce commands (see lvextend(1M) and lvreduce(1M)). The command-line options specify the type and extent of change. Each current characteristic for a logical volume remains in effect until explicitly changed by the corresponding option. All options take effect imm... |
|
lvcreate(1m) -- create logical volume in LVM volume group
|
|
The lvcreate command creates a new logical volume within the volume group specified by vg_name. Up to 255 logical volumes can be created in one volume group. If you specify the -n lv_name option, a new logical volume is created with that name. Otherwise, a system-generated name of the form lvolN is created, where N is created, where N is the decimal equivalent of the two least significant bytes of... |
|
lvdisplay(1m) -- display information about LVM logical volumes
|
|
The lvdisplay command displays the characteristics and status of each logical volume specified by lv_path. |
|
lvextend(1m) -- increase space, increase mirrors for LVM logical volume
|
|
The lvextend command can increase a logical volume's allocated extents, or increase its number of mirrored copies. Other logical volume characteristics can be modified with the lvchange and lvreduce commands (see lvchang ). To limit the allocation to specific physical volumes, specify the physical volume names as pv_path arguments or specify the physical volume group names as pvg_name arguments. ... |
|
lvlnboot(1m) -- prepare LVM logical volume to be root, boot, primary swap, or dump volume
|
|
The lvlnboot command updates all physical volumes in the volume group so that the logical volume becomes the root, boot, primary swap, or a dump volume when the system is next booted on the volume group. If a nonexistent logical volume is specified, this command fails. If a different logical volume is already linked to the root or primary swap, the command fails. This command should be run in reco... |
|
lvmerge(1m) -- merge two LVM logical volumes into one logical volume
|
|
The lvmerge command merges two logical volumes of the same size. The number of mirrored copies of the dest_lv_path is increased by the number of copies in the src_lv_path. Data previously contained in the dest_lv_path is resynchronized using the data in the src_lv_path. All new data on the dest_lv_path is destroyed. Whenever a mirrored logical volume is split into two logical volumes, a bit map is... |
|
lvmmigrate(1m) -- prepare root file system for migration from partitions to LVM logical volumes
|
|
The lvmmigrate command records the configuration information of the current system in the LIF volume of the boot section for use with a subsequent cold-install process. If there is no LIF volume on the disk, lvmmigrate creates it using lifinit(1), then records the information in a LIF file named CUSTOM. A copy of the LIF file is saved as /tmp/LVMMIGRATE.CFG. The information is also written to file... |
|
lvreduce(1m) -- decrease space allocation or the number of mirror copies of logical volumes
|
|
The lvreduce command reduces the number of logical extents allocated to a logical volume specified by lv_path. The excess physical extents in the logical volume and any mirror copies are deallocated. Alternatively, it reduces the number of mirror copies in the logical volume. The physical extents that comprise the deleted mirror copy or copies are deallocated. If pv_path ... is specified, the mirr... |
|
lvremove(1m) -- remove one or more logical volumes from LVM volume group
|
|
The lvremove command removes each logical volume specified by lv_path .... Logical volumes must be closed before they can be removed. For example, if the logical volume contains a file system, unmount the file system before removing it. |
|
lvrmboot(1m) -- remove LVM logical volume link to root, primary swap, or dump volume
|
|
The lvrmboot command updates all physical volumes contained in the volume group vg_name such that the logical volume is removed as a root, primary swap, or dump volume when the system is next booted on the volume group. |
|
lvsplit(1m) -- split mirrored LVM logical volume into two logical volumes
|
|
The lvsplit command splits a single- or double-mirrored logical volume, lv_path, into two logical volumes. A second logical volume is created containing one copy of the data. The original logical volume is appropriately reset as unmirrored or single-mirrored. If the -s option is specified, the new logical volume name has the form lv_pathsuffix. If -s is not specified, suffix defaults to b, as in l... |
|
lvsync(1m) -- synchronize stale mirrors in LVM logical volumes
|
|
The lvsync command synchronizes the physical extents of each logical volume specified by lv_path. Synchronization occurs only on physical extents that are stale mirrors of the original logical extent. The synchronization process can be time consuming, depending on the hardware characteristics and the amount of data. |
|
lwresd(1m) -- lightweight resolver daemon
|
|
lwresd is the daemon providing name lookup services to clients that use the BIND 9 lightweight resolver library. It is essentially a stripped-down, caching-only name server that answers queries using the BIND 9 lightweight resolver protocol rather than the DNS protocol. lwresd listens for resolver queries on a UDP port on the IPv4 loopback interface, 127.0.0.1. This means that lwresd can only be u... |
|
m4(1) -- macro processor
|
|
m4 is a macro processor intended as a front end for Ratfor, C, and other languages. Each of the argument files is processed in order; if there are no files, or if a file name is -, standard input is read. The processed text is written to standard output. |
|
machid(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
machinfo(1) -- print machine information
|
|
machinfo prints useful debugging information about the machine. The information includes chip stepping, firmware revision, number of CPUs, and amount of memory. Note the CPU-specific data only applies to the processor running the machinfo command. Running the machinfo command on another CPU could result in different CPU-specific information being displayed. Use the mpsched(1) command to force mach... |
|
mail(1) -- send mail to users or read mail
|
|
The mail command, when used without arguments, prints the user's mail, message-by-message, in last-in, first-out order. For each message, mail prints a ? prompt and reads a line from the standard input to determine the disposition of the message. Commands that automatically proceed to the next message exit from mail if mail already on the last message. |
|
mailfrom(1) -- summarize mail folders by subject and sender
|
|
The mailfrom command reads one or more mail folders and outputs one line per message in the form: from [subject] where from is the name of the person the message is from, and subject is the subject of the message, if present. If mailfrom determines that the message is from you, the from portion will read To user, where user is the user the message was sent to. This happens when you receive a copy ... |
|
mailq(1) -- prints the mail queue
|
|
mailq prints a summary of the mail messages queued for future delivery. The first line printed for each message shows the internal identifier used on this host for the message, the size of the message in bytes, the date and time the message was accepted into the queue, and the envelope sender of the message. The second line shows the error message that caused this message to be retained in the que... |
|
mailstats(1) -- print mail traffic statistics
|
|
mailstats reads and interprets the sendmail statistics file, and then prints out the mail traffic statistics. The statistics file is the one set by the StatusFile option in the /etc/mail/sendmail.cf. The default statistics file is /etc/mail/sendmail.st. If the statistics file exists, sendmail collects statistics about your mail traffic and stores them in that file. This file does not grow. Statist... |
|
mailx(1) -- interactive message processing system
|
|
mailx provides a comfortable, flexible environment for sending and receiving messages electronically. When reading mail, mailx provides commands to facilitate saving, deleting, and responding to messages. When sending mail, mailx allows editing, reviewing and other modification of the message as it is created. Incoming mail for each user is stored in a standard file called the system mailbox for t... |
|
make(1) -- maintain, update, and regenerate groups of programs
|
|
Makefile Structure A makefile can contain four different kinds of lines: target lines, shell command lines, macro definitions, and include lines. |
|
makedbm(1m) -- make a Network Information System database
|
|
makedbm generates databases (maps) for the Network Information System (NIS) from infile. A database created by makedbm consists of two files: outfile.pag and .pag and pag and outfile.dir. A .dir. A dir. A makedbm database contains records called dbm records composed of key-value pairs. Each line of infile is converted to a single dbm record; all characters up to the first tab or space form the key... |
|
makekey(1) -- generate encryption key
|
|
makekey improves the usefulness of encryption schemes depending on a key by increasing the amount of time required to search the key space. It reads 10 bytes from its standard input and writes 13 bytes on its standard output. The output depends on the input in a way intended to be difficult to compute (i.e., to require a substantial fraction of a second). The first eight input bytes (the input key... |
|
makemap(1m) -- creates database maps for sendmail
|
|
makemap creates the database maps used by the keyed map lookups in sendmail(1M). It reads input from the standard input and outputs them to the indicated mapname. makemap handles up to three different database formats, selected using the maptype parameter. They may be: dbm DBM format maps. (.pag,.dir) btree B-Tree format maps. (.db) hash Hash format maps. (.db) In all cases, makemap reads lines fr... |
|
man(1) -- find manual information by keywords; print out a manual entry
|
|
man accesses information from the HP-UX manual pages. It can be used to: + List all manual entries whose one-line description contains any of a specified set of keywords. + Display or print one-line descriptions of entries specified by name. + Search on-line manual directories by entry name and display or print the specified entry or entries. + Search a specified on-line manual section (directory)... |
|
map-mbone(1m) -- Multicast Router Connection Mapper
|
|
map-mbone requests the multicast router connection information from the multicast-router, and prints the information to the standard out. map-mbone sends out the ASK_NEIGHBORS igmp message to the multicastrouter. When the multicast-router receives the request, it sends back its configuration information. multicast-router can be either an ip address or a system name. If the multicast-router is not ... |
|
mc(1m) -- media changer manipulation utility
|
|
The mc utility provides users with a command-line interface to send media manipulation commands to an autoloader or media changer device. It takes "element types" as arguments to most of the options. The valid element types (element_types) are: D Specifies a Data Transfer (DT) element. I Specifies an Import/Export (IE) element. M Specifies a Medium Transport (MT) element. S Specifies a Storage (... |
|
mediainit(1) -- initialize disk or partition DDS tape
|
|
mediainit initializes mass storage media by formatting the media, writing and reading test patterns to verify media integrity, then sparing any defective blocks found. This process prepares the disk or tape for error-free operation. Initialization destroys all existing user data in the area being initialized. mediainit can also used for partitioning DDS tape media. See the -p option below for furt... |
|
memlogd(1m) -- Support Tools Manager memory logging daemon
|
|
The Support Tools Manager (STM) uses a memory logging daemon ( memlogd ) to periodically poll main memory for single bit errors, and log them to the memory log file ( memlog ). memlogd is launched automatically at boot by the STM daemon, diagmond. The User Interface, xstm , mstm , or cstm , Daemon commands can also be used to launch the daemon as well as shut it down and view the daemon's activit... |
|
merge(1) -- three-way file merge
|
|
merge combines two files that are revisions of a single original file. The original file is file2, and the revised files are file1 and file3. merge identifies all changes that lead from file2 to file3 and from file2 to file1, then deposits the merged text into file1. If the -p option is used, the result goes to standard output instead of file1. An overlap occurs if both file1 and file3 have change... |
|
mesg(1) -- permit or deny messages to terminal
|
|
The command form mesg [-] n forbids messages via write by revoking write permission to users without appropriate privilege on the user's terminal (see write(1)). The command form mesg [-] g reinstates permission so that only legitimate commands (such as write(1)) can be used by other users to send messages. mesg [-] y allows applications such as write or talk to send messages to the user's termi... |
|
mkboot(1m) -- install, update or remove boot programs from disk
|
|
mkboot is used to install or update boot programs on the specified device file. The position on device at which boot programs are installed depends on the disk layout of the device. mkboot examines device to discover the current layout and uses this as the default. If the disk is uninitialized, the default is LVM layout on PA-RISC and Whole Disk on Itanium(R)-based systems. The default can be over... |
|
mkdir(1) -- make a directory
|
|
mkdir creates specified directories in mode 0777 (possibly altered by umask unless specified otherwise by a -m mode option (see umask(1)). Standard entries, . (for the directory itself) and .. (for its parent) are created automatically. If dirname already exists, mkdir exits with a diagnostic message, and the directory is not changed. |
|
mkfifo(1) -- make FIFO (named pipe) special files
|
|
mkfifo creates the FIFO special files named by its operand list. The operands are taken sequentially in the order specified and, if the user has write permission in the appropriate directory, the FIFO is created with permissions 0666 modified by the user's file mode creation mask (see umask(2)). The specific actions performed are equivalent to calling mkfifo(filename, 0666) for each filename in t... |
|
mkfontdir(1) -- create an index of X font files in a directory
|
|
For each directory argument, mkfontdir reads all of the font files in the directory searching for properties named "FONT", or (failing that) the name of the file stripped of its suffix. These are converted to lower case and used as font names, and, along with the name of the font file, are written out to the file "fonts.dir" in the directory. The X server and font server use "fonts.dir" to f... |
|
mkfs(1m) -- construct a file system (generic)
|
|
The mkfs command creates a file system by writing on the special file special. operands are listed on file system specific manual pages (see "SEE ALSO"). |
|
mkfs_hfs(1m) -- construct an HFS file system
|
|
The mkfs command constructs an HFS file system by writing on the special file special. The mkfs command builds the file system with a root directory and a lost+found directory (see fsck_hfs(1M)). The FS_CLEAN magic number for the file system is stored in the superblock. The mkfs command creates the file system with a rotational delay value of zero (see tunefs(1M)). |
|
mkfs_vxfs(1m) -- construct a VxFS file system
|
|
mkfs creates a VxFS file system by writing on the special device file, unless either the -o N or -m option is specified. special must be the first argument on the command line after the options are given. The file system is created based on the options and size specified on the command line. The numeric size specifies the number of sectors in the file system. By default, size is specified in units... |
|
mklost+foun(1m) -- make a lost+found directory for fsck(1M)
|
|
The mklost+found command creates a directory named lost+found in the current directory. It also creates several empty files which are then removed to provide empty slots for the fsck command (see fsck(1M)). For an HFS file system, the mklost+found command is not normally needed since the mkfs command automatically creates the lost+found directory when a new file system is created (see mkfs(1M)). |
|
mkmf(1) -- make a makefile
|
|
The mkmf command creates a makefile that informs the make command how to construct and maintain programs and libraries (see make(1)). After gathering up all source code file names in the current working directory and inserting them into the makefile, mkmf scans source code files for included files and generates dependency information that is appended to the makefile. Source code files are identifi... |
|
mkmsgs(1) -- create message files for use by gettxt()
|
|
The mkmsgs command takes as input a file of localized text strings and generates a message file that can be accessed by the gettxt(3C) routine. textfile is the name of the file that contains the text strings. msgfile is the name of the output message file. mkmsgs appends the suffix .cat to the message file name. The combined length of the file name should be less than 14 bytes for short file name ... |
|
mknod(1m) -- create special files
|
|
The mknod command creates the following types of files: + Character device special file (first SYNOPSIS form), + Block device special file (second SYNOPSIS form), + FIFO file, sometimes called a named pipe (third SYNOPSIS form). name is the path name of the file to be created. The newly created file has a default mode that is readable and writable by all users (0666), but the mode is modified by t... |
|
mksf(1m) -- make a special (device) file
|
|
The mksf command makes a special file in the devices directory, normally /dev, for an existing device, a device that has already been assigned an instance number by the system. The device is specified by supplying some combination of the -C, -d, -H, and -I options. If the options specified match a unique device in the system, mksf creates a special file for that device; otherwise, mksf prints an e... |
|
mkstr(1) -- extract error messages from C source into a file
|
|
mkstr examines a C program and creates a file containing error message strings used by the program. Programs with many error diagnostics can be made much smaller by referring to places in the file, and reduce system overhead in running the program. mkstr processes each of the specified files, placing a revised version of each in a file whose name consists of the specified prefix concatenated in fr... |
|
mktemp(1) -- make a name for a temporary file
|
|
mktemp makes a name that is suitable for use as the pathname of a temporary file, and writes that name to the standard output. The name is chosen such that it does not duplicate the name of an existing file. If the -c option is specified, a zero-length file is created with the generated name. The name generated by mktemp is the concatenation of a directory name, a slash (/), the value of the LOGNA... |
|
mkuupath(1) -- access and manage the pathalias database
|
|
The uucp commands, including uupath and mkuupath, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uupath provides electronic message routing by expanding a simple UUCP address into a full UUCP path (see uucp(1)). For example, host!user could be expanded into !user could be expanded into user could be expanded into hostA!hostB!host!user. !hostB!host!user. hostB!host!user. !host!user. h... |
|
mk_kernel(1m) -- load a kernel configuration from a system file
|
|
mk_kernel reads configuration information from the system file (see system(4)) and applies those changes to a kernel configuration (see kconfig(5)). mk_kernel performs a function similar to that of kconfig -i, but has some semantic differences in order to preserve compatibility with previous releases. mk_kernel will build a new kernel executable only if needed to effect the requested changes. mk_k... |
|
mm(1) -- print documents formatted with the mm macros
|
|
mm can be used to format and print documents using nroff and the mm text-formatting macro package (see nroff(1)). It has options to specify preprocessing by tbl and/or neqn, (see tbl(1) and neqn(1)), and postprocessing by various terminal-oriented output filters. The proper pipelines and the required arguments and flags for nroff and mm are generated, depending on the options selected. osdd is equ... |
|
model(1) -- print hardware model information
|
|
model prints the machine hardware model. model may also display the manufacturer, product names, or other information. |
|
modprpw(1m) -- modify protected password database
|
|
modprpw updates the user's protected password database settings. This command is available only to the superuser in a trusted system. Usage other than via SAM, and/or modifications out of sync with /etc/passwd or NIS+ tables, may result in serious database corruption and the inability to access the system. All updated values may be verified using getprpw(1M). The database contains information for... |
|
monacct(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
more(1) -- file perusal filter for crt viewing
|
|
more is a filter for examining continuous text, one screenful at a time, on a soft-copy terminal. It is quite similar to pg, and is retained primarily for backward compatibility. more normally pauses after each screenful, printing the filename at the bottom of the screen. To display one more line, press . To display another screenful press . Other possibilities are described later. ... |
|
mount(1m) -- mount and unmount file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. directory, which must already exist, will become the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. special and directory must be given as absolute path na... |
|
mountall(1m) -- mount and unmount multiple file systems
|
|
mountall is used to mount file systems according to file_system_table. By default, /etc/fstab is the file_system_table. If a dash (-) is specified, mountall reads file_system_table from the standard input; the standard input must be in the same format as the /etc/fstab. Before each file system is mounted, a check is done using fsck (see fsck(1M)) to ensure that the file system is mountable. If the... |
|
mountd(1m) -- NFS mount request server
|
|
mountd is an RPC server that answers file system mount requests. It reads file /etc/xtab (described in exports(4)) to determine which directories are available to which machines. It also provides information on what file systems are mounted by which clients. This information can be printed using the showmount command (see showmount(1M)). rpc.mountd can be started at boot time by setting the variab... |
|
mount_cachefs(1m) -- mount CacheFS file systems
|
|
The CacheFS-specific version of the mount command mounts a cached file system; if necessary, it NFS-mounts its back file system. It also provides a number of CacheFS-specific options for controlling the caching process. |
|
mount_cdfs(1m) -- mount and unmount CDFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. directory, which must already exist, will become the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. special and directory must be given as absolute path na... |
|
mount_hfs(1m) -- mount and unmount HFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. directory, which must already exist, will become the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. special and directory must be given as absolute path na... |
|
mount_lofs(1m) -- mount and unmount LOFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts LOFS file systems. Only superuser can mount LOFS file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. mount, attaches special_directory, a directory from one of the mounted file systems, to directory, an another directory in one of the mounted file systems. This enables new file systems to be created, which provide access to existing directories or file sy... |
|
mount_nfs(1m) -- mount and unmount NFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches host:path to :path to path to directory. host is a remote system, path is a directory on this remote system and directory is a directory on the local file tree. directory must already exist, be given as an absolute path name and will bec... |
|
mount_vxfs(1m) -- mount and unmount VxFS file systems
|
|
mount attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. (This directory is also known as the mount point). directory, which must already exist, becomes the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. If you omit either special or directory, mount attempts to determine the missing value from an entry in /etc/fstab. mount can be invoked on any removable fi... |
|
mpsched(1) -- control the processor or locality domain on which a specific process executes
|
|
mpsched controls the processor (spu), or locality domain (locality- domain-id) on which a process executes. It can do this by binding a process to a particular processor or locality domain (ldom), or by setting the launch policy for the process. The command can be invoked in five manners. + With -h, it prints a help message. + With -s, it returns the hardware configuration of the system. This incl... |
|
mptconfig(1m) -- configure Ultra320 SCSI controller and A7173A PCI-X Dual Channel Host Bus Adapters
|
|
mptconfig command provides a mechanism to query or change the SCSI settings of a SCSI bus. The mptconfig command only operates with Ultra320 SCSI controllers claimed by the MPT driver. Prerequisites: An effective user ID of 0 (superuser) is required in order to run the mptconfig command. In addition, some of the mptconfig options are intended for use by HP support personnel and require detailed kn... |
|
mptutil(1m) -- Diagnostic utility for Ultra320 SCSI controllers and A7173A
|
|
The mptutil command is a diagnostic tool to be used for Ultra320 SCSI controllers claimed by the MPT driver. This command provides the ability to retrieve various configuration information, perform firmware downloads, issue Task Management commands and read accumulated statistics of the controller and connected target devices. The utility can be used with various options with a specified device fi... |
|
mrinfo(1m) -- Multicast Routing Configuration Information Tool
|
|
mrinfo requests the configuration information from the multicast- ourter, and prints the information to the standard out. multicast- router can be either an IP address or a system name. mrinfo sends out the ASK_NEIGHBORS igmp message to the specified multicast-router, when the router receives the request, it sends back its configuration information. If the multicast-router is not specified, the re... |
|
mrouted(1m) -- IP multicast routing daemon
|
|
The mrouted command is an implementation of the Distance-Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP), an earlier version of which is specified in RFC-1075. It maintains topological knowledge via a distance-vector routing protocol (like RIP, described in RFC-1058), upon which it implements a multicast datagram-forwarding algorithm called Reverse Path Multicasting. mrouted forwards a multicast datagra... |
|
mstm(1m) -- Support Tools Manager
|
|
The Support Tools Manager (STM) provides three interfaces that allow a user access to an underlying toolset, consisting of information modules, firmware update tools, verifiers, diagnostics, exercisers, expert tools, and utilities: XSTM - the graphical interface (for X11-based graphics terminals) MSTM - the menu-based interface (for non-X11-based, non-graphics terminals) CSTM - the command line in... |
|
mt(1) -- magnetic tape manipulating program
|
|
mt is used to give commands to the tape drive. If tapename is not specified, the environment variable TAPE is used; if TAPE is not defined, the default drive is used. mt winds the tape in the requested direction (forward or backward), stopping after the specified count EOF marks or records are passed. If count is not specified, one is assumed. Each EOF mark counts as one record. When winding backw... |
|
mtail(1m) -- tails the mail log file
|
|
mtail displays the last part of the mail log, typically /var/adm/syslog/mail.log. By default, it displays the last 20 lines of this log. |
|
mv(1) -- move or rename files and directories
|
|
The mv command moves: + One file (file1) to a new or existing file (new-file). + One or more files (file1, [file2, ...]) to an existing directory (dest-directory). + One or more directory subtrees (directory1, [directory2, ...]) to a new or existing directory (dest-directory). Moving file1 to new-file is used to rename a file within a directory or to relocate a file within a file system or across ... |
|
mvdir(1m) -- move a directory
|
|
mvdir moves one directory tree into another existing directory (within the same file system), or renames a directory without moving it. dir must be an existing directory. If newdir does not exist but the directory that would contain it does, dir is moved and/or renamed to newdir. Otherwise, newdir must be an existing directory not already containing an entry with the same name as the last pathname... |
|
mwm(1) -- The Motif Window Manager
|
|
mwm is an X Window System client that provides window management functionality and some session management functionality. It provides functions that facilitate control (by the user and the programmer) of elements of window state such as placement, size, icon/normal display, and input-focus ownership. It also provides session management functions such as stopping a client. |
|
naaagt(1m) -- Native Agent Adapter (NAA)
|
|
The Native Agent Adapter (naaagt) allows third-party SNMP agents to work with the HP SNMP Master Agent (snmpdm). The Native Agent Adapter runs as a subagent to the HP SNMP Master Agent. naaagt reads the naaCnf file (see the HP_NAA_CNF environment variable, described below), and it registers each object identifier (OID) with snmpdm. See the naaCnf File Format section. After registration is complete... |
|
named(1m) -- Internet domain name server
|
|
named is the Internet domain name server. See RFC 1033, RFC 1034, and RFC 1035 for more information on the Domain Name System (DNS). Without any arguments, named reads the default configuration file /etc/named.conf, reads any initial data, and listens for queries. named requires superuser privileges to execute. |
|
named-checkconf(1) -- named configuration file syntax checking tool
|
|
named-checkconf is a tool to check the syntax, but not semantics, of the configuration file for named. |
|
named-checkzone(1) -- zone validity checking tool
|
|
named-checkzone is a tool for performing integrity checks on the zone contents. It uses the same integrity checks as named. It mainly checks for syntax errors and also the RR type. |
|
ncheck(1m) -- generate a list of path names from inode numbers
|
|
ncheck, when invoked without arguments, generates a list of path names corresponding to the inode numbers of all files contained on the file systems listed in /etc/fstab. If special is specified, ncheck reports on the special only. Path names generated by ncheck are relative to the given special. |
|
ncheck_hfs(1m) -- generate a list of path names from inode numbers for a HFS file system
|
|
ncheck, when invoked without arguments, generates a list of path names corresponding to the inode numbers of all files contained on the HFS file systems listed in /etc/fstab. If special is specified, ncheck reports on the special only. Path names generated by ncheck are relative to the given special. Names of directory files are followed by /. |
|
ncheck_vxfs(1m) -- generate pathnames from inode numbers for a VxFS file system
|
|
ncheck generates a list of pathnames corresponding to inode numbers for files in a specified VxFS file system. You can specify a range for some options. A range can be a single number, or two numbers separated by a hyphen (-). The range is inclusive. If the range is a single number, the output will refer to the single sector, block, or surface specified by that number. If you enter a hyphen and om... |
|
ndd(1m) -- network tuning
|
|
The ndd command allows the examination and modification of several tunable parameters that affect networking operation and behavior. It accepts arguments on the command line or may be run interactively. The -h option displays all the supported and unsupported tunable parameters that ndd provides. Valid network_device names are: /dev/arp, /dev/ip, /dev/rawip, /dev/tcp, and /dev/udp. Set parameter t... |
|
ndp(1m) -- IPv6 Neighbor Discovery cache display and control
|
|
The ndp command displays and modifies the IPv6 Neighbor Discovery cache as specified in the IPv6 Neighbor Discovery (ND) protocol. |
|
neqn(1) -- format mathematical text for nroff
|
|
neqn is a preprocessor for nroff (see nroff(1)) for typesetting mathematical text on typewriter-like terminals. Its invocation is almost always one of the following two forms or equivalent: neqn file... | nroff | col tbl file... | neqn | nroff | col If no files are specified (or if - is specified instead of file), neqn reads from standard input. A line beginning with .EQ marks the start of an equa... |
|
netfmt(1m) -- format tracing and logging binary files
|
|
netfmt is used to format binary trace and log data gathered from the network tracing and logging facility (see nettl(1M)) and the kernel logging facility (see kl(1M)). The binary trace and log information can be read from a file or from standard input (if standard input is a tty device, an informative message is given and netfmt quits). Formatted data is written to standard output. Formatting opti... |
|
netstat(1) -- show network status
|
|
netstat displays statistics for network interfaces and protocols, as well as the contents of various network-related data structures. The output format varies according to the options selected. Some options are ignored or invalid when used in combination with other options. Generally, the netstat command takes one of the three forms shown above: + The first form of the command displays a list of a... |
|
nettl(1m) -- control network tracing and logging
|
|
The nettl command is a tool used to capture network events or packets. Logging is a means of capturing network activities such as state changes, errors, and connection establishment. Tracing is used to capture or take a snapshot of inbound and outbound packets going through the network, as well as loopback or header information. A subsystem is a particular network module that can be acted upon, su... |
|
nettladm(1m) -- network tracing and logging administration manager
|
|
The nettladm command is a tool used to administer network tracing and logging. It provides an interactive user interface to the nettl, netfmt, and nettlconf commands. The interface runs in either text terminal mode or in a Motif graphical environment. To run nettladm using Motif windows set the DISPLAY environment variable to match the system name (e.g., DISPLAY=system:0.0) prior to using the comm... |
|
nettlconf(1m) -- configure network tracing and logging command subsystem database
|
|
nettlconf maintains the database file /etc/nettlgen.conf which contains information required by the nettl, kl, and netfmt commands (see nettl(1M), kl(1M), and netfmt(1M)). This database contains system logging information along with a description of each subsystem that uses either NetTL or KL facility to log messages. nettlconf can be used to update the network or kernel logging parameters or to a... |
|
newalias(1) -- install new elm aliases for user or system
|
|
The newalias command creates new alias database files from an alias text file for use by elm and other programs. For user aliases, this functionality can also be performed from the Alias Menu of the elm program (see elm(1)). |
|
newaliases(1m) -- rebuilds the database for the mail aliases file
|
|
newaliases rebuilds the random access database for the mail aliases file /etc/mail/aliases. It must be run each time this file is changed in order for the change to take effect. newaliases is identical to sendmail -bi. |
|
newform(1) -- change or reformat a text file
|
|
newform reads lines from the named files, or the standard input if no input file is named, and reproduces the lines on the standard output. Lines are reformatted in accordance with command line options in effect. Except for -s, command line options can appear in any order, can be repeated, and can be intermingled with the optional files. Command line options are processed in the order specified. T... |
|
newfs(1m) -- construct a new file system
|
|
The newfs command is a "friendly" front-end to the mkfs command (see mkfs(1M)). The newfs command calculates the appropriate parameters and then builds the file system by invoking the mkfs command. special represents a character (raw) special device. |
|
newfs_hfs(1m) -- construct a new HFS file system
|
|
The newfs command builds a file system by invoking the mkfs command. The newfs command creates the file system with a rotational delay value of zero (see tunefs(1M)). special represents a character (raw) special device. |
|
newfs_vxfs(1m) -- create a new VxFS file system
|
|
newfs -F vxfs builds a VxFS file system by invoking mkfs. special specifies a character (or raw) file (for example, /dev/rdsk/c0t6d0). |
|
newgrp(1) -- switch to a new group
|
|
The newgrp command changes your group ID without changing your user ID and replaces your current shell with a new one. If you specify group, the change is successful if group exists and either your user ID is a member of the new group, or group has a password and you can supply it from the terminal. If you omit group, newgroup changes to the group specified in your entry in the password file, /etc... |
|
newkey(1m) -- create a new Diffie-Hellman key pair in the publickey database
|
|
newkey establishes new public keys for users and machines on the network. These keys are needed when using secure RPC or secure NFS service. newkey prompts for a password for the given username or hostname and then creates a new public/secret Diffie-Hellman 192 bit key pair for the user or host. The secret key is encrypted with the given password. The key pair can be stored in the /etc/publickey f... |
|
newmail(1) -- notify users of new mail in mailboxes
|
|
The newmail utility monitors your incoming mailbox or specified mail folders. The basic operation is that the program checks the folders each interval seconds (default 60) and lists any new mail that has arrived in any of the mailboxes, indicating the sender's name, and the subject of the message. Without any options, newmail runs in the background at a default interval of 60 seconds to monitor t... |
|
news(1) -- print news items
|
|
news is used to keep the user informed of current events. By convention, these events are described by files in the directory /var/news. When invoked without arguments, news prints the contents of all current files in /var/news, most recent first, with each preceded by an appropriate header. news stores the ``currency'' time as the modification date of a file named .news_time in the user's home... |
|
nfsd(1m) -- NFS daemons
|
|
nfsd starts the NFS server daemons that handle client file system requests (see nfs(7)). num_nfsd is the suggested number of file system request daemons that will start. One daemon will be started to support the kernel threads servicing TCP requests, and multiple additional daemons will be started to service UDP requests. At system boot time, num_nfsd is defined by the NUM_NFSD variable in the /et... |
|
nfsstat(1m) -- Network File System statistics
|
|
nfsstat displays statistical information about the NFS (Network File System) and RPC (Remote Procedure Call), interfaces to the kernel. It can also be used to reinitialize this information. If no options are given, the default is nfsstat -cnrs That is, display everything, but reinitialize nothing. |
|
nice(1) -- run a command at nondefault priority
|
|
The nice command executes command at a nondefault CPU scheduling priority. (The name is derived from being "nice" to other system users by running large programs at lower priority.) |
|
nis(1) -- a new version of the network information name service
|
|
NIS+ is a new version of the network information name service. This version differs in several significant ways from version 2, which is referred to as NIS or YP in earlier releases. Specific areas of enhancement include the ability to scale to larger networks, security, and the administration of the service. The man pages for NIS+ are broken up into three basic categories. Those in section 1 are ... |
|
nis+(1) -- a new version of the network information name service
|
|
NIS+ is a new version of the network information name service. This version differs in several significant ways from version 2, which is referred to as NIS or YP in earlier releases. Specific areas of enhancement include the ability to scale to larger networks, security, and the administration of the service. The man pages for NIS+ are broken up into three basic categories. Those in section 1 are ... |
|
NIS+(1) -- a new version of the network information name service
|
|
NIS+ is a new version of the network information name service. This version differs in several significant ways from version 2, which is referred to as NIS or YP in earlier releases. Specific areas of enhancement include the ability to scale to larger networks, security, and the administration of the service. The man pages for NIS+ are broken up into three basic categories. Those in section 1 are ... |
|
nisaddcred(1m) -- create NIS+ credentials
|
|
The nisaddcred command is used to create security credentials for NIS+ principals. NIS+ credentials serve two purposes. The first is to provide authentication information to various services; the second is to map the authentication service name into an NIS+ principal name. When the nisaddcred command is run, these credentials get created and stored in a table named cred.org_dir in the default NIS+... |
|
nisaddent(1m) -- create NIS+ tables from corresponding /etc files or NIS maps
|
|
nisaddent creates entries in NIS+ tables from their corresponding /etc files and NIS maps. This operation is customized for each of the standard tables that are used in the administration of HP-UX systems. The type argument specifies the type of the data being processed. Legal values for this type are one of aliases, bootparams, ethers, group, hosts, netid, netmasks, networks, passwd, protocols, p... |
|
niscat(1) -- display NIS+ tables and objects
|
|
In the first synopsis, niscat displays the contents of the NIS+ tables named by tablename. In the second synopsis, it displays the internal representation of the NIS+ objects named by name. |
|
nischgrp(1) -- change the group owner of an NIS+ object
|
|
nischgrp changes the group owner of the NIS+ objects or entries specified by name to the specified NIS+ group. Entries are specified using indexed names (see nismatch(1)). If group is not a fully qualified NIS+ group name, it will be resolved using the directory search path (see nisdefaults(1)). The only restriction on changing an object's group owner is that you must have modify permissions for ... |
|
nischmod(1) -- change access rights on an NIS+ object
|
|
nischmod changes the access rights (mode) of the NIS+ objects or entries specified by name to mode. Entries are specified using indexed names (see nismatch(1)). Only principals with modify access to an object may change its mode. mode has the following form: rights [,rights] ... rights has the form: [ who ] op permission [ op permission ]... who is a combination of: n Nobody's permissions. o Owne... |
|
nischown(1) -- change the owner of an NIS+ object
|
|
nischown changes the owner of the NIS+ objects or entries specified by name to owner. Entries are specified using indexed names (see nismatch(1)). If owner is not a fully qualified NIS+ principal name (see nisaddcred(1M)), the default domain (see nisdefaults(1)) will be appended to it. The only restriction on changing an object's owner is that you must have modify permissions for the object. Note... |
|
nischttl(1) -- change the time to live value of an NIS+ object
|
|
nischttl changes the time to live value (ttl) of the NIS+ objects or entries specified by name to time. Entries are specified using indexed names (see nismatch(1)). The time to live value is used by object caches to expire objects within their cache. When an object is read into the cache, this value is added to the current time in seconds yielding the time when the cached object would expire. The ... |
|
nisclient(1m) -- initialize NIS+ credentials for NIS+ principals
|
|
The nisclient shell script can be used to: + create NIS+ credentials for hosts and users + initialize NIS+ hosts and users + restore the network service environment NIS+ credentials are used to provide authentication information of NIS+ clients to NIS+ service. Use the first synopsis ( -c ) to create individual NIS+ credentials for hosts or users. You must be logged in as a NIS+ principal in the d... |
|
nisd(1m) -- NIS+ service daemon
|
|
The rpc.nisd daemon is an RPC service that implements the NIS+ service. This daemon must be running on all machines that serve a portion of the NIS+ namespace. rpc.nisd is usually started from a system startup script. rpc.nisd_resolv is an auxillary process that is started by rpc.nisd when it is invoked with -B option. Note that rpc.nisd_resolv should not be started independently. |
|
nisdefaults(1) -- display NIS+ default values
|
|
nisdefaults prints the default values that are returned by calls to the NIS+ local name functions (see nis_local_names(3N)). With no options specified, all defaults will be printed in a verbose format. With options, only that option is displayed in a terse form suitable for shell scripts. See the example below. |
|
nisd_resolv(1m) -- NIS+ service daemon
|
|
The rpc.nisd daemon is an RPC service that implements the NIS+ service. This daemon must be running on all machines that serve a portion of the NIS+ namespace. rpc.nisd is usually started from a system startup script. rpc.nisd_resolv is an auxillary process that is started by rpc.nisd when it is invoked with -B option. Note that rpc.nisd_resolv should not be started independently. |
|
niserror(1) -- display NIS+ error messages
|
|
niserror prints the NIS+ error associated with status value error-num on the standard output. It is used by shell scripts to translate NIS+ error numbers that are returned into text messages. |
|
nisgrep(1) -- utilities for searching NIS+ tables
|
|
nismatch and nisgrep can be used to search NIS+ tables. The command nisgrep differs from the nismatch command in its ability to accept regular expressions keypat for the search criteria rather than simple text matches. Because nisgrep uses a callback function, it is not constrained to searching only those columns that are specifically made searchable at the time of table creation. This makes it mo... |
|
nisgrpadm(1) -- NIS+ group administration command
|
|
nisgrpadm is used to administer NIS+ groups. This command administers both groups and the groups' membership lists. nisgrpadm can create, destroy, or list NIS+ groups. nisgrpadm can be used to administer a group's membership list. It can add or delete principals to the group, or test principals for membership in the group. The names of NIS+ groups are syntactically similar to names of NIS+ objec... |
|
nisinit(1m) -- NIS+ client and server initialization utility
|
|
nisinit initializes a machine to be a NIS+ client or an NIS+ root master server. It may be easier to use nisclient(1M) or nisserver(1M) to accomplish this same task. |
|
nisln(1) -- symbolically link NIS+ objects
|
|
The nisln command links an NIS+ object named name to an NIS+ name linkname. If name is an indexed name (see nismatch(1)), the link points to entries within an NIS+ table. Clients wishing to look up information in the name service can use the FOLLOW_LINKS flag to force the client library to follow links to the name they point to. Further, all of the NIS+ administration commands accept the -L switch... |
|
nislog(1m) -- display the contents of the NIS+ transaction log
|
|
nislog displays the contents of the NIS+ server transaction log on the standard output. This command can be used to track changes in the namespace. The /var/nis/hostname.log file contains the transaction log maintained by the NIS+ server. hostname.log file contains the transaction log maintained by the NIS+ server. .log file contains the transaction log maintained by the NIS+ server. hostname is t... |
|
nisls(1) -- list the contents of an NIS+ directory
|
|
For each name that is an NIS+ directory, nisls lists the contents of the directory. For each name that is an NIS+ object other than a directory, nisls simply echos the name. If no name is specified, the first directory in the search path (see nisdefaults(1)) is listed. |
|
nismatch(1) -- utilities for searching NIS+ tables
|
|
nismatch and nisgrep can be used to search NIS+ tables. The command nisgrep differs from the nismatch command in its ability to accept regular expressions keypat for the search criteria rather than simple text matches. Because nisgrep uses a callback function, it is not constrained to searching only those columns that are specifically made searchable at the time of table creation. This makes it mo... |
|
nismkdir(1) -- create NIS+ directories
|
|
The nismkdir command creates new NIS+ subdirectories within an existing domain. It can also be used to create replicated directories. Without options, this command will create a subdirectory with the same master and the replicas as its parent directory. It is advisable to use nisserver(1M) to create an NIS+ domain which consists of the specified directory along with the org_dir and groups_dir subd... |
|
nispasswd(1) -- change NIS+ password information
|
|
nispasswd changes a password, gecos (finger) field (-goption), home directory (-hoption), or login shell (-soption) associated with the username (invoker by default) in the NIS+ passwd table. Additionally, the command can be used to view or modify aging information associated with the user specified if the invoker has the right NIS+ privileges. nispasswd uses secure RPC to communicate with the NIS... |
|
nispasswdd(1m) -- NIS+ password update daemon
|
|
rpc.nispasswdd daemon is an ONC+ RPC service that services password update requests from nispassw . It updates password entries in the NIS+ passwd table. rpc.nispasswdd is normally started from a system startup script after the NIS+ server (rpc.nisd(1M)) has been started. rpc.nispasswdd will determine whether it is running on a machine that is a master server for one or more NIS+ directories. If i... |
|
nisping(1m) -- send ping to NIS+ servers
|
|
In the first SYNOPSIS line, the nisping command sends a ping to all replicas of a NIS+ directory. Once a replica receives a ping, it will check with the master server for the directory to get updates. Prior to pinging the replicas, this command attempts to determine the last update "seen" by a replica and the last update logged by the master. If these two timestamps are the same, the ping is not... |
|
nispopulate(1m) -- populate the NIS+ tables in a NIS+ domain.
|
|
The nispopulate shell script can be used to populate NIS+ tables in a specified domain from their corresponding files or NIS maps. nispopulate assumes that the tables have been created either through nisserver(1M) or nissetup(1M). The table argument accepts standard names that are used in the administration of HP-UX systems and non-standard key-value type tables. See nisaddent(1M) for more informa... |
|
nisrm(1) -- remove NIS+ objects from the namespace
|
|
The nisrm command removes NIS+ objects named name from the NIS+ namespace. This command will fail if the NIS+ master server is not running. |
|
nisrmdir(1) -- remove NIS+ directories
|
|
nisrmdir deletes existing NIS+ subdirectories. It can remove a directory outright, or simply remove replicas from serving a directory. This command modifies the object that describes the directory dirname, and then notifies each replica to remove the directory named dirname. If the notification of any of the affected replicas fails, the directory object is returned to its original state unless the... |
|
nisserver(1m) -- set up NIS+ servers.
|
|
The nisserver shell script can be used to set up a root master, nonroot master, and replica NIS+ servers with level 2 security (DES). When setting up a new domain, this script creates the NIS+ directories (including groups_dir and org_dir) and system table objects for the domain specified. It does not populate the tables. You will need to use nispopulate(1M) to populate the tables. Use the first S... |
|
nissetup(1m) -- initialize a NIS+ domain
|
|
nissetup is a shell script that sets up a NIS+ domain to serve clients that wish to store system administration information in a domain named domain. This domain should already exist prior to executing this command (see nismkdir(1) and nisinit(1M)). A NIS+ domain consists of a NIS+ directory and its subdirectories: org_dir and groups_dir. org_dir stores system administration information and groups... |
|
nisshowcache(1m) -- NIS+ utility to print out the contents of the shared cache file
|
|
nisshowcache prints out the contents of the per-machine NIS+ directory cache that is shared by all processes accessing NIS+ on the machine. By default, nisshowcache only prints out the directory names in the cache along with the cache header. The shared cache is maintained by nis_cachemgr(1M). |
|
nisstat(1m) -- report NIS+ server statistics
|
|
The nisstat command queries a NIS+ server for various statistics about its operations. These statistics may vary between implementations and from release to release. Not all statistics are available from all servers. Requesting a statistic from a server that does not support that statistic is never fatal, it simply returns 'unknown statistic.' By default, statistics are fetched from the server(s... |
|
nistbladm(1) -- NIS+ table administration command
|
|
The nistbladm command is used to administer NIS+ tables. There are five primary operations that it performs: creating and deleting tables, adding entries to, modifying entries within, and removing entries from tables. Though NIS+ does not place restrictions on the size of tables or entries, the size of data has an impact on the performance and the disk space requirements of the NIS+ server. NIS+ i... |
|
nistest(1) -- return the state of the NIS+ namespace using a conditional expression
|
|
nistest provides a way for shell scripts and other programs to test for the existence, type, and access rights of objects and entries. Entries are named using indexed names (see nismatch(1)). |
|
nisupdkeys(1m) -- update the public keys in a NIS+ directory object
|
|
This command updates the public keys in an NIS+ directory object. When the public key for a NIS+ server is changed, the new key must be propagated to all directory objects that reference that server. nisupdkeys reads a directory object and attempts to get the public key for each server of that directory. These keys are placed in the directory object and the object is then modified to reflect the n... |
|
nis_cachemgr(1m) -- maintains a cache containing location information about NIS+ servers
|
|
The nis_cachemgr daemon maintains a cache of the NIS+ directory objects. The cache contains location information necessary to contact the NIS+ servers that serve the various directories in the name space. This includes transport addresses, information neeeded to authenticate the server, and a time to live field which gives a hint on how long the directory object can be cached. The cache helps to i... |
|
nl(1) -- line numbering filter
|
|
nl reads lines from the named file or the standard input if no file is named and reproduces the lines on the standard output. Lines are numbered on the left in accordance with the command options in effect. nl views the text it reads in terms of logical pages. Line numbering is reset at the start of each logical page. A logical page consists of a header, a body, and a footer section. Empty section... |
|
nljust(1) -- justify lines, left or right, for printing
|
|
nljust formats for printing data written in languages with a rightto-left orientation. It is designed to be used with the pr and the lp commands (see pr(1) and lp(1)). nljust reads the concatenation of input files (or standard input if none are given) and produces on standard output a right-to-left formatted version of its input. If - appears as an input file name, nljust reads standard input at t... |
|
nm(1) -- print name list of common object file
|
|
The nm command displays the symbol table of each object file, file. There are three general output formats: the default (neither -p nor -P specified), -p specified, and -P specified. The output formats are described after the "Options" subsection. By default, nm prints the entire name of the symbols listed. Since object files can have symbol names with an arbitrary number of characters, a name t... |
|
nohup(1) -- run a command immune to hangups
|
|
nohup executes command with hangups and quits ignored. If output is not redirected by the user, both standard output and standard error are sent to nohup.out. If nohup.out is not writable in the current directory, output is redirected to $HOME/nohup.out; otherwise, nohup fails. If a file is created, the file's permission bits will be set to S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR. If output from nohup is redirected to... |
|
nroff(1) -- format text
|
|
nroff is a text formatting program that interprets source text contained in file and prepares it for printing on typewriter-like devices and line printers. If file name is - or not specified, standard input is used as source text. If the file contains plain text with no formatter requests, nroff uses default line lengths and page dimensions to produce readable output, outputting a blank line for e... |
|
nslookup(1) -- query name servers interactively
|
|
nslookup is a program to query Internet domain name servers. nslookup has been extended to follow the configured name resolution algorithm of the host and to query NIS, as well as, DNS and host tables. Both an interactive and non-interactive mode are available with nslookup. Interactive mode allows the user to query a name server for information about various hosts and domains, or print a list of ... |
|
nsquery(1) -- query the Name Service Switch backend libraries
|
|
nsquery is used to find the Name Service that returned the response to a gethostbyname(), gethostbyaddr(), getpwnam(), getpwuid(), getgrnam(), or getgrgid() function call. This application is Name Service Switch aware and follows the lookup policies in /etc/nsswitch.conf. The lookup types supported are: hosts Used to resolve host name or IP Address lookups. passwd Used to resolve user name or UID ... |
|
nsupdate(1) -- Dynamic DNS update utility
|
|
nsupdate is used to submit Dynamic DNS Update requests as defined in RFC2136 to a name server. This allows resource records to be added or removed from a zone without manually editing the zone file. A single update request can contain requests to add or remove more than one resource record. Zones that are under dynamic control via nsupdate or a DHCP server should not be edited by hand. Manual edit... |
|
ntpdate(1m) -- set the date and time via NTP
|
|
ntpdate sets the local date and time by polling those Network Time Protocol (NTP) server(s) given as the server arguments to determine the correct time. It must be run as root on the local host. A number of samples are obtained from each of the servers specified and a subset of the NTP clock filter and selection algorithms are applied to select the best of these. Note that the accuracy and reliabi... |
|
ntpq(1m) -- standard Network Time Protocol query program
|
|
ntpq is used to query NTP servers, that implement the recommended NTP mode 6 control message format about current state and to request changes in that state. The program may be run either in interactive mode or controlled mode using command line arguments. Requests to read and write arbitrary variables can be assembled, with raw and pretty-printed output options available. ntpq can also obtain and... |
|
nulladm(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
ocd(1m) -- outbound connection daemon used by DDFA software
|
|
The Outbound Connection Daemon (ocd) is part of the Data Communications and Terminal Controller (DTC) Device File Access (DDFA) software. It manages the connection and data transfer to the remote terminal server port. It can be spawned from the Dedicated Port Parser (dpp) or run directly from the shell. For performance reasons, ocd does not have a debug mode. However, a version called ocdebug with... |
|
ocdebug(1m) -- outbound connection daemon debug utility used by DDFA software
|
|
The ocdebug daemon is the debugging version of the Outbound Connection Daemon (ocd). ocd is part of the Data Communications and Terminal Controller (DTC) Device File Access (DDFA) software. It manages the connection and data transfer to the remote terminal server port. See ddfa(7) for more information on how to configure the DDFA software and for an explanation of how it works. Debugging may be to... |
|
od(1) -- octal and hexadecimal dump
|
|
od and xd concatenate one or more input files and write their contents to standard output in a user-specified format. If file is not specified, the standard input is used. |
|
odump(1) -- dump information contained in SOM object files
|
|
odump takes one or more 32-bit native code files (object files, shared and archive libraries, executables) and dumps information about them. Note: odump skips non-SOM input files and issues a warning. $ odump -all /usr/lib/pa20_64/libc.sl File is not a SOM, skipping: /usr/lib/pa20_64/libc.sl. |
|
olrad(1m) -- command for online addition/replacement of PCI IO cards
|
|
The olrad command provides the ability to perform on-line addition and replacement of I/O cards. olrad performs critical resource analysis of the system before performing any OLA/R operation. This is to ensure that the system is not left in an inconsistent state after a PCI card is added/replaced. Only users with root privileges may use this command. |
|
on(1) -- execute command on remote host with environment similar to local
|
|
on executes a command on a remote host, using an environment similar to that of the invoking user where: host specifies the name of the host on which to execute the command. command specifies the command to execute on host If command is not specified, on starts a shell on host. argument ... is a list of arguments for command. The user's environment variables are copied to the remote host, and the... |
|
opx25(1m) -- execute HALGOL programs
|
|
The uucp commands, including opx25, are targeted for removal from HPUX; see the WARNINGS below. HALGOL is a simple language for communicating with devices such as modems and X.25 PADs. It has simple statements similar to send xxx and expect yyy that are described below. Options: opx25 recognizes the following options: -f script Causes opx25 to read script as the input program. If -f is not specifi... |
|
osdd(1) -- print documents formatted with the mm macros
|
|
mm can be used to format and print documents using nroff and the mm text-formatting macro package (see nroff(1)). It has options to specify preprocessing by tbl and/or neqn, (see tbl(1) and neqn(1)), and postprocessing by various terminal-oriented output filters. The proper pipelines and the required arguments and flags for nroff and mm are generated, depending on the options selected. osdd is equ... |
|
ospf_monitor(1m) -- monitor OSPF (Open Shortest Path First protocol) gateways
|
|
Use the ospf_monitor command to query OSPF routers. The ospf_monitor command operates in interactive mode. It allows the user to query the various OSPF routers to provide detailed information on IO statistics, error logs, link-state data bases, AS external data bases, the OSPF routing table, configured OSPF interfaces, and OSPF neighbors. mon_db_file is the complete pathname of a database composed... |
|
owners(1m) -- list owners of outgoing network connections
|
|
owners displays a list of established network connections which originate on this system, and indicates the owners of each connection using the identd running on this system. |
|
pack(1) -- compress and expand files
|
|
pack attempts to store the specified files in a compressed form. Wherever possible, each input file name is replaced by a packed file name.z with the same ownership, modes, and access and modification times. The .z with the same ownership, modes, and access and modification times. The -f option forces packing of name. This is useful for causing an entire directory to be packed even if some of the ... |
|
page(1) -- file perusal filter for crt viewing
|
|
more is a filter for examining continuous text, one screenful at a time, on a soft-copy terminal. It is quite similar to pg, and is retained primarily for backward compatibility. more normally pauses after each screenful, printing the filename at the bottom of the screen. To display one more line, press . To display another screenful press . Other possibilities are described later. ... |
|
pamkrbval(1m) -- validates the PAM Kerberos configuration.
|
|
pamkrbval verifies the PAM Kerberos related configuration files, /etc/pam.conf, /etc/pam_user.conf, /etc/krb5.conf, and /etc/krb5.keytab. It also checks if the default realm KDC is running. This version of pamkrbval is based on Kerberos V5 Client Version 1.0 and may not work with configuration files of other Kerberos versions. This tool will help the administrator diagnose the problem. pamkrbval p... |
|
parcreate(1m) -- create a new partition
|
|
The parcreate command creates a new partition. By default the new partition is created on the local complex. Either the -u or the -g option can be specified to create a partition on the specified target (local or remote) complex. The command takes the specified cells (and any attached I/O chassis) and assigns them to the new partition. At least one of the cells specified must be attached to an I/O... |
|
parmgr(1m) -- Start or stop Partition Manager
|
|
The parmgr command starts or stops the HP-UX Tomcat-based Servlet Engine (a component in the HP-UX Web Server Suite) and by default starts a client Web browser running Partition Manager. Partition Manager is a Web-based application that allows system administrators to use a convenient graphical user interface to configure and manage nPartitions on HP server systems. Partition Manager also provides... |
|
parmodify(1m) -- modify an existing partition
|
|
The parmodify command is used to modify the attributes of an existing partition. By default the target partition is the local partition. Either the -u or the -g option can be specified to allow this command to modify any other partition in the (local or remote) complex. This command can modify the following attributes: Partition name Cell assignment: Add cells to the partition Delete cells from th... |
|
parremove(1m) -- remove an existing partition
|
|
The parremove command removes an existing partition. This will unassign all cells from the partition and destroy the partition definition. PartitionNumber, the target partition, must be inactive except when the -F option is used. Even then, one of the following additional conditions must be satisfied: + The target partition must be the local partition, the partition executing the parremove command... |
|
parstatus(1) -- display information about a hardware partitionable complex
|
|
The parstatus command displays information about a system complex. If no arguments are supplied, all major components that are physically present in the local complex are listed. A specific component (cell, I/O chassis, cabinet, or partition) may be specified in order to restrict the output to information about that component. Either the -u option or the -g option can be specified to access a remo... |
|
parunlock(1m) -- unlock the Stable Complex Configuration Data, Partition Configuration Data, Dynamic Complex Configuration Data
|
|
The parunlock command unlocks the specified Partition Configuration Data, the Dynamic Complex Configuration Data, the Stable Complex Configuration Data, specified cell data or cancels pending changes to the Stable Complex Configuration Data or any combination of these. This command should be used with caution. It should be used only when the system resources are locked due to the abnormal terminat... |
|
passwd(1) -- change login password and associated attributes
|
|
The passwd command modifies the password as well as the attributes associated with the login name. If name is omitted, it defaults to the invoking user's login name, which is determined using getuid. See getuid(2). Ordinary users can only change passwords corresponding to their login name. If an old password has been established, it is requested from the user. If valid, a new password is obtained... |
|
passwd_export(1m) -- Creates local password and group files
|
|
The dceshared/bin/passwd_export command creates local password and group files from registry data. These files are used when the network registry is unavailable and by programs that use the original UNIX passwd and group interfaces instead of the DCE interfaces. Use /bin/passwd_export command creates local password and group files from registry data. These files are used when the network registry ... |
|
passwd_import(1m) -- Creates registry database entries based on information in UNIX group and password files
|
|
The passwd_import command is a mechanism for creating registry database entries that are consistent with foreign password and group file entries. Use passwd_import to ensure consistency between DCE and foreign protection mechanisms when you do the following: Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 passwd_import(1m) Open Software Foundation passwd_import(1m) + Attach DCE no... |
|
paste(1) -- merge same lines of several files or subsequent lines of one file
|
|
In the first two forms, paste concatenates corresponding lines of the given input files file1, file2, etc. It treats each file as a column or columns in a table and pastes them together horizontally (parallel merging). In other words, it is the horizontal counterpart of cat(1) which concatenates vertically; i.e., one file after the other. In the -s option form above, paste replaces the function of... |
|
patch(1) -- a program for applying a diff file to an original
|
|
patch will take a patch file containing any of the three forms of difference listing produced by the diff program (normal, context or in the style of ed) and apply those differences to an original file, producing a patched version. By default, the patched version is put in place of the original, with the original file backed up to the same name with the extension ``.orig'', or as specified by th... |
|
pathalias(1) -- electronic address router
|
|
pathalias computes the shortest paths and corresponding routes from one host (computer system) to all other known, reachable hosts. pathalias reads host-to-host connectivity information on standard input or in the named files, and writes a list of host-route pairs on the standard output. |
|
pathchk(1) -- check path names
|
|
The pathchk command checks that one or more path names are valid and portable. By default, the pathchk command checks each component of each path name specified by the pathname parameter based on the underlying file system. An error message is written for each path name operand that: + is longer than that allowed by the system. + contains any component longer than that allowed by the system. + con... |
|
pax(1) -- Extracts, writes, and lists archive files; copies files and directory hierarchies
|
|
The pax command extracts and writes member files of archive files; writes lists of the member files of archives; and copies directory hierarchies. The -r and -w flags specify the archive operation performed by the pax command. The pattern argument specifies a pattern that matches one or more paths of archive members. A \ (backslash) character is not recognized in the pattern argument and it preve... |
|
pcat(1) -- compress and expand files
|
|
pack attempts to store the specified files in a compressed form. Wherever possible, each input file name is replaced by a packed file name.z with the same ownership, modes, and access and modification times. The .z with the same ownership, modes, and access and modification times. The -f option forces packing of name. This is useful for causing an entire directory to be packed even if some of the ... |
|
pcnfsd(1m) -- PC-NFS authentication and print request server
|
|
pcnfsd is an RPC server that supports ONC clients on PC (DOS, OS/2, Macintosh, and other) systems. This describes version two of the pcnfsd server. pcnfsd can be started from the /sbin/init.d/nfs.server startup script by setting the PCNFS_SERVER variable to 1 in /etc/rc.config.d/nfsconf, or from the inetd daemon (see inetd(1M)). It reads the configuration file /etc/pcnfsd.conf, if present, and ser... |
|
pcserver(1m) -- Basic Serial and HP AdvanceLink server
|
|
pcserver is the hostside server program for Basic Serial and AdvanceLink, and is started and terminated by an application program running on a PC. pcserver supports both the Basic Serial and the AdvanceLink protocols. Basic Serial offers a library of routines that support a variety of services between a PC and a serially connected host computer, including file transfers and remote interprocess com... |
|
pdc(1m) -- processor-dependent code (firmware)
|
|
pdc is the firmware that implements all processor-dependent functionality, including initialization and self-test of the processor. Upon completion, it loads and transfers control to the initial system loader (isl(1M)). Firmware behavior varies somewhat, depending on the hardware series as described below. |
|
pdp11(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
pdweb(1m) -- start the HP-UX peripheral device tool (a Web interface)
|
|
The HP-UX Peripheral Device tool (pdweb) can be used to manage hot pluggable PCI slots on systems that support adding and replacing cards without rebooting. On all HP-UX systems, pdweb will display the devices and can be used to (re)create device files for a selected device. The pdweb command starts the user interface. Once started the help facility of pdweb is available and can be used to learn m... |
|
pfsd(1m) -- PFS daemon
|
|
pfsd starts the daemons that handle client filesystem requests. nservers is the number of file system server daemons to start. This number should be based on the load expected on this server. The load is defined by the number of mounted file systems. Mounts are distributed in a round-robin fashion to the pfsd daemons. It is recommended that the pfsd daemon be invoked by rc(1M). It must be invoked ... |
|
pfsd.rpc(1m) -- PFS daemon
|
|
pfsd starts the daemons that handle client filesystem requests. nservers is the number of file system server daemons to start. This number should be based on the load expected on this server. The load is defined by the number of mounted file systems. Mounts are distributed in a round-robin fashion to the pfsd daemons. It is recommended that the pfsd daemon be invoked by rc(1M). It must be invoked ... |
|
pfs_exportfs(1m) -- export and unexport directories to PFS clients
|
|
pfs_exportfs makes a local directory or filename available for mounting over the network by PFS clients. It is recommended that a command to invoke pfs_exportfs at boot time be added to rc(1M). pfs_exportfs uses information contained in the /etc/pfs_exports file to export pathname (which must be specified as a full pathname). The superuser can run pfs_exportfs at any time to alter the list or char... |
|
pfs_mount(1m) -- mount and unmount CD-ROM file systems
|
|
pfs_mount attaches a named filesystem to the file system hierarchy at the pathname location directory, which must already exist. If directory has any contents prior to the pfs_mount operation, these remain hidden until the filesystem is once again unmounted. If filesystem is of the form host:pathname, it is assumed to be a remote file system. In the case of a local mount, :pathname, it is assumed ... |
|
pfs_mountd(1m) -- PFS mount request server
|
|
This program is available with the Portable File System Package (PFS). pfs_mountd is an RPC server that answers file system mount requests. In the case of remote mount requests, it reads the file /etc/pfs_xtab, described in pfs_exports(5), to determine which file systems are available for mounting by which machines. It is recommended that the pfs_mountd daemon be invoked by rc(1M). It must be invo... |
|
pfs_mountd.rpc(1m) -- PFS mount request server
|
|
This program is available with the Portable File System Package (PFS). pfs_mountd is an RPC server that answers file system mount requests. In the case of remote mount requests, it reads the file /etc/pfs_xtab, described in pfs_exports(5), to determine which file systems are available for mounting by which machines. It is recommended that the pfs_mountd daemon be invoked by rc(1M). It must be invo... |
|
pfs_umount(1m) -- mount and unmount CD-ROM file systems
|
|
pfs_mount attaches a named filesystem to the file system hierarchy at the pathname location directory, which must already exist. If directory has any contents prior to the pfs_mount operation, these remain hidden until the filesystem is once again unmounted. If filesystem is of the form host:pathname, it is assumed to be a remote file system. In the case of a local mount, :pathname, it is assumed ... |
|
pg(1) -- file perusal filter for soft-copy terminals
|
|
pg is a text file filter that allows the examination of files one screenful at a time on a soft-copy terminal. If - is used as a file argument, or pg detects NULL arguments in the comand line, the standard input is used. Each screenful is followed by a prompt. To display a new page, press Return. Other possibilities are enumerated below. This command is different from other paginators such as more... |
|
ping(1m) -- send ICMP Echo Request packets to network host
|
|
The ping command sends ICMP Echo Request (ECHO_REQUEST) packets to the host once per second. Each packet that is echoed back via an ICMP Echo Response packet is written to the standard output, including round-trip time. ICMP Echo Request datagrams ("pings") have an IP and ICMP header, followed by a struct timeval (see gettimeofday(2)) and an arbitrary number of "pad" bytes used to fill out the... |
|
pipcrm(1) -- remove a POSIX message queue or a POSIX named semaphore
|
|
The pipcrm command removes one or more specified POSIX message queue or POSIX named semaphore. |
|
pipcs(1) -- report status of POSIX interprocess communication facilities
|
|
pipcs displays certain information on active POSIX interprocess communication facilities. When no options are specified, pipcs displays information in short format for the POSIX message queues and POSIX named semaphores that are currently active in the system. |
|
plotdvr(1) -- filters invoked by lp interface scripts
|
|
Various filters are used by the lp subsystem to obtain specialized behavior for specific types of devices or data. This entry describes currently supported filters. A number of these filters use a specified username and filename to determine the location of the user who originated the print message. The filename is used to determine the hostname of the system where the request originated, and must... |
|
portmap(1m) -- universal addresses to RPC program number mapper
|
|
rpcbind is a server that converts RPC program numbers into universal addresses. It must be running on the host to be able to make RPC calls on a server on that machine. When an RPC service is started, it tells rpcbind the address at which it is listening, and the RPC program numbers it is prepared to serve. When a client wishes to make an RPC call to a given program number, it first contacts rpcbi... |
|
power_onoff(1m) -- timed, automatic system power on, and power off
|
|
power_onoff instructs the UPS monitor (ups_mond) to shut down the system, and optionally informs the monitor when to power on the system again. The UPS monitor in turn instructs the uninterruptible power source (UPS) when to turn the power off and on. The UPS monitor then proceeds to shut down the system. The time to restart the system (power on) is specified with power_onoff command-line argument... |
|
ppl(1) -- PPP daemon
|
|
pppd is a daemon process used in UNIX systems to manage connections to other hosts using PPP (Point to Point Protocol) or SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol). It uses the UNIX host's native serial ports. It communicates with the UNIX kernel's own TCP/IP implementation via the HP IP tunnel driver. The functionality supplied by this daemon supersedes that provided by ppl(1) in HP-UX prior to Rele... |
|
ppp(1) -- PPP daemon
|
|
pppd is a daemon process used in UNIX systems to manage connections to other hosts using PPP (Point to Point Protocol) or SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol). It uses the UNIX host's native serial ports. It communicates with the UNIX kernel's own TCP/IP implementation via the HP IP tunnel driver. The functionality supplied by this daemon supersedes that provided by ppl(1) in HP-UX prior to Rele... |
|
pppd(1) -- PPP daemon
|
|
pppd is a daemon process used in UNIX systems to manage connections to other hosts using PPP (Point to Point Protocol) or SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol). It uses the UNIX host's native serial ports. It communicates with the UNIX kernel's own TCP/IP implementation via the HP IP tunnel driver. The functionality supplied by this daemon supersedes that provided by ppl(1) in HP-UX prior to Rele... |
|
pppoec(1) -- PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) client
|
|
pppoec discovers an access concentrator that is willing to offer services to the client. It obtains a unique session-id from the selected access concentrator. pppoec then forks a pppd daemon which performs the session phase functionalities of PPPoE as mentioned in RFC 2516. |
|
pppoerd(1m) -- PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) relay
|
|
You need the pppoerd daemon if the PPPoE client and the server are not on the same link. |
|
pppoesd(1m) -- PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) server daemon
|
|
pppoesd performs the server side discovery phase functionalities of PPPoE as mentioned in RFC 2516. The pppoesd daemon responds to PADI and PADR packets from clients if it can offer services desired by the client. pppoesd generates a unique session-id for every client that it services. It then forks a pppd daemon which performs the session phase functionalities of PPPoE as mentioned in RFC 2516. |
|
pr(1) -- print files
|
|
The pr command prints the named files on the standard output. If file is -, or if no files are specified, the standard input is assumed. By default, the listing is separated into pages, each headed by the page number, a date and time, and the name of the file. By default, columns are of equal width, separated by at least one space; lines that do not fit are truncated. If the -s option is used, lin... |
|
praliases(1) -- print system-wide sendmail aliases
|
|
praliases prints out the contents of the alias data base used by sendmail to resolve system-wide mail aliases. The alias data base is built with the command newaliases or /usr/sbin/sendmail -bi. See sendmail(1M). The options are: -C file Read the sendmail configuration file specified with this option instead of the default configuration file. -f Accesses the alias database built from file with the... |
|
prctmp(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
prdaily(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
prealloc(1) -- preallocate disk storage
|
|
prealloc preallocates at least size bytes of disk space for an ordinary file name, creating the file if name does not already exist. The space is allocated in an implementation-dependent fashion for fast sequential reads and writes of the file. prealloc fails and no disk space is allocated if name already exists and is not an ordinary file of zero length, if insufficient space is left on disk, or ... |
|
primes(1) -- factor a number, generate large primes
|
|
If no arguments are provided on the command line, factor waits for a number to be typed in. If a positive number is typed, it factors the number and print its prime factors; each one is printed the proper number of times. It then waits for another number. factor exits if it encounters a zero or any non-numeric character. If an argument is provided on the command line, factor factors the number as ... |
|
printenv(1) -- print out the environment
|
|
printenv prints out the values of the variables in the environment. If a name is specified, only its value is printed. |
|
printf(1) -- format and print arguments
|
|
printf writes formatted arguments to the standard output. The arg arguments are formatted under control of the format operand. format is a character string patterned after the formatting conventions of printf(3S), and contains the following types of objects: characters Characters that are not escape sequences or conversion specifications (as described below) are copied to standard output. escape s... |
|
printstat(1) -- filters invoked by lp interface scripts
|
|
Various filters are used by the lp subsystem to obtain specialized behavior for specific types of devices or data. This entry describes currently supported filters. A number of these filters use a specified username and filename to determine the location of the user who originated the print message. The filename is used to determine the hostname of the system where the request originated, and must... |
|
privatepw(1) -- Change WU-FTPD Group Access File Information
|
|
If a site supports the SITE GROUP and SITE GPASS commands, it is necessary to be able to add, delete and list enhanced access group information. The privatepw utility is used to update this information in the group access file (/etc/ftpd/ftpgroups). This is meant as an administrative tool and not to be run by the general user population. This command requires read/write permission to the appropria... |
|
prmail(1) -- print out mail in the incoming mailbox file
|
|
prmail prints the mail which waits for you or the specified user in the incoming mailbox file. The mailbox file is not disturbed. prmail is functionally similar to the command: cat /var/mail/mailfile mailfile | more or cat /var/mail/mailfile mailfile | pg depending upon the setting of the user's PAGER environment variable |
|
prof(1) -- display profile data
|
|
prof interprets a profile file produced by monitor() (see monitor(3C)). The symbol table in the object file prog (a.out by default) is read and correlated with a profile file (mon.out by default). For each external text symbol, the percentage of time spent executing between the address of that symbol and the address of the next is printed, together with the number of times that function was called... |
|
prs(1) -- print and summarize an SCCS file
|
|
The prs command prints, on the standard output, parts or all of an SCCS file (see sccsfile(4)) in a user-supplied format. If a directory is named, prs behaves as though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component of the path name does not begin with s.), and unreadable files are silently ignored. If a name of - is given, the standard input ... |
|
prtacct(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
ps(1) -- report process status
|
|
ps prints information about selected processes. Use options to specify which processes to select and what information to print about them. |
|
psrset(1m) -- create and manage processor sets
|
|
The psrset utility controls the management of processor sets. Processor sets allow a subset of processors in the system to be isolated for exclusive use by specified threads and processes. Processes may now be bound to groups of processors rather than just one. Each processor set represents a separate scheduling allocation Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 psrset(1M) p... |
|
ptr(1) -- termainl print utility
|
|
ptr is a printer utility which support two method -- First Method is LOG PRINT - display the file on the screen then print it out. Second Method is TRANSPARENT PRINT MODE - just print file and non-display. And terminal must be HP or VT mode terminal, printer must be ESC/P printer. |
|
ptx(1) -- permuted index
|
|
ptx generates the file output that can be processed with a text formatter to produce a permuted index of file input (standard input and output default). It has three phases: the first does the permutation, generating one line for each keyword in an input line. The keyword is rotated to the front. The permuted file is then sorted (see sort(1) and Environment Variables below). Finally, the sorted li... |
|
pty(1) -- get the name of the terminal
|
|
tty and pty print the path name of the user's terminal. The -s option inhibits printing of the terminal path name and any diagnostics, providing a means to test only the exit code. |
|
pvchange(1m) -- change characteristics and access path of physical volume in LVM volume group
|
|
The pvchange command changes the characteristics and access path of a physical volume (pv_path) in a volume group. For multiported devices accessed via multiple paths, pvchange may be used to customize the circumstances that may cause LVM to automatically switch from one path to another, or when LVM will switch back to a prior path which failed when it is available again (generally described as th... |
|
pvck(1m) -- check or repair a physical volume in LVM volume group
|
|
Note: Currently pvck is only capable of detecting bad checksums caused by a forward system migration after a backward system migration. It should not be used in other situations. The pvck command examines and repairs LVM data structures on a raw disk (pv_path) in a volume group. |
|
pvcreate(1m) -- create physical volume for use in LVM volume group
|
|
The pvcreate command initializes a direct access storage device (a raw disk device) for use as a physical volume in a volume group. If pv_path contains a file system and the -f option is not specified, pvcreate asks for confirmation. The request for confirmation avoids accidentally deleting a file system. Furthermore, when the -f option is not specified, the operation is denied if pv_path already ... |
|
pvdisplay(1m) -- display information about physical volumes within LVM volume group
|
|
The pvdisplay command displays information about each physical volume specified by a pv_path parameter. |
|
pvmove(1m) -- move allocated physical extents from one LVM physical volume to other physical volumes
|
|
The pvmove command moves allocated physical extents and the data they contain from a source physical volume, source_pv_path, to one or more other physical volumes in the same volume group. If a destination physical volume or physical volume group is not specified, all physical volumes in the volume group are available as destination volumes for the transfer. pvmove selects the proper physical volu... |
|
pvremove(1m) -- remove LVM data structure from a physical volume
|
|
The pvremove command clears the LVM data structure on a disk, so that it is no longer an LVM physical volume. The device may then be used by the file system or by other Volume Manager. The operation is denied if pv_path is assigned to a volume group. The pvremove command only clears the LVM data structure on a disk if the disk does not belong to a volume group. This avoids accidentally removing a ... |
|
pwck(1m) -- password/group file checkers
|
|
pwck scans fields in the password and shadow files and reports any inconsistencies to standard error. The checks include validation of the number of fields, login name, user ID, group ID, and whether the login directory and optional program exist. In addition, if the root entry shows a program, it can only be one of: /sbin/sh, /usr/bin/csh, /usr/bin/ksh, or /usr/bin/sh. The criteria for validation... |
|
pwconv(1m) -- install, update or check the /etc/shadow file
|
|
The pwconv command installs or appends /etc/shadow with information from /etc/passwd, or checks for any discrepancies between the contents of the two files. The pwconv command without options does the following: 1. Creates the file /etc/shadow if it does not exist; otherwise, it removes all entries for usernames that are not present in /etc/passwd. 2. For each entry in /etc/passwd, move the encryp... |
|
pwd(1) -- working directory name
|
|
pwd prints the path name of the working (current) directory. |
|
pwd_strengthd(1m) -- The sample Password Management Server
|
|
DESCRIPTION pwd_strengthd is a sample Password Management Server. It exports the rsec_pwd_mgmt application programming interface. pwd_strengthd generates passwords and strength-checks them. It enforces the security registry policy for password strength-checking. Administrators can override the security registry policy via the command-line options (alpha_num, all_spaces, min_len.) Administrators ca... |
|
pwget(1) -- get password and group information
|
|
pwget and grget locate and display information from /etc/passwd and /etc/group. The standard output of pwget contains lines of colon-separated password information whose format is the same as that used in the /etc/passwd file (see passwd(4)). The standard output of grget contains lines of colon-separated group information whose format is the same as that used in the /etc/group file (see group(4)).... |
|
pwgrd(1m) -- Password and Group Hashing and Caching daemon.
|
|
pwgrd provides accelerated lookup of password and group information for libc routines like getpwuid and getgrname. pwgrd implements per request type caches and hashtables as appropriate. When the corresponding routine in libc is called, a request is issued to pwgrd via a Unix domain socket connection. pwgrd determines whether it can satisfy the request, returning the appropriate results to the req... |
|
pwgr_stat(1m) -- Password and Group Hashing and Caching Statistics.
|
|
pwgr_stat displays the current status of the pwgrd daemon process running on the system. It includes whether or not the daemon is running, how much activity is occurring, as well as statistics for each kind of request serviced by pwgrd. Request specific statistics include the number of request and the percent of requests handled by the cache and the hashtables used to service that request. A reque... |
|
pwunconv(1m) -- convert passwords from shadow to nonshadow
|
|
The pwunconv command transfers the password and aging information for all users from /etc/shadow to /etc/passwd. The /etc/shadow file is removed. Some of the aging information may be lost during the conversion; the warn and expire fields are discarded, while min, max, and lstchg are rounded from days to weeks. |
|
quit(1m) -- Causes dtscp to complete execution
|
|
The quit command causes dtscp to complete execution and returns operation to the parent process. |
|
quot(1m) -- summarize file system ownership
|
|
The quot command displays the number of 1024-byte blocks in the named filesystem that are currently owned by each user. filesystem is either the name of the directory on which the file system is mounted or the name of the device containing the file system. |
|
quota(1) -- display disk usage and limits
|
|
The quota command displays the disk usage and limits for one or more users. Without the -v option, it displays information only when the usage exceeds the limits. user is a user name or a numeric UID. The default is the login user name. Only users with appropriate privileges can view the limits of other users. |
|
quotacheck(1m) -- file system quota consistency checker
|
|
The quotacheck command examines each file system, builds a table of current disk usage, and compares this table against that stored in the disk quota file for the file system. If any inconsistencies are detected, both the quota file and the current system copy of the incorrect quotas are updated. quotacheck expects each file system to be checked to have a file named quotas in the root directory. I... |
|
quotacheck_hfs(1m) -- quota consistency checker for HFS file systems
|
|
The quotacheck command examines each HFS file system, builds a table of current disk usage, and compares this table against that stored in the disk quota file for the file system. If any inconsistencies are detected, both the quota file and the current system copy of the incorrect quotas are updated. quotacheck expects each file system to be checked to have a file named quotas in the root director... |
|
quotacheck_vxfs(1m) -- VxFS file system quota consistency checker
|
|
Because VxFS maintains quota information in the kernel, quotacheck for VxFS synchronizes quotas from the current system copy to the disk quota file for the specified VxFS file system. quotacheck requires that each file system it checks has a file named quotas in the root directory. quotacheck is typically run at mount time from a start-up script. filesystem is a mount point or block special device... |
|
quotaoff(1m) -- turn HFS file system quotas on and off
|
|
The quotaon command enables quotas on one or more HFS file systems. The quotaoff command disables quotas on one or more HFS file systems. filesystem is either the name of the mount point of the file system, or the name of the block device containing the file system. The file systems specified must be currently mounted in order to turn quotas on or off. Also, the file system quota file, quotas, mus... |
|
quotaon(1m) -- turn HFS file system quotas on and off
|
|
The quotaon command enables quotas on one or more HFS file systems. The quotaoff command disables quotas on one or more HFS file systems. filesystem is either the name of the mount point of the file system, or the name of the block device containing the file system. The file systems specified must be currently mounted in order to turn quotas on or off. Also, the file system quota file, quotas, mus... |
|
quot_hfs(1m) -- summarize ownership on an HFS file system
|
|
The quot command displays the number of 1024-byte blocks in the named HFS filesystem that are currently owned by each user. filesystem is either the name of the directory on which the file system is mounted or the name of the device containing the file system. |
|
quot_vxfs(1m) -- summarize ownership on a VxFS file system
|
|
quot displays the number of 1024-byte blocks in the specified VxFS filesystem that are currently owned by each user. filesystem is either the name of the directory on which the file system is mounted or the name of the device containing the file system. |
|
rad(1m) -- rad features have been moved to olrad
|
|
rad has been replaced with a new olrad command which provides enhanced features for performing on-line addition and replacement of I/O cards. Please see the olrad(1M) manual page. |
|
ranlib(1) -- regenerate archive symbol table
|
|
ranlib regenerates the symbol tables of the specified archives. It is equivalent to executing ar qs archive on each of the archives. After using the z modifier of ar, the symbol table of an archive must be regenerated before it can be used. |
|
rarpc(1m) -- Reverse Address Resolution Protocol client
|
|
rarpc, the Reverse Address Resolution Protocol client, implements the client portion of the Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (see SEE ALSO). It sends RARP requests for the specified interface's hardware address and waits for the response from the RARP server. rarpc can be used during boot-time initialization to find the IP address of an interface. To do so, set the IP_ADDRESS[i] variable of in... |
|
rarpd(1m) -- Reverse Address Resolution Protocol daemon
|
|
rarpd, the Reverse Address Resolution Protocol daemon, implements the server portion of the Reverse Address Resolution Protocol [1]. It responds to RARP requests providing the requested client IP address. Rarpd can be started during boot-time initialization. To do so, set the RARPD variable with RARPD=1 in /etc/rc.config.d/netconf. Options are: -d Print debugging information. -f config_file Use th... |
|
rc(1m) -- general purpose sequencer invoked upon entering new run level
|
|
The rc shell script is the general sequencer invoked upon entering a new run level via the init N command (where N equals 0-6). The script /sbin/rc is typically invoked by the corresponding entry in the file /etc/inittab as follows: sqnc:123456:wait:/sbin/rc /dev/console 2>&1 /sbin/rc is the startup and shutdown sequencer script. There is only one sequencer script and it handles all... |
|
rcancel(1m) -- remove requests from a remote printer spooling queue
|
|
The rcancel command removes a request, or requests, from the spool queue of a remote printer. rcancel is invoked by the cancel command (see lp(1)). At least one id or the name of a printer must be specified. This command is intended to be used only by the spool system in response to the cancel command (see lp(1)), and should not be invoked directly. |
|
rcp(1) -- remote file copy
|
|
The rcp command copies files, directory subtrees, or a combination of files and directory subtrees from one or more systems to another. In many respects, it is similar to the cp command (see cp(1)). To use rcp, you must have read access to files being copied, and read and search (execute) permission on all directories in the directory path. Note that there are special requirements for third-party ... |
|
rcs(1) -- change RCS file attributes
|
|
rcs creates new RCS files or changes attributes of existing ones. An RCS file contains multiple revisions of text, an access list, a change log, descriptive text, and some control attributes. For rcs to work, the user's login name must be on the access list, except if the access list is empty, if the user is the owner of the file or the superuser, or if the -i option is present. The user of the c... |
|
rcsdiff(1) -- compareRCS revisions
|
|
rcsdiff compares two revisions of each given RCS file and creates output very similar to diff (see diff(1)). A file name ending in ,v is an RCS file name, otherwise it is a working file name. rcsdiff derives the working file name from the RCS file name and vice versa, as explained in rcsintro(5). Pairs consisting of both an RCS and a working file name can also be specified. rcsdiff recognizes the ... |
|
rcsmerge(1) -- merge RCS revisions
|
|
rcsmerge incorporates the changes between rev1 and rev2 of an RCS file into the corresponding working file. If -p is given, the result is printed on the standard output; otherwise the result overwrites the working file. A file name ending in ,v is an RCS file name; otherwise it is a working file name. rcsmerge derives the working file name from the RCS file name and vice versa, as explained in rcs... |
|
rdist(1) -- remote file distribution program
|
|
rdist facilitates the maintaining of identical copies of files over multiple hosts. It preserves the owner, group, mode, and modification time of files if possible and can update programs that are executing. -f distfile Specify a distfile for rdist to execute. distfile contains a sequence of entries that specify the files to be copied, the destination hosts, and what operations to perform to do th... |
|
rdpd(1m) -- router discovery protocol daemon (OBSOLETE)
|
|
rdpd, the router discover protocol daemon, implements the host portion of the router discovery protocol (see SEE ALSO). More specifically rdpd: + solicits router advertisements when it is first started so as to populate the kernel table as soon as possible. + listens on all ethernet interfaces (that are up) for ICMP router advertisement datagrams. + adds a default router to the kernel table based ... |
|
rdump(1m) -- incremental file system dump, local or across network
|
|
The dump and rdump commands copy to magnetic tape all files in the filesystem that have been changed after a certain date. This information is derived from the files /var/adm/dumpdates and /etc/fstab. option specifies the date and other options about the dump. option consists of characters from the set 0123456789bdfnsuWw. The dump and rdump commands work only on file systems of type hfs. If the gi... |
|
read(1) -- read a line from standard input
|
|
read reads a single line from standard input. The line is split into fields as when processed by the shell (refer to shells in SEE ALSO); the first field is assigned to the first variable var, the second field to the second variable var, and so forth. If there are more fields than there are specified var operands, the remaining fields and their intervening separators are assigned to the last var. ... |
|
readmail(1) -- read mail from a mail folder or incoming mailbox
|
|
The readmail program displays messages from your incoming mailbox or a specified mail folder. Within the elm mail system (see elm(1) with no operands and optionally the -h or -n option, readmail displays the appropriate headers and the body of the current message. With the number-list operand and no options, readmail displays the corresponding messages and a summary of the headers from your incomi... |
|
reboot(1m) -- reboot the system
|
|
The reboot command terminates all currently executing processes except those essential to the system, then reboots the system, or halts, or makes the partition ready for reconfiguration. When invoked without arguments, reboot syncs all disks before rebooting the system. |
|
recserv(1m) -- HP SharedX Receiver Service
|
|
HP SharedX Receiver Service provides a method for a receiver to allow the sharing of windows without explicitly performing any xhost commands. The Internet daemon (inetd(1M)) executes recserv when it receives a service request at the port listed in the services data base for recserv (see inetd(1m) and services(4)). When recserv is executed via inetd, a dialog box appears informing the receiver of ... |
|
red(1) -- line-oriented text editor
|
|
The ed command executes a line-oriented text editor. It is most commonly used in scripts and noninteractive editing applications because, even though it can be used interactively, other editors such as vi and ex are typically easier to use in an interactive environment. If file is specified, ed performs an e command (see below) on the named file; that is to say, the file is read into ed's buffer ... |
|
reject(1m) -- allow/prevent LP destination queuing requests
|
|
The accept command permits the lp command (see lp(1)) to accept printing requests for each named LP printer or printer class destination queue. The reject command causes the lp command to reject subsequent printing requests for each named destination queue. Requests already queued will continue to be processed for printing by the lpsched scheduler (see lpsched(1M)). Use the lpstat command (see lps... |
|
remove_directory(1m) -- attribute (including application-defined attributes) of a directory
|
|
The remove directory command removes a value from a set-valued or single-valued attribute (including application-defined attributes) of a directory. If you do not specify a value, the command removes the entire attribute. This command can delete attributes created by the add directory and set directory commands. Usually this task is performed through the client application. See the OSF DCE Adminis... |
|
remove_link(1m) -- Removes a soft link's timeout value attribute
|
|
The remove link command removes a soft link's timeout value attribute, CDS_LinkTimeout, causing the soft link to become permanent. |
|
remove_object(1m) -- attribute (including application-defined attributes) of an object entry
|
|
The remove object command removes a value from a set-valued or single-valued attribute (including application-defined attributes) of an object entry. If you do not specify a value, the command removes the entire attribute. This command can delete attributes created by the add object and set object commands. Usually, this task is performed through the client application. See the OSF DCE Administrat... |
|
remsh(1) -- execute from a remote shell
|
|
remsh connects to a specified host and executes a specified command. The host name can be either the official name or an alias as understood by gethostbyname() (see gethostent(3N) and hosts(4)). remsh copies its standard input (stdin) to the remote command, the standard output of the remote command to its standard output (stdout), and the standard error of the remote command to its standard error ... |
|
remshd(1m) -- remote shell server
|
|
The remshd command is the server for the rcp, rdist and remsh commands, rcmd() and the rcmd_af() function in case of IPv6 systems (see rcp(1), rdist(1), remsh(1), rcmd(3N)), and rcmd_af(3N). remshd allows two kinds of authentication methods: 1. Authentication based on privileged port numbers where the client's source port must be in the range 512 through 1023. In this case remshd assumes it is op... |
|
renice(1m) -- alter priority of running processes
|
|
The renice command alters the system nice value (used in the system scheduling priority) of one or more running processes specified by id .... The new system nice value is set to 20 + newoffset, and is limited to the range 0 to 39. However if the UNIX95 environment variable is set, the new system nice value is set to current nice value + newoffset. Processes with lower system nice values run at hi... |
|
repquota(1m) -- summarize file system quotas
|
|
The repquota command prints a summary of disk usage and quotas for each specified filesystem. filesystem is either the name of the directory on which the file system is mounted or the name of the device containing the file system. For each user, the current number of files and amount of space (in Kbytes) is printed, along with any quotas created with edquota (see edquota(1M)). |
|
reset(1) -- terminal-dependent initialization
|
|
tset sets up the terminal when logging in on an HP-UX system. It does terminal-dependent processing, such as setting erase and kill characters, setting or resetting delays, and sending any sequences needed to properly initialize the terminal. It first determines the type of terminal involved, then does the necessary initializations and mode settings. The type of terminal attached to each HP-UX por... |
|
resize(1) -- set TERMCAP and terminal settings to current xterm window size
|
|
Resize prints a shell command for setting the TERM and TERMCAP environment variables to indicate the current size of xterm window from which the command is run. For this output to take effect, resize must either be evaluated as part of the command line (usually done with a shell alias or function) or else redirected to a file which can then be read in. From the C shell (usually known as /bin/csh),... |
|
restore(1m) -- restore file system incrementally, local or across network
|
|
The restore and rrestore commands read tapes previously dumped by the dump or rdump command (see dum ). Actions taken are controlled by the key argument where key is a string of characters containing not more than one function letter and possibly one or more function modifiers. One or more name arguments, if present, are file or directory names specifying the files that are to be restored. Unless ... |
|
rev(1) -- reverse lines of a file
|
|
rev copies the named files to the standard output, reversing the order of characters in every line. If no file is specified, the standard input is copied. |
|
reverse(1) -- filters invoked by lp interface scripts
|
|
Various filters are used by the lp subsystem to obtain specialized behavior for specific types of devices or data. This entry describes currently supported filters. A number of these filters use a specified username and filename to determine the location of the user who originated the print message. The filename is used to determine the hostname of the system where the request originated, and must... |
|
rexd(1m) -- RPC-based remote execution server
|
|
rexd is the RPC server for remote command execution. A rexd is started by inetd when a remote execution request is received (see inetd(1M)). rexd exits when command execution has completed. If the user ID (uid) in the remote execution request is assigned to a user on the server, rexd executes the command as that user. If no user on the server is assigned to the uid, rexd does not execute the comma... |
|
rexec(1) -- execute from a remote shell
|
|
remsh connects to a specified host and executes a specified command. The host name can be either the official name or an alias as understood by gethostbyname() (see gethostent(3N) and hosts(4)). remsh copies its standard input (stdin) to the remote command, the standard output of the remote command to its standard output (stdout), and the standard error of the remote command to its standard error ... |
|
rexecd(1m) -- remote execution server
|
|
rexecd is the server for the rexec() routine, and the rexec_af() routine in case of IPv6 systems; it expects to be started by the internet daemon (see inetd(1M)). rexecd provides remote execution facilities with authentication based on user account names and unencrypted passwords. inetd(1M) calls rexecd when a service request is received at the port indicated for the ``exec'' service specificati... |
|
rgb(1) -- X Window System color database creator.
|
|
rgb creates a data base used by the X window system server for its colors. Stdin is used as its input and must be in the format of: 0-255 0-255 0-255 colorname For example: 0 0 0 black 0 128 0 green 255 255 255 white rgb stands for red-green-blue. Each element can have no intensity (0) to full intensity (255). How the elements are combined determines the actual color. The name given to the color c... |
|
rgy_edit(1m) -- Edits the registry database
|
|
The rgy_edit tool views and edits information in the registry database. You can invoke rgy_edit from any node. You can edit and view principals, groups, organization, accounts, and policies in the network registry (the default) or perform a subset of those functions on the local registry (using the -l option). Changes made by rgy_edit apply only to the registry. They do not apply to the local over... |
|
ripquery(1m) -- query RIP gateways
|
|
ripquery is used to request all routes known by a RIP gateway by sending a RIP request or POLL command. The routing information in any routing packets returned is displayed numerically and symbolically. ripquery is intended to be used as a tool for debugging gateways, not for network management. SNMP is the preferred protocol for network management. ripquery by default uses the RIP POLL command, w... |
|
rksh(1) -- shell, the standard/restricted command programming language
|
|
ksh is a command programming language that executes commands read from a terminal or a file. rksh is a restricted version of the command interpreter ksh, used to set up login names and execution environments whose capabilities are more controlled than those of the standard shell. See Invoking ksh and Special Commands sections later in this entry for details about command line options and arguments... |
|
rlog(1) -- print log messages and other information on RCS files
|
|
rlog prints information about RCS files. Files ending in ,v are RCS files; all others are working files. If a working file is given, rlog tries to find the corresponding RCS file first in directory ./RCS, then in the current directory, as explained in rcsintro(5). rlog prints the following information for each RCS file: RCS file name, working file name, head (i.e., the number of the latest revisio... |
|
rlogin(1) -- remote login
|
|
The rlogin command connects your terminal on the local host to the remote host (rhost). rlogin acts as a virtual terminal to the remote system. The host name rhost can be either the official name or an alias as listed in the file /etc/hosts (see hosts(4)). In non-secure or traditional environment, rlogin allows a user to log in on an equivalent remote host, rhost, bypassing the normal login/passwo... |
|
rlogind(1m) -- remote login server
|
|
rlogind is the server for the rlogin(1) program. It provides a remote login facility with two kinds of authentication methods: 1. Authentication based on privileged port numbers where the client's source port must be in the range 512 through 1023. In this case rlogind assumes it is operating in normal or non-secure environment. 2. Authentication based on Kerberos V5. In this case rlogind assumes ... |
|
rlp(1m) -- send LP print request to a remote system
|
|
rlp transfers a spooling request to a remote system to be printed. rlp communicates with a spooling daemon on a remote system to transfer the spooling request. Options can be set only on the original system (the system where the request originated). The file name must be last. Transfers of a remote request use only the -I option and the file. This command is intended to be used only by the spool s... |
|
rlpdaemon(1m) -- daemon for queuing, displaying, removing and altering remote spool requests and writing remote messages
|
|
rlpdaemon is a LP daemon (spool area handler) for remote spool requests. rlpdaemon is normally invoked at boot time from the /sbin/rc file or started by inetd(1M), when necessary. rlpdaemon runs on a system that receives requests to be printed. rlpdaemon transfers files to the spooling area, displays the queue, removes jobs from the queue, or alters jobs in the queue. rlpdaemon is also used as a s... |
|
rlpstat(1m) -- print status of LP spooler requests on a remote system
|
|
rlpstat reports the status of the specified jobs or all requests associated with the specified users on the specified printer. At least one id or the name of a printer must be specified. For each request submitted (by lp command - see lp(1)) rlpstat reports the request ID, user's name, total size of the request, date of the request, and, if it is being transferred, the device. This command is int... |
|
rm(1) -- remove files or directories
|
|
The rm command removes the entries for one or more files from a directory. If an entry was the last link to the file, the file is destroyed. Removal of a file requires write and search (execute) permission in its directory, but no permissions on the file itself. However, if the sticky bit is set on the directory containing the file, only the owner of the file, the owner of the directory, or a user... |
|
rmail(1) -- send mail to users or read mail
|
|
The mail command, when used without arguments, prints the user's mail, message-by-message, in last-in, first-out order. For each message, mail prints a ? prompt and reads a line from the standard input to determine the disposition of the message. Commands that automatically proceed to the next message exit from mail if mail already on the last message. |
|
rmboot(1m) -- install, update or remove boot programs from disk
|
|
mkboot is used to install or update boot programs on the specified device file. The position on device at which boot programs are installed depends on the disk layout of the device. mkboot examines device to discover the current layout and uses this as the default. If the disk is uninitialized, the default is LVM layout on PA-RISC and Whole Disk on Itanium(R)-based systems. The default can be over... |
|
rmdel(1) -- remove a delta from an SCCS file
|
|
The rmdel command removes the delta specified by the SID from each named SCCS file. The delta to be removed must be the newest (most recent) delta in its branch in the delta chain of each named SCCS file. In addition, the SID specified must not be that of a version being edited for the purpose of making a delta (i.e., if a p-file (see get(1)) exists for the named SCCS file, the SID specified must ... |
|
rmdir(1) -- remove directories
|
|
rmdir removes the directory entry for each dir operand that refers to an empty directory. Directories are removed in the order specified. Consequently, if a directory and a subdirectory of that directory are both specified as arguments, the subdirectory must be specified before the parent directory so that the parent directory will be empty when rmdir tries to remove it. Removal of a directory req... |
|
rmnl(1) -- remove extra new-line characters from file
|
|
rmnl removes all blank lines from a file (except at beginning of file as explained below), and is useful for removing excess white space from files for display on a CRT terminal. Groups of two or more successive \n (new-line) characters are reduced to a single \n character, effectively eliminating all blank lines in the file except that one or more blank lines at the beginning of a file remain a... |
|
rmsf(1m) -- remove a special (device) file
|
|
The rmsf command removes one or more special files from the /dev directory and potentially removes information about the associated device or devices with H/W type "DEVICE" (see ioscan(1M)) from the system. If no options are specified, rmsf removes only the special_files specified on the command line. The -k option causes rmsf to remove the definition of the device from the system without removi... |
|
rmt(1m) -- remote magnetic-tape protocol module
|
|
rmt is a program used by the remote dump and restore programs for manipulating a magnetic tape drive through an interprocess communication (IPC) connection. The fbackup and frecover commands also use rmt to achieve remote backup capability (see fbackup(1M) and frecover(1M)). rmt is normally started up with an rexec() or rcmd() call (see rexec(3N) and rcmd(3N)). rmt accepts requests specific to the... |
|
rndc(1) -- name server control utility
|
|
This command allows the system administrator to control the operation of a name server. If rndc is invoked without any command line options or arguments, it prints a short summary of the supported commands and the available options and their arguments. rndc communicates with the name server over a TCP connection, sending commands authenticated with digital signatures. In the current versions of rn... |
|
rndc-confgen(1) -- rndc key generation tool
|
|
rndc-confgen can be used to generate rndc.conf, the configuration file for rndc. Alternatively, it can be run with the -a option to set up a rndc.key file and avoid the need for a rndc.conf file and a controls statement altogether. |
|
route(1m) -- manually manipulate the routing tables
|
|
The route command manipulates the network routing tables manually. You must have appropriate privileges. |
|
rpc.lockd(1m) -- network lock daemon
|
|
lockd is an RPC server that processes NFS file locking requests from the local kernel or from another remote lock daemon. lockd forwards lock requests for remote data to the server site's lock daemon through the RPC/XDR package (see rpc(3N)). lockd then requests the status monitor daemon, statd for monitor service (see statd(1M)). The reply to the lock request is not sent to the kernel until the ... |
|
rpc.mountd(1m) -- NFS mount request server
|
|
mountd is an RPC server that answers file system mount requests. It reads file /etc/xtab (described in exports(4)) to determine which directories are available to which machines. It also provides information on what file systems are mounted by which clients. This information can be printed using the showmount command (see showmount(1M)). rpc.mountd can be started at boot time by setting the variab... |
|
rpc.nisd(1m) -- NIS+ service daemon
|
|
The rpc.nisd daemon is an RPC service that implements the NIS+ service. This daemon must be running on all machines that serve a portion of the NIS+ namespace. rpc.nisd is usually started from a system startup script. rpc.nisd_resolv is an auxillary process that is started by rpc.nisd when it is invoked with -B option. Note that rpc.nisd_resolv should not be started independently. |
|
rpc.nisd_resolv(1m) -- NIS+ service daemon
|
|
The rpc.nisd daemon is an RPC service that implements the NIS+ service. This daemon must be running on all machines that serve a portion of the NIS+ namespace. rpc.nisd is usually started from a system startup script. rpc.nisd_resolv is an auxillary process that is started by rpc.nisd when it is invoked with -B option. Note that rpc.nisd_resolv should not be started independently. |
|
rpc.nispasswdd(1m) -- NIS+ password update daemon
|
|
rpc.nispasswdd daemon is an ONC+ RPC service that services password update requests from nispassw . It updates password entries in the NIS+ passwd table. rpc.nispasswdd is normally started from a system startup script after the NIS+ server (rpc.nisd(1M)) has been started. rpc.nispasswdd will determine whether it is running on a machine that is a master server for one or more NIS+ directories. If i... |
|
rpc.pcnfsd(1m) -- PC-NFS authentication and print request server
|
|
pcnfsd is an RPC server that supports ONC clients on PC (DOS, OS/2, Macintosh, and other) systems. This describes version two of the pcnfsd server. pcnfsd can be started from the /sbin/init.d/nfs.server startup script by setting the PCNFS_SERVER variable to 1 in /etc/rc.config.d/nfsconf, or from the inetd daemon (see inetd(1M)). It reads the configuration file /etc/pcnfsd.conf, if present, and ser... |
|
rpc.statd(1m) -- network status monitor
|
|
statd is an RPC server. It interacts with lockd to provide crash and recovery functions for the locking services on NFS (see lockd(1M)). |
|
rpc.ypupdated(1m) -- server for changing NIS information
|
|
ypupdated is a daemon that updates information in the Network Information Service (NIS) databases. It is activated at system startup when the NIS_MASTER_SERVER variable is set to 1 in /etc/rc.config.d/namesvrs file on the NIS master server. ypupdated consults the file updaters in the directory /var/yp to determine which NIS maps should be updated and how to change them. By default, the daemon requ... |
|
rpcbind(1m) -- universal addresses to RPC program number mapper
|
|
rpcbind is a server that converts RPC program numbers into universal addresses. It must be running on the host to be able to make RPC calls on a server on that machine. When an RPC service is started, it tells rpcbind the address at which it is listening, and the RPC program numbers it is prepared to serve. When a client wishes to make an RPC call to a given program number, it first contacts rpcbi... |
|
rpccp(1m) -- Starts the RPC control program
|
|
Hewlett-Packard Company - 2 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 rpccp(1m) Open Software Foundation rpccp(1m) The RPC control program (RPCCP) provides a set of commands for managing name service use for RPC applications and for managing the endpoint map. You can use control program commands from within the control program or from the system prompt (represented here as a $). To use the control prog... |
|
rpccp_add_element(1m) -- Adds an element to a profile in a name service entry; if the specified entry does not exist, creates the entry
|
|
The add element command adds an element to a profile in a name service entry. The name of the entry containing the profile and the entry name of the profile member in the new element are required. The entry of a profile may have been created previously (by either the add entry or add element command). But, if the specified entry does not exist, the add element command tries to create the entry. A ... |
|
rpccp_add_entry(1m) -- Adds a name service entry to the name service database
|
|
The add entry command adds an unspecialized entry to the name service database. The name of the entry is required. The new entry initially contains no NSI attributes. This command creates a general name service entry for an application or user. The application or user can later use the export, add element, and add member commands to make the generic entry into a server entry, a group, or a profile... |
|
rpccp_add_mapping(1m) -- Adds or replaces server address information in the local endpoint map
|
|
The add mapping command adds to, replaces, or adds server address information to the local endpoint map. Each element in the local endpoint map logically contains the following: + Interface ID, consisting of an interface UUID and versions (major and minor) + Binding information + Object UUID (optional) + Annotation (optional) This command should be used without the -N option when only a single ins... |
|
rpccp_add_member(1m) -- Adds a member to a group in a name service entry; if the specified entry does not exist, creates the entry
|
|
The add member command adds a member to a group in a name service entry. The name of the entry containing the group and the name of the new group member are required. The entry of a group may have been created previously (by either the add entry or add member command). If the specified entry does not exist, the add member command tries to create the entry. |
|
rpccp_export(1m) -- Exports binding information for an interface identifier or object UUIDs or both to a server entry; if the spec
|
|
The export command places binding information and an interface identifier, object UUIDs, or both into a server entry, or the command object UUIDs into a group's entry. The export command searches the name service database for the entry with the specified entry name. If the entry exists, the command uses it; otherwise, the command tries to create a new name service entry using the specified entry ... |
|
rpccp_help(1m) -- Displays a list of commands or the options of a specified command
|
|
The help command displays information about the RPCCP command set or the options and argument associated with a specific command. |
|
rpccp_import(1m) -- Imports binding information and an object UUID from a server entry
|
|
The import command imports binding information and an RPC object UUID for a specific RPC interface from a server entry. The name of the entry and the interface identifier are required. The entry name can refer to a server entry, a group, or a profile. |
|
rpccp_remove_element(1m) -- Removes selected elements from a profile
|
|
The remove element command removes an element from a profile in the name service database. For a description of the fields in a profile element, see add entry(1m). The remove element command requires the entry name of the profile. The command also requires one of the following options: -d The default profile option takes precedence over the other two options. -i interface-id -m member-name An inte... |
|
rpccp_remove_entry(1m) -- Removes a name service entry from the name service database
|
|
The remove entry command removes an entry from the name service database. The name of the entry is required. |
|
rpccp_remove_group(1m) -- Removes all group members and the group from the specified name service entry
|
|
The remove group command removes a group from the name service database. The group need not be empty. The entry name of the group is required. |
|
rpccp_remove_mapping(1m) -- Removes specified elements from the local endpoint map
|
|
The remove mapping command removes server address information from the local endpoint map. Each element in the local endpoint map logically Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 remove mapping(1m) Open Software Foundation remove mapping(1m) contains the following: + Interface ID, consisting of an interface UUID and versions (major and minor) + Binding information + Objec... |
|
rpccp_remove_member(1m) -- Removes a specified member from a group
|
|
The remove member command removes a specified member from a specified group. |
|
rpccp_remove_profile(1m) -- Removes all profile elements and the profile from the specified name service entry
|
|
The remove profile command removes a profile (and all of its elements) from the name service database. The entry name of the profile is required. |
|
rpccp_show_entry(1m) -- Shows the NSI attributes of a name service entry
|
|
The show entry command shows the NSI attributes of a name service entry. The name of the entry is required. Note that this operation shows all of the compatible bindings for a given interface. The show entry command shows the same list of string bindings as the import operation returns for the specified entry. This list includes all string bindings that refer to a major version that matches the sp... |
|
rpccp_show_group(1m) -- Shows the members of a group
|
|
The show group command shows the members of a group in the name service database. The entry name of the group is required. Unless it is limited to a specific member (by the -m option), the show group command shows all members. The command shows only the members in the specified group; the -r option enables you to show members of nested groups. |
|
rpccp_show_mapping(1m) -- Shows the elements of the either the local or a remote endpoint map
|
|
The show mapping command shows elements of an endpoint map. Each element corresponds to an object UUID, interface identifier, annotation, and binding information. The binding information contains an RPC protocol sequence, a network address, and an endpoint within square brackets (rpc- prot-seq:network-addr[endpoint]). The endpoint map can be either the local endpoint map or the endpoint map of a s... |
|
rpccp_show_profile(1m) -- Shows the elements of a profile
|
|
The show profile command shows the elements of a profile in the name service database. The entry name of the profile is required. By default, all elements in the profile are shown. You can select a subset of the elements by specifying the -a, -i, or -m options. The -r option enables you to show nested profiles. |
|
rpccp_show_server(1m) -- Shows the binding information, interface identifiers, and object UUIDs in a server entry
|
|
The show server command shows the RPC binding information, interface identifiers, and object UUIDs in a server entry. The entry name of the server entry is required. This operation shows all of the potential bindings for an interface. By default, this command displays bindings for the specified version of the interface and for upwardly compatible versions of the interface. The -v option controls w... |
|
rpccp_unexport(1m) -- Removes binding information, interface identifiers, and object UUIDs from a server entry
|
|
The unexport command removes binding information and an interface identifier, object UUIDs, or both from a server entry, or it removes Hewlett-Packard Company - 2 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 unexport(1m) Open Software Foundation unexport(1m) object UUIDs from a group's entry. The command requires the entry name and either the interface identifier or one or more object UUIDs. By default, ... |
|
rpcd(1m) -- DCE Host daemon
|
|
The DCE Host daemon is a process that provides services for the local host, and is also the server used by remote applications to access these host services. The daemon can be invoked either as dced or as rpcd. When invoked as dced, it provides by default all of the services described below, and it requires that the local host be configured into a DCE cell. When invoked as rpcd, it provides only t... |
|
rpcgen(1) -- an RPC protocol compiler
|
|
rpcgen is a tool that generates C code to implement an RPC protocol. The input to rpcgen is a language similar to C known as RPC Language (Remote Procedure Call Language). rpcgen is normally used as in the first synopsis where it takes an input file and generates three output files. If the infile is named proto.x, then rpcgen generates a header in proto.h, XDR routines in proto_xdr.c, server-side ... |
|
rpcinfo(1m) -- report RPC information
|
|
rpcinfo makes an RPC call to an RPC server and reports what it finds. In the first synopsis, rpcinfo lists all the registered RPC services with rpcbind on host. If host is not specified, the local host is the default. If -s is used, the information is displayed in a concise format. In the second synopsis, rpcinfo lists all the RPC services registered with rpcbind, version 2. Also note that the for... |
|
rpc_intro(1m) -- Introduction to DCE RPC daemon and RPC control program commands
|
|
DCE RPC provides two administrative facilities, the RPC daemon and the RPC control program. Note: These facilities are superceded by the DCE Host daemon (dced) and the DCE control program (dcecp) for OSF DCE version 1.1. + The RPC daemon is a process that provides the Endpoint Map Service, which maintains the local endpoint map for local RPC servers and looks up endpoints for RPC clients. An endpo... |
|
rpc_intro(1) -- Introduction to the DCE RPC programmer commands
|
|
DCE RPC provides the following programmer commands: + The idl command invokes the Interface Definition Language (IDL) compiler to convert an interface definition, written in IDL, to output files. + The uuidgen command creates a UUID string that you assign to an object to uniquely distinguish it from other objects. See each command's reference page for further information. |
|
rquotad(1m) -- remote quota server
|
|
rquotad is an RPC server that returns quotas for a user of a local file system currently mounted by a remote machine by means of NFS (see rpc(3N)). The results are used by quota to display user quotas for remote file systems (see quota(1)). rquotad is normally invoked by inetd (see inetd(1M)). |
|
rrestore(1m) -- restore file system incrementally, local or across network
|
|
The restore and rrestore commands read tapes previously dumped by the dump or rdump command (see dum ). Actions taken are controlled by the key argument where key is a string of characters containing not more than one function letter and possibly one or more function modifiers. One or more name arguments, if present, are file or directory names specifying the files that are to be restored. Unless ... |
|
rstatd(1m) -- kernel statistics server
|
|
rstatd is an RPC server that returns performance statistics obtained from the kernel. The rup utility prints this information (see rup(1)). inetd invokes rstatd through /etc/inetd.conf (see inetd(1M)). |
|
rtprio(1) -- execute process with real-time priority
|
|
rtprio executes command with a real-time priority, or changes the real-time priority of currently executing process pid. Real-time priorities range from zero (highest) to 127 (lowest). Real-time processes are not subject to priority degradation, and are all of greater (scheduling) importance than non-real-time processes. See rtprio(2) for more details. If -t is specified instead of a real-time pri... |
|
rtradvd(1m) -- Router Advertisement daemon for IPv6
|
|
rtradvd, the router advertisement daemon for IPv6, implements router functionality as specified by RFC 2461 ("Neighbor Discovery for IP Version 6"). The daemon listens to router solicitation and sends router advertisement messages on demand and periodically as described in "Neighbor Discovery for IP Version 6". These advertisements allow any listening host to configure their addresses and some... |
|
rtsched(1) -- execute process with real-time priority
|
|
Rtsched executes command with POSIX or HP-UX real-time priority, or changes the real-time priority of currently executing process pid. All POSIX real-time priority processes are of greater scheduling importance than processes with HP-UX real-time or HP-UX timeshare priority. All HP-UX real-time priority processes are of greater scheduling importance than HP-UX timeshare priority processes, but are... |
|
runacct(1m) -- run daily accounting
|
|
runacct is the main daily accounting shell procedure. It is normally initiated via cron(1M). runacct processes connect, fee, disk, and process accounting files. It also prepares summary files for prdaily or billing purposes. runacct takes care not to damage active accounting files or summary files in the event of errors. It records its progress by writing descriptive diagnostic messages into activ... |
|
rup(1) -- show host status of local machines (RPC version)
|
|
rup gives a status similar to uptime for remote machines. It broadcasts on the local network and displays the responses it receives. Though the listing is normally in the order responses are received, the order can be changed by using command-line options. The broadcast process takes about two minutes. When host arguments are given, instead of broadcasting, rup only queries the list of specified h... |
|
ruptime(1) -- show status of local machines
|
|
ruptime outputs a status line for each machine on the local network that is running the rwho daemon. ruptime's status lines are formed from packets broadcast once every 3 minutes between rwho daemons (see rwhod(1M)) on each host on the network. Each status line has a field for the name of the machine, the status of the machine (up or down), how long the machine has been up or down, the number of ... |
|
rusers(1) -- determine who is logged in on machines on local network
|
|
rusers produces output similar to the "quick" option of who(1), but for remote machines. It broadcasts on the local network and prints the responses it receives. Though the listing is normally in the order that responses are received, the order can be changed by specifying a command-line option. The broadcast process takes about two minutes. When host arguments are given, instead of broadcasting... |
|
rusersd(1m) -- network username server
|
|
rusersd is an RPC server that returns a list of users on the network. The rusers command prints this information (see rusers(1)). inetd invokes rusersd through /etc/inetd.conf (see inetd(1M)). |
|
rvxdump(1m) -- incremental VxFS file system dump, local or across network
|
|
vxdump copies to magnetic tape all files in the vxfs filesystem that have been changed after a certain date. This information is derived from the files /etc/fstab and a timestamp file, by default /etc/dumpdates. rvxdump copies the files to a tape drive on a remote system. rvxdump runs a process, /usr/sbin/rmt, on the remote machine to access the tape device. vxdump and rvxdump support both getopt(... |
|
rvxrestore(1m) -- restore file system incrementally, local or across network
|
|
vxrestore and rvxrestore read tapes previously dumped by the vxdump or rvxdump command (see vxdump(1M)). vxrestore restores from tape on the local system; rvxrestore restores from tape on a remote system. rvxrestore runs /usr/sbin/rmt on the remote machine to access the tape device. vxrestore and rvxrestore support both getopt(3C) and traditional restore command line invocations as shown above. Th... |
|
rwall(1m) -- write to all users over a network
|
|
rwall reads a message from standard input until EOF, then sends the message, preceded by the line Broadcast Message ..., to all users logged in on the specified host machines. With the -n option, rwall sends the message to the specified network hosts defined in /etc/netgroup (see netgroup(4)). A machine can only receive such a message if it is running rwalld, which is normally started from /etc/in... |
|
rwalld(1m) -- network rwall server
|
|
rwalld is an RPC server that handles rwall requests (see rwall(1)). rwalld calls wall to send a message to all users logged into the host on which rwalld is running (see wall(1)). inetd invokes rwalld through /etc/inetd.conf (see inetd(1M)). |
|
rwho(1) -- show who is logged in on local machines
|
|
rwho produces output similar to the output of the HP-UX who command for all machines on the local network that are running the rwho daemon (see who(1) and rwhod(1M)). If rwhod has not received a report from a machine for 11 minutes, rwho assumes the machine is down and rwho does not report users last known to be logged into that machine. rwho's output line has fields for the name of the user, the... |
|
rwhod(1m) -- system status server
|
|
rwhod is the server that maintains the database used by rwho and ruptime (see rwho(1) and ruptime(1)). rwhod sends status information to and receives status information from other nodes on the local network that are running rwhod. rwhod is started at system boot time if the RWHOD variable is set to 1 in the file /etc/rc.config.d/netdaemons. As an information sender, it periodically queries the sta... |
|
sa1(1m) -- system activity report package
|
|
System activity data can be accessed at the special request of a user (see sar(1M)) and automatically on a routine basis as described here. The operating system contains a number of counters that are incremented as various system actions occur. These include CPU utilization counters, buffer usage counters, disk and tape I/O activity counters, tty device activity counters, switching and system-call... |
|
sa2(1m) -- system activity report package
|
|
System activity data can be accessed at the special request of a user (see sar(1M)) and automatically on a routine basis as described here. The operating system contains a number of counters that are incremented as various system actions occur. These include CPU utilization counters, buffer usage counters, disk and tape I/O activity counters, tty device activity counters, switching and system-call... |
|
sact(1) -- print current SCCS file editing activity
|
|
The sact command informs the user of any impending deltas to a named SCCS file. This situation occurs when get -e has been previously executed without a subsequent execution of delta (see delta(1) and get(1)). If a directory is named on the command line, sact behaves as though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component of path name does no... |
|
sadc(1m) -- system activity report package
|
|
System activity data can be accessed at the special request of a user (see sar(1M)) and automatically on a routine basis as described here. The operating system contains a number of counters that are incremented as various system actions occur. These include CPU utilization counters, buffer usage counters, disk and tape I/O activity counters, tty device activity counters, switching and system-call... |
|
sam(1m) -- system administration manager
|
|
The sam command starts a menu-driven System Administration Manager program (SAM) for performing system administration tasks with only limited, specialized knowledge of the HP-UX operating system. SAM discovers many aspects of a system's configuration through automated inquiries and tests. Help menus describe how to use SAM and perform various management tasks. Press the F1 function key for help o... |
|
samlog_view(1) -- a tool for viewing and saving the SAM logfile
|
|
The samlog_viewer command enables the viewing of part or all of the SAM logfile (or another file containing data in the same format) at varying levels of detail. This tool is run by SAM whenever the View SAM Log option is chosen. It can also be run independently of SAM, in either interactive or noninteractive mode. The samlog_viewer command executes in either interactive or noninteractive mode, de... |
|
sams(1) -- Builds DCE message system files
|
|
The sams utility reads the specified input file and creates a number of output files. The name sams stands for ``symbols and message strings'', which is what the program manipulates. The input file consists of keywords, numbers, and text. Whitespace, except in quoted strings, is used only to separate tokens. If the text is a simple word, it can be entered unquoted. Text that is a keyword or that... |
|
sar(1m) -- system activity reporter
|
|
In the first form above, sar samples cumulative activity counters in the operating system at n intervals of t seconds. If the -o option is specified, it saves the samples in file in binary format. The default value of n is 1. In the second form, with no sampling interval specified, sar extracts data from a previously recorded file, either the one specified by -f option or, by default, the standard... |
|
savecrash(1m) -- save a crash dump of the operating system
|
|
savecrash saves the crash dump information of the system (assuming one was made when the system crashed) and writes a reboot message in the shutdown log file. dirname is the name of the existing directory in which to store the crash dump; the default is /var/adm/crash. savecrash saves the crash image and related files in the directory dirname/crash.n. The trailing /crash.n. The trailing n. The tra... |
|
sccs(1) -- front-end utility program for SCCS commands
|
|
The sccs command is a straightforward front end to the various programs comprising the Source Code Control System. It includes the capability of running set-user-id to another user to allow shared access to the SCCS files. sccs reduces the need to explicitly reference the SCCS filenames. The SCCS filenames are generated by prepending the string SCCS/s. to the working files specified. The default S... |
|
sccsdiff(1) -- compare two versions of an SCCS file
|
|
The sccsdiff command compares two versions of an SCCS file, and generates the differences between the two versions. Any number of SCCS files may be specified, but arguments apply to all files. -rSID? SID? SID1 and SID2 specify the deltas of an SCCS file that are to be compared. Versions are passed to bdiff in the order given (see bdiff(1)). The SIDs accepted, and the corresponding version retrieve... |
|
sccshelp(1) -- ask for help on SCCS commands
|
|
The sccshelp command finds information to explain a message from an SCCS command or to explain the use of a SCCS command. Zero or more arguments can be supplied. If no arguments are given, sccshelp prompts for one: What is the message number or SCCS command name? The arguments can be either message numbers (which normally appear in parentheses following messages) or command names, of one of the fo... |
|
sconv(1) -- hp9000 utility for Simplified-Chinese code code-converter
|
|
sconv is used to do code conversion from GB internal code to Big5/Unicode(UCS2 or UTF8) internal code and vice versa, also from Big5 internal code to GBK code and vice versa. It provides three processing modes. Mode (1) : sconv The first one is an interactive menu mode. Just invoke the command. It will display the main menu, and prompt you for which kind of code conversion you need(whether it is f... |
|
script(1) -- make typescript of terminal session
|
|
script makes a typescript of everything printed on your terminal. It starts a shell named by the SHELL environment variable, or by default /usr/bin/sh, and silently records a copy of output to your terminal from that shell or its descendents, using a pseudo-terminal device (see pty(7)). All output is written to file, or appended to file if the -a option is given. If no file name is given, the outp... |
|
scsictl(1m) -- control a SCSI device
|
|
The scsictl command provides a mechanism for controlling a SCSI device. It can be used to query mode parameters, set configurable mode parameters, and perform SCSI commands. The operations are performed in the same order as they appear on the command line. The second form, as shown above, supports the online addition of a supported SCSI card to a system. This option cannot be used with any other o... |
|
sd(1m) -- display and monitor job information and create and remove jobs; invoke graphical user interface to display and
|
|
The swjob command displays job information and removes jobs. It supports these features: + Display the current install jobs, copy jobs, and other SD jobs initiated by the SD commands. + Specify a specific job to list or remove. + Display the command logfile for a specific job. + Display the target logfile for a specific target. |
|
sdiff(1) -- side-by-side difference program
|
|
sdiff uses the output of diff(1) with the -b option, which ignores trailing blanks (spaces and tabs) and treats other strings of blanks as equal, to produce a side-by-side listing of two files, indicating those lines that are different. Each line of the two files is printed with a blank gutter between them if the lines are identical, a < in the gutter if the line only exists in file1, a > in the g... |
|
secd(1m) -- The DCE Security Server
|
|
The secd daemon is the Security Server. It manages all access to the registry database. You must have root privileges to invoke the secd. The Security Server can be replicated, so that several copies of the registry database exist on a network, each managed by a secd process. Only one Security Server, the master replica, can perform database update operations (such as adding an account). Other ser... |
|
sec_admin(1m) -- Registry replica administration tool
|
|
The registry database is replicated: each instance of a registry server, secd, maintains a working copy of the database in virtual memory and on disk. One server, called the master replica, accepts updates and handles the subsequent propagation of changes to all other replicas. All other replicas are slave replicas, which accept only queries. Each cell has one master replica and numerous slave rep... |
|
sec_create_db(1m) -- registry database creation utility
|
|
The sec_create_db tool creates new master and slave databases in dcelocal/var/security/rgy_data on the machine from which /var/security/rgy_data on the machine from which sec_create_db is run. Normally, these databases are created only once by the system configuration tool, dce_config. However, you can use sec_create_db if you need to re-create the master or a slave databse from scratch. You must ... |
|
sec_intro(1m) -- Introduction to the DCE Security administrative commands
|
|
This section describes DCE Security commands for system administration. These commands are acl_edit Manages Access Control Lists (ACLs) for DCE objects auditd Starts the DCE Audit Daemon chpass Changes user information, such as login name, password, home directory, password and account expiration dates, and login shell. The implementation of this utility is platformspecific. Use the chpass utility... |
|
sec_salvage_db(1m) -- Recover a corrupted registry database Note: The sec_salvage_db -check and -fix options are not currently avail
|
|
The sec_salvage_db tool is an aid to database administration and troubleshooting. Although day-to-day administration is handled by the rgy_edit command, sec_salvage_db can be useful for listing registry data, reconstructing databases, and salvaging corrupted databases. Hewlett-Packard Company - 4 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 sec_salvage_db(1m) Open Software Foundation sec_salvage_db(1m) Th... |
|
sed(1) -- stream text editor
|
|
sed copies the named text files (standard input default) to the standard output, edited according to a script containing up to 100 commands. Only complete input lines are processed. Any input text at the end of a file that is not terminated by a new-line character is ignored. |
|
sendmail(1m) -- send mail over the Internet
|
|
sendmail sends a message to one or more recipients or addresses and routes the message over whatever networks are necessary. sendmail does internetwork forwarding as necessary to deliver the message to the correct place. sendmail is not intended as a user interface routine. Other programs provide user-friendly front ends. sendmail is used only to deliver pre-formatted messages. With no flags speci... |
|
send_sound(1) -- play an audio file
|
|
This command plays an audio file. send_sound is the command used when you double-click an audio file from the HP VUE File Manager. The file begins playing, according to the settings of the Audio Control Panel. -format_format_switch is one these formats: au Sun file format snd NeXT file format wav Microsoft RIFF Waveform file format u MuLaw format al ALaw l16 linear 16-bit format lo8 offset (unsign... |
|
serialize(1) -- force target process to run serially with other processes
|
|
The serialize command is used to force the target process to run serially with other processes also marked by this command. The target process can be referred to by pid value, or it can be invoked directly on the command. Once a process has been marked by serialize, the process stays marked until process completion unless serialize is reissued on the serialized process with the -t option. The -t o... |
|
service.switch(1m) -- indicate lookup sources and fallback mechanism
|
|
/etc/mail/service.switch is a sendmail(1M) service switch similar to /etc/nsswitch.conf (see switch(4)) that indicates the lookup source for hostnames and aliases. It consists of two lines, one for hosts and one for aliases. The lookup sources are listed after the 'hosts' or 'aliases' name. For hosts, one or more of the following can be listed: files (for /etc/hosts), dns, nis, or nisplus. For... |
|
set(1m) -- Modifies characteristics for the DTS entity.
|
|
The set command modifies the charactistics you specify for the DTS entity. The modifiable characteristics and their values are described in the following list. check interval [relative-time] Specifies the amount of time between checks for faulty servers. Applicable only for servers that have external time providers. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 set(1m) Open Soft... |
|
setacl(1) -- modify access control lists (ACLs) for files (JFS File Systems only)
|
|
For each file specified, setacl will either replace its entire ACL, including the default ACL on a directory, or it will add, modify, or delete one or more ACL entries, including default entries on directories. The -s option will set the ACL to the entries specified on the command line. The -f option will set the ACL to the entries contained within the file acl_file. The -d option will delete one ... |
|
setboot(1m) -- display and modify boot variables in stable storage
|
|
The setboot command displays and sets boot variables in stable storage (also known as nonvolatile memory). Any user can display the values; only a superuser can change them. On all systems, the variables are: primary path, alternate path, autoboot flag, and autosearch flag. If SpeedyBoot is installed, the variables expand to include: early CPU tests, late CPU tests, memory initialization (on Itani... |
|
setext(1m) -- set VxFS extent attributes
|
|
setext specifies a fixed extent size for a file, and reserves space for a file. The file must already exist. |
|
setmemwindow(1m) -- changes the window id of a running program or starts a program in a particular memory window
|
|
setmemwindow is the command that changes the window id of a running process or starts a specified program in a particular memory window. If the -p option is specified with a non-zero pid, only the process' window id is changed, and any value specified for program is ignored. The executable program is only executed if the process id pid is either 0 or unspecified. Changing the window id for the ru... |
|
setmnt(1m) -- establish the file-system mount table, /etc/mnttab
|
|
The setmnt command creates the /etc/mnttab table (see mnttab(4)), which is needed by both the mount and umount commands (see mount(1M)). setmnt reads the standard input and creates an entry in /etc/mnttab for each line of input. Input lines have the format: filesys node where filesys is the name of the device special file associated with the file system (such as /dev/dsk/c0t5d0) and node is the ro... |
|
setnetlp(1m) -- configure the LP spooling system for lpd or ftp network printers
|
|
setnetlp configures LP spooling systems to describe printers supported lpd protocol or accepted ftp output requesting, and those are connected with network by TCP/IP. It is used to add and remove destinations, change configuration of destination if the destination exists. setnetlp is shell procedure, and invokes lpadmin(1M) command from the procedure. Exactly one of the -p, -x options or no option... |
|
setoncenv(1m) -- NFS environment configuration command
|
|
setoncenv initializes the value of NFS configuration environment variables, found either in /etc/rc.config.d/nfsconf or in /etc/rc.config.d/namesvrs (See rc.config(4)). The value can be an integer or a string. The value should be consistent with the variable being set. |
|
setprivgrp(1m) -- set special privileges for groups
|
|
The setprivgrp command associates a group with a list of privileges, thus providing access to certain system capabilities for members of a particular group or groups. The privileges can be displayed with the getprivgrp command (see getprivgrp(1)). Privileges can be granted to individual groups, as defined in the /etc/group file, and globally for all groups. Only a superuser can use the setprivgrp ... |
|
setuname(1m) -- change machine information
|
|
The setuname command is used to modify the value for system name and/or the node name by using the appropriate option(s). The setuname command attempts to change the parameter values in both the running kernel and the system configuration to cross reboots. A temporary change affects only the running kernel. |
|
set_cdscp_confidence(1m) -- Sets the confidence level of clerk calls issued as a result of CDS control program commands
|
|
The set cdscp confidence command sets the confidence level of clerk calls issued as a result of CDS control program commands. You must use this command within the CDS control program. Exiting from the CDS control program removes the confidence level setting. You must reset the confidence level each time you enter the CDS control program. |
|
set_cdscp_preferred_clearinghouse(1m) -- Specifies a preferred clearinghouse to use for satisfying read requests that result from CDS control program c
|
|
The set cdscp preferred clearinghouse command specifies a preferred clearinghouse to use for satisfying read requests that result from CDS control program commands. You cannot specify a preferred clearinghouse for making modifications, because these requests always use the master replica. You must use this command within the CDS control program. Exiting from the CDS control program removes the pre... |
|
set_directory(1m) -- Changes the value of a modifiable, single-valued attribute of a directory
|
|
The set directory command changes the value of a modifiable, singlevalued attribute of a directory. If the attribute does not exist, this command creates it. Usually, this task is performed through the client application. See the OSF DCE Administration Guide for more information about attributes. You can specify an application-defined attribute or the following attributes: CDS_Convergence = value ... |
|
set_directory_epoch(1m) -- Reconstructs a directory's replica set, allowing you to designate a new master replica or to exclude a replica
|
|
The set directory to new epoch command reconstructs a directory's replica set, allowing you to designate a new master replica or to exclude a replica. You must list each existing replica and indicate whether an existing replica needs to be included in or excluded from the new replica set. You can include or exclude more than one replica. The ellipses (...) indicates that you can specify multiple ... |
|
set_directory_skulk(1m) -- Starts the skulk of a directory immediately
|
|
The set directory to skulk command starts the skulk of a directory immediately. The CDS control program prompt dscp> does not return until the skulk is complete. The amount of time for the skulk to complete is dependent on the location, number, and availability of replicas of the directory. |
|
set_link(1m) -- Changes the value of a modifiable, single-valued attribute of a soft link
|
|
The set link command changes the value of a modifiable, single-valued attribute of a soft link. The following are valid attributes: CDS_LinkTarget = fullname Specifies the full name of the directory, object entry, or other soft link to which the soft link points. CDS_LinkTimeout = (expiration-time extension-time) Specifies a timeout value after which the soft link is either checked or deleted. The... |
|
set_object(1m) -- Changes the value of a modifiable, single-valued attribute of an object entry
|
|
The set object command changes the value of a modifiable, singlevalued attribute of an object entry. If the attribute does not exist, this command creates it. Usually, this task is performed through the client application. See the OSF DCE Administration Guide for more information about attributes. |
|
set_parms(1m) -- set system initial identity parameters: hostname, date/time, root password, and networking
|
|
The set_parms command is an interactive system set-up command that allows you to specify various "initial identity parameters" when first booting a newly installed operating system (whether preinstalled, or installed locally from media or an install server), and to revise these parameters later on a running system. Initial identity parameters are a minimal set of values required to bring a syste... |
|
sffinger(1) -- utility programs for TCP Wrappers
|
|
tryfrom This program identifies the end-point details related to a connection. This program must be called via a remote shell command as shown below. It is used to find out if the hostname and the address are properly recognized, and also if the username lookup works properly. # remsh host /usr/bin/tryfrom tryfrom prints the following output when it is invoked: client address (%a): client hostname... |
|
sh(1) -- overview of various system shells
|
|
Remarks: The POSIX.2 standard requires that, on a POSIX-compliant system, executing the command sh activates the POSIX shell (located in file /usr/bin/sh on HP-UX systems), and executing the command man sh produces an on-line manual entry that displays the syntax of the POSIX shell command-line. However, the sh command has historically been associated with the conventional Bourne shell, which coul... |
|
sh-posix(1) -- standard and restricted POSIX.2-conformant command shells
|
|
Shell Invocation Tilde Substitution Environment Options Command Substitution Functions rsh Restrictions Parameter Substitution Jobs Definitions Blank Interpretation Signals Commands File Name Generation Execution Simple Commands Quoting Command Reentry Compound Commands Arithmetic Evaluation Command Line Editing Special Commands Prompting emacs/gmacs Editing Mode Comments Conditional Expressions v... |
|
shar(1) -- make a shell archive package
|
|
The shar command bundles the named files and directories into a single distribution package suitable for mailing or moving. The files can contain any data, including executables. The resulting package, written to standard output, is a shell script file that can be edited (to add messages at the beginning, etc.). To unpack package, use the sh command with the package name as an argument as follows:... |
|
shl(1) -- shell layer manager
|
|
shl provides a means for interacting with more than one shell from a single terminal by using shell layers. A layer is a shell that is bound to a virtual device. The virtual device can be manipulated like an actual terminal by using stty and ioctl() (see stty(1) and ioctl(2)). Each layer has its own process group ID. The user controls these layers by using the commands described below. The current... |
|
show(1m) -- Displays current information about the DTS entity
|
|
The show command displays the names and values of the specified attributes or attribute groups. For attribute groups, if you do not supply a group name with the all argument, all characteristics and their values are displayed. The following sections list names of individual attributes, categorized by group. Note that the attributes displayed by the show command might be different, depending upon w... |
|
showmount(1m) -- show all remote mounts
|
|
showmount lists all clients that have remotely mounted a filesystem from host. This information is maintained by the mountd server on host (see mountd(1M)). The default value for host is the value returned by hostname (see hostname(1)). |
|
show_cached_clearinghouse(1m) -- Displays current information about the specified cached clearinghouse
|
|
The show cached clearinghouse command displays all the names and values of the attributes in the specified cached clearinghouse. The following are valid attributes: |
|
show_cached_server(1m) -- Displays address information of a server in the local clerk's cache
|
|
The show cached server command displays address information of a server in the local clerk's cache. The following list describes the valid attributes: Name The directory cell name Towers The protocol sequence and network address of the server node |
|
show_cdscp_confidence(1m) -- Displays the current confidence level of clerk calls resulting from CDS control program commands
|
|
The show cdscp confidence command displays the current confidence level of clerk calls. A low confidence level means the clerk obtains information from caches or the most convenient server. A medium level means the clerk obtains information directly from a server. A high level means the clerk obtains information only at master replicas. You must use this command within the CDS control program. Exi... |
|
show_cdscp_preferred_clearinghouse(1m) -- Displays the preferred clearinghouse for satisfying read requests that result from CDS control program command
|
|
The show cdscp preferred clearinghouse command displays the preferred clearinghouse for satisfying read requests that result from CDS control program commands. You can only read attribute values for entries stored in the specified clearinghouse. You must use this command within the CDS control program. Exiting from the CDS control program removes the preferred clearinghouse setting. You must reset... |
|
show_cell(1m) -- Displays the information you need to create a cell entry in either DNS or GDS
|
|
The show cell command displays the information you need to create a cell entry in either the Domain Name System (DNS) or the Global Directory Service (GDS). DCE does not support cells registered simultaneously in GDS and DNS. If you want to define a cell in DNS, you can use this command to produce a preformatted set of resource records. You can then edit the appropriate DNS data file and copy the ... |
|
show_child(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the specified child pointer
|
|
The show child command displays the names and values of the attributes specified in attribute-name. You can use a combination of attributes in a single command. Use a space to separate multiple attributes. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to child pointers whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must precede and follow the ... |
|
show_clearinghouse(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the specified clearinghouse
|
|
The show clearinghouse command displays the names and values of the attributes specified in attribute-name. You can use a combination of attributes in any sequence in a single command. Use a space to separate multiple attributes. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to clearinghouses whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must... |
|
show_clerk(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the CDS clerk on the local system
|
|
The show clerk command displays all the names and values of the clerk attributes on the local system. The clerk must be enabled when you use this command. The following are valid attributes: |
|
show_directory(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the specified directory
|
|
The show directory command displays the names and values of the attributes specified in attribute-name. You can use a combination of attributes in any sequence in a single command. Use a space to separate multiple attributes. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to directories whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must preced... |
|
show_link(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the specified soft link
|
|
The show link command displays the names and values of the attributes specified in attribute-name. You can use a combination of attributes in any sequence in a single command. Use a space to separate multiple attributes. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to soft links whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must precede and ... |
|
show_object(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the specified object entry
|
|
The show object command displays the names and values of the attributes specified in attribute-name. You can use a combination of attributes in a single command. Use a space to separate multiple attributes. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to object entries whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. If you do not supply any attributes... |
|
show_replica(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the specified replica
|
|
The show replica command displays the directory-specific attributes as well as the per-replica attributes of the specified directory. If you do not supply any attributes, the command displays all attributes and their values; any application-defined attributes that might exist will be included in the output of this command. You can enter one or more of the following attributes: |
|
show_server(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the server running on the local system
|
|
The show server command displays all the names and values from the attributes named in this entity. The server must be enabled when you use this command. The following are valid attribute names: |
|
shutacct(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
shutdown(1m) -- terminate all processing
|
|
The shutdown command is part of the HP-UX system operation procedures. Its primary function is to terminate all currently running processes in an orderly and cautious manner. shutdown can be used to put the system in single-user mode for administrative purposes such as backup or file system consistency checks (see fsck(1M)), to halt or reboot the system, or to make the partition ready for reconfig... |
|
sig_named(1m) -- send signals to the domain name server
|
|
sig_named sends the appropriate signal to the domain name server /usr/sbin/named. The process ID is obtained from /var/run/named.pid or from ps(1) if /var/run/named.pid does not exist. |
|
size(1) -- print section sizes of object files
|
|
size produces section size information for each section in the object files. The size of the text, data and bss (uninitialized data) sections are printed along with the total size of the object file. If an archive file is input to the size command, the information for all archive members is displayed. |
|
sleep(1) -- suspend execution for an interval
|
|
sleep suspends execution for time seconds. It is used to execute a command after a certain amount of time, as in: (sleep 105; command)& or to execute a command periodically, as in: )& or to execute a command periodically, as in: while true do command sleep 37 done |
|
slip(1) -- PPP daemon
|
|
pppd is a daemon process used in UNIX systems to manage connections to other hosts using PPP (Point to Point Protocol) or SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol). It uses the UNIX host's native serial ports. It communicates with the UNIX kernel's own TCP/IP implementation via the HP IP tunnel driver. The functionality supplied by this daemon supersedes that provided by ppl(1) in HP-UX prior to Rele... |
|
slp(1) -- set printing options for a non-serial printer
|
|
slp sets printer formatting options such as the number of lines per page, number of characters per line, and indentation. These characteristics are controlled by the printer driver as described in lp(7). slp acts on the current standard output. |
|
slpd(1m) -- Service Location Protocol Daemon
|
|
The slpd daemon provides the functionality of the Directory Agent and Service Agent for the Service Location Protocol ("SLP") version 2. SLP provides a scalable framework that allows the networking applications to discover the existence, location and configuration of networked services in the enterprise networks. slpd provides the functionality of the following services: |
|
slpdc(1m) -- send signals to the SLP daemon or starts slpd
|
|
slpdc sends the appropriate signal to the SLP daemon or starts slpd /usr/sbin/slpd. The process ID is obtained from /var/run/slpd.pid or from the ps command if /var/run/slpd.pid does not exist (see ps(1)). |
|
slweb(1m) -- start the HP-UX hardware event viewer tool (a Web interface)
|
|
The HP-UX hardware event viewer tool (slweb) can be used to display hardware events from log files or raw hexadecimal word pairs. The slweb command starts the user interface. Once started the help facility of slweb is available and can be used to learn more about slweb by clicking on field labels or column headings. The HP-UX hardware event viewer tool user interface uses a Web browser. Executing ... |
|
smrsh(1m) -- restricted shell for sendmail
|
|
The smrsh program is intended as a replacement for sh for use in the prog mailer in sendmail configuration files. It sharply limits the commands that can be run using the |program syntax of sendmail in order to improve the overall security of your system. Briefly, even if a ``bad guy'' can get sendmail to run a program without going through an alias or forward file, smrsh limits the set of progr... |
|
snmpd(1m) -- Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) process
|
|
The master SNMP agent (snmpdm) and the collection of subagents (/usr/sbin/*agt) that have attached to the master agent, collectively form a single SNMP agent. The SNMP agent accepts SNMP Get, GetNext and Set requests from an SNMP Manager which cause it to read or write the Management Information Base (MIB). The MIB objects are instrumented by the subagents. The master agent can bind to separate pr... |
|
snmpd.ipv6(1m) -- Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) process
|
|
The master SNMP agent (snmpdm) and the collection of subagents (/usr/sbin/*agt) that have attached to the master agent, collectively form a single SNMP agent. The SNMP agent accepts SNMP Get, GetNext and Set requests from an SNMP Manager which cause it to read or write the Management Information Base (MIB). The MIB objects are instrumented by the subagents. The master agent can bind to separate pr... |
|
snmpdm(1m) -- Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) process
|
|
The master SNMP agent (snmpdm) and the collection of subagents (/usr/sbin/*agt) that have attached to the master agent, collectively form a single SNMP agent. The SNMP agent accepts SNMP Get, GetNext and Set requests from an SNMP Manager which cause it to read or write the Management Information Base (MIB). The MIB objects are instrumented by the subagents. The master agent can bind to separate pr... |
|
soelim(1) -- eliminate .so's from nroff input
|
|
soelim reads the specified files or the standard input and performs the textual inclusion implied by nroff directives of the form .so some_file when they appear at the beginning of input lines. This is useful when using programs such as tbl(1) that do not normally do this, allowing placement of individual tables or other text objects in separate files to be run as a part of a large document. An ar... |
|
softpower(1m) -- determine if softpower hardware is installed on the system
|
|
The softpower command determines whether a software controlled power switch is installed on the system. |
|
sort(1) -- sort or merge files
|
|
sort performs one of the following functions: 1. Sorts lines of all the named files together and writes the result to the specified output. 2. Merges lines of all the named (presorted) files together and writes the result to the specified output. 3. Checks that a single input file is correctly presorted. The standard input is read if - is used as a file name or no input files are specified. Compar... |
|
spell(1) -- find spelling errors
|
|
The spell command collects words from the named files and looks them up in a spelling list. Words that neither occur among nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes, and/or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on the standard output. If no files are named, words are collected from the standard input. The spell command ignores most troff, tbl, and eqn constructio... |
|
spellin(1) -- find spelling errors
|
|
The spell command collects words from the named files and looks them up in a spelling list. Words that neither occur among nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes, and/or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on the standard output. If no files are named, words are collected from the standard input. The spell command ignores most troff, tbl, and eqn constructio... |
|
split(1) -- split a file into pieces
|
|
split reads file and writes it in pieces (default 1000 lines) onto a set of output files. The name of the first output file is name with aa appended, and so on lexicographically, up to zz (only ASCII letters are used, a maximum of 676 files). If no output name is given, x is the default. If no input file is given, or if - is given instead, the standard input file is used. |
|
spray(1m) -- spray packets
|
|
spray sends a one-way stream of packets to host using RPC, then reports how many were received by host and what the transfer rate was. The host name can be either a name or an internet address. |
|
sprayd(1m) -- spray server
|
|
sprayd is an RPC server that records the packets sent by spray from another system (see spray(1M)). inetd invokes sprayd through /etc/inetd.conf (see inetd(1M)). |
|
sptr(1) -- terminal print utility
|
|
sptr is a printer utility which support two method -- First Method is LOG PRINT - display the file on the screen then print it out. Second Method is TRANSPARENT PRINT MODE - just print file and non-display. And terminal must be HP or VT mode terminal, printer must be ESC/P printer. |
|
ssp(1) -- remove multiple line-feeds from output
|
|
ssp (single-space) removes redundant blank lines from the standard input and sends the result to the standard output. All blank lines at the beginning of a file are removed, and all multiple blank lines elsewhere in the file (including end-of-file) are reduced to a single blank line. ssp is typically used in pipelines such as nroff -ms file1 | ssp ssp is equivalent to the 4.2BSD cat -s command. To... |
|
st(1m) -- shared tape administration
|
|
The st command provides users with a command-line interface to check the status of a shared tape device or to reclaim a shared tape device from a host system that has failed while holding a reservation on the shared tape device. The st command can also be used for the same purpose on shared library robotic devices. To use the st command you must have root user id. Please see examples below for usa... |
|
startup(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
statd(1m) -- network status monitor
|
|
statd is an RPC server. It interacts with lockd to provide crash and recovery functions for the locking services on NFS (see lockd(1M)). |
|
stconv(1) -- Utility to convert scalable type symbol set map formats
|
|
Intellifont font technology has been obsoleted on HP's X Window System. Support for it will be removed in a future release. This utility will be removed at that time. The stconv utility is used to convert scalable typeface symbol set maps (.sym files) for Intellifont fonts from one symbol list numbering format to another. The installation default symbol sets map their respective symbols into appr... |
|
stlicense(1) -- server access control program for X
|
|
The stlicense program is run interactively by the font administrator to give devices attached to hosts on the network, netdevs, access to typefaces. Responsibility for maintaining security rests with users root, bin, and the owners of the font directories. |
|
stload(1) -- Utility to load Scalable Type outlines
|
|
Intellifont font technology has been obsoleted on HP's X Window System. Support for it will be removed in a future release. This utility will be removed at that time. The stload utility creates scalable typeface libraries (.ifo files) from Agfa Compugraphic Font Access and Interchange Standard (CG/FAIS) data. (An FAIS library on floppy disk or CD-ROM media is the common means of distribution for ... |
|
stm(1m) -- Support Tools Manager
|
|
The Support Tools Manager (STM) provides three interfaces that allow a user access to an underlying toolset, consisting of information modules, firmware update tools, verifiers, diagnostics, exercisers, expert tools, and utilities: XSTM - the graphical interface (for X11-based graphics terminals) MSTM - the menu-based interface (for non-X11-based, non-graphics terminals) CSTM - the command line in... |
|
stmkdirs(1) -- Utility to build Scalable Type fonts.dir and charsets.dir files
|
|
The stmkdirs utility is used to support TrueType, Type1 and Intellifont scalable fonts. It creates the fonts.dir, and charsets.dir files used by the Font Server and Scalable Type subsystem. Intellifont scalable fonts are being obsoleted and will not be supported on a future release of the operating system. Stmkdirs supports scalable typefaces as follows: |
|
stmkfont(1) -- Scalable Typeface font compiler to create X and PCL fonts
|
|
The stmkfont utility is obsolete and will not be supported in future releases. It has been replaced by the fstobdf utility. The stmkfont utility is a bit-mapped font generator for creating X and PCL fonts from Intellifont scalable typeface data. By specifying desired font characteristics via an X Logical Font Description (XLFD) name, the user can instruct stmkfont to generate an almost limitless v... |
|
strace(1m) -- write STREAMS event trace messages to standard output
|
|
strace gets STREAMS event trace messages from STREAMS drivers and modules via the STREAMS log driver (strlog(7)), and writes these messages to standard output. By default, strace without arguments writes all STREAMS trace messages from all drivers and modules. strace with command-line arguments limits the trace messages received. The arguments, which must be specified in groups of three, are: mod ... |
|
strchg(1m) -- change or query stream configuration
|
|
The strchg and strconf commands are used to change or query the configuration of the stream associated with the user's standard input. The strchg command pushes modules on and/or pops modules off the stream. The strconf command queries the configuration of the stream. Only the superuser or owner of a STREAMS device may alter the configuration of that stream. strchg Options The strchg command uses... |
|
strclean(1m) -- remove outdated STREAMS error log files
|
|
strclean cleans the STREAMS error logger directory of log files (error.mm-mm-dd) that contain error messages sent by the STREAMS log driver, strlog(7). If the -d option is not used to specify another directory, strclean removes error log files in the /var/adm/streams directory. If the -a option is not used to specify another age, strclean removes error log files that have not been modified in thre... |
|
strconf(1m) -- change or query stream configuration
|
|
The strchg and strconf commands are used to change or query the configuration of the stream associated with the user's standard input. The strchg command pushes modules on and/or pops modules off the stream. The strconf command queries the configuration of the stream. Only the superuser or owner of a STREAMS device may alter the configuration of that stream. strchg Options The strchg command uses... |
|
strerr(1m) -- receive error messages from the STREAMS log driver
|
|
The strerr daemon receives error messages from the STREAMS log driver (strlog(7)) for addition to the STREAMS error log files (error.mm-mm-dd) in the STREAMS error logger directory (/var/adm/streams by default). When first called, strerr creates the log file error.mm-mm-dd. This is a daily log file, where mm indicates the month and dd indicates the day of the logged messages. strerr then appends e... |
|
strings(1) -- find the printable strings in an object or other binary file
|
|
strings looks for ASCII strings in a file. If no file is specified, standard input is used. A string is any sequence of four or more printing characters ending with a newline or null character. strings is useful for identifying random object files and many other things. |
|
strip(1) -- strip symbol and line number information from an object file
|
|
strip removes the symbol table and line number information from object files, including archives. Thereafter, no symbolic debugging access is available for that file; thus, this command is normally run only on production modules that have been debugged and tested. The effect is nearly identical to using the -s option of ld. |
|
strvf(1m) -- STREAMS verification tool
|
|
strvf executes a series of subcommands that verify whether or not STREAMS is currently installed and configured on your system. All output is sent to stdout. Verbose output is always sent to the logfile /var/adm/streams/strvf.log. These subcommands make sure that the STREAMS kernel daemons are running and that open(), putmsg(), getmsg(), ioctl(), and close() can be performed on /dev/echo. |
|
stty(1) -- set the options for a terminal port
|
|
stty sets or reports current settings of certain terminal I/O options for the device that is the current standard input. The command takes four forms: stty Report the settings of a system-defined set of options; stty -a Report all of current option settings; stty -g Report current settings in a form that can be used as an argument to another stty command. stty options Set terminal I/O options as d... |
|
su(1m) -- 1 -OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96
|
|
|
|
su(1) -- switch user
|
|
The su (set user or superuser) command allows one user to become another user without logging out. username is the name of a user defined in the /etc/passwd file (see passwd(4)). The default name is root (that is, superuser). To use su, the appropriate password must be supplied unless the current user is superuser and is not using the -d option. If a valid password is entered, su executes a new sh... |
|
sum(1) -- print checksum and block or byte count of file(s)
|
|
sum calculates and prints to standard output a checksum for each named file, and also prints the size of the file in 512 byte blocks, rounded up. The default algorithm is a 16-bit sum of the bytes in which overflow is ignored. Alternate algorithms can be selected with the -r and -p options. Standard input is used if no file names are given. sum is typically used to verify data integrity when copyi... |
|
svcdumplog(1) -- Prints contents of a binary serviceability log file
|
|
The svcdumplog program will print the contents of a binary log file. DCE components log important information about their activities and state via the DCE serviceability interface. The log messages can be routed as desired via the dcecp log object. The messages can also be written in either binary or in text format (information about specifying message format can be found in svcroute(5)). When bin... |
|
swacl(1m) -- view or modify the Access Control Lists (ACLs) which protect software products
|
|
The swacl command displays or modifies the Access Control Lists (ACLs) which: + Protect the specified target_selections (hosts, software depots or root filesystems). + Protect the specified software_selections on each of the specified target_selections (software depots only). All root filesystems, software depots, and products in software depots are protected by ACLs. The SD commands permit or pre... |
|
swagent(1m) -- serve local or remote SD software management tasks, daemon that invokes swagent, respectively
|
|
The roles of UNIX target and source systems require two processes known as the daemon and agent. For most purposes, the distinction between these two processes is invisible to the user and they can be viewed as a single process. Each SD command interacts with the daemon and agent to perform its requested tasks. The swagentd daemon process must be scheduled before a UNIX system is available as a ta... |
|
swagentd(1m) -- serve local or remote SD software management tasks, daemon that invokes swagent, respectively
|
|
The roles of UNIX target and source systems require two processes known as the daemon and agent. For most purposes, the distinction between these two processes is invisible to the user and they can be viewed as a single process. Each SD command interacts with the daemon and agent to perform its requested tasks. The swagentd daemon process must be scheduled before a UNIX system is available as a ta... |
|
swapinfo(1m) -- system paging space information
|
|
swapinfo prints information about device and file system paging space. (Note: the term `swap' refers to an obsolete implementation of virtual memory; HP-UX actually implements virtual memory by way of paging rather than swapping. This command and others retain names derived from `swap' for historical reasons.) By default, swapinfo prints to standard output a two line header as shown here, follow... |
|
swapon(1m) -- enable device or file system for paging
|
|
The swapon command enables devices or file systems on which paging is to take place. (NOTE: the term `swap' refers to an obsolete implementation of virtual memory; HP-UX actually implements virtual memory by way of paging rather than swapping. This command and others retain names derived from `swap' for historical reasons.) By enabling a device for paging, the device can be accessed directly (wi... |
|
swask(1m) -- ask for user response
|
|
The swask command runs interactive software request scripts for the software objects selected to one or more targets specified by target_selections. These scripts store the responses in a response file (named response) for later use by the swinstall and swconfig commands. The swinstall and swconfig commands can also run the interactive request scripts directly, using the ask option. If the -s opti... |
|
swconfig(1m) -- configure, unconfigure, or reconfigure installed software
|
|
The swconfig command configures, unconfigures, or reconfigures installed software products for execution on the specified targets. The swconfig command transitions software between INSTALLED and CONFIGURED states. Although software is automatically configured as part of the swinstall command and unconfigured as part of the swremove command, swconfig lets you configure or unconfigure software indep... |
|
swcopy(1m) -- install and configure software products; software products for subsequent installation or distribution; respec
|
|
The swinstall command installs the software_selections from a software source to either the local host or, in the case of the HP OpenView Software Distributor product, to one or more target_selections (root filesystems). By default, the software is configured for use on the target after it is installed. (The software is not configured when installed into an alternate root directory.) The swcopy co... |
|
swinstall(1m) -- install and configure software products; software products for subsequent installation or distribution; respec
|
|
The swinstall command installs the software_selections from a software source to either the local host or, in the case of the HP OpenView Software Distributor product, to one or more target_selections (root filesystems). By default, the software is configured for use on the target after it is installed. (The software is not configured when installed into an alternate root directory.) The swcopy co... |
|
swjob(1m) -- display and monitor job information and create and remove jobs; invoke graphical user interface to display and
|
|
The swjob command displays job information and removes jobs. It supports these features: + Display the current install jobs, copy jobs, and other SD jobs initiated by the SD commands. + Specify a specific job to list or remove. + Display the command logfile for a specific job. + Display the target logfile for a specific target. |
|
swlist(1m) -- display information about software products
|
|
The swlist command displays information about software products installed at or available from the specified target_selections. It supports these features: + Specify bundles, products, subproducts, and/or filesets to list. + Display the files contained in each fileset. + Display a table of contents from a software source. + Specify the attributes to display for each software object. + Display all ... |
|
swmodify(1m) -- modify software products in a target root or depot
|
|
The swmodify command modifies the definitions of software objects installed into a primary or alternate root, or available from a software depot. It supports the following features: + adding new objects - The user can add new bundles, products, subproducts, filesets, control files, and files to existing objects (which will contain them). + deleting existing objects - The user can delete existing b... |
|
swpackage(1m) -- package software products into a target depot or tape
|
|
The swpackage command is not distributed; it only operates on the local host. It packages software products into: + a distribution directory (which can be accessed directly or copied onto a CD-ROM), + a distribution tape, such as DDS, nine-track or cartridge tapes. A software product is organized into a three-level hierarchy: products, subproducts, and filesets. The actual files that make up a pro... |
|
swreg(1m) -- register or unregister depots and roots
|
|
The swreg command controls the visibility of depots and roots to users who are performing software management tasks. It must be used to register depots created by swpackage. By default, the swcopy command registers newly created depots. By default, the swinstall command registers newly created alternate roots (the root, "/", is not automatically registered). The swremove command unregisters a de... |
|
swremove(1m) -- unconfigure and remove software products
|
|
The swremove command removes software_selections from target_selections (e.g. root file systems). When removing installed software, swremove also unconfigures the software before it is removed. The software is not unconfigured when removed from an alternate root directory since it was not configured during installation. When removing available software (within a depot), swremove also does not perf... |
|
swverify(1m) -- verify software products
|
|
The swverify command verifies the software_selections at one or more target_selections (e.g. root filesystems). When verifying installed software, swverify checks software states, dependency relationships, file existence and integrity, in addition to executing vendor-supplied verification scripts. The swverify command also verifies software_selections at one or more target depots. For target depot... |
|
sync(1m) -- synchronize file systems
|
|
sync executes the sync() system call (see sync(2)). If the system is to be stopped, the sync command must be called to ensure file system integrity. sync flushes all previously unwritten system buffers including modified super blocks, modified inodes, and delayed block I/O out to disk. This ensures that all file modifications are properly saved before performing a critical operation such as a syst... |
|
syncer(1m) -- periodically sync for file system integrity
|
|
syncer is a program that periodically executes sync() at an interval determined by the input argument seconds (see sync(2)). If seconds is not specified, the default interval is every 30 seconds. This ensures that the file system is fairly up-to-date in case of a crash. This command should not be executed directly, but should be executed at system boot time via startup script /sbin/init.d/syncer. ... |
|
synchronize(1m) -- Causes the DTS entity to synchronize the clock on the system where the command is entered.
|
|
The synchronize command causes the DTS clerk or server to solicit time intervals from servers, compute the intersection of the time intervals, and adjust the system clock to the midpoint of the computed time interval. This command overrides the functions of the synchronization hold down characteristic. |
|
sysdef(1m) -- display system definition
|
|
Note: sysdef will not be supported in future releases of HP-UX (refer to WARNINGS section below). So users are advised to use the kctune(1M) utility which provides additional information on kernel tunable parameters. The command sysdef analyzes the currently running system and reports on its tunable configuration parameters. kernel and master are not used, but can be specified for standards compli... |
|
syslogd(1m) -- log system messages
|
|
The syslogd command reads and logs messages into a set of files described by the configuration file /etc/syslog.conf. |
|
tabs(1) -- set tabs on a terminal
|
|
tabs sets the tab stops on the user's terminal according to the tab specification tabspec, after clearing any previous settings. The user's terminal must have remotely-settable hardware tabs. If you are using a non-HP terminal, you should keep in mind that behavior will vary for some tab settings. Four types of tab specification are accepted for tabspec: ``canned'', repetitive, arbitrary, and ... |
|
tail(1) -- deliver the last part of a file
|
|
tail copies the named file to the standard output beginning at a designated place. If no file is named, standard input is used. |
|
talk(1) -- talk to another user
|
|
The talk utility is a two-way, screen-oriented communication program. The command argument talk_party can take one the following forms: user user@host @host host host!user !user user host:user :user user host.user where .user where user where user is a login name and host is a host name. The optional command argument, ttyname, can be used to specify the terminal to be used when contacting a user w... |
|
talkd(1m) -- remote user communication server
|
|
Talkd is the server that notifies a user that someone wants to initiate a conversation. It acts as a repository of invitations, responding to requests by clients wishing to initiate a conversation. To initiate a conversation, the client (the talk command) sends a message of type LOOK_UP to the server (see /usr/include/protocols/talkd.h). This causes the server to search its invitation table to che... |
|
tar(1) -- tape file archiver
|
|
The tar command saves and restores archives of files on a magnetic tape, a flexible disk, or a regular file. The default archive file is /dev/rmt/0m. See the -f option below. Its actions are controlled by the key argument. |
|
tbl(1) -- format tables for nroff
|
|
tbl is a preprocessor that formats tables for nroff(1). The input files are copied to the standard output, except for lines between .TS and .TE command lines, which are assumed to describe tables and are re-formatted by tbl. (The .TS and .TE command lines are not altered by tbl). .TS is followed by global options. The available global options are: center center the table (default is left-adjust); ... |
|
tconv(1) -- HP 9000 Traditional-Chinese code converter
|
|
tconv is a code converter to do code conversion from CCDC/Big5/EUCCNS(locale: zh_TW.ccdc/zh_TW.big5/zh_TW.eucTW) internal code to another local Taiwanese 2-byte or 3-byte Traditional-Chinese internal code, or to Unicode in UCS2 or UTF8 format; as well the conversion of Big5 code(Traditional-Chinese) to GB code(Simplified-Chinese) (locale:zh_CN.hp15CN) or GBK code. It provides fourteen processing m... |
|
tcpd(1m) -- access control facility for internet services
|
|
The tcpd program can be set up to monitor the incoming requests for telnet, finger, ftp, exec, rsh, rlogin, tftp, talk, and other services that have a one-to-one mapping onto executable files. The program supports both 4.3BSD-style sockets and System V.4-style TLI. The functionality may be limited when the protocol underneath TLI is not an internet protocol. The operation is as follows: Whenever a... |
|
tcpdchk(1) -- check tcp wrapper configuration
|
|
tcpdchk examines the tcp wrapper configuration and reports all potential and real problems it can encounter. The command examines the tcpd access control files (by default, these are /etc/hosts.allow and /etc/hosts.deny), and compares the entries in these files against entries in the inetd configuration file. tcpdchk reports the following types of problems: non-existent pathnames, services that ap... |
|
tcpdmatch(1) -- evaluate tcp wrapper service requests
|
|
tcpdmatch predicts how the tcp wrapper would handle a specific request for service. Examples are given below. The program examines the tcpd access control tables (default /etc/hosts.allow and /etc/hosts.deny) and prints its conclusion. For maximum accuracy, it extracts additional information from the inetd configuration file. When tcpdmatch finds a match in the access control tables, it identifies... |
|
tee(1) -- pipe fitting
|
|
The tee command transcribes the standard input to the standard output and makes copies in the files. |
|
telnet(1) -- user interface to the TELNET protocol
|
|
telnet is used to communicate with another host using the TELNET protocol. If telnet is invoked without arguments, it enters command mode, indicated by its prompt (telnet>). In this mode, it accepts and executes the commands listed below. If telnet is invoked with arguments, it performs an open command (see below) with those arguments. Once a connection has been opened, telnet enters an input mode... |
|
telnetd(1m) -- TELNET protocol server
|
|
The telnetd daemon executes a server that supports the DARPA standard TELNET virtual terminal protocol. The Internet daemon (inetd) executes telnetd when it receives a service request at the port listed in the services database for telnet using the tcp protocol (see inetd(1M) and services(4)). telnetd operates by allocating a Telnet pseudo-terminal device (see tels(7)) for a client, then creating ... |
|
test(1) -- condition evaluation command
|
|
The test command evaluates the expression expr and, if its value is True, returns a zero (true) exit status; otherwise, a nonzero (false) exit status is returned. test also returns a nonzero exit status if there are no arguments. The following primitives are used to construct expr: -r file True if file exists and is readable. -w file True if file exists and is writable. -x file True if file exists... |
|
tftp(1) -- trivial file transfer program
|
|
tftp is the user interface to the Internet TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol), that allows users to transfer files to and from a remote machine. The remote host can be specified on the command line, in which case tftp uses host as the default host for future transfers (see the connect command below). |
|
tftpd(1m) -- trivial file transfer protocol server
|
|
tftpd is a server that supports the Internet Trivial File Transfer Protocol (RFC783). The TFTP server operates at the port indicated in the tftp service description (see services(4)). The server is normally started by inetd using the /etc/inetd.conf file (see inetd(1M) and inetd.conf(4)). |
|
tic(1m) -- terminfo compiler
|
|
tic translates terminfo files from source format into the compiled format. Results are placed in the directory /usr/share/lib/terminfo. -vn Specifies that (verbose) output be written to standard error trace information showing tic's progress. The optional integer n is a number from 1 to 10, inclusive, indicating the desired level of detail of information. If n is omitted, the default level is 1. ... |
|
time(1) -- time a command
|
|
command is executed. Upon completion, time prints the elapsed time during the command, the time spent in the system, and the time spent executing the command. Times are reported in seconds. Execution time can depend on the performance of the memory in which the program is running. The times are printed on standard error. Note that the shell also has a keyword time that times an entire pipeline if ... |
|
timex(1) -- time a command; report process data and system activity
|
|
timex reports in seconds the elapsed time, user time, and system time spent in execution of the given command. Optionally, process accounting data for command and all its children can be listed or summarized, and total system activity during the execution interval can be reported. The output of timex is written on the standard error. Timex returns an exit status of 1 if it is used incorrectly, if ... |
|
top(1) -- display and update information about the top processes on the system
|
|
top displays the top processes on the system and periodically updates the information. Raw CPU percentage is used to rank the processes. On a PA-RISC, hard-partitionable platform, top issues a warning that it reports only for the current partition and it has to be run on other partitions if their status is required. |
|
touch(1) -- update access, modification, and/or change times of file
|
|
touch updates the access, modification, and last-change times of each argument. The file name is created if it does not exist. If no time is specified (see date(1)) the current time is used. The -r and -t options are mutually exclusive. |
|
tput(1) -- query terminfo database
|
|
The tput command uses the terminfo database to make terminal-dependent capabilities and information available to the shell (see terminfo(4)). The tput command outputs a string if the attribute (capname) is of type string, or an integer if the attribute is of type integer. If the attribute is of type boolean, tput simply sets the exit code (0 for TRUE, 1 for FALSE), and produces no output. |
|
tr(1) -- translate characters
|
|
tr copies the standard input to the standard output with substitution or deletion of selected characters. Input characters from string1 are replaced with the corresponding characters in string2. If necessary, string1 and string2 can be quoted to avoid pattern matching by the shell. tr recognizes the following command line options: -A Translates on a byte-by-byte basis. When this flag is specified ... |
|
true(1) -- return exit status zero or one respectively
|
|
The command true does nothing, and returns exit code zero. The command false does nothing, and returns exit code one. They are typically used to construct command procedures. |
|
tryfrom(1) -- utility programs for TCP Wrappers
|
|
tryfrom This program identifies the end-point details related to a connection. This program must be called via a remote shell command as shown below. It is used to find out if the hostname and the address are properly recognized, and also if the username lookup works properly. # remsh host /usr/bin/tryfrom tryfrom prints the following output when it is invoked: client address (%a): client hostname... |
|
tset(1) -- terminal-dependent initialization
|
|
tset sets up the terminal when logging in on an HP-UX system. It does terminal-dependent processing, such as setting erase and kill characters, setting or resetting delays, and sending any sequences needed to properly initialize the terminal. It first determines the type of terminal involved, then does the necessary initializations and mode settings. The type of terminal attached to each HP-UX por... |
|
tsm(1) -- Terminal Session Manager
|
|
tsm allows a user to interact with more than one shell or application (session) from a single terminal. Each session is bound to a virtual device emulating the physical terminal. The emulation includes maintaining display state, softkeys, and terminal modes for each session. The virtual device can be manipulated like the actual terminal by using stty and ioctl (see stty(1) and ioctl(2)). Additiona... |
|
tsm.command(1) -- send commands to the Terminal Session Manager (TSM)
|
|
tsm.command is used to send a command string programmaticly to the Terminal Session Manager (TSM), as if the string were typed on the TSM command line. tsm.command fails unless it is run from inside a TSM session. Actions caused by tsm.command affect only the instance of TSM that tsm.command is run under. command can have any value that is a valid key sequence for the TSM command line. The sequenc... |
|
tsm.info(1) -- get Terminal Session Manager state information
|
|
tsm.info is used to obtain information about TSM. When run from inside a TSM session it returns valid information; otherwise it fails with a nonzero error code. Information returned is written to standard output. request can have any of the following values: is_a_window Successful (returns zero) if executed from a TSM session, nonzero error code otherwise. session_number Writes the session number ... |
|
tsm.lpadmin(1m) -- add or remove a printer for use with tsm(1)
|
|
tsm.lpadmin is used to add (or remove) a printer to the LP spooling system when the printer is connected to the system through a terminal running the Terminal Session Manager (see tsm(1)). tsm.lpadmin is a shell script that uses lpadmin in the normal way but also creates a named pipe to which LP output is directed (see lpadmin(1)). This named pipe is opened by TSM and data flowing from it is sent ... |
|
tsort(1) -- topological sort
|
|
tsort produces on the standard output a totally ordered list of items consistent with a partial ordering of items mentioned in the input text file. If no file is specified, the standard input is understood. tsort is generally used in conjunction with the lorder command to sort the objects to be installed in a library by ar (see lorder(1) and ar(1)). The input consists of pairs of text items (nonem... |
|
ttsyncd(1m) -- Daemon to maintain the nis+ password table in sync with the nis+ trusted table.
|
|
ttsyncd checks that each login name in the nis+ password (passwd) table appears in the nis+ trusted table. It will create a user entry in the trusted table for every user that exists in the password table and NOT in the trusted table. Each nis+ user can potentially log in to an HP trusted system; thus, ttsyncd aids trusted systems by creating an entry in the trusted table before the nis+ user logs... |
|
tty(1) -- get the name of the terminal
|
|
tty and pty print the path name of the user's terminal. The -s option inhibits printing of the terminal path name and any diagnostics, providing a means to test only the exit code. |
|
ttytype(1) -- terminal identification program
|
|
ttytype automatically identifies the current terminal type by sending an identification request sequence to the terminal. This method works for local, modem, and remote terminal connections, as well as for the hpterm and xterm terminal emulators. Once the terminal has been identified, ttytype prints the terminal's type to the standard output (see terminfo(4)). This string is usually used as the v... |
|
tunefs(1m) -- tune up an existing HFS file system
|
|
The tunefs command is used to alter dynamic parameters that affect HFS file system layout policies. Parameters to be altered are specified by the options and arguments provided on the command line as described below. tunefs affects how the file system blocks are laid out on the disk. The default rotdelay value set by the newfs and mkfs commands (see newf ) is 0 milliseconds, causing file system bl... |
|
tunefs_hfs(1m) -- tune up an existing HFS file system
|
|
The tunefs command is used to alter dynamic parameters that affect HFS file system layout policies. Parameters to be altered are specified by the options and arguments provided on the command line as described below. tunefs affects how the file system blocks are laid out on the disk. The default rotdelay value set by the newfs and mkfs commands (see newf ) is 0 milliseconds, causing file system bl... |
|
turnacct(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
u370(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
u3b(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
u3b10(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
u3b2(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
u3b5(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
udcc(1) -- user-defined character raster font compiler
|
|
udcc compiles udc_file in UDC raster font format, and merges it with font_file. Font file specified by font_file must be in PCF (Portable Compiled Format) . The merged file is written to the dest_file in PCF. If udc_file is omitted, the standard input is read. If dest_file is not specified, the standard output is used. |
|
udpublickey(1m) -- update the publickey database file and the NIS map
|
|
udpublickey is executed from the updaters(1M) makefile when either newkey or rpc.ypupdated updates the /etc/publickey database file. udpublickey receives the following information from newkey or rpc.ypupdated: Requestor's name (a string) Type of update Number of bytes in key Key Number of bytes in data Data After receiving this information, udpublickey attempts to update the publickey database fi... |
|
ul(1) -- do underlining
|
|
ul reads the named files (or standard input if none are given) and translates occurrences of underscores to the sequence which indicates underlining for the terminal in use, as specified by the environment variable TERM. The -t option overrides the terminal type specified in the environment. The terminfo(4) file corresponding to TERM is read to determine the appropriate sequences for underlining. ... |
|
umask(1) -- set or display the file mode creation mask
|
|
The umask command sets the value of the file mode creation mask or displays the current one. The mask affects the initial value of the file mode (permission) bits for subsequently created files. |
|
umodem(1) -- XMODEM-protocol file transfer program
|
|
umodem is a file transfer program that incorporates the well-known XMODEM protocol used on CP/M systems and on the HP 110 portable computer. |
|
umount(1m) -- mount and unmount file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. directory, which must already exist, will become the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. special and directory must be given as absolute path na... |
|
umountall(1m) -- mount and unmount multiple file systems
|
|
mountall is used to mount file systems according to file_system_table. By default, /etc/fstab is the file_system_table. If a dash (-) is specified, mountall reads file_system_table from the standard input; the standard input must be in the same format as the /etc/fstab. Before each file system is mounted, a check is done using fsck (see fsck(1M)) to ensure that the file system is mountable. If the... |
|
umount_cdfs(1m) -- mount and unmount CDFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. directory, which must already exist, will become the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. special and directory must be given as absolute path na... |
|
umount_hfs(1m) -- mount and unmount HFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. directory, which must already exist, will become the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. special and directory must be given as absolute path na... |
|
umount_lofs(1m) -- mount and unmount LOFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts LOFS file systems. Only superuser can mount LOFS file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. mount, attaches special_directory, a directory from one of the mounted file systems, to directory, an another directory in one of the mounted file systems. This enables new file systems to be created, which provide access to existing directories or file sy... |
|
umount_nfs(1m) -- mount and unmount NFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches host:path to :path to path to directory. host is a remote system, path is a directory on this remote system and directory is a directory on the local file tree. directory must already exist, be given as an absolute path name and will bec... |
|
umount_vxfs(1m) -- mount and unmount VxFS file systems
|
|
mount attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. (This directory is also known as the mount point). directory, which must already exist, becomes the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. If you omit either special or directory, mount attempts to determine the missing value from an entry in /etc/fstab. mount can be invoked on any removable fi... |
|
unadvertise(1m) -- Removes the global server entry from the cell profile
|
|
The unadvertise command causes DTS to remove the server's name from the cell profile and binding from the related CDS entry, deleting the server's global status. |
|
unalias(1) -- standard and restricted POSIX.2-conformant command shells
|
|
Shell Invocation Tilde Substitution Environment Options Command Substitution Functions rsh Restrictions Parameter Substitution Jobs Definitions Blank Interpretation Signals Commands File Name Generation Execution Simple Commands Quoting Command Reentry Compound Commands Arithmetic Evaluation Command Line Editing Special Commands Prompting emacs/gmacs Editing Mode Comments Conditional Expressions v... |
|
uname(1) -- display information about computer system; set node name (system name)
|
|
In the first form above, the uname command displays selected information about the current computer system, derived from the utsname structure (see uname(2)). In the second form, uname sets the node name (system name) that is used in the utsname structure. |
|
uncompact(1) -- compact and uncompact files, and cat them
|
|
compact compresses the named files using an adaptive Huffman code. If no file names are given, standard input is compacted and sent to the standard output. compact operates as an on-line algorithm. Each time a byte is read, it is encoded immediately according to the current prefix code. This code is an optimal Huffman code for the set of frequencies seen so far. It is unnecessary to attach a decod... |
|
uncompress(1) -- compress and expand data
|
|
The following commands compress and uncompress files and directory subtrees as indicated: compress Reduce the size of the named files using adaptive Lempel-Ziv coding. If reduction is possible, each file is replaced by a new file of the same name with the suffix .Z added to indicate that it is a compressed file. Original ownership, modes, access, and modification times are preserved. If no file is... |
|
uncompressd(1) -- compress and expand data
|
|
The following commands compress and uncompress files and directory subtrees as indicated: compress Reduce the size of the named files using adaptive Lempel-Ziv coding. If reduction is possible, each file is replaced by a new file of the same name with the suffix .Z added to indicate that it is a compressed file. Original ownership, modes, access, and modification times are preserved. If no file is... |
|
unexpand(1) -- expand tabs to spaces, and vice versa
|
|
expand processes the named files or the standard input and writes to the standard output with tabs changed into spaces. Backspace characters are preserved in the output, and the column count is decreased by one column for tab calculations. For proper tab calculation, if a multi-column character is to be "backspace'd", it should be followed by multiple backspace characters which equal to it's c... |
|
unget(1) -- undo a previous get of an SCCS file
|
|
The unget command undoes the effect of a get -e done prior to creating the intended new delta. If file is a directory name, unget treats each file in the directory as a file to be processed, except that non-SCCS files and unreadable files are silently ignored. If - is specified for file, the standard input is read with each line being taken as the name of an SCCS file to be processed. Refer to sac... |
|
unifdef(1) -- remove preprocessor lines
|
|
unifdef simulates some of the actions of cpp in interpreting C language preprocessor command lines (see cpp(1)). For unifdef, a valid preprocessor command line contains as its first character a # and one of the following keywords: ifdef, ifndef, if, else, or endif. The # character and its associated keyword must appear on the same line, but they can be separated by spaces, tabs, and commented text... |
|
uniq(1) -- report repeated lines in a file
|
|
uniq reads the input text file input_file, comparing adjacent lines, and copies the result to output_file. If input_file is not specified, the standard input and standard output are used. If input_file is specified, but output_file is not, results are printed to standard output. input_file and output_file must not be the same file. |
|
units(1) -- conversion program
|
|
units converts quantities expressed in various standard scales to their equivalents in other scales. It works interactively as follows: System Prompt User Response You have: inch You want: cm The system responds with two factors; one used if multiplying (preceded by *), the other if dividing (preceded by /): * 2.540000e+00 / 3.937008e-01 After providing the conversion factors, units prompts for th... |
|
unlink(1m) -- execute link() and unlink() system calls without error checking
|
|
The link and unlink commands perform their respective system calls (link() or unlink()) on their arguments, abandoning most error checking. These commands can be executed only by users who have appropriate privileges. |
|
unpack(1) -- compress and expand files
|
|
pack attempts to store the specified files in a compressed form. Wherever possible, each input file name is replaced by a packed file name.z with the same ownership, modes, and access and modification times. The .z with the same ownership, modes, and access and modification times. The -f option forces packing of name. This is useful for causing an entire directory to be packed even if some of the ... |
|
untic(1m) -- terminfo de-compiler
|
|
untic translates a terminfo file from the compiled format into the source format. If the environment variable TERMINFO is set to a path name, untic checks for a compiled terminfo description of the terminal under the path specified by TERMINFO before checking /usr/share/lib/terminfo. Otherwise, only /usr/share/lib/terminfo is checked. Normally untic uses the terminal type obtained from the TERM en... |
|
update-ux(1m) -- updates the HP-UX operating system from new HP-UX media
|
|
The update-ux command updates the HP-UX operating system to a newer version. Use update-ux when updating the operating system (OS), and installing or changing operating environments (OEs). update-ux works only with source depots containing the OS and OEs such as HP-UX 11i OE DVDs. When using other media as source, use swinstall(1M) instead. update-ux will always attempt to update the OS. These bun... |
|
updaters(1m) -- configuration file for NIS updating
|
|
updaters is a makefile used for updating the Network Information Service (NIS) databases. Databases can be updated only if the network is secure, that is, only if there is a NIS publickey database ( publickey.byname). The default updaters script will update only the publickey.byname map. An entry in the file is a make target for a particular NIS database. For example, if you wanted to add passwd.b... |
|
ups_mond(1m) -- HP PowerTrust Uninterruptible Power System monitor daemon
|
|
When it detects a loss of AC power for a period of time exceeding a configured limit, ups_mond ensures file system integrity by shutting down HP-UX. To do this, ups_mond uses the device special files specified in its configuration file (/etc/ups_conf by default) to monitor the state of each HP PowerTrust Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) attached to the system. Use the -f option to specify a conf... |
|
uptime(1) -- show how long system has been up, and/or who is logged in and what they are doing
|
|
uptime prints the current time, the length of time the system has been up, the number of users logged on to the system, and the average number of jobs in the run queue over the last 1, 5, and 15 minutes for the active processors. w is linked to uptime and prints the same output as uptime -w, displaying a summary of the current activity on the system. |
|
useradd(1m) -- add a new user login to the system
|
|
The useradd command creates a user login on the system by adding the appropriate entry to the /etc/passwd file and any security files, modifying the /etc/group file as necessary, creating a home directory, and copying the appropriate default files into the home directory depending on the command line options. The new login remains locked until the passwd (see passwd(1)) command is invoked. |
|
userdel(1m) -- delete a user login from the system
|
|
The userdel command deletes a user login from the system by modifying the appropriate login related files. The userdel command requires the login argument. login is the name to be deleted, specified as a string of printable characters. It may not contain a colon (:) or a newline (\n). |
|
usermod(1m) -- modify a user login on the system
|
|
The usermod command modifies a user login on the system by changing the appropriate login related files. The usermod command requires the login argument. login is a new login name, specified as a string of printable characters. It may not contain a colon (:) or a newline (\n). |
|
users(1) -- compact list of users who are on the system
|
|
users lists the login names of the users currently on the system in a compact, one-line format. The login names are sorted in ascending collation order (see Environment Variables below). |
|
utmp2wtmp(1m) -- overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands
|
|
Accounting software is structured as a set of tools (consisting of both C programs and shell procedures) that can be used to build accounting systems. The shell procedures, described in acctsh(1M), are built on top of the C programs. Connect time accounting is handled by various programs that write records into the utmps database. The programs described in acctcon(1M) convert this file into sessio... |
|
utmpd(1m) -- user accounting database daemon
|
|
utmpd, user accounting database daemon, manages the user accounting database which is the database of currently logged-in users. This was previously maintained by /etc/utmp and /etc/utmpx files on HP-UX. Upon startup, utmpd writes its pid to the file /etc/useracct/utmpd_pid. Applications can add, update, or query entries into the database using the getuts() APIs. See the getuts(3C) manual page for... |
|
uucheck(1m) -- check the uucp directories and permissions file
|
|
The uucp commands, including uucheck, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uucheck checks for the presence of the files and directories required by uucp (see uucp(1)). uucheck is executed from the UUCP makefile before the installation occurs. uucheck also checks for various obvious errors in the /etc/uucp/Permissions file. |
|
uucico(1m) -- transfer files for the uucp system
|
|
The uucp commands, including uucico, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uucico scans the /var/spool/uucp directories for work files. If such files exist, a connection to a remote system is attempted using the line protocol for the remote system specified in file /etc/uucp/Systems. uucico then executes all requests for work and logs the results. |
|
uuclean(1m) -- uucp spool directory clean-up
|
|
The uucp commands, including uuclean, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uuclean scans the spool directories for files with the specified prefix and deletes all those that are older than the specified number of hours. |
|
uucleanup(1m) -- uucp spool directory clean-up
|
|
The uucp commands, including uucleanup, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uucleanup scans the spool directories for old files and takes appropriate action to remove them. Depending on the options selected, uucleanup performs the following: + Informs the requestor of send and/or receive requests for systems that cannot be reached. + Returns mail that cannot be delivered t... |
|
uucp(1) -- UNIX system to UNIX system copy
|
|
uucp copies files named by the source_files argument to the destination identified by the destination_file argument. When copying files to or from a remote system, source_files and destination_file can be a path name on the local system, or have the form: system_name!path_!path_path_name where system_name is the name of a remote system in a list of system names known to uucp. When copying files to... |
|
uucpd(1m) -- UUCP over TCP/IP server daemon
|
|
The uucp commands, including uucpd, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uucpd is the server for supporting UUCP connections over TCP/IP networks. uucpd is invoked by inetd(1M) when a UUCP connection is established (that is, a connection to the port indicated in the "uucp" service specification; see services(4)), and executes the following protocol: 1) The server prompts ... |
|
uudecode(1) -- encode/decode a binary file for transmission by mailer
|
|
uuencode and uudecode can be used to send a binary file to another machine by means of such services as elm(1), mailx(1), or uucp(1) (see elm(1), mailx(1), and uucp(1)). uuencode takes the named source file (default standard input) and produces an encoded version on the standard output. The encoding uses only printing ASCII characters, includes the original mode of the input file, and preserves th... |
|
uuencode(1) -- encode/decode a binary file for transmission by mailer
|
|
uuencode and uudecode can be used to send a binary file to another machine by means of such services as elm(1), mailx(1), or uucp(1) (see elm(1), mailx(1), and uucp(1)). uuencode takes the named source file (default standard input) and produces an encoded version on the standard output. The encoding uses only printing ASCII characters, includes the original mode of the input file, and preserves th... |
|
uugetty(1m) -- set terminal type, modes, speed and line discipline
|
|
The uucp commands, including uugetty, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uugetty sets terminal type, modes, speed and line discipline. It is similar to getty, except that uugetty supports using the line in both directions (see getty(1M)). This allows users to log in, but, if the line is free, uucico, cu, and ct can dial out (see uucico(1), cu(1), and ct(1)). When devices ... |
|
uuidgen(1) -- Generates a Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)
|
|
The uuidgen command creates a UUID string that you assign to an object to uniquely identify it. One such use is in the UUID interface attribute of an IDL interface definition. The format for representing a UUID string consists of eight hexadecimal digits followed by a dash, followed by three groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by dashes, followed by a dash and twelve hexadecimal digits: 01... |
|
uulog(1) -- UNIX system to UNIX system copy
|
|
uucp copies files named by the source_files argument to the destination identified by the destination_file argument. When copying files to or from a remote system, source_files and destination_file can be a path name on the local system, or have the form: system_name!path_!path_path_name where system_name is the name of a remote system in a list of system names known to uucp. When copying files to... |
|
uuls(1m) -- list spooled uucp transactions grouped by transaction
|
|
The uucp commands, including uuls, are targeted for removal from HPUX; see the WARNINGS below. This command lists the contents of UUCP spool directories (default /var/spool/uucp/*) with the files in each directory grouped into three categories: + Transactions, + Orphans, and + Others. |
|
uuname(1) -- UNIX system to UNIX system copy
|
|
uucp copies files named by the source_files argument to the destination identified by the destination_file argument. When copying files to or from a remote system, source_files and destination_file can be a path name on the local system, or have the form: system_name!path_!path_path_name where system_name is the name of a remote system in a list of system names known to uucp. When copying files to... |
|
uupath(1) -- access and manage the pathalias database
|
|
The uucp commands, including uupath and mkuupath, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uupath provides electronic message routing by expanding a simple UUCP address into a full UUCP path (see uucp(1)). For example, host!user could be expanded into !user could be expanded into user could be expanded into hostA!hostB!host!user. !hostB!host!user. hostB!host!user. !host!user. h... |
|
uupick(1) -- public UNIX system to UNIX system file copy
|
|
uuto sends source-files to destination. uuto uses the uucp facility to send files (see uucp(1)), while allowing the local system to control the file access. A source-file name is a path name on your machine. Destination has the form: system!user where !user where user where system is taken from a list of system names that uucp knows about (see uuname in uucp(1) manual entry). user is the login nam... |
|
uusched(1m) -- schedule uucp transport files
|
|
The uucp commands, including uusched, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uusched is the UUCP file transport scheduler. It is usually started by the daemon uudemon.hour, which is started by cron (see cron(1M)) from the following entry in /var/spool/cron: 39 * * * * /usr/bin/su uucp -c */usr/lbin/uucp/uudemon.hour > /dev/null* |
|
uusnap(1m) -- show snapshot of the UUCP system
|
|
The uucp commands, including uusnap, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uusnap displays in tabular format a synopsis of the current UUCP situation. The format of each line is as follows: site N Cmds N Data N Xqts Message Where site is the name of the site with work, N is a count of each of the three possible types of work (command, data, or remote execute), and Message is... |
|
uusnaps(1m) -- sort and embellish uusnap output
|
|
The uucp commands, including uusnaps, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uusnaps runs uusnap (see uusnap(1M)) and post-processes the output into a more useful form. It sorts output lines in ``Pareto-style'', showing first those remote systems with the greatest number of Cmds files, next Data files, and then Xqts files. uusnaps inserts a * after the number of Xqts files ... |
|
uustat(1) -- uucp status inquiry and job control
|
|
uustat displays the status of, or cancels, previously specified uucp commands, or provide general status on uucp connections to other systems (see uucp(1)). Only one of the following options can be specified with uustat per command execution: -a Output all jobs in queue. -m Report the status of accessibility of all machines. -p Execute a ps -flp for all the process IDs that are in the lock files. ... |
|
uusub(1m) -- monitor uucp network
|
|
The uucp commands, including uusub, are targeted for removal from HPUX; see the WARNINGS below. uusub defines a uucp subnetwork and monitors the connection and traffic among the members of the subnetwork. |
|
uuto(1) -- public UNIX system to UNIX system file copy
|
|
uuto sends source-files to destination. uuto uses the uucp facility to send files (see uucp(1)), while allowing the local system to control the file access. A source-file name is a path name on your machine. Destination has the form: system!user where !user where user where system is taken from a list of system names that uucp knows about (see uuname in uucp(1) manual entry). user is the login nam... |
|
uutry(1) -- UNIX system to UNIX system copy
|
|
uucp copies files named by the source_files argument to the destination identified by the destination_file argument. When copying files to or from a remote system, source_files and destination_file can be a path name on the local system, or have the form: system_name!path_!path_path_name where system_name is the name of a remote system in a list of system names known to uucp. When copying files to... |
|
uux(1) -- UNIX system to UNIX system command execution
|
|
uux gathers zero or more files from various systems, executes a command on a specified system, then sends standard output to a file on a specified system. Note that, for security reasons, many installations limit the list of commands executable on behalf of an incoming request from uux. Many sites will permit little more than the receipt of mail (see mail(1), mailx(1), and elm(1)) via uux. The com... |
|
uuxqt(1m) -- execute remote uucp or uux command requests
|
|
The uucp commands, including uuxqt, are targeted for removal from HPUX; see the WARNINGS below. uuxqt executes remote job requests generated by use of the uux command (see uux(1)). uux generates X. files and places them in the spool directory, where uuxqt searches for them. For each X. file, uuxqt determines whether the required data files are available and accessible, and if file commands are per... |
|
ux2dos(1) -- convert ASCII file format
|
|
dos2ux and ux2dos read each specified file in sequence and write it to standard output, converting to HP-UX format or to DOS format, respectively. Each file can be either DOS format or HP-UX format for either command. A DOS file name is recognized by the presence of an embedded colon (:) delimiter; see dosif(4) for DOS file naming conventions. If no input file is given or if the argument - is enco... |
|
vacation(1) -- return ``I am not here'' indication
|
|
The vacation program returns a message to the sender of a message telling them that you are currently not reading your mail. The intended use is in a .forward file in $HOME. For example, your .forward file might contain: \eric, "|/usr/bin/vacation -a allman eric" which would send messages to you (assuming your login name was eric) and reply to any messages for eric or allman. The \ preceding e... |
|
val(1) -- validate SCCS file
|
|
The val command reads one or more files to determine whether each file read is an SCCS file meeting the characteristics specified by the optional argument list. Command-line options may appear in any order, and are described below. |
|
vax(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
vc(1) -- substitutes assigned values in place of identification keywords.
|
|
The vc, or version control command copies lines from the standard input to the standard output under control of command line arguments and control statements encountered in the standard input. In the process of performing the copy operation, user declared keywords can be replaced by their string value when they appear in plain text and/or control statements. The copying of lines from the standard ... |
|
vedit(1) -- screen-oriented (visual) text editor
|
|
The vi (visual) program is a display-oriented text editor that is based on the underlying ex line editor (see ex(1)). It is possible to switch back and forth between the two and to execute ex commands from within vi. The line-editor commands and the editor options are described in ex(1). Only the visual mode commands are described here. The view program is identical to vi except that the readonly ... |
|
vgcfgbackup(1m) -- create or update LVM volume group configuration backup file
|
|
The vgcfgbackup command saves the LVM configuration for a volume group in a default or alternate configuration backup file (see the -f option). By default, vgcfgbackup runs automatically each time an LVM command changes the LVM configuration. In this case, it always uses the default configuration backup file. An existing default configuration backup file is renamed with an extension of .old. |
|
vgcfgrestor(1m) -- display or restore LVM volume group configuration from backup file
|
|
The vgcfgrestore command restores the LVM configuration data from a default (-n option) or alternate (-f option) configuration backup file to the physical volume named by pv_path. Or, it displays the configuration data on standard output (-l option). The configuration stored for one physical volume, old_pv_path, can be copied to another physical volume pv_path (-o option). |
|
vgchange(1m) -- set LVM volume group availability
|
|
The vgchange command with the -a option activates or deactivates one or more volume groups. The vgchange command with the -c option controls the membership of one or more volume groups in a high availability cluster. The vgchange command with the -c and -S options control the membership of a volume group and mark it sharable. The vgchange command without the -P resync_daemon_count option (default)... |
|
vgchgid(1m) -- modify the Volume Group ID (VGID) on a given set of physical devices
|
|
The vgchgid command is designed to change the LVM Volume Group ID (VGID) on a supplied set of disks. vgchgid will work with any type of storage, but it is primarily targeted at disk arrays that are able to create "snapshots" or "clones" of mirrored LUNs. vgchgid accepts a set of raw physical devices and checks the following criteria before it alters the VGID: + All raw physical volume devices ... |
|
vgcreate(1m) -- create LVM volume group
|
|
The vgcreate command creates a new volume group. vg_name is a symbolic name for the volume group and must be used in all references to it. vg_name is the path to a directory entry under /dev that must contain a character special file named group. Except for the group entry, the vg_name directory should be empty. The vg_name directory and the group file have to be created by the user (see lvm(7)). ... |
|
vgdisplay(1m) -- display information about LVM volume groups
|
|
The vgdisplay command displays information about volume groups. For each vg_name specified, vgdisplay displays information for that volume group only. If no vg_name is specified, vgdisplay displays names and corresponding information for all defined volume groups. The volume group must be activated (see vgchange(1M)) before it can be displayed. |
|
vgexport(1m) -- export an LVM volume group and its associated logical volumes
|
|
Using the format of the first command line of the SYNOPSIS above, the vgexport command can be used to remove a volume group from the system. The volume group will be removed without modifying the logical volume information found on the physical volumes. The volume group identified by vg_name is removed from the /etc/lvmtab file, and the associated device files including the vg_name directory and g... |
|
vgextend(1m) -- extend an LVM volume group by adding physical volumes
|
|
The vgextend command assigns additional physical volumes to volume group vg_name. The volume group must be active. Volume groups are extended by adding one or more physical volumes specified by pv_path ... After the physical volumes have been successfully added to the volume group, the disk space they contain can be allocated to logical volumes. Before assigning an additional physical volume to a ... |
|
vgimport(1m) -- import an LVM volume group onto the system
|
|
The vgimport command adds the specified volume group to the system. The physical volumes, specified as pv_path ..., are scanned to obtain the volume group information and logical volume information. This command works much like vgcreate by requiring that the volume group device directory and the group special file be created before the command is executed (see vgcreate(1M)). The vg_name is added f... |
|
vgreduce(1m) -- remove physical volumes from an LVM volume group
|
|
The vgreduce command removes each physical volume specified by a pv_path argument from volume group vg_name. The vgreduce command with -f option removes all missing physical volume from the volume group. All but one physical volume can be removed. The last physical volume must remain in the volume group so that the logical volume driver can continue to operate. The last physical volume in the volu... |
|
vgremove(1m) -- remove LVM volume group definition from the system
|
|
The vgremove command removes from the system the last physical volume of the volume group and the definition of the volume group or groups specified by vg_name .... Since all system knowledge of the volume group and its contents are removed, the volume group can no longer be accessed. To move a volume group from one system to another, use the vgexport command instead (see vgexport(1M)). Before exe... |
|
vgrestore(1m) -- restore a VxVM disk group back to an LVM volume group
|
|
The vgrestore command restores a Logical Volume Manager (LVM) volume group that was previously converted to a VxVM disk group by the vxvmconvert utility. |
|
vgscan(1m) -- scan physical volumes for LVM volume groups
|
|
The vgscan command allows the re-creation of the /etc/lvmtab file and possibly the associated volume group device files. This command should be run only in the event of a catastrophic error such as the deletion of the /etc/lvmtab file or the mismatch of names of the physical volumes in the /etc/lvmtab file to the actual physical volume path configuration. If the /etc/lvmtab file exists, the inform... |
|
vgsync(1m) -- synchronize stale logical volume mirrors in LVM volume groups
|
|
The vgsync command synchronizes the physical extents of each mirrored logical volume in the volume group specified by vg_name .... Synchronization occurs only on the physical extents that are stale mirrors of the original logical extent. The synchronization process can be time consuming, depending on the hardware characteristics and the amount of data. Unless disabled, the mirrors within a volume ... |
|
vi(1) -- screen-oriented (visual) text editor
|
|
The vi (visual) program is a display-oriented text editor that is based on the underlying ex line editor (see ex(1)). It is possible to switch back and forth between the two and to execute ex commands from within vi. The line-editor commands and the editor options are described in ex(1). Only the visual mode commands are described here. The view program is identical to vi except that the readonly ... |
|
view(1) -- screen-oriented (visual) text editor
|
|
The vi (visual) program is a display-oriented text editor that is based on the underlying ex line editor (see ex(1)). It is possible to switch back and forth between the two and to execute ex commands from within vi. The line-editor commands and the editor options are described in ex(1). Only the visual mode commands are described here. The view program is identical to vi except that the readonly ... |
|
vipw(1m) -- edit the password file
|
|
vipw edits the password file while setting the appropriate locks, and does any necessary processing after the password file is unlocked. If the password file is already being edited, you will be told to try again later. The vi editor is used unless the environment variable EDITOR indicates an alternate editor. vipw performs a number of consistency checks on the password entry for root, and does no... |
|
vis(1) -- make unprintable and non-ASCII characters in a file visible or invisible
|
|
vis reads characters from each file in sequence and writes them to the standard output, converting those that are not printable or not ASCII into a visible form. inv performs the inverse function, reading printable characters from each file, returning them to non-printable or non-ASCII form, if appropriate, then writing them to standard output; Non-printable ASCII characters are represented using ... |
|
vmstat(1) -- report virtual memory statistics
|
|
The vmstat command reports certain statistics kept about process, virtual memory, trap, and CPU activity. It also can clear the accumulators in the kernel sum structure. |
|
volcopy(1m) -- copy a file system with label checking
|
|
The volcopy command makes a literal copy of the file system using a block size matched to the device. |
|
volcopy_hfs(1m) -- copy an HFS file system with label checking
|
|
The volcopy command makes a literal copy of an HFS file system using a block size matched to the device. |
|
volcopy_vxfs(1m) -- copy a VxFS file system with label checking
|
|
volcopy makes a literal copy of a VxFS file system using a block size matched to the device. |
|
vradmin(1m) -- administer VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR) in a distributed environment
|
|
The vradmin utility performs administrative tasks on a Replicated Data Set (RDS) in a VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR) environment. Tasks available in vradmin include configuring, administering and displaying Replicated Data Sets, synchronizing remote volumes, and migrating or taking over the Primary role in the RDS. Note: vradmin is a VVR-specific utility and requires a valid VVR license. A Replic... |
|
vrnotify(1m) -- display VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR) events
|
|
The vrnotify utility displays events related to VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR) as managed by Volume Replicator Administrative Services (VRAS) daemon, vradmind. The vrnotify command is a VVRspecific utility and requires a valid VVR license. A Replicated Data Set (RDS) is comprised of a Replicated Volume Group (RVG) on the Primary host and its counterparts on the Secondary hosts. Note: An RDS is a ... |
|
vrport(1m) -- VERITAS Volume Replicator port management utility
|
|
The vrport utility manages the various UDP and TCP ports used by VERITAS Volume Replicator(VVR). VVR uses the UDP and TCP transport protocols to communicate between the Primary and Secondary. VVR exchanges three types of message between the Primary and Secondary - heartbeat, data and administrative control. The heartbeat messages are transmitted using the UDP protocol on the IANA approved 4145 UDP... |
|
vt(1) -- log into another system over lan
|
|
vt enables a user to log into another HP 9000 system (nodename) over an HP local area network. The -p option causes vt to send a poll request over the local area network to find out what systems currently have vtdaemon running (see vtdaemon(1M)). An asterisk (*) following a nodename in the response indicates that the system is a vt gateway. Plus signs (+) following the nodename indicate how many v... |
|
vtdaemon(1m) -- respond to vt requests
|
|
vtdaemon responds to requests from other systems (via local area network) made by vt (see vt(1)). vtdaemon spawns a server to respond to each request that it receives. |
|
vxassist(1m) -- create, relayout, convert, mirror, backup, grow, shrink, delete, and move volumes
|
|
The vxassist utility is a command-line interface to the VERITAS Volume - 1 - Formatted: January 24, 2005 vxassist(1M) VxVM 3.5 vxassist(1M) 1 Jun 2002 Manager (VxVM) that: + Finds space for and creates volumes + Performs volume conversion + Adds mirrors and logs to existing volumes + Extends and shrinks existing volumes + Migrates data from a specified set of disks + Provides facilities for the on... |
|
vxbootsetup(1m) -- set up system boot information on a VERITAS Volume Manager disk
|
|
The vxbootsetup utility configures physical disks so that they can be used to boot the system. Before vxbootsetup is called to configure a disk, the required volumes, standvol, rootvol and swapvol (and optionally, dumpvol) must be created on the disk. All of these volumes must be contiguous with only one subdisk. If no medianame arguments are specified, all disks that contain usable mirrors of the... |
|
vxclustadm(1m) -- start, stop, and reconfigure a cluster
|
|
The vxclustadm utility activates and deactivates cluster functionality on a node in a cluster. vxclustadm provides an interface to the clustering functionality of VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) in the absence of a cluster monitor. Caution: If there is no cluster monitor or if GAB is used as the cluster monitor, ensure that you completely understand the functionality of this command. Otherwise, clus... |
|
vxconfigd(1m) -- VERITAS Volume Manager configuration daemon
|
|
The VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) configuration daemon, vxconfigd, maintains disk configurations and disk groups in VxVM. vxconfigd takes requests from other utilities for configuration changes, and communicates those changes to the kernel and modifies configuration information stored on disk. vxconfigd also initializes VxVM when the system is booted. |
|
vxcp_lvmroot(1m) -- copy LVM root disk onto new VERITAS Volume Manager root disk
|
|
The vxcp_lvmroot command copies (or "clones") the volumes associated with an LVM root volume group to volumes of equal size (unless the -R option is specified) on a VxVM root disk group. VxVM rootability means that VxVM controls the disk containing the root file system. The vxcp_lvmroot command provides a means of achieving VxVM rootability when upgrading from a prior release of HP-UX without ha... |
|
vxdco(1m) -- perform operations on DCO objects and DCO volumes
|
|
The vxdco command is used to manipulate data change objects (DCO objects or DCOs) and DCO volumes that allow the use of Persistent FastResync with volumes. The att operation attaches a DCO object, dco, to a volume, volume. If the DCO object has an associated DCO volume, you can use the command vxvol set fmr=on volume to enable Persistent FastResync on the volume after the attP operation has comple... |
|
vxdctl(1m) -- control the volume configuration daemon
|
|
The vxdctl utility manages aspects of the state of the volume configuration daemon, vxconfigd, and also manages aspects of configuration for bootstrapping the rootdg disk group. The volboot file forms a key element in managing the state of vxconfigd and bootstrapping the rootdg disk group. This file contains a host ID that VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) uses to establish ownership of physical disks... |
|
vxddladm(1m) -- Device Discovery Layer subsystem administration
|
|
The vxddladm utility is an administrative interface to the dynamic array support facility of the Device Discovery Layer(DDL). This utility lists the types of arrays supported, adds or removes array support from DDL, and allows dynamic addition of JBOD support for disks from different vendors. It additionally lists supported JBODs, and allows addition or removal of JBOD support. The vxddladm utilit... |
|
vxdestroy_lvmroot(1m) -- remove LVM root disk and associated LVM volume group
|
|
The vxdestroy_lvmroot command tears down and removes the LVM volume group associated with the specified physical disk. This is done by removing the volumes in the volume group and then removing the volume group. |
|
vxdg(1m) -- manage VERITAS Volume Manager disk groups
|
|
The vxdg utility performs basic administrative operations on disk groups. Operations include the creation of disk groups, the addition of disks to a disk group, disk group split/join, and disk group imports and deports. Note: A license is necessary to use the Disk Group Split/Join feature. The behavior of the vxdg utility depends upon the keyword specified as the first operand. A diskgroup argumen... |
|
vxdisk(1m) -- define and manage VERITAS Volume Manager disks
|
|
The vxdisk utility performs basic administrative operations on disks. Operations include initializing and replacing disks, as well as taking care of some book-keeping necessary for the disk model presented by VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM). accessname refers to the disk access name, while disk represents the disk media name. vxdisk accesses disks based on disk access names, which are system-specifi... |
|
vxdiskadd(1m) -- add one or more disks for use with VERITAS Volume Manager
|
|
The vxdiskadd utility configures disks for use by VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM). Disks must already have been formatted. vxdiskadd prompts the user for a disk group name and disk name for the disks. If no disk group name specified, the disks will be left as unassigned replacement disks for future use. A new disk group may be created that will become the disks' disk group. If a disk group is speci... |
|
vxdiskadm(1m) -- menu-driven VERITAS Volume Manager disk administrator
|
|
vxdiskadm provides a menu-driven interface to perform common VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) disk administration tasks. The vxdiskadm script is interactive and prompts you for responses, supplying defaults where appropriate. Help is available at every prompt by entering a question mark (?) to display a context-sensitive help message. To add disks, specify one or more disks with a disk-address-patter... |
|
vxdisksetup(1m) -- configure a disk for use with VERITAS Volume Manager
|
|
The vxdisksetup command configures the disk for use by VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM). vxdisksetup is called by the vxdiskadd command as part of initial disk configuration. It is not typically necessary to call this command directly. vxdisksetup creates a VERITAS Volume Manager private configuration region and public region for allocating subdisks. The vxdiskunsetup command reverses the configurati... |
|
vxdiskusg(1m) -- generate VxFS disk accounting data by user ID
|
|
vxdiskusg generates intermediate disk accounting information from data in file, or the standard input if the -s option is specified and file is omitted. vxdiskusg outputs lines on the standard output, one line per user, in the following format: uid login #blocks where: uid User's numerical user ID login User's login name #blocks Total number of disk blocks allocated to this user Without the -s o... |
|
vxdmpadm(1m) -- DMP subsystem administration
|
|
The vxdmpadm utility is an administrative interface to the VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) Dynamic Multipathing (DMP) facility. vxdmpadm lists the paths under a DMP device, gets the DMP device corresponding to a path, lists all the disk controllers on the system, lists all the paths through a host disk controller, lists all the DMP nodes through a disk array, and enables or disables a host disk cont... |
|
vxdump(1m) -- incremental VxFS file system dump, local or across network
|
|
vxdump copies to magnetic tape all files in the vxfs filesystem that have been changed after a certain date. This information is derived from the files /etc/fstab and a timestamp file, by default /etc/dumpdates. rvxdump copies the files to a tape drive on a remote system. rvxdump runs a process, /usr/sbin/rmt, on the remote machine to access the tape device. vxdump and rvxdump support both getopt(... |
|
vxedit(1m) -- create, remove, and modify VERITAS Volume Manager records
|
|
The vxedit utility sets and changes attributes for VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) configuration records that do not depend upon volume usage types. See vxvol(1M) for operations that can set attributes that are dependent upon usage types. In particular, setting the length and logging type for a volume requires use of the vxvol set operation. Each invocation can be applied to only one disk group at a... |
|
vxenablef(1m) -- enable VxFS DMAPI, OnLineJFS, or full VxFS functionality in the kernel
|
|
vxenablef enables VxFS DMAPI (Data Management Applications Programming Interface), OnLineJFS functionality, or full VxFS functionality in the kernel. If you have valid licenses for these features, vxenablef makes them available without rebuilding a new kernel and rebooting the system. If no argument is specified, vxenablef displays the available licensed features enabled in the kernel. |
|
vxevac(1m) -- evacuate all volumes from a disk
|
|
The vxevac utility moves subdisks off the specified VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) disk (medianame) to the specified destination disks (new_medianame...). If no new_medianame arguments are specified, any non-volatile, non-reserved disks can be used as destination disks. Subdisks that are part of unmirrored striped plexes are moved by moving the entire plex to a new location. Note: This operation as... |
|
vxfsconvert(1m) -- convert a file system to a vxfs file system or upgrade a VxFS disk layout version.
|
|
vxfsconvert converts a file system of a supported type to a vxfs file system with a Version 4 disk layout. Currently vxfsconvert only supports conversion of an hfs file system to a vxfs file system. Conversion of all file system block and fragment sizes is supported. After a file system is converted to vxfs, its block size is the value of the fragment size before conversion. vxfsconvert also conve... |
|
vxfsstat(1m) -- display VxFS file system statistics
|
|
vxfsstat is a statistical reporter to aid in performance tuning and determining performance anomalies. vxfsstat gathers buffer cache, inode cache, DNLC (directory name lookup cache), per-CPU statistics, per-file system statistics for local and cluster mounted file system, and global cluster file system counters. The mount_point specifies any VxFS file system mount point. mount_point is used as an ... |
|
vxibc(1m) -- perform VERITAS Volume Replicator In-Band Control Messaging operations
|
|
The vxibc utility is specific to VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR) and requires a valid license. The vxibc command-line utility performs In-Band Control Messaging (IBC) operations. It allows applications to inject user-defined control messages into the update stream of a Replicated Volume Group (RVG). An IBC message is delivered on the Secondary node in causal order with respect to other activity on... |
|
vximportdg(1m) -- import a disk group into the VERITAS Volume Manager configuration
|
|
The vximportdg utility performs a temporary import of the disk group contained on the disk device specified by daname to the disk group specified by new_dgname. As the persistent disk group information is not changed within the private partition of the affected disk, the import is only valid for the duration of the bootload or until a vxdg deport is performed. |
|
vxinfo(1m) -- print accessibility and usability of volumes
|
|
The vxinfo utility reports a usage-type-dependent condition on one or more volumes in a disk group. A report for each volume specified by the volume operand is written to the standard output. If no volume operands are given, then a volume condition report is provided for each volume in the selected disk group. Each invocation can be applied to only one disk group at a time. Any volume operands wil... |
|
vxinstall(1m) -- menu-driven VERITAS Volume Manager initial configuration procedure
|
|
The vxinstall utility provides a menu driven interface to configure VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM). After you install the VERITAS Volume Manager software package (VRTSvxvm), run vxinstall to configure VxVM for initial use on your system. You can use the files /etc/vx/cntrls.exclude, /etc/vx/disks.exclude and /etc/vx/enclr.exclude to automatically exclude controllers or disks from use by vxinstall s... |
|
vxintro(1m) -- introduction to the VERITAS Volume Manager utilities
|
|
The VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) utilities provide a shell-level interface for use by system administrators and high-level applications and scripts to query and manipulate objects managed through VxVM. |
|
vxiod(1m) -- start, stop, and report on VERITAS Volume Manager kernel daemons
|
|
The vxiod utility starts, stops, or reports on VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) I/O daemons. An I/O daemon provides a process context for performing I/O in VxVM. VERITAS Volume Manager I/O daemons are not required for correct operation, but not having I/O daemons can adversely affect system performance. When invoked with no arguments, vxiod prints the current number of volume I/O daemons on the stand... |
|
vxlicense(1m) -- VxFS and VxVM licensing key utility
|
|
vxlicense maintains the VxFS and VxVM license key files. |
|
vxmake(1m) -- create VERITAS Volume Manager configuration records
|
|
The vxmake utility creates subdisk, plex, and volume records for VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM). Records can be created entirely from parameters specified on the command line, or they can be created using a description file. vxmake can also create a data change object (DCO) that is used to implement Persistent FastResync on a volume. When the VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR) option is available, vxm... |
|
vxmemstat(1m) -- display memory statistics for VERITAS Volume Manager
|
|
The vxmemstat utility prints memory statistics information. This information is system-wide and not specific to a disk group, volume or any other Volume Manager object. |
|
vxmend(1m) -- mend simple problems in configuration records
|
|
The vxmend utility performs various VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) usage-type-specific operations on subdisk, plex, and volume records. The first operand is a keyword that determines the specific operation to perform. The remaining operands specify the configuration objects to which the operation is applied. Each invocation can be applied to only one disk group at a time. Any name operands will be ... |
|
vxmirror(1m) -- mirror volumes on a disk or control default mirroring
|
|
The vxmirror command provides a mechanism to mirror the contents of a specified disk, to mirror all currently un-mirrored volumes in the specified disk group, or to change or display the current defaults for mirroring. All volumes that have only a single plex (mirror copy), are mirrored by adding an additional plex. Volumes containing subdisks that reside on more than one disk are not mirrored by ... |
|
vxnotify(1m) -- display VERITAS Volume Manager configuration events
|
|
The vxnotify utility displays events related to disk and configuration changes, as managed by the VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) configuration daemon, vxconfigd. If vxnotify is running on a system where the VxVM cluster feature is active, it displays events related to changes in the cluster state of the system on which it is running. vxnotify displays requested event types until killed by a signal,... |
|
vxpfto(1m) -- set Powerfail Timeout (pfto)
|
|
Powerfail Timeout is an attribute of a SCSI disk connected to an HP-UX host (see the pfto(7) man page). The vxpfto command sets the Powerfail Timeout interval on a set of Volume Manager disks, either all disks in a disk group, or all disks underlying the volumes listed. The first form of the command sets the same PFTO value for all the disks in the specified VxVM diskgroup. In the second form, all... |
|
vxplex(1m) -- perform VERITAS Volume Manager operations on plexes
|
|
The vxplex utility performs VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) operations on plexes and on volume-and-plex combinations. The first operand is a keyword that determines the specific operation to perform. The remaining operands specify the configuration objects to which the operation is to be applied. Each operation can be applied to only one disk group at a time. Any volume or plex operands are used to ... |
|
vxprint(1m) -- display records from the VERITAS Volume Manager configuration
|
|
The vxprint utility displays complete or partial information from records in VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) disk group configurations. Records can be selected by name or with special search expressions. Selecting RVG and RLINK records via search expressions is not currently supported. Additionally, record association hierarchies can be displayed in an orderly fashion so that the structure of record... |
|
vxr5check(1m) -- verify RAID-5 volume parity
|
|
The vxr5check utility compares the parity of each stripe of a RAID-5 volume specified by volume. vxr5check reads the data for each stripe, generates the parity for this stripe, and compares this parity with the existing parity. vxr5check can be run against the entire RAID-5 volume, or incrementally on RAID-5 stripe boundaries, by specifying the -i option. |
|
vxreattach(1m) -- reattach disk drives that have once again become accessible
|
|
The vxreattach utility reattaches disks to the disk group they were in and retains the same media name. This operation may be necessary if a disk has a transient failure, or if VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) starts with some disk drivers unloaded and unloadable. Disks then enter the failed state. If the problem is fixed, vxreattach may be able to reattach the disks without plexes being flagged as s... |
|
vxrecover(1m) -- perform volume recovery operations
|
|
The vxrecover utility performs plex attach, RAID-5 subdisk recovery, and resynchronize operations for the named volumes, or for volumes residing on the specified disks medianame. If no medianame or volume is specified, the operation applies to all volumes, or to all volumes in the specified disk group. If -s is specified, disabled volumes are started. With -s and -n, volumes are started, but no ot... |
|
vxrelayout(1m) -- convert online storage from one layout to another
|
|
Online relayout is a process where storage in a volume or a plex is converted from one layout to another maintaining data availability at all times. You can convert any supported VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) layout to another and change the stripe width or the number columns. You can also perform only stripe width and column changes. The transformation of a volume or a plex must be initiated usin... |
|
vxrelocd(1m) -- monitor VERITAS Volume Manager for failure events and relocate failed subdisks
|
|
The vxrelocd command monitors VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) by analyzing the output of the vxnotify command, and waits for a failure. When a failure occurs, vxrelocd sends mail via mailx to root (by default) or to other specified users and relocates failed subdisks. After completing the relocation, vxrelocd sends more mail indicating the status of each subdisk replacement. The vxrecover utility is... |
|
vxresize(1m) -- change the length of a volume containing a file system
|
|
The vxresize command either grows or shrinks both the file system and its underlying volume to match the specified new volume length. The ability to grow or shrink is file system dependent. Some file system types may require that the file system be unmounted for the operation to succeed, as shown in the following table: ______________________________________________________________ | | Online JFS ... |
|
vxrestore(1m) -- restore file system incrementally, local or across network
|
|
vxrestore and rvxrestore read tapes previously dumped by the vxdump or rvxdump command (see vxdump(1M)). vxrestore restores from tape on the local system; rvxrestore restores from tape on a remote system. rvxrestore runs /usr/sbin/rmt on the remote machine to access the tape device. vxrestore and rvxrestore support both getopt(3C) and traditional restore command line invocations as shown above. Th... |
|
vxres_lvmroot(1m) -- restore LVM root disk from VERITAS Volume Manager root disk
|
|
The vxres_lvmroot command initializes the specified physical disks as a Logical Volume Manager (LVM) root disks under HP-UX. The resulting LVM root volume group is named vg## where ## is the first number starting at 00 that creates a unique LVM volume group name. The specified disks must have enough space to accommodate the total size of all of the volumes in the VxVM root disk group. The new LVM ... |
|
vxrlink(1m) -- perform VERITAS Volume Manager operations on RLINKs
|
|
The vxrlink utility performs VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) operations on RLINKs (rlinks). vxrlink is specific to VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR), which requires a valid license. The first operand is a keyword that determines the specific operation to perform. Each operation can be applied to only one disk group at a time. Any rlink and rvg operands are used to determine a default local disk group,... |
|
vxrootmir(1m) -- create a mirror of a VERITAS Volume Manager root disk
|
|
The vxrootmir command creates mirrors of all of the volumes on a VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) rootable boot disk, and makes the new disk bootable. The disk to be used as a mirror can be specified either by its VM disk name, dmname (disk media name), or by its device name, daname (disk access name). If a disk media name is specified, it is validated to make sure that it exists and that it has been... |
|
vxrvg(1m) -- perform VERITAS Volume Manager operations on RVGs
|
|
The vxrvg utility performs VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) operations on replicated volume groups (RVGs). vxrvg is specific to VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR), which requires a valid license. The first operand is a keyword that determines the specific operation to perform. Each operation can be applied to only one diskgroup at a time. The rvg operand is used to determine a default local disk group, ... |
|
vxsd(1m) -- perform VERITAS Volume Manager operations on subdisks
|
|
The vxsd utility performs VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) operations on subdisks and on plex-and-subdisk combinations. The first operand is a keyword that determines the specific operation to perform. The remaining operands specify the configuration objects to which the operation is to be applied. Each operation can be applied to only one disk group at a time. Any plex or subdisk name operands will ... |
|
vxsparecheck(1m) -- monitor VERITAS Volume Manager for failure events and replace failed disks
|
|
The vxsparecheck command monitors VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) by analyzing the output of the vxnotify command, waiting for failures to occur. It then sends mail via mailx to the logins specified on the command line, or (by default) to root. It then replaces any failed disks. After an attempt at replacement is complete, mail will be sent indicating the status of each disk replacement. The mail no... |
|
vxstat(1m) -- VERITAS Volume Manager statistics management utility
|
|
The vxstat utility prints and resets statistics information on one or more volumes, plexes, subdisks, or disks. The vxstat utility reads statistics from the volume device files in the directory /dev/vx/rdsk and prints them to standard output. These statistics represent volume, plex, subdisk, and disk activity since boot time. If no object operands are given, then statistics from all volumes in the... |
|
vxtask(1m) -- list and administer VERITAS Volume Manager tasks
|
|
The vxtask utility performs basic administrative operations on VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) tasks that are running on the system. Operations include listing tasks (subject to filtering), modifying the state of a task (aborting, pausing, resuming), and modifying the rate of progress of a task. VERITAS Volume Manager tasks represent long-term operations in progress on the system. Every task provide... |
|
vxtrace(1m) -- trace operations on volumes
|
|
The vxtrace utility prints kernel error or I/O trace event records on the standard output or writes them to a file in binary format. Binary trace records written to a file can be read back and formatted by vxtrace as well. If no arguments are specified, vxtrace reports either all error trace data or all I/O trace data on all virtual disk devices. With error trace data, it is possible to select all... |
|
vxtunefs(1m) -- tune a VxFS File System
|
|
vxtunefs sets or prints tuneable I/O parameters of mounted file systems. vxtunefs can set parameters describing the I/O properties of the underlying device, parameters to indicate when to treat an I/O as direct I/O, or parameters to control the extent allocation policy for the specified file system. With no options specified, vxtunefs prints the existing VxFS parameters for the specified file syst... |
|
vxumount(1m) -- unmount a VxFS file system
|
|
vxumount unmounts a currently mounted VxFS file system, which you can specify either as a mount_point or as special, the device on which the file system resides. Note: Only a privileged user can unmount file systems. |
|
vxunreloc(1m) -- move a hot-relocated subdisk back to its original disk
|
|
The VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) hot-relocation feature can detect an I/O failure in a subdisk, relocate the subdisk, and recover the plex associated with the subdisk. vxunreloc lets you reverse the process and move the hot-relocated subdisks back onto a disk that was replaced after a disk failure. dm_name specifies the disk where the hot-relocated subdisks originally resided. The -n option moves... |
|
vxupgrade(1m) -- upgrade the disk layout of a VxFS file system
|
|
vxupgrade prints the current disk layout version number for a VxFS file system or upgrades the file system to a new disk layout. vxupgrade operates on file systems mounted for read/write access: mount_point must be a mounted VxFS file system. Only a privileged user can query or upgrade a VxFS file system. When invoked with the -n option, vxupgrade upgrades the disk layout to the specified version.... |
|
vxvmboot(1m) -- prepare VERITAS Volume Manager volume as a root, boot, primary swap or dump volume
|
|
The vxvmboot command updates information in the LABEL file for the lif disk specified by the pathname of its character (raw) device node, rawpath. The volume at the specified offset and length becomes the boot, root, primary swap or dump volume when the system is next booted. This command is normally invoked by the vxbootsetup utility. |
|
vxvmconvert(1m) -- convert LVM volume groups to VxVM disk groups
|
|
vxvmconvert is a menu-driven program to convert an HP Logical Volume Manger (LVM) configuration to a VERITAS Volume Manager configuration. This man page is a brief overview of vxvmconvert. Refer to the VERITAS Volume Manager Migration Guide for a detailed description before using the conversion procedure. The vxvmconvert script is interactive and prompts you for responses, supplying defaults where... |
|
vxvol(1m) -- perform VERITAS Volume Manager operations on volumes
|
|
The vxvol utility performs VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) operations on volumes. The first operand is a keyword that determines the specific operation to perform. The remaining operands specify configuration records to which the operation is to be applied. - 1 - Formatted: January 24, 2005 vxvol(1M) VxVM 3.5 vxvol(1M) 1 Jun 2002 Each operation can be applied to only one disk group at a time. Any vo... |
|
vx_emerg_start(1m) -- start VERITAS Volume Manager from recovery media
|
|
The vx_emerg_start utility can be used to start VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) when a system is booted from alternate media, or when a system has been booted into Emergency Mode Boot mode. This allows a rootable VxVM configuration to be repaired in the event of a catastrophic failure. vx_emerg_start verifies that the /etc/vx/volboot file exists, and checks the command-line arguments against the con... |
|
w(1) -- show how long system has been up, and/or who is logged in and what they are doing
|
|
uptime prints the current time, the length of time the system has been up, the number of users logged on to the system, and the average number of jobs in the run queue over the last 1, 5, and 15 minutes for the active processors. w is linked to uptime and prints the same output as uptime -w, displaying a summary of the current activity on the system. |
|
waconf(1m) -- display and configure web administration tool
|
|
The waconf command configures the behavior of the web administration server use by the kcweb and pdweb commands. If no options are specified, waconf displays the current configuration. Only the superuser can change the configuration. |
|
wait(1) -- await process completion
|
|
If no argument is specified, wait waits until all processes (started with &) of the current shell have completed, and reports on abnormal terminations. If a numeric argument pid is given and is the process ID of a background process, wait waits until that process has completed. Otherwise, if pid is not a background process, wait exits without waiting for any processes to complete. Because the wait... |
|
wall(1m) -- write message to all users
|
|
Without arguments, the wall command reads a message from standard input until end-of-file. Then it sends this message to all currently logged-in users preceded by: Broadcast Message from ... If the -ggroupname option is specified, groupname option is specified, wall sends the message to all currently logged-in groupname members (as specified in /etc/group) preceded by: Broadcast Message from ... t... |
|
wc(1) -- count words, lines, and bytes or characters in a file
|
|
The wc command counts lines, words, and bytes or characters in the named files, or in the standard input if no file names are specified. It also keeps a total count for all named files. A word is a string of characters delimited by spaces, tabs, or newlines. |
|
wdutil(1) -- manipulate Native Language I/O word dictionary
|
|
wdutil is used to manipulate the word dictionary used by Native Language I/O for phrase and word conversion. The word dictionary consists of a key entries block and a data entries block. The key entries block holds the designations, and the data entries block holds the words corresponding to each designation. wdutil also functions as a filter for transforming a word dictionary to a text file, and ... |
|
what(1) -- get SCCS identification information
|
|
The what command searches the given files for all occurrences of the pattern that get(1) substitutes for %Z% (currently @(#) at this printing) and prints out what follows until the first ", >, new-line, \, or null character. For example, if the C program in file f.c contains char ident[] = "@(#)identification information"; and f.c is compiled to yield f.o and a.out, the command what f.c f.o a.... |
|
whereis(1) -- locate source, binary, and/or manual for program
|
|
whereis locates source, binary, and manuals sections for specified files. The supplied names are first stripped of leading path name components and any (single) trailing extension of the form .ext (such as ext (such as .c). Prefixes of s. resulting from use of SCCS are also dealt with. whereis then attempts to locate the desired program in a list of standard places. |
|
which(1) -- locate a program file including aliases and paths
|
|
For each name given, which searches for the file that would be executed if name were given as a command, and displays the absolute path of that file. Each argument is expanded if it is aliased, and searched for along the user's path. Both aliases and path are determined by sourcing (executing) the user's .cshrc file. |
|
who(1) -- who is on the system
|
|
The who command can list the user's name, terminal line, login time, elapsed time since input activity occurred on the line, the user's host name, and the process-ID of the command interpreter (shell) for each current system user. It examines the utmps database to obtain the information. If file is given, that file is examined, file should be a utmp like file. The who command with the am i or am... |
|
whoami(1) -- print effective current user id
|
|
whoami prints your current user name, even if you have used su to change it since your initial login (see su(1)). The command who am i reports your initial login name because it uses /etc/utmp. |
|
whodo(1m) -- which users are doing what
|
|
The whodo command produces merged, reformatted, and dated output from the who, ps and acctcom commands (see who(1) , ps(1) and acctcom(1M)). If user is specified, output is restricted to all sessions pertaining to that user. The following options are available: -h Suppress the heading. -l Produce a long form of output. The fields displayed are: the user's login name, the name of the tty the user ... |
|
whois(1) -- Internet user name directory service
|
|
whois looks up records in the Network Information Center database. The operands specified to whois are concatenated together (separated by white-space) and presented to the whois server. The default action, unless directed otherwise with a special name, is to do a very broad search, looking for matches to name in all types of records and most fields (name, nicknames, hostname, net address, etc.) i... |
|
write(1) -- interactively write (talk) to another user
|
|
The write command copies lines from your terminal to that of another user. When first called, it sends the message: Message from yourname (yourterminal) [ yourterminal) [ ) [ date ] ... to the receiving user's terminal. When it has successfully completed the connection, it also sends two bells to your own terminal to indicate that what you are typing is being sent. To set up two-way communication... |
|
wtmpfix(1m) -- manipulate connect accounting records
|
|
fwtmp fwtmp reads from the standard input and writes to the standard output, converting binary records of the type found in wtmps to formatted ASCII records. The ASCII version is useful to enable editing, via ed(1), bad records or for general purpose maintenance of the file. The argument -ic is used to denote that input is in ASCII form, and output is to be written in binary form. The arguments i ... |
|
X(1) -- a portable, network-transparent window system
|
|
X Window System servers run on computers with bitmap displays. The server distributes user input to and accepts output requests from various client programs through a variety of different interprocess communication channels. Although the most common case is for the client programs to be running on the same machine as the server, clients can be run transparently from other machines (including machi... |
|
x11start(1) -- start the X11 window system
|
|
NOTE: Beginning with the next release of HP-UX, x11start and its components (xinit, sys.x11start, and sys.Xdefaults) will not be supported. vuelogin (an enhanced version of xdm) will perform all start-up tasks, regardless of whether or not HP-VUE is in use. See the HP Visual Environment User's Guide and the vuelogin man page for information on vuelogin. x11start is a shell script that provides a ... |
|
xargs(1) -- construct argument list(s) and execute command
|
|
xargs combines the fixed initial-arguments with arguments read from standard input to execute the specified command one or more times. The number of arguments read for each command invocation and the manner in which they are combined are determined by the options specified. command, which can be a shell file, is searched for, using the $PATH environment variable. If command is omitted, /usr/bin/ec... |
|
xauth(1) -- X authority file utility
|
|
The xauth program is used to edit and display the authorization information used in connecting to the X server. This program is usually used to extract authorization records from one machine and merge them in on another (as is the case when using remote logins or granting access to other users). Commands (described below) may be entered interactively, on the xauth command line, or in scripts. Note... |
|
xclock(1) -- analog / digital clock for X
|
|
The xclock program displays the time in analog or digital form. The time is continuously updated at a frequency which may be specified by the user. |
|
xcmsdb(1) -- Device Color Characterization utility for X Color Management System
|
|
xcmsdb is used to load, query, or remove Device Color Characterization data stored in properties on the root window of the screen as specified in section 7, Device Color Characterization, of the ICCCM. Device Color Characterization data (also called the Device Profile) is an integral part of Xlib's X Color Management System (Xcms), necessary for proper conversion of color specification between de... |
|
xd(1) -- octal and hexadecimal dump
|
|
od and xd concatenate one or more input files and write their contents to standard output in a user-specified format. If file is not specified, the standard input is used. |
|
Xf86(1) -- X Window System display server
|
|
Xf86 is name for the XFree86 Window System display server delivered by Hewlett Packard. |
|
xf86config_convert(1) -- convert XF86Config file format
|
|
|
|
xfs(1) -- X font server
|
|
Xfs is the X Window System font server. It supplies fonts to X Window System display servers. |
|
xhost(1) -- server access control program for X
|
|
The xhost program is used to add and delete host names or user names to the list allowed to make connections to the X server. In the case of hosts, this provides a rudimentary form of privacy control and security. It is only sufficient for a workstation (single user) environment, although it does limit the worst abuses. Environments which require more sophisticated measures should implement the us... |
|
Xhp(1) -- X Window System server
|
|
X is the generic name for the window system server. It is started by the dtlogin program which is typically run by init(1M). Alternatively it may be started from the xinit(1) program, which is called by x11start. The displaynumber argument is used by clients in their DISPLAY environment variables to indicate which server to contact (machines may have several displays attached). This number can be ... |
|
xjim(1) -- Japanese input server on X Window
|
|
xjim is a japanese input server which can connect with application programs through XIM (X Window System, Version11 Input Method) interface. Before starting xjim, Kana Kanji conversion server kks must be executed in advance. Normally, kks is invoked automatically at system boot time. |
|
xlsfonts(1) -- server font list displayer for X
|
|
Xlsfonts lists the fonts that match the given pattern. The wildcard character "*" may be used to match any sequence of characters (including none), and "?" to match any single character. If no pattern is given, "*" is assumed. The "*" and "?" characters must be quoted to prevent them from being expanded by the shell. |
|
xmbind(1) -- Configures virtual key bindings
|
|
xmbind is an X Window System client that configures the virtual key bindings for Motif applications. This action is performed by mwm at its startup, so the xmbind client is only needed when mwm is not in use, or when you want to change bindings without restarting mwm. If a file is specified, it's contents are used as the virtual key bindings. If a file is not specified, the file .motifbind in the... |
|
xmodmap(1) -- utility for modifying keymaps in X
|
|
The xmodmap program is used to edit and display the keyboard modifier map and keymap table that are used by client applications to convert event keycodes into keysyms. It is usually run from the user's session startup script to configure the keyboard according to personal tastes. |
|
xntpd(1m) -- Network Time Protocol daemon
|
|
xntpd is an operating system daemon which sets and maintains the system time-of-day in synchronism with Internet standard time servers. xntpd is a complete implementation of the Network Time Protocol (NTP) version 3, as defined by RFC-1305, but also retains compatibility with version 1 and 2 servers as defined by RFC-1059 and RFC-1119, respectively. xntpd does all computations in 64-bit fixed poin... |
|
xntpdc(1m) -- special NTP query program
|
|
xntpdc is used to query the xntpd daemon about its current state and to request changes in that state. The program may be run either in interactive mode or controlled mode using command line arguments. Extensive state and statistics information is available through the xntpdc interface. In addition, nearly all the configuration options which can be specified at start up using xntpd's configuratio... |
|
xrdb(1) -- X server resource database utility
|
|
Xrdb is used to get or set the contents of the RESOURCE_MANAGER property on the root window of screen 0, or the SCREEN_RESOURCES property on the root window of any or all screens, or everything combined. You would normally run this program from your X startup file. Most X clients use the RESOURCE_MANAGER and SCREEN_RESOURCES properties to get user preferences about color, fonts, and so on for appl... |
|
Xserver(1) -- X Window System display server dispatcher
|
|
|
|
xset(1) -- user preference utility for X
|
|
This program is used to set various user preference options of the display. |
|
xsetroot(1) -- root window parameter setting utility for X
|
|
The setroot program allows you to tailor the appearance of the background ("root") window on a workstation display running X. Normally, you experiment with xsetroot until you find a personalized look that you like, then put the xsetroot command that produces it into your X startup file. If no options are specified, or if -def is specified, the window is reset to its default state. The -def optio... |
|
xsim(1) -- Simplified Chinese input server on X Window
|
|
xsim is a Simplified Chinese input server which can connect with application programs through XIM (X Window System, Version11 Input Method) interface. |
|
xstm(1m) -- Support Tools Manager
|
|
The Support Tools Manager (STM) provides three interfaces that allow a user access to an underlying toolset, consisting of information modules, firmware update tools, verifiers, diagnostics, exercisers, expert tools, and utilities: XSTM - the graphical interface (for X11-based graphics terminals) MSTM - the menu-based interface (for non-X11-based, non-graphics terminals) CSTM - the command line in... |
|
xstr(1) -- extract strings from C programs to implement shared strings
|
|
xstr maintains a file strings into which strings in component parts of a large program are hashed. These strings are replaced with references to this common area. This serves to implement shared constant strings, which are most useful if they are also read-only. The command: xstr -c name extracts the strings from the C source in name, replacing string references with expressions of the form (&xstr... |
|
xterm(1) -- terminal emulator for X
|
|
The xterm program is a terminal emulator for the X Window System. It provides DEC VT102/VT220 (VTxxx) and Tektronix 4014 compatible terminals for programs that cannot use the window system directly. If the underlying operating system supports terminal resizing capabilities (for example, the SIGWINCH signal in systems derived from 4.3bsd), xterm will use the facilities to notify programs running in... |
|
xtim(1) -- Traditional Chinese input methods server on X Window
|
|
xtim is a Traditional Chinese input methods server which can connect with application programs through XIMP (X Window System, Version 11 Input Method Protocol) interface. |
|
xudced(1) -- user-defined character editor
|
|
xudced is an editor that creates, modifies, and deletes user-defined characters (UDC). It uses bitmap(1) to edit UDC character patterns. Character patterns from existing HP Asian fonts can be modified to create UDCs. xudced runs on the X Window System, Version 11. If udc_file is not specified, the file $HOME/.nlio_udc is read. WIDTHxHEIGHT sets the size of UDC pattern. This can be specified by the... |
|
xwd(1) -- dump an image of an X window
|
|
Xwd is an X Window System window dumping utility. Xwd allows X users to store window images in a specially formatted dump file. This file can then be read by various other X utilities for redisplay, printing, editing, formatting, archiving, image processing, etc. The target window is selected by clicking the pointer in the desired window. The keyboard bell is rung once at the beginning of the dump... |
|
xwud(1) -- image displayer for X
|
|
Xwud is an X Window System image undumping utility. Xwud allows X users to display in a window an image saved in a specially formatted dump file, such as produced by xwd(1). |
|
xzoom(1) -- 0 xzoom- magnify parts of the screen
|
|
The xzoom program displays in its window a magnified area of the X11 display. The user can interactively change the zoomed area, the window size, magnification (optionally different magnification for X and Y axes) or rotate or mirror the image. |
|
yes(1) -- be repetitively affirmative
|
|
yes repeatedly outputs y, or if expletive is given, the expletive is output repeatedly. Termination is by interrupt. |
|
ypbind(1m) -- Network Information Service (NIS) server, binder, and transfer processes
|
|
The Network Information Service (NIS) provides a simple network lookup service consisting of databases and processes. The databases are files in a directory tree rooted at /var/yp (see ypfiles(4)). The processes are /usr/lib/netsvc/yp/ypserv, the NIS database lookup server, and /usr/lib/netsvc/yp/ypbind, the NIS binder. Both ypserv and ypbind are daemon processes activated at system startup time w... |
|
ypcat(1) -- print all values in Network Information Service map
|
|
ypcat prints all values in a Network Information Service (NIS) map specified by mname, which can be either a mapname or a map nickname. A map nickname is a synonym by which a NIS map can be referenced. Values are listed, one per line. |
|
ypinit(1m) -- build and install Network Information Service databases
|
|
ypinit is a shell script that creates Network Information Service (NIS) databases on either a master or slave NIS server. ypinit asks a few self-explanatory questions, and reports success or failure to the terminal. For an overview of Network Information Service, see ypfiles(4) and ypserv(1M). |
|
ypmake(1m) -- create or rebuild Network Information Service databases
|
|
ypmake is a shell script that builds one or more Network Information Service (NIS) maps (databases) on a master NIS server. If no arguments are specified, ypmake either creates maps if they do not already exist or rebuilds maps that are not current. These maps are constructed from ASCII files. ypmake then executes yppush to notify slave NIS servers of the change and make the slave servers copy the... |
|
ypmatch(1) -- print values of selected keys in Network Information Service map
|
|
ypmatch prints the values associated with one or more keys in a Network Information Service (NIS) map specified by mname. The mname can be either a mapname or a map nickname. A map nickname is a synonym by which a NIS map can be referenced. If multiple keys are specified, the same map is searched for an occurrence of each key. A match is made only when the case and length of a key is the same as t... |
|
yppasswd(1) -- change login password in Network Information System (NIS)
|
|
yppasswd changes or installs a password associated with the login name in the Network Information System (NIS). The NIS password can be different from the one on your own machine. If name is omitted, it defaults to the name returned by getlogin() (see getlogin(3C)). yppasswd prompts for the old NIS password (even if it does not exist), then twice for the new one. The old password must be entered c... |
|
yppasswdd(1m) -- daemon for modifying Network Information Service passwd database
|
|
The yppasswdd daemon handles password change requests from yppasswd (see yppasswd(1)). It changes a password entry in passwd_file, which must be in the format defined by passwd(4). The change is made only if the old password provided by yppasswd matches the encrypted password of that entry. yppasswdd should be executed only on the master Network Information Service (NIS) server for the passwd data... |
|
yppoll(1m) -- query NIS server for information about NIS map
|
|
yppoll asks a Network Information Service (NIS) server process (see ypserv(1M)) to return the order number (the time in seconds when the map was built - time(2)) and master NIS server's host name for a NIS database named mapname. yppoll then writes them to standard output. If the server uses Version 1 NIS protocol, yppoll uses this older protocol to communicate with it. yppoll also prints the old... |
|
yppush(1m) -- force propagation of Network Information Service database
|
|
yppush copies a Network Information Service (NIS) map (database), mapname, from the map's master NIS server to each slave NIS server. It is usually executed only on the master NIS server by shell script ypmake which is run either after changes are made to one or more of the master's NIS databases or when the NIS databases are first created. See ypmake(1M) and ypinit(1M) for more information on t... |
|
ypserv(1m) -- Network Information Service (NIS) server, binder, and transfer processes
|
|
The Network Information Service (NIS) provides a simple network lookup service consisting of databases and processes. The databases are files in a directory tree rooted at /var/yp (see ypfiles(4)). The processes are /usr/lib/netsvc/yp/ypserv, the NIS database lookup server, and /usr/lib/netsvc/yp/ypbind, the NIS binder. Both ypserv and ypbind are daemon processes activated at system startup time w... |
|
ypset(1m) -- bind to particular Network Information Service server
|
|
ypset tells ypbind to get Network Information Service (NIS) services for the specified domain from the ypserv process running on server (see ypserv(1M) and ypbind(1M)). server is the NIS server that the NIS client binds to, and is specified as either a host name or an IP address. If server is down or is not running ypserv, this is not discovered until a local NIS client process tries to obtain a b... |
|
ypupdated(1m) -- server for changing NIS information
|
|
ypupdated is a daemon that updates information in the Network Information Service (NIS) databases. It is activated at system startup when the NIS_MASTER_SERVER variable is set to 1 in /etc/rc.config.d/namesvrs file on the NIS master server. ypupdated consults the file updaters in the directory /var/yp to determine which NIS maps should be updated and how to change them. By default, the daemon requ... |
|
ypwhich(1) -- list which host is Network Information System server or map master
|
|
ypwhich lists the host name of the Network Information System (NIS) server that supplies NIS services to a NIS client. It can also print the NIS server that is the master for mname. The mname can be either a mapname or a map nickname. A map nickname is a synonym by which a NIS map can be referenced. If invoked without arguments, ypwhich prints the host name of the NIS server serving the local mach... |
|
ypxfr(1m) -- transfer NIS database from server to local node
|
|
ypxfr copies a Network Information Service (NIS) map (database) to the local host from a NIS server by using the NIS services. A map can be copied regardless of its age, or it can be copied depending on whether its modification time (order number) is more recent than that of the local map. The ypxfr command creates a temporary map in directory /var/yp/domain where domain is the NIS domain. The ypx... |
|
ypxfrd(1m) -- Network Information Service (NIS) server, binder, and transfer processes
|
|
The Network Information Service (NIS) provides a simple network lookup service consisting of databases and processes. The databases are files in a directory tree rooted at /var/yp (see ypfiles(4)). The processes are /usr/lib/netsvc/yp/ypserv, the NIS database lookup server, and /usr/lib/netsvc/yp/ypbind, the NIS binder. Both ypserv and ypbind are daemon processes activated at system startup time w... |
|
zcat(1) -- compress and expand data
|
|
The following commands compress and uncompress files and directory subtrees as indicated: compress Reduce the size of the named files using adaptive Lempel-Ziv coding. If reduction is possible, each file is replaced by a new file of the same name with the suffix .Z added to indicate that it is a compressed file. Original ownership, modes, access, and modification times are preserved. If no file is... |
|
accept(2) -- accept a connection on a socket
|
|
The accept() system call is used with connection-based socket types, such as SOCK_STREAM. The argument, s, is a socket descriptor created with socket(), bound to a local address by bind(), and listening for connections after a listen(). accept() extracts the first connection on the queue of pending connections, creates a new socket with the same properties as s, and returns a new file descriptor, ... |
|
access(2) -- determine accessibility of a file
|
|
The access() system call checks the file pointed to by path for accessibility according to the bit pattern contained in amode. access() uses the real user ID, not the effective user ID, and the real group ID, not the effective group ID. The value of amode is either the bit-wise inclusive OR of the access permissions to be checked, or the existence test. You can use the following symbolic constants... |
|
acct(2) -- enable or disable process accounting
|
|
The acct() system call enables or disables the system's process accounting routine. If the routine is enabled, an accounting record is written on an accounting file for each process that terminates. Termination can be caused by one of two things: an exit() call or a signal (see exit(2) and signal(5)). The effective user ID of the calling process must be superuser to use this call. path points to ... |
|
acl(2) -- set a file's Access Control List (ACL) information (JFS File Systems only)
|
|
The acl() system call is used to manipulate ACLs on JFS file system objects. pathp points to a pathname naming a file. nentries specifies how many ACL entries are pointed to by aclbufp. aclbufp is a pointer to the first element of an array of struct acl. This type is defined in as follows: struct acl { int a_type; /* entry type */ uid_t a_id; /* user or group ID */ ushort a_perm; /* en... |
|
adjtime(2) -- correct the time to synchronize the system clock
|
|
The function adjtime() adjusts the current time of the system. The time is either advanced or retarded by the amount of time specified in the struct timeval pointed to by delta. The adjustment is made by applying small correctional adjustments to the value of current time that the system keeps. The time is always increasing monotonically, but at a rate slightly slower or faster than normal. A time... |
|
aio_cancel(2) -- cancel an asynchronous I/O operation
|
|
The aio_cancel() function attempts to cancel the asynchronous I/O request currently outstanding for the aiocb referenced by aiocbp or, if aiocbp is NULL, any asynchronous I/O operations currently outstanding for the file descriptor fildes. If an asynchronous I/O operation is successfully canceled as a result of aio_cancel, its status is set to ECANCELED, and any signal delivery specified for that ... |
|
aio_error(2) -- return error status of an asynchronous I/O operation
|
|
The aio_error() function returns the error status of the asynchronous I/O operation that was initiated with the aiocb and referenced by aiocbp. The error status for an asynchronous I/O operation is the errno value set by the corresponding read(), write(), or fsync() function. To use this function, link in the realtime library by specifying -lrt on the compiler or linker command line. |
|
aio_fsync(2) -- force outstanding asynchronous operations on a file to the synchronized state
|
|
The aio_fsync() function asynchronously forces all I/O operations that are enqueued at the time of the call for the file or device referenced by aiocbp->aio_fildes to the synchronized I/O state. The function call returns when the synchronization request has been enqueued to the file or device (even when the data cannot be synchronized immediately). Successful completion of the aio_fsync() request ... |
|
aio_read(2) -- start an asynchronous read operation
|
|
The aio_read() function allows the calling process to perform an asynchronous read from a previously opened file. The function call returns when the read operation has been enqueued for processing. At this point, processing of the read operation may proceed concurrently with execution of the calling process or thread. If an error condition is detected that prevents the read request from being enqu... |
|
aio_reap(2) -- wait for multiple asynchronous I/O requests
|
|
The aio_reap() function is an extension of the aio_suspend() library function. Refer to the aio_suspend() manpage for a general description of the interface, the aiocb data structure and other structures relevant for asynchronous I/O (AIO). The timeout function parameter has the same meaning as for the aio_suspend() function. This function suspends the calling thread until at least waitfor AIO ope... |
|
aio_return(2) -- return status of an asynchronous I/O operation
|
|
The aio_return() function returns the return status associated with the aiocb structure referenced by the aiocbp argument. The return value for an asynchronous I/O operation is the value that would be set by the corresponding read(), write(), or fsync() operation. If the operation has been queued but not completed, aio_return() returns -1 and errno is set to EINPROGRESS. A successful aio_return() ... |
|
aio_suspend(2) -- wait for an asynchronous I/O operation to complete
|
|
The aio_suspend() function suspends the calling process or thread until at least one of the asynchronous I/O operations initiated with one of the nent aiocb pointers contained in list has completed, or a signal interrupts the function, or timeout is not NULL and the time interval specified by timeout has passed. Multiple threads may issue simultaneous calls to aio_suspend(), referencing one or mor... |
|
aio_write(2) -- start asynchronous write operation
|
|
The aio_write() function allows the calling process to perform an asynchronous write to a previously opened file. The function call returns when the write operation has been enqueued for processing. At this point, processing of the write operation may proceed concurrently with execution of the calling process or thread. If an error condition is detected that prevents the write request from being e... |
|
alarm(2) -- set a process's alarm clock
|
|
alarm() instructs the alarm clock of the calling process to send the signal SIGALRM to the calling process after the number of real-time seconds specified by sec have elapsed; see signal(5). Specific implementations might place limitations on the maximum supported alarm time. The constant MAX_ALARM defined in specifies the implementation-specific maximum. Whenever sec is greater that... |
|
audctl(2) -- start or halt the auditing system and set or get audit files
|
|
audctl() sets or gets the auditing system "current" and "next" audit files, and starts or halts the auditing system. This call is restricted to superusers. cpath and npath hold the absolute path names of the "current" and "next" files. mode specifies the audit file's permission bits. cmd is one of the following specifications: AUD_ON The caller issues the AUD_ON command with the required ... |
|
audswitch(2) -- suspend or resume auditing on the current process
|
|
audswitch() suspends or resumes auditing within the current process. This call is restricted to superusers. One of the following aflags must be used: AUD_SUSPEND Suspend auditing on the current process. AUD_RESUME Resume auditing on the current process. audswitch() can be used in self-auditing privileged processes to temporarily suspend auditing during intervals where auditing is to be handled by ... |
|
audwrite(2) -- write an audit record for a self-auditing process
|
|
audwrite() is called by trusted self-auditing processes, which are capable of turning off the regular auditing (using audswitch(2)) and doing higher-level auditing on their own. audwrite() is restricted to superusers. audwrite() checks to see if the auditing system is on and the calling process and the event specified are being audited. If these conditions are met, audwrite() writes the audit reco... |
|
bind(2) -- bind an address to a socket
|
|
The bind() system call assigns an address to an unbound socket. When a socket is created with socket(), it exists in an address space (address family) but has no address assigned. bind() causes the socket whose descriptor is s to become bound to the address specified in the socket address structure pointed to by addr. addrlen must specify the size of the address structure. Since the size of the so... |
|
brk(2) -- change data segment space allocation
|
|
brk() and sbrk() are used to change dynamically the amount of space allocated for the calling process's data segment; see exec(2). The change is made by resetting the process's break value and allocating the appropriate amount of space. The break value is the address of the first location beyond the end of the data segment. The amount of allocated space increases as the break value increases. Th... |
|
chdir(2) -- change working directory
|
|
chdir() and fchdir() cause a directory pointed to by path or fildes to become the current working directory, the starting point for path searches of path names not beginning with /. path points to the path name of a directory. fildes is an open file descriptor of a directory. For a directory to become the current working directory, a process must have execute (search) access to the directory. |
|
chmod(2) -- change file mode access permissions
|
|
The chmod() and fchmod() system calls set the access permission portion of the file's mode according to the bit pattern contained in mode. path points to a path name naming a file. fildes is a file descriptor. The following symbolic constants representing the access permission bits are defined with the indicated values in and are used to construct the mode argument. The value of mode... |
|
chown(2) -- change owner and group of a file
|
|
The chown() system call changes the user and group ownership of a file. path points to the path name of a file. chown() sets the owner ID and group ID of the file to the numeric values contained in owner and group respectively. A value of UID_NO_CHANGE or GID_NO_CHANGE can be specified in owner or group to leave unchanged the file's owner ID or group ID, respectively. Note that owner and group sh... |
|
chroot(2) -- change root directory
|
|
chroot() causes the named directory to become the root directory, the starting point for path searches for path names beginning with /. path points to a path name naming a directory. The user's working directory is unaffected by the chroot() system call. The effective user ID of the process must be a user having appropriate privileges to change the root directory. The .. entry in the root directo... |
|
clocks(2) -- clock operations
|
|
clock_settime() The clock_settime() function sets the specified clock, clock_id, to the value specified by tp. Time values that are between two consecutive non-negative integer multiples of the resolution of the specified clock are truncated down to the smaller multiple of the resolution. clock_gettime() The clock_gettime() function returns the current value tp for the specified clock, clock_id. c... |
|
clock_getres(2) -- clock operations
|
|
clock_settime() The clock_settime() function sets the specified clock, clock_id, to the value specified by tp. Time values that are between two consecutive non-negative integer multiples of the resolution of the specified clock are truncated down to the smaller multiple of the resolution. clock_gettime() The clock_gettime() function returns the current value tp for the specified clock, clock_id. c... |
|
clock_gettime(2) -- clock operations
|
|
clock_settime() The clock_settime() function sets the specified clock, clock_id, to the value specified by tp. Time values that are between two consecutive non-negative integer multiples of the resolution of the specified clock are truncated down to the smaller multiple of the resolution. clock_gettime() The clock_gettime() function returns the current value tp for the specified clock, clock_id. c... |
|
clock_settime(2) -- clock operations
|
|
clock_settime() The clock_settime() function sets the specified clock, clock_id, to the value specified by tp. Time values that are between two consecutive non-negative integer multiples of the resolution of the specified clock are truncated down to the smaller multiple of the resolution. clock_gettime() The clock_gettime() function returns the current value tp for the specified clock, clock_id. c... |
|
close(2) -- close a file descriptor
|
|
close() closes the file descriptor indicated by fildes. fildes is a file descriptor obtained from a creat(), open(), dup(), fcntl(), or pipe() system call. All associated file segments which have been locked by this process with the lockf() function are released (i.e., unlocked). |
|
connect(2) -- initiate a connection on a socket
|
|
The connect() function initiates a connection on a socket. s is a socket descriptor. addr is a pointer to a socket address structure containing the address of a remote socket to which a connection is to be established. addrlen is the size of this address structure. Since the size of the socket address structure varies among socket address families, the correct socket address structure should be us... |
|
CPU_IS_PA_R(2) -- get configurable system variables
|
|
The sysconf() system call provides a way for applications to determine the current value of a configurable limit or variable. The name argument represents the system variable being queried. The following table lists the configuration variable name, the associated value for the name argument that is used in the sysconf() call and the value returned: Variable Value for name Value Returned __________... |
|
crashconf(2) -- configure system crash dumps
|
|
crashconf() changes the current system crash dump configuration. The crash dump configuration consists of: + The crash dump device list. This list identifies all devices that can be used to store a crash dump. The devices are used in reverse order, last specified to first. + The included class list. This list identifies all system memory classes that must be included in any crash dump. + The exclu... |
|
creat(2) -- create a new file or rewrite an existing one
|
|
The creat() system call creates a new regular file or prepares to rewrite an existing file named by the path name pointed to by path. If the file exists, its length is truncated to 0, and its mode and owner are unchanged. Otherwise, the file's owner ID is set to the effective user ID of the process. If the set-group-ID bit of the parent directory is set, the file's group ID is set to the group I... |
|
creat64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
dup(2) -- duplicate an open file descriptor
|
|
fildes is a file descriptor obtained from a creat(), open(), dup(), fcntl(), or pipe() system call. dup() returns a new file descriptor having the following in common with the original: + Same open file (or pipe). + Same file pointer (i.e., both file descriptors share one file pointer). + Same access mode (read, write or read/write). + Same file status flags (see fcntl(2), F_DUPFD). The new file d... |
|
dup2(2) -- duplicate an open file descriptor to a specific slot
|
|
fildes is a file descriptor obtained from a creat(), open(), dup(), fcntl(), or pipe() system call. fildes2 is a non-negative integer less than the maximum value allowed for file descriptors. dup2() causes fildes2 to refer to the same file as fildes. If fildes2 refers to an already open file, the open file is closed first. The file descriptor returned by dup2() has the following in common with fil... |
|
errno(2) -- error indicator for function calls
|
|
Many functions in the HP-UX operating system indicate an error condition by returning an otherwise out-of-range value (usually -1). Most of these functions set the symbol errno, that is defined in errno.h, to a nonzero code value that more specifically identifies the particular error condition that was encountered. In most cases, the manpages for functions that set errno list those errno values an... |
|
exec(2) -- execute a file
|
|
The exec*() system calls, in all their forms, load a program from an ordinary, executable file into the current process, replacing the current program. The path or file argument refers to either an executable object file or a file of data for an interpreter. In the latter case, the file of data is also called a script file. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 exec(2) exe... |
|
execl(2) -- execute a file
|
|
The exec*() system calls, in all their forms, load a program from an ordinary, executable file into the current process, replacing the current program. The path or file argument refers to either an executable object file or a file of data for an interpreter. In the latter case, the file of data is also called a script file. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 exec(2) exe... |
|
execle(2) -- execute a file
|
|
The exec*() system calls, in all their forms, load a program from an ordinary, executable file into the current process, replacing the current program. The path or file argument refers to either an executable object file or a file of data for an interpreter. In the latter case, the file of data is also called a script file. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 exec(2) exe... |
|
execlp(2) -- execute a file
|
|
The exec*() system calls, in all their forms, load a program from an ordinary, executable file into the current process, replacing the current program. The path or file argument refers to either an executable object file or a file of data for an interpreter. In the latter case, the file of data is also called a script file. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 exec(2) exe... |
|
execv(2) -- execute a file
|
|
The exec*() system calls, in all their forms, load a program from an ordinary, executable file into the current process, replacing the current program. The path or file argument refers to either an executable object file or a file of data for an interpreter. In the latter case, the file of data is also called a script file. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 exec(2) exe... |
|
execve(2) -- execute a file
|
|
The exec*() system calls, in all their forms, load a program from an ordinary, executable file into the current process, replacing the current program. The path or file argument refers to either an executable object file or a file of data for an interpreter. In the latter case, the file of data is also called a script file. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 exec(2) exe... |
|
execvp(2) -- execute a file
|
|
The exec*() system calls, in all their forms, load a program from an ordinary, executable file into the current process, replacing the current program. The path or file argument refers to either an executable object file or a file of data for an interpreter. In the latter case, the file of data is also called a script file. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 exec(2) exe... |
|
exit(2) -- terminate process
|
|
exit() terminates the calling process and passes status to the system for inspection, see wait(2). Returning from main in a C program has the same effect as exit(); the status value is the function value returned by main (this value is undefined if main does not take care to return a value or to call exit() explicitly). If the calling process is multithreaded, all threads/lightweight process in th... |
|
fchdir(2) -- change working directory
|
|
chdir() and fchdir() cause a directory pointed to by path or fildes to become the current working directory, the starting point for path searches of path names not beginning with /. path points to the path name of a directory. fildes is an open file descriptor of a directory. For a directory to become the current working directory, a process must have execute (search) access to the directory. |
|
fchmod(2) -- change file mode access permissions
|
|
The chmod() and fchmod() system calls set the access permission portion of the file's mode according to the bit pattern contained in mode. path points to a path name naming a file. fildes is a file descriptor. The following symbolic constants representing the access permission bits are defined with the indicated values in and are used to construct the mode argument. The value of mode... |
|
fchown(2) -- change owner and group of a file
|
|
The chown() system call changes the user and group ownership of a file. path points to the path name of a file. chown() sets the owner ID and group ID of the file to the numeric values contained in owner and group respectively. A value of UID_NO_CHANGE or GID_NO_CHANGE can be specified in owner or group to leave unchanged the file's owner ID or group ID, respectively. Note that owner and group sh... |
|
fcntl(2) -- file control
|
|
fcntl() provides for control over open files. fildes is an open file descriptor. The following are possible values for the cmd argument: F_DUPFD Return a new file descriptor having the following characteristics: + Lowest numbered available file descriptor greater than or equal to the third argument, arg, taken as an integer of type int. + Same open file (or pipe) as the original file. + Same file ... |
|
fdatasync(2) -- synchronize a file's in-core and on-disk states
|
|
fsync() and fdatasync() cause all modified data and attributes of fildes to be moved to a permanent storage device. This normally results in all in-core modified copies of buffers for the associated file to be written to a disk. fsync() and fdatasync() apply to ordinary files, and apply to block special devices on systems which permit I/O to block special devices. fsync() and fdatasync() should be... |
|
FD_CLR(2) -- synchronous I/O multiplexing
|
|
The select() function indicates which of the specified file descriptors is ready for reading, ready for writing, or has an error condition pending. If the specified condition is false for all of the specified file descriptors, select() blocks, up to the specified timeout interval, until the specified condition is true for at least one of the specified file descriptors. The select() function suppor... |
|
FD_ISSET(2) -- synchronous I/O multiplexing
|
|
The select() function indicates which of the specified file descriptors is ready for reading, ready for writing, or has an error condition pending. If the specified condition is false for all of the specified file descriptors, select() blocks, up to the specified timeout interval, until the specified condition is true for at least one of the specified file descriptors. The select() function suppor... |
|
FD_SET(2) -- synchronous I/O multiplexing
|
|
The select() function indicates which of the specified file descriptors is ready for reading, ready for writing, or has an error condition pending. If the specified condition is false for all of the specified file descriptors, select() blocks, up to the specified timeout interval, until the specified condition is true for at least one of the specified file descriptors. The select() function suppor... |
|
FD_ZERO(2) -- synchronous I/O multiplexing
|
|
The select() function indicates which of the specified file descriptors is ready for reading, ready for writing, or has an error condition pending. If the specified condition is false for all of the specified file descriptors, select() blocks, up to the specified timeout interval, until the specified condition is true for at least one of the specified file descriptors. The select() function suppor... |
|
fgetacl(2) -- get access control list (ACL) information (HFS File Systems only)
|
|
getacl() returns a complete listing of all ACL entries (uid.gid, mode) in an existing file's access control list. path points to a path name of a file. Similarly, fgetacl() returns a complete listing of all ACL entries for an open file known by the file descriptor fildes. nentries is the number of entries being reported on, and is never more than the constant NACLENTRIES defined in . I... |
|
fork(2) -- create a new process
|
|
The fork() system call causes the creation of a new process. The new child process is created wth exactly one thread or lightweight process. The new child process contains a replica of the calling thread (if the calling process is multi-threaded) and its entire address space, possibly including the state of mutexes and other resources. If the calling process is multi-threaded, the child process ma... |
|
fpathconf(2) -- get configurable path name variables
|
|
The pathconf() and fpathconf() functions provide a method for applications to determine the value of a configurable limit or option associated with a file or directory (see limits(5) and ). For pathconf(), the path argument points to the path name of a file or directory. For fpathconf(), the fildes argument is an open file descriptor. For both functions, the name argument represents the ... |
|
fsctl(2) -- file system control
|
|
fsctl() provides access to file-system-specific information. fildes is an open file descriptor for a file in the file system of interest. The possible values for command depend on the type of file system. Currently, defined commands exist only for the CDFS file system (see sys/cdfsdir.h). outbuf is a pointer to the data area in which data is returned from the file system. outlen gives the length o... |
|
fsetacl(2) -- set access control list (ACL) information
|
|
setacl() sets an existing file's access control list (ACL) or deletes optional entries from it. path points to a path name of a file. Similarly, fsetacl() sets an existing file's access control list for an open file known by the file descriptor fildes. The effective user ID of the process must match the owner of the file or be the super-user to set a file's ACL. A successful call to setacl() de... |
|
fstat(2) -- get file status
|
|
The fstat() function obtains information about an open file associated with the file descriptor fildes, and writes it to the area pointed to by buf. fildes is a file descriptor for an open file, which is created with the successful completion of an open(), creat(), dup(), fcntl(), or pipe() system call. See the open(2), creat(2), dup(2), fcntl(2), or pipe(2)) manpages for more detailed information... |
|
fstat64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
fstatfs(2) -- get file system statistics
|
|
statfs() returns status information for a mounted file system. fstatfs() returns similar information for an open file. The parameters for the statfs() and fstatfs() functions are as follows: path is a pointer to a path name of any file within the mounted file system. buf is a pointer to a statfs structure, which is where the file system status information is stored. fildes is a file descriptor for... |
|
fstatvfs(2) -- get file system information
|
|
statvfs() returns information about a mounted file system. fstatvfs() returns similar information about an open file. The parameters for the statvfs() and fstatvfs() functions are as follows: path is a pointer to a path name of any file within the mounted file system. buf is a pointer to a statvfs structure, which is where the file system status information is stored. fildes is a file descriptor f... |
|
fstatvfs64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
fsync(2) -- synchronize a file's in-core and on-disk states
|
|
fsync() and fdatasync() cause all modified data and attributes of fildes to be moved to a permanent storage device. This normally results in all in-core modified copies of buffers for the associated file to be written to a disk. fsync() and fdatasync() apply to ordinary files, and apply to block special devices on systems which permit I/O to block special devices. fsync() and fdatasync() should be... |
|
ftime(2) -- get date and time more precisely
|
|
ftime() fills in a structure pointed to by its argument, as defined by : /* * Structure returned by ftime system call */ struct timeb { time_t time; unsigned short millitm; short timezone; short dstflag; }; The structure contains the time in seconds since 00:00:00 UTC (Coordinated Universal Time), January 1, 1970, up to 1000 milliseconds of more-precise interval, the local timezone (m... |
|
ftruncate(2) -- truncate a file to a specified length
|
|
The ftruncate() function causes the regular file referenced by fildes to have a size of length bytes. The truncate() function causes the regular file named by path to have a size of length bytes. The effect of ftruncate() and truncate() on other types of files is unspecified. If the file previously was larger than length, the extra data is lost. If it was previously shorter than length, bytes betw... |
|
ftruncate64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
getaccess(2) -- get a user's effective access rights to a file
|
|
getaccess() identifies the access rights (read, write, execute/search) a specific user ID has to an existing file. path points to a path name of a file. If the call succeeds, it returns a value of zero or greater, representing the specified user's effective access rights (modes) to the file. The rights are expressed as the logical OR of bits (R_OK, W_OK, and X_OK) whose values are defined in the ... |
|
getacl(2) -- get access control list (ACL) information (HFS File Systems only)
|
|
getacl() returns a complete listing of all ACL entries (uid.gid, mode) in an existing file's access control list. path points to a path name of a file. Similarly, fgetacl() returns a complete listing of all ACL entries for an open file known by the file descriptor fildes. nentries is the number of entries being reported on, and is never more than the constant NACLENTRIES defined in . I... |
|
getaudid(2) -- get the audit ID (aid) for the current process
|
|
getaudid() returns the audit ID (aid) for the current process. This call is restricted to the super-user. |
|
getaudproc(2) -- get the audit process flag for the calling process
|
|
getaudproc() returns the audit process flag for the calling process. The audit process flag (u_audproc) determines whether the process run by a given user should be audited. The process is audited if the returned flag is 1. If the returned flag is 0, the process is not audited. This call is restricted to the super-user. |
|
getcontext(2) -- get and set current user context
|
|
The getcontext() function initializes the structure pointed to by ucp to the current user context of the calling process. The ucontext_t type that ucp points to defines the user context and includes the contents of the calling process' machine registers, the signal mask, and the current execution stack. The setcontext() function restores the user context pointed to by ucp. A successful call to se... |
|
getdirentri(2) -- get entries from a directory in a file-systemindependent format
|
|
The getdirentries() system call and the header file have been obsoleted starting from HP-UX 10.30 by the functions described in directory(3C). getdirentries() will not be supported for 64-bit applications. The getdirentries() system call places directory entries from the directory referenced by the file descriptor fildes into the buffer pointed to by buf, in a file-system-independent form... |
|
getdomainna(2) -- get/set name of current Network Information Service domain
|
|
getdomainname() returns the name of the Network Information Service (NIS) domain for the current processor, as previously set by setdomainname(). The parameter namelen specifies the size of the name array. The returned value is null-terminated unless the area pointed to by name is not large enough to hold the domain name plus the null byte. In this case, only the namelen number of bytes is returne... |
|
getegid(2) -- get real user, effective user, real group, and effective group IDs
|
|
The following functions return the information indicated: getuid() Real-user-ID of the calling process. geteuid() Effective-user-ID of the calling process. getgid() Real-group-ID of the calling process. getegid() Effective-group-ID of the calling process. No means is available for ascertaining the saved-user-ID or savedgroup-ID of a process. |
|
geteuid(2) -- get real user, effective user, real group, and effective group IDs
|
|
The following functions return the information indicated: getuid() Real-user-ID of the calling process. geteuid() Effective-user-ID of the calling process. getgid() Real-group-ID of the calling process. getegid() Effective-group-ID of the calling process. No means is available for ascertaining the saved-user-ID or savedgroup-ID of a process. |
|
getevent(2) -- get events and system calls that are currently being audited
|
|
getevent() gets the events and system calls being audited. The events are returned in a table pointed to by a_event. The system calls are returned in a table pointed to by a_syscall. This call is restricted to the super-user. |
|
getfh(2) -- return file handle for file on remote node
|
|
The getfh() system call returns a file handle in the struct pointed to by fhp for the file pointed to by path. This information is used to perform an NFS mount for a remote node. getfh() is executed on the remote node; results are passed back to the program doing the NFS mount. The caller should never examine the file handle contents. The file handle only identifies a file to the node that produce... |
|
getgid(2) -- get real user, effective user, real group, and effective group IDs
|
|
The following functions return the information indicated: getuid() Real-user-ID of the calling process. geteuid() Effective-user-ID of the calling process. getgid() Real-group-ID of the calling process. getegid() Effective-group-ID of the calling process. No means is available for ascertaining the saved-user-ID or savedgroup-ID of a process. |
|
getgroups(2) -- get group access list
|
|
getgroups() gets the current group access list of the user process and stores it in the array gidset. The parameter ngroups indicates the number of entries which may be placed in gidset. No more than NGROUPS_MAX, as defined in , is ever returned. As a special case, if the ngroups argument is zero, getgroups() returns the number of group entries for the process. In this case, the array po... |
|
gethostid(2) -- get an identifier for the current host
|
|
The gethostid() function retrieves a 32-bit identifier for the current host. |
|
gethostname(2) -- get name of current host
|
|
gethostname() returns in the array to which hostname points, the standard host name for the current processor as set by sethostname() (see sethostname(2)). size specifies the length of the hostname array. hostname is null-terminated unless insufficient space is provided. |
|
getitimer(2) -- get and set value of interval timer
|
|
The getitimer() function stores the current value of the timer specified by which into the structure pointed to by value. The setitimer() function sets the timer specified by which to the value specified in the structure pointed to by value, and if ovalue is not a null pointer, stores the previous value of the timer in the structure pointed to by ovalue. The header declares the itimer... |
|
getksym(2) -- get information for a global kernel symbol
|
|
There are two ways that getksym can be used to retrieve kernel symbol information. As detailed below, if symname is provided and value is set to zero, getksym attempts to retrieve the value of the symbol; if a non-zero value is provided, the associated symbol name is retrieved. getksym, given a symname, looks for a global (STB_GLOBAL or STB_WEAK) symbol of that name in the symbol table of the stat... |
|
getmsg(2) -- receive next message from a STREAMS file
|
|
The getmsg() function retrieves the contents of a message located at the head of the stream head read queue associated with a STREAMS file and places the contents into one or more buffers. The message contains either a data part, a control part, or both. The data and control parts of the message are placed into separate buffers, as described below. The semantics of each part is defined by the orig... |
|
getpagesize(2) -- get the current page size
|
|
The getpagesize() function returns the current page size. The getpagesize() function is equivalent to sysconf(_SC_PAGE_SIZE) and sysconf(_SC_PAGESIZE). |
|
getpeername(2) -- get address of connected peer
|
|
getpeername() returns the address of the peer socket connected to the socket indicated by s, where s is a socket descriptor. addr points to a socket address structure in which this address is returned. addrlen points to a variable that should be initialized to indicate the size of the address structure. On return, the variable contains the actual size of the address returned (in bytes). If addr do... |
|
getpgid(2) -- get process, process group and parent process ID.
|
|
These functions return process, process group and parent process IDs, as follows: getpgid() Process group ID of the specified process. If pid is zero, the call applies to the calling process. Same result as getpgrp2(). getpgrp() Process group ID of the calling process. getpgrp2() Process group ID of the specified process. If pid is zero, the call applies to the calling process. Same result as getp... |
|
getpgrp(2) -- get process, process group and parent process ID.
|
|
These functions return process, process group and parent process IDs, as follows: getpgid() Process group ID of the specified process. If pid is zero, the call applies to the calling process. Same result as getpgrp2(). getpgrp() Process group ID of the calling process. getpgrp2() Process group ID of the specified process. If pid is zero, the call applies to the calling process. Same result as getp... |
|
getpgrp2(2) -- get process, process group and parent process ID.
|
|
These functions return process, process group and parent process IDs, as follows: getpgid() Process group ID of the specified process. If pid is zero, the call applies to the calling process. Same result as getpgrp2(). getpgrp() Process group ID of the calling process. getpgrp2() Process group ID of the specified process. If pid is zero, the call applies to the calling process. Same result as getp... |
|
getpid(2) -- get process, process group and parent process ID.
|
|
These functions return process, process group and parent process IDs, as follows: getpgid() Process group ID of the specified process. If pid is zero, the call applies to the calling process. Same result as getpgrp2(). getpgrp() Process group ID of the calling process. getpgrp2() Process group ID of the specified process. If pid is zero, the call applies to the calling process. Same result as getp... |
|
getpmsg(2) -- receive next message from a STREAMS file
|
|
The getmsg() function retrieves the contents of a message located at the head of the stream head read queue associated with a STREAMS file and places the contents into one or more buffers. The message contains either a data part, a control part, or both. The data and control parts of the message are placed into separate buffers, as described below. The semantics of each part is defined by the orig... |
|
getppid(2) -- get process, process group and parent process ID.
|
|
These functions return process, process group and parent process IDs, as follows: getpgid() Process group ID of the specified process. If pid is zero, the call applies to the calling process. Same result as getpgrp2(). getpgrp() Process group ID of the calling process. getpgrp2() Process group ID of the specified process. If pid is zero, the call applies to the calling process. Same result as getp... |
|
getpriority(2) -- get or set process priority
|
|
getpriority() returns the priority of the indicated processes. setpriority() sets the priority of the indicated processes to priority. The processes are indicated by which and who, where which can have one of the following values: PRIO_PROCESS Get or set the priority of the specified process where who is the process ID. A who of 0 implies the process ID of the calling process. PRIO_PGRP Get or set... |
|
getprivgrp(2) -- get and set special attributes for group
|
|
getprivgrp() The getprivgrp() system call returns a table of the privileged group assignments into a user-supplied structure. grplist points to an array of structures of type privgrp_map, associating a group ID with a privilege mask. Privilege masks are formed by ORing together elements from the access types specified in . The array may have gaps in it, distinguished as having a pri... |
|
getrlimit(2) -- control maximum resource consumption
|
|
Limits on the consumption of a variety of resources by the calling process may be obtained with getrlimit() and set with setrlimit(). Each call to either getrlimit() or setrlimit() identifies a specific resource to be operated upon as well as a resource limit. A resource limit is represented by an rlimit structure, pointed to by the rlp argument and includes the following members: rlim_t rlim_cur;... |
|
getrlimit64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
getrusage(2) -- get information about resource utilization
|
|
The getrusage() function provides measures of the resources used by the current process or its terminated and waited-for child processes. If the value of the who argument is RUSAGE_SELF, information is returned about resources used by the current process. If the value of the who argument is RUSAGE_CHILDREN, information is returned about resources used by the terminated and waited-for children of t... |
|
getsid(2) -- get session ID
|
|
The getsid() function returns the session ID of the specified process. If pid is 0, the call applies to the current process. For this to be allowed, the current process and the referenced process must be in the same session. |
|
getsockname(2) -- get socket address
|
|
getsockname() returns the local address of the socket indicated by s, where s is a socket descriptor. addr points to a socket address structure in which this address is returned. addrlen points to a variable that should be initialized to indicate the size of the address structure. On return it contains the actual size of the address returned (in bytes). If addr does not point to enough space to co... |
|
getsockopt(2) -- get and set options on sockets
|
|
The getsockopt() and setsockopt() system calls manipulate options associated with a socket. The socket is identified by the socket descriptor s. Options can exist at multiple protocol levels, and they are always present at the uppermost "socket" level (see socket(2)). When manipulating socket options, the level at which the option resides (level) and the name of the option (optname) must be spec... |
|
gettimeofda(2) -- get the date and time
|
|
The gettimeofday() function obtains the current time, expressed as seconds and microseconds since Epoch, and stores it in the timeval structure pointed to by tp. The resolution of the system clock is one microsecond. |
|
gettimeofday(2) -- get the date and time
|
|
The gettimeofday() function obtains the current time, expressed as seconds and microseconds since Epoch, and stores it in the timeval structure pointed to by tp. The resolution of the system clock is one microsecond. |
|
gettune(2) -- get the value of a kernel tunable parameter
|
|
This function retrieves the current value of the kernel tunable parameter named tunable. The value is passed back through the supplied value pointer. The value returned is the value for the tunable that is being used by the currently running kernel. |
|
getuid(2) -- get real user, effective user, real group, and effective group IDs
|
|
The following functions return the information indicated: getuid() Real-user-ID of the calling process. geteuid() Effective-user-ID of the calling process. getgid() Real-group-ID of the calling process. getegid() Effective-group-ID of the calling process. No means is available for ascertaining the saved-user-ID or savedgroup-ID of a process. |
|
gtty(2) -- control terminal device (Bell Version 6 compatibility)
|
|
For certain status settings and status inquiries about terminal devices, the functions stty() and gtty() are equivalent to ioctl(fildes, TIOCSETP, argp) and ioctl(fildes, TIOCGETP, argp) respectively (see ioctl(2) and termio(7). |
|
intro(2) -- introduction to system calls
|
|
This section describes all of the system calls. All of these calls return a function result. This result indicates the status of the call. Typically, a zero or positive result indicates that the call completed successfully, and -1 indicates an error. The individual descriptions specify the details. An error number is also made available in the external variable errno (see errno(2)). Note: errno is... |
|
ioctl(2) -- control device
|
|
ioctl() performs a variety of functions on character special files (devices), or regular files and directories on VxFS file systems. The write-ups of various devices in Section (7) discuss how ioctl() applies to them. The type of arg is dependent on the specific ioctl() call, as described in Section (7). request is made up of several fields which encode the size and direction of the argument (refe... |
|
iscomsec(2) -- check if the system has been converted to a trusted system.
|
|
iscomsec returns a zero (0) if the system is not a trusted system. If the system has been converted to a trusted system, iscomsec returns a one (1). |
|
kill(2) -- send a signal to a process or a group of processes
|
|
The kill() system call sends a signal to a process or a group of processes, as specified by pid. The signal to be sent is specified by sig and is either one from the list given in signal(2), or 0. The raise() system call sends a signal to the executing program. The signal to be sent is specified by sig and is either one from the list given in signal(2), or 0. If sig is 0 (the null signal), error c... |
|
killpg(2) -- 4.2 BSD-compatible process control facilities
|
|
These calls simulate (and are provided for backward compatibility with) functions of the same name in the 4.2 Berkeley Software Distribution. This version of setpgrp() is equivalent to the system call setpgid(pid, pid, , pgrp) (see ) (see setpgid(2)). This version of getpgrp() is equivalent to the system call getpgrp2(pid) (see pid) (see ) (see getpid(2)). killpg() is equivalent to the system call... |
|
lchown(2) -- change owner and group of a file
|
|
The chown() system call changes the user and group ownership of a file. path points to the path name of a file. chown() sets the owner ID and group ID of the file to the numeric values contained in owner and group respectively. A value of UID_NO_CHANGE or GID_NO_CHANGE can be specified in owner or group to leave unchanged the file's owner ID or group ID, respectively. Note that owner and group sh... |
|
link(2) -- link to a file
|
|
The link() system call creates a new link (directory entry) for the existing file. path1 points to a path name naming an existing file. path2 points to a path name naming the new directory entry to be created. |
|
lio_listio(2) -- start a list of asynchronous I/O operations
|
|
The lio_listio() function allows the calling process to request a list of asynchronous I/O operations with a single function call. The function call returns when all operation requests have been enqueued for processing. At this point, processing of the operations may proceed concurrently with execution of the calling process or thread. The list argument is an array of nent pointers to aiocb struct... |
|
listen(2) -- listen for connections on a socket
|
|
To accept connections, a socket is first created using socket(), a queue for incoming connections is activated using listen(), and then connections are accepted using accept(). listen() applies only to unconnected sockets of type SOCK_STREAM. Except for AF_VME_LINK, if the socket has not been bound to a local port before listen() is invoked, the system automatically binds a local port for the sock... |
|
lockf(2) -- provide semaphores and record locking on files
|
|
The lockf() function allows regions of a file to be used as semaphores (advisory locks) or restricts access to only the locking process (enforcement-mode record locks). Other processes that attempt to access the locked resource either return an error or sleep until the resource becomes unlocked. All locks for a process are released upon the first close of the file, even if the process still has th... |
|
lockf64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
lseek(2) -- move read/write file pointer; seek
|
|
lseek() sets the file pointer associated with the file descriptor as follows: + If whence is SEEK_SET, the pointer is set to offset bytes. + If whence is SEEK_CUR, the pointer is set to its current location plus offset. + If whence is SEEK_END, the pointer is set to the size of the file plus offset. These symbolic constants are defined in . |
|
lseek64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
lstat(2) -- get symbolic link status
|
|
The lstat() function has the same effect as stat(), except when path refers to a symbolic link. In that case lstat() returns information about the link, while stat() returns information about the file the link references. For symbolic links, the st_mode member will contain meaningful information when used with the file type macros, and the st_size member will contain the length of the pathname con... |
|
lstat64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
lsync(2) -- update disk
|
|
sync() causes all information in memory that should be on disk to be written out. This includes modified file system meta-data and delayed block I/O. It should be used by commands and programs that examine a file system, such as fsck, df, etc. It is mandatory before a shutdown. The writing, although scheduled, is not necessarily complete upon return from sync. In some HP-UX systems, sync() may be ... |
|
madvise(2) -- advise the system of a process's expected paging behavior
|
|
The madvise system call permits a process to advise the system about its expected future behavior in referencing a mapped file, an anonymous memory region, or a shared memory region. Certain implementations can use this information to optimize the use of resources. addr and len specify the address and length in bytes of the region to which the advice refers. For MADV_DONTNEED, the address and leng... |
|
makecontext(2) -- manipulate user contexts
|
|
The makecontext() function modifies the context specified by ucp, which has been initialized using getcontext(). When this context is resumed using swapcontext() or setcontext(), program execution continues by calling func(), passing it the arguments that follow argc in the makecontext() call. Before a call is made to makecontext(), the context being modified should have a stack allocated for it. ... |
|
mkdir(2) -- make a directory file
|
|
The mkdir() system call creates a new directory file named by path. The file permission bits of the new directory are initialized from mode, and are modified by the process's file mode creation mask. For each bit set in the process's file mode creation mask, the corresponding bit in the new directory's mode is cleared (see umask(2)). The directory's owner ID is set to the process's effective-... |
|
mknod(2) -- make directory, special, or ordinary file
|
|
The mknod() system call creates a new file named by the path name pointed to by path. The mode of the new file is specified by the mode argument. Symbolic constants that define the file type and file access permission bits are found in the header file and are used to construct the mode argument. The value of the mode argument should be the bit-wise inclusive OR of the values of the de... |
|
mlock(2) -- lock a segment of the process virtual address space in memory
|
|
The mlock() system call allows the calling process to lock a segment of the process virtual address space into memory. Any addressable segment of the process' address space may be locked. Locked segments are immune to all routine swapping. addr must be a valid address in the process virtual address space. addr + len must also be a valid address in the process virtual address space. Locks are appl... |
|
mlockall(2) -- lock a process virtual address space in memory
|
|
The mlockall() system call allows the calling process to lock its entire virtual address space into memory, making it immune to all routine swapping. flags may be one or both of the following: MCL_CURRENT Lock the current process virtual address space. All addressable pages of the address space are locked. MCL_FUTURE Lock any future additions to the process virtual address space. Note that MCL_FUT... |
|
mmap(2) -- map pages of memory
|
|
The mmap() function establishes a mapping between a process' address space and a file. The format of the call is as follows: pa = mmap(addr, len, prot, flags, fildes, off); The mmap() function establishes a mapping between the process' address space at an address pa for len bytes and the file associated with the file descriptor fildes at offset off for len bytes. The value of pa is an unspecifie... |
|
mmap64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
modload(2) -- load kernel modules on demand
|
|
modload allows processes with appropriate privilege to demand-load a kernel module into the running kernel. The module must be of a supported type and must have been registered via kcmodule(1M) before it can be loaded. The module to be loaded is specified by pathname. pathname may be either a module name or an absolute pathname. If pathname is a module name, a list of directories specified by modp... |
|
modpath(2) -- change global search path for dynamically loadable kernel modules
|
|
modpath allows users with appropriate privilege to modify the global search path used to locate object files for dynamically loadable kernel modules. The search path modifications take effect immediately and affect all subsequent loads for all users on the system. pathname may be either a colon-separated list of absolute pathnames or NULL. If the former, these path names represent directories whic... |
|
modstat(2) -- get information for a dynamically loaded kernel module
|
|
The modstat function allows processes to get information for dynamically loaded kernel modules. For modules with appropriate privilege, it fills in all the elements of the modstatus structure, specified by stbuf, with the information available for the given module identifier module_id. For non-privileged processes, modstat fills in all information except the address and size of the module object f... |
|
moduload(2) -- unload a kernel module on demand
|
|
moduload allows users with appropriate privilege to demand unload one or all unloadable modules from the running kernel. A module is considered unloadable if it is not currently in use, if no module depending on it is currently loaded, and if the module is not being loaded or unloaded from the kernel. If module_id is set to 0 (zero), moduload attempts to unload all unloadable modules, otherwise mo... |
|
mount(2) -- mount a file system
|
|
The mount() system call requests that a file system identified by fs be mounted on the file identified by path. mflag contains a bit-mask of flags (described below). Note that the MS_DATA flag must be set for the six-argument version of the call. fstype is the file system type name. It is the same name that sysfs(2) uses. The last two arguments together describe a block of file-systemspecific data... |
|
mpctl(2) -- multiprocessor control
|
|
mpctl provides a means of determining how many processors and locality domains are available in the system, and assigning processes or lightweight processes to execute on specific processors or within a specific locality domain. A locality domain consists of a related collection of processors, memory, and peripheral resources that comprise a fundamental building block of the system. All processors... |
|
mprotect(2) -- set or check protection of memory mapping
|
|
The mprotect() function changes the access protections on the mappings specified by the range [addr, addr+len], rounding len up to the next multiple of the page size as returned by sysconf(), to be that specified by prot. Legitimate values for prot are the same as those permitted for mmap() and are defined in : PROT_READ Page can be read. PROT_WRITE Page can be written. PROT_EXEC Page ... |
|
mq_close(2) -- close a message queue descriptor
|
|
The mq_close() system call removes the association between the message queue descriptor, mqdes, and a message queue. Use of this message queue descriptor by the process, after a successful return from this mq_close(), and until this descriptor is returned by a subsequent mq_open(), will result in the failure of message queue system calls, with errno set to [EBADF]. If the process has a registered ... |
|
mq_getattr(2) -- get status information and attributes associated with a message queue
|
|
The mq_getattr() system call collects status information and attributes associated with the message queue specified by mqdes which is copied into the mq_attr structure referenced by mqstat. Upon a successful return, the mq_msgsize and mq_maxmsg fields within the mq_attr structure contain the maximum size of a message for this queue and the maximum number of messages that can be queued at any time.... |
|
mq_notify(2) -- register/cancel a notification request with a message queue
|
|
If the argument notification is not NULL, the mq_notify() system call registers the calling process to be notified of message arrival at an empty message queue associated with the message queue descriptor mqdes. The notification specified by the notification argument will be sent to the process when the message queue transitions from the empty state to the non-empty state. At any time, only one pr... |
|
mq_open(2) -- create/open a message queue
|
|
The mq_open() system call establishes a connection between a process and a message queue. It returns a new message queue descriptor which is used by other message queue system calls to refer to that queue. The name argument points to the message queue name, and must conform to the rules listed in Message Queue Naming Convention. The oflag argument is the bitwise inclusive OR of the flags listed in... |
|
mq_receive(2) -- receive a message from a message queue
|
|
The mq_receive() system call receives the oldest of the highest priority message from the message queue specified by mqdes. The selected message is removed from the queue and copied to the buffer pointed to by the msg_ptr argument. The argument, msg_len, specifies the size of the buffer in bytes. The value of msg_len should be greater than or equal to the mq_msgsize attribute of the message queue,... |
|
mq_send(2) -- send a message to a message queue
|
|
The mq_send() system call adds a message pointed to by the argument msg_ptr to the message queue specified by mqdes. The msg_len argument specifies the length of the message in bytes. The value of msg_len should be less than or equal to the mq_msgsize attribute of the message queue, or mq_send() will fail. If the specified message queue is not full, mq_send() will insert the message into the queue... |
|
mq_setattr(2) -- set the blocking status of a message queue associated with a descriptor
|
|
The mq_setattr() system call changes the blocking status of a message queue associated with the descriptor, mqdes. The blocking status that is modified is per message queue descriptor and another open descriptor for the same message queue can have a different blocking status. The argument mqstat, points to an mq_attr structure that specifies the blocking status desired. More specifically, if the O... |
|
mq_unlink(2) -- unlink a message queue
|
|
The mq_unlink() system call disassociates the queue name, from a message queue specified by the argument, name. After a successful call to mq_unlink(), attempts to open a message queue with the same name will fail, if the flag O_CREAT is not set in oflags. If there are no processes with existing open descriptors for the message queue, the queue is destroyed. If one or more processes have the messa... |
|
msem_init(2) -- initialize a semaphore in a mapped file or anonymous memory region
|
|
msem_init() allocates a new binary semaphore and initializes the state of the new semaphore. sem points to an msemaphore structure in which the state of the semaphore is to be stored. If initial_value is MSEM_LOCKED, the new semaphore is initialized in the locked state. If initial_value is MSEM_UNLOCKED, the new semaphore is initialized in the unlocked state. The msemaphore structure must be locat... |
|
msem_lock(2) -- lock a semaphore
|
|
msem_lock() attempts to lock a binary semaphore. sem points to an msemaphore structure which specifies the semaphore to be locked. If the semaphore is not currently locked, it becomes locked and the function returns successfully. If the semaphore is currently locked, and condition is MSEM_IF_NOWAIT, then the function returns with an error. If the semaphore is currently locked and condition is zero... |
|
msem_remove(2) -- remove a semaphore in mapped file or anonymous region
|
|
msem_remove() removes a binary semaphore. sem points to an msemaphore structure that specifies the semaphore to be removed. Any subsequent use of the msemaphore structure before it is again initialized by calling msem_init() produces undefined results. msem_remove() also causes any process waiting in the msem_lock() function on the removed semaphore to return with an error. If the msemaphore struc... |
|
msem_unlock(2) -- unlock a semaphore
|
|
msem_unlock() unlocks a binary semaphore. sem points to an msemaphore structure that specifies the semaphore to be unlocked. If the condition argument is zero, the semaphore will be unlocked, whether or not any other processes are currently attempting to lock it. If the condition argument is MSEM_IF_WAITERS, and some other process is waiting to lock the semaphore or the implementation cannot relia... |
|
msgctl(2) -- message control operations
|
|
msgctl() provides a variety of message control operations as specified by cmd. The following cmds are available: IPC_STAT Place the current value of each member of the data structure associated with msqid into the structure pointed to by buf. The contents of this structure are defined in glossary(9). IPC_SET Set the value of the following members of the data structure associated with msqid to the ... |
|
msgget(2) -- get message queue
|
|
msgget() returns the message queue identifier associated with key. A message queue identifier and associated message queue and data structure are created for key if one of the following is true: key is equal to IPC_PRIVATE. This call creates a new identifier, subject to available resources. The identifier will never be returned by another call to msgget() until it has been released by a call to ms... |
|
msgop(2) -- message operations
|
|
The msgsnd() system call sends a message to the queue associated with the message queue identifier specified by msqid. msgp points to a user-defined buffer that must contain first a field of type long that specifies the type of the message, followed by a data portion that will hold the data bytes of the message. The structure below is an example of what this user-defined buffer might look like: lo... |
|
msgrcv(2) -- message operations
|
|
The msgsnd() system call sends a message to the queue associated with the message queue identifier specified by msqid. msgp points to a user-defined buffer that must contain first a field of type long that specifies the type of the message, followed by a data portion that will hold the data bytes of the message. The structure below is an example of what this user-defined buffer might look like: lo... |
|
msgsnd(2) -- message operations
|
|
The msgsnd() system call sends a message to the queue associated with the message queue identifier specified by msqid. msgp points to a user-defined buffer that must contain first a field of type long that specifies the type of the message, followed by a data portion that will hold the data bytes of the message. The structure below is an example of what this user-defined buffer might look like: lo... |
|
msync(2) -- synchronize the memory of a mapped file with physical storage
|
|
The msync() function writes all modified copies of pages over the range [addr, addr+len] to the underlying hardware, or invalidates any copies so that further references to the pages will be obtained by the system from their permanent storage locations. The flags argument is one of the following: MS_ASYNC perform asynchronous writes MS_SYNC perform synchronous writes MS_INVALIDATE invalidate mappi... |
|
munlock(2) -- unlock a segment of the process virtual address space
|
|
The munlock() system call allows the calling process to unlock a segment of the process virtual address space that may have been previously locked with mlock() or mlockall(). Upon successful completion of the munlock(), pages within the specified segment are subject to routine paging and/or swapping. addr must be a valid address in the process virtual address space. addr + len must also be a valid... |
|
munlockall(2) -- unlock the entire virtual address space of a process
|
|
The munlockall() system call allows the calling process to unlock any portions of its virtual address space that have previously been locked into memory with mlock() or mlockall(), including any portions locked due to the MCL_FUTURE option of mlockall(). Upon successful completion of the munlockall(), all pages within the process virtual address space are subject to routine paging and/or swapping ... |
|
munmap(2) -- unmap pages of memory
|
|
The munmap() function removes the mappings for pages in the range [addr, addr+len], rounding the len argument up to the next multiple of the page size as returned by sysconf(). If addr is not the address of a mapping established by a prior call to mmap(), the behavior is undefined. After a successful call to munmap() and before any subsequent mapping of the unmapped pages, further references to th... |
|
nanosleep(2) -- high resolution sleep
|
|
The nanosleep() function causes the current process to be suspended from execution until either the time interval specified by the rqtp argument has elapsed, or a signal is delivered to the calling process and its action is to invoke a signal-catching function or to terminate the process. The suspension time may be longer than that requested because the argument value is rounded up to an integer m... |
|
nice(2) -- change priority of a process
|
|
nice() adds the value of priority_change to the nice value of the calling process. A process's nice value is a positive number for which a more positive value results in lower CPU priority. A maximum nice value of 39 and a minimum nice value of 0 are imposed by the system. Requests for values above or below these limits result in the nice value being set to the corresponding limit. If the calling... |
|
open(2) -- open file for reading or writing
|
|
The open() system call opens a file descriptor for the named file and sets the file status flags according to the value of oflag. The path argument points to a path name naming a file, and must not exceed PATH_MAX bytes in length. The oflag argument is a value that is the bitwise inclusive OR of flags listed in "Read-Write Flags," "General Flags," and "Synchronized I/O Flags" below. The opti... |
|
open64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
pathconf(2) -- get configurable path name variables
|
|
The pathconf() and fpathconf() functions provide a method for applications to determine the value of a configurable limit or option associated with a file or directory (see limits(5) and ). For pathconf(), the path argument points to the path name of a file or directory. For fpathconf(), the fildes argument is an open file descriptor. For both functions, the name argument represents the ... |
|
pause(2) -- suspend process until signal
|
|
pause() suspends the calling process until it receives a signal. The signal must be one that is not currently set to be ignored or blocked (masked) by the calling process. If the signal causes termination of the calling process, pause() does not return. If the signal is caught by the calling process and control is returned from the signal-catching function (see signal(5)), the calling process resu... |
|
pipe(2) -- create an interprocess channel
|
|
pipe() creates an I/O mechanism called a pipe and returns two file descriptors, fildes[0] and fildes[1]. fildes[0] is opened for reading and fildes[1] is opened for writing. A read-only file descriptor fildes[0] accesses the data written to fildes[1] on a first-in-first-out (FIFO) basis. For details of the I/O behavior of pipes see read(2) and write(2). By default, HP-UX pipes are not STREAMS-base... |
|
plock(2) -- lock process, text, data, stack, or shared library in memory
|
|
The plock() system call allows the calling process to lock the text segment of the process (text lock), its data segment (data lock), or both its text and data segment (process lock) into memory. Stack segments are also locked when data segments are locked. Shared library text and shared library data segments (shlib lock) can also be locked. Locked segments are immune to all routine swapping. ploc... |
|
poll(2) -- monitor I/O conditions on multiple file descriptors
|
|
poll() provides a general mechanism for reporting I/O conditions associated with a set of file descriptors and for waiting until one or more specified conditions becomes true. Specified conditions include the ability to read or write data without blocking, and error conditions. |
|
postwait(2) -- lightweight synchronization mechanism
|
|
Postwait is a fast, lightweight sleep/wakeup mechanism that can be used for synchronization by cooperating kernel threads within a single process or between separate processes. A thread calls pw_wait() to block. It resumes execution when it is posted by another thread, the call expires, or is signaled. If one or more posts are already pending, pw_wait returns immediately. Threads using postwait ar... |
|
pread(2) -- read from file
|
|
The read() function attempts to read nbyte bytes from the file associated with the open file descriptor, fildes, into the buffer pointed to by buf. If nbyte is 0, read() will return 0 and have no other results. On files that support seeking (for example, a regular file), the read() starts at a position in the file given by the file offset associated with fildes. The file offset is incremented by t... |
|
pread64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
prealloc(2) -- preallocate fast disk storage
|
|
prealloc() is used to preallocate space on a disk for faster storage operations. fildes is a file descriptor obtained from a creat(), open(), dup(), or fcntl() system call for an ordinary file of zero length. It must be opened writable, because it will be written to by prealloc(). size is the size in bytes to be preallocated for the file specified by fildes. At least size bytes will be allocated. ... |
|
prealloc64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
pri_hpux_to(2) -- real-time scheduling operations
|
|
Summary sched_get_priority_max() Get maximum scheduling policy sched_get_priority_min() Get minimum scheduling policy sched_getparam() Get scheduling parameters of process sched_getscheduler() Get scheduling policy of process sched_rr_get_interval() Get execution time limit for a process sched_setparam() Set scheduling parameters of process sched_setscheduler() Set scheduling policy and parameters... |
|
PRI_HPUX_TO(2) -- real-time scheduling operations
|
|
Summary sched_get_priority_max() Get maximum scheduling policy sched_get_priority_min() Get minimum scheduling policy sched_getparam() Get scheduling parameters of process sched_getscheduler() Get scheduling policy of process sched_rr_get_interval() Get execution time limit for a process sched_setparam() Set scheduling parameters of process sched_setscheduler() Set scheduling policy and parameters... |
|
pri_posix_t(2) -- real-time scheduling operations
|
|
Summary sched_get_priority_max() Get maximum scheduling policy sched_get_priority_min() Get minimum scheduling policy sched_getparam() Get scheduling parameters of process sched_getscheduler() Get scheduling policy of process sched_rr_get_interval() Get execution time limit for a process sched_setparam() Set scheduling parameters of process sched_setscheduler() Set scheduling policy and parameters... |
|
PRI_POSIX_T(2) -- real-time scheduling operations
|
|
Summary sched_get_priority_max() Get maximum scheduling policy sched_get_priority_min() Get minimum scheduling policy sched_getparam() Get scheduling parameters of process sched_getscheduler() Get scheduling policy of process sched_rr_get_interval() Get execution time limit for a process sched_setparam() Set scheduling parameters of process sched_setscheduler() Set scheduling policy and parameters... |
|
profil(2) -- execution time profile
|
|
profil() controls profiling, by which the system maintains estimates of the amount of time the calling program spends executing at various places in its address space. The buff argument must point to an area of memory whose length (in bytes) is given by bufsiz. When profiling is on, the process's program counter (pc) is examined each clock tick (CLK_TCK times per second), offset is subtracted fro... |
|
pset_assign(2) -- change processor set assignment
|
|
The pset_assign() function assigns the processor spu to the processor set pset, removing the processor spu from its current processor set. A processor may not belong to more than one processor set at any given time. If opset is not NULL, it contains the processor set ID of the previously assigned processor set upon successful operation. A superuser, a PRIV_PSET privilege user, or a user with WRITE... |
|
pset_bind(2) -- bind process or thread to a processor set
|
|
The pset_bind() function binds thread(s) or process(es) specified by idtype and id to the processor set pset. If idtype is P_PID, then id specifies the pid of the process to be assigned, and the binding affects all threads of the process. If idtype is P_LWPID, then id specifies the lwpid of the thread to be assigned, and the binding affects only the specified thread. You cannot specify a pthread i... |
|
pset_create(2) -- create a processor set
|
|
The pset_create() function creates an empty processor set with no processors. Processor sets allow a subset of processors in the system to be isolated for exclusive use by specified threads and processes. Only the threads bound to a processor set can execute on processors in that processor set. The binding of threads and processes to processor sets is controlled by the pset_bind() function (see ps... |
|
pset_ctl(2) -- processor set control
|
|
The pset_ctl() function provides a means to query the system processor set configuration and assignment information. The request argument specifies what information is needed for the pset processor set. The following request values are supported: |
|
pset_destroy(2) -- destroy a processor set
|
|
The pset_destroy() function destroys the processor set pset, releasing all constituent processors and processes by default. The processors and processes are reassigned to the system default processor set. Once destroyed, the pset identifier becomes available for new processor sets that may be created in the future. The behavior when attempting to destroy a non-empty processor set may be controlled... |
|
pset_getattr(2) -- manage processor set attributes
|
|
The pset_getattr() function returns the current value of the attribute type for the processor set pset in the memory location pointed to by val. The pset_setattr() function assigns the value val to the attribute type for processor set pset. A user can not change the attribute values for the system default processor set PS_DEFAULT using the pset_setattr() function. A superuser, a PRIV_PSET privileg... |
|
pset_setattr(2) -- manage processor set attributes
|
|
The pset_getattr() function returns the current value of the attribute type for the processor set pset in the memory location pointed to by val. The pset_setattr() function assigns the value val to the attribute type for processor set pset. A user can not change the attribute values for the system default processor set PS_DEFAULT using the pset_setattr() function. A superuser, a PRIV_PSET privileg... |
|
pstat(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getcommandline(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getcrashdev(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getcrashinfo(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getdisk(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getdynamic(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getfile(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getfile2(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getfiledetails(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getipc(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getlocality(2) -- returns system-wide or
|
|
pstat_getlocality() and pstat_getproclocality() are part of the general pstat(2) functionality provided to obtain information about various system contexts. These calls return information on different parts of a Cache Coherent Non-Uniform Memory Architecture (ccNUMA) system. pstat_getlocality() returns system-wide information, while pstat_getproclocality() returns per-process information. A locali... |
|
pstat_getlv(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getlwp(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getmpathname(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getmsg(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getnode(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getpathname(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getpmq(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getproc(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getprocessor(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getproclocality(2) -- returns system-wide or
|
|
pstat_getlocality() and pstat_getproclocality() are part of the general pstat(2) functionality provided to obtain information about various system contexts. These calls return information on different parts of a Cache Coherent Non-Uniform Memory Architecture (ccNUMA) system. pstat_getlocality() returns system-wide information, while pstat_getproclocality() returns per-process information. A locali... |
|
pstat_getprocvm(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getpsem(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getpset(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getsem(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getshm(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getsocket(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getstable(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getstatic(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getstream(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getswap(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
pstat_getvminfo(2) -- get system information
|
|
The pstat functions return information about various system contexts. The contents of the various associated data structures, structs pst_crashdev, pst_crashinfo, pst_diskinfo, pst_dynamic, pst_fileinfo, pst_fileinfo2, pst_filedetails, pst_ipcinfo, pst_lvinfo, pst_mpathnode, pst_msginfo, pst_node, pst_pmqinfo, pst_processor, pst_pseminfo, pst_pset, pst_seminfo, pst_shminfo, pst_stable, pst_static,... |
|
ptrace(2) -- process trace
|
|
The ptrace() system call provides a means by which a process can control the execution of another process. Its primary use is for the implementation of a breakpoint debugging mechanism (see adb(1)) and involves a tracing and a traced process. The traced process behaves normally until it encounters a signal (see signal(2) for the list) at which time it enters a stopped state and the tracing process... |
|
putmsg(2) -- send a message on a stream
|
|
The putmsg() function creates a message from a process buffer(s) and sends the message to a STREAMS file. The message may contain either a data part, a control part, or both. The data and control parts are distinguished by placement in separate buffers, as described below. The semantics of each part is defined by the STREAMS module that receives the message. The putpmsg() function does the same th... |
|
putpmsg(2) -- send a message on a stream
|
|
The putmsg() function creates a message from a process buffer(s) and sends the message to a STREAMS file. The message may contain either a data part, a control part, or both. The data and control parts are distinguished by placement in separate buffers, as described below. The semantics of each part is defined by the STREAMS module that receives the message. The putpmsg() function does the same th... |
|
pwrite(2) -- write on a file
|
|
The write() function attempts to write nbyte bytes from the buffer pointed to by buf to the file associated with the open file descriptor, fildes. If nbyte is 0, write() will return 0 and have no other results if the file is a regular file. Otherwise, the results are unspecified. On a regular file or other file capable of seeking, the actual writing of data proceeds from the position in the file i... |
|
pwrite64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
pw_getukid(2) -- lightweight synchronization mechanism
|
|
Postwait is a fast, lightweight sleep/wakeup mechanism that can be used for synchronization by cooperating kernel threads within a single process or between separate processes. A thread calls pw_wait() to block. It resumes execution when it is posted by another thread, the call expires, or is signaled. If one or more posts are already pending, pw_wait returns immediately. Threads using postwait ar... |
|
pw_getvmax(2) -- lightweight synchronization mechanism
|
|
Postwait is a fast, lightweight sleep/wakeup mechanism that can be used for synchronization by cooperating kernel threads within a single process or between separate processes. A thread calls pw_wait() to block. It resumes execution when it is posted by another thread, the call expires, or is signaled. If one or more posts are already pending, pw_wait returns immediately. Threads using postwait ar... |
|
pw_post(2) -- lightweight synchronization mechanism
|
|
Postwait is a fast, lightweight sleep/wakeup mechanism that can be used for synchronization by cooperating kernel threads within a single process or between separate processes. A thread calls pw_wait() to block. It resumes execution when it is posted by another thread, the call expires, or is signaled. If one or more posts are already pending, pw_wait returns immediately. Threads using postwait ar... |
|
pw_postv(2) -- lightweight synchronization mechanism
|
|
Postwait is a fast, lightweight sleep/wakeup mechanism that can be used for synchronization by cooperating kernel threads within a single process or between separate processes. A thread calls pw_wait() to block. It resumes execution when it is posted by another thread, the call expires, or is signaled. If one or more posts are already pending, pw_wait returns immediately. Threads using postwait ar... |
|
pw_wait(2) -- lightweight synchronization mechanism
|
|
Postwait is a fast, lightweight sleep/wakeup mechanism that can be used for synchronization by cooperating kernel threads within a single process or between separate processes. A thread calls pw_wait() to block. It resumes execution when it is posted by another thread, the call expires, or is signaled. If one or more posts are already pending, pw_wait returns immediately. Threads using postwait ar... |
|
quotactl(2) -- manipulate disk quotas
|
|
quotactl() manipulates disk quotas. cmd indicates a command to be applied to the user ID uid. Parameter special is a pointer to a null-terminated string containing the path name of the block special device for the file system being manipulated. The block special device must be mounted. The parameter addr is the address of an optional, command-specific, data structure which is copied in or out of t... |
|
raise(2) -- send a signal to a process or a group of processes
|
|
The kill() system call sends a signal to a process or a group of processes, as specified by pid. The signal to be sent is specified by sig and is either one from the list given in signal(2), or 0. The raise() system call sends a signal to the executing program. The signal to be sent is specified by sig and is either one from the list given in signal(2), or 0. If sig is 0 (the null signal), error c... |
|
read(2) -- read from file
|
|
The read() function attempts to read nbyte bytes from the file associated with the open file descriptor, fildes, into the buffer pointed to by buf. If nbyte is 0, read() will return 0 and have no other results. On files that support seeking (for example, a regular file), the read() starts at a position in the file given by the file offset associated with fildes. The file offset is incremented by t... |
|
readlink(2) -- read the contents of a symbolic link
|
|
The readlink() function places the contents of the symbolic link referred to by path in the buffer buf which has size bufsiz. If the number of bytes in the symbolic link is less than bufsiz, the contents of the remainder of buf are unspecified. In systems conforming to AES standards, the returned string will be null-terminated if the length of the path name string is less than bufsiz. If the lengt... |
|
readv(2) -- read from file
|
|
The read() function attempts to read nbyte bytes from the file associated with the open file descriptor, fildes, into the buffer pointed to by buf. If nbyte is 0, read() will return 0 and have no other results. On files that support seeking (for example, a regular file), the read() starts at a position in the file given by the file offset associated with fildes. The file offset is incremented by t... |
|
reboot(2) -- boot the system
|
|
reboot() causes the system to reboot. howto is a mask of reboot options (see ), specified as follows: RB_AUTOBOOT A file system sync is performed (unless RB_NOSYNC is set) and the processor is rebooted from the default device and file. RB_HALT The processor is simply halted. A sync of the file system is performed unless the RB_NOSYNC flag is set. RB_HALT should be used with caution. ... |
|
recv(2) -- receive a message from a socket
|
|
The recv(), recvfrom(), and recvmsg() system calls are used to receive messages from a socket. s is a socket descriptor from which messages are received. buf is a pointer to the buffer into which the messages are placed. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 recv(2) recv(2) len is the maximum number of bytes that can fit in the buffer referenced by buf. If the socket uses ... |
|
recvfrom(2) -- receive a message from a socket
|
|
The recv(), recvfrom(), and recvmsg() system calls are used to receive messages from a socket. s is a socket descriptor from which messages are received. buf is a pointer to the buffer into which the messages are placed. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 recv(2) recv(2) len is the maximum number of bytes that can fit in the buffer referenced by buf. If the socket uses ... |
|
recvmsg(2) -- receive a message from a socket
|
|
The recv(), recvfrom(), and recvmsg() system calls are used to receive messages from a socket. s is a socket descriptor from which messages are received. buf is a pointer to the buffer into which the messages are placed. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 recv(2) recv(2) len is the maximum number of bytes that can fit in the buffer referenced by buf. If the socket uses ... |
|
rename(2) -- change the name of a file
|
|
The rename() system call causes the source file to be renamed to target. If target exists, it is first removed. Both source and target must be of the same type (that is, either directories or nondirectories), and must reside on the same file system. If target can be created or if it existed before the call, rename() guarantees that an instance of target will exist, even if the system crashes in th... |
|
rmdir(2) -- remove a directory file
|
|
The rmdir() system call removes a directory file whose name is given by path. The directory must be empty (except for the files . and ..) before it can be removed. |
|
rtprio(2) -- change or read real-time priority
|
|
The rtprio() system call sets or reads the real-time priority of a process. If pid is zero, it specifies the calling process; otherwise, it specifies the process ID of a process. If the process pid contains more than one thread or a lightweight process (that is, the process is multi-threaded), this function shall only change the process scheduling policy and priority. Individual threads or lightwe... |
|
rtsched(2) -- real-time scheduling operations
|
|
Summary sched_get_priority_max() Get maximum scheduling policy sched_get_priority_min() Get minimum scheduling policy sched_getparam() Get scheduling parameters of process sched_getscheduler() Get scheduling policy of process sched_rr_get_interval() Get execution time limit for a process sched_setparam() Set scheduling parameters of process sched_setscheduler() Set scheduling policy and parameters... |
|
sbrk(2) -- change data segment space allocation
|
|
brk() and sbrk() are used to change dynamically the amount of space allocated for the calling process's data segment; see exec(2). The change is made by resetting the process's break value and allocating the appropriate amount of space. The break value is the address of the first location beyond the end of the data segment. The amount of allocated space increases as the break value increases. Th... |
|
sched_getpa(2) -- real-time scheduling operations
|
|
Summary sched_get_priority_max() Get maximum scheduling policy sched_get_priority_min() Get minimum scheduling policy sched_getparam() Get scheduling parameters of process sched_getscheduler() Get scheduling policy of process sched_rr_get_interval() Get execution time limit for a process sched_setparam() Set scheduling parameters of process sched_setscheduler() Set scheduling policy and parameters... |
|
sched_getsc(2) -- real-time scheduling operations
|
|
Summary sched_get_priority_max() Get maximum scheduling policy sched_get_priority_min() Get minimum scheduling policy sched_getparam() Get scheduling parameters of process sched_getscheduler() Get scheduling policy of process sched_rr_get_interval() Get execution time limit for a process sched_setparam() Set scheduling parameters of process sched_setscheduler() Set scheduling policy and parameters... |
|
sched_get_p(2) -- real-time scheduling operations
|
|
Summary sched_get_priority_max() Get maximum scheduling policy sched_get_priority_min() Get minimum scheduling policy sched_getparam() Get scheduling parameters of process sched_getscheduler() Get scheduling policy of process sched_rr_get_interval() Get execution time limit for a process sched_setparam() Set scheduling parameters of process sched_setscheduler() Set scheduling policy and parameters... |
|
sched_rr_ge(2) -- real-time scheduling operations
|
|
Summary sched_get_priority_max() Get maximum scheduling policy sched_get_priority_min() Get minimum scheduling policy sched_getparam() Get scheduling parameters of process sched_getscheduler() Get scheduling policy of process sched_rr_get_interval() Get execution time limit for a process sched_setparam() Set scheduling parameters of process sched_setscheduler() Set scheduling policy and parameters... |
|
sched_setpa(2) -- real-time scheduling operations
|
|
Summary sched_get_priority_max() Get maximum scheduling policy sched_get_priority_min() Get minimum scheduling policy sched_getparam() Get scheduling parameters of process sched_getscheduler() Get scheduling policy of process sched_rr_get_interval() Get execution time limit for a process sched_setparam() Set scheduling parameters of process sched_setscheduler() Set scheduling policy and parameters... |
|
sched_setsc(2) -- real-time scheduling operations
|
|
Summary sched_get_priority_max() Get maximum scheduling policy sched_get_priority_min() Get minimum scheduling policy sched_getparam() Get scheduling parameters of process sched_getscheduler() Get scheduling policy of process sched_rr_get_interval() Get execution time limit for a process sched_setparam() Set scheduling parameters of process sched_setscheduler() Set scheduling policy and parameters... |
|
sched_yield(2) -- real-time scheduling operations
|
|
Summary sched_get_priority_max() Get maximum scheduling policy sched_get_priority_min() Get minimum scheduling policy sched_getparam() Get scheduling parameters of process sched_getscheduler() Get scheduling policy of process sched_rr_get_interval() Get execution time limit for a process sched_setparam() Set scheduling parameters of process sched_setscheduler() Set scheduling policy and parameters... |
|
select(2) -- synchronous I/O multiplexing
|
|
The select() function indicates which of the specified file descriptors is ready for reading, ready for writing, or has an error condition pending. If the specified condition is false for all of the specified file descriptors, select() blocks, up to the specified timeout interval, until the specified condition is true for at least one of the specified file descriptors. The select() function suppor... |
|
semctl(2) -- semaphore control operations
|
|
The semctl() system call provides a variety of semaphore control operations as specified by cmd. The fourth argument is optional and depends on the operation requested. If present, it must be of type union semun, which the application program must explicitly declare. For the meaning of unspecified variables, see semaphore identifier in glossary(9). The following values for cmd are executed with re... |
|
semget(2) -- get set of semaphores
|
|
semget() returns the semaphore identifier associated with key. A semaphore identifier and associated data structure and set containing nsems semaphores are created for key if one of the following is true: key is equal to IPC_PRIVATE. This call creates a new identifier, subject to available resources. The identifier is never returned by another call to semget() until it has been released by a call ... |
|
semop(2) -- semaphore operations
|
|
semop() is used to atomically perform an array of semaphore operations on the set of semaphores associated with the semaphore identifier specified by semid. sops is a pointer to the array of semaphoreoperation structures. nsops is the number of such structures in the array. The contents of each structure includes the following members: ushort sem_num; /* semaphore number */ short sem_op /* semapho... |
|
semtimedop(2) -- semaphore operations
|
|
semop() is used to atomically perform an array of semaphore operations on the set of semaphores associated with the semaphore identifier specified by semid. sops is a pointer to the array of semaphoreoperation structures. nsops is the number of such structures in the array. The contents of each structure includes the following members: ushort sem_num; /* semaphore number */ short sem_op /* semapho... |
|
sem_close(2) -- close a named POSIX semaphore
|
|
sem_close() is used to close a named semaphore. A successful call to sem_close() will do the following: Remove the process's descriptor for the semaphore referenced by the specified sem_t structure sem. Remove the semaphore referenced by the specified sem_t structure sem, if the semaphore is marked for removal by a call to sem_unlink() and there are no other descriptors referencing this semaphore... |
|
sem_destroy(2) -- destroy an unnamed POSIX semaphore
|
|
sem_destroy() is used to destroy an unnamed semaphore. A successful call to sem_destroy() will invalidate the unnamed semaphore referred to by sem and removes all descriptors referencing it. The semaphore should have been created by a previous call to sem_init() and there should not be any processes blocked on it. To use this function, link in the realtime library by specifying -lrt on the compile... |
|
sem_getvalue(2) -- get the value of a POSIX semaphore
|
|
sem_getvalue() is used to read the value of the semaphore. The value of the semaphore specified by sem is read, at some unspecified time during the call, and then stored into sval. If the semaphore value is <= 0, at that time, the semaphore is considered unavailable. If the semaphore value is > 0, at that time, the semaphore is considered available. If sval is positive, it is equal to the number o... |
|
sem_init(2) -- initialize an unnamed POSIX semaphore
|
|
sem_init() is used to initialize an unnamed semaphore. A successful call to sem_init() will create a new unnamed semaphore referred to by sem, if one does not exist, initialize the unnamed semaphore descriptor, referred to by sem, to the non-negative value specified by value. If the unnamed semaphore already exists, i.e. created by a previous call to sem_init(), it is re-initialized only if its cu... |
|
sem_open(2) -- create/open a named POSIX semaphore
|
|
sem_open() is used to open or create a named semaphore. A successful call to sem_open() will create a descriptor for the semaphore specified by name. The pointer to the semaphore returned by sem_open() can be used to access the semaphore associated with name in subsequent operations. The name argument points to a string referring to a semaphore. It should begin with a "/" and shall conform to pa... |
|
sem_post(2) -- unlock a POSIX semaphore
|
|
sem_post() is used to post the semaphore referenced by sem. The calling thread will not return from its call to sem_post() unless it can either: increment the semaphore value, if there are no blocked threads on this semaphore; give the semaphore to a blocked thread, if there are any blocked threads on this semaphore; or have an error condition. If the semaphore value is < 0, the semaphore has bloc... |
|
sem_trywait(2) -- lock a POSIX semaphore
|
|
sem_wait() is used to lock a semaphore. The calling thread will not return from its call to sem_wait() until one of the following events occur: it successfully obtains a lock on the semaphore; it is interrupted by a signal or an error condition occurs. sem_trywait() is used to lock a semaphore, if it is available. The value of the semaphore sem is checked at some unspecified time during the call. ... |
|
sem_unlink(2) -- unlink a named POSIX semaphore
|
|
sem_unlink() is used to unlink named semaphores. A successful call to sem_unlink() marks the semaphore, specified by name, for removal. Calling sem_unlink() does not affect processes, including the calling process, which currently have a descriptor, obtained from a call to sem_open(). Named semaphores are uniquely identified by character strings. All character string names will be pre-processed to... |
|
sem_wait(2) -- lock a POSIX semaphore
|
|
sem_wait() is used to lock a semaphore. The calling thread will not return from its call to sem_wait() until one of the following events occur: it successfully obtains a lock on the semaphore; it is interrupted by a signal or an error condition occurs. sem_trywait() is used to lock a semaphore, if it is available. The value of the semaphore sem is checked at some unspecified time during the call. ... |
|
send(2) -- send a message from a socket
|
|
The send(), sendmsg(), and sendto() system calls transmit a message to another socket. send() can be used only when the socket is in a connected state, whereas sendmsg() and sendto() can be used at any time. sendmsg() allows the send data to be gathered from several buffers specified in the msghdr structure. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 send(2) send(2) s is a sock... |
|
sendfile(2) -- send the contents of a file through a socket
|
|
The sendfile() system call transmits the contents of a file associated with the file descriptor fd, plus an optional header and trailer buffers across a socket connection specified by s. sendfile() can be used only when the socket is in a connected state. offset specifies the offset within the file at which to start the file data transfer. nbytes is the number of bytes to be sent from the file. If... |
|
sendfile64(2) -- send the contents of a Large File through a socket
|
|
The sendfile64() system call transmits the contents of a file (including a Large File (greater than 2GB)) associated with the file descriptor fd, plus an optional header and trailer buffers across a socket connection specified by s. sendfile64() should be used by 32- bit applications using Large Files; however, 64-bit applications can use sendfile64() for compatibility. 64-bit applications can als... |
|
sendmsg(2) -- send a message from a socket
|
|
The send(), sendmsg(), and sendto() system calls transmit a message to another socket. send() can be used only when the socket is in a connected state, whereas sendmsg() and sendto() can be used at any time. sendmsg() allows the send data to be gathered from several buffers specified in the msghdr structure. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 send(2) send(2) s is a sock... |
|
sendto(2) -- send a message from a socket
|
|
The send(), sendmsg(), and sendto() system calls transmit a message to another socket. send() can be used only when the socket is in a connected state, whereas sendmsg() and sendto() can be used at any time. sendmsg() allows the send data to be gathered from several buffers specified in the msghdr structure. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 send(2) send(2) s is a sock... |
|
serialize(2) -- force target process to run serially with other processes
|
|
The serialize() system call is used to force the target process referenced by the pid value passed in to run serially with other processes also marked for serialization. If the value of pid is zero, then the currently running process is marked for serialization. Once a process has been marked by serialize(), the process stays marked until process completion, unless serialize() is reissued on the s... |
|
setacl(2) -- set access control list (ACL) information
|
|
setacl() sets an existing file's access control list (ACL) or deletes optional entries from it. path points to a path name of a file. Similarly, fsetacl() sets an existing file's access control list for an open file known by the file descriptor fildes. The effective user ID of the process must match the owner of the file or be the super-user to set a file's ACL. A successful call to setacl() de... |
|
setaudid(2) -- set the audit ID (aid) for the current process
|
|
setaudid() sets the audit ID (aid) for the current process. This call is restricted to the super-user. |
|
setaudproc(2) -- controls process level auditing for the current process and its decendents
|
|
setaudproc() controls process level auditing for the current process and its decendents. It accomplishes this by setting or clearing the u_audproc flag in the u area of the calling process. When this flag is set, the system audits the process; when it is cleared, the process is not audited. This call is restricted to super-users. One of the following aflags must be used: AUD_PROC Audit the calling... |
|
setcontext(2) -- get and set current user context
|
|
The getcontext() function initializes the structure pointed to by ucp to the current user context of the calling process. The ucontext_t type that ucp points to defines the user context and includes the contents of the calling process' machine registers, the signal mask, and the current execution stack. The setcontext() function restores the user context pointed to by ucp. A successful call to se... |
|
setdomainna(2) -- get/set name of current Network Information Service domain
|
|
getdomainname() returns the name of the Network Information Service (NIS) domain for the current processor, as previously set by setdomainname(). The parameter namelen specifies the size of the name array. The returned value is null-terminated unless the area pointed to by name is not large enough to hold the domain name plus the null byte. In this case, only the namelen number of bytes is returne... |
|
setevent(2) -- set current events and system calls which are to be audited
|
|
setevent() sets the events and system calls to be audited. The event and system call settings in the tables pointed to by a_syscall and a_event become the current settings. This call is restricted to the super-user. |
|
setgid(2) -- set user and group IDs
|
|
setuid() sets the real-user-ID (ruid), effective-user-ID (euid), and/or saved-user-ID (suid) of the calling process. The super-user's euid is zero. The following conditions govern setuid's behavior: + If the euid is zero, setuid() sets the ruid, euid, and suid to uid. + If the euid is not zero, but the argument uid is equal to the ruid or the suid, setuid() sets the euid to uid; the ruid and sui... |
|
setgroups(2) -- set group access list
|
|
setgroups() sets the group access list of the current user process according to the array gidset. The parameter ngroups indicates the number of entries in the array and must be no more than NGROUPS_MAX, as defined in . Only super-user can set new groups by adding to the group access list of the current user process; any user can delete groups from it. |
|
sethostname(2) -- set name of host cpu
|
|
The sethostname() system call sets the name of the host processor to name, which has a length of namelen characters. At system boot time sethostname() is normally executed by the hostname command (see hostname(1)) in the /sbin/init.d/hostname script. Host names are limited to MAXHOSTNAMELEN characters, as defined in . |
|
setitimer(2) -- get and set value of interval timer
|
|
The getitimer() function stores the current value of the timer specified by which into the structure pointed to by value. The setitimer() function sets the timer specified by which to the value specified in the structure pointed to by value, and if ovalue is not a null pointer, stores the previous value of the timer in the structure pointed to by ovalue. The header declares the itimer... |
|
setpgid(2) -- set process group ID for job control
|
|
The setpgid() and setpgrp2() system calls cause the process specified by pid to join an existing process group or create a new process group within the session of the calling process. The process group ID of the process whose process ID is pid is set to pgid. If pid is zero, the process ID of the calling process is used. If pgid is zero, the process ID of the indicated process is used. The process... |
|
setpgrp(2) -- set process group ID
|
|
If the calling process is not already a session leader, setpgrp() sets the process group ID of the calling process to the process ID of the calling process. If setpgrp() creates a new session, then the new session has no controlling terminal. The setpgrp() function has no effect when the calling process is a session leader. |
|
setpgrp2(2) -- set process group ID for job control
|
|
The setpgid() and setpgrp2() system calls cause the process specified by pid to join an existing process group or create a new process group within the session of the calling process. The process group ID of the process whose process ID is pid is set to pgid. If pid is zero, the process ID of the calling process is used. If pgid is zero, the process ID of the indicated process is used. The process... |
|
setpgrp3(2) -- create session and set process group ID; for HP-UX 9.x compatibility.
|
|
If the calling process is not a process group leader, setpgrp3() creates a new session. The calling process becomes the session leader of this new session, it becomes the process group leader of a new process group, and it has no controlling terminal. The process group ID of the calling process is set equal to the process ID of the calling process. The calling process is the only process in the ne... |
|
setpriority(2) -- get or set process priority
|
|
getpriority() returns the priority of the indicated processes. setpriority() sets the priority of the indicated processes to priority. The processes are indicated by which and who, where which can have one of the following values: PRIO_PROCESS Get or set the priority of the specified process where who is the process ID. A who of 0 implies the process ID of the calling process. PRIO_PGRP Get or set... |
|
setprivgrp(2) -- get and set special attributes for group
|
|
getprivgrp() The getprivgrp() system call returns a table of the privileged group assignments into a user-supplied structure. grplist points to an array of structures of type privgrp_map, associating a group ID with a privilege mask. Privilege masks are formed by ORing together elements from the access types specified in . The array may have gaps in it, distinguished as having a pri... |
|
setregid(2) -- sets the real and effective group IDs
|
|
setregid() sets the real and effective group IDs of the calling process. Only a privileged process can set the real group ID and/or the effective group ID to any valid value. A non-privileged process can set the real group ID to the saved set-group-ID from one of the exec family of functions, or the effective group ID to either the saved set-group-ID or the real group ID. Any supplementary group I... |
|
setresgid(2) -- set real, effective, and saved user and group IDs
|
|
setresuid() sets the real, effective and/or saved user ID of the calling process. If the current real, effective or saved user ID is equal to that of a user having appropriate privileges, setresuid() sets the real, effective and saved user IDs to ruid, euid, and suid, respectively. Otherwise, setresuid() only sets the real, effective, and saved user IDs if ruid, euid, and suid each match at least ... |
|
setresuid(2) -- set real, effective, and saved user and group IDs
|
|
setresuid() sets the real, effective and/or saved user ID of the calling process. If the current real, effective or saved user ID is equal to that of a user having appropriate privileges, setresuid() sets the real, effective and saved user IDs to ruid, euid, and suid, respectively. Otherwise, setresuid() only sets the real, effective, and saved user IDs if ruid, euid, and suid each match at least ... |
|
setreuid(2) -- set real and effective user IDs
|
|
The setreuid() function sets the real and effective user IDs of the current process to the values specified by the ruid and euid arguments. If ruid or euid is -1, the corresponding effective or real user ID of the current process is left unchanged. A process with appropriate privileges can set either ID to any value. An unprivileged process can only set the effective user ID if the euid argument i... |
|
setrlimit(2) -- control maximum resource consumption
|
|
Limits on the consumption of a variety of resources by the calling process may be obtained with getrlimit() and set with setrlimit(). Each call to either getrlimit() or setrlimit() identifies a specific resource to be operated upon as well as a resource limit. A resource limit is represented by an rlimit structure, pointed to by the rlp argument and includes the following members: rlim_t rlim_cur;... |
|
setrlimit64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
setsid(2) -- create session and set process group ID
|
|
If the calling process is not a process group leader, setsid() creates a new session. The calling process becomes the session leader of this new session, it becomes the process group leader of a new process group, and it has no controlling terminal. The process group ID of the calling process is set equal to the process ID of the calling process. The calling process is the only process in the new ... |
|
setsockopt(2) -- get and set options on sockets
|
|
The getsockopt() and setsockopt() system calls manipulate options associated with a socket. The socket is identified by the socket descriptor s. Options can exist at multiple protocol levels, and they are always present at the uppermost "socket" level (see socket(2)). When manipulating socket options, the level at which the option resides (level) and the name of the option (optname) must be spec... |
|
settimeofda(2) -- set the date and time
|
|
The settimeofday() function sets the current time, expressed as seconds and microseconds since Epoch, and passed as the timeval structure pointed to by tp. The resolution of the system clock is one microsecond. |
|
settimeofday(2) -- set the date and time
|
|
The settimeofday() function sets the current time, expressed as seconds and microseconds since Epoch, and passed as the timeval structure pointed to by tp. The resolution of the system clock is one microsecond. |
|
settune(2) -- set the value of a kernel tunable parameter
|
|
This function sets the value of the kernel tunable parameter named tunable to the supplied value. This new value will take effect immediately, except in the cases noted below. Some parameters cannot be changed without rebooting the OS kernel. Some parameters represent limits on resources that can be consumed by individual processes. In general, changes to these parameters do not affect processes t... |
|
settune_txn(2) -- sets the values of kernel tunable parameters in a transaction
|
|
This function is used to modify the values of a set of kernel tunable Hewlett-Packard Company - 2 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 settune_txn(2) settune_txn(2) parameters at the same time. The caller needs to have super-user privileges to make this call. Changes are made to the tunables using a transactional change model using a three-phase commit where the following rules apply: + None of the ... |
|
setuid(2) -- set user and group IDs
|
|
setuid() sets the real-user-ID (ruid), effective-user-ID (euid), and/or saved-user-ID (suid) of the calling process. The super-user's euid is zero. The following conditions govern setuid's behavior: + If the euid is zero, setuid() sets the ruid, euid, and suid to uid. + If the euid is not zero, but the argument uid is equal to the ruid or the suid, setuid() sets the euid to uid; the ruid and sui... |
|
setuname(2) -- get information about computer system; set node name (system name)
|
|
uname() The uname() system call places information identifying the computer system in the utsname structure pointed to by name. The utsname structure, defined in , is set up as follows: #define UTSLEN 9 #define SNLEN 15 char sysname[UTSLEN]; char nodename[UTSLEN]; char release[UTSLEN]; char version[UTSLEN]; char machine[UTSLEN]; char idnumber[SNLEN]; Each field is a null-terminated ... |
|
shmat(2) -- shared memory operations
|
|
shmat() attaches the shared memory segment associated with the shared memory identifier specified by shmid to the data segment of the calling process. The segment is attached for reading if (shmflg & SHM_RDONLY) is "true"; otherwise, it is attached for reading and writing. It is not possible to attach a segment for write only. If the shared memory segment has never been attached to by any proces... |
|
shmctl(2) -- shared memory control operations
|
|
The shmctl() system call provides a variety of shared memory control operations as specified by the cmd argument. cmd can have the following values: IPC_STAT Place the current value of each member of the data structure associated with shmid into the structure pointed to by buf. The contents of this structure are defined in glossary(9). IPC_SET Set the value of the following members of the data str... |
|
shmdt(2) -- shared memory operations
|
|
shmat() attaches the shared memory segment associated with the shared memory identifier specified by shmid to the data segment of the calling process. The segment is attached for reading if (shmflg & SHM_RDONLY) is "true"; otherwise, it is attached for reading and writing. It is not possible to attach a segment for write only. If the shared memory segment has never been attached to by any proces... |
|
shmget(2) -- get shared memory segment
|
|
shmget() returns the shared memory identifier associated with key. A shared memory identifier and associated data structure and shared memory segment of size size bytes (see glossary(9)) are created for key if one of the following is true: + key is equal to IPC_PRIVATE. This call creates a new identifier, subject to available resources. The identifier will never be returned by another call to shmg... |
|
shmop(2) -- shared memory operations
|
|
shmat() attaches the shared memory segment associated with the shared memory identifier specified by shmid to the data segment of the calling process. The segment is attached for reading if (shmflg & SHM_RDONLY) is "true"; otherwise, it is attached for reading and writing. It is not possible to attach a segment for write only. If the shared memory segment has never been attached to by any proces... |
|
shm_open(2) -- create/open a shared memory object
|
|
The shm_open() system call establishes a connection between a shared memory object and a file descriptor. It creates an open file description that corresponds to the shared memory object and returns a file descriptor that refers to that open file description. This file descriptor (which is the lowest numbered file descriptor not currently open for that process) is used by other functions to refer ... |
|
shm_unlink(2) -- unlink a shared memory object
|
|
The shm_unlink() system call removes the name of the shared memory object named by the string pointed to by name. If one or more references to the shared memory object exists when the object is unlinked, the name will be removed before shm_unlink() returns, but the removal of the memory object contents will be postponed until all open and map references to the shared memory object have been remove... |
|
shutdown(2) -- shut down a socket
|
|
The shutdown() system call is used to shut down a socket. In the case of a full-duplex connection, shutdown() can be used to either partially or fully shut down the socket, depending upon the value of how. how Interpretation SHUT_RD or 0 Further receives are disallowed SHUT_WR or 1 Further sends are disallowed SHUT_RDWR or 2 Further sends and receives are disallowed The s parameter is a socket des... |
|
sigaction(2) -- examine and change signal action
|
|
The sigaction() function allows the calling process to examine and/or specify the action to be associated with a specific signal. The argument sig specifies the signal; acceptable values are defined in . The structure sigaction, used to describe an action to be taken, is defined in the header to include at least the following members: Member Type Member Name Description void(*... |
|
sigaltstack(2) -- set and/or get signal alternate stack context.
|
|
The sigaltstack() function allows a process to define and examine the state of an alternate stack for signal handlers. Signals that have been explicitly declared to execute on the alternate stack will be delivered on the alternate stack. If ss is not a null pointer, it points to a stack_t structure that specifies the alternate signal stack that will take effect upon return from sigaltstack(). The ... |
|
sigblock(2) -- block signals
|
|
sigblock() causes the signals specified in mask to be added to the set of signals currently being blocked from delivery. Signal i is blocked if the i-th bit in mask is 1, as specified with the macro sigmask(i). It is not possible to block signals that cannot be ignored, as documented in i). It is not possible to block signals that cannot be ignored, as documented in ). It is not possible to block ... |
|
siginterrupt(2) -- allow signals to interrupt functions
|
|
The siginterrupt() function is used to change the restart behaviour when a function is interrupted by the specified signal. The function siginterrupt(sig, flag) has an effect as if implemented as: siginterrupt(int sig, int flag) { int ret; struct sigaction act; (void) sigaction(sig, NULL, &act); if (flag) act.sa_flags &= ~SA_RESTART; else act.sa_flags |= SA_RESTART; ret = sigaction(sig, &act, NULL... |
|
signal(2) -- signal management
|
|
The functions described in this reference page provide simplified signal management: + The signal() function chooses one of three ways in which receipt of the signal number sig is to be subsequently handled. + The sigset() function is used to modify signal dispositions. + The sighold() function adds sig to the calling process' signal mask. + The sigrelse() function removes sig from the calling pr... |
|
sigpending(2) -- examine pending signals
|
|
sigpending() stores the set of signals that are blocked from delivery and are pending to the calling thread, at the location pointed to by set. |
|
sigprocmask(2) -- examine and change blocked signals
|
|
The sigprocmask() function allows the calling thread to examine and/or change its signal mask. If the argument set is not a null pointer, it points to a set of signals to be used to change the currently blocked set. The argument how indicates the way in which the set is changed and consists of one of the following values: SIG_BLOCK The resulting set will be the union of the current set and the sig... |
|
sigqueue(2) -- queue a signal to a process
|
|
The sigqueue() system call causes the signal specified by signo to be sent with the value specified by value to the process specified by pid. If signo is zero (the null signal), error checking is performed but no signal is actually sent. The null signal can be used to check the validity of pid. The conditions required for a process to have permission to queue a signal to another process are the sa... |
|
sigsend(2) -- send a signal to a process or a group of processes
|
|
The sigsend() system call sends a signal to a process or a group of processes. The process or group of processes to which the signal is to be sent is specified by id and idtype. The signal to be sent is specified by sig and is either one from the list given in signal() (see signal(2)) or 0. If sig is equal to zero (the null signal), error checking is performed but no signal is actually sent. This ... |
|
sigsendset(2) -- send a signal to a process or a group of processes
|
|
The sigsend() system call sends a signal to a process or a group of processes. The process or group of processes to which the signal is to be sent is specified by id and idtype. The signal to be sent is specified by sig and is either one from the list given in signal() (see signal(2)) or 0. If sig is equal to zero (the null signal), error checking is performed but no signal is actually sent. This ... |
|
sigsetmask(2) -- set current signal mask
|
|
sigsetmask() sets the current signal mask (those signals that are blocked from delivery). Signal i is blocked if the i-th bit in mask, as specified with the macro sigmask(i), is a i), is a ), is a 1. It is not possible to mask signals that cannot be ignored, as documented in signal(5); this restriction is silently imposed by the system. sigblock() can be used to add elements to the set of blocked ... |
|
sigspace(2) -- assure sufficient signal stack space
|
|
sigspace() requests additional stack space that is guaranteed to be available for processing signals received by the calling process. If the value of stacksize is positive, it specifies the size of a space, in bytes, which the system guarantees to be available when processing a signal. If the value of stacksize is zero, any guarantee of space is removed. If the value is negative, the guarantee is ... |
|
sigstack(2) -- set and/or get alternate signal stack context
|
|
The sigstack() function allows the calling process to indicate to the system an area of its address space to be used for processing signals received by the process. The sigstack() function requires the application to have knowledge of the underlying system's stack architecture. To ensure portability, use sigaltstack() instead of sigstack() when writing or rewriting applications. If the ss argumen... |
|
sigsuspend(2) -- wait for a signal
|
|
The sigsuspend() function replaces the current signal mask of the calling thread with the set of signals pointed to by sigmask and then suspends the thread until delivery of a signal whose action is either to execute a signal-catching function or to terminate the process. This will not cause any other signals that may have been pending on the process to become pending on the thread. If the action ... |
|
sigtimedwait(2) -- synchronously accept a signal
|
|
The sigwait() function atomically selects and clears a pending signal from set and returns the signal number in the location pointed to by sig. If none of the signals in set is pending at the time of the call, the calling thread will be suspended until one or more signals become pending or the thread is interrupted by an unblocked, caught signal. The signals in set should be blocked at the time of... |
|
sigvector(2) -- software signal facilities
|
|
The system defines a set of signals that can be delivered to a process. The set of signals is defined in signal(5), along with the meaning and side effects of each signal. This manual entry, along with those for sigblock(2), sigsetmask(2), sigpause(3C), and sigspace(2), defines an alternate mechanism for handling these signals that ensures the delivery of signals and the integrity of signal handli... |
|
sigwait(2) -- synchronously accept a signal
|
|
The sigwait() function atomically selects and clears a pending signal from set and returns the signal number in the location pointed to by sig. If none of the signals in set is pending at the time of the call, the calling thread will be suspended until one or more signals become pending or the thread is interrupted by an unblocked, caught signal. The signals in set should be blocked at the time of... |
|
sigwaitinfo(2) -- synchronously accept a signal
|
|
The sigwait() function atomically selects and clears a pending signal from set and returns the signal number in the location pointed to by sig. If none of the signals in set is pending at the time of the call, the calling thread will be suspended until one or more signals become pending or the thread is interrupted by an unblocked, caught signal. The signals in set should be blocked at the time of... |
|
socket(2) -- create an endpoint for communication
|
|
The socket() system call creates an endpoint for communication and returns a descriptor. The socket descriptor returned is used in all subsequent socket-related system calls. The af parameter specifies an address family to be used to interpret addresses in later operations that specify the socket. These address families are defined in the include files and . The on... |
|
socketpair(2) -- create a pair of connected sockets
|
|
The socketpair() system call creates an unnamed pair of connected sockets and returns two file descriptors in sv[0] and sv[1]. The two sockets are indistinguishable. af specifies the address family. See socket(2). type specifies the semantics of communication for the socket. protocol specifies a particular protocol to be used. protocol can be specified as zero, which causes the system to choose a ... |
|
sprofil(2) -- execution time profile for disjointed text spaces
|
|
sprofil() controls profiling, by which the system maintains estimates of the amount of time the calling program spends executing at various places in its address space. It differs from its predecessor profil(2) in that it allows simultaneous profiling of many disjointed regions of memory. profp must point to an ordered array of prof structures. The prof structure is defined as: struct prof { void ... |
|
stat(2) -- get file status
|
|
The stat() function obtains information about the named file and writes it to the area pointed to by the buf argument. The path argument is a pointer to a path name of any file within the mounted file system. (All directories listed in the path name must be searchable). Read, write or execute permission of the named file is not required, but all directories listed in the pathname leading to all di... |
|
stat64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
statfs(2) -- get file system statistics
|
|
statfs() returns status information for a mounted file system. fstatfs() returns similar information for an open file. The parameters for the statfs() and fstatfs() functions are as follows: path is a pointer to a path name of any file within the mounted file system. buf is a pointer to a statfs structure, which is where the file system status information is stored. fildes is a file descriptor for... |
|
statvfs(2) -- get file system information
|
|
statvfs() returns information about a mounted file system. fstatvfs() returns similar information about an open file. The parameters for the statvfs() and fstatvfs() functions are as follows: path is a pointer to a path name of any file within the mounted file system. buf is a pointer to a statvfs structure, which is where the file system status information is stored. fildes is a file descriptor f... |
|
statvfs64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
stime(2) -- set time and date
|
|
The stime() system call sets the system time and date. tp points to the value of time as measured in seconds from 00:00:00 on January 1, 1970, Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). |
|
stream(2) -- STREAMS enhancements to standard system calls
|
|
The open(), close(), read(), readv(), write(), writev(), ioctl(), select(), and signal() system calls are enhanced to support STREAMS. The new functionality is described below for each system call. |
|
stty(2) -- control terminal device (Bell Version 6 compatibility)
|
|
For certain status settings and status inquiries about terminal devices, the functions stty() and gtty() are equivalent to ioctl(fildes, TIOCSETP, argp) and ioctl(fildes, TIOCGETP, argp) respectively (see ioctl(2) and termio(7). |
|
swapcontext(2) -- manipulate user contexts
|
|
The makecontext() function modifies the context specified by ucp, which has been initialized using getcontext(). When this context is resumed using swapcontext() or setcontext(), program execution continues by calling func(), passing it the arguments that follow argc in the makecontext() call. Before a call is made to makecontext(), the context being modified should have a stack allocated for it. ... |
|
swapon(2) -- add swap space for interleaved paging/swapping
|
|
The swapon() system call makes a block device or a directory named path available to the system for paging and swapping. priority indicates the order in which the swap space from the device or file system is used. Space is taken from the lower-priority systems first. swapon() can be used only by users who have appropriate privileges. If path names a block device file swapon() makes it available to... |
|
symlink(2) -- make symbolic link to a file
|
|
The symlink() function creates a symbolic link. Its name is the pathname pointed to by path2, which must be a pathname that does not name an existing file or symbolic link. The contents of the symbolic link are the string pointed to by path1. |
|
sync(2) -- update disk
|
|
sync() causes all information in memory that should be on disk to be written out. This includes modified file system meta-data and delayed block I/O. It should be used by commands and programs that examine a file system, such as fsck, df, etc. It is mandatory before a shutdown. The writing, although scheduled, is not necessarily complete upon return from sync. In some HP-UX systems, sync() may be ... |
|
sysconf(2) -- get configurable system variables
|
|
The sysconf() system call provides a way for applications to determine the current value of a configurable limit or variable. The name argument represents the system variable being queried. The following table lists the configuration variable name, the associated value for the name argument that is used in the sysconf() call and the value returned: Variable Value for name Value Returned __________... |
|
sysfs(2) -- get file system type information
|
|
sysfs is used to return information about the file system types configured in the system. The number arguments accepted by sysfs varies and depends on the opcode. The current recognized opcodes and their functions are: GETFSIND Translate fsname, a null-terminated file-system type identifier, into a file-system type index. GETFSTYP Translate fs_index, a file-system type index, into a null-terminate... |
|
time(2) -- get time
|
|
time() returns the value of time in seconds since the Epoch. If tloc is not a null pointer, the return value is also assigned to the object to which it points. |
|
timers(2) -- timer operations
|
|
timer_create() The timer_create() function creates a per-process timer using the specified clock, clock_id, as the timing base. The timer_create() function returns, in the location referenced by timerid, a timer ID of type timer_t used to identify the timer in timer requests. This timer ID will be unique within the calling process until the timer is deleted. The particular clock, clock_id, is defi... |
|
timer_create(2) -- timer operations
|
|
timer_create() The timer_create() function creates a per-process timer using the specified clock, clock_id, as the timing base. The timer_create() function returns, in the location referenced by timerid, a timer ID of type timer_t used to identify the timer in timer requests. This timer ID will be unique within the calling process until the timer is deleted. The particular clock, clock_id, is defi... |
|
timer_delete(2) -- timer operations
|
|
timer_create() The timer_create() function creates a per-process timer using the specified clock, clock_id, as the timing base. The timer_create() function returns, in the location referenced by timerid, a timer ID of type timer_t used to identify the timer in timer requests. This timer ID will be unique within the calling process until the timer is deleted. The particular clock, clock_id, is defi... |
|
timer_getoverrun(2) -- timer operations
|
|
timer_create() The timer_create() function creates a per-process timer using the specified clock, clock_id, as the timing base. The timer_create() function returns, in the location referenced by timerid, a timer ID of type timer_t used to identify the timer in timer requests. This timer ID will be unique within the calling process until the timer is deleted. The particular clock, clock_id, is defi... |
|
timer_gettime(2) -- timer operations
|
|
timer_create() The timer_create() function creates a per-process timer using the specified clock, clock_id, as the timing base. The timer_create() function returns, in the location referenced by timerid, a timer ID of type timer_t used to identify the timer in timer requests. This timer ID will be unique within the calling process until the timer is deleted. The particular clock, clock_id, is defi... |
|
timer_settime(2) -- timer operations
|
|
timer_create() The timer_create() function creates a per-process timer using the specified clock, clock_id, as the timing base. The timer_create() function returns, in the location referenced by timerid, a timer ID of type timer_t used to identify the timer in timer requests. This timer ID will be unique within the calling process until the timer is deleted. The particular clock, clock_id, is defi... |
|
times(2) -- get process and child process times
|
|
times() fills the structure pointed to by buffer with time-accounting information. The structure defined in is as follows: struct tms { clock_t tms_utime; /* user time */ clock_t tms_stime; /* system time */" clock_t tms_cutime; /* user time, children */ clock_t tms_cstime; /* system time, children */ }; This information comes from the calling process and each of its terminated chil... |
|
truncate(2) -- truncate a file to a specified length
|
|
The ftruncate() function causes the regular file referenced by fildes to have a size of length bytes. The truncate() function causes the regular file named by path to have a size of length bytes. The effect of ftruncate() and truncate() on other types of files is unspecified. If the file previously was larger than length, the extra data is lost. If it was previously shorter than length, bytes betw... |
|
truncate64(2) -- non-POSIX standard API interfaces to support large files
|
|
New API's to support large files in 32-bit applications. These API interfaces are not a part of the POSIX standard and may be removed in the future. creat64() The creat64() function returns a file descriptor which can be used to grow the file past 2 GB if desired. All other functional behaviors, returns, and errors are identical to creat(). fstat64() The fstat64() function is identical to fstat()... |
|
ttrace(2) -- tracing facility for multithreaded processes
|
|
The ttrace() system call provides a means by which a process can control the execution of another process. Its primary use is for the implementation of breakpoint and event driven debugging; see adb(1) and dde(1). ttrace() is designed to function for both single and multithreaded traced processes. The traced process behaves normally until one of its threads encounters a signal (see signal(2) for t... |
|
ttrace_wait(2) -- wait for ttrace event
|
|
The ttrace_wait() system call provides a means to wait for a ttrace() event to occur. A tracing process (debugger) will normally invoke ttrace_wait() after a process or any of its threads has been set running. ttrace_wait() synchronizes tracing requests directed at threads within the traced process. This mechanism differs from the process-oriented synchronization provided by wait() or waitpid() (s... |
|
tuneinfo2(2) -- retrieve detailed information about kernel tunable parameters
|
|
This function provides detailed information about one or all kernel tunable parameters. If a particular parameter is of interest, specify it by name in tunable. Otherwise, set tunable to NULL and information will be returned on all kernel tunable parameters (if the supplied buffer is big enough). version must always be set to TUNEINFO_VERSION. Information about the selected tunable parameters is r... |
|
ualarm(2) -- set the interval timer
|
|
The ualarm() function causes the SIGALRM signal to be generated for the calling process after the number of real-time microseconds specified by the useconds argument has elapsed. When the interval argument is non-zero, repeated timeout notification occurs with a period in microseconds specified by the interval argument. If the notification signal, SIGALRM, is not caught or ignored, the calling pro... |
|
ulimit(2) -- get and set user limits
|
|
ulimit() provides for control over process limits. Available values for cmd are: UL_GETFSIZE Get the file size limit of the process. The limit is in units of 512-byte blocks and is inherited by child processes. Files of any size can be read. The optional second argument is not used. UL_SETFSIZE Set the file size limit of the process to the value of the optional second argument which is taken as a ... |
|
umask(2) -- set and get file creation mask
|
|
umask() sets the process's file mode creation mask to umask() and returns the previous value of the mask. Only the file access permission bits of the masks are used. The bits set in cmask specify which permission bits to turn off in the mode of the created file, and should be specified using the symbolic values defined in stat(5). |
|
umount(2) -- unmount a file system
|
|
umount() requests that a previously mounted file system contained on the block special device identified by name be unmounted. name is a pointer to a path name. After unmounting the file system, the directory upon which the file system was mounted reverts to its ordinary interpretation. umount() can also request that a file system mounted previously on the directory identified by name be unmounted... |
|
uname(2) -- get information about computer system; set node name (system name)
|
|
uname() The uname() system call places information identifying the computer system in the utsname structure pointed to by name. The utsname structure, defined in , is set up as follows: #define UTSLEN 9 #define SNLEN 15 char sysname[UTSLEN]; char nodename[UTSLEN]; char release[UTSLEN]; char version[UTSLEN]; char machine[UTSLEN]; char idnumber[SNLEN]; Each field is a null-terminated ... |
|
unlink(2) -- remove directory entry; delete file
|
|
The unlink() system call removes the directory entry named by the path name pointed to by path. When all links to a file have been removed and no process has the file open, the space occupied by the file is freed and the file ceases to exist. If one or more processes have the file open when the last link is removed, only the directory entry is removed immediately so that processes that do not alre... |
|
usleep(2) -- suspend execution for an interval
|
|
The usleep() function will cause the calling thread to be suspended from execution until either the number of real-time microseconds specified by the argument useconds has elapsed, or a signal is delivered to the calling thread and its action is to invoke a signal-catching function or to terminate the process. The suspension time may be longer than requested due to the scheduling of other activiti... |
|
ustat(2) -- get mounted file system statistics
|
|
The ustat() system call returns information about a mounted file system. dev is a device number identifying a device containing a mounted file system. buf is a pointer to a ustat structure (defined in ) that includes the following elements: int32_t f_tfree; /* Total free blocks */ ino_t f_tinode; /* Number of free inodes */ char f_fname[6]; /* Filsys name or null */ char f_fpack[6]; /* Fi... |
|
utime(2) -- set file access and modification times
|
|
The utime() system call sets the access and modification times of the file to which the path argument refers. If times is a NULL pointer, the access and modification times of the file are set to the current time. A process must be the owner of the file or have write permission on the file to use utime() in this manner. If times is not a NULL pointer, times is interpreted as a pointer to a utimbuf ... |
|
utimes(2) -- set file access and modification times
|
|
The utimes() function sets the access and modification times of the file pointed to by the path argument to the value of the times argument. The utimes() function allows time specifications accurate to the microsecond. For utimes(), the times argument is an array of timeval structures. The first array member represents the date and time of last access, and the second member represents the date and... |
|
vfork(2) -- spawn new process; share virtual memory
|
|
vfork() can be used to create new processes without fully copying the address space of the old process. If a forked process is simply going to do an exec() (see exec(2)), the data space copied from the parent to the child by fork() is not used. This is particularly inefficient in a paged environment, making vfork particularly useful. Depending upon the size of the parent's data space, vfork() can... |
|
vfsmount(2) -- mount a file system
|
|
The vfsmount() system call attaches a file system to a directory. After a successful return, references to directory dir refer to the root directory of the newly mounted file system. dir is a pointer to a null-terminated string containing a path name. dir must exist already, and must be a directory. Its old contents are inaccessible while the file system is mounted. type indicates the type of the ... |
|
wait(2) -- wait for child process to stop or terminate
|
|
The wait() and waitpid() functions shall obtain status information pertaining to one of the caller's child processes. Various options permit status information to be obtained for child processes that have terminated or stopped. If status information is available for two or more child processes, the order in which their status is reported is unspecified. The wait() function shall suspend execution... |
|
wait3(2) -- wait for child process to change state
|
|
The wait3() and wait4() functions allow the calling process to obtain various status information for a caller's child process based on the options specified. If status information is available for two or more child processes, the order of which process to report status on is not defined. The wait4() function is similar to wait3(), except that wait4() waits for a specific child as indicated by the... |
|
wait4(2) -- wait for child process to change state
|
|
The wait3() and wait4() functions allow the calling process to obtain various status information for a caller's child process based on the options specified. If status information is available for two or more child processes, the order of which process to report status on is not defined. The wait4() function is similar to wait3(), except that wait4() waits for a specific child as indicated by the... |
|
waitid(2) -- wait for child process to change state
|
|
The waitid() function suspends the calling process until one of its children changes state. It records the current state of a child in the structure pointed to by infop. If a child process changed state prior to the call to waitid(), waitid() returns immediately. The idtype and id arguments are used to specify which children waitid() will wait for. If idtype is P_PID, waitid() will wait for the ch... |
|
waitpid(2) -- wait for child process to stop or terminate
|
|
The wait() and waitpid() functions shall obtain status information pertaining to one of the caller's child processes. Various options permit status information to be obtained for child processes that have terminated or stopped. If status information is available for two or more child processes, the order in which their status is reported is unspecified. The wait() function shall suspend execution... |
|
write(2) -- write on a file
|
|
The write() function attempts to write nbyte bytes from the buffer pointed to by buf to the file associated with the open file descriptor, fildes. If nbyte is 0, write() will return 0 and have no other results if the file is a regular file. Otherwise, the results are unspecified. On a regular file or other file capable of seeking, the actual writing of data proceeds from the position in the file i... |
|
writev(2) -- write on a file
|
|
The write() function attempts to write nbyte bytes from the buffer pointed to by buf to the file associated with the open file descriptor, fildes. If nbyte is 0, write() will return 0 and have no other results if the file is a regular file. Otherwise, the results are unspecified. On a regular file or other file capable of seeking, the actual writing of data proceeds from the position in the file i... |
|
_exit(2) -- terminate process
|
|
exit() terminates the calling process and passes status to the system for inspection, see wait(2). Returning from main in a C program has the same effect as exit(); the status value is the function value returned by main (this value is undefined if main does not take care to return a value or to call exit() explicitly). If the calling process is multithreaded, all threads/lightweight process in th... |
|
__pset_rtctl(2) -- real-time processor set control
|
|
HP-UX Processor Sets allow a subset of processors in the system to be isolated for exclusive use by specified threads and processes. Only the threads bound to a processor set can execute on processors in that processor set (see pset_create(2)). The __pset_rtctl() function extends processor set functionality for real-time applications to minimize operating system activities in a processor set. A pr... |
|
ApplicationShell(3) -- The ApplicationShell widget class
|
|
ApplicationShell is used as the main top-level window for an application. An application should have more than one ApplicationShell only if it implements multiple logical applications. |
|
atexit(3) -- register a function to be called at program termination
|
|
atexit() registers the function func to be called, without arguments, at normal program termination. Functions registered by atexit() are called in reverse order of registration. An atexit() call during exit processing is always unsuccessful. The number of registered functions should not exceed ATEXIT_MAX as specified in . When necessary, crt0() or dld.sl() (see crt0(3) and dld.sl(5)) re... |
|
audit_intro(3) -- Introduction to the DCE Audit API runtime.
|
|
This introduction gives general information about the DCE Audit Application Programming Interface (API) and an overview of the following parts of the DCE Audit API runtime: + Runtime services + Environment variables + Data types and structures + Permissions required |
|
close_secdef(3) -- security defaults configuration file routines
|
|
open_secdef opens the security configuration file /etc/default/security. This function must be called prior to calling get_secdef_str or get_secdef_int. close_secdef closes the security configuration file. get_secdef_str and get_secdef_int return the value of the specified parameter defined in the security configuration file. See the security(4) manpage. Programs using these routines must be compi... |
|
Composite(3) -- The Composite widget class
|
|
Composite widgets are intended to be containers for other widgets and can have an arbitrary number of children. Their responsibilities (implemented either directly by the widget class or indirectly by Intrinsics functions) include: + Overall management of children from creation to destruction. + Destruction of descendants when the composite widget is destroyed. + Physical arrangement (geometry man... |
|
Constraint(3) -- The Constraint widget class
|
|
Constraint widgets maintain additional state data for each child. For example, client-defined constraints on the child's geometry may be specified. When a constrained composite widget defines constraint resources, all of that widget's children inherit all of those resources as their own. These constraint resources are set and read just the same as any other resources defined for the child. This ... |
|
copydvagent(3) -- manipulate device assignment database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getdvagent, getdvagnam, and copydvagent each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of an entry in the Device Assignment database. Each database entry is returned as a dev_asg structure, declared in the header file: struct dev_field { char *fd_name; /* external name */ char **fd_devs; /* device list */ mask_t fd_type[1]; /* tape, printe... |
|
Core(3) -- The Core widget class
|
|
Core is the Xt Intrinsic base class for windowed widgets. The Object and RectObj classes provide support for windowless widgets. |
|
crt0(3) -- execution startup routines
|
|
The C, aC++, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object file crt0.o for statically-bound programs to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. It contains startup code that must be linked using ld to every statically-bound program. In a dynamically linked program (the default method), the crt0.o object file is not used, and all actions normally associated with it are inste... |
|
crt0.o(3) -- execution startup routines
|
|
The C, aC++, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object file crt0.o for statically-bound programs to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. It contains startup code that must be linked using ld to every statically-bound program. In a dynamically linked program (the default method), the crt0.o object file is not used, and all actions normally associated with it are inste... |
|
crt0.o_ia(3) -- execution startup routines
|
|
The C, aC++, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object file crt0.o for statically-bound programs to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. It contains startup code that must be linked using ld to every statically-bound program. In a dynamically linked program (the default method), the crt0.o object file is not used, and all actions normally associated with it are inste... |
|
crt0.o_pa(3) -- 64-bit ELF uses crt0.o only
|
|
PA-RISC 32-bit SOM The C, Pascal, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object files crt0.o, gcrt0.o, or mcrt0.o to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. All are identical except that gcrt0.o and mcrt0.o provide additional functionality for gpro profiling support respectively. The following symbols are defined in these object files: _environ An array of character pointer... |
|
crt0_ia(3) -- execution startup routines
|
|
The C, aC++, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object file crt0.o for statically-bound programs to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. It contains startup code that must be linked using ld to every statically-bound program. In a dynamically linked program (the default method), the crt0.o object file is not used, and all actions normally associated with it are inste... |
|
crt0_pa(3) -- execution startup routines; PARISC
|
|
PA-RISC 32-bit SOM The C, Pascal, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object files crt0.o, gcrt0.o, or mcrt0.o to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. All are identical except that gcrt0.o and mcrt0.o provide additional functionality for gpro profiling support respectively. The following symbols are defined in these object files: _environ An array of character pointer... |
|
cr_close(3) -- close a crash dump descriptor
|
|
The cr_close() function closes the crash dump descriptor structure pointed to by crash_cb. The crash_cb structure is a crash dump descriptor filled in by a cr_open(3) call. All associated resources (memory and files) are released. |
|
cr_info(3) -- retrieve crash dump information
|
|
The cr_info() function returns a pointer to a cr_info_t structure with information about an open crash dump. cr_info_t The cr_info_t structure contains the following fields. Note that there is no necessary correlation between the placement in this list and the order in the structure, and the structure may contain other, reserved fields. In the future, this structure may change in size and should n... |
|
cr_isaddr(3) -- validate whether physical page number was dumped
|
|
The cr_isaddr() checks to see if the specified page number, pagenum, is present in the open crash dump represented by crash_cb. It sets the Boolean to which avail points to indicate the presence (1) or absence (0) of the page. |
|
cr_open(3) -- open crash dump for reading
|
|
The cr_open() library call opens a crash dump and passes back a crash dump descriptor. The path argument points to a path name naming a crash dump directory or file, and must not exceed PATH_MAX bytes in length. The CRASH * to which crash_cb points is set to a crash dump descriptor, which can then be passed to the other cr_*() functions to access the crash dump. flags is a bitmask of zero or more ... |
|
cr_perror(3) -- print a libcrash error or warning message
|
|
cr_perror() prints to standard error an error or warning message corresponding to error, which should be the return value from an immediately previous call to one of the libcrash calls. The message describes the problem that occurred, explains its implications when appropriate, and gives corrective action where appropriate. If called with a zero error value, indicating success, cr_perror() prints ... |
|
cr_read(3) -- read from crash dump
|
|
The cr_read() function attempts to read the memory area defined by mem_page and num_pages into the buffer pointed to by buf from the crash dump opened using crash_cb. The cr_read() starts at the position in the crash dump associated with the physical memory offset given by mem_page. If the physical memory page mem_page does not exist in the crash dump, cr_read() sets *num_pages to 0 and returns 0.... |
|
cr_set_node(3) -- set node number
|
|
The cr_set_node() function expects the physical node number passed in node_num. The node number will be used by cr_read() and cr_isaddr() to access the node private memory contained on a particular node. This function is only valid for ccnumadir (version 4) dumps. If the old_node_num argument is non-NULL, the address referenced by old_node_num will be set to the previous node number. If old_node_n... |
|
cr_uncompress(3) -- uncompress a file in a crash dump
|
|
The cr_uncompress() ensures that a file, part of a crash dump described by crash_cb, is uncompressed and matches its expected size and checksum (as computed by cksum(1)). This call is most often used to ensure the integrity of module files that are a part of the crash dump; see cr_info(3). pathname is the name of the file to uncompress. Supported compression methods include gzip(1), which appends ... |
|
cr_verify(3) -- verify integrity of crash dump
|
|
cr_verify() uncompresses and verifies the sizes and checksums of every file in the crash dump identified by crash_cb. flags is a bitmask of zero or more of the following flag values: CR_NOCHECKSUM cr_verify() will not attempt to verify checksums of files in the crash dump if this flag is set. Only sizes will be verified. CR_DELAYMSGS cr_verify() will write messages to stderr during time-consuming ... |
|
csa_add_calendar(3) -- add a calendar to the calendar service
|
|
The csa_add_calendar function creates a calendar on the calendar service. If the user does not have sufficient authority to add a calendar to the service, the error CSA_E_NO_AUTHORITY is returned. If the calendar already exists the error CSA_E_CALENDAR_EXISTS is returned. |
|
csa_add_entry(3) -- add an entry to the specified calendar
|
|
The csa_add_entry function adds a new entry to a calendar. The handle for the new entry is returned. Only the owner of the calendar, users with CSA_OWNER_RIGHTS, users with CSA_INSERT_PUBLIC_ENTRIES, user with CSA_INSERT_CONFIDENTIAL_ENTRIES, or users with CSA_INSERT_PRIVATE_ENTRIES access rights can add entries to the calendar. |
|
csa_call_callbacks(3) -- force the invocation of the callback functions associated with the specified callback list(s)
|
|
The csa_call_callbacks function causes the service to call the registered callback functions associationed with the specified callback list(s). The service will process each specified callback list and call the registered callback functions if there have been changes that would trigger the callbacks of that type. The order in which callbacks are invoked is implementation specific. |
|
csa_delete_calendar(3) -- delete a calendar from the calendar service
|
|
The csa_delete_calendar function deletes a calendar on the calendar service. Only the owner of the calendar, or a user with the owner authority, can remove the calendar from the calendar service. |
|
csa_delete_entry(3) -- delete an entry from a calendar
|
|
The csa_delete_entry function will delete an entry in a calendar. The delete_scope indicates the scope of the deletion if the entry has any associated recurring entries. All of the recurring entries can be deleted, only the specified entry can be deleted, or only the recurring entries that follow the specified entry can be deleted. Only the calendar owner, users with CSA_OWNER_RIGHTS, users with C... |
|
csa_free(3) -- free memory allocated by the calendaring service
|
|
The csa_free function frees memory allocated by the calendaring service. After the call, the pointer memory will be invalid and should not be referenced again. When any CSA function allocates and returns a buffer to the application, the application will free that memory with this call when it is finished with the memory. When a CSA function returns a base pointer to a complex structure containing ... |
|
csa_free_time_search(3) -- searches one or more calendars for available free time
|
|
The csa_free_time_search function searches for available free time on one or more calendars and returns a list of free time intervals found. Free time is an interval of time that is not currently scheduled on one or more calendars. The free time search is based on a date and time range and the minimum time duration required of the free time interval. Only the owner of the calendar, users with CSA_... |
|
csa_list_calendars(3) -- list the calendars supported by a calendar service
|
|
The csa_list_calendars function lists all the calendars supported by the specified calendar service. The names of the calendars supported are returned in calendar_names, which is an array of CSA_calendar_users structures with number_names elements. It is implementation specific what authority a calendar user needs to invoke this function. |
|
csa_list_calendar_attributes(3) -- list the names of the calendar attributes associated with a calendar
|
|
The csa_list_calendar_attributes function lists the names of the calendar attributes associated with a calendar. Using the returned calendar attribute name(s), the attribute value(s) may be read using the csa_read_calendar_attributes(3) function. Only the owner of the calendar, users with CSA_OWNER_RIGHTS, or users with CSA_VIEW_CALENDAR_ATTRIBUTES access rights can list the calendar attributes. |
|
csa_list_entries(3) -- list the calendar entries that match all the attribute search criteria
|
|
The csa_list_entries function lists the entry handles for the calendar entries that match all the attribute search criteria. Using the returned entry handles, the entries can have their attributes listed and read, or the entries can updated or deleted. Only the calendar owner, users with CSA_OWNER_RIGHTS, users with CSA_VIEW_PUBLIC_ENTRIES, user with CSA_VIEW_CONFIDENTIAL_ENTRIES, or users with CS... |
|
csa_list_entry_attributes(3) -- list the names of the entry attributes associated with the specified entry
|
|
The csa_list_entry_attributes function lists the names of the entry attributes associated with a calendar entry. Using the returned entry attributes name(s), the attributes value(s) may be read using the csa_read_entry_attributes(3) function. |
|
csa_list_entry_sequence(3) -- lists the recurring calendar entries that are associated with a calendar entry
|
|
The csa_list_entry_sequence function returns an array of the entry handles for the recurring entries associated with a specific calendar entry. The entry handles for the recurring calendar entries are returned in entry_list. A NULL is returned if no recurring entries are associated with this calendar entry. |
|
csa_logoff(3) -- terminate a session with a calendar
|
|
The csa_logoff function allows the calling application to terminate a session with a calendar. |
|
csa_logon(3) -- log on to the calendar service and establish a session with a calendar
|
|
The csa_logon function allows the calling application to logon to the calendar service. If the specified calendar does not exist, then the error CSA_E_CALENDAR_NOT_EXIST is returned. The function returns a Session Handle that the application will use in subsequent CSA calls. |
|
csa_look_up(3) -- Looks up calendar information
|
|
The csa_look_up function looks up calendar addressing information in the directory provided by the CSA calendaring service. It primarily is used to resolves a user's friendly name to a calendar address. Multiple addresses may be returned. An array of calendar user descriptors is allocated and returned containing fully resolved information about each entry. |
|
csa_query_configuration(3) -- Determine information about the installed CSA configuration
|
|
The csa_query_configuration function queries the underlying implementation's configuration, and returns the information requested about it, allocating memory when necessary. The underlying configuration file format is implementation dependent. |
|
csa_read_calendar_attributes(3) -- read and return the calendar attributes values for a calendar
|
|
The csa_read_calendar_attributes function returns an array of attributes structures containing the values of the calendar attributes of the specified calendar. The function will return all of the attributes if number_names argument is zero and attribute_names argument is NULL. Only the owner of the calendar, users with CSA_OWNER_RIGHTS, or users with CSA_VIEW_CALENDAR_ATTRIBUTES access rights can ... |
|
csa_read_entry_attributes(3) -- read and return the calendar entry attribute values for a specified calendar entry
|
|
The csa_read_entry_attributes function returns an array of attribute structures containing the values of the attributes of the specified calendar entry. The function will return all of the attributes if number_names argument is zero and attribute_names argument is NULL. |
|
csa_read_next_reminder(3) -- reads the next reminder of the given type in the specified calendar relative to a given time
|
|
The csa_read_next_reminder function reads the next reminder of the specified type in the specified calendar relative to a given time. More than one type of reminder may be specified. For each reminder type specified, the next reminder of that type after the given time will be returned. The owner of the calendar or users with CSA_OWNER_RIGHTS access right can read the next reminder for a calendar. |
|
csa_register_callback(3) -- register the callback functions to be invoked when the specified type of update occurs in the calendar
|
|
The csa_register_callback function adds the callback procedure to the specified callback list for the session. The service maintains a set of callback lists, logically one list per callback activity type per session. The service reports changes to the state of the service or its calendars by invoking the appropriate callbacks in sequence when the client calls the csa_call_callbacks function or whe... |
|
csa_restore(3) -- restores calendar entries from an archive file
|
|
This optional function is not implemented in the CDE 1.0 Sample Implementation. - 1 - Formatted: January 24, 2005 |
|
csa_save(3) -- saves calendar entries into an archive file
|
|
This optional function is not implemented in the CDE 1.0 Sample Implementation. - 1 - Formatted: January 24, 2005 |
|
csa_unregister_callback(3) -- unregister the specified callback functions
|
|
The csa_unregister_callback function removes the specified callback procedure to the specified callback list. Both the procedure and the client data must match for this function to remove the procedure. Specifying a value of NULL for both callback and client data will cause all callbacks on the specified callback list(s) to be removed. |
|
csa_update_calendar_attributes(3) -- update the calendar attributes values for a calendar
|
|
The csa_update_calendar_attributes function update the values of the calendar attributes of the specified calendar. The existing value of each specified attribute will be replaced by the new value specified in calendar_attributes. New attributes can be added using this function and existing attributes can be effectively deleted by setting the value part of the CSA_attributes structure to NULL. If ... |
|
csa_update_entry_attributes(3) -- update the calendar entry attributes
|
|
The csa_update_entry_attributes function updates the values of the entry attributes of the specified calendar entry. The existing value of each specified attribute will be replaced by the new value specified in entry_attributes. New attributes can be added using this function and existing attributes can be effectively deleted by setting the value part of the entry_attributes structure to NULL. If ... |
|
csa_x_process_updates(3) -- invoke a calendar application's calendar event handler
|
|
The csa_x_process_updates function checks to see if there have been calendar updates that are of interest to the client. If there have been one or more calendar updates, and the client previously registered a callback handler using csa_register_callback(3) for updates of this type, the callback function is called by csa_x_process_updates. The cal argument specifies a calendar session handle. The c... |
|
devnm(3) -- map device ID to file path
|
|
Given a device type, a device ID, and a string in which to return the result, devnm() maps the type and ID to a block or character special file (device file) name by searching /dev. It returns in path the full path name of the first special file encountered with a matching device type and ID. It searches /dev and all its subdirectories recursively in unspecified order. The parameters are: devtype ... |
|
DtActionCallbackProc(3) -- notify application that the status of an application has changed
|
|
The Dt/Action.h header defines the DtActionCallbackProc callback prototype as follows: typedef void (*DtActionCallbackProc)(DtActionInvocationID id, XtPointer client_data, DtActionArg *args, int argCount, DtActionStatus status); If registered when invoking an action with DtActionInvoke(3), a DtActionCallbackProc procedure is called whenever an action has a status update, such as action termination... |
|
DtActionDescription(3) -- obtain the descriptive text for a given action
|
|
The DtActionDescription function looks up and returns the descriptive text associated with the actionName action. The actionName argument is the name of the action. If there are multiple actionName actions, the string returned is the description of the most general. The most general action is the one with the lowest precedence, as described in dtactionfile(4) (``Action Selection''). |
|
DtActionExists(3) -- determine if a string corresponds to an action name
|
|
The DtActionExists function checks whether a given name corresponds to an action name. The name argument is the name of the action. |
|
DtActionIcon(3) -- get the icon information for an action
|
|
The DtActionIcon function gets the icon information for an action. The actionName argument is the name of the action. DtActionIcon returns the name of the icon associated with an actionName action. If the action definition does not explicitly identify an icon name, this function returns the default action icon name, as described in dtactionfile(4) (``Action Selection''). The default action icon ... |
|
DtActionInvoke(3) -- invoke a CDE action
|
|
The DtActionInvoke function provides a way for applications to invoke desktop actions on file or buffer arguments. Applications can register a callback for receiving action-done status and return arguments. The actions and data types databases must be initialized and loaded (using DtInitialize(3) and DtDbLoad(3)) before DtActionInvoke can run successfully. The w argument is a widget that becomes t... |
|
DtActionLabel(3) -- get the localizable label string for an action
|
|
The DtActionLabel function provides access to the localizable label string associated with an action named actionName. The actionName argument is the name of the action. The localizable label string is the string that all components should display to identify the action. If the action definition does not specify a label string, the action name itself is returned. The label string associated with a... |
|
DtAppInitialize(3) -- initialize the Desktop Services library
|
|
These functions perform the one-time initialization in the Desktop Services library. Applications must call either DtInitialize or DtAppInitialize before calling any other Desktop Services library routines. The difference between these two functions is whether app_context is specified. DtInitialize uses the default Intrinsic XtAppContext. The app_context argument is the application context, displa... |
|
DtComboBox(3) -- the ComboBox widget class
|
|
Note: This function has been superseded by the equivalent Motif function XmComboBox. Please refer to the Motif Programmer's Reference for more information. The DtComboBox widget is a combination of a TextField and a List widget that provides a list of valid choices for the TextField. Selecting an item from this list automatically fills in the TextField with that list item. Widget subclassing is n... |
|
DtComboBoxAddItem(3) -- add an item to the ComboBox widget
|
|
Note: This function has been superseded by the equivalent Motif function, XmComboBoxAddItem. Please refer to the Motif Programmer's Reference for more information. The DtComboBoxAddItem function adds the given item to the DtComboBox at the given position. The w argument specifies the DtComboBox widget ID. The item argument specifies the XmString for the new item. The pos argument specifies the po... |
|
DtComboBoxDeletePos(3) -- delete a DtComboBox item
|
|
Note: This function has been superseded by the equivalent Motif function, XmComboBoxDeletePos. Please refer to the Motif Programmer's Reference for more information. The DtComboBoxDeletePos function deletes a specified item from a DtComboBox widget. The w argument specifies the DtComboBox widget ID. The pos argument specifies the position of the item to be deleted. |
|
DtComboBoxSelectItem(3) -- select a DtComboBox item
|
|
Note: This function has been superseded by the equivalent Motif function, XmComboBoxSelectItem. Please refer to the Motif Programmer's Reference for more information. The DtComboBoxSelectItem function selects an item in the XmList of the DtComboBox widget. The w argument specifies the DtComboBox widget ID. The item argument specifies the XmString of the item to be selected. If the item is not fou... |
|
DtComboBoxSetItem(3) -- set an item in the DtComboBox list
|
|
Note: This function has been superseded by the equivalent Motif function, XmComboBoxSetItem. Please refer to the Motif Programmer's Reference for more information. The DtComboBoxSetItem function selects an item in the XmList of the given DtComboBox widget and makes it the first visible item in the list. The w argument specifies the DtComboBox widget ID. The item argument specifies the XmString fo... |
|
DtCreateComboBox(3) -- the ComboBox widget creation function
|
|
Note: This function has been superseded by the equivalent Motif function, XmCreateComboBox. Please refer to the Motif Programmer's Reference for more information. The DtCreateComboBox function creates an instance of a ComboBox widget and returns the associated widget ID. The parent argument specifies the parent widget ID. The name argument specifies the name of the created widget. The arglist arg... |
|
DtCreateEditor(3) -- create a new instance of a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorCreate function creates an instance of a DtEditor widget and returns the associated widget ID. The parent argument specifies the parent widget ID. The name argument specifies the name of the created widget. The arglist argument specifies the argument list. The argcount argument specifies the number of attribute and value pairs in the argument list ( arglist). For a complete definition ... |
|
DtCreateHelpDialog(3) -- create a general DtHelpDialog widget
|
|
The DtCreateHelpDialog function is a convenience function that creates a DtHelpDialog widget. The parent argument specifies the parent widget ID. The name argument specifies the name of the created widget. The arglist argument specifies the argument list. The argcount argument specifies the number of attribute and value pairs in the argument list (arglist). |
|
DtCreateHelpQuickDialog(3) -- create a DtHelpQuickDialog widget
|
|
The DtCreateHelpQuickDialog function is a convenience function that creates a DtHelpQuickDialog widget. The parent argument specifies the parent widget ID. The name argument specifies the name of the created widget. The arglist argument specifies the argument list. The argcount argument specifies the number of attribute and value pairs in the argument list (arglist). |
|
DtCreateMenuButton(3) -- the MenuButton widget creation function
|
|
The DtCreateMenuButton function creates an instance of a MenuButton widget and returns the associated widget ID. The parent argument specifies the parent widget ID. The name argument specifies the name of the created widget. The arglist argument specifies the argument list. The argcount argument specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list. |
|
DtCreatePrintSetupBox(3) -- creates an instance of a DtPrintSetupBox widget
|
|
The DtCreatePrintSetupBox function creates an unmanaged instance of a DtPrintSetupBox widget and returns its widget ID. |
|
DtCreatePrintSetupDialog(3) -- creates an instance of a dialog containing a DtPrintSetupBox widget
|
|
DtCreatePrintSetupDialog is a convenience function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged DtPrintSetupBox child of the DialogShell. Use XtManageChild to pop up the print set up dialog (passing the DtPrintSetupBox as the widget parameter); use XtUnmanageChild to pop it down. |
|
DtCreateSpinBox(3) -- the SpinBox widget creation function
|
|
Note: This function has been superseded by the equivalent Motif function XmCreateSimpleSpinBox. Please refer to the Motif Programmer's Reference for more information. The DtCreateSpinBox function creates an instance of a SpinBox widget and returns the associated widget ID. The parent argument specifies the parent widget ID. The name argument specifies the name of the created widget. The arglist a... |
|
DtCreateTerm(3) -- create a DtTerm widget
|
|
The DtCreateTerm function creates a terminal emulator widget hierarchy. The parent argument specifies the parent widget ID. The name argument specifies the name of the created widget. The arglist argument specifies the argument list. The argcount argument specifies the number of attribute and value pairs in the argument list (arglist). The DtTerm widget provides the core set of functionality neede... |
|
DtDbLoad(3) -- load actions and data types database
|
|
The DtDbLoad function loads the actions and data types database into the application. When the function returns, the database has been loaded. An environment variable determines the set of directories to be searched. The DtDbLoad function loads all actions and data types defined in files with a .dt suffix located in these directories. The directory search path is based on the value of the DTDATABA... |
|
DtDbReloadNotify(3) -- reload the Dt actions and data typing services database
|
|
The DtDbReloadNotify function registers an application callback function that is called whenever the actions and data types database needs to be reloaded; the conditions that trigger this callback are implementation-dependent. The callback_proc must flush any actions and data type information that the application has cached and then call DtDbLoad(3) to reload the database. The client_data argument... |
|
DtDndCreateSourceIcon(3) -- create a drag source icon
|
|
The DtDndCreateSourceIcon function creates a Motif drag icon, named sourceIcon, based on the characteristics of the pixmap argument. The resulting drag icon is suitable for use with DtDndDragStart(3). The parent argument is the parent of the drag icon. Typically this widget is the drag source. The pixmap argument is the pixmap representation of the data to be dragged. The mask argument is the mask... |
|
DtDndDragStart(3) -- initiate a drag
|
|
The DtDndDragStart and DtDndVaDragStart functions initiate a Motif drag, with drag visuals appropriate to the type of data being dragged, and updates the translation table of the drag context. Either of the functions is called from the application's event handler, which interprets mouse events to determine when a drag should begin. The only difference between DtDndDragStart and DtDndVaDragStart i... |
|
DtDndDropRegister(3) -- specify a drop site
|
|
The DtDndDropRegister and DtDndVaDropRegister functions register a Motif drop site with import targets based on the specified data transfer protocols. DtDndDropRegister may be called to register a widget as a drop site at any time, typically soon after the widget is created. The only difference between DtDndDropRegister and DtDndVaDropRegister is how the argument list is passed. The argument list ... |
|
DtDndDropUnregister(3) -- deactivate a drop site
|
|
The DtDndDropUnregister function removes the widget, dropSite, from the set of drop sites that have been registered with DtDndDropRegister(3) and frees data allocated by a call to DtDndDropRegister(3). The DtDndDropUnregister function is used to unregister a widget when it is no longer a drop site. A widget can be unregistered with DtDndDropUnregister at any time after it has been registered with ... |
|
DtDndVaDragStart(3) -- initiate a drag
|
|
The DtDndDragStart and DtDndVaDragStart functions initiate a Motif drag, with drag visuals appropriate to the type of data being dragged, and updates the translation table of the drag context. Either of the functions is called from the application's event handler, which interprets mouse events to determine when a drag should begin. The only difference between DtDndDragStart and DtDndVaDragStart i... |
|
DtDndVaDropRegister(3) -- specify a drop site
|
|
The DtDndDropRegister and DtDndVaDropRegister functions register a Motif drop site with import targets based on the specified data transfer protocols. DtDndDropRegister may be called to register a widget as a drop site at any time, typically soon after the widget is created. The only difference between DtDndDropRegister and DtDndVaDropRegister is how the argument list is passed. The argument list ... |
|
DtDtsBufferToAttributeList(3) -- get a list of data attributes for a byte stream
|
|
The DtDtsBufferToAttributeList function returns a list of data attributes for a given byte stream. The buffer argument is a pointer to the buffer of the data to be typed. The size argument is the size of the buffer in bytes. The opt_name argument can be used to specify a name to be associated with the buffer. If the opt_name argument is not NULL, it is used as a pseudo file name in typing; otherwi... |
|
DtDtsBufferToAttributeValue(3) -- get a single data attribute value for a byte stream
|
|
The DtDtsBufferToAttributeValue function returns a data attribute value for a given byte stream. The buffer argument is a pointer to the buffer of the data to be typed. The size argument is the size of the buffer in bytes. The attr_name argument is a name of the attribute. The opt_name argument can be used to specify a name to be associated with the buffer. If the opt_name argument is not NULL, it... |
|
DtDtsBufferToDataType(3) -- get the data type for a byte stream
|
|
The DtDtsBufferToDataType function returns the data type name for a given byte stream. The buffer argument is a pointer to the buffer of the data to be typed. The size argument is the size of the buffer in bytes. The opt_name argument can be used to specify a name to be associated with the buffer. If the opt_name argument is not NULL, it is used as a pseudo file name in typing; otherwise, certain ... |
|
DtDtsDataToDataType(3) -- get the data type for a set of data
|
|
The DtDtsDataToDataType function determines the data type of a set of data, based on the information given in the non- NULL pointer arguments to the function. The function gathers any additional information, if it is needed, to compensate for the NULL arguments. For example, if the filepath argument is given, but the stat_buff argument is NULL and a stat_buff value is required to determine the dat... |
|
DtDtsDataTypeIsAction(3) -- determine if the data type is an action
|
|
The DtDtsDataTypeIsAction function determines if the specified data type is an action-a data type that was loaded from the action tables of the actions and data types database. The datatype argument is a pointer to a data type name string. |
|
DtDtsDataTypeNames(3) -- get a list of available data types
|
|
The DtDtsDataTypeNames function returns a list of all available data types that are currently loaded into the data types database. |
|
DtDtsDataTypeToAttributeList(3) -- get a list of attributes for a data type
|
|
The DtDtsDataTypeToAttributeList function returns a list of attributes for a data type. The datatype argument is a pointer to a data type name string. The opt_name argument can be used to specify a name to be associated with the data type. If the opt_name argument is not NULL, it is used as a pseudo file name in typing; otherwise, certain attributes may be returned as NULL because the filename com... |
|
DtDtsDataTypeToAttributeValue(3) -- get an attribute value for a specified data type
|
|
The DtDtsDataTypeToAttributeValue returns an attribute value for the specified data type name. The datatype argument is a pointer to a data type name string. The attr_name argument is a name of the attribute. The opt_name argument can be used to specify a name to be associated with the data type. If the opt_name argument is not NULL, it is used as a pseudo file name in typing; otherwise, certain a... |
|
DtDtsFileToAttributeList(3) -- get a list of attributes for a file
|
|
The DtDtsFileToAttributeList function returns a list of attributes for the specified file. The filepath argument is the pathname of the file. |
|
DtDtsFileToAttributeValue(3) -- get a specified attribute value for a file
|
|
The DtDtsFileToAttributeValue function returns a data attribute value for the specified file. The filepath argument is the pathname of the file. The attr_name argument is a pointer to an attribute name string. |
|
DtDtsFileToDataType(3) -- get a data type for a file
|
|
The function DtDtsFileToDataType returns a data type name for the specified file. The filepath argument is the pathname of the file. |
|
DtDtsFindAttribute(3) -- get a specified list of data types
|
|
The DtDtsFindAttribute function returns the list of data types that have an attribute name that equals the specified value. The attr_name argument is the attribute name. The attr_value argument is the value of an attribute to be matched. |
|
DtDtsFreeAttributeList(3) -- free a list of data attributes
|
|
The DtDtsFreeAttributeList function frees the memory used for an attribute list. The attr_list argument is a list of attribute and value pairs defined by the DtDtsAttribute structure. |
|
DtDtsFreeAttributeValue(3) -- free a data attribute value
|
|
The DtDtsFreeAttributeValue function frees the memory used for an attribute value. The attr_value argument is the value of an attribute. |
|
DtDtsFreeDataType(3) -- free data type pointer memory
|
|
The DtDtsFreeDataType function frees the memory used for a data type name. The datatype argument is a pointer to a data type name string. |
|
DtDtsFreeDataTypeNames(3) -- free a list of data type names
|
|
The DtDtsFreeDataTypeNames function frees the memory used for a list of data type names. The namelist argument is a list of data type names. |
|
DtDtsIsTrue(3) -- return a Boolean value associated with a string
|
|
The DtDtsIsTrue function tests a string for a Boolean value. Any of the following string values, without regard to case, causes a return value of True: true yes on 1 |
|
DtDtsLoadDataTypes(3) -- load and initialize the data types database
|
|
The DtDtsLoadDataTypes function initializes and loads the database fields for the data typing functions. |
|
DtDtsRelease(3) -- free memory associated with the data types database
|
|
The DtDtsRelease function releases the data structures and data associated with the data types database, generally in preparation for a reload. |
|
DtDtsSetDataType(3) -- set the data type of a directory
|
|
The DtDtsSetDataType function sets the data type of a directory. This may be accomplished by adding a file named with a leading dot to the directory. The dirpath argument is a pathname of the directory. The datatype argument is a data type. If the value is already set, DtDtsSetDataType does not change the value unless the override argument is set to True. |
|
DtEditor(3) -- the DtEditor widget class
|
|
The DtEditor widget supports creating and editing text files. It gives applications running in the desktop environment a consistent method for editing text data. The widget consists of: + A scrolled edit window for text + Dialogs for finding and changing text + Optional status line + Spell checking option + Formatting options + Convenience functions for programmatically controlling the widget The ... |
|
DtEditorAppend(3) -- append data to a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorAppend function appends either a NULL-terminated string, wide character string or sized buffer after the last character in a DtEditor widget. The data is transferred to the DtEditor widget using a DtEditorContentRec, which indicates the type of data being transferred along with the actual data. After the data is appended, the insertion cursor is positioned at the new last character. Th... |
|
DtEditorAppendFromFile(3) -- append data from a file into a DtEditor widget
|
|
DtEditorAppendFromFile function appends data from a file to after the last character in a DtEditor widget. After the data is appended, the insertion cursor is positioned at the new last character. The widget argument specifies the DtEditor widget ID. The fileName argument is the pathname of the file relative to the local system. For a complete definition of the DtEditor widget and its associated r... |
|
DtEditorChange(3) -- change one or all occurrences of a string in a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorChange function replaces the next occurrence of a string, all occurrences of the string, or the currently selected text in a DtEditor widget with a replacement string. The string to search for and the value to change it to can be the last values entered in the Find/Change dialog (see DtEditorInvokeFindChangeDialog(3)) or passed as arguments to DtEditorChange. The search begins at the i... |
|
DtEditorCheckForUnsavedChanges(3) -- report whether text has been edited
|
|
The DtEditorCheckForUnsavedChanges function reports whether the text contained in the edit window of a DtEditor widget has been modified since the last call to DtEditorGetContents(3) or DtEditorSaveContentsToFile(3), including inserting, deleting or moving text with the keyboard or mouse. For information about retrieving the text without affecting whether DtEditorCheckForUnsavedChanges reports tha... |
|
DtEditorClearSelection(3) -- clear the primary selection in a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorClearSelection function replaces the primary selection in a DtEditor widget, specified by widget, with blanks (ASCII character 0x20) and newlines. Text can be selected and deselected programmatically with DtEditorSelectAll(3) and DtEditorDeselect(3). The widget argument specifies the DtEditor widget ID. For a complete definition of the DtEditor widget and its associated resources, see ... |
|
DtEditorCopyToClipboard(3) -- copy the primary selection in a DtEditor widget to the clipboard
|
|
The DtEditorCopyToClipboard function copies to the clipboard the currently selected text in the DtEditor widget specified by the widget argument. Text can be selected and deselect programmatically with DtEditorSelectAll(3) and DtEditorDeselect(3). The widget argument specifies the DtEditor widget ID. For a complete definition of the DtEditor widget and its associated resources, see DtEditor(3). |
|
DtEditorCutToClipboard(3) -- copy the primary selection in a DtEditor widget to the clipboard and delete the selected text
|
|
The DtEditorCutToClipboard function copies the primary selected text in the DtEditor widget, specified by the widget, argument to the clipboard and then deletes the primary selected text. Text can be selected and deselected programmatically with DtEditorSelectAll(3) and DtEditorDeselect(3). The widget argument specifies the DtEditor widget ID. For a complete definition of the DtEditor widget and i... |
|
DtEditorDeleteSelection(3) -- delete the primary selection in the DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorDeleteSelection function removes the currently highlighted data in a DtEditor widget. Any data following the deleted data is moved up. Text can be selected and deselect programmatically with DtEditorSelectAll(3) and DtEditorDeselect(3). The widget argument Specifies the DtEditor widget ID. For a complete definition of the DtEditor widget and its associated resources, see DtEditor(3). |
|
DtEditorDeselect(3) -- deselect the current selection in a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorDeselect function deselects any currently selected text in a DtEditor widget. The entire contents of a DtEditor widget may be selected with DtEditorSelectAll(3). The widget argument specifies the DtEditor widget ID. For a complete definition of the DtEditor widget and its associated resources, see DtEditor(3). |
|
DtEditorDisableRedisplay(3) -- temporarily prevent visual update of a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorDisableRedisplay function prevents redisplay of a DtEditor widget even though its visual attributes have been modified. The visual appearance of the widget remains unchanged until DtEditorEnableRedisplay(3) is called. This allows an application to make multiple changes to an editor widget without causing intermediate visual updates. The widget argument specifies the DtEditor widget ID.... |
|
DtEditorEnableRedisplay(3) -- force the visual update of a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorEnableRedisplay function forces a DtEditor widget to update its visual display if any visual attributes have been set or modified since the DtEditorDisableRedisplay(3) function was called for the specified widget. Any subsequent changes that affect the widget's visual appearance will cause the widget to update its display. These functions allow an application to make multiple changes ... |
|
DtEditorFind(3) -- search for the next occurrence of a string in a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorFind function searches for the next occurrence (relative to the insertion cursor) of a string. The string is either the last find string value specified in the Find/Change dialog (see DtEditorInvokeFindChangeDialog(3)) or is passed in as an argument. The widget argument specifies the DtEditor widget ID. The find argument specifies the string to search for. If find is NULL, DtEditorFind... |
|
DtEditorFormat(3) -- format all or part of the contents of a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorFormat function formats all or part of the contents of the DtEditor widget according to the current text format settings in the Format Settings dialog. These options specify which margins and alignments (left aligned, right aligned, justified or centered) are used. Optionally, alternative settings can be passed as an argument to DtEditorFormat in a data structure. This function formats... |
|
DtEditorGetContents(3) -- retrieve the contents of a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorGetContents function retrieves the entire contents of a DtEditor widget as a string, wide character string or sized buffer of data. The data is transferred from the DtEditor widget using a DtEditorContentRec, which indicates the type of data being transferred along with the actual data. If desired, any soft line feeds (word wraps) can be replaced with s. The DtEditor widget tr... |
|
DtEditorGetInsertionPosition(3) -- retrieve the position of the insert cursor in a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorGetInsertionPosition function accesses the current position of the insertion cursor in the DtEditor widget. The position is an integer number of characters from the beginning of the widget's text buffer. The first character position is zero. The position of the insertion cursor can be set with DtEditorSetInsertionPosition(3). The widget argument specifies the DtEditor widget ID. For a... |
|
DtEditorGetLastPosition(3) -- retrieve the position of the last character in a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorGetLastPosition function accesses the last text position in the DtEditor widget. The position is an integer number of characters from the beginning of the widget's buffer. Any text added to the end of the buffer is added after this position. The first character position is zero. The last character position is equal to the number of characters contained in the widget. The widget argume... |
|
DtEditorGetMessageTextFieldID(3) -- retrieve the widget ID of the message text field in the DtEditor status line
|
|
The DtEditorGetMessageTextFieldID function returns the widget ID of the Motif Text Field located in the status area of a DtEditor widget. By setting the XmNvalue or XmNvalueWcs resource of this widget, an application can display feedback messages for the user. If the application does not use the message field, the message field can be unmanaged by calling XtUnmanageWidget(3) with this widget ID. T... |
|
DtEditorGetSizeHints(3) -- retrieve sizing information from a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorGetSizeHints function retrieves the current sizing information from a DtEditor widget, allowing the application to compute appropriate size hints for the window manager. The widget argument specifies the DtEditor widget ID. The pHints argument is a pointer to an XSizeHints structure into which the current sizing information is placed. The fields in this structure do not have to contain... |
|
DtEditorGoToLine(3) -- move the insert cursor for a DtEditor widget to a specified line
|
|
The DtEditorGoToLine function moves the insert cursor for the DtEditor widget to the beginning of the line specified by the lineNumber argument. The cursor can be moved to the last line by specifying DtEDITOR_LAST_LINE as the line number. If the line is not currently on-screen, the contents for the DtEditor widget are scrolled to display the new insertion position. The lineNumber argument is the n... |
|
DtEditorInsert(3) -- insert data into a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorInsert function inserts either a string, wide character string or sized buffer at the insertion cursor position in a DtEditor widget. The data is transferred to the DtEditor widget using a DtEditorContentRec, which indicates the type of data being transferred along with the actual data. After the data is appended, the insertion cursor is positioned after the last character inserted. Th... |
|
DtEditorInsertFromFile(3) -- insert data from a file into a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorInsertFromFile function inserts data from a file to the insertion cursor position in a DtEditor widget. After the data is inserted, the insertion cursor is positioned after the last character inserted. The widget argument specifies the DtEditor widget ID. The fileName argument is the pathname of the file relative to the local system. For a complete definition of the DtEditor widget and... |
|
DtEditorInvokeFindChangeDialog(3) -- display the DtEditor widget dialog for searching and replacing text
|
|
The DtEditorInvokeFindChangeDialog function displays the Find/Change dialog for the DtEditor widget. This dialog enables a user to search for, and optionally replace, a string in the text for the DtEditor widget. It also allows the user to specify a replacement string, which can be substituted for either the next occurrence of the search string or all occurrences. The Find/Change dialog remains di... |
|
DtEditorInvokeFormatDialog(3) -- display the DtEditor widget dialog for choosing formatting options
|
|
The DtEditorInvokeFormatDialog function displays the Format Settings dialog of the DtEditor widget. This dialog enables a user to set the text formatting options: margins and text alignments (left aligned, right aligned, justified or centered). The dialog also provides the capability to format either the paragraph containing the insertion cursor or the entire contents of the DtEditor widget. The F... |
|
DtEditorInvokeSpellDialog(3) -- display the DtEditor widget dialog for checking text for spelling errors
|
|
The DtEditorInvokeSpellDialog function displays the Spell dialog for the DtEditor widget. This dialog displays the list of unrecognized or misspelled words from the widget's text. Users can search for and replace misspelled words with the Spell dialog. The list of misspelled words is automatically generated by filtering the text for the DtEditor widget through the filter specified by the DtNspell... |
|
DtEditorPasteFromClipboard(3) -- insert the clipboard selection into a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorPasteFromClipboard function inserts the clipboard selection before the insertion cursor of the DtEditor widget. If the insertion cursor is inside the current selection, the clipboard selection replaces the selected text. Text can be cut or copied to the clipboard with DtEditorCutToClipboard(3) and DtEditorCopyToClipboard(3). Text can be selected and deselected programmatically with DtE... |
|
DtEditorReplace(3) -- replace a portion of the contents of a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorReplace function replaces part of the contents of a DtEditor widget with a string, a wide character string or sized buffer. The data is transferred to the DtEditor widget using a DtEditorContentRec, which indicates the type of data being transferred along with the actual data. All data following the start position and up to, but not including, the end position is replaced. If the start... |
|
DtEditorReplaceFromFile(3) -- replace a portion of the contents of a DtEditor widget with the contents of a file
|
|
The DtEditorReplaceFromFile function replaces part of the contents of a DtEditor widget with the contents of a file. All data following the start position and up to, but not including, the end position is replaced. If the start position and the end position are equal, the data is inserted after the end position. The character positions begin at zero and are numbered sequentially from the beginning... |
|
DtEditorReset(3) -- reset a DtEditor widget to its default state
|
|
The DtEditorReset function deletes the contents of a DtEditor widget, resets the undo edit function, clears the last string searched for plus the last replacement string. The widget argument specifies the DtEditor widget ID. For a complete definition of the DtEditor widget and its associated resources, see DtEditor(3). |
|
DtEditorSaveContentsToFile(3) -- save the contents of a DtEditor widget to a file
|
|
The DtEditorSaveContentsToFile function saves the entire contents of the DtEditor widget to a file, optionally replacing soft line feeds (word wraps) with s. If the file does not exist and the directory has the correct write permissions, the file is created. If the file exists and the overwriteIfExists argument is set to True, the contents of the file are overwritten. If the file or its d... |
|
DtEditorSelectAll(3) -- select all text in a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorSelectAll function selects all text in a DtEditor widget. Any current selection can be programmatically deselected with DtEditorDeselect(3). The widget argument specifies the DtEditor widget ID. For a complete definition of the DtEditor widget and its associated resources, see DtEditor(3). |
|
DtEditorSetContents(3) -- place data into a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorSetContents function places a NULL-terminated string, wide character string or sized buffer into a DtEditor widget. Any data currently in the DtEditor widget is lost. The data is transferred to the DtEditor widget using a DtEditorContentRec, which indicates the type of data being transferred along with the actual data. After the data is placed into the DtEditor widget, the insertion cu... |
|
DtEditorSetContentsFromFile(3) -- load data from a file into a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorSetContentsFromFile function loads the contents of a file into a DtEditor widget. Any data currently in the DtEditor widget is lost. After the data is loaded, the insertion cursor is positioned at the first character. The widget argument specifies the DtEditor widget ID. The fileName argument is the pathname of the file relative to the local system. For a complete definition of the DtE... |
|
DtEditorSetInsertionPosition(3) -- set the position of the insert cursor in a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorSetInsertionPosition function sets the insertion cursor position of the DtEditor widget. The current position of the insertion cursor can be retrieved with DtEditorGetInsertionPosition(3). The last text position of the DtEditor widget can be retrieved with DtEditorGetLastPosition(3). The widget argument specifies the DtEditor widget ID. The position argument specifies the position of t... |
|
DtEditorTraverseToEditor(3) -- set keyboard traversal to the edit window of a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorTraverseToEditor function causes the Motif keyboard traversal to be set to the edit window of a DtEditor widget. The widget argument specifies the DtEditor widget ID. For a complete definition of the DtEditor widget and its associated resources, see DtEditor(3). |
|
DtEditorUndoEdit(3) -- undo the last edit made to the text in a DtEditor widget
|
|
The DtEditorUndoEdit function undoes the last change (deletion or insertion) made to the text in a DtEditor widget. A change consists of either a set of consecutive insertions, or a set of consecutive deletions followed by up to one set of consecutive insertions. An insertion is consecutive if there have been no intervening deletions, and it is continuing forward from the same point. A deletion is... |
|
DtHelpDialog(3) -- DtHelpDialog widget class
|
|
The DtHelpDialog widget provides users with functionality for viewing and navigating structured online information (CDE help volumes). This functionality includes text and graphics rendering, embedded hypertext links and various navigation methods to move through online help information. The widget supports rendering of CDE help volumes, system manual pages, text files and character string values.... |
|
DtHelpQuickDialog(3) -- DtHelpQuickDialog widget class
|
|
The DtHelpQuickDialog widget provides users with a constrained set of functionality for viewing and and navigating structured online information (CDE help volumes). This functionality includes text and graphics rendering, embedded hypertext links and limited navigation methods to move through online help information. The widget supports rendering of CDE help volume, system manual pages, text files... |
|
DtHelpQuickDialogGetChild(3) -- get child of DtHelpQuickDialog widget
|
|
The DtHelpQuickDialogGetChild function accesses a component within a DtHelpQuickDialog widget. The widget argument specifies the DtHelpQuickDialog widget instance. The child argument specifies which DtHelpQuickDialog widget child the widget ID is for. The following are valid values for the child argument: |
|
DtHelpReturnSelectedWidgetId(3) -- select a widget or gadget
|
|
The DtHelpReturnSelectedWidgetId function provides an interface for users to select a component within an application. This function grabs the pointer and returns the widget within which a button press occurs. Pressing the escape key (ESC) aborts this function. The parent argument specifies the widget ID to use as the basis of the interaction, usually a top level shell. The cursor argument specifi... |
|
DtHelpSetCatalogName(3) -- assign the name of the message catalog to use for help services
|
|
The DtHelpSetCatalogName function provides an interface for applications to set the name of the message catalog file that the help services library uses at runtime. This message catalog contains all strings, messages and button labels used in the help widgets that can be localized. The catFile argument specifies the name of the message catalog file that the help services library accesses at runtim... |
|
DtInfoShowTopic(3) -- provide the user access to a local information corpus at a specific location
|
|
By invoking DtInfoShowTopic, a client application requests that dtinfo display a particular section of data, or topic. DtInfoShowTopic sends a ToolTalk message to any active dtinfo process that can access the requested information in the current locale. The browser is started if it is not already running. This corresponds to invoking the dtinfo command with the -sect option from the command line. ... |
|
DtInitialize(3) -- initialize the Desktop Services library
|
|
These functions perform the one-time initialization in the Desktop Services library. Applications must call either DtInitialize or DtAppInitialize before calling any other Desktop Services library routines. The difference between these two functions is whether app_context is specified. DtInitialize uses the default Intrinsic XtAppContext. The app_context argument is the application context, displa... |
|
DtMenuButton(3) -- the MenuButton widget class
|
|
The DtMenuButton widget is a command widget that complements the menu cascading functionality of an XmCascadeButton widget. As a complement to the XmCascadeButton widget, DtMenuButton can only be instantiated outside a MenuPane; the application must use XmCascadeButton widget inside a MenuPane. The DtMenuButton widget belongs to a subclass of the XmLabel class. Visually, the DtMenuButton widget co... |
|
DtMmdbBookCaseFreeInfo(3) -- frees space used by bookcase information structure
|
|
The DtMmdbBookCaseFreeInfo function frees the space used by the specified bookcase information structure. |
|
DtMmdbBookCaseGetInfo(3) -- obtains information about a bookcase
|
|
The DtMmdbBookCaseGetInfo function returns a structure containing information about the specified bookcase. |
|
DtMmdbBookGetLicense(3) -- obtains a book's license term
|
|
The DtMmdbBookGetLicense function returns the license term of the specified book object. Do not use the free function on the returned pointer. Table lookup is involved when the identifier is specified by either the primary_oid or sequence_num field. |
|
DtMmdbBookGetLongTitle(3) -- obtains the long title of a book
|
|
The DtMmdbBookGetLongTitle function returns the long title of the specified book object. Do not use the free function on the returned pointer. Table lookup is involved when the identifier is specified by either the primary_oid or sequence_num field. |
|
DtMmdbBookGetSeqNum(3) -- obtains the sequence number of a book
|
|
The DtMmdbBookGetSeqNum function returns the sequence number of the specified book object. Table lookup is involved when the identifier is specified by the primary_oid field. |
|
DtMmdbBookGetShortTitle(3) -- obtains the short title of a book
|
|
The DtMmdbBookGetShortTitle function returns the short title of the specified book object. Do not use the free function on the returned pointer. Table lookup is involved when the identifier is specified by either the primary_oid or sequence_num field. |
|
DtMmdbBookGetTabList(3) -- obtains the list of tab sections in a book
|
|
The DtMmdbBookGetTabList function returns the list of tab sections for the specified book object. It returns the list in a NULL-terminated array. Use the DtMmdbFreeHandleList function to release the memory when the array is no longer needed. Table lookup is involved when the identifier is specified by either the primary_oid or sequence_num field. |
|
DtMmdbBookGetTocObjectId(3) -- obtains the locator of a book's TOC section
|
|
The DtMmdbBookGetTocObjectId function returns the object identifier of the specified book's TOC section. Use the DtMmdbFreeHandleList function to release the memory when the object identifier is no longer needed. Table lookup is involved when the identifier is specified by either the primary_oid or sequence_num field. |
|
DtMmdbCloseInfoLib(3) -- closes an infolib
|
|
The DtMmdbCloseInfoLib function desclares that the specified infolib is no longer needed by the application. |
|
DtMmdbDlpGetNextSectionId(3) -- obtains the object identifier of the next section
|
|
The DtMmdbDlpGetNextSectionId function returns the object identifier of the next section. You can use this function to traverse the TOC hierarchy in a depth-first fashion. Use the DtMmdbFreeHandleList function to release the memory when the object identifier is no longer needed. Table lookup is involved. |
|
DtMmdbDlpGetPrevSectionId(3) -- obtains the object identifier of the previous section
|
|
The DtMmdbDlpGetPrevSectionId function returns the object identifier of the previous section. You can use this function to traverse the TOC hierarchy in a depth-first fashion. Use the DtMmdbFreeHandleList function to release the memory when the object identifier is no longer needed. Table lookup is involved. |
|
DtMmdbFreeGraphicInfo(3) -- frees memory used by a graphics info structure
|
|
The DtMmdbFreeGraphicInfo function frees all memory used by a DtMmdbGraphicInfo structure. |
|
DtMmdbFreeHandle(3) -- frees memory used by a DtMmdbHandle
|
|
The DtMmdbFreeHandle function frees all memory used by a DtMmdbHandle. |
|
DtMmdbFreeHandleList(3) -- frees memory used by a DtMmdbHandle array
|
|
The DtMmdbFreeHandleList frees all memory used by a DtMmdbHandle array, including all contained DtMmdbHandle structures. |
|
DtMmdbGetBookCaseByIndex(3) -- obtains a descriptor for a bookcase based on an infolib index
|
|
The DtMmdbGetBookCaseByIndex function makes the database engine ready to provide access service for a bookcase. It allows you to access all bookcases in an infolib without knowing their names. |
|
DtMmdbGetBookCaseByLoc(3) -- obtains a descriptor for a bookcase based on a hypertext link target
|
|
The DtMmdbGetBookCaseByLoc function makes the database engine ready to provide access service for a bookcase. It allows you to access a bookcase by using a hypertext link target in the bookcase. |
|
DtMmdbGetBookCaseByLocs(3) -- obtains descriptors for a set of bookcases based on hypertext link targets
|
|
The DtMmdbGetBookCaseByLocs function makes the database engine ready to provide access service for a set of bookcases. It allows you to access multiple bookcases by specifying hypertext link targets that occur within the bookcases. Use the free function to release the array of bookcase descriptors when it is no longer needed. |
|
DtMmdbGetBookCaseByName(3) -- obtains a descriptor for a bookcase based on the bookcase name
|
|
The DtMmdbGetBookCaseByName function makes the database engine ready to provide access service for a bookcase. It allows you to access a bookcase by supplying its name. |
|
DtMmdbGraphicGetData(3) -- obtains the data for a graphic object
|
|
The DtMmdbGraphicGetData function returns the data for a graphic object. Do not use the free function on the returned pointer. Table lookup is involved because the graphic identifier is specified by the locator_ptr field. |
|
DtMmdbGraphicGetInfo(3) -- obtains information about a graphic object
|
|
The DtMmdbGraphicGetInfo function returns a structure containing the information about a graphic object. Use the DtMmdbFreeGraphicInfo function to release the memory when the structure is no longer needed. Table lookup is involved because the graphic identifier is specified by the locator_ptr field. |
|
DtMmdbInfoLibFreeInfo(3) -- frees space occupied by an infolib information structure
|
|
The DtMmdbInfoLibFreeInfo function releases the space used by an infolib information structure. |
|
DtMmdbInfoLibGetInfo(3) -- obtains information about an infolib
|
|
The DtMmdbInfoLibGetInfo function returns a structure containing information about a specified infolib. |
|
DtMmdbInit(3) -- initializes the DtInfo database engine
|
|
The DtMmdbInit function makes the DtInfo database engine ready to provide access service. When the function returns, the database has been initialized. |
|
DtMmdbLocatorGetSectionLoc(3) -- obtains the locator of a section
|
|
The DtMmdbLocatorGetSectionLoc function returns the locator of the section that contains the specified component. Do not use the free function on the returned pointer. Table lookup is involved because the component identifier is specified by the locator_ptr field. |
|
DtMmdbLocatorGetSectionObjectId(3) -- obtains the object identifier of a section
|
|
The DtMmdbLocatorGetSectionObjectId function returns the object identifier of the specified section. Use the DtMmdbFreeHandle function to release the identifier when it is no longer needed. Table lookup is involved because the section identifier is specified by the locator_ptr field. |
|
DtMmdbOpenInfoLib(3) -- opens an infolib for service
|
|
The DtMmdbOpenInfoLib function opens an infolib for user access and returns the descriptor for the infolib. It makes the database engine ready to provide service for an infolib. To obtain information about an infolib, use the DtMmdbInfoLibGetInfo function. |
|
DtMmdbQuit(3) -- shuts down the DtInfo database engine
|
|
The DtMmdbQuit function frees all memory used by the database engine and instructs it to stop service. After the call, the database engine can no longer provide services. |
|
DtMmdbSectionGetBookId(3) -- obtains the object identifier of a book
|
|
The DtMmdbSectionGetBookId function returns the object identifier of the book that contains the specified section. Use the DtMmdbFreeHandle function to release the identifier when it is no longer needed. Table lookup is involved if the section identifier is specified by the locator_ptr field. |
|
DtMmdbSectionGetData(3) -- obtains the data for a section
|
|
The DtMmdbSectionGetData function returns the data for the specified section. Do not use the free function on the returned pointer. Table lookup is involved if the section identifier is specified by the locator_ptr field. |
|
DtMmdbSectionGetDataSize(3) -- obtains the size of a section's data
|
|
The DtMmdbSectionGetDataSize function returns the number of bytes in the specified section's data. Table lookup is involved if the section identifier is specified by the locator_ptr field. |
|
DtMmdbSectionGetLoc(3) -- obtains a section's locator
|
|
The DtMmdbSectionGetLoc function returns the logical identifier for the specified section. Do not use the free function on the returned pointer. No table lookup is involved. The space used by the returned locator pointer is likely to be reused by the database engine when any of the API functions are invoked again. You must make a copy of the content if you want to retain it across multiple API cal... |
|
DtMmdbSectionGetLongTitle(3) -- obtains the long title for a section
|
|
The DtMmdbSectionGetLongTitle function returns the long title for the specified section. Do not use the free function on the returned pointer. Table lookup is involved if the section identifier is specified by the locator_ptr field. |
|
DtMmdbSectionGetShortTitle(3) -- obtains the short title for a section
|
|
The DtMmdbSectionGetShortTitle function returns the short title for the specified section. Do not use the free function on the returned pointer. Table lookup is involved if the section identifier is specified by the locator_ptr field. |
|
DtMmdbSectionGetStyleSheetId(3) -- obtains the object identifier of a section's stylesheet
|
|
The DtMmdbSectionGetStyleSheetId function returns the object identifier for the specified section's stylesheet. Use the DtMmdbFreeHandle function to free the handle when it is no longer needed. Table lookup is involved if the section identifier is specified by the locator_ptr field. |
|
DtMmdbSectionGetTocLoc(3) -- obtains the locator for a book's TOC section
|
|
The DtMmdbSectionGetTocLoc function returns the locator of the TOC section of the book that contains the specified section. Table lookup is involved if the section identifier is specified by the locator_ptr field. |
|
DtMmdbStylesheetGetData(3) -- obtains the data for a stylesheet object
|
|
The DtMmdbStylesheetGetData function returns the data for the stylesheet used by the specified section. Do not use the free function on the returned pointer. Table lookup is involved if the section identifier is specified by the locator_ptr field. |
|
DtMmdbStylesheetGetName(3) -- obtains the name of a stylesheet
|
|
The DtMmdbStylesheetGetName function returns the name of the specified stylesheet object. Do not use the free function on the returned pointer. |
|
DtMmdbTocGetChildIds(3) -- obtains a list of object identifiers for child sections
|
|
The DtMmdbTocGetChildIds function returns an array of the object identifiers for the child sections belonging to the specified section. Use the DtmmdbFreeHandleList to release the array when it is no longer needed. |
|
DtMmdbTocGetNumOfChildren(3) -- obtains the number of child sections
|
|
The DtMmdbTocGetNumOfChildren function returns the number of child sections for the specified section. |
|
DtMmdbTocGetParentId(3) -- obtains the object identifier of the parent section
|
|
The DtMmdbTocGetParentId function returns the object identifier of the section that is parent to the specified section. Use the DtMmdbFreeHandle to release the identifier when it is no longer needed. |
|
DtMrmInitialize(3) -- registers the Dt Widget with the Mrm library and initializes it
|
|
DtMrmInitialize first calls MrmInitialize, and then, using MrmRegisterClass, registers the following Dt widgets: + DtMenuButton + DtTerm + DtHelpDialog, DtHelpQuickDialog + DtEditor + DtPrintSetupBox, DtPrintSetupDialog (Refer to the individual widgets for the exact class pointer names, resources, etc.) DtMrmInitialize is part of the DtMrm run time library. It is necessary to link with libMrm to u... |
|
DtMsgLogMessage(3) -- logs a message
|
|
The DtMsgLogMessage function logs the given arguments in one message. The format of the message is specified by format and thus is controlled by the application. The format of each logged entry is: *** ( ): : PID : *** [ ] The value of depends on the value of msg_type. Its value is: |
|
DtMsgLogOpenFile(3) -- opens a log file
|
|
The DtMsgLogOpenFile function calls fopen to open a log file with type open mode. If fopen opens a log file successfully and returns a nonNULL filename_return, DtMsgLogOpenFile calls malloc to allocate space for filename_return. DtMsgLogOpenFile then copies the log file name to filename_return. The caller must use the free function to release the space allocated for filename_return, if it is not N... |
|
DtMsgLogSetHandler(3) -- installs an alternate message logging handler
|
|
The DtMsgLogSetHandler function installs an alternate message logging handler that will be invoked when DtMsgLogMessage is called. If handler is NULL, the default handler is installed. DtMsgLogSetHandler is optional and should be used only to override the default message logging handler. If the handler function wants to log a message, it must use the format and file specified in DtMsgLogMessage(3)... |
|
DtPrintCopySetupData(3) -- copies one DtPrintSetupData structure to another
|
|
The DtPrintCopySetupData function copies the DtPrintSetupData structure pointed to by source to the DtPrintSetupData structure pointed to by target. Elements in target are updated only if different than the corresponding elements in source. For elements that point to allocated memory, DtPrintCopySetupData allocates new memory for those elements updated in target. Existing elements in target are fr... |
|
DtPrintFillSetupData(3) -- obtains X printer connection information
|
|
The DtPrintFillSetupData function obtains an X printer connection in order to initiate an X printing job in situations other than direct interaction with a DtPrintSetupBox. Examples of such situations include a "quick print" button on a toolbar and "GUI-less" printing. This X printer connection information can be obtained from an existing DtPrintSetupBox widget instance, or if a DtPrintSetupBo... |
|
DtPrintFreeSetupData(3) -- frees the memory pointed to by DtPrintSetupData structure elements
|
|
The DtPrintFreeSetupData function calls XtFree to deallocate memory pointed to by elements of the DtPrintSetupData structure indicated by target. The DtPrintSetupData structure pointed to by target is not altered by this function. For a description of the DtPrintSetupData structure, see DtPrintSetupBox(3). |
|
DtPrintResetConnection(3) -- resets the print display connection managed by a DtPrintSetupBox
|
|
The DtPrintResetConnection function is a convenience function provided by the DtPrintSetupBox widget that allows applications to direct the widget to stop managing the X print server connection. A mode parameter is included in order to direct the widget to close the print connection by calling XpDestroyPrintContext and XCloseDisplay or to simply relinquish control of the connection without closing... |
|
DtPrintSetupBox(3) -- application print setup widget
|
|
DtPrintSetupBox is a widget that is typically the initial window used to set various options prior to printing from an application. This widget is designed primarily for use by applications that utilize the X Print Service. However, it can also be used by applications employing other printing methods. DtPrintSetupBox is organized based on generic print options and application specific print option... |
|
DtPrintSetupProc(3) -- Type definition for DtPrintSetupBox procedure resources.
|
|
DtPrintSetupProc is the type definition used for DtPrintSetupBox procedure resources. Each procedure is passed the widget ID of the DtPrintSetupBox via wid, and a structure containing information needed to perform the particular operation via print_data. If a procedure needs to update the DtPrintSetupBox, it should do so by setting resources as indicated by the procedure resource description. The ... |
|
DtSaverGetWindows(3) -- get the list of windows for drawing by a screen saver application
|
|
The DtSaverGetWindows function returns a list of windows on which a screen saver application should draw when invoked by CDE. The display argument is the X display. The window argument is the address of a pointer to receive the pointer to a list of windows. The count argument is the address of an integer to receive the number of elements in the list of windows returned in window. |
|
DtSearchAddMessage(3) -- Access and manipulate messages on the DtSearch MessageList
|
|
The DtSearch online search engine may assemble detailed user messages to explain various errors and failures. These messages are designed to provide a user with enough information to correct the error. Often more than one message is assembled onto the MessageList as the result of a single API call. The calling code may also append messages to the MessageList prior to display to the user. All messa... |
|
DtSearchExit(3) -- Perform orderly shutdown of search engine
|
|
DtSearchExit is an internal exit call for the online API. It may be called by any API module when a fatal error or aborting signal is detected. It performs an orderly shutdown of the search engine including graceful database closure, communications disconnect, release of system resources, restoration of environment, etc., as necessary. It will call a user exit function if one was installed by DtSe... |
|
DtSearchFreeMessages(3) -- Access and manipulate messages on the DtSearch MessageList
|
|
The DtSearch online search engine may assemble detailed user messages to explain various errors and failures. These messages are designed to provide a user with enough information to correct the error. Often more than one message is assembled onto the MessageList as the result of a single API call. The calling code may also append messages to the MessageList prior to display to the user. All messa... |
|
DtSearchFreeResults(3) -- Free storage allocated for DtSearch results lists
|
|
The DtFreeSearchResults function frees the results list pointed to by list which was originally returned from DtSearchQuery, and sets the list pointer to NULL. |
|
DtSearchGetKeytypes(3) -- Access the Keytypes array for a DtSearch database
|
|
The DtSearchGetKeytypes function returns a pointer to the keytypes array of the specified database. The caller may modify the is_selected member of any DtSrKeytype but should not alter any other member values. This function may be called anytime after DtSearchInit. |
|
DtSearchGetMaxResults(3) -- Obtain the DtSearch maximum results value
|
|
The results list returned from DtSearchQuery will be truncated to a maximum number of items after search completion and statistical ranking. DtSearchGetMaxResults returns the current maximum results setting. The function can be called any time after DtSearchInit. |
|
DtSearchGetMessages(3) -- Access and manipulate messages on the DtSearch MessageList
|
|
The DtSearch online search engine may assemble detailed user messages to explain various errors and failures. These messages are designed to provide a user with enough information to correct the error. Often more than one message is assembled onto the MessageList as the result of a single API call. The calling code may also append messages to the MessageList prior to display to the user. All messa... |
|
DtSearchHasMessages(3) -- Access and manipulate messages on the DtSearch MessageList
|
|
The DtSearch online search engine may assemble detailed user messages to explain various errors and failures. These messages are designed to provide a user with enough information to correct the error. Often more than one message is assembled onto the MessageList as the result of a single API call. The calling code may also append messages to the MessageList prior to display to the user. All messa... |
|
DtSearchHighlight(3) -- Generate DtSrHitwords table for highlighting DtSearch document
|
|
The DtSearchHighlight function generates an array of offsets and lengths (DtSrHitword) of parsed linguistic terms (stems) in the passed document cleartext to enable a browser to highlight the words in the text as appropriate for its user interface. |
|
DtSearchInit(3) -- Initialize the DtSearch online API for subsequent calls
|
|
DtSearchInit opens databases and other files and initializes the search engine API for subsequent requests. It must be the first online DtSearch function called. DtSearchInit may be called only once, although DtSrReinit may be called at any time after DtSearchInit. If this function fails, the caller should display the MessageList returned and exit; no subsequent requests will be possible. |
|
DtSearchMergeResults(3) -- Merge two DtSearch results lists into one
|
|
DtSearchMergeResults merges the srclist results list into the targlist list using proximity for sort order, and sets the srclist source list pointer to NULL. This function is used to merge results from separate database searches for presentation to the user as a single results list. It presumes both lists are initially sorted by ascending proximity. It does nothing if source list is empty and retu... |
|
DtSearchQuery(3) -- Perform a DtSearch database search for a specified query
|
|
DtSearchQuery is the DtSearch API search function. DtSearchQuery is passed a query string and some search options, performs the requested search, and if successful returns a linked list of DtSrResult structures representing the documents satisfying the search. The results list contains information about the documents that can be used for subsequent retrievals, as well as information suitable for d... |
|
DtSearchReinit(3) -- Reinitialize the DtSearch online API
|
|
DtSearchReinit closes and reopens databases and other files as necessary, and reinitializes the search engine API. It is typically used after either databases or the ocf file have been externally changed to force the search engine to reinitialize itself, and to acquire the new database names if any. It can also be used after any function returns DtSrREINIT to acquire the new database names. |
|
DtSearchRetrieve(3) -- Return clear text of documents from DtSearch databases
|
|
DtSearchRetrieve retrieves the uncompressed document text of a specified DtSearch document listed in the DtSrResult list from a previous call to DtSearchQuery. It will be successful only in an AusText type database where the documents are stored directly in a database repository. |
|
DtSearchSetMaxResults(3) -- Set the DtSearch maximum results value
|
|
The results list returned from DtSearchQuery will be truncated to a maximum number of items after search completion and statistical ranking. DtSearchSetMaxResults changes the maximum results setting to max. If DtSearchSetMaxResults is never called, the maximum number of DtSrResult items returned will default to 20. The function can be called any time after DtSearchInit(). |
|
DtSearchSortResults(3) -- Sort DtSearch results lists
|
|
DtSearchSortResults sorts lists returned from DtSearchQuery. Note that results lists are already presorted by proximity by DtSearchQuery. |
|
DtSearchValidDateString(3) -- Validate and convert a user date string
|
|
DtSearchValidDateString validates a DtSearch date string, as might have been entered by a user in a free form text field, and converts it into a valid DtSrObjdate. Since an invalid date string format returns a distinctive DtSrObjdate, this function may also be used as a boolean test for string validity. |
|
DtSessionRestorePath(3) -- get a pathname for the application's state information file
|
|
The DtSessionRestorePath function returns a pathname to an application's state information. The widget argument is the application's top level widget. The restorePath argument is the address of the character string to receive the pathname of the application's state information file. The restoreFile argument is the filename of the file containing the application state information. This is the fi... |
|
DtSessionSavePath(3) -- get a pathname for saving application state information
|
|
The DtSessionSavePath function returns the pathname to be used by an application for saving its state information. The information is later used by the application to restore its state. The widget argument is the application's top level widget. The savePath argument is the address of the character string to receive the pathname of the state information file to be used by the application for stori... |
|
DtSpinBox(3) -- the SpinBox widget class
|
|
Note: This widget has been superseded by the equivalent Motif widget XmSimpleSpinBox. Please refer to the Motif Programmer's Reference for more information. The DtSpinBox widget is a user interface control to increment and decrement an arbitrary TextField. For example, it can be used to cycle through the months of the year or days of the month. Widget subclassing is not supported for the DtSpinBo... |
|
DtSpinBoxAddItem(3) -- add an item to the DtSpinBox
|
|
Note: This function has been superseded by the equivalent Motif function XmSimpleSpinBoxAddItem. Please refer to the Motif Programmer's Reference for more information. The DtSpinBoxAddItem function adds the given item to the DtSpinBox at the given position. The w argument specifies the widget ID. The item argument specifies the XmString for the new item. The pos argument specifies the position of... |
|
DtSpinBoxDeletePos(3) -- delete a DtSpinBox item
|
|
Note: This function has been superseded by the equivalent Motif function XmSimpleSpinBoxDeletePos. Please refer to the Motif Programmer's Reference for more information. The DtSpinBoxDeletePos function deletes a specified item from a DtSpinBox widget. The w argument specifies the widget ID. The pos argument specifies the position of the item to be deleted. A value of 1 means the first item in the... |
|
DtSpinBoxSetItem(3) -- set an item in the DtSpinBox list
|
|
Note: This function has been superseded by the equivalent Motif function XmSimpleSpinBoxSetItem. Please refer to the Motif Programmer's Reference for more information. The DtSpinBoxSetItem function selects an item in the list of the given DtSpinBox widget and makes it the current value. The w argument specifies the widget ID. The item argument specifies the XmString for the item to be set in the ... |
|
DtSrAPI(3) -- Describes overview, constants, and structures for DtSearch online API
|
|
The DtSearch API provides programmatic access to the DtSearch search and retrieval engine. The API functions are located in the library libDtSr, and are directly linked into user written search programs. Search and retrieval of DtSearch databases is available through three essential API functions: |
|
DtTerm(3) -- DtTerm widget class
|
|
The DtTerm widget provides the core set of functionality needed to emulate an ANSI X3.64-1979 - and ISO 6429:1992(E)-style terminal, such as the DEC VT220. This functionality includes text rendering, scrolling, margin and tab support, escape sequence parsing and the low-level OS-specific interface required to allocate and configure a pty or STREAMS pseudo-terminal device and write the system's ut... |
|
DtTermDisplaySend(3) -- send data to a DtTerm widget's display
|
|
The DtTermDisplaySend function sends data to a DtTerm widget's display. The widget argument specifies the DtTerm widget ID. The buffer argument specifies the string (single- or multi-byte depending on the locale) to be sent to the display. The string may contain NULL bytes. The length argument specifies the length of buffer in bytes. The DtTermDisplaySend function allows the program to write text... |
|
DtTermInitialize(3) -- prevent accelerators from being installed on a DtTerm widget
|
|
The DtTermInitialize function prevents the XmBulletinBoard(3) widget from installing accelerators on DtTerm widgets. It enables DtTerm widgets to receive certain key events, such as Return and Escape, normally not passed by Motif to XmPrimitive(3) widgets. |
|
DtTermSubprocReap(3) -- allow a DtTerm widget to clean up after subprocess termination
|
|
The DtTermSubprocReap function allows DtTerm widgets to function correctly in applications that have installed a SIGCHLD signal handler. The pid argument specifies the process ID of the child process wait(2) returns. The stat_loc argument specifies the termination information wait(2) returns. |
|
DtTermSubprocSend(3) -- send data to a DtTerm widget's subprocess
|
|
The DtTermSubprocSend function sends data to a DtTerm widget's child process. The widget argument specifies the DtTerm widget ID. The buffer argument specifies the string (single- or multi-byte depending on the locale) to be sent to the display. The string may contain NULL bytes. The length argument specifies the length of buffer in bytes. The DtTermSubprocSend function allows the program to send... |
|
DtWsmAddCurrentWorkspaceCallback(3) -- add a callback to be called when the current workspace changes
|
|
The DtWsmAddCurrentWorkspaceCallback function registers an application function to be called when the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), switches to a new workspace. The workspace manager sends the new current workspace name to the DtWsmWsChangeProc callback. The widget argument is a realized widget. The ws_change argument is the procedure to be called when the workspace changes. The client_data argu... |
|
DtWsmAddWorkspace(3) -- add a workspace
|
|
The DtWsmAddWorkspace() function works with the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), and adds a new workspace. Applications can use this function to implement an interface to the workspace manager. If the DtWsmAddWorkspace() function is not successful, the most likely reason for failure is that the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), is not running. DtWsmAddWorkspace() sends a message to the CDE workspace ... |
|
DtWsmAddWorkspaceFunctions(3) -- add workspace functions for a window
|
|
The DtWsmAddWorkspaceFunctions function enables workspace functions for a window. When workspace functions are enabled, the default window menu for the window displayed by the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), shows entries that allow the window to occupy a different set of workspaces, occupy all workspaces, or be removed from the current workspace. The display argument is the X display. The window ... |
|
DtWsmAddWorkspaceModifiedCallback(3) -- add a callback to be called when any workspace is changed
|
|
The DtWsmAddWorkspaceModifiedCallback function works with the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), and registers a function to be called when a workspace is added, deleted or modified. The widget argument is a realized widget. The ws_change argument is the procedure to be called when a workspace is modified. The client_data argument points to arbitrary client data to be passed back to ws_change. The he... |
|
DtWsmChangeBackdrop(3) -- set current workspace's backdrop
|
|
The DtWsmChangeBackdrop function works with the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), and changes the current workspace's backdrop. Applications can use this function to implement an interface to the workspace manager. If the DtWsmChangeBackdrop function is not successful, the most likely reason for failure is that the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), is not running. DtWsmChangeBackdrop sends a message ... |
|
DtWsmDeleteWorkspace(3) -- delete a specific workspace
|
|
The DtWsmDeleteWorkspace() function works with the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), and deletes a specific workspace. Applications can use this function to implement an interface to the workspace manager. If the DtWsmDeleteWorkspace() function is not successful, the most likely reason for failure is that the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), is not running. The DtWsmDeleteWorkspace() function require... |
|
DtWsmFreeWorkspaceInfo(3) -- free workspace information
|
|
The DtWsmFreeWorkspaceInfo function frees workspace information. The pWsInfo argument points to the workspace information the DtWsmGetWorkspaceInfo(3) function returns. |
|
DtWsmGetCurrentBackdropWindow(3) -- get the backdrop window for the current workspace
|
|
The DtWsmGetCurrentBackdropWindow function works with the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), and returns the window used as the backdrop for the current workspace. The display argument is the X display. The root argument is the root window of the screen of interest. |
|
DtWsmGetCurrentWorkspace(3) -- get the current workspace
|
|
The DtWsmGetCurrentWorkspace function works with the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), and returns the name of the current workspace (converted to an X atom). The display argument is the X display. The root argument is the root window of the screen of interest. The paWorkspace argument is the address of an atom to receive the current workspace identifier. |
|
DtWsmGetWorkspaceInfo(3) -- get detailed workspace information
|
|
The DtWsmGetWorkspaceInfo function works with the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), and returns detailed information on a specific workspace. The display argument is the X display. The root argument is the root window of the screen of interest. The aWorkspace argument is the workspace name (converted to an X atom). The *ppWsInfo argument is the address of a variable to receive the returned pointer t... |
|
DtWsmGetWorkspaceList(3) -- get the names of the currently defined workspaces
|
|
The DtWsmGetWorkspaceList function works with the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1). and returns a list of the names (converted into X atoms) of the currently defined workspaces. The display argument is the X display. The root argument is the root window of the screen of interest. The *ppaWorkspaces argument is the address of a pointer to receive the returned pointer to the workspacelist. The pNumWor... |
|
DtWsmGetWorkspacesOccupied(3) -- get the workspaces in which a window resides
|
|
The DtWsmGetWorkspacesOccupied function works with the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), and returns the list of workspaces in which this window resides. Each element of the list is the name of a workspace (converted to an X atom). The display argument is the X display. The window argument is the window of interest. The *ppaWorkspaces argument is the address of a pointer to receive the pointer to a ... |
|
DtWsmOccupyAllWorkspaces(3) -- put a window into all workspaces
|
|
The DtWsmOccupyAllWorkspaces function works with the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), and puts a window into all currently defined workspaces and also into newly created workspaces. The display argument is the X display. The window argument is the window to occupy all workspaces. Calling the DtWsmSetWorkspacesOccupied function overrides the effect of the DtWsmOccupyAllWorkspaces function. |
|
DtWsmRemoveWorkspaceCallback(3) -- remove a workspace callback
|
|
The DtWsmRemoveWorkspaceCallback function works with the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), and removes a callback called when the current workspace changes or when a workspace is modified. The context argument is the context the DtWsmAddCurrentWorkspaceCallback(3) function or the DtWsmAddWorkspaceModifiedCallback(3) function returns when the application registers the callback. |
|
DtWsmRemoveWorkspaceFunctions(3) -- remove a window's workspace functions
|
|
The DtWsmRemoveWorkspaceFunctions function removes a window's workspace functions. When DtWsmRemoveWorkspaceFunctions removes workspace functions, the window menu for the window the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), displays does not have the entries that allow the window to occupy a different set of workspaces, occupy all workspaces, or be removed from the current workspace. The display argument i... |
|
DtWsmSetCurrentWorkspace(3) -- set the current workspace
|
|
The DtWsmSetCurrentWorkspace function works with the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), and sets the current workspace. Applications can use this function to switch from the current workspace to another workspace. The widget argument is a realized widget on the screen of interest. The aWorkspace argument is the name (in X atom form) of the workspace to be made current. |
|
DtWsmSetWorkspacesOccupied(3) -- set the workspaces in which a window resides
|
|
The DtWsmSetWorkspacesOccupied function works with the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), and puts a window into a set of workspaces. The display argument is the X display. The window argument is the window to be put into this set of workspaces. The paWorkspaces argument points to a list of workspace names (converted to X atoms); the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), places the window into these worksp... |
|
DtWsmSetWorkspaceTitle(3) -- set workspace title
|
|
The DtWsmSetWorkspaceTitle() function works with the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), and changes a specific workspace's title. Applications can use this function to implement an interface to the workspace manager. If the DtWsmSetWorkspaceTitle() function is not successful, the most likely reason for failure is that the CDE workspace manager, dtwm(1), is not running. The DtWsmSetWorkspaceTitle() f... |
|
enddvagent(3) -- manipulate device assignment database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getdvagent, getdvagnam, and copydvagent each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of an entry in the Device Assignment database. Each database entry is returned as a dev_asg structure, declared in the header file: struct dev_field { char *fd_name; /* external name */ char **fd_devs; /* device list */ mask_t fd_type[1]; /* tape, printe... |
|
endprdfent(3) -- manipulate system default database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getprdfent and getprdfnam each returns a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the system default database. Each line in the database contains a pr_default structure, declared in the header file: struct system_default_fields { time_t fd_inactivity_timeout ; char fd_boot_authenticate ; } ; struct system_default_flags { unsigned shor... |
|
endprpwent(3) -- manipulate protected password database entries (for trusted systems only).
|
|
getprpwent, getprpwuid, getprpwaid, and getprpwnam each returns a pointer to a pr_passwd structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the protected password database. Each line in the database contains a pr_passwd structure, declared in the header file: struct pr_field { /* Identity: */ char fd_name[9]; /* uses 8 character maximum(and NULL) from utmp */ uid_t fd_uid; /* uid ass... |
|
endprtcent(3) -- manipulate terminal control database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getprtcent and getprtcnam each returns a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of an entry in the terminal control database. Each entry in the database contains a pr_term structure, declared in the header file: struct t_field { char fd_devname[14]; /* Terminal (or host) name */ uid_t fd_uid; /* uid of last successful login */ time_t fd_slogin; ... |
|
frt0.o(3) -- 64-bit ELF uses crt0.o only
|
|
PA-RISC 32-bit SOM The C, Pascal, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object files crt0.o, gcrt0.o, or mcrt0.o to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. All are identical except that gcrt0.o and mcrt0.o provide additional functionality for gpro profiling support respectively. The following symbols are defined in these object files: _environ An array of character pointer... |
|
frt0.o_pa(3) -- 64-bit ELF uses crt0.o only
|
|
PA-RISC 32-bit SOM The C, Pascal, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object files crt0.o, gcrt0.o, or mcrt0.o to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. All are identical except that gcrt0.o and mcrt0.o provide additional functionality for gpro profiling support respectively. The following symbols are defined in these object files: _environ An array of character pointer... |
|
gcrt0.o(3) -- execution startup routines; PARISC
|
|
PA-RISC 32-bit SOM The C, Pascal, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object files crt0.o, gcrt0.o, or mcrt0.o to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. All are identical except that gcrt0.o and mcrt0.o provide additional functionality for gpro profiling support respectively. The following symbols are defined in these object files: _environ An array of character pointer... |
|
gcrt0.o_pa(3) -- 64-bit ELF uses crt0.o only
|
|
PA-RISC 32-bit SOM The C, Pascal, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object files crt0.o, gcrt0.o, or mcrt0.o to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. All are identical except that gcrt0.o and mcrt0.o provide additional functionality for gpro profiling support respectively. The following symbols are defined in these object files: _environ An array of character pointer... |
|
getdvagent(3) -- manipulate device assignment database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getdvagent, getdvagnam, and copydvagent each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of an entry in the Device Assignment database. Each database entry is returned as a dev_asg structure, declared in the header file: struct dev_field { char *fd_name; /* external name */ char **fd_devs; /* device list */ mask_t fd_type[1]; /* tape, printe... |
|
getdvagnam(3) -- manipulate device assignment database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getdvagent, getdvagnam, and copydvagent each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of an entry in the Device Assignment database. Each database entry is returned as a dev_asg structure, declared in the header file: struct dev_field { char *fd_name; /* external name */ char **fd_devs; /* device list */ mask_t fd_type[1]; /* tape, printe... |
|
getprdfent(3) -- manipulate system default database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getprdfent and getprdfnam each returns a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the system default database. Each line in the database contains a pr_default structure, declared in the header file: struct system_default_fields { time_t fd_inactivity_timeout ; char fd_boot_authenticate ; } ; struct system_default_flags { unsigned shor... |
|
getprdfnam(3) -- manipulate system default database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getprdfent and getprdfnam each returns a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the system default database. Each line in the database contains a pr_default structure, declared in the header file: struct system_default_fields { time_t fd_inactivity_timeout ; char fd_boot_authenticate ; } ; struct system_default_flags { unsigned shor... |
|
getprpwaid(3) -- manipulate protected password database entries (for trusted systems only).
|
|
getprpwent, getprpwuid, getprpwaid, and getprpwnam each returns a pointer to a pr_passwd structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the protected password database. Each line in the database contains a pr_passwd structure, declared in the header file: struct pr_field { /* Identity: */ char fd_name[9]; /* uses 8 character maximum(and NULL) from utmp */ uid_t fd_uid; /* uid ass... |
|
getprpwent(3) -- manipulate protected password database entries (for trusted systems only).
|
|
getprpwent, getprpwuid, getprpwaid, and getprpwnam each returns a pointer to a pr_passwd structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the protected password database. Each line in the database contains a pr_passwd structure, declared in the header file: struct pr_field { /* Identity: */ char fd_name[9]; /* uses 8 character maximum(and NULL) from utmp */ uid_t fd_uid; /* uid ass... |
|
getprpwnam(3) -- manipulate protected password database entries (for trusted systems only).
|
|
getprpwent, getprpwuid, getprpwaid, and getprpwnam each returns a pointer to a pr_passwd structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the protected password database. Each line in the database contains a pr_passwd structure, declared in the header file: struct pr_field { /* Identity: */ char fd_name[9]; /* uses 8 character maximum(and NULL) from utmp */ uid_t fd_uid; /* uid ass... |
|
getprpwuid(3) -- manipulate protected password database entries (for trusted systems only).
|
|
getprpwent, getprpwuid, getprpwaid, and getprpwnam each returns a pointer to a pr_passwd structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the protected password database. Each line in the database contains a pr_passwd structure, declared in the header file: struct pr_field { /* Identity: */ char fd_name[9]; /* uses 8 character maximum(and NULL) from utmp */ uid_t fd_uid; /* uid ass... |
|
getprtcent(3) -- manipulate terminal control database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getprtcent and getprtcnam each returns a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of an entry in the terminal control database. Each entry in the database contains a pr_term structure, declared in the header file: struct t_field { char fd_devname[14]; /* Terminal (or host) name */ uid_t fd_uid; /* uid of last successful login */ time_t fd_slogin; ... |
|
getprtcnam(3) -- manipulate terminal control database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getprtcent and getprtcnam each returns a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of an entry in the terminal control database. Each entry in the database contains a pr_term structure, declared in the header file: struct t_field { char fd_devname[14]; /* Terminal (or host) name */ uid_t fd_uid; /* uid of last successful login */ time_t fd_slogin; ... |
|
getresgid(3) -- get real, effective and saved user or group IDs
|
|
getresuid and getresgid return the real, effective, and saved user or group ID's of the current process. |
|
getresuid(3) -- get real, effective and saved user or group IDs
|
|
getresuid and getresgid return the real, effective, and saved user or group ID's of the current process. |
|
get_secdef_int(3) -- security defaults configuration file routines
|
|
open_secdef opens the security configuration file /etc/default/security. This function must be called prior to calling get_secdef_str or get_secdef_int. close_secdef closes the security configuration file. get_secdef_str and get_secdef_int return the value of the specified parameter defined in the security configuration file. See the security(4) manpage. Programs using these routines must be compi... |
|
get_secdef_str(3) -- security defaults configuration file routines
|
|
open_secdef opens the security configuration file /etc/default/security. This function must be called prior to calling get_secdef_str or get_secdef_int. close_secdef closes the security configuration file. get_secdef_str and get_secdef_int return the value of the specified parameter defined in the security configuration file. See the security(4) manpage. Programs using these routines must be compi... |
|
gfrt0.o(3) -- 64-bit ELF uses crt0.o only
|
|
PA-RISC 32-bit SOM The C, Pascal, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object files crt0.o, gcrt0.o, or mcrt0.o to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. All are identical except that gcrt0.o and mcrt0.o provide additional functionality for gpro profiling support respectively. The following symbols are defined in these object files: _environ An array of character pointer... |
|
gfrt0.o_pa(3) -- 64-bit ELF uses crt0.o only
|
|
PA-RISC 32-bit SOM The C, Pascal, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object files crt0.o, gcrt0.o, or mcrt0.o to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. All are identical except that gcrt0.o and mcrt0.o provide additional functionality for gpro profiling support respectively. The following symbols are defined in these object files: _environ An array of character pointer... |
|
gss_accept_sec_context(3) -- establish a security context between the application and a context acceptor
|
|
The gss_accept_sec_context() routine is the second step in establishing a security context between the context initiator and a context acceptor. In the first step, the context initiator calls the gss_init_sec_context() routine. The gss_init_sec_context() routine generates a token for the security context and passes it to the context initiator. The context initiator sends the token to the context a... |
|
gss_acquire_cred(3) -- allow an application to acquire a handle for an existing, named credential
|
|
The gss_acquire_cred() routine allows an application to obtain a handle for a pre-existing credential by name. The credentials could be either an ACCEPT, INITIATE, or BOTH. The application then passes the credential handle to either the gss_init_sec_context() or the gss_accept_sec_context() routine. If desired_name is GSS_C_NO_NAME, the call is interpreted as a request for a credential handle that... |
|
gss_add_cred(3) -- adds a credential-element to a credential
|
|
The gss_add_cred() routine adds a credential-element to a credential. The credential-element is identified by the name of the principal to which it refers. If desired_name is GSS_C_NO_NAME, the call is interpreted as a request to add a credential element that will invoke default behavior when passed to gss_init_sec_context() or gss_accept_sec_context(). This routine can be used to either compose a... |
|
gss_add_oid_set_member(3) -- add an Object Identifier (OID) to an OID set
|
|
The gss_add_oid_set_member() routine adds a new Object Identifier to an Object Identifier set. If an OID set does not exist, you can create a new, empty OID set with the gss_create_empty_oid_set() routine. |
|
gss_canonicalize_name(3) -- convert an internal name to an internal mechanism name (MN) representation of an opaque internal name
|
|
The gss_canonicalize_name() routine generate a canonical mechanism name (MN) from an arbitrary internal name. The mechanism name is the name that would be returned to a context acceptor on successful authentication of a context where the initiator used the input_name in a successful call to gss_acquire_cred(), specifying an Object Identifier (OID) set containing mech_type as its only member, follo... |
|
gss_compare_name(3) -- allow an application to compare two internal names to determine whether they are equivalent
|
|
The gss_compare_name() routine lets an application compare two internal names to determine whether they are the same. This routine does not resolve the names to see if they refer to the same object. It simply compares the input names for equivalence. If either name presented to gss_compare_name() denotes an anonymous principal, the routines should indicate that the two names do not refer to the sa... |
|
gss_context_time(3) -- check the number of seconds the context will remain valid
|
|
The gss_context_time() routine checks the number of seconds for which the context will remain valid. |
|
gss_create_empty_oid_set(3) -- create a new, empty OID set, to which members can be added
|
|
The gss_create_empty_oid_set() routine creates a new, empty OID set to which the context initiator can add members. Use the gss_add_oid_set_member() routine to add members to the OID set. These routines are intended to be used to construct sets of mechanism object identifiers, for input to gss_acquire_cred() routine. |
|
gss_delete_sec_context(3) -- delete a security context
|
|
The gss_delete_sec_context() routine deletes a security context. It also deletes the local data structures associated with the security context. When it deletes the context, the routine can generate a token. The application passes the token to the context acceptor. The context acceptor then passes the token to the gss_process_context_token() routine, telling it to delete the context and all associ... |
|
gss_display_name(3) -- provide textual representation of an opaque internal name to an application
|
|
The gss_display_name() routine provides an application with the text form of an opaque internal name. The application can use the text to display the name but not to print it. |
|
gss_display_status(3) -- provide an application with the textual representation of a GSSAPI status code that can be displayed to a user
|
|
The gss_display_status() routine provides the context initiator with a textual representation of a status code so that the application can display the message to a user or log the message. Because some status values can indicate more than one error, the routine enables the calling application to process status codes with multiple messages. The message_context parameter indicates which error messag... |
|
gss_duplicate_name(3) -- allow an application to create an exact duplicate of the existing internal name
|
|
The gss_duplicate_name() routine create an exact duplicate of the existing internal name src_name. The new dest_name will be independent of src_name. |
|
gss_export_name(3) -- convert a mechanism name (MN) to a form suitable for direct comparison
|
|
The gss_export_name() converts a mechanism name (MN) to export form. |
|
gss_export_sec_context(3) -- transfer a security context to another process on a single machine
|
|
The gss_export_sec_context() deactivates the security context for the calling process and creates an interprocess token which, when passed to gss_import_sec_context() in another process, will re-activate the context in the second process. Only a single instantiation of a given context may be active at any one time; a subsequent attempt by a context exporter to access the exported security context ... |
|
gss_get_mic(3) -- calculate a cryptographic message integrity code (MIC) for a message and return in a token
|
|
The gss_get_mic() routine generates a cryptographic message integrity code (MIC) for the supplied message and places the MIC in a token for transfer to the peer application. The qop_req parameter allows a choice between several cryptographic algorithms, if supported by the chosen mechanism. |
|
gss_import_name(3) -- convert a printable name to an internal form
|
|
The gss_import_name() routine converts a printable name to an internal form. |
|
gss_import_sec_context(3) -- transfer a security context to another process on a single machine
|
|
The gss_import_sec_context() routine lets a process to import a security context established by another process. A given interprocess token may be imported only once. |
|
gss_indicate_mechs(3) -- allow an application to determine which underlying security mechanisms are available
|
|
The gss_indicate_mechs() routine enables an application to determine which underlying security mechanisms are available. |
|
gss_init_sec_context(3) -- establish a security context between the context initiator and a context acceptor
|
|
The gss_init_sec_context() routine is the first step in the establishment of a security context between the context initiator and the context acceptor. To ensure the portability of the application, use its default credential by supplying GSS_C_NO_CREDENTIAL to the claimant_cred_handle parameter. Specify an explicit credential when the application needs an additional credential; for example, to use... |
|
gss_inquire_context(3) -- obtain information about a security context
|
|
The gss_inquire_context() routine provides information about the security context to the calling application. The calling application must first have called the gss_acquire_cred() routine for a handle for the credential. |
|
gss_inquire_cred(3) -- provide the calling application information about a credential
|
|
The gss_inquire_cred() routine provides information about a credential to the calling application. The calling application must first have called the gss_acquire_cred() routine for a handle for the credential. |
|
gss_inquire_cred_by_mech(3) -- provide the calling application permechanism information about a credential
|
|
The gss_inquire_cred_by_mech() routine provides per-mechanism information about a credential. |
|
gss_inquire_mechs_for_name(3) -- list the mechanisms that support the
|
|
The gss_inquire_mechs_for_name() routine returns the set of mechanisms supported by the GSS-API implementation that may be able to process the specified name. |
|
gss_inquire_names_for_mech(3) -- list the name-types supported by the specified mechanism
|
|
The gss_inquire_names_for_mech() routine returns the set of nametypes supported by the specified mechanism. |
|
gss_process_context_token(3) -- process a context to the security service
|
|
The gss_process_context_token() routine passes tokens generated by the gss_delete_security_context() routine to the security service. Usually, tokens are associated with either the context establishment or with per-message security services. If the tokens are associated with the context establishment, they are passed to the gss_init_sec_context() or gss_accept_sec_context() routine. If the tokens ... |
|
gss_release_buffer(3) -- free storage associated with a buffer
|
|
The gss_release_buffer() routine deletes the buffer by freeing the storage associated with it. |
|
gss_release_cred(3) -- mark a credential for deletion
|
|
The gss_release_cred() routine informs the GSSAPI that a credential is no longer required and marks it for deletion. |
|
gss_release_name(3) -- free storage associated with an internal name allocated by a GSSAPI routine
|
|
The gss_release_name() routine deletes the internal name by freeing the storage associated with that internal name. |
|
gss_release_oid_set(3) -- free storage associated with a gss_OID_set object
|
|
The gss_release_oid_set() routine frees storage that is associated with the gss_OID_set parameter and was allocated by a GSSAPI routine. |
|
gss_test_oid_set_member(3) -- check an OID set for a specified OID
|
|
The gss_test_oid_set_member() routine checks an OID set to see if the specified OID is a member of the set. To add a member to an OID set, use the gss_add_oid_set_member() routine. The gss_test_oid_set_member() routine uses the value of the actual_mechs output parameter from the gss_acquire_cred() routine to get the list of OIDs. It checks this list to see if any of the OIDs are members of the OID... |
|
gss_unwrap(3) -- verify a message with attached message integrity code (MIC) and decrypt message content if necessary
|
|
The gss_unwrap() routine converts a protected message to a usable form and verifies the embedded message integrity code (MIC). The conf_state parameter indicates whether the message was encrypted. The qop_state parameter indicates the quality of protection that was used to provide the confidentiality and integrity services. |
|
gss_verify_mic(3) -- check a cryptographic message integrity code (MIC) against a message to verify its integrity
|
|
The gss_verify_mic() routine verifies that a cryptographic MIC, contained in the token_buffer parameter, fits the supplied message. The application receiving the message can use the qop_state parameter to check the strength of protection. |
|
gss_wrap(3) -- attach a message integrity code (MIC) to a message, and optionally encrypt the message content
|
|
The gss_wrap() routine attaches a cryptographic message integrity code (MIC) and optionally encrypts the input_message. The output_message contains both the MIC and the message. Although the qop_req parameter enables a choice between several qualities of protection, if you specify an unsupported protection, the gss_wrap() routine returns a status of GSS_S_FAILURE. |
|
gss_wrap_size_limit(3) -- determine a token-size limit for gss_wrap on a context
|
|
The gss_wrap_size_limit() routine allows an application to determine the maximum message size that, if presented to gss_wrap() with the same conf_req_flag and qop_req parameters, will result in an output token containing no more than the req_output_size bytes. This call is intended for use by applications that communicate over protocols that impose a maximum message size. It enables the applicatio... |
|
hosts_access(3) -- access control library
|
|
The routines described here are a part of the libwrap.a library. They implement a rule-based access control language with optional shell commands that are executed when a rule fires. request_init() initializes a structure with information about a client request. request_set() updates an already initialized request structure. Both functions take a variable-length list of key-value pairs and return ... |
|
hosts_ctl(3) -- access control library
|
|
The routines described here are a part of the libwrap.a library. They implement a rule-based access control language with optional shell commands that are executed when a rule fires. request_init() initializes a structure with information about a client request. request_set() updates an already initialized request structure. Both functions take a variable-length list of key-value pairs and return ... |
|
libcom_err(3) -- Kerberos client libraries (libkrb5, libk5crypto, libcom_err)
|
|
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol developed at MIT. This is now an IETF standard RFC 1510, the Kerberos Network Authentication Service (V5). The shared libraries, libkrb5.so/libkrb5.sl, libcom_err.so/libcom_err.sl and libk5crypto.so/libk5crypto.sl support authentication, integrity and confidentiality services as per the Kerberos V5 specification. Kerberos performs authentication as a t... |
|
libcom_err.sl(3) -- Kerberos client libraries (libkrb5, libk5crypto, libcom_err)
|
|
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol developed at MIT. This is now an IETF standard RFC 1510, the Kerberos Network Authentication Service (V5). The shared libraries, libkrb5.so/libkrb5.sl, libcom_err.so/libcom_err.sl and libk5crypto.so/libk5crypto.sl support authentication, integrity and confidentiality services as per the Kerberos V5 specification. Kerberos performs authentication as a t... |
|
libcom_err.so(3) -- Kerberos client libraries (libkrb5, libk5crypto, libcom_err)
|
|
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol developed at MIT. This is now an IETF standard RFC 1510, the Kerberos Network Authentication Service (V5). The shared libraries, libkrb5.so/libkrb5.sl, libcom_err.so/libcom_err.sl and libk5crypto.so/libk5crypto.sl support authentication, integrity and confidentiality services as per the Kerberos V5 specification. Kerberos performs authentication as a t... |
|
libk5crypto(3) -- Kerberos client libraries (libkrb5, libk5crypto, libcom_err)
|
|
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol developed at MIT. This is now an IETF standard RFC 1510, the Kerberos Network Authentication Service (V5). The shared libraries, libkrb5.so/libkrb5.sl, libcom_err.so/libcom_err.sl and libk5crypto.so/libk5crypto.sl support authentication, integrity and confidentiality services as per the Kerberos V5 specification. Kerberos performs authentication as a t... |
|
libk5crypto.sl(3) -- Kerberos client libraries (libkrb5, libk5crypto, libcom_err)
|
|
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol developed at MIT. This is now an IETF standard RFC 1510, the Kerberos Network Authentication Service (V5). The shared libraries, libkrb5.so/libkrb5.sl, libcom_err.so/libcom_err.sl and libk5crypto.so/libk5crypto.sl support authentication, integrity and confidentiality services as per the Kerberos V5 specification. Kerberos performs authentication as a t... |
|
libk5crypto.so(3) -- Kerberos client libraries (libkrb5, libk5crypto, libcom_err)
|
|
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol developed at MIT. This is now an IETF standard RFC 1510, the Kerberos Network Authentication Service (V5). The shared libraries, libkrb5.so/libkrb5.sl, libcom_err.so/libcom_err.sl and libk5crypto.so/libk5crypto.sl support authentication, integrity and confidentiality services as per the Kerberos V5 specification. Kerberos performs authentication as a t... |
|
libkrb5(3) -- Kerberos client libraries (libkrb5, libk5crypto, libcom_err)
|
|
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol developed at MIT. This is now an IETF standard RFC 1510, the Kerberos Network Authentication Service (V5). The shared libraries, libkrb5.so/libkrb5.sl, libcom_err.so/libcom_err.sl and libk5crypto.so/libk5crypto.sl support authentication, integrity and confidentiality services as per the Kerberos V5 specification. Kerberos performs authentication as a t... |
|
libkrb5.sl(3) -- Kerberos client libraries (libkrb5, libk5crypto, libcom_err)
|
|
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol developed at MIT. This is now an IETF standard RFC 1510, the Kerberos Network Authentication Service (V5). The shared libraries, libkrb5.so/libkrb5.sl, libcom_err.so/libcom_err.sl and libk5crypto.so/libk5crypto.sl support authentication, integrity and confidentiality services as per the Kerberos V5 specification. Kerberos performs authentication as a t... |
|
libkrb5.so(3) -- Kerberos client libraries (libkrb5, libk5crypto, libcom_err)
|
|
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol developed at MIT. This is now an IETF standard RFC 1510, the Kerberos Network Authentication Service (V5). The shared libraries, libkrb5.so/libkrb5.sl, libcom_err.so/libcom_err.sl and libk5crypto.so/libk5crypto.sl support authentication, integrity and confidentiality services as per the Kerberos V5 specification. Kerberos performs authentication as a t... |
|
mcrt0.o(3) -- execution startup routines; PARISC
|
|
PA-RISC 32-bit SOM The C, Pascal, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object files crt0.o, gcrt0.o, or mcrt0.o to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. All are identical except that gcrt0.o and mcrt0.o provide additional functionality for gpro profiling support respectively. The following symbols are defined in these object files: _environ An array of character pointer... |
|
mcrt0.o_pa(3) -- 64-bit ELF uses crt0.o only
|
|
PA-RISC 32-bit SOM The C, Pascal, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object files crt0.o, gcrt0.o, or mcrt0.o to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. All are identical except that gcrt0.o and mcrt0.o provide additional functionality for gpro profiling support respectively. The following symbols are defined in these object files: _environ An array of character pointer... |
|
mfrt0.o(3) -- 64-bit ELF uses crt0.o only
|
|
PA-RISC 32-bit SOM The C, Pascal, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object files crt0.o, gcrt0.o, or mcrt0.o to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. All are identical except that gcrt0.o and mcrt0.o provide additional functionality for gpro profiling support respectively. The following symbols are defined in these object files: _environ An array of character pointer... |
|
mfrt0.o_pa(3) -- 64-bit ELF uses crt0.o only
|
|
PA-RISC 32-bit SOM The C, Pascal, and FORTRAN compilers link in the object files crt0.o, gcrt0.o, or mcrt0.o to provide startup capabilities and environments for program execution. All are identical except that gcrt0.o and mcrt0.o provide additional functionality for gpro profiling support respectively. The following symbols are defined in these object files: _environ An array of character pointer... |
|
MrmCloseHierarchy(3) -- Closes a UID hierarchy
|
|
The MrmCloseHierarchy function closes a UID hierarchy previously opened by MrmOpenHierarchyPerDisplay. All files associated with the hierarchy are closed by the Motif Resource Manager (MRM) and all associated memory is returned. hierarchy_id Specifies the ID of a previously opened UID hierarchy. The hierarchy_id was returned in a previous call to MrmOpenHierarchyPerDisplay. |
|
MrmFetchBitmapLiteral(3) -- Fetches a bitmap literal from a hierarchy
|
|
The MrmFetchBitmapLiteral function fetches a bitmap literal from an MRM hierarchy, and converts the bitmap literal to an X pixmap of depth 1. The function returns this pixmap and its width and height. hierarchy_id Specifies the ID of the UID hierarchy that contains the specified icon literal. The value of hierarchy_id was returned in a previous call to MrmOpenHierarchyPerDisplay. index Specifies t... |
|
MrmFetchColorLiteral(3) -- Fetches a named color literal from a UID file
|
|
The MrmFetchColorLiteral function fetches a named color literal from a UID file, and converts the color literal to a pixel color value. hierarchy_id Specifies the ID of the UID hierarchy that contains the specified literal. The value of hierarchy_id was returned in a previous call to MrmOpenHierarchyPerDisplay. index Specifies the UIL name of the color literal to fetch. You must define this name i... |
|
MrmFetchIconLiteral(3) -- Fetches an icon literal from a hierarchy
|
|
The MrmFetchIconLiteral function fetches an icon literal from an MRM hierarchy and converts the icon literal to an X pixmap. hierarchy_id Specifies the ID of the UID hierarchy that contains the specified icon literal. The hierarchy_id was returned in a previous call to MrmOpenHierarchyPerDisplay. index Specifies the UIL name of the icon literal to fetch. screen Specifies the screen used for the pi... |
|
MrmFetchLiteral(3) -- Fetches a literal from a UID file
|
|
The MrmFetchLiteral function reads and returns the value and type of a literal (named value) that is stored as a public resource in a single UID file. This function returns a pointer to the value of the literal. For example, an integer is always returned as a pointer to an integer, and a string is always returned as a pointer to a string. Applications should not use MrmFetchLiteral for fetching ic... |
|
MrmFetchSetValues(3) -- Fetches the values to be set from literals stored in UID files
|
|
The MrmFetchSetValues function is similar to XtSetValues, except that the values to be set are defined by the UIL named values that are stored in the UID hierarchy. MrmFetchSetValues fetches the values to be set from literals stored in UID files. hierarchy_id Specifies the ID of the UID hierarchy that contains the specified literal. The value of hierarchy_id was returned in a previous call to MrmO... |
|
MrmFetchWidget(3) -- Fetches and creates an indexed (UIL named) application widget and its children
|
|
The MrmFetchWidget function fetches and creates an indexed application widget and its children. The indexed application widget is any widget that is named in UIL. In fetch operations, the fetched widget's subtree is also fetched and created. This widget must not appear as the child of a widget within its own subtree. MrmFetchWidget does not execute XtManageChild for the newly created widget. All ... |
|
MrmFetchWidgetOverride(3) -- Fetches any indexed (UIL named) application widget. It overrides the arguments specified for this application
|
|
The MrmFetchWidgetOverride function is the extended version of MrmFetchWidget. It is identical to MrmFetchWidget, except that it allows the caller to override the widget's name and any arguments that MrmFetchWidget would otherwise retrieve from the UID file or one of the defaulting mechanisms. That is, the override argument list is not limited to those arguments in the UID file. The override argu... |
|
MrmInitialize(3) -- Prepares an application to use MRM widget-fetching facilities
|
|
The MrmInitialize function must be called to prepare an application to use MRM widget-fetching facilities. You must call this function prior to fetching a widget. However, it is good programming practice to call MrmInitialize prior to performing any MRM operations. MrmInitialize initializes the internal data structures that MRM needs to successfully perform type conversion on arguments and to succ... |
|
MrmOpenHierarchy(3) -- Allocates a hierarchy ID and opens all the UID files in the hierarchy
|
|
This routine is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. It is replaced by MrmOpenHierarchyPerDisplay. MrmOpenHierarchy is identical to MrmOpenHierarchyPerDisplay except that MrmOpenHierarchy does not take a display argument. num_files Specifies the number of files in the name list. file_names_list Specifies an array of character strings that identify the UID files. ancillary_... |
|
MrmOpenHierarchyFromBuffer(3) -- Allocates a hierarchy ID and opens a buffer containing a memory image of a UID file
|
|
MrmOpenHierarchyFromBuffer allows you to specify a buffer containing information from UID files that MRM searches in subsequent fetch operations. This function also allocates a hierarchy ID and initializes the optimized search lists in the hierarchy. buffer Specifies a stream of bytes containing information from UID files hierarchy_id Returns the search hierarchy ID. The search hierarchy ID identi... |
|
MrmOpenHierarchyPerDisplay(3) -- Allocates a hierarchy ID and opens all the UID files in the hierarchy
|
|
MrmOpenHierarchyPerDisplay allows you to specify the list of UID files that MRM searches in subsequent fetch operations. All subsequent fetch operations return the first occurrence of the named item encountered while traversing the UID hierarchy from the first list element (UID file specification) to the last list element. This function also allocates a hierarchy ID and opens all the UID files in ... |
|
MrmRegisterClass(3) -- Saves the information needed for MRM to access the
|
|
The MrmRegisterClass function allows MRM to access user-defined widget classes. This function registers the necessary information for MRM to create widgets of this class. You must call MrmRegisterClass prior to fetching any user-defined class widget. MrmRegisterClass saves the information needed to access the widget creation function and to do type conversion of argument lists by using the informa... |
|
MrmRegisterNames(3) -- Registers the values associated with the names referenced in UIL (for example, UIL callback function names or
|
|
The MrmRegisterNames function registers a vector of names and associated values for access in MRM. The values can be callback functions, pointers to user-defined data, or any other values. The information provided is used to resolve symbolic references occurring in UID files to their run-time values. For callbacks, this information provides the procedure address required by the Motif Toolkit. For ... |
|
MrmRegisterNamesInHierarchy(3) -- Registers the values associated with the names referenced in UIL within a single hierarchy (for example, UIL c
|
|
The MrmRegisterNamesInHierarchy function registers a vector of names and associated values for access in MRM. The values can be callback functions, pointers to user-defined data, or any other values. The information provided is used to resolve symbolic references occurring in UID files to their run-time values. For callbacks, this information provides the procedure address required by the Motif To... |
|
Object(3) -- The Object widget class
|
|
Object is never instantiated. Its sole purpose is as a supporting superclass for other widget classes. |
|
open_secdef(3) -- security defaults configuration file routines
|
|
open_secdef opens the security configuration file /etc/default/security. This function must be called prior to calling get_secdef_str or get_secdef_int. close_secdef closes the security configuration file. get_secdef_str and get_secdef_int return the value of the specified parameter defined in the security configuration file. See the security(4) manpage. Programs using these routines must be compi... |
|
OverrideShell(3) -- The OverrideShell widget class
|
|
OverrideShell is used for shell windows that completely bypass the window manager, for example, PopupMenu shells. |
|
pam(3) -- Pluggable Authentication Module
|
|
PAM gives system administrators the flexibility of choosing any authentication service available on the system to perform authentication. The framework also allows new authentication service modules to be plugged in and made available without modifying the applications. The PAM framework, libpam, consists of an interface library and multiple authentication service modules. The PAM interface librar... |
|
pam_acct_mgmt(3) -- perform PAM account validation procedures
|
|
The function pam_acct_mgmt() is called to determine if the current user's account is valid. This includes checking for password and account expiration, as well as verifying access hour restrictions and terminal access restrictions for trusted mode. This function is typically called after the user has been authenticated with pam_authenticate(3). The pamh argument is an authentication handle obtain... |
|
pam_authenticate(3) -- perform authentication within the PAM framework
|
|
pam_authenticate() is called to authenticate the current user. The user is usually required to enter a password or similar authentication token depending upon the authentication service configured within the system. In the case of smart card authentication this token would be a PIN (Personal Identification Number). The user in question should have been specified by a prior call to pam_start() or p... |
|
pam_chauthtok(3) -- perform password related functions within the PAM framework
|
|
pam_chauthtok() is called to change the authentication token associated with a particular user referenced by the authentication handle, pamh. The following flag may be passed in to pam_chauthtok(): |
|
pam_close_session(3) -- perform PAM session creation and termination operations
|
|
pam_open_session() is called after a user has been successfully authenticated (refer to pam_authenticate(3) and pam_acct_mgmt(3)) and is used to notify the session modules that a new session has been initiated. All programs that use the pam(3) library should invoke pam_open_session() when beginning a new session. Upon termination of this activity, pam_close_session() should be invoked to inform pa... |
|
pam_end(3) -- authentication transaction routines for PAM
|
|
pam_start() is called to initiate an authentication transaction. pam_start() takes as arguments the name of the current service, service, the name of the user to be authenticated, user, the address of the conversation structure, pam_conv, and the address of a variable to be assigned the authentication handle, pamh. Upon successful completion, pamh will refer to a PAM handle for use with subsequent... |
|
pam_get_data(3) -- PAM routines to maintain module specific state
|
|
pam_set_data() and pam_get_data() allow PAM service modules to access and update module specific information as needed. These functions should not be used by applications. pam_set_data() stores module specific data within the PAM handle, pamh. The module_data_name argument uniquely identifies the data, and the data argument represents the actual data. module_data_name should be unique across all s... |
|
pam_get_item(3) -- authentication information routines for PAM
|
|
pam_get_item() and pam_set_item() allow applications and PAM service modules to access and update PAM information as needed. The information is specified by item_type, and can be one of the following: PAM_SERVICE The service name. PAM_USER The user name. PAM_AUTHTOK The user authentication token. PAM_OLDAUTHTOK The old user authentication token. PAM_TTY The tty name. PAM_RHOST The remote host name... |
|
pam_get_user(3) -- PAM routine to retrieve user name.
|
|
pam_get_user() is used by PAM service modules to retrieve the current user name from the PAM handle. If the user name has not been set, via pam_start() or pam_set_item(), then the PAM conversation function will be used to prompt the user for the user name with the string "prompt". If prompt is NULL, then pam_get_item() is called and the value of PAM_USER_PROMPT is used for prompting. If the valu... |
|
pam_open_session(3) -- perform PAM session creation and termination operations
|
|
pam_open_session() is called after a user has been successfully authenticated (refer to pam_authenticate(3) and pam_acct_mgmt(3)) and is used to notify the session modules that a new session has been initiated. All programs that use the pam(3) library should invoke pam_open_session() when beginning a new session. Upon termination of this activity, pam_close_session() should be invoked to inform pa... |
|
pam_setcred(3) -- modify/delete user credentials for an authentication service
|
|
pam_setcred() is used to establish, modify, or delete user credentials. pam_setcred() is typically called after the user has been authenticated and after a session has been opened (refer to pam_authenticate(3), pam_acct_mgmt(3), and pam_open_session(3)). The user is specified by a prior call to pam_start() or pam_set_item(), and is referenced by the authentication handle, pamh. The following flags... |
|
pam_set_data(3) -- PAM routines to maintain module specific state
|
|
pam_set_data() and pam_get_data() allow PAM service modules to access and update module specific information as needed. These functions should not be used by applications. pam_set_data() stores module specific data within the PAM handle, pamh. The module_data_name argument uniquely identifies the data, and the data argument represents the actual data. module_data_name should be unique across all s... |
|
pam_set_item(3) -- authentication information routines for PAM
|
|
pam_get_item() and pam_set_item() allow applications and PAM service modules to access and update PAM information as needed. The information is specified by item_type, and can be one of the following: PAM_SERVICE The service name. PAM_USER The user name. PAM_AUTHTOK The user authentication token. PAM_OLDAUTHTOK The old user authentication token. PAM_TTY The tty name. PAM_RHOST The remote host name... |
|
pam_sm(3) -- PAM Service Module APIs
|
|
PAM gives system administrators the flexibility of choosing any authentication service available on the system to perform authentication. The framework also allows new authentication service modules to be plugged in and made available without modifying the applications. The PAM framework, libpam, consists of an interface library and multiple authentication service modules. The PAM interface librar... |
|
pam_sm_acct_mgmt(3) -- Service provider implementation for pam_acct_mgmt
|
|
In response to a call to pam_acct_mgmt(3), the PAM framework calls pam_sm_acct_mgmt() from the modules listed in the pam.conf(4) file. The account management provider supplies the back-end functionality for this interface function. The applications should not call this API directly. The function, pam_sm_acct_mgmt(), determines whether the current user's account and password are valid. This includ... |
|
pam_sm_authenticate(3) -- Service provider implementation for pam_authenticate
|
|
In response to a call to pam_authenticate(3), the PAM framework calls pam_sm_authenticate() from the modules listed in the pam.conf(4) file. The authentication provider supplies the back-end functionality for this interface function. The function, pam_sm_authenticate(), is called to verify the identity of the current user. The user is usually required to enter a password or similar authentication ... |
|
pam_sm_chauthtok(3) -- Service provider implementation for pam_chauthtok
|
|
In response to a call to pam_chauthtok() the PAM framework calls pam_sm_chauthtok() from the modules listed in the pam.conf(4) file. The password management provider supplies the back-end functionality for this interface function. pam_sm_chauthtok() changes the authentication token associated with a particular user referenced by the authentication handle, pamh. The following flag may be passed in ... |
|
pam_sm_close_session(3) -- Service provider implementation for pam_open_session and pam_close_session respectively
|
|
In response to a call to pam_open_session() and pam_close_session(), the PAM framework calls pam_sm_open_session() and pam_sm_close_session(), respectively from the modules listed in the pam.conf(4) file. The session management provider supplies the backend functionality for this interface function. pam_sm_open_session() is called to initiate session management. pam_sm_close_session() is invoked w... |
|
pam_sm_open_session(3) -- Service provider implementation for pam_open_session and pam_close_session respectively
|
|
In response to a call to pam_open_session() and pam_close_session(), the PAM framework calls pam_sm_open_session() and pam_sm_close_session(), respectively from the modules listed in the pam.conf(4) file. The session management provider supplies the backend functionality for this interface function. pam_sm_open_session() is called to initiate session management. pam_sm_close_session() is invoked w... |
|
pam_sm_setcred(3) -- Service provider implementation for pam_setcred
|
|
In response to a call to pam_setcred(), the PAM framework calls pam_sm_setcred() from the modules listed in the pam.conf(4) file. The authentication provider supplies the back-end functionality for this interface function. pam_sm_setcred() is called to set the credentials of the current user associated with the authentication handle, pamh. The following flags may be set in the flags field. Note th... |
|
pam_start(3) -- authentication transaction routines for PAM
|
|
pam_start() is called to initiate an authentication transaction. pam_start() takes as arguments the name of the current service, service, the name of the user to be authenticated, user, the address of the conversation structure, pam_conv, and the address of a variable to be assigned the authentication handle, pamh. Upon successful completion, pamh will refer to a PAM handle for use with subsequent... |
|
pam_strerror(3) -- get PAM error message string
|
|
pam_strerror() maps the PAM error number in errnum to a PAM error message string, and returns a pointer to that string. The application should not free or modify the string returned. The pamh argument is the PAM handle obtained by a prior call to pam_start(). If pam_start() returns an error, a NULL PAM handle should be passed. |
|
putdvagnam(3) -- manipulate device assignment database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getdvagent, getdvagnam, and copydvagent each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of an entry in the Device Assignment database. Each database entry is returned as a dev_asg structure, declared in the header file: struct dev_field { char *fd_name; /* external name */ char **fd_devs; /* device list */ mask_t fd_type[1]; /* tape, printe... |
|
putprdfnam(3) -- manipulate system default database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getprdfent and getprdfnam each returns a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the system default database. Each line in the database contains a pr_default structure, declared in the header file: struct system_default_fields { time_t fd_inactivity_timeout ; char fd_boot_authenticate ; } ; struct system_default_flags { unsigned shor... |
|
putprpwnam(3) -- manipulate protected password database entries (for trusted systems only).
|
|
getprpwent, getprpwuid, getprpwaid, and getprpwnam each returns a pointer to a pr_passwd structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the protected password database. Each line in the database contains a pr_passwd structure, declared in the header file: struct pr_field { /* Identity: */ char fd_name[9]; /* uses 8 character maximum(and NULL) from utmp */ uid_t fd_uid; /* uid ass... |
|
putprtcnam(3) -- manipulate terminal control database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getprtcent and getprtcnam each returns a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of an entry in the terminal control database. Each entry in the database contains a pr_term structure, declared in the header file: struct t_field { char fd_devname[14]; /* Terminal (or host) name */ uid_t fd_uid; /* uid of last successful login */ time_t fd_slogin; ... |
|
RectObj(3) -- The RectObj widget class
|
|
RectObj is never instantiated. Its sole purpose is as a supporting superclass for other widget classes. |
|
request_init(3) -- access control library
|
|
The routines described here are a part of the libwrap.a library. They implement a rule-based access control language with optional shell commands that are executed when a rule fires. request_init() initializes a structure with information about a client request. request_set() updates an already initialized request structure. Both functions take a variable-length list of key-value pairs and return ... |
|
request_set(3) -- access control library
|
|
The routines described here are a part of the libwrap.a library. They implement a rule-based access control language with optional shell commands that are executed when a rule fires. request_init() initializes a structure with information about a client request. request_set() updates an already initialized request structure. Both functions take a variable-length list of key-value pairs and return ... |
|
secdef(3) -- security defaults configuration file routines
|
|
open_secdef opens the security configuration file /etc/default/security. This function must be called prior to calling get_secdef_str or get_secdef_int. close_secdef closes the security configuration file. get_secdef_str and get_secdef_int return the value of the specified parameter defined in the security configuration file. See the security(4) manpage. Programs using these routines must be compi... |
|
setdvagent(3) -- manipulate device assignment database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getdvagent, getdvagnam, and copydvagent each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of an entry in the Device Assignment database. Each database entry is returned as a dev_asg structure, declared in the header file: struct dev_field { char *fd_name; /* external name */ char **fd_devs; /* device list */ mask_t fd_type[1]; /* tape, printe... |
|
setprdfent(3) -- manipulate system default database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getprdfent and getprdfnam each returns a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the system default database. Each line in the database contains a pr_default structure, declared in the header file: struct system_default_fields { time_t fd_inactivity_timeout ; char fd_boot_authenticate ; } ; struct system_default_flags { unsigned shor... |
|
setprpwent(3) -- manipulate protected password database entries (for trusted systems only).
|
|
getprpwent, getprpwuid, getprpwaid, and getprpwnam each returns a pointer to a pr_passwd structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the protected password database. Each line in the database contains a pr_passwd structure, declared in the header file: struct pr_field { /* Identity: */ char fd_name[9]; /* uses 8 character maximum(and NULL) from utmp */ uid_t fd_uid; /* uid ass... |
|
setprtcent(3) -- manipulate terminal control database entry for a trusted system
|
|
getprtcent and getprtcnam each returns a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of an entry in the terminal control database. Each entry in the database contains a pr_term structure, declared in the header file: struct t_field { char fd_devname[14]; /* Terminal (or host) name */ uid_t fd_uid; /* uid of last successful login */ time_t fd_slogin; ... |
|
Shell(3) -- The Shell widget class
|
|
Shell is a top-level widget (with only one managed child) that encapsulates the interaction with the window manager. At the time the shell's child is managed, the child's width is used for both widgets if the shell is unrealized and no width has been specified for the shell. Otherwise, the shell's width is used for both widgets. The same relations hold for the height of the shell and its child. |
|
TopLevelShell(3) -- The TopLevelShell widget class
|
|
TopLevelShell is used for normal top-level windows such as any additional top-level widgets an application needs. |
|
TransientShell(3) -- The TransientShell widget class
|
|
TransientShell is used for shell windows that can be manipulated by the window manager, but are not allowed to be iconified separately. For example, DialogBoxes make no sense without their associated application. They are iconified by the window manager only if the main application shell is iconified. |
|
ttdt_close(3) -- destroy a ToolTalk communication endpoint
|
|
The ttdt_close function destroys a ToolTalk communication endpoint. If sendStopped is True, the ttdt_close function sends a Stopped notice; otherwise, it sends no notice. If procid is not NULL, ttdt_close calls tt_default_procid_set with a procid argument and then calls tt_close; otherwise, it closes the current default procid. If new_procid is not NULL, ttdt_close calls tt_default_procid_set with... |
|
ttdt_file_event(3) -- use ToolTalk to announce an event about a file
|
|
The ttdt_file_event function is used to create and send a ToolTalk notice announcing an event pertaining to a file. The file is indicated by the pathname argument that was passed to ttdt_file_join(3) when patterns was created. The event argument identifies the event. If event is TTDT_MODIFIED, ttdt_file_event registers in the the_scope argument passed to ttdt_file_join(3) to handle Get_Modified, S... |
|
ttdt_file_join(3) -- register to observe ToolTalk events on a file
|
|
The ttdt_file_join function registers to observe Deleted, Modified, Reverted, Moved, and Saved notices. If join is True, ttdt_file_join calls tt_file_join with a pathname argument. The the_scope argument identifies the scope of the request. If the_scope is TT_SCOPE_NONE, it tries TT_BOTH, and falls back to TT_FILE_IN_SESSION if, for example, the ToolTalk database server is not installed on the fil... |
|
ttdt_file_notice(3) -- create and send a standard ToolTalk notice about a file
|
|
The ttdt_file_notice function is used to create (and optionally send) any of the standard file notices: Created, Deleted, Moved, Reverted, Saved, and Modified. The ttdt_file_notice function creates a notice with the specified op and scope, and sets its file attribute to pathname. The function adds an unset argument of Tt_mode TT_IN and vtype File to the notice, per the Desktop messaging convention... |
|
ttdt_file_quit(3) -- unregister interest in ToolTalk events about a file
|
|
The ttdt_file_quit function is used to unregister interest in the pathname that was passed to ttdt_file_join(3) when patterns was created. The ttdt_file_quit function destroys patterns and sets the default file to NULL. If quit is True, ttdt_file_quit calls tt_file_quit(3) with a pathname argument; otherwise, it returns without quitting. |
|
ttdt_file_request(3) -- create and send a standard ToolTalk request about a file
|
|
The ttdt_file_request function is used to create (and optionally send) any of the standard Desktop file requests such as Get_Modified, Save, and Revert. The ttdt_file_request function creates a request with the specified op and scope, and sets its file attribute to pathname. The function adds an unset argument of Tt_mode TT_IN and vtype File to the request, per the Desktop messaging conventions. I... |
|
ttdt_Get_Modified(3) -- ask if any ToolTalk client has changes pending on a file
|
|
The ttdt_Get_Modified function sends a Get_Modified request in the scope the_scope and waits for the reply. A Get_Modified request asks if any ToolTalk client has changes pending on pathname that it intends to make persistent. The context argument describes the environment to use. If context is not zero, messages created by ttdt_Get_Modified inherit from context all contexts whose slotname begins ... |
|
ttdt_message_accept(3) -- accept a contract to handle a ToolTalk request
|
|
The ttdt_message_accept function registers in the default session for TT_HANDLER-addressed requests: 1. Get_Geometry, Set_Geometry, Get_Iconified, Set_Iconified, Get_Mapped, Set_Mapped, Raise, Lower, Get_XInfo 2. Pause, Resume 3. Quit, Get_Status If the shell argument is not NULL, the ToolTalk service handles messages in (1) transparently; otherwise, it treats them like messages in (3). If shell i... |
|
ttdt_open(3) -- create a ToolTalk communication endpoint
|
|
The ttdt_open function calls tt_open(3) and tt_fd(3). It associates toolname, vendor and version with the created procid, and initializes the new procid's default contexts from the process environment. If sendStarted is True, ttdt_open sends a Started notice. |
|
ttdt_Revert(3) -- request a ToolTalk client to revert a file
|
|
The ttdt_Revert function sends a Revert request in the the_scope argument and waits for the reply. A Revert request asks the handling ToolTalk client to discard any changes pending on pathname. The context argument describes the environment to use. If context is not zero, messages created by ttdt_Revert inherit from context all contexts whose slotname begins with the characters ENV_. The the_scope... |
|
ttdt_Save(3) -- request a ToolTalk client to save a file
|
|
The ttdt_Save function sends a Save request in the the_scope argument and waits for the reply. A Save request asks the handling ToolTalk client to save any changes pending on pathname. The context argument describes the environment to use. If context is not zero, messages created by ttdt_Save inherit from context all contexts whose slotname begins with the characters ENV_. The the_scope argument i... |
|
ttdt_sender_imprint_on(3) -- act like a child of the specified tool
|
|
The ttdt_sender_imprint_on function is used to make the calling tool act equivalently to a child of another specified tool. The calling tool adopts the other tool's X11 display, locale, and current working directory. It also learns the other tool's X11 geometry, so that it may position itself appropriately. If the handler argument is non- NULL, the requests are addressed to that procid using TT_... |
|
ttdt_session_join(3) -- join a ToolTalk session
|
|
The ttdt_session_join function joins the session sessid, registering patterns and default callbacks for many standard Desktop message interfaces. If sessid is NULL, the default session is joined. The ttdt_session_join function registers for the following TT_HANDLER-addressed requests: 1. Get_Environment, Set_Environment, Get_Locale, Set_Locale, Get_Situation, Set_Situation, Signal, Get_Sysinfo 2. ... |
|
ttdt_session_quit(3) -- quit a ToolTalk session
|
|
The ttdt_session_quit function destroys the patterns in sess_pats. If quit is True, it quits the session sessid, or the default session if sessid is NULL. |
|
ttdt_subcontract_manage(3) -- manage an outstanding request
|
|
The ttdt_subcontract_manage function allows a requester to manage the standard Desktop interactions with the tool that is handling the request. The ttdt_subcontract_manage function registers in the default session for TT_HANDLER-addressed requests Get_Geometry and Get_XInfo, and Status notices. If shell is not NULL, the ToolTalk service handles the Get_Geometry and Get_XInfo notices transparently;... |
|
ttmedia_Deposit(3) -- send a Deposit request to checkpoint a document
|
|
The ttmedia_Deposit function is used to perform a checkpoint save on a document that was the subject of a Media Exchange load_contract request such as Edit, Compose, or Open. To carry out a checkpoint save, the editor must send the new document contents back to the sender of load_contract. The ttmedia_Deposit function creates and sends a Deposit request and returns the success or failure of that r... |
|
ttmedia_load(3) -- send a Display, Edit or Compose request
|
|
The ttmedia_load function is used to create and optionally send a Media Exchange request to display, edit or compose a document. The cb argument will be passed clientdata when the reply is received, or when intermediate versions of the document are checkpointed through Deposit requests. The op argument must be one of TTME_DISPLAY, TTME_EDIT or TTME_COMPOSE. The media_type argument names the data f... |
|
ttmedia_load_reply(3) -- reply to a Display, Edit or Compose request
|
|
The ttmedia_load_reply function is used to reply to a Media Exchange request to display, edit or compose a document. The editor working on the request usually calls ttmedia_load_reply when the user has indicated in some way that he or she is finished viewing or modifying the document. If new_contents and new_len are non- NULL and non-zero, respectively, ttmedia_load_reply uses their values to set ... |
|
ttmedia_ptype_declare(3) -- declare the ptype of a Media Exchange media editor
|
|
The ttmedia_ptype_declare function is used to initialize an editor that implements the Media Exchange message interface for a particular media type. The ttmedia_ptype_declare function notifies the ToolTalk service that the cb callback is to be called when the editor is asked to edit a document of the kind supported by ptype. The ttmedia_ptype_declare function installs an implementation-specific op... |
|
tttk_block_while(3) -- block while a counter is greater than zero
|
|
The tttk_block_while function is used to process asynchronous events, such as ToolTalk messages or window system events, while waiting for a condition or timeout. If app2run is not zero, then an event loop is run for that application context, by repeatedly calling XtAppProcessEvent(3) with ms_timeout being effected using XtAppAddTimeOut(3). If app2run is zero, then the file descriptor (as returned... |
|
tttk_message_abandon(3) -- finalize a message properly
|
|
The tttk_message_abandon function is used by an application when it does not understand a message and wants to get rid of it. The tttk_message_abandon function fails or rejects msg if appropriate, and then destroys it. The tttk_message_abandon will reject or fail the message only if msg is a TT_REQUEST in Tt_state TT_SENT. If it has a Tt_address of TT_HANDLER or a tt_message_status of TT_WRN_START... |
|
tttk_message_create(3) -- create a message conforming to the CDE conventions
|
|
The tttk_message_create function creates a message that propagates inherited contexts from one message to another. The tttk_message_create function creates a message and copies onto it all the context slots from context whose slotname begins with the characters ENV_. It gives the created message a Tt_class of the_class and a Tt_scope of the_scope. If handler is not NULL, then tttk_message_create a... |
|
tttk_message_destroy(3) -- destroy a message conforming to the CDE conventions
|
|
The tttk_message_destroy function can be used in place of tt_message_destroy(3). It destroys any patterns that may have been stored on msg by ttdt_message_accept(3) or ttdt_subcontract_manage(3). Then it passes msg to tt_message_destroy(3). |
|
tttk_message_fail(3) -- fail a message
|
|
The tttk_message_fail function sets the status and status string of the TT_REQUEST msg, fails msg, and then destroys msg if destroy is True. |
|
tttk_message_reject(3) -- reject a message
|
|
The tttk_message_reject function sets the status and status string of the TT_REQUEST msg, rejects the msg, and then destroys msg if destroy is True. |
|
tttk_op_string(3) -- map a ToolTalk op code to a string
|
|
The tttk_op_string function returns a string containing the op for opcode. |
|
tttk_string_op(3) -- map a string to a ToolTalk op code
|
|
The tttk_string_op function returns the Tttk_op named by opstring. |
|
tttk_Xt_input_handler(3) -- Process ToolTalk events for Xt clients
|
|
If procid is not NULL, tttk_Xt_input_handler passes it to tt_default_procid_set(3). The tttk_Xt_input_handler function then calls tt_message_receive(3), which retrieves the next message available, if any, for the default procid. If tt_message_receive(3) returns TT_ERR_NOMP, then tttk_Xt_input_handler closes the default procid with ttdt_close(3), and removes the input source *id with XtRemoveInput(... |
|
tt_bcontext_join(3) -- add a byte-array value to the list of values
|
|
The tt_bcontext_join function adds the given byte-array value to the list of values for the named contexts of all patterns. The context is compared to currently registered patterns for the procid. If a pattern has a slot with the specified name, the given byte-array value is added to the list of values for that slot. The slotname argument is the name of the context. The value argument is the value... |
|
tt_bcontext_quit(3) -- remove a byte-array value from the list of values
|
|
The tt_bcontext_quit function removes the given byte-array value from the list of values for the contexts of all patterns. The context is compared to currently registered patterns for the procid. If a pattern has a slot with the specified name, the given byte string value is removed from the list of values for that slot. If there are duplicate values, only one value is removed. The slotname argume... |
|
tt_close(3) -- close the current default procid
|
|
The tt_close function closes the current default procid. |
|
tt_context_join(3) -- add a string value to the list of values
|
|
The tt_context_join function adds the given string value to the list of values for the context of all patterns. The context is compared to currently registered patterns for the procid. If a pattern has a slot with the specified name, the given string value is added to the list of values for that slot. The slotname argument is the name of the context. The value argument is the value to be added. |
|
tt_context_quit(3) -- remove a string value from the list of values
|
|
The tt_context_quit function removes the given string value from the list of values for the contexts of all patterns. The context is compared to currently registered patterns for the procid. If a pattern has a slot with the specified name, tt_context_quit removes the given string value from the list of values for that slot. If there are duplicate values, only one value is removed. The slotname arg... |
|
tt_default_file(3) -- return the current default file
|
|
The tt_default_file function returns the current default file. When the application joins a file, the file becomes the default. |
|
tt_default_file_set(3) -- set the default file to a file
|
|
The tt_default_file_set function sets the default file to the specified file. The docid argument is a pointer to a character string that specifies the file that is to be the default file. |
|
tt_default_procid(3) -- identify the current default process
|
|
The tt_default_procid function retrieves the current default procid for the process. |
|
tt_default_procid_set(3) -- set the current default procid
|
|
The tt_default_procid_set function sets the current default procid. The procid argument is the name of process that is to be the default process. |
|
tt_default_ptype(3) -- retrieve the current default ptype
|
|
The tt_default_ptype function retrieves the current default ptype. When the application declares a ptype, the ptype becomes the default. |
|
tt_default_ptype_set(3) -- set the default ptype
|
|
The tt_default_ptype_set function sets the default ptype. The ptid argument must be the character string that uniquely identifies the process that is to be the default process. |
|
tt_default_session(3) -- retrieve the current default session identifier
|
|
The tt_default_session function retrieves the current default session identifier. |
|
tt_default_session_set(3) -- set the current default session identifier
|
|
The tt_default_session_set function sets the current default session identifier. The ToolTalk service uses the initial user session as the default session and supports one session per procid. The application can make this call before it calls tt_open(3) to specify the session to which it wants to connect. The sessid argument is a pointer to the unique identifier for the session in which the procid... |
|
tt_error(3) -- capture ToolTalk function errors
|
|
The tt_error function is a publicly-known null function. It is called by the ToolTalk library just before it returns from any ToolTalk API call that has a status other than TT_OK. The caller passes the name of the function that is about to return and the function's status code. You can use this function to set a dbx breakpoint to quickly catch and trace back any ToolTalk errors. You can also inte... |
|
tt_error_int(3) -- return an integer error object that encodes the code
|
|
The tt_error_int function returns an integer error object that encodes a Tt_status return value. The ttrc argument is the Tt_status code that is to be encoded. |
|
tt_error_pointer(3) -- return a pointer to an error object that encodes the code
|
|
The tt_error_pointer function returns a pointer to an error object that encodes a Tt_status return value. The ttrc argument is the Tt_status code that is to be encoded. |
|
tt_fd(3) -- return a file descriptor
|
|
The tt_fd function returns a file descriptor. The returned file descriptor alerts the process that a message has arrived for the default procid in the default session. File descriptors are either active or inactive. When the file descriptor becomes active, the process must call tt_message_receive(3) to receive the message. |
|
tt_feature_enabled(3) -- determine if a particular feature has been enabled in this process
|
|
The tt_feature_enabled function queries the ToolTalk service to see if the specified feature has previously been enabled. This allows a library that "wraps around" ToolTalk for sending and receiving messages to determine if multithreaded execution has been enabled by the main program, and to modify its behavior accordingly. |
|
tt_feature_required(3) -- declare a feature to be required by the calling program.
|
|
The tt_feature_required function declares a feature to be required by the calling code. If the feature is available, tt_feature_required enables it. If the feature requires the ToolTalk service to perform some initialization (for example, TT_FEATURE_MULTITHREADED), the initialization is performed in this call. Some features (such as TT_FEATURE_MULTITHREADED) require this call to be made before cal... |
|
tt_file_copy(3) -- copy objects from one file to a new file
|
|
The tt_file_copy function copies all objects that exist on the specified file to a new file. If any objects already exist on newfilepath, they are not overwritten by the copy (that is, they are not removed.) The oldfilepath argument is a pointer to the name of the file whose objects are to be copied. The newfilepath argument is a pointer to the name of the file on which to create the copied object... |
|
tt_file_destroy(3) -- remove objected rooted on a file
|
|
The tt_file_destroy function removes all objects that exist on the files and directories rooted at filepath. The application must call this function when the application unlinks a file or removes a directory. The filepath argument is a pointer to the pathname of the file or directory to be removed. |
|
tt_file_join(3) -- register interest in messages involving a file
|
|
The tt_file_join function informs the ToolTalk service that the process is interested in messages that involve the specified file. The ToolTalk service adds this file value to any currently registered patterns. The named file becomes the default file. When the process joins a file, the ToolTalk service updates the file field of its registered patterns. The tt_file_join call causes the pattern's T... |
|
tt_file_move(3) -- move objects from one file to another
|
|
The tt_file_move function destroys all objects that exist on the files and directories rooted at newfilepath, then moves all objects that exist on oldfilepath to newfilepath. If oldfilepath and newfilepath reside in the same file system, tt_file_move replaces oldfilepath with newfilepath in the path associated with every object in that file system; that is, all the objects in the directory tree ro... |
|
tt_file_netfile(3) -- map between local and canonical pathnames on the local host
|
|
The tt_file_netfile function converts a local pathname to a netfilename, a form that can be passed to other hosts on the network and converted back to a local pathname for the same file with tt_netfile_file(3). The filename argument is a pathname (absolute or relative) that is valid on the local host. Every component of filename must exist, except that the last component need not exist. |
|
tt_file_objects_query(3) -- find all objects in the named file
|
|
The tt_file_objects_query function instructs the ToolTalk service to find all objects in the named file and pass the objids to the filter function. The context pointer and accumulator pointer initially specified are also passed to the filter function. As the ToolTalk service finds each object, it calls the filter function, passing the objid of the object and the two applicationsupplied pointers. T... |
|
tt_file_quit(3) -- register lack of interest in messages that involve a file
|
|
The tt_file_quit function informs the ToolTalk service that the process is no longer interested in messages that involve the specified file. The ToolTalk service removes this file value from any currently registered patterns and sets the default file to NULL. The filepath argument is the name of the file in which the process is no longer interested. |
|
tt_free(3) -- free storage from the ToolTalk API allocation stack
|
|
The tt_free function frees storage from the ToolTalk API allocation stack. The p argument is the address of the storage in the ToolTalk API allocation stack to be freed. |
|
tt_host_file_netfile(3) -- map between local and canonical pathnames on a remote host
|
|
The tt_host_file_netfile function performs a conversion equivalent to that of the tt_file_netfile(3) function, but performs it on a remote host. The filename argument is a pathname (absolute or relative) that is valid on the remote host. Every component of filename must exist, except for the last component. The host argument is a name of a remote host. |
|
tt_host_netfile_file(3) -- map between canonical and local pathnames on a remote host
|
|
The tt_host_netfile_file function performs a conversion equivalent to that of the tt_netfile_file(3) function, but performs it on a remote host. The host argument is the host on which the file resides. The netfilename argument is a copy of a null-terminated string returned by tt_netfile_fileRETURN VALUEÂ Â Â Â RETURN VALUEÂ Â Â Â [Toc]Â Â Â Â |
|
tt_icontext_join(3) -- add an integer value to the list of values
|
|
The tt_icontext_join function adds the given integer value to the list of values for the contexts of all patterns. The context is compared to currently registered patterns for the procid. If a pattern has a slot with the specified name, the given integer value is added to the list of values for that slot. The slotname argument is the name of the context. The value argument is the value to be added... |
|
tt_icontext_quit(3) -- remove an integer value from the list of values
|
|
The tt_icontext_quit function removes the given integer value from the list of values for the contexts of all patterns. The context is compared to currently registered patterns for the procid. If a pattern has a slot with the specified name, the given integer value is removed from the list of values for that slot. If there are duplicate values, only one value is removed. The slotname argument is t... |
|
tt_initial_session(3) -- return the initial session identifier
|
|
The tt_initial_session function returns the initial session identifier of the ttsession(1) with which the current process identifier is associated. The current process identifier is obtained by calling tt_open(3). |
|
tt_int_error(3) -- return the status of an error object
|
|
The tt_int_error function returns the status of an error object. The return_val argument is the integer returned by a ToolTalk function. |
|
tt_is_err(3) -- check status value
|
|
The tt_is_err function checks whether a status value is a warning or an error. The s argument is the Tt_status code to check. |
|
tt_malloc(3) -- allocate storage on the ToolTalk API allocation stack
|
|
The tt_malloc function allocates storage on the ToolTalk API allocation stack. The s argument is the amount of storage to be allocated in bytes. |
|
tt_mark(3) -- mark a storage position in the ToolTalk API allocation stack
|
|
The tt_mark function marks a storage position in the ToolTalk API allocation stack. |
|
tt_message_abstainer(3) -- return offer's nth abstaining procid
|
|
The tt_message_abstainer function returns the procid of the nth abstainer of the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument is the number of the abstainer to be returned. The first abstainer is numbered zero. |
|
tt_message_abstainers_count(3) -- return a count of the offer's abstaining procids
|
|
The tt_message_abstainers_count function returns a count of the procids that are recorded in the offer m as having abstained from it. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_accept(3) -- declare that the process has been initialized and can accept messages
|
|
The tt_message_accept function declares that the process has been initialized and can accept messages. The ToolTalk service invokes this function for start messages. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_accepter(3) -- return offer's nth accepting procid
|
|
The tt_message_accepter function returns the procid of the nth accepter of the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument is the number of the accepter to be returned. The first accepter is numbered zero. |
|
tt_message_accepters_count(3) -- return a count of the offer's accepting procids
|
|
The tt_message_accepters_count function returns a count of the procids that are recorded in the offer m as having accepted it. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_address(3) -- retrieve the address attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_address function retrieves the address attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_address_set(3) -- set the address attribute for a message
|
|
The tt_message_address_set function sets the address attribute for the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The a argument specifies which message attributes form the address to which the message will be delivered. The following values are defined: TT_HANDLER The message is addressed to a specific handler that can perform this operation... |
|
tt_message_args_count(3) -- return the number of arguments in the message
|
|
The tt_message_args_count function returns the number of arguments in the message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_arg_add(3) -- add a new argument to a message object
|
|
The tt_message_arg_add function adds a new argument to a message object. The application must add all arguments before the message is sent. To change existing argument values, the application must use only modes TT_OUT or TT_INOUT. Adding arguments when replying to a message produces undefined results. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument s... |
|
tt_message_arg_bval(3) -- retrieve the byte-array value of a message argument
|
|
The tt_message_arg_bval function retrieves the byte-array value of the nth message argument. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument is the number of the argument to be retrieved. The first argument is numbered zero. The value argument is the address of a character pointer to which the ToolTalk service is to point a string that contains the co... |
|
tt_message_arg_bval_set(3) -- set the byte-array value and type of a message argument
|
|
The tt_message_arg_bval_set function sets the byte-array value and the type of the nth message argument. This function also changes the value of an existing nth message argument to a byte string. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument is the number of the argument to set. The first argument is numbered zero. The value argument is the byte str... |
|
tt_message_arg_ival(3) -- retrieve the integer value of a message argument
|
|
The tt_message_arg_ival function retrieves the integer value of the nth message argument. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument is the number of the argument to be retrieved. The first argument is numbered zero. The value argument is a pointer to an integer where the ToolTalk service is to store the contents of the argument. |
|
tt_message_arg_ival_set(3) -- add an integer value in a message argument
|
|
The tt_message_arg_ival_set function adds an integer value in the nth message argument. This function also changes the value of an existing nth message argument to an integer. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument is the number of the argument to be set. The first argument is numbered zero. The value argument is the contents for the message ... |
|
tt_message_arg_mode(3) -- return the mode of a message argument
|
|
The tt_message_arg_mode function returns the mode of the nth message argument. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument is the number of the argument to be returned. The first argument is numbered zero. |
|
tt_message_arg_type(3) -- retrieve the type of a message argument
|
|
The tt_message_arg_type function retrieves the type of the nth message argument. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument is the number of the argument to be retrieved. The first argument is numbered zero. |
|
tt_message_arg_val(3) -- return a pointer to the value of a message argument
|
|
The tt_message_arg_val function returns a pointer to the value of the nth message argument. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument is the number of the argument to be returned. The first argument is numbered zero. |
|
tt_message_arg_val_set(3) -- change the value of a message argument
|
|
The tt_message_arg_val_set function changes the value of the nth message argument. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument is the number of the argument to be changed. The first argument is numbered zero. The value argument is the contents for the message argument. |
|
tt_message_arg_xval(3) -- retrieve and deserialize the data from a message argument
|
|
The tt_message_arg_xval function retrieves and deserializes the data from a message argument. This function uses an XDR routine that is supplied by the client. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument is the number of the argument to be returned. The first argument is numbered zero. The xdr_proc argument points to the XDR procedure to be used t... |
|
tt_message_arg_xval_set(3) -- serialize and set data into an existing message argument
|
|
The tt_message_arg_xval_set function serializes and sets data into an existing message argument. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument is the number of the argument to be changed. The first argument is numbered zero. The xdr_proc argument causes tt_message_arg_xval_set to serialize the data pointed to by value and store it as a byte string v... |
|
tt_message_barg_add(3) -- add an argument to a pattern
|
|
The tt_message_barg_add function adds an argument to a pattern that may have a byte-array value that contains embedded nulls. To change existing argument values, the application must use only modes TT_OUT or TT_INOUT. Adding arguments when replying to a message produces undefined results. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument specifies who (... |
|
tt_message_bcontext_set(3) -- set the byte-array value of a message's context
|
|
The tt_message_bcontext_set function sets the byte-array value of a message's context. This function overwrites any previous value associated with slotname. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The slotname argument describes the slotname in this message. The value argument is the byte string with the contents for the message argument. The length argumen... |
|
tt_message_callback_add(3) -- register a callback function
|
|
The tt_message_callback_add function registers a callback function to be automatically invoked by tt_message_receive(3) whenever a reply or other state-change to this message is returned. The callback is defined in Tt/tt_c.h - Tttt_c(5). If the callback returns TT_CALLBACK_CONTINUE, other callbacks will be run; if no callback returns TT_CALLBACK_PROCESSED, tt_message_receive returns the message. I... |
|
tt_message_class(3) -- retrieve the class attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_class function retrieves the class attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_class_set(3) -- set the class attribute for a message
|
|
The tt_message_class_set function sets the class attribute for the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The c argument indicates whether an action is to take place after the message is received. The following values are defined: TT_NOTICE A notice of an event. The sender does not want feedback on this message. TT_REQUEST A request for s... |
|
tt_message_contexts_count(3) -- return the number of contexts in a message
|
|
The tt_message_contexts_count function returns the number of contexts in a message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_context_bval(3) -- retrieve the byte-array value and length of a message's context
|
|
The tt_message_context_bval function retrieves the byte-array value and length of a message's context. If there is no context slot associated with slotname, tt_message_context_bval returns zero in slotname and zero in len. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The slotname argument describes the context of this message. The value argument points to the lo... |
|
tt_message_context_ival(3) -- retrieve the integer value of a message's context
|
|
The tt_message_context_ival function retrieves the integer value of a message's context. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The slotname argument describes the context of this message. The value argument points to the location to return the value. If there is no context slot associated with slotname, tt_message_context_ival returns a NULL pointer in *v... |
|
tt_message_context_set(3) -- set the character string value of a message's context
|
|
The tt_message_context_set function sets the character string value of a message's context. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The slotname argument describes the context of this message. This function overwrites any previous value associated with slotname. The value argument is the character string to be set. |
|
tt_message_context_slotname(3) -- return the name of a message's nth context
|
|
The tt_message_context_slotname function returns the name of a message's nth context. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument is the number of the context to be retrieved. The first context is numbered zero. |
|
tt_message_context_val(3) -- retrieve the character string of a message's context
|
|
The tt_message_context_val function retrieves the character string of a message's context. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The slotname argument describes the context of this message. If there is no context slot associated with slotname, tt_message_context_val returns a NULL pointer. |
|
tt_message_context_xval(3) -- retrieve and deserialize the data from a message's context
|
|
The tt_message_context_xval function retrieves and deserializes the data from a message's context. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The slotname argument describes the context of this message. The xdr_proc argument points to the XDR procedure to be used to deserialize the data in the nth argument into newly allocated storage, the address of which wil... |
|
tt_message_create(3) -- create a new message object
|
|
The tt_message_create function creates a new message object. The ToolTalk service returns a message handle that is an opaque pointer to a ToolTalk structure. |
|
tt_message_create_super(3) -- create and re-address a copy of a message
|
|
The tt_message_create_super function creates a copy of the specified message and re-addresses the copy of the message to the parent of the otype contained within the message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_destroy(3) -- destroy a message
|
|
The tt_message_destroy function destroys the message. Destroying a message has no effect on the delivery of a message already sent. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_disposition(3) -- retrieve the disposition attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_disposition function retrieves the disposition attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_disposition_set(3) -- set the disposition attribute for a message
|
|
The tt_message_disposition_set function sets the disposition attribute for the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The r argument indicates whether an instance of the receiving process is to be started to receive the message immediately, or whether the message is to be queued until the receiving process is started at a later time. The ... |
|
tt_message_fail(3) -- indicate a message cannot be handled
|
|
The tt_message_fail function informs the ToolTalk service that the process cannot handle the request just received. This function also informs the ToolTalk service that the message is not be offered to other processes of the same ptype. The ToolTalk service will send the message back to the sender with state TT_FAILED. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_file(3) -- retrieves the file attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_file function retrieves the file attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_file_set(3) -- set the file attribute for a message
|
|
The tt_message_file_set function sets the file attribute for the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The file argument is the name of the file involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_gid(3) -- retrieve the group identifier attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_gid function retrieves the group identifier attribute from the specified message. The ToolTalk service automatically sets the group identifier of a message with the group identifier of the process that created the message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_handler(3) -- retrieve the handler attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_handler function retrieves the handler attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_handler_ptype(3) -- retrieve the handler ptype attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_handler_ptype function retrieves the handler ptype attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_handler_ptype_set(3) -- set the handler ptype attribute for a message
|
|
The tt_message_handler_ptype_set function sets the handler ptype attribute for the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The ptid argument is the type of process that is to handle this message. |
|
tt_message_handler_set(3) -- set the handler attribute for a message
|
|
The tt_message_handler_set function sets the handler attribute for the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The procid argument is the character value that uniquely identifies the process that is to handle the message. |
|
tt_message_iarg_add(3) -- add a new argument to a message object
|
|
The tt_message_iarg_add function adds a new argument to a message object and sets the value to a given integer. Add all arguments before the message is sent. To change existing argument values, the application must use only modes TT_OUT or TT_INOUT. Adding arguments when replying to a message produces undefined results. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation... |
|
tt_message_icontext_set(3) -- set the integer value of a message's context
|
|
The tt_message_icontext_set function sets the integer value of a message's context. This function overwrites any previous value associated with slotname. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The slotname argument describes the context of this message. The value argument is the integer value to be set. |
|
tt_message_id(3) -- retrieve the identifier of a message
|
|
The tt_message_id function retrieves the identifier of the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_object(3) -- retrieve the object attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_object function retrieves the object attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_object_set(3) -- set the object attribute for a message
|
|
The tt_message_object_set function sets the object attribute for the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The objid argument is the identifier of the specified object. |
|
tt_message_op(3) -- retrieve the operation attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_op function retrieves the operation attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_opnum(3) -- retrieve the operation number attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_opnum function retrieves the operation number attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_op_set(3) -- set the operation attribute for a message
|
|
The tt_message_op_set function sets the operation attribute for the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The opname argument is the operation that the receiving process is to perform. |
|
tt_message_otype(3) -- retrieve the object type attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_otype function retrieves the object type attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_otype_set(3) -- set the otype attribute for a message
|
|
The tt_message_otype_set function sets the object type (otype) attribute for the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The otype argument is the type of the object involved in this message. |
|
tt_message_pattern(3) -- return the pattern matched by a message
|
|
The tt_message_pattern function returns the pattern that the specified message matched. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_print(3) -- format a message
|
|
The tt_message_print function formats a message in the same way a message is formatted for the ttsession(1) trace and returns a string containing it. The m argument is the message to be formatted. |
|
tt_message_receive(3) -- receive a message
|
|
The tt_message_receive function returns a handle for the next message queued to be delivered to the process and also runs any message or pattern callbacks applicable to the queued message. If the return value of tt_message_status(3) for this message is TT_WRN_START_MESSAGE, the ToolTalk service started the process to deliver the queued message; the process must reply to this message. If the return... |
|
tt_message_reject(3) -- reject a message
|
|
The tt_message_reject function informs the ToolTalk service that the process cannot handle this message. The ToolTalk service will attempt to deliver the message to other handlers. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_rejecter(3) -- return offer's nth rejecting procid
|
|
The tt_message_rejecter function returns the procid of the nth rejecter of the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument is the number of the rejecter to be returned. The first rejecter is numbered zero. |
|
tt_message_rejecters_count(3) -- return a count of the offer's rejecting procids
|
|
The tt_message_rejecters_count function returns a count of the procids that are recorded in the offer m as having rejected it. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_reply(3) -- reply to a message
|
|
The tt_message_reply function informs the ToolTalk service that the process has handled the message and filled in all return values. The ToolTalk service sends the message back to the sending process and fills in the state attribute with TT_HANDLED. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_scope(3) -- retrieve the scope attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_scope function retrieves the scope attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_scope_set(3) -- set the scope attribute for a message
|
|
The tt_message_scope_set function sets the scope attribute for the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The s argument identifies the set of processes eligible to receive the message. The following values are defined: TT_SESSION All processes joined to the indicated session are eligible. TT_FILE All processes joined to the indicated fil... |
|
tt_message_send(3) -- send a message
|
|
The tt_message_send function sends the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_sender(3) -- retrieve the sender attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_sender function retrieves the sender attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_sender_ptype(3) -- retrieve the sender ptype attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_sender_ptype function retrieves the sender ptype attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_sender_ptype_set(3) -- set the sender ptype attribute for a message
|
|
The tt_message_sender_ptype_set function sets the sender ptype attribute for the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The ptid argument is the type of process that is sending this message. |
|
tt_message_send_on_exit(3) -- set up a message to send upon unexpected exit
|
|
The tt_message_send_on_exit function requests that the ToolTalk service send this message if the process exits unexpectedly. The message is sent to the ToolTalk service, which queues the message internally until either of two events occur: 1. The procid that sent the tt_message_send_on_exit message to the ToolTalk service calls tt_close(3). In this case, the queued message is deleted. 2. The conne... |
|
tt_message_session(3) -- retrieve the session attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_session function retrieves the session attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_session_set(3) -- set the session attribute for a message
|
|
The tt_message_session_set function sets the session attribute for the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The sessid argument is the identifier of the session in which the process is interested. |
|
tt_message_state(3) -- retrieve the state attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_state function retrieves the state attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_status(3) -- retrieve the status attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_status function retrieves the status attribute from the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_status_set(3) -- set the status attribute for a message
|
|
The tt_message_status_set function sets the status attribute for the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The status argument is the status to be stored in this message. |
|
tt_message_status_string(3) -- retrieve the character string stored with the status attribute for a message
|
|
The tt_message_status_string function retrieves the character string stored with the status attribute for the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_status_string_set(3) -- set a character string with the status attribute for a message
|
|
The tt_message_status_string_set function sets status string of the specified message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The status_str argument is the status string to be stored in this message. |
|
tt_message_uid(3) -- retrieve the user identifier attribute from a message
|
|
The tt_message_uid function retrieves the user identifier attribute from the specified message. The ToolTalk service automatically sets the user identifier of a message with the user identifier of the process that created the message. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. |
|
tt_message_user(3) -- retrieve the user information associated with a message object
|
|
The tt_message_user function retrieves the user information stored in data cells associated with the specified message object. The user data is part of the message object (that is, the storage buffer in the application); it is not a part of the actual message. The application can, therefore, only retrieve user information that the application placed in the message. The m argument is the opaque han... |
|
tt_message_user_set(3) -- stores user information associated with a message object
|
|
The tt_message_user_set function stores user information in data cells associated with the specified message object. The user data is part of the message object (that is, the storage buffer in the application); it is not part of the actual message. Data stored by the sending process in user data cells is not seen by handlers and observers. The application can use arguments for data that needs to b... |
|
tt_message_xarg_add(3) -- add an argument with an XDR-interpreted value to a message object
|
|
The tt_message_xarg_add function adds an argument with an XDRinterpreted value to a message object. To change existing argument values, the application must use only modes TT_OUT or TT_INOUT. Adding arguments when replying to a message produces undefined results. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The n argument specifies who (sender, handler, observers... |
|
tt_message_xcontext_set(3) -- set the XDR-interpreted byte-array value of a message's context
|
|
The tt_message_xcontext_set function sets the XDR-interpreted bytearray value of a message's context. The m argument is the opaque handle for the message involved in this operation. The slotname argument describes the slotname in this message. The value argument is the byte string with the contents for the message argument. The xdr_proc argument points to the XDR procedure to be used to serialize... |
|
tt_netfile_file(3) -- map between canonical and local pathnames on the local host
|
|
The tt_netfile_file function converts a netfilename of the format returned by tt_file_netfile(3) to a pathname that is valid on the local host. If the file is not currently mounted on the local host, tt_netfile_file constructs a pathname of the form: /mountpoint/host/filepath where mountpoint is the mount point pathname in the environment variable DTMOUNTPOINT, or /net if the variable is null or u... |
|
tt_objid_equal(3) -- test whether two objids are equal
|
|
The tt_objid_equal function tests whether two objids are equal. The tt_objid_equal(3) function is recommended rather than strcmp(3) for this purpose because the tt_objid_equal(3) function returns 1 even in the case where one objid is a forwarding pointer for the other. The objid1 argument is the identifier of the first object involved in this operation. The objid2 argument is the identifier of the... |
|
tt_objid_objkey(3) -- return the unique key of an objid
|
|
The tt_objid_objkey function returns the unique key of an objid. The objid argument is the identifier of the object involved in this operation. |
|
tt_onotice_create(3) -- create a notice
|
|
The tt_onotice_create function creates a message. The created message contains the following: Tt_address = TT_OBJECT Tt_class = TT_NOTICE The application can use the returned handle to add arguments and other attributes, and to send the message. The objid argument is the identifier of the specified object. The op argument is the operation to be performed by the receiving process. |
|
tt_open(3) -- return the process identifier for the calling process
|
|
The tt_open function returns the process identifier for the calling process. |
|
tt_orequest_create(3) -- create a request message
|
|
The tt_orequest_create function creates a message. The created message contains the following: Tt_address = TT_OBJECT Tt_class = TT_REQUEST The application can use the returned handle to add arguments and other attributes, and to send the message. The objid argument is the identifier of the specified object. The op argument is the operation to be performed by the receiving process. |
|
tt_otype_base(3) -- return the base otype of an otype
|
|
The tt_otype_base function returns the base otype of the given otype, or NULL if the given otype is not derived. The otype argument is the object type involved in this operation. |
|
tt_otype_derived(3) -- return the ith otype derived from the given otype
|
|
The tt_otype_derived function returns the ith otype derived from the given otype. The otype argument is the object type involved in this operation. The i argument is the zero-based index into the otypes derived from the given otype. |
|
tt_otype_deriveds_count(3) -- return the number of otypes derived from an otype
|
|
The tt_otype_deriveds_count function returns the number of otypes derived from the given otype. The otype argument is the object type involved in this operation. |
|
tt_otype_hsig_args_count(3) -- return the number of arguments of a request signature of an otype
|
|
The tt_otype_hsig_args_count function returns the number of arguments of the sigth request signature of the given otype. The otype argument is the object type involved in this operation. The sig argument is the zero-based index into the request signatures of the specified otype. |
|
tt_otype_hsig_arg_mode(3) -- return the mode of an argument of a request signature of an otype
|
|
The tt_otype_hsig_arg_mode function returns the mode of the argth argument of the sigth request signature of the given otype. The otype argument is the object type involved in this operation. The sig argument is the zero-based index into the request signatures of the specified otype. The arg argument is the zero-based index into the arguments of the specified signature. |
|
tt_otype_hsig_arg_type(3) -- return the data type of an argument of a request signature of an otype
|
|
The tt_otype_hsig_arg_type function returns the data type of the argth argument of the sigth request signature of the given otype. The otype argument is the object type involved in this operation. The sig argument is the zero-based index into the request signatures of the specified otype. The arg argument is the zero-based index into the arguments of the specified signature. |
|
tt_otype_hsig_count(3) -- return the number of request signatures for an otype
|
|
The tt_otype_hsig_count function returns the number of request signatures for the given otype. The otype argument is the object type involved in this operation. |
|
tt_otype_hsig_op(3) -- return the operation name of a request signature of an otype
|
|
The tt_otype_hsig_op function returns the operation name of the sigth request signature of the given otype. The otype argument is the object type involved in this operation. The sig argument is the zero-based index into the request signatures of the given otype. |
|
tt_otype_is_derived(3) -- indicate the otype derivations
|
|
The tt_otype_is_derived function specifies whether the derived otype is derived directly or indirectly from the base otype. The derivedotype argument is the specified derived otype. The baseotype argument is the specified base otype. |
|
tt_otype_opnum_callback_add(3) -- return a callback if two opnums are equal
|
|
The tt_otype_opnum_callback_add function adds a callback that is automatically invoked when a message is delivered because it matched a pattern derived from a signature in the named otype with an opnum equal to the specified one. The callback is defined in Tt/tt_c.h - Tttt_c(5). The otid argument is the identifier of the object type involved in this operation. The opnum argument is the opnum of th... |
|
tt_otype_osig_args_count(3) -- returns the number of arguments of a notice signature of an otype
|
|
The tt_otype_osig_args_count function returns the number of arguments of the sigth notice signature of the given otype. The otype argument is the object type involved in this operation. The sig argument is the zero-based index into the notice signatures of the specified otype. |
|
tt_otype_osig_arg_mode(3) -- return the mode of an argument of a notice signature of an otype
|
|
The tt_otype_osig_arg_mode function returns the mode of the argth argument of the sigth notice signature of the given otype. The otype argument is the object type involved in this operation. The sig argument is the zero-based index into the notice signatures of the specified otype. The arg argument is the zero-based index into the arguments of the specified signature. |
|
tt_otype_osig_arg_type(3) -- return the data type of an argument of a notice signature of an otype
|
|
The tt_otype_osig_arg_type function returns the data type of the argth argument of the sigth notice signature of the given otype. The otype argument is the object type involved in this operation. The sig argument is the zero-based index into the notice signatures of the specified otype. The arg argument is the zero-based index into the arguments of the specified signature. |
|
tt_otype_osig_count(3) -- return the number of notice signatures for an otype
|
|
The tt_otype_osig_count function returns the number of notice signatures for the given otype. The otype argument is the object type involved in this operation. |
|
tt_otype_osig_op(3) -- return the op name of a notice signature of an otype
|
|
The tt_otype_osig_op function returns the op name of the sigth notice signature of the given otype. The otype argument is the object type involved in this operation. The sig argument is the zero-based index into the notice signatures of the given otype. |
|
tt_pattern_address_add(3) -- add a value to the address field for a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_address_add function adds a value to the address field for the specified pattern. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after a tt_pattern_create(3) call has been made. The d argument specifies which pattern attributes form the address that messages will be matched against. The following values are defined: TT_HANDLER The message is address... |
|
tt_pattern_arg_add(3) -- add an argument to a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_arg_add function adds an argument to a pattern. The application must add pattern arguments before it registers the pattern with the ToolTalk service. The p argument is the opaque handle for the pattern involved in this operation The n argument specifies who (sender, handler, observers) writes and reads a message argument. The following modes are defined: TT_IN The argument is writte... |
|
tt_pattern_barg_add(3) -- add an argument with a value that contains embedded nulls to a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_barg_add function adds an argument with a value that contains embedded nulls to a pattern. The m argument is the opaque handle for the pattern involved in this operation. The n argument specifies who (sender, handler, observers) writes and reads a message argument. The following modes are defined: TT_IN The argument is written by the sender and read by the handler and any observers.... |
|
tt_pattern_bcontext_add(3) -- add a byte-array value to the values in this pattern's named context
|
|
The tt_pattern_bcontext_add function adds a byte-array value to the values in this pattern's named context. The p argument is the opaque handle for the pattern involved in this operation. The slotname argument describes the context for this pattern. The value argument is the byte string with the contents for the message context. The length argument is the length of the value in bytes. |
|
tt_pattern_callback_add(3) -- register a message-matching callback function
|
|
The tt_pattern_callback_add function registers a callback function that will be automatically invoked by tt_message_receive(3) whenever a message matches the pattern. The callback is defined in Tt/tt_c.h - Tttt_c(5). If the callback returns TT_CALLBACK_CONTINUE, other callbacks will be run; if no callback returns TT_CALLBACK_PROCESSED, tt_message_receive(3) returns the message. If the callback ret... |
|
tt_pattern_category(3) -- return the category value of a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_category function returns the category value of the specified pattern. The p argument is the opaque handle for a message pattern. |
|
tt_pattern_category_set(3) -- fill in the category field for a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_category_set function fills in the category field for the specified pattern. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. The c argument indicates whether the receiving process will observe or handle messages. The following values are defined: TT_OBSERVE The receiving process will observe messages. TT_HANDLE T... |
|
tt_pattern_class_add(3) -- add a value to the class information for a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_class_add function adds a value to the class information for the specified pattern. If the class is TT_REQUEST, the sending process expects a reply to the message. If the class is TT_NOTICE, the sending process does not expect a reply to the message. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. The c argument ... |
|
tt_pattern_context_add(3) -- add a string value to the values of this pattern's context
|
|
The tt_pattern_context_add function adds a string value to the values of this pattern's context. If the value pointer is NULL, a slot is created with the specified name but no value is added. The p argument is the opaque handle for the pattern involved in this operation. The slotname argument describes the context of this pattern. The value argument is the value to be added. |
|
tt_pattern_create(3) -- request a new pattern object
|
|
The tt_pattern_create function requests a new pattern object. After receiving the pattern object, the application fills in the message pattern fields to indicate what type of messages the process wants to receive and then registers the pattern with the ToolTalk service. The application can supply multiple values for each attribute added to a pattern (although some attributes are set and can only h... |
|
tt_pattern_destroy(3) -- destroy a pattern object
|
|
The tt_pattern_destroy function destroys a pattern object. Destroying a pattern object automatically unregisters the pattern with the ToolTalk service. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. |
|
tt_pattern_disposition_add(3) -- add a value to the disposition field for a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_disposition_add function adds a value to the disposition field for the specified pattern. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. The r argument indicates whether an instance of the receiver is to be started to receive the message immediately, or whether the message is to be queued until the receiving pro... |
|
tt_pattern_file_add(3) -- add a value to the file field of a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_file_add function adds a value to the file field of the specified pattern. The application can use this call to set individual files on individual patterns. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. The file argument is the name of the file of the specified pattern. |
|
tt_pattern_iarg_add(3) -- add a new integer argument to a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_iarg_add function adds a new argument to a pattern and sets the value to a given integer. Add all arguments before the pattern is registered with the ToolTalk service. The m argument is the opaque handle for the pattern involved in this operation. The n argument specifies who (sender, handler, observers) writes and reads a message argument. The following modes are defined: TT_IN The... |
|
tt_pattern_icontext_add(3) -- add an integer value to the values of this pattern's context
|
|
The tt_pattern_icontext_add function adds an integer value to the values of this pattern's context. The p argument is the opaque handle for the pattern involved in this operation. The slotname argument describes the slotname in this pattern. The value argument is the value to be added. |
|
tt_pattern_object_add(3) -- add a value to the object field of a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_object_add function adds a value to the object field of the specified pattern. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. The objid argument is the identifier for the specified object. Both tt_spec_createRETURN VALUEÂ Â Â Â RETURN VALUEÂ Â Â Â [Toc]Â Â Â Â |
|
tt_pattern_opnum_add(3) -- add an operation number to a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_opnum_add function adds an operation number to the specified pattern. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. The opnum argument is the operation number to be added. |
|
tt_pattern_op_add(3) -- add a value to the operation field of a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_op_add function adds a value to the operation field of the specified pattern. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. The opname argument is the name of the operation the process can perform. |
|
tt_pattern_otype_add(3) -- add a value to the object type field for a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_otype_add function adds a value to the object type field for the specified pattern. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. The otype argument is the name of the object type the application manages. |
|
tt_pattern_print(3) -- format a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_print function formats a pattern in the same way a message is formatted for the ttsession(1) trace and returns a string containing it. The p argument is the pattern to be formatted. |
|
tt_pattern_register(3) -- register a pattern with the ToolTalk service
|
|
The tt_pattern_register function registers a pattern with the ToolTalk service. When the process is registered, it will start receiving messages that match the specified pattern. Once a pattern is registered, no further changes can be made in the pattern. When the process joins a session or file, the ToolTalk service updates the file and session field of its registered patterns. The p argument is ... |
|
tt_pattern_scope_add(3) -- add a value to the scope field for a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_scope_add function adds a value to the scope field for the specified pattern. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. The s argument specifies what processes are eligible to receive the message. The following values are defined: TT_SESSION All processes joined to the indicated session are eligible. TT_FIL... |
|
tt_pattern_sender_add(3) -- add a value to the sender field for a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_sender_add function adds a value to the sender field for the specified pattern. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. The procid argument is the character value that uniquely identifies the process of interest. |
|
tt_pattern_sender_ptype_add(3) -- add a value to the sending process's ptype field for a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_sender_ptype_add function adds a value to the sending process's ptype field for the specified pattern. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. The ptid argument is the character string that uniquely identifies the type of process in which the application is interested. |
|
tt_pattern_session_add(3) -- adds a value to the session field for a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_session_add function adds a value to the session field for the specified pattern. When the process joins a session, the ToolTalk service updates the session field of its registered patterns. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. The sessid argument is the session of interest. |
|
tt_pattern_state_add(3) -- add a value to the state field for a pattern
|
|
The tt_pattern_state_add function adds a value to the state field for the specified pattern. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. The s argument indicates the current delivery state of a message. The following values are defined: TT_CREATED The message has been created, but not yet sent. TT_SENT The message has been ... |
|
tt_pattern_unregister(3) -- unregister a pattern from the ToolTalk service
|
|
The tt_pattern_unregister function unregisters the specified pattern from the ToolTalk service. The process will stop receiving messages that match this pattern. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. |
|
tt_pattern_user(3) -- return the value in a user data cell for a pattern object
|
|
The tt_pattern_user function returns the value in the indicated user data cell for the specified pattern object. Every pattern object allows an arbitrary number of user data cells that are each one word in size. The user data cells are identified by integer keys. The tool can use these keys in any manner to associate arbitrary data with a pattern object. The user data is part of the pattern object... |
|
tt_pattern_user_set(3) -- store information in the user data cells of a pattern object
|
|
The tt_pattern_user_set function stores information in the user data cells associated with the specified pattern object. The p argument is a unique handle for a message pattern. This handle is returned after tt_pattern_create(3) is called. The key argument is the specified user data cell. The value for each data cell must be unique for this pattern. The v argument is the data cell, a piece of arbi... |
|
tt_pattern_xarg_add(3) -- add a new argument with an interpreted XDR value to a pattern object
|
|
The tt_pattern_xarg_add function adds a new argument with an interpreted XDR value to a pattern object. The m argument is the opaque handle for the pattern involved in this operation. The n argument specifies who (sender, handler, observers) writes and reads a pattern argument. The following modes are defined: TT_IN The argument is written by the sender and read by the handler and any observers. T... |
|
tt_pattern_xcontext_add(3) -- add an XDR-interpreted byte-array value to this pattern's named context
|
|
The tt_pattern_xcontext_add function adds an XDR-interpreted bytearray value to the values in this pattern's named context. The p argument is the opaque handle for the pattern involved in this operation. The slotname argument describes the context for this pattern. The xdr_proc argument points to the XDR procedure to be used to serialize the data pointed to by value. The value argument is the dat... |
|
tt_pnotice_create(3) -- create a procedure notice
|
|
The tt_pnotice_create function creates a message. The created message contains the following: Tt_address = TT_PROCEDURE Tt_class = TT_NOTICE The application can use the returned handle to add arguments and other attributes, and to send the message. The scope argument determines which processes are eligible to receive the message. The following values are defined: TT_SESSION All processes joined to... |
|
tt_pointer_error(3) -- return the status of a pointer
|
|
The tt_pointer_error function returns the status of the specified pointer. If an opaque pointer (Tt_message or Tt_pattern) or character pointer (char *) is specified, this function returns TT_OK if the pointer is valid or the encoded Tt_status value if the pointer is an error object. The pointer argument is the opaque pointer or character pointer to be checked. |
|
tt_prequest_create(3) -- create a procedure request message
|
|
The tt_prequest_create function creates a message. The created message created contains the following: Tt_address = TT_PROCEDURE Tt_class = TT_REQUEST The application can use the returned handle to add arguments and other attributes, and to send the message. The scope argument determines which processes are eligible to receive the message. The following values are defined: TT_SESSION All processes... |
|
tt_procid_session(3) -- identify the session in which a procid was opened
|
|
The tt_procid_session function returns the identifier of the session in which the specified procid was opened. The return value points to the sessid for the session associated with the procid. When the sessid value is no longer needed, it must be freed with tt_free. |
|
tt_ptr_error(3) -- pointer error macro
|
|
The tt_ptr_error macro expands to tt_pointer_error((void *)(p)). The pointer argument is the opaque pointer or character pointer to be checked. |
|
tt_ptype_declare(3) -- register the process type with the ToolTalk service
|
|
The tt_ptype_declare function registers the process type with the ToolTalk service. The ptid argument is the character string specified in the ptype that uniquely identifies this process. |
|
tt_ptype_exists(3) -- indicate whether a ptype is already installed
|
|
The tt_ptype_exists function returns an indication of whether a ptype is already installed. The ptid argument is the character string specifying the ptype. |
|
tt_ptype_opnum_callback_add(3) -- return a callback if two opnums are equal
|
|
The tt_ptype_opnum_callback_add function returns a callback if the specified opnums are equal. The callback is defined in Tt/tt_c.h - Tttt_c(5). When a message is delivered because it matched a pattern derived from a signature in the named ptype with an opnum equal to the specified one, the given callback is run in the usual ToolTalk way. The ptid argument is the identifier of the ptype involved i... |
|
tt_ptype_undeclare(3) -- undeclare a ptype
|
|
The tt_ptype_undeclare function undeclares the indicated ptype and unregisters the patterns associated with the indicated ptype from the ToolTalk service. The ptid argument is the character string specifying the ptype. |
|
tt_release(3) -- free storage allocated on the ToolTalk API allocation stack
|
|
The tt_release function frees all storage allocated on the ToolTalk API allocation stack since mark was returned by tt_mark(3). The mark argument is an integer that marks the application's storage position in the ToolTalk API allocation stack. |
|
tt_session_bprop(3) -- retrieve the ith value of the named property of a session
|
|
The tt_session_bprop function retrieves the ith value of the named property of the specified session. If there are i values or fewer, both the returned value and the returned length are set to zero. The sessid argument is the session joined. The application can use the sessid value returned when tt_default_session is called. The propname argument is the name of the property from which values are t... |
|
tt_session_bprop_add(3) -- add a new byte-string value to the end of the list of values
|
|
The tt_session_bprop_add function adds a new byte-string value to the end of the list of values for the named property of the specified session. The sessid argument is the name of the session joined. The application can use the sessid value returned when tt_default_session is called. The propname argument is the name of the property to which to add values. The value argument is the value to add to... |
|
tt_session_bprop_set(3) -- replace current values stored under the named property of a session
|
|
The tt_session_bprop_set function replaces any current values stored under the named property of the specified session with the given byte-string value. The sessid argument is the name of the session joined. The application can use the sessid value returned when tt_default_session is called. The propname argument is the name of the property whose value is to be replaced. The value argument is the ... |
|
tt_session_join(3) -- join a session and make it the default
|
|
The tt_session_join function joins the named session and makes it the default session. The sessid argument is the name of the session to join. |
|
tt_session_prop(3) -- return the ith value of a session property
|
|
The tt_session_prop function returns the ith value of the specified session property. The sessid argument is the name of the session joined. The application can use the sessid value returned when tt_default_session is called. The propname argument is the name of the property from which a value is to be retrieved. The name must be less than 64 bytes. The i argument is the number of the item in the ... |
|
tt_session_propname(3) -- returns an element of the list of property names for a session
|
|
The tt_session_propname function returns the nth element of the list of currently defined property names for the specified session. The sessid argument is the name of the session joined. The application can use the sessid value returned when tt_default_session is called. The n argument is the number of the item in the property name list for which a name is to be obtained. The list numbering begins... |
|
tt_session_propnames_count(3) -- return the number of property names for the session
|
|
The tt_session_propnames_count function returns the number of currently defined property names for the session. The sessid argument is the name of the session joined. The application can use the sessid value returned when tt_default_session is called. |
|
tt_session_prop_add(3) -- add a new character-string value to the end of the list of values
|
|
The tt_session_prop_add function adds a new character-string value to the end of the list of values for the property of the specified session. The sessid argument is the name of the session joined. The application can use the sessid value returned when tt_default_session is called. The propname argument is the name of the property to which a value is to be added. The name must be less than 64 byte... |
|
tt_session_prop_count(3) -- return the number of values stored under a property of a session
|
|
The tt_session_prop_count function returns the number of values stored under the named property of the specified session. The sessid argument is the name of the session joined. The application can use the sessid value returned when tt_default_session is called. The propname argument is the name of the property to be examined. |
|
tt_session_prop_set(3) -- replace current values for a property of a
|
|
The tt_session_prop_set function replaces all current values stored under the named property of the specified session with the given character-string value. The sessid argument is the name of the session joined. The application can use the sessid value returned when tt_default_session is called. The propname argument is the name of the property to be examined. The value argument is the new value t... |
|
tt_session_quit(3) -- quit the session
|
|
The tt_session_quit function informs the ToolTalk service that the process is no longer interested in this ToolTalk session. The ToolTalk service stops delivering messages scoped to this session. The sessid argument is the name of the session to quit. |
|
tt_session_types_load(3) -- merge a compiled ToolTalk types file into the running ttsession
|
|
The tt_session_types_load function merges a compiled ToolTalk types file into the running ttsession(1). The session argument is the name of the running session. The filename argument is the name of the compiled ToolTalk types file. |
|
tt_spec_bprop(3) -- retrieve the ith value of a property
|
|
The tt_spec_bprop function retrieves the ith value of the specified property. The objid argument is the identifier of the object involved in this operation. The propname argument is the name of the property whose value is to be retrieved. The name must be less than 64 characters. The i argument is the item of the list for which a value is to be obtained. The list numbering begins with zero. The va... |
|
tt_spec_bprop_add(3) -- add a new byte-string to the end of the list of values
|
|
The tt_spec_bprop_add function adds a new byte-string to the end of the list of values associated with the specified spec property. The objid argument is the identifier of the object involved in this operation. The propname argument is the name of the property to which the byte-string is to be added. The value argument is the byte-string to be added to the property value list. The length argument ... |
|
tt_spec_bprop_set(3) -- replace any current values stored under this spec
|
|
The tt_spec_bprop_set function replaces any current values stored under this spec property with a new byte-string. The objid argument is the identifier of the object involved in this operation. The propname argument is the name of the property which stores the values. The value argument is the byte-string to be added to the property value list. If the value is NULL, the property is removed entirel... |
|
tt_spec_create(3) -- create an in-memory spec for an object
|
|
The tt_spec_create function creates a spec (in memory) for an object. The application can use the objid returned in future calls to manipulate the object. The filepath argument is the name of the file. |
|
tt_spec_destroy(3) -- destroy an object's spec
|
|
The tt_spec_destroy function destroys an object's spec immediately. The objid argument is the identifier of the object involved in this operation. |
|
tt_spec_file(3) -- retrieve the name of the file that contains the object described by the spec
|
|
The tt_spec_file function retrieves the name of the file that contains the object described by the spec. The objid argument is the identifier of the object involved in this operation. |
|
tt_spec_move(3) -- notify the ToolTalk service that an object has moved to a different file
|
|
The tt_spec_move function notifies the ToolTalk service that this object has moved to a different file. The ToolTalk service returns a new objid for the object and leaves a forwarding pointer from the old objid to the new one. If a new objid is not required (for example, because the new and old files are in the same file system), tt_spec_move returns TT_WRN_SAME_OBJID. The objid argument is the id... |
|
tt_spec_prop(3) -- retrieve the ith value of the property associated with an object spec
|
|
The tt_spec_prop function retrieves the ith value of the property associated with this object spec. The objid argument is the identifier of the object involved in this operation. The propname argument is the name of the property associated with the object spec. The i argument is the item of the list whose value is to be retrieved. The list numbering begins with zero. |
|
tt_spec_propname(3) -- return an element of the property name list for an object spec
|
|
The tt_spec_propname function returns the nth element of the property name list for this object spec. The objid argument is the identifier of the object involved in this operation. The n argument is the item of the list whose element is to be returned. The list numbering begins with zero. |
|
tt_spec_propnames_count(3) -- return the number of property names for an object
|
|
The tt_spec_propnames_count function returns the number of property names for this object. The objid argument is the identifier of the object involved in this operation. |
|
tt_spec_prop_add(3) -- add a new item to the end of the list of values
|
|
The tt_spec_prop_add function adds a new item to the end of the list of values associated with this spec property. The objid argument is the identifier of the object involved in this operation. The propname argument is the property to which the item is to be added. The value argument is the new character-string to be added to the property value list. |
|
tt_spec_prop_count(3) -- return the number of values listed in this spec property
|
|
The tt_spec_prop_count function returns the number of values listed in this spec property. The objid argument is the identifier of the object involved in this operation. The propname argument is the name of the property that contains the value to be returned. |
|
tt_spec_prop_set(3) -- replace property values
|
|
The tt_spec_prop_set function replaces any values currently stored under this property of the object spec with a new value. The objid argument is the identifier of the object involved in this operation. The propname argument is the name of the property which stores the values. The value argument is the value to be placed in the property value list. If value is NULL, the property is removed entirel... |
|
tt_spec_type(3) -- return the name of the object type
|
|
The tt_spec_type function returns the name of the object type. The objid argument is the identifier of the object involved in this operation. |
|
tt_spec_type_set(3) -- assign an object type value to an object spec
|
|
The tt_spec_type_set function assigns an object type value to the object spec. The type must be set before the spec is written for the first time and cannot be set thereafter. The objid argument is the identifier of the object involved in this operation. The otid argument is the otype to be assigned to the spec. |
|
tt_spec_write(3) -- write the spec and any associated properties to the ToolTalk database
|
|
The tt_spec_write function writes the spec and any associated properties to the ToolTalk database. The type must be set before the spec is written for the first time. The objid argument is the identifier of the object involved in this operation. |
|
tt_status_message(3) -- provide a message for a problem status code
|
|
The tt_status_message function returns a pointer to a message that describes the problem indicated by this status code. The ttrc argument is the status code received during an operation. |
|
tt_thread_procid(3) -- identify the default process for the currently active thread
|
|
The tt_thread_procid function returns the current default procid for the currently-active thread. If there is no default procid set for the thread, then the process default procid is returned. |
|
tt_thread_procid_set(3) -- set the default procid for the currently active thread
|
|
The tt_thread_procid_set function sets the default procid for the currently active thread. The default procid is an implicit argument to most ToolTalk API calls. |
|
tt_thread_session(3) -- retrieve the default session identifier for the currently active thread
|
|
The tt_thread_session function retrieves the default session identifier for the currently active thread. If there is no default session set for the currently-active thread, then the process default session identifier is returned. A session can have more than one session identifier. This means, for example, that the application cannot compare the result of tt_thread_session with the result of tt_me... |
|
tt_thread_session_set(3) -- set the default session identifier for the current thread
|
|
The tt_thread_session_set function sets the default session identifier for the currently active thread. The ToolTalk service uses the initial user session as the default session and supports one session per procid. The application can make this call before it calls tt_open to specify which session it wants to connect to in the active thread. To change to another opened session, the application mus... |
|
tt_trace_control(3) -- control client-side tracing
|
|
The tt_trace_control function sets or clears an internal flag controlling all client-side tracing. The intent of this is to be called from debugger breakpoints, allowing a programmer to narrow the trace to the suspect area. The value of the onoff argument affects tracing as follows: 0 Tracing is turned off. 1 Tracing is turned on. -1 Tracing is turned on if it was off and vice-versa. |
|
tt_xcontext_join(3) -- add an XDR-interpreted byte-array to the list of values
|
|
The tt_xcontext_join function adds the given XDR-interpreted bytearray value to the list of values for the named contexts of all patterns. The slotname argument describes the slotname in this message. The xdr_proc argument points to the XDR procedure to be used to serialize the data pointed to by value. The value argument is the data to be serialized. |
|
tt_xcontext_quit(3) -- remove an XDR-interpreted byte-array value from the list of values
|
|
The tt_xcontext_quit function removes the given XDR-interpreted bytearray value from the list of values for the contexts of all patterns. The slotname argument describes the slotname in this message. The xdr_proc argument points to the XDR procedure to be used to serialize the data pointed to by value. The value argument is the data to be serialized. |
|
tt_X_session(3) -- return the session associated with an X window system display
|
|
The tt_X_session function returns the session associated with the named X window system display. The application can call tt_X_session before it calls tt_open(3). The xdisplaystring argument is the name of an X display server; for example, somehost:0 or :0. |
|
t_accept(3) -- accept a connect request
|
|
The t_accept() function is issued by a transport user to accept a connect request. fd identifies the local transport endpoint where the connect indication arrived. resfd specifies the local transport endpoint where the connection is to be established. call contains information required by the transport provider to complete the connection. The parameter call points to a t_call structure which conta... |
|
t_alloc(3) -- allocate a library structure
|
|
The t_alloc() function dynamically allocates memory for the various transport function argument structures as specified below. This function will allocate memory for the specified structure and will also allocate memory for buffers referenced by the structure. The structure to allocate is specified by struct_type and must be one of the following: T_BIND struct t_bind T_CALL struct t_call T_OPTMGMT... |
|
t_bind(3) -- bind an address to a transport endpoint
|
|
The t_bind() function associates a protocol address with the transport endpoint specified by fd and activates that transport endpoint. In connection mode, the transport provider may begin enqueuing incoming connect indications or servicing a connection request on the transport endpoint. In connectionless mode, the transport user may send or receive data units through the transport endpoint. The re... |
|
t_close(3) -- close a transport endpoint
|
|
The t_close() function informs the transport provider that the user is finished with the transport endpoint specified by fd, and frees any local library resources associated with the endpoint. t_close() also closes the file descriptor associated with the transport endpoint. t_close() should be called from the T_UNBND state (see t_getstate(3)). However, this function does not check state informatio... |
|
t_connect(3) -- establish a connection with another transport user
|
|
This function enables a transport user to request a connection to the specified destination transport user. This function can only be issued in the T_IDLE state. fd identifies the local transport endpoint where communication will be established. sndcall and rcvcall point to a t_call structure which contains the following members: struct netbuf addr; struct netbuf opt; struct netbuf udata; int sequ... |
|
t_error(3) -- produce error message
|
|
The t_error() function produces a language-dependent message on the standard error output which describes the last error encountered during a call to a transport function. The argument string errmsg is a user-supplied error message that gives context to the error. The error message is written as follows: First if errmsg is not a null pointer and the character pointed to be errmsg is not the null c... |
|
t_free(3) -- free a library structure
|
|
The t_free() function frees memory previously allocated by t_alloc(). This function will free memory for the specified structure and will also free memory for buffers referenced by the structure. The argument ptr points to one of the seven structure types described for t_alloc(). struct_type identifies the type of that structure which must be one of the following: T_BIND struct t_bind T_CALL struc... |
|
t_getinfo(3) -- get protocol-specific service information
|
|
The t_getinfo() function returns the current characteristics of the underlying transport protocol associated with file descriptor fd. The info structure is used to return the same information returned by t_open(). This function enables a transport user to access this information during any phase of communication. This argument points to a t_info structure which contains the following members: t_sc... |
|
t_getprotaddr(3) -- get the protocol address
|
|
The t_getprotaddr() function returns local and remote protocol addresses currently associated with the transport endpoint specified by fd. In boundaddr and peeraddr the user specifies maxlen, which is the maximum size of the address buffer, and buf which points to the buffer where the address is to be placed. On return, the buf field of boundaddr points to the address, if any, currently bound to f... |
|
t_getstate(3) -- get the current state
|
|
The t_getstate() function returns the current state of the provider as seen by the application associated with the transport endpoint specified by fd. |
|
t_listen(3) -- listen for a connect request
|
|
The t_listen() function listens for a connect request from a calling transport user. fd identifies the local transport endpoint where connect indications arrive. On return, call contains information describing the connect indication. The parameter call points to a t_call structure which contains the following members: struct netbuf addr; struct netbuf opt; struct netbuf udata; int sequence; The ty... |
|
t_look(3) -- look at the current event on a transport endpoint
|
|
The t_look() function returns the current event on the transport endpoint specified by fd. This function enables a transport provider to notify a transport user of an asynchronous event when the user is calling functions in synchronous mode. Certain events require immediate notification of the user and are indicated by a specific error, [TLOOK], on the current or next function to be executed. This... |
|
t_open(3) -- establish a transport endpoint
|
|
The t_open() function must be called as the first step in the initialization of a transport endpoint. This function establishes a transport endpoint by opening a file that identifies a particular transport provider and returning a file descriptor that identifies that endpoint. The argument name points to a file name that identifies a transport provider. When using HP XTI to connect to the OSI prot... |
|
t_optmgmt(3) -- manage options for a transport endpoint
|
|
The t_optmgmt() function enables a transport user to retrieve, verify or negotiate protocol options with the transport provider. The argument fd identifies a bound transport endpoint. The req and ret arguments point to a t_optmgmt structure containing the following members: struct netbuf opt; t_scalar_t flags; The opt field identifies protocol options. The flags field is used to specify the action... |
|
t_rcv(3) -- receive data or expedited data sent over a connection
|
|
The t_rcv() function receives either normal or expedited data. fd identifies the local transport endpoint through which data will arrive. buf points to a receive buffer where user data will be placed. nbytes specifies the size of the receive buffer. flags may be set on return from t_rcv() and specifies optional flags as described below. By default, t_rcv() operates in synchronous mode and will wai... |
|
t_rcvconnect(3) -- receive the confirmation from a connect request
|
|
The t_rcvconnect() function enables a calling transport user to determine the status of a previously sent connect request. t_rcvconnect() is also used in conjunction with t_connect() to establish a connection in asynchronous mode. The connection will be established on successful completion of this function. fd identifies the local transport endpoint where communication will be established. call co... |
|
t_rcvdis(3) -- retrieve information from disconnect
|
|
The t_rcvdis() function is used to identify the cause of a disconnect, and to retrieve any user data sent with the disconnect. fd identifies the local transport endpoint where the connection existed. discon points to a t_discon structure containing the following members: struct netbuf udata; int reason; int sequence; The type netbuf structure is defined in the or header file. Th... |
|
t_rcvrel(3) -- acknowledge receipt of an orderly release indication at a transport endpoint
|
|
The t_rcvrel() function is used in connection-oriented mode to acknowledge receipt of an orderly release indication at a transport endpoint. The released endpoint is specified by fd, which is a file descriptor previously returned by the t_open() function. After receipt of this orderly release indication at the transport endpoint specified by fd, the transport user should not try to receive additio... |
|
t_rcvudata(3) -- receive a data unit from remote transport provider user
|
|
The t_rcvudata() function is used in connectionless-mode to receive a data unit from a remote transport provider user. The argument fd identifies the local transport endpoint through which data will be received. unitdata holds information associated with the received data unit. flags is set on return to indicate that the complete data unit was not received. The argument unitdata points to a t_unit... |
|
t_rcvuderr(3) -- receive a unit data error indication
|
|
The t_rcvuderr() function is used in connectionless mode to receive information concerning an error on a previously sent data unit. This function should only be issued following a unit data error indication. It informs the transport user that a data unit with a specific destination address and protocol options produced an error. The argument fd identifies the local transport endpoint through which... |
|
t_snd(3) -- send data or expedited data over a connection
|
|
This function is used to send either normal or expedited data. fd identifies the local transport endpoint over which data should be sent, buf points to the user data, nbytes specifies the number of bytes of user data to be sent, and flags specifies any optional flags described below: T_EXPEDITED if set in flags, the data will be sent as expedited data and will be subject to the interpretations of ... |
|
t_snddis(3) -- send user-initiated disconnect request
|
|
The t_snddis() function is used to initiate an abortive release on an already established connection or to reject a connect request. fd identifies the local transport endpoint of the connection, and call specifies information associated with the abortive release. call points to a t_call structure which contains the following members: struct netbuf addr; struct netbuf opt; struct netbuf udata; int ... |
|
t_sndrel(3) -- initiate an orderly release
|
|
The t_sndrel() function is used in connection-oriented mode to initiate an orderly release at a transport endpoint specified by fd, which is a file descriptor previously returned by the t_open() function. After this orderly release is indicated, the transport user should not try to send more data through that transport endpoint. An attempt to send more data to a released transport endpoint may blo... |
|
t_sndudata(3) -- send a data unit
|
|
The t_sndudata() function is used in connectionless mode to send a data unit to another transport user. The argument fd identifies the local transport endpoint through which data is sent. The argument unitdata points to a type t_unitdata structure used to specify a data unit being sent through the transport endpoint specified by the fd parameter. The t_unitdata structure has the following members:... |
|
t_strerror(3) -- produce an error message string
|
|
The t_strerror() function maps the error number in errnum that corresponds to an XTI error to a language-dependent error message string and returns a pointer to the string. The string pointed to will not be modified by the program, but may be overwritten by a subsequent call to the t_strerror() function. The string is not terminated by a newline character. The language for error message strings wr... |
|
t_sync(3) -- synchronize transport library
|
|
For the transport endpoint specified by fd, the t_sync() function synchronizes the data structures managed by the transport library with information from the underlying transport provider. In doing so, it can convert an uninitialized file descriptor (obtained via open(), dup() or as a result of a fork() and exec()) to an initialized endpoint, assuming that the file descriptor referenced a transpor... |
|
t_unbind(3) -- disable a transport endpoint
|
|
The t_unbind() function disables the transport endpoint specified by fd which was previously bound by t_bind(). On completion of this call, no further data or events destined for this transport endpoint will be accepted by the transport provider. |
|
uc_access(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
Uil(3) -- Invokes the UIL compiler from within an application
|
|
The Uil function provides a callable entry point for the UIL compiler. The Uil callable interface can be used to process a UIL source file and to generate UID files, as well as return a detailed description of the UIL source module in the form of a symbol table (parse tree). command_desc Specifies the uil command line. compile_desc Returns the results of the compilation. message_cb Specifies a cal... |
|
UilDumpSymbolTable(3) -- Dumps the contents of a named UIL symbol table to standard output
|
|
The UilDumpSymbolTable function dumps the contents of a UIL symbol table pointer to standard output. root_ptr Specifies a pointer to the the symbol table root entry. This value can be taken from the parse_tree_root part of the Uil_compile_desc_type data structure returned by Uil. By following the link from the root entry, you can traverse the entire parse tree. Symbol table entries are in the foll... |
|
VendorShell(3) -- The VendorShell widget class
|
|
VendorShell is a Motif widget class used as a supporting superclass for all shell classes that are visible to the window manager and that are not override redirect. It contains resources that describe the MWM-specific look and feel. It also manages the MWM-specific communication needed by all VendorShell subclasses. See the mwm reference page for more information. If an application uses the XmNmwm... |
|
VirtualBindings(3) -- Bindings for virtual mouse and key events
|
|
The Motif reference pages describe key translations in terms of virtual bindings, based on those described in the Motif Style Guide. |
|
WMShell(3) -- The WMShell widget class
|
|
WMShell is a top-level widget that encapsulates the interaction with the window manager. |
|
XmActivateProtocol(3) -- A VendorShell function that activates a protocol
|
|
XmActivateProtocol activates a protocol. It updates the handlers and the property if the shell is realized. It is sometimes useful to allow a protocol's state information (callback lists, and so on) to persist, even though the client may choose to temporarily resign from the interaction. This is supported by allowing a protocol to be in one of two states: active or inactive. If the protocol is ac... |
|
XmActivateWMProtocol(3) -- A VendorShell convenience interface that activates a protocol
|
|
XmActivateWMProtocol is a convenience interface. It calls XmActivateProtocol with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. shell Specifies the widget with which the protocol property is associated protocol Specifies the protocol Atom For a complete definition of VendorShell and its associated resources, see VendorShell(3). |
|
XmAddProtocolCallback(3) -- A VendorShell function that adds client callbacks for a protocol
|
|
XmAddProtocolCallback adds client callbacks for a protocol. It checks if the protocol is registered, and if it is not, calls XmAddProtocols. It then adds the callback to the internal list. These callbacks are called when the corresponding client message is received. XmAddWMProtocolCallback is a convenience interface. It calls XmAddProtocolCallback with the property value set to the atom returned b... |
|
XmAddProtocols(3) -- A VendorShell function that adds the protocols to the protocol manager and allocates the internal tables
|
|
XmAddProtocols adds the protocols to the protocol manager and allocates the internal tables. XmAddWMProtocols is a convenience interface. It calls XmAddProtocols with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. shell Specifies the widget with which the protocol property is associated property Specifies the protocol property protocols Specifies the protocol Atoms num_prot... |
|
XmAddTabGroup(3) -- A function that adds a manager or a primitive widget to the list of tab groups
|
|
This function is obsolete and its behavior is replaced by setting XmNnavigationType to XmEXCLUSIVE_TAB_GROUP. When the keyboard is used to traverse through a widget hierarchy, primitive or manager widgets are grouped together into what are known as tab groups. Any manager or primitive widget can be a tab group. Within a tab group, move the focus to the next widget in the tab group by using the arr... |
|
XmAddToPostFromList(3) -- a RowColumn function that makes a menu accessible from more than one widget
|
|
XmAddToPostFromList makes a menu accessible from more than one widget. After a menu is once created, this function may be used to make that menu accessible from a second widget. The process may be repeated indefinitely. In other words, where an application would use XmCreatePopupMenu or XmCreatePulldownMenu or their equivalent to create a new menu identical to one that already exists, it can use t... |
|
XmAddWMProtocolCallback(3) -- A VendorShell convenience interface that adds client callbacks for a protocol
|
|
XmAddWMProtocolCallback is a convenience interface. It calls XmAddProtocolCallback with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. shell Specifies the widget with which the protocol property is associated protocol Specifies the protocol Atom callback Specifies the procedure to call when a protocol message is received closure Specifies the client data to be passed to the... |
|
XmAddWMProtocols(3) -- A VendorShell convenience interface that adds the protocols to the protocol manager and allocates the internal
|
|
XmAddWMProtocols is a convenience interface. It calls XmAddProtocols with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. shell Specifies the widget with which the protocol property is associated protocols Specifies the protocol Atoms num_protocols Specifies the number of elements in protocols For a complete definition of VendorShell and its associated resources, see VendorS... |
|
XmArrowButton(3) -- The ArrowButton widget class
|
|
ArrowButton consists of a directional arrow surrounded by a border shadow. When it is selected, the shadow changes to give the appearance that the ArrowButton has been pressed in. When the ArrowButton is unselected, the shadow reverts to give the appearance that the ArrowButton is released, or out. ArrowButton holds the XmQTactivatable trait. |
|
XmArrowButtonGadget(3) -- The ArrowButtonGadget widget class
|
|
ArrowButtonGadget consists of a directional arrow surrounded by a border shadow. When it is selected, the shadow changes to give the appearance that the ArrowButtonGadget has been pressed in. When it is unselected, the shadow reverts to give the appearance that the button is released, or out. ArrowButtonGadget holds the XmQTactivatable trait. |
|
XmBulletinBoard(3) -- The BulletinBoard widget class
|
|
BulletinBoard is a composite widget that provides simple geometry management for child widgets. It does not force positioning on its children, but can be set to reject geometry requests that result in overlapping children. BulletinBoard is the base widget for most dialog widgets and is also used as a general container widget. Modal and modeless dialogs are implemented as collections of widgets tha... |
|
XmCascadeButton(3) -- The CascadeButton widget class
|
|
CascadeButton links two menu panes or a MenuBar to a menu pane. It is used in menu systems and must have a RowColumn parent with its XmNrowColumnType resource set to XmMENU_BAR, XmMENU_POPUP or XmMENU_PULLDOWN. It is the only widget that can have a Pulldown menu pane attached to it as a submenu. The submenu is displayed when this widget is activated within a MenuBar, a PopupMenu, or a PulldownMenu... |
|
XmCascadeButtonGadget(3) -- The CascadeButtonGadget widget class
|
|
CascadeButtonGadget links two menu panes, a MenuBar to a menu pane, or an OptionMenu to a menu pane. It is used in menu systems and must have a RowColumn parent with its XmNrowColumnType resource set to XmMENU_BAR, XmMENU_POPUP, XmMENU_PULLDOWN, or XmMENU_OPTION. It is the only gadget that can have a Pulldown menu pane attached to it as a submenu. The submenu is displayed when this gadget is activ... |
|
XmCascadeButtonGadgetHighlight(3) -- A CascadeButtonGadget function that sets the highlight state
|
|
XmCascadeButtonGadgetHighlight either draws or erases the shadow highlight around the CascadeButtonGadget. cascadeButtonGadget Specifies the CascadeButtonGadget to be highlighted or unhighlighted highlight Specifies whether to highlight (True) or to unhighlight (False) For a complete definition of CascadeButtonGadget and its associated resources, see XmCascadeButtonGadget(3). |
|
XmCascadeButtonHighlight(3) -- A CascadeButton and CascadeButtonGadget function that sets the highlight state
|
|
XmCascadeButtonHighlight either draws or erases the shadow highlight around the CascadeButton or the CascadeButtonGadget. cascadeButton Specifies the CascadeButton or CascadeButtonGadget to be highlighted or unhighlighted highlight Specifies whether to highlight (True) or to unhighlight (False) For a complete definition of CascadeButton or CascadeButtonGadget and their associated resources, see Xm... |
|
XmChangeColor(3) -- Recalculates all associated colors of a widget
|
|
XmChangeColor handles all color modifications for the specified widget when a new background pixel value is specified. This function recalculates the foreground, select, and shadow colors based on the new background color and sets the corresponding resources for the widget. If a color calculation procedure has been set by a call to XmSetColorCalculation, XmChangeColor uses that procedure to calcul... |
|
XmClipboardCancelCopy(3) -- A clipboard function that cancels a copy to the clipboard
|
|
XmClipboardCancelCopy cancels the copy to clipboard that is in progress and frees up temporary storage. When a copy is to be performed, XmClipboardStartCopy allocates temporary storage for the clipboard data. XmClipboardCopy copies the appropriate data into the the temporary storage. XmClipboardEndCopy copies the data to the clipboard structure and frees up the temporary storage structures. If XmC... |
|
XmClipboardCopy(3) -- A clipboard function that copies a data item to temporary storage for later copying to clipboard
|
|
XmClipboardCopy copies a data item to temporary storage. The data item is moved from temporary storage to the clipboard data structure when a call to XmClipboardEndCopy is made. Additional calls to XmClipboardCopy before a call to XmClipboardEndCopy add additional data item formats to the same data item or append data to an existing format. Formats are described in the Inter-Client Communication C... |
|
XmClipboardCopyByName(3) -- A clipboard function that copies a data item passed by name
|
|
XmClipboardCopyByName copies the actual data for a data item that was previously passed by name to the clipboard. Data is considered to be passed by name when a call to XmClipboardCopy is made with a NULL buffer parameter. Additional calls to this function append new data to the existing data. display Specifies a pointer to the Display structure that was returned in a previous call to XOpenDisplay... |
|
XmClipboardEndCopy(3) -- A clipboard function that completes the copying of data to the clipboard
|
|
XmClipboardEndCopy locks the clipboard from access by other applications, places data in the clipboard data structure, and unlocks the clipboard. Data items copied to the clipboard by XmClipboardCopy are not actually entered in the clipboard data structure until the call to XmClipboardEndCopy. This function also frees up temporary storage that was allocated by XmClipboardStartCopy, which must be c... |
|
XmClipboardEndRetrieve(3) -- A clipboard function that completes retrieval of data from the clipboard
|
|
XmClipboardEndRetrieve suspends copying data incrementally from the clipboard. It tells the clipboard routines that the application is through copying an item from the clipboard. Until this function is called, data items can be retrieved incrementally from the clipboard with XmClipboardRetrieve. The act of copying data is started with the XmClipboardStartRetrieve function. display Specifies a poin... |
|
XmClipboardInquireCount(3) -- A clipboard function that returns the number of data item formats
|
|
XmClipboardInquireCount returns the number of data item formats available for the data item in the clipboard. This function also returns the maximum name-length for all formats in which the data item is stored. display Specifies a pointer to the Display structure that was returned in a previous call to XOpenDisplay or XtDisplay. window Specifies the window ID of a widget that relates the applicati... |
|
XmClipboardInquireFormat(3) -- A clipboard function that returns a specified format name
|
|
XmClipboardInquireFormat returns a specified format name for the data item in the clipboard. If the name must be truncated, the function returns a warning status. display Specifies a pointer to the Display structure that was returned in a previous call to XOpenDisplay or XtDisplay. window Specifies the window ID of a widget that relates the application window to the clipboard. The widget's window... |
|
XmClipboardInquireLength(3) -- A clipboard function that returns the length of the stored data
|
|
XmClipboardInquireLength returns the length of the data stored under a specified format name for the clipboard data item. If no data is found for the specified format, or if there is no item on the clipboard, this function returns a value of 0 (zero) in the length argument. Any format passed by name is assumed to have length passed in a call to XmClipboardCopy, even though the data has not yet bee... |
|
XmClipboardInquirePendingItems(3) -- A clipboard function that returns a list of data ID/private ID pairs
|
|
XmClipboardInquirePendingItems returns a list of data ID/private ID pairs for the specified format name. A data item is considered pending if the application originally passed it by name, the application has not yet copied the data, and the item has not been deleted from the clipboard. The application is responsible for freeing the memory provided by this function to store the list. To free the me... |
|
XmClipboardLock(3) -- A clipboard function that locks the clipboard
|
|
XmClipboardLock locks the clipboard from access by another application until XmClipboardUnlock is called. All clipboard functions lock and unlock the clipboard to prevent simultaneous access. This function allows the application to keep the clipboard data from changing between calls to Inquire and other clipboard functions. The application does not need to lock the clipboard between calls to XmCli... |
|
XmClipboardRegisterFormat(3) -- A clipboard function that registers a new format
|
|
XmClipboardRegisterFormat registers a new format. Each format stored on the clipboard should have a length associated with it; this length must be known to the clipboard routines. Formats are known as targets in the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual (ICCCM). All of the formats specified by version 1.1 of the ICCCM conventions are preregistered. Any other format that the application wan... |
|
XmClipboardRetrieve(3) -- A clipboard function that retrieves a data item from the clipboard
|
|
XmClipboardRetrieve retrieves the current data item from clipboard storage. It returns a warning if the clipboard is locked, if there is no data on the clipboard, or if the data needs to be truncated because the buffer length is too short. Between a call to XmClipboardStartRetrieve and a call to XmClipboardEndRetrieve, multiple calls to XmClipboardRetrieve with the same format name result in data ... |
|
XmClipboardStartCopy(3) -- A clipboard function that sets up a storage and data structure
|
|
XmClipboardStartCopy sets up storage and data structures to receive clipboard data. An application calls this function during a cut or copy operation. The data item that these structures receive then becomes the next data item in the clipboard. Copying a large piece of data to the clipboard can take a long time. It is possible that, once the data is copied, no application will ever request that da... |
|
XmClipboardStartRetrieve(3) -- A clipboard function that prepares to retrieve data from the clipboard
|
|
XmClipboardStartRetrieve tells the clipboard routines that the application is ready to start copying an item from the clipboard. The clipboard is locked by this routine and stays locked until XmClipboardEndRetrieve is called. Between a call to XmClipboardStartRetrieve and a call to XmClipboardEndRetrieve, multiple calls to XmClipboardRetrieve with the same format name result in data being incremen... |
|
XmClipboardUndoCopy(3) -- A clipboard function that deletes the last item placed on the clipboard
|
|
XmClipboardUndoCopy deletes the last item placed on the clipboard if the item was placed there by an application with the passed display and window arguments. Any data item deleted from the clipboard by the original call to XmClipboardCopy is restored. If the display or window IDs do not match the last copied item, no action is taken, and this function has no effect. display Specifies a pointer to... |
|
XmClipboardUnlock(3) -- A clipboard function that unlocks the clipboard
|
|
XmClipboardUnlock unlocks the clipboard, enabling it to be accessed by other applications. If multiple calls to XmClipboardLock have occurred, the same number of calls to XmClipboardUnlock is necessary to unlock the clipboard, unless remove_all_locks is set to True. display Specifies a pointer to the Display structure that was returned in a previous call to XOpenDisplay or XtDisplay. window Specif... |
|
XmClipboardWithdrawFormat(3) -- A clipboard function that indicates that the application no longer wants to supply a data item
|
|
XmClipboardWithdrawFormat indicates that the application no longer supplies a data item to the clipboard that the application had previously passed by name. display Specifies a pointer to the Display structure that was returned in a previous call to XOpenDisplay or XtDisplay. window Specifies the window ID of a widget that relates the application window to the clipboard. The widget's window ID ca... |
|
XmComboBox(3) -- The ComboBox widget class
|
|
XmComboBox combines the capabilities of a single-line TextField widget and a List widget. It allows users to perform opoerations like typing and pasting information, and it also provides a list of possible choices that the user can select from to complete the TextField entry field. The list can either be displayed at all times or can be dropped down by the user. When the list portion of the ComboB... |
|
XmComboBoxAddItem(3) -- add an item to the ComboBox widget
|
|
The XmComboBoxAddItem function adds the given item to the XmComboBox at the given position. The w argument specifies the XmComboBox widget ID. The item argument specifies the XmString for the new item. The pos argument specifies the position of the new item. The unique argument specifies if this item should duplicate an identical item or not. |
|
XmComboBoxDeletePos(3) -- Delete a XmComboBox item
|
|
The XmComboBoxDeletePos function deletes a specified item from a XmComboBox widget. The w argument specifies the XmComboBox widget ID. The pos argument specifies the position of the item to be deleted. |
|
XmComboBoxSelectItem(3) -- select a XmComboBox item
|
|
The XmComboBoxSelectItem function selects an item in the XmList of the XmComboBox widget. The w argument specifies the XmComboBox widget ID. The item argument specifies the XmString of the item to be selected. If the item is not found on the list, XmComboBoxSelectItem notifies the user via the XtWarning function. |
|
XmComboBoxSetItem(3) -- set an item in the XmComboBox list
|
|
The XmComboBoxSetItem function selects an item in the XmList of the given XmComboBox widget and makes it the first visible item in the list. The w argument specifies the XmComboBox widget ID. The item argument specifies the XmString for the item to be set in the XmComboBox. If the item is not found on the list, XmComboBoxSetItem notifies the user via the XtWarning function. |
|
XmComboBoxUpdate(3) -- A ComboBox function that resynchronizes data
|
|
XmComboBoxUpdate resynchronizes the internal data structures of a specified ComboBox widget. This function is useful when an application manipulates ComboBox's child widgets, possibly changing data structures. For example, you might want to use the XmComboBoxUpdate function after a ComboBox List child selection has been changed without notification. widget Specifies the ComboBox widget ID. |
|
XmCommand(3) -- The Command widget class
|
|
Command is a special-purpose composite widget for command entry that provides a built-in command-history mechanism. Command includes a command-line text-input field, a command-line prompt, and a commandhistory list region. One additional WorkArea child may be added to the Command after creation. Whenever a command is entered, it is automatically added to the end of the command-history list and mad... |
|
XmCommandAppendValue(3) -- A Command function that appends the passed XmString to the end of the string displayed in the command area of
|
|
XmCommandAppendValue appends the passed XmString to the end of the string displayed in the command area of the Command widget. widget Specifies the Command widget ID command Specifies the passed XmString For a complete definition of Command and its associated resources, see XmCommand(3). |
|
XmCommandError(3) -- A Command function that displays an error message
|
|
XmCommandError displays an error message in the history area of the Command widget. The XmString error is displayed until the next command entered occurs. widget Specifies the Command widget ID error Specifies the passed XmString For a complete definition of Command and its associated resources, see XmCommand(3). |
|
XmCommandGetChild(3) -- A Command function that is used to access a component
|
|
XmCommandGetChild is used to access a component within a Command. The parameters given to the function are the Command widget and a value indicating which component to access. widget Specifies the Command widget ID. child Specifies a component within the Command. The following values are legal for this parameter: + XmDIALOG_COMMAND_TEXT + XmDIALOG_PROMPT_LABEL + XmDIALOG_HISTORY_LIST + XmDIALOG_WO... |
|
XmCommandSetValue(3) -- A Command function that replaces a displayed string
|
|
XmCommandSetValue replaces the string displayed in the command area of the Command widget with the passed XmString. widget Specifies the Command widget ID command Specifies the passed XmString For a complete definition of Command and its associated resources, see XmCommand(3). |
|
XmContainer(3) -- The Container widget class
|
|
Container manages child widgets that have the ContainerItem trait. These child widgets can be viewed in several different layout formats, selected using different selection types and techniques, and directly manipulated by the user. Three different formats or views are supported by the Container. They are specified via the XmNentryViewType resource: + XmLARGE_ICON + XmSMALL_ICON + XmANY_ICON Three... |
|
XmContainerCopy(3) -- Container widget function to copy primary selection to the clipboard
|
|
XmContainerCopy copies the primary selected container items to the clipboard. This routine calls the XmNconvertCallback procedures, possibly multiple times, with the selection member of the XmConvertCallbackStruct set to CLIPBOARD and with the parm member set to XmCOPY. container Specifies the Container widget ID. timestamp Specifies the server time at which to modify the selection value. For a co... |
|
XmContainerCopyLink(3) -- Container widget function to copy links to the clipboard
|
|
XmContainerCopyLink copies links to the primary selected items to the clipboard. This routine calls the XmNconvertCallback procedures, possibly multiple times, with the selection member of the XmConvertCallbackStruct set to CLIPBOARD and with the parm member set to XmLINK. The Container widget itself does not copy any links; XmNconvertCallback procedures are responsible for copying the link to the... |
|
XmContainerCut(3) -- Container widget function to move items to the clipboard
|
|
XmContainerCut cuts the primary selected items to the clipboard. This routine calls the XmNconvertCallback procedures, possibly multiple times, with the selection member of the XmConvertCallbackStruct set to CLIPBOARD and with the parm member set to XmMOVE. If the transfer is successful, this routine then calls the XmNconvertCallback procedures for the CLIPBOARD selection and the DELETE target. co... |
|
XmContainerGetItemChildren(3) -- Container widget function to find all children of an item
|
|
XmContainerGetItemChildren allocates a WidgetList and stores within it the widget IDs of all widgets that have item specified as the value of their XmNentryParent resource. The application programmer is responsible for freeing the allocated WidgetList using XtFree. The number of widget IDs returned in item_children is returned by the function. If no widgets specify item as the value of their XmNen... |
|
XmContainerPaste(3) -- Container widget function to insert items from the clipboard
|
|
XmContainerPaste requests data transfer from the clipboard selection to the Container. This routine calls the widget's XmNdestinationCallback procedures with the selection member of the XmDestinationCallbackStruct set to CLIPBOARD and with the operation member set to XmCOPY. The Container widget itself performs no transfers; the XmNdestinationCallback procedures are responsible for inserting the ... |
|
XmContainerPasteLink(3) -- Container widget function to insert links from the clipboard
|
|
XmContainerPasteLink requests data transfer from the clipboard selection to the Container. This routine calls the widget's XmNdestinationCallback procedures with the selection member of the XmDestinationCallbackStruct set to CLIPBOARD and with the operation member set to XmLINK. The Container widget itself performs no transfers; the XmNdestinationCallback procedures are responsible for inserting ... |
|
XmContainerRelayout(3) -- Container widget relayout function
|
|
XmContainerRelayout forces a layout of all items in the Container using the XmNpositionIndex and XmNentryParent constraint resources associated with each item. container Specifies the Container widget ID. For a complete definition of Container and its associated resources, see XmContainer(3). |
|
XmContainerReorder(3) -- Container widget function to reorder children
|
|
XmContainerReorder obtains the XmNpositionIndex constraint resources of each widget specified in widgets, sorts them in ascending order, and inserts the XmNpositionIndex constraint resources in the new order into each widget. If the XmNlayoutType resource of Container is XmOUTLINE or XmDETAIL, XmContainerReorder will force a layout of all items. container Specifies the Container widget ID. widgets... |
|
XmConvertStringToUnits(3) -- A function that converts a string specification to a unit value
|
|
XmConvertStringToUnits converts a string specification value and returns the converted value as the return value from the function. This function uses the specified screen's resolution to compute the number of units for the string specification. screen Specifies the screen whose resolution is to be used for the computation. spec Specifies the string, in format, to be conver... |
|
XmConvertUnits(3) -- A function that converts a value in one unit type to another unit type
|
|
XmConvertUnits converts the value and returns it as the return value from the function. For resources of type, dimension, or position, you can specify units using the syntax described in the XmNunitType resource of the XmPrimitive reference page. widget Specifies the widget for which the data is to be converted. orientation Specifies whether the converter uses the horizontal or vertical screen res... |
|
XmCreateArrowButton(3) -- The ArrowButton widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateArrowButton creates an instance of an ArrowButton widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of ArrowButton and its associated resources, see XmArrowButton(3)... |
|
XmCreateArrowButtonGadget(3) -- The ArrowButtonGadget creation function
|
|
XmCreateArrowButtonGadget creates an instance of an ArrowButtonGadget widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of ArrowButtonGadget and its associated resources, se... |
|
XmCreateBulletinBoard(3) -- The BulletinBoard widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateBulletinBoard creates an instance of a BulletinBoard widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of BulletinBoard and its associated resources, see XmBulletinB... |
|
XmCreateBulletinBoardDialog(3) -- The BulletinBoard BulletinBoardDialog convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateBulletinBoardDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged BulletinBoard child of the DialogShell. A BulletinBoardDialog is used for interactions not supported by the standard dialog set. This function does not automatically create any labels, buttons, or other dialog components. Such components should be added by the application after the BulletinBo... |
|
XmCreateCascadeButton(3) -- The CascadeButton widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateCascadeButton creates an instance of a CascadeButton widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID. The parent must be a RowColumn widget. name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of CascadeButton and i... |
|
XmCreateCascadeButtonGadget(3) -- The CascadeButtonGadget creation function
|
|
XmCreateCascadeButtonGadget creates an instance of a CascadeButtonGadget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID. The parent must be a RowColumn widget. name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of CascadeButtonG... |
|
XmCreateComboBox(3) -- The default ComboBox widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateComboBox creates an instance of a ComboBox widget of XmNcomboBoxType XmCOMBO_BOX and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID. name Specifies the name of the created widget. arglist Specifies the argument list. arg_count Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist). For a complete definition of ComboBox and its associated resou... |
|
XmCreateCommand(3) -- The Command widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateCommand creates an instance of a Command widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of Command and its associated resources, see XmCommand(3). |
|
XmCreateCommandDialog(3) -- The Command CommandDialog convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateCommandDialog is a convenience function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged Command child of the DialogShell. A CommandDialog is used for entering commands for processing. Use XtManageChild to pop up the CommandDialog (passing the Command as the widget parameter); use XtUnmanageChild to pop it down. XmCreateCommandDialog forces the value of the Shell resource XmNallowShellResize to... |
|
XmCreateContainer(3) -- The Container widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateContainer creates an instance of a Container widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID. name Specifies the name of the created widget. arglist Specifies the argument list. argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist). For a complete definition of Container and its associated resources, see XmContainer(3). |
|
XmCreateDialogShell(3) -- The DialogShell widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateDialogShell creates an instance of a DialogShell widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of DialogShell and its associated resources, see XmDialogShell(3). |
|
XmCreateDragIcon(3) -- A Drag and Drop function that creates a DragIcon widget
|
|
XmCreateDragIcon creates a DragIcon and returns the associated widget ID. widget Specifies the ID of the widget that the function uses to access default values for visual attributes of the DragIcon. This widget may be different than the actual parent of the DragIcon. name Specifies the name of the DragIcon widget. arglist Specifies the argument list. argcount Specifies the number of attribute/valu... |
|
XmCreateDrawingArea(3) -- The DrawingArea widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateDrawingArea creates an instance of a DrawingArea widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of DrawingArea and its associated resources, see XmDrawingArea(3). |
|
XmCreateDrawnButton(3) -- The DrawnButton widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateDrawnButton creates an instance of a DrawnButton widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of DrawnButton and its associated resources, see XmDrawnButton(3). |
|
XmCreateDropDownComboBox(3) -- The Drop-down ComboBox widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateDropDownComboBox creates an instance of a ComboBox widget of XmNcomboBoxType XmDROP_DOWN_COMBO_BOX and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID. name Specifies the name of the created widget. arglist Specifies the argument list. arg_count Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist). For a complete definition of ComboBox and it... |
|
XmCreateDropDownList(3) -- The Drop-down list ComboBox widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateDropDownList creates an instance of a ComboBox widget of XmNcomboBoxType XmDROP_DOWN_LIST and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID. name Specifies the name of the created widget. arglist Specifies the argument list. arg_count Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist). For a complete definition of ComboBox and its associa... |
|
XmCreateErrorDialog(3) -- The MessageBox ErrorDialog convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateErrorDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged MessageBox child of the DialogShell. An ErrorDialog warns the user of an invalid or potentially dangerous condition. It includes a symbol, a message, and three buttons. The default symbol is an octagon with a diagonal slash. The default button labels are OK, Cancel, and Help. Use XtManageChild to pop... |
|
XmCreateFileSelectionBox(3) -- The FileSelectionBox widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateFileSelectionBox creates an unmanaged FileSelectionBox. A FileSelectionBox is used to select a file and includes the following: + An editable text field for the directory mask + A scrolling list of filenames + An editable text field for the selected file + Labels for the list and text fields + Four buttons The default button labels are OK, Filter, Cancel, and Help. Additional work area chi... |
|
XmCreateFileSelectionDialog(3) -- The FileSelectionBox FileSelectionDialog convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateFileSelectionDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged FileSelectionBox child of the DialogShell. A FileSelectionDialog selects a file. It includes the following: + An editable text field for the directory mask + A scrolling list of filenames + An editable text field for the selected file + Labels for the list and text fields + Four buttons The d... |
|
XmCreateForm(3) -- The Form widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateForm creates an instance of a Form widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of Form and its associated resources, see XmForm(3). |
|
XmCreateFormDialog(3) -- A Form FormDialog convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateFormDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged Form child of the DialogShell. A FormDialog is used for interactions not supported by the standard dialog set. This function does not automatically create any labels, buttons, or other dialog components. Such components should be added by the application after the FormDialog is created. Use XtManageCh... |
|
XmCreateFrame(3) -- The Frame widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateFrame creates an instance of a Frame widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of Frame and its associated resources, see XmFrame(3). |
|
XmCreateIconGadget(3) -- The IconGadget widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateIconGadget creates an instance of an IconGadget widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID. name Specifies the name of the created widget. arglist Specifies the argument list. argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist). For a complete definition of IconGadget and its associated resources, see XmIconGadget(3)... |
|
XmCreateInformationDialog(3) -- The MessageBox InformationDialog convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateInformationDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged MessageBox child of the DialogShell. An InformationDialog gives the user information, such as the status of an action. It includes a symbol, a message, and three buttons. The default symbol is i. The default button labels are OK, Cancel, and Help. Use XtManageChild to pop up the InformationDial... |
|
XmCreateLabel(3) -- The Label widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateLabel creates an instance of a Label widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of Label and its associated resources, see XmLabel(3). |
|
XmCreateLabelGadget(3) -- The LabelGadget creation function
|
|
XmCreateLabelGadget creates an instance of a LabelGadget widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of LabelGadget and its associated resources, see XmLabelGadget(3). |
|
XmCreateList(3) -- The List widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateList creates an instance of a List widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of List and its associated resources, see XmList(3). |
|
XmCreateMainWindow(3) -- The MainWindow widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateMainWindow creates an instance of a MainWindow widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of MainWindow and its associated resources, see XmMainWindow(3). |
|
XmCreateMenuBar(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateMenuBar creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_BAR and returns the associated widget ID. It is provided as a convenience function for creating RowColumn widgets configured to operate as a MenuBar and is not implemented as a separate widget class. The MenuBar widget is generally used for building a Pulldown menu system. Typically, a MenuBar is created and placed along the ... |
|
XmCreateMenuShell(3) -- The MenuShell widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateMenuShell creates an instance of a MenuShell widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of MenuShell and its associated resources, see XmMenuShell(3). |
|
XmCreateMessageBox(3) -- The MessageBox widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateMessageBox creates an unmanaged MessageBox. A MessageBox is used for common interaction tasks, which include giving information, asking questions, and reporting errors. It includes an optional symbol, a message, and three buttons. By default, there is no symbol. The default button labels are OK, Cancel, and Help. If the parent of the MessageBox is a DialogShell, use XtManageChild to pop up... |
|
XmCreateMessageDialog(3) -- The MessageBox MessageDialog convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateMessageDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged MessageBox child of the DialogShell. A MessageDialog is used for common interaction tasks, which include giving information, asking questions, and reporting errors. It includes a symbol, a message, and three buttons. By default, there is no symbol. The default button labels are OK, Cancel, and Help... |
|
XmCreateNotebook(3) -- The Notebook widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateNotebook creates an instance of a Notebook widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID. name Specifies the name of the created widget. arglist Specifies the argument list. argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist). For a complete definition of Notebook and its associated resources, see XmNotebook(3). |
|
XmCreateOptionMenu(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateOptionMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_OPTION and returns the associated widget ID. It is provided as a convenience function for creating a RowColumn widget configured to operate as an OptionMenu and is not implemented as a separate widget class. The OptionMenu widget is a specialized RowColumn manager composed of a label, a selection area, and a single Pulldow... |
|
XmCreatePanedWindow(3) -- The PanedWindow widget creation function
|
|
XmCreatePanedWindow creates an instance of a PanedWindow widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of PanedWindow and its associated resources, see XmPanedWindow(3). |
|
XmCreatePopupMenu(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreatePopupMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_POPUP and returns the associated widget ID. When this function is used to create the Popup menu pane, a MenuShell widget is automatically created as the parent of the menu pane. The parent of the MenuShell widget is the widget indicated by the parent parameter. XmCreatePopupMenu is provided as a convenience function for cre... |
|
XmCreatePromptDialog(3) -- The SelectionBox PromptDialog convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreatePromptDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged SelectionBox child of the DialogShell. A PromptDialog prompts the user for text input. It includes a message, a text input region, and three managed buttons. The default button labels are OK, Cancel, and Help. An additional button, with Apply as the default label, is created unmanaged; it may be exp... |
|
XmCreatePulldownMenu(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreatePulldownMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_PULLDOWN and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (a... |
|
XmCreatePushButton(3) -- The PushButton widget creation function
|
|
XmCreatePushButton creates an instance of a PushButton widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of PushButton and its associated resources, see XmPushButton(3). |
|
XmCreatePushButtonGadget(3) -- The PushButtonGadget creation function
|
|
XmCreatePushButtonGadget creates an instance of a PushButtonGadget widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of PushButtonGadget and its associated resources, see Xm... |
|
XmCreateQuestionDialog(3) -- The MessageBox QuestionDialog convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateQuestionDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged MessageBox child of the DialogShell. A QuestionDialog is used to get the answer to a question from the user. It includes a symbol, a message, and three buttons. The default symbol is a question mark. The default button labels are OK, Cancel, and Help. Use XtManageChild to pop up the QuestionDialog... |
|
XmCreateRadioBox(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateRadioBox creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmWORK_AREA and returns the associated widget ID. Typically, this is a composite widget that contains multiple ToggleButtonGadgets. The RadioBox arbitrates and ensures that at most one ToggleButtonGadget is on at any time. Unless the application supplies other values in the arglist, this function provides initial values for several... |
|
XmCreateRowColumn(3) -- The RowColumn widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateRowColumn creates an instance of a RowColumn widget and returns the associated widget ID. If XmNrowColumnType is not specified, then it is created with XmWORK_AREA, which is the default. If this function is used to create a Popup Menu of type XmMENU_POPUP or a Pulldown Menu of type XmMENU_PULLDOWN, a MenuShell widget is not automatically created as the parent of the menu pane. The applicat... |
|
XmCreateScale(3) -- The Scale widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateScale creates an instance of a Scale widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of Scale and its associated resources, see XmScale(3). |
|
XmCreateScrollBar(3) -- The ScrollBar widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateScrollBar creates an instance of a ScrollBar widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of ScrollBar and its associated resources, see XmScrollBar(3). |
|
XmCreateScrolledList(3) -- The List ScrolledList convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateScrolledList creates an instance of a List widget that is contained within a ScrolledWindow. The ScrolledWindow parent is created managed. All ScrolledWindow subarea widgets are automatically created by this function. The ID returned by this function is that of the List widget (not the ScrolledWindow widget). Use this widget ID for all operations on the List widget. Use the widget ID of th... |
|
XmCreateScrolledText(3) -- The Text ScrolledText convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateScrolledText creates an instance of a Text widget that is contained within a ScrolledWindow. The ScrolledWindow parent is created managed. All ScrolledWindow subarea widgets are automatically created by this function. The ID returned by this function is that of the Text widget (not the ScrolledWindow widget). Use this widget ID for all operations on the Text widget. Use the widget ID of th... |
|
XmCreateScrolledWindow(3) -- The ScrolledWindow widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateScrolledWindow creates an instance of a ScrolledWindow widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of ScrolledWindow and its associated resources, see XmScroll... |
|
XmCreateSelectionBox(3) -- The SelectionBox widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateSelectionBox creates an unmanaged SelectionBox. A SelectionBox is used to get a selection from a list of alternatives from the user and includes the following: + A scrolling list of alternatives + An editable text field for the selected alternative + Labels for the list and text field + Three or four buttons The default button labels are OK, Cancel, and Help. By default, an Apply button is... |
|
XmCreateSelectionDialog(3) -- The SelectionBox SelectionDialog convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateSelectionDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged SelectionBox child of the DialogShell. A SelectionDialog offers the user a choice from a list of alternatives and gets a selection. It includes the following: + A scrolling list of alternatives + An editable text field for the selected alternative + Labels for the text field + Four buttons The de... |
|
XmCreateSeparator(3) -- The Separator widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateSeparator creates an instance of a Separator widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of Separator and its associated resources, see XmSeparator(3). |
|
XmCreateSeparatorGadget(3) -- The SeparatorGadget creation function
|
|
XmCreateSeparatorGadget creates an instance of a SeparatorGadget widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of SeparatorGadget and its associated resources, see XmSep... |
|
XmCreateSimpleCheckBox(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateSimpleCheckBox creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmWORK_AREA and returns the associated widget ID. This routine creates a CheckBox and its ToggleButtonGadget children. A CheckBox is similar to a RadioBox, except that more than one button can be selected at a time. The name of each button is button_n, where n, where n is an integer from 0 (zero) to the number of buttons in t... |
|
XmCreateSimpleMenuBar(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateSimpleMenuBar creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_BAR and returns the associated widget ID. This routine creates a MenuBar and its CascadeButtonGadget children. The name of each button is button_n, where n, where n is an integer from 0 (zero) to the number of buttons in the menu minus 1. Buttons are named and created in the order they are specified in the RowColumn sim... |
|
XmCreateSimpleOptionMenu(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateSimpleOptionMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_OPTION and returns the associated widget ID. This routine creates an OptionMenu and its submenu containing PushButtonGadget or CascadeButtonGadget children. The name of each button is button_n, where n, where n is an integer from 0 (zero) to the number of buttons in the menu minus 1. The name of each separator is sep... |
|
XmCreateSimplePopupMenu(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateSimplePopupMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_POPUP and returns the associated widget ID. This routine creates a Popup menu pane and its button children. The name of each button is button_n, where n, where n is an integer from 0 (zero) to the number of buttons in the menu minus 1. The name of each separator is separator_n, where n, where n is an integer from 0 (z... |
|
XmCreateSimplePulldownMenu(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateSimplePulldownMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_PULLDOWN and returns the associated widget ID. This routine creates a Pulldown menu pane and its button children. The name of each button is button_n, where n, where n is an integer from 0 (zero) to the number of buttons in the menu minus 1. The name of each separator is separator_n, where n, where n is an integer ... |
|
XmCreateSimpleRadioBox(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateSimpleRadioBox creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmWORK_AREA and returns the associated widget ID. This routine creates a RadioBox and its ToggleButtonGadget children. The name of each button is button_n, where n, where n is an integer from 0 (zero) to the number of buttons in the menu minus 1. Buttons are named and created in the order they are specified in the RowColumn s... |
|
XmCreateSimpleSpinBox(3) -- the SimpleSpinBox widget creation function
|
|
The XmCreateSimpleSpinBox function creates an instance of a SpinBox widget and returns the associated widget ID. The parent argument specifies the parent widget ID. The name argument specifies the name of the created widget. The arglist argument specifies the argument list. The argcount argument specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list. |
|
XmCreateSpinBox(3) -- The SpinBox creation function
|
|
XmCreateSpinBox creates a SpinBox widget. This function creates a SpinBox with two arrows, but without any traversable children (choices to spin). The application can create text children to go with this parent SpinBox using XmCreateTextField or XmCreateText. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies t... |
|
XmCreateTemplateDialog(3) -- A MessageBox TemplateDialog convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateTemplateDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged MessageBox child of the DialogShell. The MessageBox widget's XmNdialogType resource is set to XmDIALOG_TEMPLATE. By default, the TemplateDialog widget contains only the separator child. You can build a customized dialog by adding children to the TemplateDialog. You can create the standard Message... |
|
XmCreateText(3) -- The Text widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateText creates an instance of a Text widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of Text and its associated resources, see XmText(3). |
|
XmCreateTextField(3) -- The TextField widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateTextField creates an instance of a TextField widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of TextField and its associated resources, see XmTextField(3). |
|
XmCreateToggleButton(3) -- The ToggleButton widget creation function
|
|
XmCreateToggleButton creates an instance of a ToggleButton widget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of ToggleButton and its associated resources, see XmToggleButton... |
|
XmCreateToggleButtonGadget(3) -- The ToggleButtonGadget creation function
|
|
XmCreateToggleButtonGadget creates an instance of a ToggleButtonGadget and returns the associated widget ID. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of ToggleButtonGadget and its associated resources, see XmT... |
|
XmCreateWarningDialog(3) -- The MessageBox WarningDialog convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateWarningDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged MessageBox child of the DialogShell. A WarningDialog warns users of action consequences and gives them a choice of resolutions. It includes a symbol, a message, and three buttons. The default symbol is an exclamation point. The default button labels are OK, Cancel, and Help. Use XtManageChild to po... |
|
XmCreateWorkArea(3) -- A function that creates a RowColumn WorkArea
|
|
XmCreateWorkArea creates an instance of a RowColumn widget and returns the associated widget ID. The widget is created with XmNrowColumnType set to XmWORK_AREA. parent Specifies the parent widget ID name Specifies the name of the created widget arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of RowC... |
|
XmCreateWorkingDialog(3) -- The MessageBox WorkingDialog convenience creation function
|
|
XmCreateWorkingDialog is a convenience creation function that creates a DialogShell and an unmanaged MessageBox child of the DialogShell. A WorkingDialog informs users that there is a time-consuming operation in progress and allows them to cancel the operation. It includes a symbol, a message, and three buttons. The default symbol is an hourglass. The default button labels are OK, Cancel, and Help... |
|
XmCvtByteStreamToXmString(3) -- A compound string function that converts from a compound string in Byte Stream format to a compound string
|
|
XmCvtByteStreamToXmString converts a stream of bytes representing a compound string in Byte Stream format to a compound string. This routine is typically used by the destination of a data transfer operation to produce a compound string from a transferred Byte Stream representation. property Specifies a compound string representation in Byte Stream format. |
|
XmCvtCTToXmString(3) -- A compound string function that converts compound text to a compound string
|
|
XmCvtCTToXmString converts a (char *) string in compound text format to a compound string. The application must call XtAppInitialize before calling this function. Conversion of compound text to compound strings is implementation dependent. text Specifies a string in compound text format to be converted to a compound string. |
|
XmCvtStringToUnitType(3) -- A function that converts a string to a unittype value
|
|
XmCvtStringToUnitType converts a string to a unit type. Refer to the reference pages for XmGadget, XmManager, or XmPrimitive for a description of the valid unit types. Use of this function as a resource converter is obsolete. It has been replaced by a new resource converter that uses the RepType facility. args Specifies a list of additional XrmValue arguments to the converter if additional context... |
|
XmCvtTextPropertyToXmStringTable(3) -- A function that converts from a TextProperty Structure to a StringTable
|
|
XmCvtTextPropertyToXmStringTable converts the specified XTextProperty structure into an XmStringTable, as follows: + If the encoding member of text_prop is the Atom STRING, each returned XmString has a tag of "ISO8859-1" and a text type of XmCHARSET_TEXT. + If the encoding member of text_prop is the encoding of the current locale, and if that encoding is not STRING, each returned XmString has a ... |
|
XmCvtXmStringTableToTextProperty(3) -- A function that converts from XmStringTable to an XTextProperty Structure
|
|
XmCvtXmStringTableToTextProperty converts the XmStrings in the specified XmStringTable into an XTextProperty structure. The function sets the encoding member of text_prop_return to an Atom for the specified display naming the encoding determined by the specified style, and it converts the first count compound strings in the specified XmStringTable to this encoding for storage in the text_prop_retu... |
|
XmCvtXmStringToByteStream(3) -- A compound string function that converts a compound string to a Byte Stream format
|
|
XmCvtXmStringToByteStream converts a compound string to a string of bytes representing the compound string in Byte Stream format. This routine is typically used by the source of a data transfer operation to produce a Byte Stream representation for transferring a compound string to a destination. If prop_return is not NULL, this function creates a string of characters in Byte Stream format and retu... |
|
XmCvtXmStringToCT(3) -- A compound string function that converts a compound string to compound text
|
|
XmCvtXmStringToCT converts a compound string to a (char *) string in compound text format. The application must call XtAppInitialize before calling this function. The converter uses the font list tag associated with a given compound string segment to select a compound text format for that segment. A registry defines a mapping between font list tags and compound text encoding formats. The converter... |
|
XmDeactivateProtocol(3) -- A VendorShell function that deactivates a protocol without removing it
|
|
XmDeactivateProtocol deactivates a protocol without removing it. It updates the handlers and the property if the shell is realized. It is sometimes useful to allow a protocol's state information (callback lists, and so on) to persist, even though the client may choose to temporarily resign from the interaction. The main use of this capability is to gray/ungray f.send_msg entries in the MWM system... |
|
XmDeactivateWMProtocol(3) -- A VendorShell convenience interface that deactivates a protocol without removing it
|
|
XmDeactivateWMProtocol is a convenience interface. It calls XmDeactivateProtocol with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. shell Specifies the widget with which the protocol property is associated protocol Specifies the protocol atom For a complete definition of VendorShell and its associated resources, see VendorShell(3). |
|
XmDestroyPixmap(3) -- A pixmap caching function that removes a pixmap from the pixmap cache
|
|
XmDestroyPixmap removes pixmaps that are no longer used. Pixmaps are completely freed only when there is no further reference to them. screen Specifies the display screen for which the pixmap was requested pixmap Specifies the pixmap to be destroyed |
|
XmDialogShell(3) -- The DialogShell widget class
|
|
Modal and modeless dialogs use DialogShell as the Shell parent. DialogShell widgets cannot be iconified. Instead, all secondary DialogShell widgets associated with an ApplicationShell widget are iconified and de-iconified as a group with the primary widget. The client indirectly manipulates DialogShell through the convenience interfaces during creation, and it can directly manipulate its BulletinB... |
|
XmDirection(3) -- Data type for the direction of widget components
|
|
XmDirection is the data type specifying the direction in which the system displays subwidgets, children of widgets, or other visual components that are to be laid out. This data type also affects traversal order within tab groups. XmDirection is implemented as an unsigned char bit mask. The horizontal and vertical directions can be specified independent of each other. XmDirection also specifies th... |
|
XmDirectionMatch(3) -- A function that checks for a specified direction component
|
|
XmDirectionMatch compares two XmDirection values. The function returns a Boolean value depending on whether or not the two input values "match." The simplest match is when d1 and d2 are identical. However, other matches are possible. XmDirectionMatch attempts to compare specified bits only; nonspecified bits automatically match. For example, suppose that d1 equals XmTOP_TO_BOTTOM_RIGHT_TO_LEFT. ... |
|
XmDirectionMatchPartial(3) -- A function that checks for a specified direction component
|
|
XmDirectionMatchPartial compares d1 and d2 along the direction component specified by dmask. For example, if dmask equals XmVERTICAL_MASK, then the function will compare only the vertical components of d1 and d2. d1 Specifies an XmDirection value to check. d2 Specifies an XmDirection value to check. dmask Specifies the direction component along which d1 and d2 are to be checked. Appropriate values... |
|
XmDirectionToStringDirection(3) -- A function that converts an XmDirection value to an XmStringDirection value
|
|
XmDirectionToStringDirection converts the specified XmDirection direction value to its equivalent XmStringDirection value. Basically, if the XmDirection value has a horizontal direction specification, that horizontal element is used; otherwise, the XmStringDirection value is interpreted as XmSTRING_DIRECTION_L_TO_R. This function provides backward compatibility with the XmStringDirection data type... |
|
XmDisplay(3) -- The Display widget class
|
|
The XmDisplay object is used by the Motif widgets to store information that is specific to a display. It also allows the toolkit to access certain information on widget hierarchies that would otherwise be unavailable. Each client has one XmDisplay object for each display it accesses. An XmDisplay object is automatically created when the application creates the first shell on a display (usually acc... |
|
XmDragCancel(3) -- A Drag and Drop function that terminates a drag transaction
|
|
XmDragCancel terminates a drag operation and cancels any pending actions of the specified DragContext. This routine can only be called by the initiator client. dragcontext Specifies the ID of the DragContext widget associated with the drag and drop transaction to be terminated For a complete definition of DragContext and its associated resources, see XmDragContext(3). |
|
XmDragContext(3) -- The DragContext widget class
|
|
DragContexts are special widgets used in drag and drop transactions. A DragContext is implemented as a widget, but a client does not explicitly create a DragContext widget. Instead, a client initiates a drag and drop transaction by calling XmDragStart, and this routine initializes and returns a DragContext widget. There is a unique DragContext for each drag operation. The toolkit frees a DragConte... |
|
XmDragIcon(3) -- The DragIcon widget class
|
|
A DragIcon is a component of the visual used to represent the source data in a drag and drop transaction. During a drag operation, a real or simulated X cursor provides drag-over visuals consisting of a static portion that represents the object being dragged, and dynamic cues that provide visual feedback during the drag operation. The visual is attained by blending together various XmDragIcons spe... |
|
XmDragStart(3) -- A Drag and Drop function that initiates a drag and drop transaction
|
|
XmDragStart initiates a drag operation. This routine returns the DragContext widget that it initializes for the associated drag transaction. The toolkit is responsible for freeing the DragContext when the drag and drop transaction is complete. widget Specifies the ID of the smallest widget and/or gadget that encloses the source elements selected for a drag operation. event Specifies the XEvent tha... |
|
XmDrawingArea(3) -- The DrawingArea widget class
|
|
DrawingArea is an empty widget that is easily adaptable to a variety of purposes. It does no drawing and defines no behavior except for invoking callbacks. Callbacks notify the application when graphics need to be drawn (exposure events or widget resize) and when the widget receives input from the keyboard or mouse. Applications are responsible for defining appearance and behavior as needed in res... |
|
XmDrawnButton(3) -- The DrawnButton widget class
|
|
The DrawnButton widget consists of an empty widget window surrounded by a shadow border. It provides the application developer with a graphics area that can have PushButton input semantics. Callback types are defined for widget exposure and widget resize to allow the application to redraw or reposition its graphics. If the DrawnButton widget has a highlight and shadow thickness, the application sh... |
|
XmDropSite(3) -- The DropSite Registry
|
|
A client registers a widget or gadget as a drop site using the XmDropSiteRegister function. In addition, this routine defines the behavior and capabilities of a drop site by specifying appropriate resources. For example, the XmNimportTargets and XmNnumImportTargets resources identify respectively the selection target types and number of types supported by a drop site. The visual animation effects ... |
|
XmDropSiteConfigureStackingOrder(3) -- A Drag and Drop function that reorders a stack of widgets that are registered drop sites
|
|
XmDropSiteConfigureStackingOrder changes the stacking order of the drop site specified by widget. The stacking order controls the manner in which drag-under effects are clipped by overlapping siblings, regardless of whether they are active. The stack mode is relative either to the entire stack, or to another drop site within the stack. The stack order can be modified only if the drop sites are sib... |
|
XmDropSiteEndUpdate(3) -- A Drag and Drop function that facilitates processing updates to multiple drop sites
|
|
XmDropSiteEndUpdate is used in conjunction with XmDropSiteStartUpdate to process updates to multiple drop sites within the same hierarchy. XmDropSiteStartUpdate and XmDropSiteEndUpdate signal the beginning and the end respectively of a series of calls to XmDropSiteUpdate. Calls to XmDropSiteStartUpdate and XmDropSiteEndUpdate can be recursively stacked. Using these routines optimizes the processin... |
|
XmDropSiteQueryStackingOrder(3) -- A Drag and Drop function that returns the parent, a list of children, and the number of children for a specifi
|
|
XmDropSiteQueryStackingOrder obtains the parent, a list of children registered as drop sites, and the number of children registered as drop sites for a given widget. The children are listed in current stacking order, from bottom-most (first child) to the top-most (last child). This function allocates memory for the returned data that must be freed by calling XtFree. widget Specifies the widget ID.... |
|
XmDropSiteRegister(3) -- A Drag and Drop function that identifies a drop site and assigns resources that specify its behavior
|
|
XmDropSiteRegister identifies the specified widget or gadget as a drop site and sets resource values that define the drop site's behavior. The routine assigns default values to any resources that are not specified in the argument list. The toolkit generates a warning message if a drop site is registered with XmNdropSiteActivity set to XmDROP_SITE_ACTIVE and the XmNdropProc resource is NULL. If th... |
|
XmDropSiteRegistered(3) -- A Drag and Drop function that determines if a drop site has been registered
|
|
XmDropSiteRegistered determines if the specified widget has a drop site registered. If a drop site is registered, this function returns True. widget Specifies the ID of the widget being queried. For a complete definition of DropSite and its associated resources, see XmDropSite(3). |
|
XmDropSiteRetrieve(3) -- A Drag and Drop function that retrieves resource values set on a drop site
|
|
XmDropSiteRetrieve extracts values for the given resources from the drop site specified by widget. An initiator can also obtain information about the current drop site by passing the associated DragContext widget as the widget parameter to this routine. The initiator can retrieve all of the drop site resources except XmNdragProc and XmNdropProc using this method. widget Specifies the ID of the wid... |
|
XmDropSiteStartUpdate(3) -- A Drag and Drop function that facilitates processing updates to multiple drop sites
|
|
XmDropSiteStartUpdate is used in conjunction with XmDropSiteEndUpdate to process updates to multiple drop sites within the same shell widget. XmDropSiteStartUpdate and XmDropSiteEndUpdate signal the beginning and the end respectively of a series of calls to XmDropSiteUpdate. Calls to XmDropSiteStartUpdate and XmDropSiteEndUpdate can be recursively stacked. Using these routines optimizes the proces... |
|
XmDropSiteUnregister(3) -- A Drag and Drop function that frees drop site information
|
|
XmDropSiteUnregister informs the toolkit that the specified widget is no longer a registered drop site. The function frees all associated drop site information. widget Specifies the ID of the widget, registered as a drop site, that is to be unregistered For a complete definition of DropSite and its associated resources, see XmDropSite(3). |
|
XmDropSiteUpdate(3) -- A Drag and Drop function that sets resource values for a drop site
|
|
XmDropSiteUpdate modifies drop site resources associated with the specified widget. This routine updates the drop site resources specified in the arglist. widget Specifies the ID of the widget registered as a drop site arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of DropSite and its associated re... |
|
XmDropTransfer(3) -- The DropTransfer widget class
|
|
DropTransfer provides a set of resources that identifies the procedures and associated information required by the toolkit in order to process and complete a drop transaction. Clients should not explicitly create a DropTransfer widget. Instead, a client initiates a transfer by calling XmDropTransferStart, which initializes and returns a DropTransfer widget. If this function is called within an XmN... |
|
XmDropTransferAdd(3) -- A Drag and Drop function that enables additional drop transfer entries to be processed after initiating a drop
|
|
XmDropTransferAdd identifies a list of additional drop transfer entries to be processed after a drop transfer is started. drop_transfer Specifies the ID of the DropTransfer widget returned by XmDropTransferStart transfers Specifies the additional drop transfer entries that the receiver wants processed num_transfers Specifies the number of items in the transfers array For a complete definition of D... |
|
XmDropTransferStart(3) -- A Drag and Drop function that initiates a drop transfer
|
|
XmDropTransferStart initiates a drop transfer and uses the specified argument list to initialize an XmDropTransfer object. The DropTransfer object can be manipulated with XtSetValues and XtGetValues until the last call to the XmNtransferProc procedure is made. After that point, the result of using the widget pointer is undefined. The DropTransfer object is freed by the toolkit when a transfer is c... |
|
XmFileSelectionBox(3) -- The FileSelectionBox widget class
|
|
FileSelectionBox traverses through directories, views the files and subdirectories in them, and then selects files. A FileSelectionBox has five main areas: + A text input field for displaying and editing a directory mask used to select the files to be displayed + An optional text input field for displaying and editing a filter mask used to select the files to be displayed. + A scrollable list of f... |
|
XmFileSelectionBoxGetChild(3) -- A FileSelectionBox function used to access a component
|
|
XmFileSelectionBoxGetChild is used to access a component within a FileSelectionBox. The parameters given to the function are the FileSelectionBox widget and a value indicating which component to access. NOTE: This routine is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. Instead of calling XmFileSelectionBoxGetChild, you should call XtNameToWidget as described in the XmFileSelection... |
|
XmFileSelectionDoSearch(3) -- A FileSelectionBox function that initiates a directory search
|
|
XmFileSelectionDoSearch initiates a directory and file search in a FileSelectionBox widget. For a description of the actions that the FileSelectionBox takes when doing a search, see XmFileSelectionBox(3). widget Specifies the FileSelectionBox widget ID. dirmask Specifies the directory mask used in determining the directories and files displayed in the FileSelectionBox lists. This value is used as ... |
|
XmFontList(3) -- Data type for a font list
|
|
XmFontList is the data type for a font list. A font list consists of font list entries. Each entry contains a font or a font set (a group of fonts) and is identified with a tag, which is optional. If this tag is NULL, the tag is set to XmFONTLIST_DEFAULT_TAG. The value of XmFONTLIST_DEFAULT_TAG is XmFONTLIST_DEFAULT_TAG_STRING. When a compound string is displayed, the font list element tag of the ... |
|
XmFontListAdd(3) -- A font list function that creates a new font list
|
|
XmFontListAdd creates a new font list consisting of the contents of oldlist and the new font list element being added. This function deallocates oldlist after extracting the required information; therefore, do not reference oldlist thereafter. NOTE: This function is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. It has been replaced by XmFontListAppendEntry. oldlist Specifies a poin... |
|
XmFontListAppendEntry(3) -- A font list function that appends an entry to a font list
|
|
XmFontListAppendEntry creates a new font list that contains the contents of oldlist. This function copies the contents of the font list entry being added into this new font list. If oldlist is NULL, XmFontListAppendEntry creates a new font list containing only the single entry specified. This function deallocates the original font list after extracting the required information. The caller must fre... |
|
XmFontListCopy(3) -- A font list function that copies a font list
|
|
XmFontListCopy creates a new font list consisting of the contents of the fontlist argument. fontlist Specifies a font list to be copied |
|
XmFontListCreate(3) -- A font list function that creates a font list
|
|
XmFontListCreate creates a new font list with a single element specified by the provided font and character set. It also allocates the space for the font list. NOTE: This function is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. It is replaced by XmFontListAppendEntry. font Specifies a pointer to a font structure for which the new font list is generated. This is the structure retur... |
|
XmFontListEntryCreate(3) -- A font list function that creates a font list entry
|
|
XmFontListEntryCreate creates a font list entry that contains either a font or font set and is identified by a tag. tag Specifies a NULL terminated string for the tag of the font list entry. The tag may be specified as XmFONTLIST_DEFAULT_TAG, which is used to identify the default font list element in a font list. type Specifies whether the font argument is a font structure or a font set. Valid val... |
|
XmFontListEntryFree(3) -- A font list function that recovers memory used by a font list entry
|
|
XmFontListEntryFree recovers memory used by a font list entry. This routine does not free the XFontSet or XFontStruct associated with the font list entry. entry Specifies a pointer to the font list entry to be freed. In addition, it may be necessary to take the address of the font list entry (via the & operator) before passing it to this function. |
|
XmFontListEntryGetFont(3) -- A font list function that retrieves font information from a font list entry
|
|
XmFontListEntryGetFont retrieves font information for a specified font list entry. If the font list entry contains a font, type_return returns XmFONT_IS_FONT and the function returns a pointer to an XFontStruct. If the font list entry contains a font set, type_return returns XmFONT_IS_FONTSET and the function returns the XFontSet. entry Specifies the font list entry. type_return Specifies a pointe... |
|
XmFontListEntryGetTag(3) -- A font list function that retrieves the tag of a font list entry
|
|
XmFontListEntryGetTag retrieves a copy of the tag of the specified font list entry. This routine allocates memory for the tag string that must be freed by the application. entry Specifies the font list entry |
|
XmFontListEntryLoad(3) -- A font list function that loads a font or creates a font set and creates an accompanying font list entry
|
|
XmFontListEntryLoad loads a font or creates a font set based on the value of the type argument. It creates and returns a font list entry that contains the font or font set and the specified tag. If the value of type is XmFONT_IS_FONT, the function uses the XtCvtStringToFontStruct routine to convert the value of font_name to a font struct. If the value of type is XmFONT_IS_FONTSET, the function use... |
|
XmFontListFree(3) -- A font list function that recovers memory used by a font list
|
|
XmFontListFree recovers memory used by a font list. This routine does not free the XFontSet or XFontStruct associated with the specified font list. list Specifies the font list to be freed |
|
XmFontListFreeFontContext(3) -- A font list function that instructs the toolkit that the font list context is no longer needed
|
|
XmFontListFreeFontContext instructs the toolkit that the context is no longer needed and will not be used without reinitialization. context Specifies the font list context structure that was allocated by the XmFontListInitFontContext function |
|
XmFontListGetNextFont(3) -- A font list function that allows applications to access the fonts and character sets in a font list
|
|
XmFontListGetNextFont accesses the character set and font for the next entry of the font list. The application first uses the XmFontListInitFontContext routine to create a font list context. The application then calls XmFontListGetNextFont repeatedly with the same context. Each succeeding call accesses the next element of the font list. When finished, the application calls XmFontListFreeFontContex... |
|
XmFontListInitFontContext(3) -- A font list function that allows applications to access the entries in a font list
|
|
XmFontListInitFontContext establishes a context to allow applications to access the contents of a font list. This context is used when reading the font list entry tag, font, or font set associated with each entry in the font list. A Boolean status is returned to indicate whether or not the font list is valid. If an application deallocates the font list passed to XmFontListInitFontContext as the fo... |
|
XmFontListNextEntry(3) -- A font list function that returns the next entry in a font list
|
|
XmFontListNextEntry returns the next entry in the font list. The application uses the XmFontListInitFontContext routine to create a font list context. The first call to XmFontListNextEntry sets the context to the first entry in the font list. The application then calls XmFontListNextEntry repeatedly with the same context. Each succeeding call accesses the next entry of the font list. When finished... |
|
XmFontListRemoveEntry(3) -- A font list function that removes a font list entry from a font list
|
|
XmFontListRemoveEntry creates a new font list that contains the contents of oldlist minus those entries specified in entry. The routine removes any entries from oldlist that match the components (tag, type font/font set) of the specified entry. The function deallocates the original font list after extracting the required information. The caller uses XmFontListEntryFree to recover memory allocated ... |
|
XmForm(3) -- The Form widget class
|
|
Form is a container widget with no input semantics of its own. Constraints are placed on children of the Form to define attachments for each of the child's four sides. These attachments can be to the Form, to another child widget or gadget, to a relative position within the Form, or to the initial position of the child. The attachments determine the layout behavior of the Form when resizing occur... |
|
XmFrame(3) -- The Frame widget class
|
|
Frame is a very simple manager used to enclose a single work area child in a border drawn by Frame. It uses the Manager class resources for border drawing and performs geometry management so that its size always matches its child's outer size plus the Frame's margins and shadow thickness. Frame is most often used to enclose other managers when the application developer wants the manager to have ... |
|
XmGadget(3) -- The Gadget widget class
|
|
Gadget is a widget class used as a supporting superclass for other gadget classes. It handles shadow-border drawing and highlighting, traversal activation and deactivation, and various callback lists needed by gadgets. The color and pixmap resources defined by XmManager are directly used by gadgets. If XtSetValues is used to change one of the resources for a manager widget, all of the gadget child... |
|
XmGetAtomName(3) -- A function that returns the string representation for an atom
|
|
XmGetAtomName returns the string representation for an atom. It mirrors the Xlib interfaces for atom management but provides clientside caching. When and where caching is provided in Xlib, the routines will become pseudonyms for the Xlib routines. display Specifies the connection to the X server atom Specifies the atom for the property name you want returned |
|
XmGetColorCalculation(3) -- A function to get the procedure used for default color calculation
|
|
XmGetColorCalculation returns the procedure being used to calculate default colors. For a description of XmColorProc, see XmSetColorCalculation(3). |
|
XmGetColors(3) -- A function that generates foreground, select, and shadow colors
|
|
XmGetColors takes a screen, a colormap, and a background pixel, and returns pixel values for foreground, select, and shadow colors. screen Specifies the screen for which these colors should be allocated. colormap Specifies the colormap from which these colors should be allocated. background Specifies the background on which the colors should be based. foreground Specifies a pointer to the returned... |
|
XmGetDestination(3) -- A function that returns the widget ID of the widget to be used as the current destination for quick paste and
|
|
XmGetDestination returns the widget that is the current destination on the specified display. The destination is generally the last editable widget on which a select, edit, insert, or paste operation was performed and is the destination for quick paste and certain clipboard functions. The destination is NULL until a keyboard or mouse operation has been done on an editable widget. Refer to the Moti... |
|
XmGetDragContext(3) -- A Drag and Drop function that retrieves the DragContext widget ID associated with a timestamp
|
|
XmGetDragContext returns the widget ID of the active DragContext associated with a given display and timestamp. A timestamp uniquely identifies which DragContext is active when more than one drag and drop transaction has been initiated on a display. If the specified timestamp matches a timestamp processed between the start and finish of a single drag and drop transaction, the function returns the ... |
|
XmGetFocusWidget(3) -- Returns the ID of the widget that has keyboard focus
|
|
XmGetFocusWidget examines the hierarchy that contains the specified widget and returns the ID of the widget that has keyboard focus. The function extracts the widget ID from the associated Shell widget; therefore, the specified widget can be located anywhere in the hierarchy. widget Specifies a widget ID within a given hierarchy |
|
XmGetMenuCursor(3) -- A function that returns the cursor ID for the current menu cursor
|
|
XmGetMenuCursor queries the menu cursor currently being used by this client on the specified display and returns the cursor ID. This function returns the menu cursor for the default screen of the display. NOTE: XmGetMenuCursor is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. Instead of using this function, call XtGetValues for the XmScreen resource XmNmenuCursor. display Specifies ... |
|
XmGetPixmap(3) -- A pixmap caching function that generates a pixmap, stores it in a pixmap cache, and returns the pixmap
|
|
XmGetPixmap uses the parameter data to perform a lookup in the pixmap cache to see if a pixmap has already been generated that matches the data. If one is found, a reference count is incremented and the pixmap is returned. Applications should use XmDestroyPixmap when the pixmap is no longer needed. screen Specifies the display screen on which the pixmap is to be drawn. The depth of the pixmap is t... |
|
XmGetPixmapByDepth(3) -- A pixmap caching function that generates a pixmap, stores it in a pixmap cache, and returns the pixmap
|
|
XmGetPixmapByDepth uses the parameter data to perform a lookup in the pixmap cache to see if a pixmap has already been generated that matches the data. If one is found, a reference count is incremented and the pixmap is returned. Applications should use XmDestroyPixmap when the pixmap is no longer needed. screen Specifies the display screen on which the pixmap is to be drawn image_name Specifies t... |
|
XmGetPostedFromWidget(3) -- A RowColumn function that returns the widget from which a menu was posted
|
|
XmGetPostedFromWidget returns the widget from which a menu was posted. For torn-off menus, this function returns the widget from which the menu was originally torn. An application can use this routine during the activate callback to determine the context in which the menu callback should be interpreted. menu Specifies the widget ID of the menu For a complete definition of RowColumn and its associa... |
|
XmGetScaledPixmap(3) -- read a pixmap file and scale it according to pixmap and print resolution
|
|
XmGetScaledPixmap uses its Widget argument to look up for a Print Shell ancestor to get the pixmap resolution and the default printer resolution information to be used if scaling_ratio ==0. If scaling is 0, and a valid PrintShell is present XmGetScaledPixmap applies a ratio equals to (printer resolution / default pixmap resolution) before creating the Pixmap on the widget's Screen. Otherwise, the... |
|
XmGetSecondaryResourceData(3) -- A function that provides access to secondary widget resource data
|
|
Some Motif widget classes (such as Gadget, Text, and VendorShell) have resources that are not accessible through the functions XtGetResourceList and XtGetConstraintResourceList. In order to retrieve the descriptions of these resources, an application must use XmGetSecondaryResourceData. When a widget class has such resources, this function provides descriptions of the resources in one or more data... |
|
XmGetTabGroup(3) -- Returns the widget ID of a tab group
|
|
XmGetTabGroup returns the widget ID of the tab group that contains the specified widget. widget Specifies a widget ID within a tab group |
|
XmGetTearOffControl(3) -- A RowColumn function that obtains the widget ID
|
|
XmGetTearOffControl provides the application with the means for obtaining the widget ID of the internally created tear-off control in a tear-off menu. RowColumn creates a tear-off control for a PulldownMenu or PopupMenu when the XmNtearOffModel resource is initialized or set to XmTEAR_OFF_ENABLED. The tear-off control is a widget that appears as the first element in the menu. The user tears off th... |
|
XmGetVisibility(3) -- A function that determines if a widget is visible
|
|
XmGetVisibility returns the visibility state of the specified widget. It checks to see if some part of the widget's rectangular area is unobscured by the widget's ancestors, or some part of the widget's rectangular area is inside the work window (but possibly outside the clip window) of a ScrolledWindow whose XmNscrollingPolicy is XmAUTOMATIC and whose XmNtraverseObscuredCallback is not NULL. X... |
|
XmGetXmDisplay(3) -- A Display function that returns the XmDisplay object ID for a specified display
|
|
XmGetXmDisplay returns the XmDisplay object ID associated with a display. The application can access Display resources with XtGetValues. display Specifies the display for which the XmDisplay object ID is to be returned For a complete definition of Display and its associated resources, see XmDisplay(3). |
|
XmGetXmScreen(3) -- A Screen function that returns the XmScreen object ID for a specified screen
|
|
XmGetXmScreen returns the XmScreen object ID associated with a screen. The application can access and manipulate Screen resources with XtGetValues and XtSetValues. screen Specifies the screen for which the XmScreen ID is to be returned For a complete definition of Screen and its associated resources, see XmScreen(3). |
|
XmIconGadget(3) -- The IconGadget widget class
|
|
IconGadget is an instantiable widget used to display both text and a pixmap in various combinations. Other widgets that hold the XmQTcontainer trait, such as Container, can use IconGadget to represent objects. IconGadget text is a compound string. If no text is supplied, then the compound string is generated from the gadget name. IconGadget text is placed relative to the type of associated pixmap.... |
|
XmImCloseXIM(3) -- An input manager function that releases the input method associated with a specified widget
|
|
XmImCloseXIM closes all input contexts associated with the Input Method (IM) of widget. widget is used to identify the Display that specifies the Input Method opened for the widget. Upon closure, all widgets registered with the input contexts are unregistered. Also, the Input Method specified by Display is closed. widget Specifies the ID of a widget whose reference Input Method is to be closed. |
|
XmImFreeXIC(3) -- An input manager function that unregisters widgets for an XIC
|
|
XmImFreeXIC unregisters all widgets associated with the specified X Input Context (XIC). The specified widget must be associated with the specified xic. After unregistering the associated widgets, this call frees the xic. widget Specifies the ID of a widget used to identify the VendorShell and XmDisplay that maintain the widget-XIC registry. xic Specifies the Input Context associated with the widg... |
|
XmImGetXIC(3) -- An input manager function that obtains an XIC for a widget
|
|
XmImGetXIC creates and registers an X Input Context (XIC) with the specified arguments for widget. If XmINHERIT_POLICY is specified for input_policy, a new XIC will be created only if required to by the arguments or by the VendorShell input policy. Any existing XIC registered with widget is unregistered. Refer to the VendorShell reference page for further details. widget Specifies the ID of a widg... |
|
XmImGetXIM(3) -- An input manager function that retrieves the input method associated with a specified widget
|
|
XmImGetXIM retrieves the XIM data structure representing the input method that the input manager has opened for the specified widget. If an input method has not been opened by a previous call to XmImRegister, the first time this routine is called it opens an input method using the XmNinputMethod resource for the VendorShell. If the XmNinputMethod is NULL, an input method is opened using the curren... |
|
XmImMbLookupString(3) -- An input manager function that retrieves a composed string from an input method
|
|
XmImMbLookupString returns a string composed in the locale associated with the widget's input method and a KeySym that is currently mapped to the keycode in a KeyPress event. The KeySym is obtained by using the standard interpretation of Shift, Lock and Group modifiers as defined in the X Protocol specification. An XIM will be created, but an XIC will not be created. One of the functions, XmImSet... |
|
XmImMbResetIC(3) -- An input manager function that resets the input context for a widget
|
|
XmImMbResetIC gets the XIC of the widget and resets it. It puts a pointer to a string containing the current preedit string to mb. The caller should free the returned string after use by calling Xfree. widget Specifies the ID of the widget. mb Contains a pointer to the preedit string upon return. |
|
XmImRegister(3) -- An input manager function that registers a widget with an input manager
|
|
XmImRegister registers a widget with its input manager. This adds the specified widget to a list of widgets that are supported by the input manager for an input method. If an input method has not been opened by a previous call to XmImRegister, the first time this routine is called it opens an input method using the XmNinputMethod resource for the VendorShell. If the XmNinputMethod is NULL, an inpu... |
|
XmImSetFocusValues(3) -- An input manager function that notifies an input manager that a widget has received input focus and updates th
|
|
XmImSetFocusValues notifies the input manager that the specified widget has received input focus. This function also updates the attributes of the input context associated with the widget. The focus window for the XIC is set to the window of the widget. The arglist argument is a list of attribute/value pairs for the input context. This function passes the attributes and values to XICSetValues. The... |
|
XmImSetValues(3) -- An input manager function that updates attributes of an input context
|
|
XmImSetValues updates attributes of the input context associated with the specified widget. The arglist argument is a list of attribute/value pairs for the input context. This function passes the attributes and values to XICSetValues. The initial call to this routine should pass in all of the input context attributes. Thereafter, the application programmer calls XmImSetValues, for an XIC, only if ... |
|
XmImSetXIC(3) -- An input manager function that registers an existing XIC with a widget
|
|
XmImSetXIC registers the specified X Input Context (XIC) with widget. Any existing XIC registered for widget is unregistered. The new XIC registered for widget is returned. If xic was not created by XmImGetXIC or XmImRegister, it will not be subject to closing activities when it has no widgets registered with it. widget Specifies the ID of a widget for which a new Input Context is to be registered... |
|
XmImUnregister(3) -- An input manager function that removes a widget from association with its input manager
|
|
XmImUnregister removes the specified widget from the list of widgets registered for input by the input manager. Note that the Text, TextField, and List widgets already call the XmImRegister internally. You should call the XmImUnregister function for these widgets before calling XmImRegister. widget Specifies the ID of the widget to be unregistered |
|
XmImUnsetFocus(3) -- An input manager function that notifies an input method that a widget has lost input focus
|
|
XmImUnsetFocus unsets a specified widget's focus, then notifies the input manager that the specified widget has lost its input focus. Note that the Text, TextField, and List widgets already call the XmImUnsetFocus internally. Therefore, further calls to the XmImUnsetFocus function for those widgets are unnecessary. widget Specifies the ID of the widget registered with the input manager |
|
XmImVaSetFocusValues(3) -- An input manager function that notifies an input manager that a widget has received input focus and updates th
|
|
XmImVaSetFocusValues notifies the input manager that the specified widget has received input focus. This function also updates the attributes of the input context associated with the widget. This function passes the attributes and values to XICSetValues. The caller of this routine should pass in only those values that have changed since the last call to any of these functions; XmImVaSetValues, XmI... |
|
XmImVaSetValues(3) -- An input manager function that updates attributes of an input context
|
|
XmImVaSetValues updates attributes of the input context associated with the specified widget. This function passes the attributes to XICSetValues. The initial call to this routine should pass in all of the input context attributes. Thereafter, the application programmer calls XmImVaSetValues only if a value has changed. See the description in the XmImSetValues(3) man page for a list of associated ... |
|
XmInstallImage(3) -- A pixmap caching function that adds an image to the image cache
|
|
XmInstallImage stores an image in an image cache that can later be used to generate a pixmap. Part of the installation process is to extend the resource converter used to reference these images. The resource converter is given the image name so that the image can be referenced in a .Xdefaults file. Since an image can be referenced by a widget through its pixmap resources, it is up to the applicati... |
|
XmInternAtom(3) -- A macro that returns an atom for a given name
|
|
XmInternAtom returns an atom for a given name. The returned atom remains defined even after the client's connection closes. The returned atom becomes undefined when the last connection to the X server closes. display Specifies the connection to the X server name Specifies the name associated with the atom you want returned. The value of name is case dependent. only_if_exists Specifies a Boolean v... |
|
XmIsMotifWMRunning(3) -- A function that determines whether the window manager is running
|
|
XmIsMotifWMRunning lets a user know whether the Motif Window Manager is running on a screen that contains a specific widget hierarchy. This function first sees whether the _MOTIF_WM_INFO property is present on the root window of the shell's screen. If it is, its window field is used to query for the presence of the specified window as a child of root. shell Specifies the shell whose screen will b... |
|
XmIsTraversable(3) -- A function that identifies whether a widget can be traversed
|
|
XmIsTraversable determines whether the specified widget is eligible to receive focus through keyboard traversal. In general, a widget is eligible to receive focus when all of the following conditions are true: + The widget and its ancestors are not being destroyed, are sensitive, and have a value of True for XmNtraversalOn. + The widget and its ancestors are realized, managed, and (except for gadg... |
|
XmLabel(3) -- The Label widget class
|
|
Label is an instantiable widget and is also used as a superclass for other button widgets, such as PushButton and ToggleButton. The Label widget does not accept any button or key input, and the help callback is the only callback defined. Label also receives enter and leave events. Label can contain either text or a pixmap. Label text is a compound string. Refer to the Motif Programmer's Guide for... |
|
XmLabelGadget(3) -- The LabelGadget widget class
|
|
LabelGadget is an instantiable widget and is also used as a superclass for other button gadgets, such as PushButtonGadget and ToggleButtonGadget. LabelGadget can contain either text or a pixmap. LabelGadget text is a compound string. Refer to the Motif Programmer's Guide for more information on compound strings. The text can be multilingual, multiline, and/or multifont. When a LabelGadget is inse... |
|
XmList(3) -- The List widget class
|
|
List allows a user to select one or more items from a group of choices. Items are selected from the list in a variety of ways, using both the pointer and the keyboard. List operates on an array of compound strings that are defined by the application. Each compound string becomes an item in the List, with the first compound string becoming the item in position 1, the second becoming the item in pos... |
|
XmListAddItem(3) -- A List function that adds an item to the list
|
|
XmListAddItem adds an item to the list at the given position. When the item is inserted into the list, it is compared with the current XmNselectedItems list. If the new item matches an item on the selected list, it appears selected. widget Specifies the ID of the List to which an item is added. item Specifies the item to be added to the list. position Specifies the position of the new item in the ... |
|
XmListAddItems(3) -- A List function that adds items to the list
|
|
XmListAddItems adds the specified items to the list at the given position. The first item_count items of the items array are added to the list. When the items are inserted into the list, they are compared with the current XmNselectedItems list. If any of the new items matches an item on the selected list, it appears selected. widget Specifies the ID of the List to which an item is added. items Spe... |
|
XmListAddItemsUnselected(3) -- A List function that adds items to a list
|
|
XmListAddItemsUnselected adds the specified items to the list at the given position. The inserted items remain unselected, even if they currently appear in the XmNselectedItems list. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget to add items to. items Specifies a pointer to the items to be added to the list. item_count Specifies the number of elements in items. This number must be nonnegative. positi... |
|
XmListAddItemUnselected(3) -- A List function that adds an item to the list
|
|
XmListAddItemUnselected adds an item to the list at the given position. The item does not appear selected, even if it matches an item in the current XmNselectedItems list. widget Specifies the ID of the List from whose list an item is added. item Specifies the item to be added to the list. position Specifies the position of the new item in the list. A value of 1 makes the new item the first item i... |
|
XmListDeleteAllItems(3) -- A List function that deletes all items from the list
|
|
XmListDeleteAllItems deletes all items from the list. widget Specifies the ID of the List from whose list the items are deleted For a complete definition of List and its associated resources, see XmList(3). |
|
XmListDeleteItem(3) -- A List function that deletes an item from the list
|
|
XmListDeleteItem deletes the first item in the list that matches item. A warning message appears if the item does not exist. widget Specifies the ID of the List from whose list an item is deleted. item Specifies the text of the item to be deleted from the list. If item appears more than once in the List, only the first occurrence is matched. For a complete definition of List and its associated res... |
|
XmListDeleteItems(3) -- A List function that deletes items from the list
|
|
XmListDeleteItems deletes the specified items from the list. For each element of items, the first item in the list that matches that element is deleted. A warning message appears if any of the items do not exist. widget Specifies the ID of the List from whose list an item is deleted items Specifies a pointer to items to be deleted from the list item_count Specifies the number of elements in items ... |
|
XmListDeleteItemsPos(3) -- A List function that deletes items from the list starting at the given position
|
|
XmListDeleteItemsPos deletes the specified number of items from the list starting at the specified position. widget Specifies the ID of the List from whose list an item is deleted. item_count Specifies the number of items to be deleted. This number must be nonnegative. position Specifies the position in the list of the first item to be deleted. A value of 1 indicates that the first deleted item is... |
|
XmListDeletePos(3) -- A List function that deletes an item from a list at a specified position
|
|
XmListDeletePos deletes an item at a specified position. A warning message appears if the position does not exist. widget Specifies the ID of the List from which an item is to be deleted. position Specifies the position of the item to be deleted. A value of 1 indicates that the first item in the list is deleted; a value of 2 indicates that the second item is deleted; and so on. A value of 0 (zero)... |
|
XmListDeletePositions(3) -- A List function that deletes items from a list based on an array of positions
|
|
XmListDeletePositions deletes noncontiguous items from a list. The function deletes all items whose corresponding positions appear in the position_list array. A warning message is displayed if a specified position is invalid; that is, the value is 0, a negative integer, or a number greater than the number of items in the list. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget position_list Specifies an a... |
|
XmListDeselectAllItems(3) -- A List function that unhighlights and removes all items from the selected list
|
|
XmListDeselectAllItems unhighlights and removes all items from the selected list. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget from whose list all selected items are deselected For a complete definition of List and its associated resources, see XmList(3). |
|
XmListDeselectItem(3) -- A List function that deselects the specified item from the selected list
|
|
XmListDeselectItem unhighlights and removes from the selected list the first item in the list that matches item. widget Specifies the ID of the List from whose list an item is deselected. item Specifies the item to be deselected from the list. If item appears more than once in the List, only the first occurrence is matched. For a complete definition of List and its associated resources, see XmList... |
|
XmListDeselectPos(3) -- A List function that deselects an item at a specified position in the list
|
|
XmListDeselectPos unhighlights the item at the specified position and deletes it from the list of selected items. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget position Specifies the position of the item to be deselected. A value of 1 indicates that the first item in the list is deselected; a value of 2 indicates that the second item is deselected; and so on. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the la... |
|
XmListGetKbdItemPos(3) -- A List function that returns the position of the item at the location cursor
|
|
XmListGetKbdItemPos returns the position of the list item at the location cursor. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget For a complete definition of List and its associated resources, see XmList(3). |
|
XmListGetMatchPos(3) -- A List function that returns all instances of an item in the list
|
|
XmListGetMatchPos is a Boolean function that returns an array of positions where a specified item is found in a List. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget. item Specifies the item to search for. position_list Returns an array of positions at which the item occurs in the List. The position of the first item in the list is 1; the position of the second item is 2; and so on. When the return val... |
|
XmListGetSelectedPos(3) -- A List function that returns the position of every selected item in the list
|
|
This routine is obsolete. It is replaced by calling XtGetValues for the List resources XmNselectedPositions and XmNselectedPositionCount. XmListGetSelectedPos is a Boolean function that returns an array of the positions of the selected items in a List. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget. position_list Returns an array of the positions of the selected items in the List. The position of the ... |
|
XmListItemExists(3) -- A List function that checks if a specified item is in the list
|
|
XmListItemExists is a Boolean function that checks if a specified item is present in the list. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget item Specifies the item whose presence is checked For a complete definition of List and its associated resources, see XmList(3). |
|
XmListItemPos(3) -- A List function that returns the position of an item in the list
|
|
XmListItemPos returns the position of the first instance of the specified item in a list. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget item Specifies the item whose position is returned For a complete definition of List and its associated resources, see XmList(3). |
|
XmListPosSelected(3) -- A List function that determines if the list item at a specified position is selected
|
|
XmPosSelected determines if the list item at the specified position is selected or not. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget position Specifies the position of the list item. A value of 1 indicates the first item in the list; a value of 2 indicates the second item; and so on. A value of 0 (zero) specifies the last item in the list. For a complete definition of List and its associated resourc... |
|
XmListPosToBounds(3) -- A List function that returns the bounding box of an item at a specified position in a list
|
|
XmListPosToBounds returns the coordinates of an item within a list and the dimensions of its bounding box. The function returns the associated x and y-coordinates of the upper left corner of the bounding box relative to the upper left corner of the List widget, as well as the width and the height of the box. The caller can pass a NULL value for the x, y, width, or height parameters to indicate tha... |
|
XmListReplaceItems(3) -- A List function that replaces the specified elements in the list
|
|
XmListReplaceItems replaces each specified item of the list with a corresponding new item. When the items are inserted into the list, they are compared with the current XmNselectedItems list. If any of the new items matches an item on the selected list, it appears selected. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget. old_items Specifies the items to be replaced. item_count Specifies the number of ... |
|
XmListReplaceItemsPos(3) -- A List function that replaces the specified elements in the list
|
|
XmListReplaceItemsPos replaces the specified number of items of the List with new items, starting at the specified position in the List. When the items are inserted into the list, they are compared with the current XmNselectedItems list. If any of the new items matches an item on the selected list, it appears selected. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget. new_items Specifies the replacement... |
|
XmListReplaceItemsPosUnselected(3) -- A List function that replaces items in a list without selecting the replacement items
|
|
XmListReplaceItemsPosUnselected replaces the specified number of items in the list with new items, starting at the given position. The replacement items remain unselected, even if they currently appear in the XmNselectedItems list. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget to replace items in. new_items Specifies a pointer to the replacement items. item_count Specifies the number of elements in n... |
|
XmListReplaceItemsUnselected(3) -- A List function that replaces items in a list
|
|
XmListReplaceItemsUnselected replaces each specified item in the list with a corresponding new item. The replacement items remain unselected, even if they currently appear in the XmNselectedItems list. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget to replace items in. old_items Specifies a pointer to the list items to be replaced. item_count Specifies the number of elements in old_items and new_items... |
|
XmListReplacePositions(3) -- A List function that replaces items in a list based on position
|
|
XmListReplacePositions replaces noncontiguous items in a list. The item at each position specified in position_list is replaced with the corresponding entry in item_list. When the items are inserted into the list, they are compared with the current XmNselectedItems list. Any of the new items that match items on the selected list appear selected. A warning message is displayed if a specified positi... |
|
XmListSelectItem(3) -- A List function that selects an item in the list
|
|
XmListSelectItem highlights and adds to the selected list the first item in the list that matches item. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget from whose list an item is selected. item Specifies the item to be selected in the List widget. If item appears more than once in the List, only the first occurrence is matched. notify Specifies a Boolean value that when TRUE invokes the selection callb... |
|
XmListSelectPos(3) -- A List function that selects an item at a specified position in the list
|
|
XmListSelectPos highlights a List item at the specified position and adds it to the list of selected items. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget. position Specifies the position of the item to be selected. A value of 1 indicates that the first item in the list is selected; a value of 2 indicates that the second item is selected; and so on. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the last item in ... |
|
XmListSetAddMode(3) -- A List function that sets add mode in the list
|
|
XmListSetAddMode allows applications control over Add Mode in the extended selection model. This function ensures that the mode it sets is compatible with the selection policy (XmNselectionPolicy) of the widget. For example, it cannot put the widget into add mode when the value of XmNselectionPolicy is XmBROWSE_SELECT. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget state Specifies whether to activate ... |
|
XmListSetBottomItem(3) -- A List function that makes an existing item the last visible item in the list
|
|
XmListSetBottomItem makes the first item in the list that matches item the last visible item in the list. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget from whose list an item is made the last visible item Specifies the item For a complete definition of List and its associated resources, see XmList(3). |
|
XmListSetBottomPos(3) -- A List function that makes a specified item the last visible item in the list
|
|
XmListSetBottomPos makes the item at the specified position the last visible item in the List. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget. position Specifies the position of the item to be made the last visible item in the list. A value of 1 indicates that the first item in the list is the last visible item; a value of 2 indicates that the second item is the last visible item; and so on. A value o... |
|
XmListSetHorizPos(3) -- A List function that scrolls to the specified position in the list
|
|
XmListSetHorizPos sets the XmNvalue resource of the horizontal ScrollBar to the specified position and updates the visible portion of the list with the new value if the List widget's XmNlistSizePolicy is set to XmCONSTANT or XmRESIZE_IF_POSSIBLE and the horizontal ScrollBar is currently visible. This is equivalent to moving the horizontal ScrollBar to the specified position. widget Specifies the ... |
|
XmListSetItem(3) -- A List function that makes an existing item the first visible item in the list
|
|
XmListSetItem makes the first item in the list that matches item the first visible item in the list. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget from whose list an item is made the first visible item Specifies the item For a complete definition of List and its associated resources, see XmList(3). |
|
XmListSetKbdItemPos(3) -- A List function that sets the location cursor at a specified position
|
|
XmListSetKbdItemPos sets the location cursor at the item specified by position. This function does not determine if the item at the specified position is selected or not. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget. position Specifies the position of the item at which the location cursor is set. A value of 1 indicates the first item in the list; a value of 2 indicates the second item; and so on. A ... |
|
XmListSetPos(3) -- A List function that makes the item at the given position the first visible position in the list
|
|
XmListSetPos makes the item at the given position the first visible position in the list. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget. position Specifies the position of the item to be made the first visible item in the list. A value of 1 indicates that the first item in the list is the first visible item; a value of 2 indicates that the second item is the first visible item; and so on. A value of ... |
|
XmListUpdateSelectedList(3) -- A List function that updates the XmNselectedItems resource
|
|
XmListUpdateSelectedList frees the contents of the current XmNselectedItems list. The routine traverses the XmNitems list and adds each currently selected item to the XmNselectedItems list. For each selected item, there is a corresponding entry in the updated XmNselectedItems list. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget to update For a complete definition of List and its associated resources, ... |
|
XmListYToPos(3) -- A List function that returns the position of the item
|
|
XmListYToPos returns the position of the item at the given ycoordinate within the list. widget Specifies the ID of the List widget y Specifies the y-coordinate in the list's coordinate system For a complete definition of List and its associated resources, see XmList(3). |
|
XmMainWindow(3) -- The MainWindow widget class
|
|
MainWindow provides a standard layout for the primary window of an application. This layout includes a MenuBar, a CommandWindow, a work region, a MessageWindow, and ScrollBars. Any or all of these areas are optional. The work region and ScrollBars in the MainWindow behave identically to the work region and ScrollBars in the ScrolledWindow widget. The user can think of the MainWindow as an extended... |
|
XmMainWindowSep1(3) -- A MainWindow function that returns the widget ID of the first Separator
|
|
XmMainWindowSep1 returns the widget ID of the first Separator in the MainWindow. The first Separator is located between the MenuBar and the Command widget. This Separator is visible only when XmNshowSeparator is True. NOTE: XmMainWindowSep1 is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. Use XtNameToWidget instead. Pass a MainWindow variable as the first argument to XtNameToWidget... |
|
XmMainWindowSep2(3) -- A MainWindow function that returns the widget ID of the second Separator widget
|
|
XmMainWindowSep2 returns the widget ID of the second Separator in the MainWindow. The second Separator is located between the Command widget and the ScrolledWindow. This Separator is visible only when XmNshowSeparator is True. NOTE: XmMainWindowSep2 is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. Use XtNameToWidget instead. Pass a MainWindow variable as the first argument to XtNam... |
|
XmMainWindowSep3(3) -- A MainWindow function that returns the widget ID of the third Separator widget
|
|
XmMainWindowSep3 returns the widget ID of the third Separator in the MainWindow. The third Separator is located between the message window and the widget above it. This Separator is visible only when XmNshowSeparator is True. NOTE: XmMainWindowSep3 is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. Use XtNameToWidget instead. Pass a MainWindow variable as the first argument to XtName... |
|
XmMainWindowSetAreas(3) -- A MainWindow function that identifies manageable children for each area
|
|
XmMainWindowSetAreas identifies which of the valid children for each area (such as the MenuBar and work region) are to be actively managed by MainWindow. This function also sets up or adds the MenuBar, work window, command window, and ScrollBar widgets to the application's main window widget. Each area is optional; therefore, the user can pass NULL to one or more of the following arguments. The w... |
|
XmManager(3) -- The Manager widget class
|
|
Manager is a widget class used as a supporting superclass for other widget classes. It supports the visual resources, graphics contexts, and traversal resources necessary for the graphics and traversal mechanisms. |
|
XmMapSegmentEncoding(3) -- A compound string function that returns the compound text encoding format associated with the specified font l
|
|
XmMapSegmentEncoding searches the segment encoding registry for an entry that matches the specified font list tag and returns a copy of the associated compound text encoding format. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated with the returned data by calling XtFree. fontlist_tag Specifies the compound string font list tag |
|
XmMenuPosition(3) -- A RowColumn function that positions a Popup menu pane
|
|
XmMenuPosition positions a Popup menu pane using the information in the specified event. Unless an application is positioning the menu pane itself, it must first invoke this function before managing the PopupMenu. The x_root and y_root fields in the specified X event are used to determine the menu position. menu Specifies the PopupMenu to be positioned event Specifies the event passed to the actio... |
|
XmMenuShell(3) -- The MenuShell widget class
|
|
The MenuShell widget is a custom OverrideShell widget. An OverrideShell widget bypasses mwm when displaying itself. It is designed specifically to contain Popup or Pulldown menu panes. Most application writers never encounter this widget if they use the menu-system convenience functions, XmCreatePopupMenu or XmCreatePulldown Menu, to create a Popup or Pulldown menu pane. The convenience functions ... |
|
XmMessageBox(3) -- The MessageBox widget class
|
|
MessageBox is a dialog class used for creating simple message dialogs. Convenience dialogs based on MessageBox are provided for several common interaction tasks, which include giving information, asking questions, and reporting errors. A MessageBox dialog is typically transient in nature, displayed for the duration of a single interaction. MessageBox is a subclass of BulletinBoard and depends on i... |
|
XmMessageBoxGetChild(3) -- A MessageBox function that is used to access a component
|
|
XmMessageBoxGetChild is used to access a component within a MessageBox. The parameters given to the function are the MessageBox widget and a value indicating which component to access. NOTE: This routine is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. Instead of calling XmMessageBoxGetChild, you should call XtNameToWidget as described in the XmMessageBox(3) reference page. widget ... |
|
XmNotebook(3) -- The Notebook widget class
|
|
Notebook is a manager widget that organizes its children into pages, tabs, status areas, and page scrollers to simulate a real notebook. It stacks its page children so that all page children occupy the same area like real book pages. Notebook displays visuals that look like the binding of a book and the edges of other pages around the page that is shown. Tab children simulate notebook tabs. Major ... |
|
XmNotebookGetPageInfo(3) -- A Notebook function that returns page information
|
|
XmNotebookGetPageInfo returns status information for the specified Notebook page. notebook Specifies the Notebook widget. page_number Specifies the page number to be queried. page_info Points to the structure containing the page information. The structure has the following form: typedef struct { int page_number; Widget page_widget; Widget status_area_widget; Widget major_tab_widget; Widget minor_t... |
|
XmObjectAtPoint(3) -- A toolkit function that determines which child intersects or comes closest to a specified point
|
|
XmObjectAtPoint searches the child list of the specified manager widget and returns the child most closely associated with the specified x,y coordinate pair. For the typical Motif manager widget, XmObjectAtPoint uses the following rules to determine the returned object: + If one child intersects x,y, XmObjectAtPoint returns the widget ID of that child. + If more than one child intersects x,y, XmOb... |
|
XmOptionButtonGadget(3) -- A RowColumn function that obtains the widget ID for the CascadeButtonGadget in an OptionMenu
|
|
XmOptionButtonGadget provides the application with the means for obtaining the widget ID for the internally created CascadeButtonGadget. Once the application has obtained the widget ID, it can adjust the visuals for the CascadeButtonGadget, if desired. When an application creates an instance of the OptionMenu widget, the widget creates two internal gadgets. One is a LabelGadget that is used to dis... |
|
XmOptionLabelGadget(3) -- A RowColumn function that obtains the widget ID for the LabelGadget in an OptionMenu
|
|
XmOptionLabelGadget provides the application with the means for obtaining the widget ID for the internally created LabelGadget. Once the application has obtained the widget ID, it can adjust the visuals for the LabelGadget, if desired. option_menu Specifies the OptionMenu widget ID When an application creates an instance of the OptionMenu widget, the widget creates two internal gadgets. One is a L... |
|
XmPanedWindow(3) -- The PanedWindow widget class
|
|
PanedWindow is a composite widget that lays out children in a vertically tiled format. Children appear in top-to-bottom fashion, with the first child inserted appearing at the top of the PanedWindow and the last child inserted appearing at the bottom. The PanedWindow grows to match the width of its widest child and all other children are forced to this width. The height of the PanedWindow is equal... |
|
XmParseMapping(3) -- Data type for a compound string parse mapping
|
|
XmParseMapping is an opaque data type for a parse mapping used by XmStringParseText to create a compound string. A parse mapping contains a pattern to be matched in text being parsed to create a compound string. It also contains a compound string, or a function to be invoked to provide a compound string, to be included in the compound string being created whenever the pattern is matched. An applic... |
|
XmParseMappingCreate(3) -- A compound string function to create a parse mapping
|
|
XmParseMappingCreate creates a parse mapping for use in a parse table. This function allows the application to specify values for components of the parse mapping using a resource-style argument list. arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of XmParseMapping and its associated resources, see ... |
|
XmParseMappingFree(3) -- A compound string function to free a parse mapping
|
|
XmParseMappingFree recovers memory used by an XmParseMapping. parse_mapping Specifies the parse mapping to be freed |
|
XmParseMappingGetValues(3) -- A compound string function to retrieve attributes of a parse mapping
|
|
XmParseMappingGetValues retrieves attributes of an XmParseMapping object, using a resource-style argument list. If the XmNsubstitute resource is in the arglist, the function will allocate space to hold the returned XmString value. The application is responsible for managing this allocated space. The application can recover the allocated space by calling XmStringFree. arglist Specifies the argument... |
|
XmParseMappingSetValues(3) -- A compound string function to set attributes of a parse mapping
|
|
XmParseMappingSetValues specifies attributes of an XmParseMapping object, using a resource-style argument list. arglist Specifies the argument list argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist) For a complete definition of XmParseMapping and its associated resources, see XmParseMapping(3). |
|
XmParseTable(3) -- Data type for a compound string parse table
|
|
XmParseTable is the data type for an array of parse mappings (objects of type XmParseMapping). A parse table is used by some routines that parse and unparse compound strings. The table is an ordered list of parse mappings. A parsing routine that uses a parse table scans the input text and searches the parse mappings, in order, for one containing a pattern that matches the input text. The matching ... |
|
XmParseTableFree(3) -- A compound string function that recovers memory
|
|
XmParseTableFree recovers memory used by an XmParseTable and its constituent XmParseMappings. parse_table Specifies the parse table to be freed count Specifies the number of parse mappings in the parse table |
|
XmPrimitive(3) -- The Primitive widget class
|
|
Primitive is a widget class used as a supporting superclass for other widget classes. It handles border drawing and highlighting, traversal activation and deactivation, and various callback lists needed by Primitive widgets. Primitive and all its subclasses hold the XmQTcareParentVisual trait. |
|
XmPrintPopupPDM(3) -- Send a notification for the PDM to be popped up
|
|
A convenience function that sends a notification to start a Print Dialog Manager on behalf of the application, XmPrintPopupPDM hides the details of the X selection mechanism used to notify the PDM that a new dialog must be popped up for this application. XmPrintPopupPDM sends a selection request to either the print display of the print shell, or the video display of the transient_for video widget ... |
|
XmPrintSetup(3) -- setup and create a Print Shell widget
|
|
A function that does the appropriate setting and creates a realized XmPrintShell that it returns to the caller. This function hides the details of the Xt to set up a valid print shell heirarchy for the application. It is also meant to encourage consistency in the way applications root their print widget hierarchy. print_screen must belong to a Display connection that has already been initialized w... |
|
XmPrintShell(3) -- a shell widget class used for printing in Motif
|
|
The XmPrintShell provides the Motif application programmer with an Xt widget oriented API to some of the X Print resources and a callback to drive the pagination. The XmPrintShell provides a simple callback to handle the pagination logic, and a set of resources to get and set common printer attributes. If not created on an XPrint connection, XmPrintShell behaves as a regular applicationShell. The ... |
|
XmPrintToFile(3) -- Retrieves and saves data that would normally be printed by the X Print Server.
|
|
XmPrintToFile hides the details of X display connection and XpGetDocumentData to the Motif application programmer. This function is a convenience routine that hides the details of the X and Xp internals to the application programmer by calling the XpGetDocumentData function with appropriate save and finish callbacks. This is used in the context of X Printing when the user has specified the "print... |
|
XmProcessTraversal(3) -- A function that determines which component receives keyboard events when a widget has the focus
|
|
XmProcessTraversal determines which component of a hierarchy receives keyboard events when the hierarchy that contains the given widget has keyboard focus. XmProcessTraversal changes focus only when the keyboard focus policy of the widget hierarchy is explicit. If the XmNkeyboardFocusPolicy of the nearest shell ancestor of the given widget is not XmEXPLICIT, XmProcessTraversal returns False withou... |
|
XmPushButton(3) -- The PushButton widget class
|
|
PushButton issues commands within an application. It consists of a text label or pixmap surrounded by a border shadow. When a PushButton is selected, the shadow changes to give the appearance that it has been pressed in. When a PushButton is unselected, the shadow changes to give the appearance that it is out. The default behavior associated with a PushButton in a menu depends on the type of menu ... |
|
XmPushButtonGadget(3) -- The PushButtonGadget widget class
|
|
PushButtonGadget issues commands within an application. It consists of a text label or pixmap surrounded by a border shadow. When PushButtonGadget is selected, the shadow changes to give the appearance that the PushButtonGadget has been pressed in. When PushButtonGadget is unselected, the shadow changes to give the appearance that the PushButtonGadget is out. The default behavior associated with a... |
|
XmRedisplayWidget(3) -- Synchronously activates the expose method of a widget to draw its content
|
|
This function is a convenience routine that hides the details of the Xt internals to the application programmer by calling the expose method of the given widget with a well formed Expose event and Region corresponding to the total area of the widget. If the widget doesn't have an Expose method, the function does nothing. This is primarily used in the context of X Printing if the programming model... |
|
XmRegisterSegmentEncoding(3) -- A compound string function that registers a compound text encoding format for a specified font list element ta
|
|
XmRegisterSegmentEncoding registers a compound text encoding format with the specified font list element tag. The XmCvtXmStringToCT function uses this registry to map the font list tags of compound string segments to compound text encoding formats. Registering a font list tag that already exists in the registry overwrites the original entry. You can unregister a font list tag by passing a NULL val... |
|
XmRemoveFromPostFromList(3) -- a RowColumn function that disables a menu for a particular widget
|
|
XmRemoveFromPostFromList makes a Popup or Pulldown menu no longer accessible from a widget. This function does not destroy a menu, or deallocate the memory associated with it. It simply removes the widget from the menu's list of widgets permitted to post that menu. If the menu argument refers to a Popup menu, the event handlers are removed from the post_from_widget widget. If the argument refers ... |
|
XmRemoveProtocolCallback(3) -- A VendorShell function that removes a callback from the internal list
|
|
XmRemoveProtocolCallback removes a callback from the internal list. XmRemoveWMProtocolCallback is a convenience interface. It calls XmRemoveProtocolCallback with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. shell Specifies the widget with which the protocol property is associated property Specifies the protocol property protocol Specifies the protocol atom callback Specif... |
|
XmRemoveProtocols(3) -- A VendorShell function that removes the protocols from the protocol manager and deallocates the internal table
|
|
XmRemoveProtocols removes the protocols from the protocol manager and deallocates the internal tables. If any of the protocols are active, it will update the handlers and update the property if shell is realized. XmRemoveWMProtocols is a convenience interface. It calls XmRemoveProtocols with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. shell Specifies the widget with whic... |
|
XmRemoveTabGroup(3) -- A function that removes a tab group
|
|
This function is obsolete and its behavior is replaced by setting XmNnavigationType to XmNONE. XmRemoveTabGroup removes a widget from the list of tab groups associated with a particular widget hierarchy and sets the widget's XmNnavigationType to XmNONE. tab_group Specifies the widget ID |
|
XmRemoveWMProtocolCallback(3) -- A VendorShell convenience interface that removes a callback from the internal list
|
|
XmRemoveWMProtocolCallback is a convenience interface. It calls XmRemoveProtocolCallback with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. shell Specifies the widget with which the protocol property is associated protocol Specifies the protocol atom callback Specifies the procedure to call when a protocol message is received closure Specifies the client data to be passed ... |
|
XmRemoveWMProtocols(3) -- A VendorShell convenience interface that removes the protocols from the protocol manager and deallocates the i
|
|
XmRemoveWMProtocols is a convenience interface. It calls XmRemoveProtocols with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. shell Specifies the widget with which the protocol property is associated protocols Specifies the protocol atoms num_protocols Specifies the number of elements in protocols For a complete definition of VendorShell and its associated resources, see V... |
|
XmRenderTable(3) -- Data type for a render table
|
|
XmRenderTable is the data type for a render table, which contains a table of renditions (XmRenditions). Each rendition consists of a set of attributes for rendering text, including a font or fontset, colors, tabs, and lines. Each rendition is identified with a tag. When a compound string is displayed, for each segment in the string, the rendition used to render that string is formed as follows. If... |
|
XmRenderTableAddRenditions(3) -- Creates a new render table
|
|
XmRenderTableAddRenditions is a function to create a new render table that includes the renditions listed in oldtable, if there is one. This function also copies specified renditions (renditions) to the new render table. The first rendition_count renditions of the renditions array are added to the new table. If a rendition is tagged with a tag that matches a tag already in oldtable, then the exist... |
|
XmRenderTableCopy(3) -- A render table function that copies renditions
|
|
XmRenderTableCopy creates a new render table which will contain the renditions of the table whose tags match those in tags. table Specifies the table containing the renditions to be copied. tags Specifies an array of tags, whose corresponding renditions are to be copied. NULL indicates that the complete table should be copied. tag_count Specifies the number of tags in tags. |
|
XmRenderTableCvtFromProp(3) -- A render table function that converts from a string representation to a render table
|
|
XmRenderTableCvtFromProp converts a string of characters representing a render table to a render table. This routine is typically used by the destination of a data transfer operation to produce a render table from a transferred representation. widget Specifies the widget that is the destination for the render table property Specifies a string of characters representing a render table length Specif... |
|
XmRenderTableCvtToProp(3) -- A render table function that converts a render table to a string representation
|
|
XmRenderTableCvtToProp converts a render table to a string of characters representing the render table. This routine is typically used by the source of a data transfer operation to produce a representation for transferring a render table to a destination. widget Specifies the widget that is the source of the render table table Specifies a render table to be converted prop_return Specifies a pointe... |
|
XmRenderTableFree(3) -- A render table function that recovers memory
|
|
XmRenderTableFree frees the memory associated with the specified render table. table Specifies the table to be freed. |
|
XmRenderTableGetRendition(3) -- A convenience function that matches a rendition tag
|
|
XmRenderTableGetRendition searches table and returns a copy of the rendition whose XmNtag resource matches tag. If no rendition matches, then NULL is returned. This function is to be used for just one rendition match. It is the responsibility of the caller to free the returned rendition with the XmRenditionFree function. table Specifies the table containing renditions to be searched. tag Specifies... |
|
XmRenderTableGetRenditions(3) -- A convenience function that matches rendition tags
|
|
XmRenderTableGetRenditions searches table and returns an array of copies of the renditions whose XmNtag resources match a tag in tags. If no renditions match, then NULL is returned. The size of the returned array is tag_count. The XmNtag resource of each rendition will match the corresponding tag in tags. If no match is found for a particular tag, the corresponding slot in the return value will be... |
|
XmRenderTableGetTags(3) -- A convenience function that gets rendition tags
|
|
XmRenderTableGetTags searches the specified table for the XmNtag resources of all the renditions (XmRenditions) entries. These tag resources are then composed into an array. table Specifies the table containing the XmRenditions. tag_list Is the array of XmStringTags generated by this function. The function allocates space to hold the returned tags and to hold the tag_list itself. The application i... |
|
XmRenderTableRemoveRenditions(3) -- A convenience function that removes renditions
|
|
XmRenderTableRemoveRenditions removes from oldtable the renditions whose tags match the tags specified in tags, then places the remaining renditions in a newly created render table. oldtable Specifies the render table from which renditions are to be removed. This function deallocates the original render table and the matching renditions after extracting the required information. tags Specifies an ... |
|
XmRendition(3) -- The Rendition registry
|
|
XmRendition is a pseudo widget used for the rendering of XmStrings. XmRendition has two parts: XmStringTag and rendering information. The XmStringTag part can be matched with an XmStringTag associated with a LOCALE, CHARSET, or RENDITION[BEGIN|END] component within XmString. The rendering information contains information about the font or fontset, colors, tabs, and lines to be used in rendering a ... |
|
XmRenditionCreate(3) -- A convenience function that creates a rendition
|
|
XmRenditionCreate creates a rendition whose resources are set to the values specified in arglist. Default values are assigned to resources that are not specified. widget Specifies the widget used for deriving any necessary information for creating the rendition. In particular, the X display of widget will be used for loading fonts. tag Specifies the tag for the rendition. (This will become the XmN... |
|
XmRenditionFree(3) -- A convenience function that frees a rendition
|
|
XmRenditionFree recovers memory used by rendition. rendition Specifies the rendition to be freed. |
|
XmRenditionRetrieve(3) -- A convenience function that retrieves rendition resources
|
|
XmRenditionRetrieve extracts values for the given resources (arglist) from the specified rendition. Note that the function returns the actual values of the resources, not copies. Therefore it is necessary to copy before modifying any resource whose value is an address. This will include such resources as XmNfontName, XmNfont, and XmNtabList. rendition Specifies the rendition. arglist Specifies the... |
|
XmRenditionUpdate(3) -- A convenience function that modifies resources
|
|
XmRenditionUpdate modifies resources in the specified rendition. rendition Specifies the rendition. arglist Specifies the argument list. argcount Specifies the number of attribute/value pairs in the argument list (arglist). |
|
XmRepTypeAddReverse(3) -- A representation type manager function that installs the reverse converter for a previously registered represe
|
|
XmRepTypeAddReverse installs the reverse converter for a previously registered representation type. The reverse converter takes a numerical representation type value and returns its corresponding string value. Certain applications may require this capability to obtain a string value to display on a screen or to build a resource file. The values argument of the XmRepTypeRegister function can be use... |
|
XmRepTypeGetId(3) -- A representation type manager function that retrieves the identification number of a representation type
|
|
XmRepTypeGetId searches the registration list for the specified representation type and returns the associated identification number. rep_type Specifies the representation type for which an identification number is requested |
|
XmRepTypeGetNameList(3) -- A representation type manager function that generates a list of values for a representation type
|
|
XmRepTypeGetNameList generates a NULL-terminated list of the value names associated with the specified representation type. Each value name is a NULL-terminated string. This routine allocates memory for the returned data. The application must free this memory using XtFree. rep_type_id Specifies the identification number of the representation type. use_uppercase_format Specifies a Boolean value tha... |
|
XmRepTypeGetRecord(3) -- A representation type manager function that returns information about a representation type
|
|
XmRepTypeGetRecord retrieves information about a particular representation type that is registered with the representation type manager. This routine allocates memory for the returned data. The application must free this memory using XtFree. rep_type_id The identification number of the representation type The representation type entry structure contains the following information: typedef struct { ... |
|
XmRepTypeGetRegistered(3) -- A representation type manager function that returns a copy of the registration list
|
|
XmRepTypeGetRegistered retrieves information about all representation types that are registered with the representation type manager. The registration list is an array of structures, each of which contains information for a representation type entry. The end of the registration list is marked with a representation type entry whose rep_type_name field has a NULL pointer. This routine allocates memo... |
|
XmRepTypeInstallTearOffModelConvert(3) -- A representation type manager function that installs the resource converter for XmNtearOffModel.
|
|
XmRepTypeInstallTearOffModelConverter installs the resource converter that allows values for the XmNtearOffModel resource to be specified in resource default files. |
|
XmRepTypeRegister(3) -- A representation type manager function that registers a representation type resource
|
|
XmRepTypeRegister registers a representation type resource with the representation type manager. All features of the representation type management facility become available for the specified representation type. The function installs a forward type converter to convert string values to numerical representation type values. When the values argument is NULL, consecutive numerical values are assumed... |
|
XmRepTypeValidValue(3) -- A representation type manager function that tests the validity of a numerical value of a representation type r
|
|
XmRepTypeValidValue tests the validity of a numerical value for a given representation type resource. The function generates a default warning message if the value is invalid and the enable_default_warning argument is non-NULL. rep_type_id Specifies the identification number of the representation type. test_value Specifies the numerical value to test. enable_default_warning Specifies the ID of the... |
|
XmResolveAllPartOffsets(3) -- A function that allows writing of upwardcompatible applications and widgets
|
|
Note: This routine is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. You should call XmeResolvePartOffsets instead. The use of offset records requires two extra global variables per widget class. The variables consist of pointers to arrays of offsets into the widget record and constraint record for each part of the widget structure. The XmResolveAllPartOffsets function allocates the... |
|
XmResolvePartOffsets(3) -- A function that allows writing of upwardcompatible applications and widgets
|
|
The use of offset records requires one extra global variable per widget class. The variable consists of a pointer to an array of offsets into the widget record for each part of the widget structure. The XmResolvePartOffsets function allocates the offset records needed by an application to guarantee upward-compatible access to widget instance records by applications and widgets. These offset record... |
|
XmRowColumn(3) -- The RowColumn widget class
|
|
The RowColumn widget is a general purpose RowColumn manager capable of containing any widget type as a child. In general, it requires no special knowledge about how its children function and provides nothing beyond support for several different layout styles. However, it can be configured as a menu, in which case, it expects only certain children, and it configures to a particular layout. The menu... |
|
XmScale(3) -- The Scale widget class
|
|
Scale is used by an application to indicate a value from within a range of values, and it allows the user to input or modify a value from the same range. A Scale has an elongated rectangular region similar to a ScrollBar. A slider inside this region indicates the current value along the Scale. The user can also modify the Scale's value by moving the slider within the rectangular region of the Sca... |
|
XmScaleGetValue(3) -- A Scale function that returns the current slider position
|
|
XmScaleGetValue returns the current slider position value displayed in the scale. widget Specifies the Scale widget ID value_return Returns the current slider position value For a complete definition of Scale and its associated resources, see XmScale(3). |
|
XmScaleSetTicks(3) -- A Scale function that controls tick marks
|
|
XmScaleSetTicks controls the number, location, and size of the tick marks on a Scale. Each tick mark is a SeparatorGadget oriented perpendicular to the Scale's orientation. For example, if the Scale is oriented horizontally, the tick marks will be oriented vertically. If you specify tick marks for a Scale and then change the Scale's orientation, you will have to do the following: + Remove all th... |
|
XmScaleSetValue(3) -- A Scale function that sets a slider value
|
|
XmScaleSetValue sets the slider value within the Scale widget. widget Specifies the Scale widget ID. value Specifies the slider position along the scale. This sets the XmNvalue resource. For a complete definition of Scale and its associated resources, see XmScale(3). |
|
XmScreen(3) -- The Screen widget class
|
|
The XmScreen object is used by Motif widgets to store information that is specific to a screen. It also allows the toolkit to store certain information on widget hierarchies that would otherwise be unavailable. Each client has one XmScreen object for each screen that it accesses. An XmScreen object is automatically created when the application creates the first shell on a screen (usually accomplis... |
|
XmScrollBar(3) -- The ScrollBar widget class
|
|
The ScrollBar widget allows the user to view data that is too large to be displayed all at once. ScrollBars are usually located inside a ScrolledWindow and adjacent to the widget that contains the data to be viewed. When the user interacts with the ScrollBar, the data within the other widget scrolls. A ScrollBar consists of two arrows placed at each end of a rectangle. The rectangle is called the ... |
|
XmScrollBarGetValues(3) -- A ScrollBar function that returns the ScrollBar's increment values
|
|
XmScrollBarGetValues returns the the ScrollBar's increment values. The scroll region is overlaid with a slider bar that is adjusted in size and position using the main ScrollBar or set slider function attributes. widget Specifies the ScrollBar widget ID. value_return Returns the ScrollBar's slider position between the XmNminimum and XmNmaximum resources. Specify NULL to prevent the return of a p... |
|
XmScrollBarSetValues(3) -- A ScrollBar function that changes ScrollBar's increment values and the slider's size and position
|
|
XmSetScrollBarValues changes the ScrollBar's increment values and the slider's size and position. The scroll region is overlaid with a slider bar that is adjusted in size and position using the main ScrollBar or set slider function attributes. widget Specifies the ScrollBar widget ID. value Specifies the ScrollBar's slider position. Refer to the XmNvalue resource described on XmScrollBar(3). sl... |
|
XmScrolledWindow(3) -- The ScrolledWindow widget class
|
|
The ScrolledWindow widget combines one or two ScrollBar widgets and a viewing area to implement a visible window onto some other (usually larger) data display. The visible part of the window can be scrolled through the larger display by the use of ScrollBars. To use ScrolledWindow, an application first creates a ScrolledWindow widget, any needed ScrollBar widgets, and a widget capable of displayin... |
|
XmScrolledWindowSetAreas(3) -- A ScrolledWindow function that adds or changes a window work region and a horizontal or vertical ScrollBar wid
|
|
XmScrolledWindowSetAreas adds or changes a window work region and a horizontal or vertical ScrollBar widget to the ScrolledWindow widget for the application. Each widget is optional and may be passed as NULL. This function is obsolete and exists for compatibility with other releases. Use the XmNscrolledWindowChildType resource of XmScrolledWindow instead. widget Specifies the ScrolledWindow widget... |
|
XmScrollVisible(3) -- A ScrolledWindow function that makes an invisible descendant of a ScrolledWindow work area visible
|
|
XmScrollVisible makes an obscured or partially obscured widget or gadget descendant of a ScrolledWindow work area visible. The function repositions the work area and sets the specified margins between the widget and the nearest viewport boundary. The widget's location relative to the viewport determines whether one or both of the margins must be adjusted. This function requires that the XmNscroll... |
|
XmSelectionBox(3) -- The SelectionBox widget class
|
|
SelectionBox is a general dialog widget that allows the user to select one item from a list. By default, a SelectionBox includes the following: + A scrolling list of alternatives + An editable text field for the selected alternative + Labels for the list and text field + Three or four buttons The default button labels are OK, Cancel, and Help. By default an Apply button is also created; if the par... |
|
XmSelectionBoxGetChild(3) -- A SelectionBox function that is used to access a component
|
|
XmSelectionBoxGetChild is used to access a component within a SelectionBox. The parameters given to the function are the SelectionBox widget and a value indicating which component to access. NOTE: This routine is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. Instead of calling XmSelectionBoxGetChild, you should call XtNameToWidget as described in the XmSelectionBox(3) reference pag... |
|
XmSeparator(3) -- The Separator widget class
|
|
Separator is a primitive widget that separates items in a display. Several different line drawing styles are provided, as well as horizontal or vertical orientation. The Separator line drawing is automatically centered within the height of the widget for a horizontal orientation and centered within the width of the widget for a vertical orientation. An XtSetValues with a new XmNseparatorType resiz... |
|
XmSeparatorGadget(3) -- The SeparatorGadget widget class
|
|
SeparatorGadget separates items in a display. Several line drawing styles are provided, as well as horizontal or vertical orientation. Lines drawn within the SeparatorGadget are automatically centered within the height of the gadget for a horizontal orientation and centered within the width of the gadget for a vertical orientation. An XtSetValues with a new XmNseparatorType resizes the widget to i... |
|
XmSetColorCalculation(3) -- A function to set the procedure used for default color calculation
|
|
XmSetColorCalculation sets the procedure to calculate default colors. This procedure is used to calculate the foreground, top shadow, bottom shadow, and select colors on the basis of a given background color. If called with an argument of NULL, it restores the default procedure used to calculate colors. color_proc Specifies the procedure to use for color calculation. Following is a description of ... |
|
XmSetFontUnit(3) -- A function that sets the font unit value for a display
|
|
XmSetFontUnit provides an external function to initialize font unit values. Applications may want to specify resolution-independent data based on a global font size. See the XmNunitType resource description in the reference pages for XmGadget, XmManager, and XmPrimitive for more information on resolution independence. This function sets the font units for all screens on the display. NOTE: XmSetFon... |
|
XmSetFontUnits(3) -- A function that sets the font unit value for a display
|
|
XmSetFontUnits provides an external function to initialize font unit values. Applications may want to specify resolution-independent data based on a global font size. This function must be called before any widgets with resolution-independent data are created. See the XmNunitType resource description in the reference pages for XmGadget, XmManager, and XmPrimitive for more information on resolution... |
|
XmSetMenuCursor(3) -- A function that modifies the menu cursor for a client
|
|
XmSetMenuCursor programmatically modifies the menu cursor for a client; after the cursor has been created by the client, this function registers the cursor with the menu system. After calling this function, the specified cursor is displayed whenever this client displays a Motif menu on the indicated display. The client can then specify different cursors on different displays. This function sets th... |
|
XmSetProtocolHooks(3) -- A VendorShell function that allows preactions and postactions to be executed when a protocol message is receiv
|
|
XmSetProtocolHooks is used by shells that want to have preactions and postactions executed when a protocol message is received from MWM. Since there is no guaranteed ordering in execution of event handlers or callback lists, this allows the shell to control the flow while leaving the protocol manager structures opaque. XmSetWMProtocolHooks is a convenience interface. It calls XmSetProtocolHooks wi... |
|
XmSetWMProtocolHooks(3) -- A VendorShell convenience interface that allows preactions and postactions to be executed when a protocol mess
|
|
XmSetWMProtocolHooks is a convenience interface. It calls XmSetProtocolHooks with the property value set to the atom returned by interning WM_PROTOCOLS. shell Specifies the widget with which the protocol property is associated protocol Specifies the protocol atom (or an int cast to Atom) prehook Specifies the procedure to call before calling entries on the client callback list pre_closure Specifie... |
|
XmSimpleSpinBox(3) -- a simple SpinBox widget class
|
|
The XmSimpleSpinBox widget is a user interface control to increment and decrement an arbitrary TextField. For example, it can be used to cycle through the months of the year or days of the month. Widget subclassing is not supported for the XmSimpleSpinBox widget class. |
|
XmSimpleSpinBoxAddItem(3) -- add an item to the XmSimpleSpinBox
|
|
The XmSimpleSpinBoxAddItem function adds the given item to the XmSimpleSpinBox at the given position. The w argument specifies the widget ID. The item argument specifies the XmString for the new item. The pos argument specifies the position of the new item. |
|
XmSimpleSpinBoxDeletePos(3) -- delete a XmSimpleSpinBox item
|
|
The XmSimpleSpinBoxDeletePos function deletes a specified item from a XmSimpleSpinBox widget. The w argument specifies the widget ID. The pos argument specifies the position of the item to be deleted. A value of 1 means the first item in the list; zero means the last item. |
|
XmSimpleSpinBoxSetItem(3) -- set an item in the XmSimpleSpinBox list
|
|
The XmSimpleSpinBoxSetItem function selects an item in the list of the given XmSimpleSpinBox widget and makes it the current value. The w argument specifies the widget ID. The item argument specifies the XmString for the item to be set in the XmSimpleSpinBox. If the item is not found on the list, XmSimpleSpinBoxSetItem notifies the user via the XtWarning function. |
|
XmSpinBox(3) -- The SpinBox widget class
|
|
SpinBox allows the user to select a value from a ring of related but mutually exclusive choices which are displayed in sequence. The SpinBox always has an increment arrow, a decrement arrow, and one or more other children. The choices are displayed, one at a time, in a traversable text child ( XmText or XmTextField. The user clicks on an arrow to display the next (or previous) item in the r... |
|
XmSpinBoxValidatePosition(3) -- translate the current value of the specified XmSpinBox child into a valid position
|
|
The XmSpinBoxValidatePosition function is a utility that can be used by applications wanting to implement a policy for tracking user modifications to editable XmSpinBox children of type XmNUMERIC. The specifics of when and how the user's modifications take effect is left up to the application. text_field The text_field argument specifies the widget ID of the child of the XmSpinBox that is being m... |
|
XmString(3) -- Data type for a compound string
|
|
XmString is the data type for a compound string. Compound strings consist of a sequence of components, including, but not limited to, the following: + XmSTRING_COMPONENT_SEPARATOR + XmSTRING_COMPONENT_TAB + XmSTRING_COMPONENT_LAYOUT_POP + XmSTRING_COMPONENT_DIRECTION + XmSTRING_COMPONENT_LAYOUT_PUSH + XmSTRING_COMPONENT_CHARSET + XmSTRING_COMPONENT_FONTLIST_ELEMENT_TAG + XmSTRING_COMPONENT_LOCALE ... |
|
XmStringBaseline(3) -- A compound string function that returns the number of pixels between the top of the character box and the base
|
|
XmStringBaseline returns the number of pixels between the top of the character box and the baseline of the first line of text in the provided compound string. rendertable Specifies the render table string Specifies the string |
|
XmStringByteCompare(3) -- A compound string function that indicates the
|
|
This function is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. XmStringByteCompare returns a Boolean indicating the results of a byte-by-byte comparison of two compound strings. In general, if two compound strings are created with the same (char *) string using XmStringCreateLocalized in the same language environment, the compound strings compare as equal. If two compound strings a... |
|
XmStringByteStreamLength(3) -- A function that returns the size of a string
|
|
XmStringByteStreamLength receives a byte stream format string and returns the size, in bytes, of that stream, including the header. Because of this header information, even a NULL string will cause XmStringByteStreamLength to return a non-zero value. string Specifies the byte stream format string. |
|
XmStringCompare(3) -- A compound string function that compares two strings
|
|
XmStringCompare returns a Boolean value indicating the results of a semantically equivalent comparison of two compound strings. Semantically equivalent means that the strings have the same text components, font list element tags, directions, and separators. In general, if two compound strings are created with the same (char *) string using XmStringCreateLocalized in the same language environment, ... |
|
XmStringComponentCreate(3) -- A compound string function that creates arbitrary components
|
|
XmStringComponentCreate creates a new XmString component of type c_type, containing value. If value is invalid for the particular component type, this function fails and returns NULL. c_type Specifies the type of component to be created. length Specifies the length in bytes of value. Note that this must be precisely the length of the value string, not including any trailing null characters. value ... |
|
XmStringComponentType(3) -- Data type for compound string components
|
|
XmStringComponentType is the data type specifying compound string component types. A compound string component identifies some part of a compound string, and can have a value and length. A compound string component can be one of the following types. These component types are grouped according to their length and value types. The following components have values of NULL and lengths of 0 (zero). |
|
XmStringConcat(3) -- A compound string function that appends one string to another
|
|
XmStringConcat copies s2 to the end of s1 and returns a copy of the resulting compound string. The original strings are preserved. The function will allocate space to hold the returned compound string. The application is responsible for managing the allocated space. The application can recover the allocated space by calling XmStringFree. s1 Specifies the compound string to which a copy of s2 is ap... |
|
XmStringConcatAndFree(3) -- A compound string function that appends one string to another and frees the original strings
|
|
XmStringConcatAndFree copies s2 to the end of s1 and returns a copy of the resulting compound string. The original strings are freed. The function will allocate space to hold the returned compound string. The application is responsible for managing the allocated space. The application can recover the allocated space by calling XmStringFree. s1 Specifies the compound string to which a copy of s2 is... |
|
XmStringCopy(3) -- A compound string function that makes a copy of a string
|
|
XmStringCopy makes a copy of an existing compound string. When the application no longer needs the returned compound string, the application should call XmStringFree. s1 Specifies the compound string to be copied |
|
XmStringCreate(3) -- A compound string function that creates a compound string
|
|
XmStringCreate creates a compound string with two components: text and a font list element tag. The function will allocate space to hold the returned compound string. When the application no longer needs the returned compound string, the application should call XmStringFree. text Specifies a NULL-terminated string to be used as the text component of the compound string. tag Specifies the tag compo... |
|
XmStringCreateLocalized(3) -- A compound string function that creates a compound string in the current locale
|
|
XmStringCreateLocalized creates a compound string containing the specified text in the current language environment. An identical compound string would result from the function XmStringCreate called with XmFONTLIST_DEFAULT_TAG explicitly as the tag component. The function will allocate space to hold the returned compound string. The application is responsible for managing the allocated space. The ... |
|
XmStringCreateLtoR(3) -- A compound string function that creates a compound string
|
|
This function is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. It is replaced by XmStringGenerate. XmStringCreateLtoR creates a compound string with two components: text and a tag component. This function scans for \n characters in the text. When one is found, the text up to that point is put into a segment followed by a separator component. No final separator component is appende... |
|
XmStringCreateSimple(3) -- A compound string function that creates a compound string in the language environment of a widget
|
|
XmStringCreateSimple creates a compound string with a text component and a charset tag. It derives the character set from the current language environment. The routine attempts to derive a character set from the value of the LANG environment variable. If this does not result in a valid character set, the routine uses a vendor-specific default. If the vendor has not specified a different value, thi... |
|
XmStringDirection(3) -- Data type for the direction of display in a string
|
|
XmStringDirection is the data type for specifying the direction in which the system displays characters of a string, or characters of a segment of a compound string. This is an enumeration with three possible values: |
|
XmStringDirectionCreate(3) -- A compound string function that creates a compound string
|
|
XmStringDirectionCreate creates a compound string with a single component, a direction with the given value. When the application no longer needs the returned compound string, the application should call XmStringFree. direction Specifies the value of the direction component. The possible values are: |
|
XmStringDirectionToDirection(3) -- A function that converts from XmStringDirection to XmDirection
|
|
XmStringDirectionToDirection converts the specified XmStringDirection direction value to its equivalent XmDirection value. This function provides backward compatibility with the XmStringDirection data type. direction Specifies the XmStringDirection value to be converted. |
|
XmStringDraw(3) -- A compound string function that draws a compound string in an X window
|
|
XmStringDraw draws a compound string in an X Window. If a compound string segment uses a rendition that contains a font set, the graphic context passed to this routine will have the GC font member left in an undefined state. The underlying XmbStringDraw function called by this routine modifies the font ID field of the GC passed into it and does not attempt to restore the font ID to the incoming va... |
|
XmStringDrawImage(3) -- A compound string function that draws a compound string in an X Window and creates an image
|
|
XmStringDrawImage draws a compound string in an X Window and paints both the foreground and background bits of each character. If a compound string segment uses a rendition that contains a font set, the graphic context passed to this routine will have the GC font member left in an undefined state. The underlying XmbStringDraw function called by this routine modifies the font ID field of the GC pas... |
|
XmStringDrawUnderline(3) -- A compound string function that underlines a string drawn in an X Window
|
|
XmStringDrawUnderline draws a compound string in an X Window. If the substring identified by underline can be matched in string, the substring will be underlined. Once a match has occurred, no further matches or underlining will be done. Only the first text component of underline is used for matching. If a compound string segment uses a rendition that contains a font set, the graphic context passe... |
|
XmStringEmpty(3) -- A compound string function that provides information
|
|
XmStringEmpty returns a Boolean value indicating whether any nonzero-length text components exist in the provided compound string. It returns True if there are no text segments in the string. If this routine is passed NULL as the string, it returns True. s1 Specifies the compound string |
|
XmStringExtent(3) -- A compound string function that determines the size of the smallest rectangle that will enclose the compound s
|
|
XmStringExtent determines the width and height, in pixels, of the smallest rectangle that will enclose the provided compound string. rendertable Specifies the render table string Specifies the string width Specifies a pointer to the width of the rectangle height Specifies a pointer to the height of the rectangle |
|
XmStringFree(3) -- A compound string function that conditionally deallocates memory
|
|
XmStringFree conditionally recovers memory used by a compound string. Applications should call XmStringFree when the application no longer needs string. string Specifies the compound string to be freed |
|
XmStringFreeContext(3) -- A compound string function that releases the string scanning context data structure
|
|
XmStringFreeContext releases the string scanning context data structure. context Specifies the string context structure that was allocated by the XmStringInitContext function |
|
XmStringGenerate(3) -- A convenience function that generates a compound string
|
|
XmStringGenerate calls the XmStringParseText function with a default parse table of entries consisting of '0', which maps to Separator, and '', which maps to Tab. Matching RENDITION_BEGIN and RENDITION_END components containing rendition are placed around the resulting XmString. text Specifies a NULL-terminated string containing characters of a type determined by type. tag Specifies the tag to... |
|
XmStringGetLtoR(3) -- A compound string function that searches for a text segment in the input compound string
|
|
This function is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. It is replaced by XmStringUnparse. XmStringGetLtoR returns the first text component in the input compound string that is tagged with the given tag component. The returned text is to be a NULLterminated sequence of single byte characters. If the function returns True, the function will allocate space to hold the returned... |
|
XmStringGetNextComponent(3) -- A compound string function that returns the type and value of the next component in a compound string
|
|
This function is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. It is replaced by XmStringGetNextTriple. XmStringGetNextComponent returns the type and value of the next component in the compound string identified by context. Components are returned one at a time. On return, only some output parameters will be valid; which ones can be determined by examining the returned component ty... |
|
XmStringGetNextSegment(3) -- A compound string function that fetches the bytes in the next segment of a compound string
|
|
This routine is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. To read the contents of a compound string, read each component of the string with XmStringGetNextTriple. This XmString function returns the type, length, and value of the next component in the compound string. XmStringGetNextSegment fetches the bytes in the next segment; repeated calls fetch sequential segments. The text... |
|
XmStringGetNextTriple(3) -- An XmString function that returns the type, length, and value of the next component in the compound string
|
|
XmStringGetNextTriple returns the type, length, and value of the next component in the compound string identified by context. This function returns one component at a time. context Specifies the string context structure that was allocated by the XmStringInitContext function. length Specifies a pointer to the length of the value of the returned component. value Specifies a pointer to the value of t... |
|
XmStringHasSubstring(3) -- A compound string function that indicates whether one compound string is contained within another
|
|
XmStringHasSubstring indicates whether or not one compound string is contained within another. string Specifies the compound string to be searched substring Specifies the compound string to be searched for |
|
XmStringHeight(3) -- A compound string function that returns the line height of the given compound string
|
|
XmStringHeight returns the height, in pixels, of the sum of all the line heights of the given compound string. Separator components delimit lines. rendertable Specifies the render table string Specifies the string |
|
XmStringInitContext(3) -- A compound string function that creates a data structure for scanning an XmString component by component
|
|
XmStringInitContext creates a context to allow applications to read out the contents of a compound string component by component. A Boolean status is returned to indicate that the context could not be initalized. If the function returns True, the function will allocate space to hold the returned context. The application is responsible for managing the allocated space. The memory can be recovered b... |
|
XmStringIsVoid(3) -- A compound string function that provides information
|
|
XmStringIsVoid returns a Boolean value indicating whether or not string s1 is void. s1 Specifies the compound string |
|
XmStringLength(3) -- A compound string function that obtains the length of a compound string
|
|
This function is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. It is replaced by XmStringByteStreamLength. XmStringLength obtains the length of a compound string. It returns the number of bytes in s1 including all tags, direction indicators, and separators. If the compound string has an invalid structure, 0 (zero) is returned. s1 Specifies the compound string |
|
XmStringLineCount(3) -- A compound string function that returns the number of separators plus one in the provided compound string
|
|
XmStringLineCount returns the number of separators plus one in the provided compound string. In effect, it counts the lines of text. string Specifies the string |
|
XmStringNConcat(3) -- A compound string function that appends a specified number of bytes to a compound string
|
|
This function is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. It is replaced by XmStringConcat. XmStringNConcat appends a specified number of bytes from s2 to the end of s1, including tags, directional indicators, and separators. It then returns the resulting compound string. The original strings are preserved. The function allocates space for the resulting compound string. The ap... |
|
XmStringNCopy(3) -- A compound string function that creates a copy of a compound string
|
|
This function is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. XmStringNCopy creates a copy of s1 that contains a specified number of bytes, including tags, directional indicators, and separators. It then returns the resulting compound string. The original strings are preserved. The function allocates space for the resulting compound string. The application is responsible for manag... |
|
XmStringParseText(3) -- A function that converts a character string to a compound string
|
|
XmStringParseText converts characters specified in text to corresponding components in the returned compound string. The resulting compound string consists of at least one locale or charset tag component and a series of XmString text components and other components. The conversion proceeds according to the parse information contained in parse_table. See the Motif Programmer's Guide for more infor... |
|
XmStringPeekNextComponent(3) -- A compound string function that returns the component type of the next component to be fetched
|
|
This function is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. It is replaced by XmStringPeekNextTriple. XmStringPeekNextComponent examines the next component that would be fetched by XmStringGetNextComponent and returns the component type. context Specifies the string context structure that was allocated by the XmStringInitContext function |
|
XmStringPeekNextTriple(3) -- A function that returns the component type of the next component
|
|
XmStringPeekNextTriple examines the next component that would be fetched by XmStringGetNextTriple and returns the component type. context Specifies the string context structure that was allocated by the XmStringInitContext function. |
|
XmStringPutRendition(3) -- A convenience function that places renditions around strings
|
|
XmStringPutRendition places matching Xm_STRING_COMPONENT_RENDITION_BEGIN and XmSTRING_COMPONENT_RENDITION_END components containing rendition around string. The original string is preserved. string Specifies the compound string to which begin and end rendition components should be added. rendition Specifies the rendition tag to be used in an XmSTRING_COMPONENT_RENDITION_BEGIN component which will ... |
|
XmStringSegmentCreate(3) -- A compound string function that creates a compound string
|
|
This function is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. It can be replaced by using a combination of XmStringComponentCreate and XmStringConcat. XmStringSegmentCreate is a high-level function that assembles a compound string consisting of a font list element tag, a direction component, a text component, and an optional separator component. The function allocates space for th... |
|
XmStringSeparatorCreate(3) -- A compound string function that creates a compound string
|
|
XmStringSeparatorCreate creates a compound string with a single component, a separator. |
|
XmStringTable(3) -- Data type for an array of compound strings
|
|
XmStringTable is the data type for an array of compound strings (objects of type XmString). |
|
XmStringTableParseStringArray(3) -- A convenience function that converts an array of strings to a compound string table
|
|
XmStringTableParseStringArray takes an array of strings, allocates an XmStringTable with an equal number of slots, calls XmStringParseText on each string in strings, and inserts the resulting XmString in the corresponding slot in the XmStringTable. strings Specifies an array of strings of characters as determined by type. count Specifies the number of strings in strings. tag Specifies the tag to b... |
|
XmStringTableProposeTablist(3) -- A convenience function that returns a tab list
|
|
XmStringTableProposeTablist takes an XmStringTable structure containing tabbed compound strings, information on padding between columns, and rendering information and returns a tab list that, if used to render the strings in the table, would cause the strings to line up in columns with no overlap and with the specified amount of padding between the widest item in each column and the start of the n... |
|
XmStringTableToXmString(3) -- A convenience function that converts a compound string table to a single compound string
|
|
XmStringTableToXmString takes as input table of compound strings and a specified string component (such as a tab) and returns a single compound string consisting of each of the elements of table concatenated together with a single copy of break_component inserted between each element. table Specifies an XmStringTable containing the compound strings to be converted. count Specifies the number of co... |
|
XmStringTableUnparse(3) -- A convenience function that converts a table of compound strings to an array of text
|
|
XmStringTableUnparse takes an array of compound strings, allocates a string array for the type of characters determined by type with an equal number of slots, calls XmStringUnparse on each compound string in table, and inserts the resulting string in the corresponding slot in the array. table Specifies an XmStringTable containing the compound string to be converted. count Specifies the number of c... |
|
XmStringToXmStringTable(3) -- A convenience function that converts a single compound string to a table of compound strings
|
|
XmStringToXmStringTable takes as input a single compound string and a specified string component (such as a tab) and returns a table of compound strings consisting of portions of string delimited by components matching break_component. The components marking breaks will not appear in the resulting table. string Specifies the XmString to be converted. break_component Specifies the XmStringComponent... |
|
XmStringUnparse(3) -- A compound string function that unparses text
|
|
XmStringUnparse looks in the input string for text segments that are tagged with locale or charset tags that match tag. The tag_type parameter specifies whether the tag is a locale or charset type. If tag has a value of NULL, all the segments are matched. When a text segment is found with a matching tag, it is added to the end of a resulting string. The characters in the resulting string are of ty... |
|
XmStringWidth(3) -- A compound string function that returns the width of the widest line in a compound string
|
|
XmStringWidth returns the width, in pixels, of the widest line in the provided compound string. rendertable Specifies the render table string Specifies the string |
|
XmTab(3) -- Data type for a tab stop
|
|
XmTab is a data structure that specifies a tab stop to be used in rendering an XmString containing tab components. An XmTab value contains a value, a unit type, an offset model (either XmABSOLUTE or XmRELATIVE), an alignment model (XmALIGNMENT_BEGINNING), and a decimal point character. The resource file syntax for XmTab is specified in the XmTabList reference page. |
|
XmTabCreate(3) -- A convenience function that creates a tab stop
|
|
XmTabCreate creates a tab stop at a position defined by the value and units arguments. value Specifies the floating point value to be used in conjunction with units to calculate the location of the tab stop. Note that negative values are not permitted. units Specifies the unit type (for example, XmMILLIMETERS) to be used in conjunction with value to calculate the location of the tab stop. You can ... |
|
XmTabFree(3) -- A convenience function that frees a tab
|
|
XmTabFree frees the memory associated with the specified tab. tab Specifies the tab to be freed. |
|
XmTabGetValues(3) -- A convenience function that returns tab values
|
|
XmTabGetValues takes an XmTab structure, returns the floating point number that is set as the value of the tab, and then sets values for the units, offset, alignment, and decimal arguments where they are not NULL. The returned floating point number represents the distance that the rendering of the XmString segment associated with tab will be offset. The offset is from either the beginning of the r... |
|
XmTabList(3) -- Data type for a tab list
|
|
XmTabList is the data type for a tab list. A tab list consists of tab stop list entries (XmTabs). Whenever a tab component is encountered while an XmString is being rendered, the origin of the next X draw depends on the next XmTab. If a tab stop would cause text to overlap, the x position for the segment is reset to follow immediately after the end of the previous segment. Tab lists are specified ... |
|
XmTabListCopy(3) -- A convenience function that creates a new tab list from an existing list
|
|
XmTabListCopy creates a new tab list consisting of a copy of a portion of the contents of the tablist argument. This function starts copying at the specified offset value of the tab list and copies count values. tablist Specifies a tab list to be copied. offset Specifies where to start copying. A value of 0 (zero) indicates begin at the beginning, a value of 1 indicates to skip the first tab, and ... |
|
XmTabListFree(3) -- A convenience function that frees the memory of a new tab list
|
|
XmTabListFree recovers memory used by a tab list. In addition, this function frees all contained tabs. If the tablist is NULL, the function returns immediately. tablist Specifies the tab list to be freed. |
|
XmTabListGetTab(3) -- A convenience function that returns a copy of a tab
|
|
XmTabListGetTab returns a copy of the tab that is located at the specified position in the tab list. tablist Specifies the tab list. position Specifies the position of the tab to be returned. A value of 0 (zero) returns the first tab in the tab list, a value of 1 returns the second tab, and so on. |
|
XmTabListInsertTabs(3) -- A convenience function that inserts tabs into a tab list
|
|
XmTabListInsertTabs creates a new tab list that includes the tabs in oldlist. This function copies specified tabs to the tab list at the given position. The first tab_count tabs of the tabs array are added to the tab list. If oldlist is NULL, XmTabListInsertTabs creates a new tab list containing only the tabs specified. oldlist Specifies the tab list to add the tabs to. The function deallocates ol... |
|
XmTabListRemoveTabs(3) -- A convenience function that removes noncontiguous tabs
|
|
XmTabListRemoveTabs removes noncontiguous tabs from a tab list. The function creates a new tab list by copying the contents of oldlist and removing all tabs whose corresponding positions appear in the position_list array. A warning message is displayed if a specified position is invalid; for example, if the value is a number greater than the number of tabs in the tab list. tablist Specifies the ta... |
|
XmTabListReplacePositions(3) -- A convenience function that creates a new tab list with replacement tabs
|
|
XmTabListReplacePositions creates a new tab list that contains the contents of oldlist, but with the tabs at the positions in position_list replaced with copies of the corresponding tabs in tabs. A warning message is displayed if a specified position is invalid; for example, if the value is a number greater than the number of tabs in the tab list. This function deallocates the original tab list af... |
|
XmTabListTabCount(3) -- A convenience function that counts the number of tabs
|
|
XmTabListTabCount counts the number of tabs in the specified tablist. tablist Specifies the tab list. |
|
XmTabSetValue(3) -- A convenience function that sets a tab stop
|
|
XmTabSetValue sets the value field of the XmTab structure associated with tab. tab Specifies the tab to set the value of. value Specifies the floating point number which represents the distance that the rendering of the XmString segment associated with tab will be offset. The offset is from either the beginning of the rendering or from the previous tab stop, depending on the setting for the offset... |
|
XmTargetsAreCompatible(3) -- A function that tests whether the target types match between a drop site and source object
|
|
XmTargetsAreCompatible determines whether the import targets of the destination match any of the export targets of a source. If there is at least one target in common, the function returns True. display Specifies the display connection. export_targets Specifies the list of target atoms associated with the source object. This resource identifies the selection targets the source can convert to. num_... |
|
XmText(3) -- The Text widget class
|
|
Text provides a single-line and multiline text editor for customizing both user and programmatic interfaces. It can be used for single-line string entry, forms entry with verification procedures, and fullwindow editing. It provides an application with a consistent editing system for textual data. The screen's textual data adjusts to the application writer's needs. Text provides separate callback... |
|
XmTextClearSelection(3) -- A Text function that clears the primary selection
|
|
XmTextClearSelection clears the primary selection in the Text widget. widget Specifies the Text widget ID. time Specifies the server time at which the selection value is desired. This should be the time of the event that triggered this request. One source of a valid time stamp is the function XtLastTimestampProcessed(). For a complete definition of Text and its associated resources, see XmText(3). |
|
XmTextCopy(3) -- A Text function that copies the primary selection to the clipboard
|
|
XmTextCopy copies the primary selected text to the clipboard. This routine calls the XmNconvertCallback procedures, possibly multiple times, with the selection member of the XmConvertCallbackStruct set to CLIPBOARD and with the parm member set to XmCOPY. widget Specifies the Text widget ID. time Specifies the server time at which the selection value is to be modified. This should be the time of th... |
|
XmTextCopyLink(3) -- A Text function that copies a link to the primary selection to the clipboard
|
|
XmTextCopyLink copies a link to the primary selected text to the clipboard. This routine calls the XmNconvertCallback procedures, possibly multiple times, with the selection member of the XmConvertCallbackStruct set to CLIPBOARD and with the parm member set to XmLINK. The Text widget itself does not copy any links; XmNconvertCallback procedures are responsible for copying the link to the clipboard... |
|
XmTextCut(3) -- A Text function that copies the primary selection to the clipboard and deletes the selected text
|
|
XmTextCut copies the primary selected text to the clipboard and then deletes the primary selected text. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback or XmNmodifyVerifyCallbackWcs, or both. If both verification callback lists are registered, the procedures of the XmNmodifyVerifyCallback list are executed first and the resulting ... |
|
XmTextDisableRedisplay(3) -- A Text function that temporarily prevents visual update of the Text widget
|
|
XmTextDisableRedisplay prevents redisplay of the specified Text widget even though its visual attributes have been modified. The visual appearance of the widget remains unchanged until XmTextEnableRedisplay is called, although the insertion cursor is not displayed. This allows an application to make multiple changes to the widget without causing intermediate visual updates. widget Specifies the Te... |
|
XmTextEnableRedisplay(3) -- A Text function that forces the visual update of a Text widget
|
|
XmTextEnableRedisplay is used in conjunction with XmTextDisableRedisplay, which suppresses visual update of the Text widget. When XmTextEnableRedisplay is called, it determines if any visual attributes have been set or modified for the specified widget since XmTextDisableRedisplay was called. If so, it forces the widget to update its visual display for all of the intervening changes. Any subsequen... |
|
XmTextField(3) -- The TextField class
|
|
The TextField widget provides a single line text editor for customizing both user and programmatic interfaces. It is used for single-line string entry, and forms entry with verification procedures. It provides an application with a consistent editing system for textual data. TextField provides separate callback lists to verify movement of the insert cursor, modification of the text, and changes in... |
|
XmTextFieldClearSelection(3) -- A TextField function that clears the primary selection
|
|
XmTextFieldClearSelection clears the primary selection in the TextField widget. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID. time Specifies the time at which the selection value is desired. This should be the time of the event that triggered this request. For a complete definition of TextField and its associated resources, see XmTextField(3). |
|
XmTextFieldCopy(3) -- A TextField function that copies the primary selection to the clipboard
|
|
XmTextFieldCopy copies the primary selected text to the clipboard. This routine calls the XmNconvertCallback procedures, possibly multiple times, with the selection member of the XmConvertCallbackStruct set to CLIPBOARD and with the parm member set to XmCOPY. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID. time Specifies the time at which the selection value is to be modified. This should be the time of... |
|
XmTextFieldCopyLink(3) -- A TextField function that copies a link to the primary selection to the clipboard
|
|
XmTextFieldCopyLink copies a link to the primary selected text to the clipboard. This routine calls the XmNconvertCallback procedures, possibly multiple times, with the selection member of the XmConvertCallbackStruct set to CLIPBOARD and with the parm member set to XmLINK. The TextField widget itself does not copy any links; XmNconvertCallback procedures are responsible for copying the link to the... |
|
XmTextFieldCut(3) -- A TextField function that copies the primary selection to the clipboard and deletes the selected text
|
|
XmTextFieldCut copies the primary selected text to the clipboard and then deletes the primary selected text. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback or XmNmodifyVerifyCallbackWcs, or both. If both verification callback lists are registered, the procedures of the XmNmodifyVerifyCallback list are executed first and the resul... |
|
XmTextFieldGetBaseline(3) -- A TextField function that accesses the y position of the baseline
|
|
XmTextFieldGetBaseline accesses the y position of the baseline in the TextField widget, relative to the y position of the top of the widget. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID For a complete definition of TextField and its associated resources, see XmTextField(3). |
|
XmTextFieldGetEditable(3) -- A TextField function that accesses the edit permission state
|
|
XmTextFieldGetEditable accesses the edit permission state of the TextField widget. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID For a complete definition of TextField and its associated resources, see XmTextField(3). |
|
XmTextFieldGetInsertionPosition(3) -- A TextField function that accesses the position of the insertion cursor
|
|
XmTextFieldGetInsertionPosition accesses the insertion cursor position of the TextField widget. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID For a complete definition of TextField and its associated resources, see XmTextField(3). |
|
XmTextFieldGetLastPosition(3) -- A TextField function that accesses the position of the last text character
|
|
XmTextFieldGetLastPosition accesses the position of the last character in the text buffer of the TextField widget. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID For a complete definition of TextField and its associated resources, see XmTextField(3). |
|
XmTextFieldGetMaxLength(3) -- A TextField function that accesses the value of the current maximum allowable length of a text string entered
|
|
XmTextFieldGetMaxLength accesses the value of the current maximum allowable length of the text string in the TextField widget entered from the keyboard. The maximum allowable length prevents the user from entering a text string larger than this limit. Note that the maximum allowable length is the same as the value of the widget's XmNmaxLength resource. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID For... |
|
XmTextFieldGetSelection(3) -- A TextField function that retrieves the value of the primary selection
|
|
XmTextFieldGetSelection retrieves the value of the primary selection. It returns a NULL pointer if no text is selected in the widget. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated with the string by calling XtFree. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID For a complete definition of TextField and its associated resources, see XmTextField(3). |
|
XmTextFieldGetSelectionPosition(3) -- A TextField function that accesses the position of the primary selection
|
|
XmTextFieldGetSelectionPosition accesses the left and right position of the primary selection in the text buffer of the TextField widget. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID left Specifies the pointer in which the position of the left boundary of the primary selection is returned. This is an integer number of characters from the beginning of the buffer. The first character position is 0 (zero... |
|
XmTextFieldGetSelectionWcs(3) -- A TextField function that retrieves the value of a wide character encoded primary selection
|
|
XmTextFieldGetSelectionWcs retrieves the value of the primary selection, encoded in a wide character format. It returns a NULL pointer if no text is selected in the widget. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated with the wide character buffer by calling XtFree. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID For a complete definition of TextField and its associated resources, s... |
|
XmTextFieldGetString(3) -- A TextField function that accesses the string value
|
|
XmTextFieldGetString accesses the string value of the TextField widget. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated with the string by calling XtFree. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID For a complete definition of TextField and its associated resources, see XmTextField(3). |
|
XmTextFieldGetStringWcs(3) -- A TextField function that retrieves a copy of the wide character string value of a TextField widget
|
|
XmTextFieldGetStringWcs retrieves a copy of the wide character string value of the TextField widget. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated with the string by calling XtFree. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID For a complete definition of TextField and its associated resources, see XmTextField(3). |
|
XmTextFieldGetSubstring(3) -- A TextField function that retrieves a copy of a portion of the internal text buffer
|
|
XmTextFieldGetSubstring retrieves a copy of a portion of the internal text buffer of a TextField widget. The function copies a specified number of characters from a given start position in the internal text buffer into a buffer provided by the application. A NULL terminator is placed at the end of the copied data. The size of the required buffer depends on the maximum number of bytes per character... |
|
XmTextFieldGetSubstringWcs(3) -- A TextField function that retrieves a portion of a wide character internal text buffer
|
|
XmTextFieldGetSubstringWcs retrieves a copy of a portion of the internal text buffer of a TextField widget that is stored in a wide character format. The function copies a specified number of characters from a given start position in the internal text buffer into a buffer provided by the application. A NULL terminator is placed at the end of the copied data. widget Specifies the TextField widget I... |
|
XmTextFieldInsert(3) -- A TextField function that inserts a character string into a text string
|
|
XmTextFieldInsert inserts a character string into the text string in the TextField widget. The character positions begin at 0 (zero) and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the text. For example, to insert a string after the fourth character, the position parameter must be 4. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCall... |
|
XmTextFieldInsertWcs(3) -- A TextField function that inserts a wide character string into a TextField widget
|
|
XmTextFieldInsertWcs inserts a wide character string into the TextField widget at a specified location. The character positions begin at 0 (zero) and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the text. For example, to insert a string after the fourth character, the position parameter must be 4. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmod... |
|
XmTextFieldPaste(3) -- A TextField function that inserts the clipboard selection
|
|
XmTextFieldPaste inserts the clipboard selection at the insertion cursor of the destination widget. If XmNpendingDelete is True and the insertion cursor is inside the current selection, the clipboard selection replaces the selected text. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback or XmNmodifyVerifyCallbackWcs, or both. If bot... |
|
XmTextFieldPasteLink(3) -- A TextField function that inserts a link to the clipboard selection
|
|
XmTextFieldPasteLink inserts a link to the clipboard selection at the insertion cursor. This routine calls the widget's XmNdestinationCallback procedures with the selection member of the XmDestinationCallbackStruct set to CLIPBOARD and with the operation member set to XmLINK. The TextField widget itself performs no transfers; the XmNdestinationCallback procedures are responsible for inserting the... |
|
XmTextFieldPosToXY(3) -- A TextField function that accesses the x and y position of a character position
|
|
XmTextFieldPosToXY accesses the x and y position, relative to the upper left corner of the TextField widget, of a given character position in the text buffer. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID position Specifies the character position in the text for which the x and y position is accessed. This is an integer number of characters from the beginning of the buffer. The first character position... |
|
XmTextFieldRemove(3) -- A TextField function that deletes the primary selection
|
|
XmTextFieldRemove deletes the primary selected text. If there is a selection, this routine also calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback or XmNmodifyVerifyCallbackWcs, or both. If both verification callback lists are registered, the procedures of the XmNmodifyVerifyCallback list are executed first and the resulting data is passed to the... |
|
XmTextFieldReplace(3) -- A TextField function that replaces part of a text string
|
|
XmTextFieldReplace replaces part of the text string in the TextField widget. The character positions begin at 0 (zero) and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the text. An example text replacement would be to replace the second and third characters in the text string. To accomplish this, the parameter from_pos must be 1 and to_pos must be 3. To insert a string after the fourth characte... |
|
XmTextFieldReplaceWcs(3) -- A TextField function that replaces part of a wide character string in a TextField widget
|
|
XmTextFieldReplaceWcs replaces part of the wide character string in the TextField widget. The character positions begin at 0 (zero) and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the text. An example text replacement would be to replace the second and third characters in the text string. To accomplish this, the parameter from_pos must be 1 and to_pos must be 3. To insert a string after the fo... |
|
XmTextFieldSetAddMode(3) -- A TextField function that sets the state of Add mode
|
|
XmTextFieldSetAddMode controls whether or not the TextField widget is in Add mode. When the widget is in Add mode, the insert cursor can be moved without disturbing the primary selection. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID state Specifies whether or not the widget is in Add mode. A value of True turns on Add mode; a value of False turns off Add mode. For a complete definition of TextField an... |
|
XmTextFieldSetEditable(3) -- A TextField function that sets the edit permission
|
|
XmTextFieldSetEditable sets the edit permission state of the TextField widget. When set to True, the text string can be edited. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID editable Specifies a Boolean value that when True allows text string edits For a complete definition of TextField and its associated resources, see XmTextField(3). |
|
XmTextFieldSetHighlight(3) -- A TextField function that highlights text
|
|
XmTextFieldSetHighlight highlights text between the two specified character positions. The mode parameter determines the type of highlighting. Highlighting text merely changes the visual appearance of the text; it does not set the selection. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID left Specifies the position of the left boundary of text to be highlighted. This is an integer number of characters f... |
|
XmTextFieldSetInsertionPosition(3) -- A TextField function that sets the position of the insertion cursor
|
|
XmTextFieldSetInsertionPosition sets the insertion cursor position of the TextField widget. This routine also calls the widget's XmNmotionVerifyCallback callbacks if the insertion cursor position changes. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID position Specifies the position of the insert cursor. This is an integer number of characters from the beginning of the text buffer. The first character ... |
|
XmTextFieldSetMaxLength(3) -- A TextField function that sets the value of the current maximum allowable length of a text string entered from
|
|
XmTextFieldSetMaxLength sets the value of the current maximum allowable length of the text string in the TextField widget. The maximum allowable length prevents the user from entering a text string from the keyboard that is larger than this limit. Strings that are entered using the XmNvalue (or XmNvalueWcs) resource, or the XmTextFieldSetString (or XmTextFieldSetStringWcs) function ignore this res... |
|
XmTextFieldSetSelection(3) -- A TextField function that sets the primary selection of the text
|
|
XmTextFieldSetSelection sets the primary selection of the text in the widget. It also sets the insertion cursor position to the last position of the selection and calls the widget's XmNmotionVerifyCallback callbacks. XmTextFieldSetSelection always generates an XmNgainPrimaryCallback unless it fails to take ownership of the primary text selection. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID first Mar... |
|
XmTextFieldSetString(3) -- A TextField function that sets the string value
|
|
XmTextFieldSetString sets the string value of the TextField widget. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback or XmNmodifyVerifyCallbackWcs, or both. If both verification callback lists are registered, the procedures of the XmNmodifyVerifyCallback list are executed first and the resulting data is passed to the XmNmodifyVerif... |
|
XmTextFieldSetStringWcs(3) -- A TextField function that sets a wide character string value
|
|
XmTextFieldSetStringWcs sets the wide character string value of the TextField widget. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback or XmNmodifyVerifyCallbackWcs, or both. If both verification callback lists are registered, the procedures of the XmNmodifyVerifyCallback list are executed first and the resulting data is passed to ... |
|
XmTextFieldShowPosition(3) -- A TextField function that forces text at a given position to be displayed
|
|
XmTextFieldShowPosition forces text at the specified position to be displayed. The cursor position is not updated nor is the cursor shown at this position. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID position Specifies the character position to be displayed. This is an integer number of characters from the beginning of the text buffer. The first character position is 0 (zero). See XmTextPosition(3) f... |
|
XmTextFieldXYToPos(3) -- A TextField function that accesses the character position nearest an x and y position
|
|
XmTextFieldXYToPos accesses the character position nearest to the specified x and y position, relative to the upper left corner of the TextField widget. widget Specifies the TextField widget ID x Specifies the x position, relative to the upper left corner of the widget. y Specifies the y position, relative to the upper left corner of the widget. For a complete definition of TextField and its assoc... |
|
XmTextFindString(3) -- A Text function that finds the beginning position of a text string
|
|
XmTextFindString locates the beginning position of a specified text string. This routine searches forward or backward for the first occurrence of the string starting from the given start position. If it finds a match, the function returns the position of the first character of the string in position. If the match string begins at the current position, this routine returns the current position. wid... |
|
XmTextFindStringWcs(3) -- A Text function that finds the beginning position of a wide character text string
|
|
XmTextFindStringWcs locates the beginning position of a specified wide character text string. This routine searches forward or backward for the first occurrence of the string, starting from the given start position. If a match is found, the function returns the position of the first character of the string in position. If the match string begins at the current position, this routine returns the cu... |
|
XmTextGetBaseline(3) -- A Text function that accesses the y position of the baseline
|
|
XmTextGetBaseline accesses the y position of the baseline in the Text widget, relative to the y position of the top of the widget. In vertical mode (when the XmNlayoutDirection resource is XmTOP_TO_BOTTOM) this function returns 0 and the program should use XmTextGetCenterline widget Specifies the Text widget ID For a complete definition of Text and its associated resources, see XmText(3). |
|
XmTextGetCenterline(3) -- Return the height (length) of a character string when the writing direction is vertical
|
|
XmTextGetCenterline accesses the x position of the centerline in the Text widget, relative to the x position of the top of the widget. widget Specifies the Text widget ID. |
|
XmTextGetEditable(3) -- A Text function that accesses the edit permission state
|
|
XmTextGetEditable accesses the edit permission state of the Text widget. widget Specifies the Text widget ID For a complete definition of Text and its associated resources, see XmText(3). |
|
XmTextGetInsertionPosition(3) -- A Text function that accesses the position of the insert cursor
|
|
XmTextGetInsertionPosition accesses the insertion cursor position of the Text widget. widget Specifies the Text widget ID For a complete definition of Text and its associated resources, see XmText(3). |
|
XmTextGetLastPosition(3) -- A Text function that accesses the last position in the text
|
|
XmTextGetLastPosition accesses the last position in the text buffer of the Text widget. This is an integer number of characters from the beginning of the buffer, and represents the position that text added to the end of the buffer is placed after. The first character position is 0 (zero). The last character position is equal to the number of characters in the text buffer. widget Specifies the Text... |
|
XmTextGetMaxLength(3) -- A Text function that accesses the value of the current maximum allowable length of a text string entered from
|
|
XmTextGetMaxLength accesses the value of the current maximum allowable length of the text string in the Text widget entered from the keyboard. The maximum allowable length prevents the user from entering a text string larger than this limit. Note that the maximum allowable length is the same as the value of the widget's XmNmaxLength resource. widget Specifies the Text widget ID For a complete def... |
|
XmTextGetSelection(3) -- A Text function that retrieves the value of the primary selection
|
|
XmTextGetSelection retrieves the value of the primary selection. It returns a NULL pointer if no text is selected in the widget. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated with the string by calling XtFree. widget Specifies the Text widget ID For a complete definition of Text and its associated resources, see XmText(3). |
|
XmTextGetSelectionPosition(3) -- A Text function that accesses the position of the primary selection
|
|
XmTextGetSelectionPosition accesses the left and right position of the primary selection in the text buffer of the Text widget. widget Specifies the Text widget ID left Specifies the pointer in which the position of the left boundary of the primary selection is returned. This is an integer number of characters from the beginning of the buffer. The first character position is 0 (zero). right Specif... |
|
XmTextGetSelectionWcs(3) -- A Text function that retrieves the value of a wide character encoded primary selection
|
|
XmTextGetSelectionWcs retrieves the value of the primary selection that is encoded in a wide character format. It returns a NULL pointer if no text is selected in the widget. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated with the wide character buffer by calling XtFree. widget Specifies the Text widget ID For a complete definition of Text and its associated resources, see XmTex... |
|
XmTextGetSource(3) -- A Text function that accesses the source of the widget
|
|
XmTextGetSource accesses the source of the Text widget. Text widgets can share sources of text so that editing in one widget is reflected in another. This function accesses the source of one widget so that it can be made the source of another widget, using the function XmTextSetSource(3). Setting a new text source destroys the old text source if no other Text widgets are using that source. To repl... |
|
XmTextGetString(3) -- A Text function that accesses the string value
|
|
XmTextGetString accesses the string value of the Text widget. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated with the string by calling XtFree. widget Specifies the Text widget ID For a complete definition of Text and its associated resources, see XmText(3). |
|
XmTextGetStringWcs(3) -- A Text function that retrieves a copy of the wide character string value of a Text widget
|
|
XmTextGetStringWcs retrieves a copy of the wide character string value of the Text widget. The application is responsible for freeing the storage associated with the string by calling XtFree. widget Specifies the Text widget ID For a complete definition of Text and its associated resources, see XmText(3). |
|
XmTextGetSubstring(3) -- A Text function that retrieves a copy of a portion of the internal text buffer
|
|
XmTextGetSubstring retrieves a copy of a portion of the internal text buffer of a Text widget. The function copies a specified number of characters from a given start position in the internal text buffer into a buffer provided by the application. A NULL terminator is placed at the end of the copied data. The size of the required buffer depends on the maximum number of bytes per character (MB_CUR_M... |
|
XmTextGetSubstringWcs(3) -- A Text function that retrieves a portion of a wide character internal text buffer
|
|
XmTextGetSubstringWcs retrieves a copy of a portion of the internal text buffer of a Text widget that is stored in a wide character format. The function copies a specified number of characters from a given start position in the internal text buffer into a buffer provided by the application. A NULL terminator is placed at the end of the copied data. widget Specifies the Text widget ID. start Specif... |
|
XmTextGetTopCharacter(3) -- A Text function that accesses the position of the first character displayed
|
|
XmTextGetTopCharacter accesses the position of the text at the top of the Text widget. If there is no text in the Text widget (in other words, XmNvalue contains an empty string), then XmTextGetTopCharacter returns 0. Suppose that the XmNtopCharacter resource has been set to a value greater than the number of characters in the text widget. In this case, XmTextGetTopCharacter returns an XmTextPositi... |
|
XmTextInsert(3) -- A Text function that inserts a character string into a text string
|
|
XmTextInsert inserts a character string into the text string in the Text widget. The character positions begin at 0 (zero) and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the text. For example, to insert a string after the fourth character, the parameter position must be 4. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback or Xm... |
|
XmTextInsertWcs(3) -- A Text function that inserts a wide character string into a Text widget
|
|
XmTextInsertWcs inserts a wide character string into the Text widget at a specified location. The character positions begin at 0 (zero) and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the text. For example, to insert a string after the fourth character, the position parameter must be 4. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyC... |
|
XmTextPaste(3) -- A Text function that inserts the clipboard selection
|
|
XmTextPaste inserts the clipboard selection at the insertion cursor of the destination widget. If XmNpendingDelete is True and the insertion cursor is inside the current selection, the clipboard selection replaces the selected text. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback or XmNmodifyVerifyCallbackWcs, or both. If both ver... |
|
XmTextPasteLink(3) -- A Text function that inserts a link to the clipboard selection
|
|
XmTextPasteLink inserts a link to the clipboard selection at the insertion cursor. This routine calls the widget's XmNdestinationCallback procedures with the selection member of the XmDestinationCallbackStruct set to CLIPBOARD and with the operation member set to XmLINK. The Text widget itself performs no transfers; the XmNdestinationCallback procedures are responsible for inserting the link to t... |
|
XmTextPosition(3) -- Data type for a character position within a text string
|
|
XmTextPosition is an integer data type that holds a character's position within a text string for Text and TextField. An XmTextPosition value conceptually points to the gap between two characters. For example, consider a text string consisting of N characters. A value of 0 refers to the position immediately prior to the first character. A value of 1 refers to the position in between the first and... |
|
XmTextPosToXY(3) -- A Text function that accesses the x and y position of a character position
|
|
XmTextPosToXY accesses the x and y position, relative to the upper left corner of the Text widget, of a given character position in the text buffer. In the case of horizontal writing, the position is the origin of the character. In the case of vertical writing, the position is the vertical origin of the character. widget Specifies the Text widget ID position Specifies the character position in the... |
|
XmTextRemove(3) -- A Text function that deletes the primary selection
|
|
XmTextRemove deletes the primary selected text. If there is a selection, this routine also calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback or XmNmodifyVerifyCallbackWcs, or both. If both verification callback lists are registered, the procedures of the XmNmodifyVerifyCallback list are executed first and the resulting data is passed to the XmNm... |
|
XmTextReplace(3) -- A Text function that replaces part of a text string
|
|
XmTextReplace replaces part of the text string in the Text widget. The character positions begin at 0 (zero) and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the text. An example text replacement would be to replace the second and third characters in the text string. To accomplish this, the parameter from_pos must be 1 and to_pos must be 3. To insert a string after the fourth character, both pa... |
|
XmTextReplaceWcs(3) -- A Text function that replaces part of a wide character string in a Text widget
|
|
XmTextReplaceWcs replaces part of the wide character string in the Text widget. The character positions begin at zero and are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the text. An example text replacement would be to replace the second and third characters in the text string. To accomplish this, the from_pos parameter must be 1 and the to_pos parameter must be 3. To insert a string after the fo... |
|
XmTextScroll(3) -- A Text function that scrolls text
|
|
XmTextScroll scrolls text by a given number of lines in a Text widget. The sign of the number is interpreted according to the value of the XmNlayoutDirection resource. widget Specifies the Text widget ID lines Specifies the number of lines of text to scroll. A positive value causes text to scroll upward; a negative value causes text to scroll downward. Note that the text will scroll only as long a... |
|
XmTextSetAddMode(3) -- A Text function that sets the state of Add mode
|
|
XmTextSetAddMode controls whether or not the Text widget is in Add mode. When the widget is in Add mode, the insert cursor can be moved without disturbing the primary selection. widget Specifies the Text widget ID state Specifies whether or not the widget is in Add mode. A value of True turns on Add mode; a value of False turns off Add mode. For a complete definition of Text and its associated res... |
|
XmTextSetEditable(3) -- A Text function that sets the edit permission
|
|
XmTextSetEditable sets the edit permission state of the Text widget. When set to True, the text string can be edited. widget Specifies the Text widget ID editable Specifies a Boolean value that when True allows text string edits For a complete definition of Text and its associated resources, see XmText(3). |
|
XmTextSetHighlight(3) -- A Text function that highlights text
|
|
XmTextSetHighlight highlights text between the two specified character positions. The mode parameter determines the type of highlighting. Highlighting text merely changes the visual appearance of the text; it does not set the selection. widget Specifies the Text widget ID left Specifies the position of the left boundary of text to be highlighted. This is an integer number of characters from the be... |
|
XmTextSetInsertionPosition(3) -- A Text function that sets the position of the insert cursor
|
|
XmTextSetInsertionPosition sets the insertion cursor position of the Text widget. This routine also calls the widget's XmNmotionVerifyCallback callbacks if the insertion cursor position changes. widget Specifies the Text widget ID position Specifies the position of the insertion cursor. This is an integer number of characters from the beginning of the text buffer. The first character position is ... |
|
XmTextSetMaxLength(3) -- A Text function that sets the value of the current maximum allowable length of a text string entered from the
|
|
XmTextSetMaxLength sets the value of the current maximum allowable length of the text string in the Text widget. The maximum allowable length prevents the user from entering a text string from the keyboard that is larger than this limit. Strings that are entered using the XmNvalue (or XmNvalueWcs) resource, or the XmTextSetString (or XmTextSetStringWcs) function ignore this resource. widget Specif... |
|
XmTextSetSelection(3) -- A Text function that sets the primary selection of the text
|
|
XmTextSetSelection sets the primary selection of the text in the widget. It also sets the insertion cursor position to the last position of the selection and calls the widget's XmNmotionVerifyCallback callbacks. widget Specifies the Text widget ID first Marks the first character position of the text to be selected last Marks the last position of the text to be selected time Specifies the time at ... |
|
XmTextSetSource(3) -- A Text function that sets the source of the widget
|
|
XmTextSetSource sets the source of the Text widget. Text widgets can share sources of text so that editing in one widget is reflected in another. This function sets the source of one widget so that it can share the source of another widget. Setting a new text source destroys the old text source if no other Text widgets are using that source. To replace a text source but keep it for later use, crea... |
|
XmTextSetString(3) -- A Text function that sets the string value
|
|
XmTextSetString sets the string value of the Text widget. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback or XmNmodifyVerifyCallbackWcs, or both. If both verification callback lists are registered, the procedures of the XmNmodifyVerifyCallback list are executed first and the resulting data is passed to the XmNmodifyVerifyCallbackW... |
|
XmTextSetStringWcs(3) -- A Text function that sets a wide character string value
|
|
XmTextSetStringWcs sets the wide character string value of the Text widget. This routine calls the widget's XmNvalueChangedCallback and verification callbacks, either XmNmodifyVerifyCallback or XmNmodifyVerifyCallbackWcs, or both. If both verification callback lists are registered, the procedures of the XmNmodifyVerifyCallback list are executed first and the resulting data is passed to the XmNmod... |
|
XmTextSetTopCharacter(3) -- A Text function that sets the position of the first character displayed
|
|
XmTextSetTopCharacter sets the position of the text at the top of the Text widget. If the XmNeditMode is XmMULTI_LINE_EDIT, the line of text that contains top_character is displayed at the top of the widget without the text shifting left or right. If the edit mode is XmSINGLE_LINE_EDIT, the text moves horizontally so that top_character is the first character displayed. widget Specifies the Text wi... |
|
XmTextShowPosition(3) -- A Text function that forces text at a given position to be displayed
|
|
XmTextShowPosition forces text at the specified position to be displayed. If the XmNautoShowCursorPosition resource is True, the application should also set the insert cursor to this position. widget Specifies the Text widget ID position Specifies the character position to be displayed. This is an integer number of characters from the beginning of the text buffer. The first character position is 0... |
|
XmTextXYToPos(3) -- A Text function that accesses the character position nearest an x and y position
|
|
XmTextXYToPos accesses the character position nearest to the specified x and y position, relative to the upper left corner of the Text widget. In the case of horizontal writing, the position is the origin of the character. In the case of vertical writing, the position is the vertical origin of the character. widget Specifies the Text widget ID x Specifies the x position, relative to the upper left... |
|
XmToggleButton(3) -- The ToggleButton widget class
|
|
ToggleButton sets nontransitory state data within an application. Usually this widget consists of an indicator (square, diamond, or round) with either text or a pixmap on one side of it. However, it can also consist of just text or a pixmap without the indicator. The toggle graphics display a 1-of-many, N-of-many, or 1-of-many-round selection state. When a toggle indicator is displayed, a square i... |
|
XmToggleButtonGadget(3) -- The ToggleButtonGadget widget class
|
|
ToggleButtonGadget sets nontransitory state data within an application. Usually this gadget consists of an indicator (square, diamond, or round) with either text or a pixmap on one side of it. However, it can also consist of just text or a pixmap without the indicator. The toggle graphics display a 1-of-many, N-of-many, or N-of-many-round selection state. When a toggle indicator is displayed, a sq... |
|
XmToggleButtonGadgetGetState(3) -- A ToggleButtonGadget function that obtains the state of a ToggleButtonGadget
|
|
XmToggleButtonGadgetGetState obtains the state of a ToggleButtonGadget. widget Specifies the ToggleButtonGadget ID For a complete definition of ToggleButtonGadget and its associated resources, see XmToggleButtonGadget(3). |
|
XmToggleButtonGadgetSetState(3) -- A ToggleButtonGadget function that sets or changes the current state
|
|
XmToggleButtonGadgetSetState sets or changes the ToggleButtonGadget's current state. widget Specifies the ToggleButtonGadget widget ID. state Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the ToggleButtonGadget state is selected or unselected. If the value is True, the button state is selected; if it is False, the button state is unselected. notify Indicates whether XmNvalueChangedCallback is ... |
|
XmToggleButtonGetState(3) -- A ToggleButton function that obtains the state of a ToggleButton
|
|
XmToggleButtonGetState obtains the state of a ToggleButton. widget Specifies the ToggleButton widget ID For a complete definition of ToggleButton and its associated resources, see XmToggleButton(3). |
|
XmToggleButtonSetState(3) -- A ToggleButton function that sets or changes the current state
|
|
XmToggleButtonSetState sets or changes the ToggleButton's current state. widget Specifies the ToggleButton widget ID. state Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the ToggleButton state is selected or unselected. If the value is True, the button state is selected; if it is False, the button state is unselected. notify Indicates whether XmNvalueChangedCallback is called; it can be either... |
|
XmToggleButtonSetValue(3) -- A ToggleButton function that sets or changes the current state
|
|
XmToggleButtonSetValue sets or changes the ToggleButton's current state. widget Specifies the ToggleButton widget ID. state Specifies whether the ToggleButton state is selected or unselected. If the value is True, the button state is selected; if it is False, the button state is unselected, if it is XmINDETERMINATE, the button state is neither. notify Indicates whether XmNvalueChangedCallback is ... |
|
XmTrackingEvent(3) -- A Toolkit function that provides a modal interaction
|
|
XmTrackingEvent provides a modal interface for selection of a component. It is intended to support context help. The function calls the XmUpdateDisplay function. XmTrackingEvent then grabs the pointer and discards succeeding events until BSelect is released or a key is pressed and then released. The function then returns the widget or gadget that contains the pointer when BSelect is released or a ... |
|
XmTrackingLocate(3) -- A Toolkit function that provides a modal interaction
|
|
XmTrackingLocate provides a modal interface for selection of a component. It is intended to support context help. This function is implemented as XmTrackingEvent. NOTE: This function is obsolete and exists for compatibility with previous releases. It has been replaced by XmTrackingEvent. widget Specifies the widget ID of a widget to use as the basis of the modal interaction. That is, the widget wi... |
|
XmTransferDone(3) -- A toolkit function that completes a data transfer
|
|
XmTransferDone completes an already-initiated data transfer operation. An application can call this routine from an XmNdestinationCallback procedure or any function called as a result, including the selection procedures called as a result of calls to XmTransferValue. The caller of XmTransferDone supplies an identifier for the transfer operation and an indication of the completion status. XmTransfe... |
|
XmTransferSendRequest(3) -- A toolkit function that transfers a MULTIPLE request
|
|
XmTransferSendRequest marks the end of a MULTIPLE request started by XmTransferStartRequest. transfer_id Specifies a unique indentifier for the data transfer operation. time Specifies the time of the XEvent that triggered the data transfer. You should typically set this field to XtLastTimestampProcessed. |
|
XmTransferSetParameters(3) -- A toolkit function that establishes parameters to be passed by the next call to XmTransferValue
|
|
XmTransferSetParameters establishes a parameter definition. Your application calls XmTransferSetParameters just before calling XmTransferValue, and only if XmTransferValue needs to transfer a value containing a parameter. transfer_id Specifies a unique indentifier for the data transfer operation. The value must be the same as the value of the transfer_id member of the XmDestinationCallbackStruct p... |
|
XmTransferStartRequest(3) -- A toolkit function that begins a MULTIPLE transfer
|
|
XmTransferStartRequest begins a MULTIPLE request. The MULTIPLE request may contain one or more calls to XmTransferValue. Your application concludes a MULTIPLE request by calling XmTransferSendRequest. XmTransferStartRequest is typically called by a destination callback or by a transfer procedure. transfer_id Specifies a unique indentifier for the data transfer operation. You should use the transfe... |
|
XmTransferValue(3) -- A toolkit function that transfers data to a destination
|
|
XmTransferValue converts a selection, transferring any data from the selection owner, in the context of an already-initiated data transfer operation. An application can call this routine from an XmNdestinationCallback procedure or any function called as a result. The caller of XmTransferValue supplies the target to which the selection is converted. The caller also supplies a callback procedure to ... |
|
XmTranslateKey(3) -- The default keycode-to-keysym translator
|
|
XmTranslateKey is the default XtKeyProc translation procedure for Motif applications. The function takes a keycode and modifiers and returns the corresponding keysym. XmTranslateKey serves two main purposes: to enable new translators with expanded functionality to get the default Motif keycode-to-keysym translation in addition to whatever they add, and to reinstall the default translator. This fun... |
|
XmUninstallImage(3) -- A pixmap caching function that removes an image from the image cache
|
|
XmUninstallImage removes an image from the image cache. image Points to the image structure given to the XmInstallImage() routine |
|
XmUpdateDisplay(3) -- A function that processes all pending exposure events immediately
|
|
XmUpdateDisplay provides the application with a mechanism for forcing all pending exposure events to be removed from the input queue and processed immediately. When a user selects a button within a menu pane, the menu panes are unposted and then any activation callbacks registered by the application are invoked. If one of the callbacks performs a time-consuming action, the portion of the applicati... |
|
XmVaCreateSimpleCheckBox(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmVaCreateSimpleCheckBox creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmWORK_AREA and returns the associated widget ID. This routine uses the ANSI C variable-length argument list (varargs) calling convention. This routine creates a CheckBox and its ToggleButtonGadget children. A CheckBox is similar to a RadioBox, except that more than one button can be selected at a time. The name of each but... |
|
XmVaCreateSimpleMenuBar(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmVaCreateSimpleMenuBar creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_BAR and returns the associated widget ID. This routine uses the ANSI C variable-length argument list (varargs) calling convention. This routine creates a MenuBar and its CascadeButtonGadget children. The name of each button is button_n, where n, where n is an integer from 0 (zero) to the number of buttons in the menu ... |
|
XmVaCreateSimpleOptionMenu(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmVaCreateSimpleOptionMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_OPTION and returns the associated widget ID. This routine uses the ANSI C variable-length argument list (varargs) calling convention. This routine creates an OptionMenu and its Pulldown submenu containing PushButtonGadget or CascadeButtonGadget children. The name of each button is button_n, where n, where n is an i... |
|
XmVaCreateSimplePopupMenu(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmVaCreateSimplePopupMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_POPUP and returns the associated widget ID. This routine uses the ANSI C variable-length argument list (varargs) calling convention. This routine creates a Popup menu pane and its button children. The name of each button is button_n, where n, where n is an integer from 0 (zero) to the number of buttons in the menu m... |
|
XmVaCreateSimplePulldownMenu(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmVaCreateSimplePulldownMenu creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmMENU_PULLDOWN and returns the associated widget ID. This routine uses the ANSI C variable-length argument list (varargs) calling convention. This routine creates a Pulldown menu pane and its button children. The name of each button is button_n, where n, where n is an integer from 0 to the number of buttons in the menu... |
|
XmVaCreateSimpleRadioBox(3) -- A RowColumn widget convenience creation function
|
|
XmVaCreateSimpleRadioBox creates an instance of a RowColumn widget of type XmWORK_AREA and returns the associated widget ID. This routine uses the ANSI C variable-length argument list (varargs) calling convention. This routine creates a RadioBox and its ToggleButtonGadget children. The name of each button is button_n, where n, where n is an integer from 0 (zero) to the number of buttons in the men... |
|
XmWidgetGetBaselines(3) -- Retrieves baseline information for a widget
|
|
XmWidgetGetBaselines returns an array that contains one or more baseline values associated with the specified widget. The baseline of any given line of text is a vertical offset in pixels from the origin of the widget's bounding box to the given baseline. widget Specifies the ID of the widget for which baseline values are requested baselines Returns an array that contains the value of each baseli... |
|
XmWidgetGetDisplayRect(3) -- Retrieves display rectangle information for a widget
|
|
XmWidgetGetDisplayRect returns the width, height and the x and ycoordinates of the upper left corner of the display rectangle of the specified widget. The display rectangle is the smallest rectangle that encloses either a string or a pixmap. If the widget contains a string, the return values specify the x and y-coordinates of the upper left corner of the display rectangle relative to the origin of... |
|
__uc_get_ar(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_ar_bsp(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_ar_bspstore(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_ar_ccv(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_ar_csd(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_ar_ec(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_ar_fpsr(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_ar_lc(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_ar_pfs(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_ar_rsc(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_ar_ssd(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_ar_unat(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_brs(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_cfm(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_cr(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_ed(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_frs(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_grs(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_ip(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_prs(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_reason(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_rsebs(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_rsebs64(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_get_um(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_ar(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_ar_ccv(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_ar_csd(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_ar_ec(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_ar_fpsr(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_ar_lc(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_ar_pfs(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_ar_rsc(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_ar_ssd(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_ar_unat(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_brs(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_cfm(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_ed(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_frs(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_grs(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_ip(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_prs(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_rsebs(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_rsebs64(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
__uc_set_um(3) -- ucontext_t (user context) access
|
|
The Ucontext Access interfaces allow an application to access Itanium(R)-based register state contained inside the opaque mcontext_t structure within the ucontext_t user context structure. In all these interfaces, ucp is a pointer to a ucontext_t passed to the application as the third argument to a signal handler, allocated by the user and filled in with getcontext() or read from an application co... |
|
.netrc(4) -- login information for ftp and rexec
|
|
The .netrc file contains login and initialization information used by the ftp autologin process, by the rexec() library routine, and by the rexec command (see ftp(1), rexec(3N), and remsh(1)), respectively. This file is optional. It exists, if at all, in the user's home directory. If the .netrc file contains password or account information for use other than for anonymous ftp, its owner must matc... |
|
.rhosts(4) -- security files authorizing access by remote hosts and users on local host
|
|
The /etc/hosts.equiv file and files named .rhosts found in users' home directories specify remote hosts and users that are "equivalent" to the local host or user. Users from equivalent remote hosts are permitted to access a local account using rcp or remsh or to rlogin to the local account without supplying a password (see rcp(1), remsh(1), and rlogin(1)). The security provided by hosts.equiv i... |
|
a.out(4) -- assembler and link editor output
|
|
ELF a.out The file name a.out is the default output file name from the link editor, ld(1). The link editor will make an a.out executable if there were no errors in linking. The output file of the assembler, as(1), also follows the format of the a.out file although its default file name is different. Programs that manipulate ELF files may use the library that elf(3E) describes. An overview of the f... |
|
acct(4) -- per-process accounting file format
|
|
Files produced as a result of calling acct() (see acct(2)) have records in the form defined by , whose contents are: typedef ushort comp_t; /* "floating point": 13-bit fraction, 3-bit exponent */ struct acct { char ac_flag; /* Accounting flag */ char ac_stat; /* Exit status */ uid_t ac_uid; /* Accounting user ID */ gid_t ac_gid; /* Accounting group ID */ dev_t ac_tty; /* control type... |
|
ar(4) -- common archive file format
|
|
The ar command is used to concatenate several files into an archive file (see ar(1)). Archives are used mainly as libraries to be searched by the link editor (see ld(1)). Each archive begins with the archive magic string. #define ARMAG "!\n" /* magic string */ #define SARMAG 8 /* length of magic string */ Following the archive magic string are the archive file members. Each file member is... |
|
audeventsta(4) -- define and describe audit system events
|
|
The /usr/audit/audeventstab file lists audit event numbers, corresponding mnemonic names, and brief explanations of each event. Blank lines and comments (beginning with a # character) are allowed. Each non-comment, non-blank line in this file contains three parts: event Audit event number in decimal: a single field separated by whitespace. name Corresponding mnemonic name: a single field separated... |
|
audit(4) -- file format and other information for auditing
|
|
Audit records are generated when users make security-relevant system calls, as well as by self-auditing processes that call audwrite() (see audwrite(2)). Access to the auditing system is restricted to superuser. Each audit record consists of an audit record header and a record body. The record header is comprised of time, process ID, error, event type, and record body length. The time refers to th... |
|
authcap(4) -- security databases for trusted systems
|
|
All security-relevant databases are stored in an ASCII format in the file system. This format is converted to binary structures by support routines described in Section 3 manual entries. This manual entry describes the format of these databases, and describes the philosophy of conversion into data structures. |
|
bootconf(4) -- boot device configuration table
|
|
This file, /stand/bootfonf, contains the address and disk layout type of the system's boot devices or lif volumes. It is used by the Software Distributor and HP-UX kernel control scripts (fileset OS- Core.KERN-RUN) to determine how and where to update the initial boot loader. Normally the kernel's checkinstall script queries the system's hardware and creates the file. In rare cases when either ... |
|
btmp(4) -- utmp, wtmp, btmp entry format
|
|
These files, which hold user and accounting information for such commands as last, who, write, and login (see last(1), who(1), write(1), and login(1)), have the following structure as defined by : #define UTMP_FILE "/etc/utmp" #define WTMP_FILE "/var/adm/wtmp" #define BTMP_FILE "/var/adm/btmp" #define ut_name ut_user struct utmp { char ut_user[8]; /* User login name */ char ut_id[4];... |
|
btmps(4) -- user login information
|
|
wtmps and btmps hold user and accounting information for such commands as last, who, write, and login (see last(1), who(1), write(1), and login(1)). File btmps contains bad login entries for each invalid logon attempt. File wtmps contains a record for all logins and logouts apart from accounting records. These files contain utmps-like structure, the key elements of the structure are given below: c... |
|
cdnode(4) -- format of a CDFS cdnode
|
|
This entry describes the cdnode structure and related concepts for the CDFS file system. The CDFS file system does not have the concept of a separate entity called an inode. The information normally found in an HFS inode is kept in a cdnode data structure. However, the cdnode data structure does not reside on the physical media, but instead is kept in kernel memory space only. The cdnode informati... |
|
cdrom(4) -- CD-ROM background information
|
|
This manual entry provides general information on existing CD-ROM standards, terminology, data layout, and levels of support. More detailed information is available in the standard documents listed in SEE ALSO. Not all topics discussed here are supported in the current HP-UX release. Refer to the DEPENDENCIES section for details about the contents of the current release. |
|
charmap(4) -- symbolic translation file for localedef scripts
|
|
Invoking the localedef command with the -f option causes symbolic names in the locale description file to be translated into the encodings given in the charmap file (see localedef(1M)). As a recommendation, a locale description file should be written completely with symbolic names. The charmap file has two sections: a declarations section and a character definition section. |
|
core(4) -- format of core image file
|
|
The HP-UX system writes out a file containing a core image of a terminated process when certain signals are received (see signal(5) for the list of reasons). The most common causes are memory violations, illegal instructions, floating point exceptions, bus errors, and user-generated quit signals. The core image file is called core and is written in the process's working directory (provided it is ... |
|
cpio(4) -- format of cpio archive
|
|
The header structure, when the -c option of cpio is not used (see cpio(1)), is: struct { short c_magic, c_dev; ushort c_ino, c_mode, c_uid, c_gid; short c_nlink, c_rdev, c_mtime[2], c_namesize, c_filesize[2]; char c_name[c_namesize rounded to word]; } Hdr; When the cpio -c option is used, the header information is described by: sscanf(Chdr,"%6ho%6ho%6ho%6ho%6ho%6ho%6ho%6ho%11lo%6ho%11lo", &Hdr.c... |
|
default(4) -- system default database file for a trusted system
|
|
The system default database is unique in that it defines system-wide global parameters for a trusted system. It is designed to provide values for users and devices on a global scale rather than requiring an administrator to replicate values in user or device databases when they are all the same. In addition to being easier to specify global values, it is also much easier to make a global system ch... |
|
devassign(4) -- device assignment database file for a trusted system
|
|
The system supports a single device assignment database that contains entries for local login terminals. The format of the terminal control database file is identical to other trusted system authentication database files. For more information on the file format, see authcap(4). The file consists of keyword field identifiers and values for those fields. The keyword identifiers supported and their u... |
|
dialups(4) -- dialup security control
|
|
dialups and d_passwd are used to control the dialup security feature of login (see login(1)). If /etc/dialups is present, the first word on each line is compared with the name of the line upon which the login is being performed (including the /dev/, as returned by ttyname() (see ttyname(3C)). If the login is occurring on a line found in dialups, dialup security is invoked. Anything after a space o... |
|
dir(4) -- format of directories on short-name HFS file systems
|
|
A directory behaves exactly like an ordinary file, except that no user can write into a directory. The structure of a directory entry as given in the header file is: #define DIRSIZ 14 #define DIRSIZ_CONSTANT 14 #define DIR_PADSIZE 10 #define MAXNAMLEN 255 struct direct { u_long d_ino; /* inode number of entry */ u_short d_reclen; /* length of this record */ u_short d_namlen; /* length ... |
|
disktab(4) -- disk description file
|
|
disktab is a simple database that describes disk geometries. Entries in disktab consist of a number of colon-separated fields. The first entry for each disk gives the names by which the disk is known, separated by vertical bar (|) characters. This file is provided for backward compatibility with previous HP-UX releases only. Its use is discouraged. The following list indicates the normal values st... |
|
dlpi(4) -- data link provider interface standard header file
|
|
is the standard header file containing DLPI requests as prescribed by the DLPI 2.0 standard. It contains the definitions for the primitives, acknowledgements and associated structures. The header file must be included by all DLS users (user-space and kernel-space) who intend to interact with LAN drivers through DLPI. The header file contains definitions for both connection-mode and connec... |
|
dlpi.h(4) -- data link provider interface standard header file
|
|
is the standard header file containing DLPI requests as prescribed by the DLPI 2.0 standard. It contains the definitions for the primitives, acknowledgements and associated structures. The header file must be included by all DLS users (user-space and kernel-space) who intend to interact with LAN drivers through DLPI. The header file contains definitions for both connection-mode and connec... |
|
dlpi_drv(4) -- definitions of interfaces for device drivers to interact with DLPI
|
|
The header file contains definitions of structures and function prototypes that are required by networking device drivers to interact with DLPI (data link provider interface). The header file contains interfaces that could be used by tightly coupled and loosely coupled drivers. DLPI serves as a sole interface to DLS users for tightly coupled drivers. Whereas, a loosely coupled driver ... |
|
dlpi_drv.h(4) -- definitions of interfaces for device drivers to interact with DLPI
|
|
The header file contains definitions of structures and function prototypes that are required by networking device drivers to interact with DLPI (data link provider interface). The header file contains interfaces that could be used by tightly coupled and loosely coupled drivers. DLPI serves as a sole interface to DLS users for tightly coupled drivers. Whereas, a loosely coupled driver ... |
|
dlpi_ext(4) -- HP-specific extensions for DLPI
|
|
is the header file for HP-specific extensions to data link provider interface, DLPI 2.0 standard. The header file contains definitions for primitives, acknowledgements, ioctls and associated structures to satisfy needs of DLS users over and beyond what is provided by DLPI 2.0 standard. The header file must be included by all DLS users (user-space and kernel-space) who intend to intera... |
|
dlpi_ext.h(4) -- HP-specific extensions for DLPI
|
|
is the header file for HP-specific extensions to data link provider interface, DLPI 2.0 standard. The header file contains definitions for primitives, acknowledgements, ioctls and associated structures to satisfy needs of DLS users over and beyond what is provided by DLPI 2.0 standard. The header file must be included by all DLS users (user-space and kernel-space) who intend to intera... |
|
dosif(4) -- DOS Interchange Format description
|
|
The commands doschmod, doscp, dosdf, dosls, dosll, dosmkdir, dosrm, and dosrmdir are targeted for removal from HP-UX. Use the dos2ux and ux2dos commands to convert files between HP-UX and DOS file formats; see dos2ux(1). DOSIF (DOS Interchange Format) is the name given to the media format used by the DOS operating system. This format is based upon that used in IBM PC and PC AT and HP Vectra system... |
|
dp(4) -- dedicated ports file used by DDFA software and Telnet port identification feature
|
|
The dp file has two uses: Datacommunications and Terminal Controller Device File Access The dp file is used by the Datacommunications and Terminal Controller Device File Access (DDFA) software to allow terminal server ports to be programmatically accessed from HP-UX applications in the same way as devices connected directly to the HP-UX system. It contains a one-line entry for each configured term... |
|
d_passwd(4) -- dialup security control
|
|
dialups and d_passwd are used to control the dialup security feature of login (see login(1)). If /etc/dialups is present, the first word on each line is compared with the name of the line upon which the login is being performed (including the /dev/, as returned by ttyname() (see ttyname(3C)). If the login is occurring on a line found in dialups, dialup security is invoked. Anything after a space o... |
|
efi(4) -- Extensible Firmware Interface description
|
|
The EFI (Extensible Firmware Interface) is an interface between HP-UX and the Itanium-based platform firmware. The file system supported by the Extensible Firmware Interface is based on the FAT file system. EFI encompasses the use of FAT-32 for a system partition, and FAT-12 or FAT-16 for removable media. The system partition is required on a bootable disk for the Itanium-based platform. For a har... |
|
exports(4) -- directories to export to NFS clients
|
|
File /etc/exports describes the directories that can be exported to NFS clients. The system administrator creates it using a text editor. mountd processes it each time a mount request is received (see mountd(1M)). /etc/exports is read automatically by the exportfs command (see exportfs(1M)). If this file is changed, exportfs must be run (exportfs -a) before the changes can affect the daemon's ope... |
|
fspec(4) -- format specification in text files
|
|
It is sometimes convenient to maintain text files on the HP-UX system with non-standard tabs, (meaning tabs that are not set at every eighth column). Generally, such files must be converted to a standard format - frequently by replacing all tabs with the appropriate number of spaces - before they can be processed by HP-UX system commands. A format specification occurring in the first line of a tex... |
|
fstab(4) -- static information about the file systems
|
|
fstab is an ASCII file that resides in directory /etc. Programs read it, but do not write to or from it. System administrators are responsible for creating and maintaining this file properly. /etc/fstab contains a list of mountable file-system entries. Each file-system entry appears on a separate line, and consists of fields separated by one or more blanks or tabs. The order of entries in /etc/fst... |
|
fs_vxfs(4) -- format of a VxFS file system volume
|
|
The VxFS super-block always begins at byte offset 8192 from the start of the file system. The super-block location is fixed so that various system utilities know where to locate it. Super-block fields contain the following fundamental sizes and offsets: fs_bsize The block size of the file system. VxFS supports block sizes of 1024, 2048, 4096, and 8192 bytes. The default block size depends on the s... |
|
ftpaccess(4) -- ftpd configuration file
|
|
The /etc/ftpd/ftpaccess file is used to configure the operation of ftpd (see ftpd(1M)). |
|
ftpconversions(4) -- ftpd conversions database
|
|
The conversions known by ftpd and their attributes are stored in an ASCII file that is structured as below. Each line in the file provides a description for a single conversion. Fields are separated by colons (:). %s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Field Description 1 strip prefix 2 strip postfix 3 addon prefix 4 addon postfix 5 external command 6 types 7 options 8 description strip postfix a... |
|
ftpgroups(4) -- group password file for use with the SITE GROUP and SITE GPASS commands.
|
|
The ftpgroups file is the group password file for use with the SITE GROUP and SITE GPASS commands. To enable the use of this file, the entry private yes must be made in the configuration file /etc/ftpd/ftpaccess. This file contains an alphanumeric string, encrypted password, and the actual group name from the /etc/group file. Each entry is separated by :. After a user logs in, the SITE GROUP and S... |
|
ftphosts(4) -- ftpd individual user host access file
|
|
The /etc/ftpd/ftphosts file is used to allow or deny access to certain accounts from various hosts. |
|
ftpservers(4) -- ftpd virtual hosting configuration specification file
|
|
The /etc/ftpd/ftpservers file is used to tell which set of virtual domain configuration files that the ftpd server should use. With VIRTUAL support, wu-ftpd has the ability to use separate configuration files for each virtual domain. For a virtual host, configuration files can be placed into a separate virtual domain directory. The directory path and the virtual host IP address that is to use thos... |
|
ftpusers(4) -- security file for ftpd(1M)
|
|
ftpd rejects remote logins to local user accounts that are named in /etc/ftpd/ftpusers. Each restricted account name must appear alone on a line in the file. The line cannot contain any white space. User accounts that specify a restricted login shell in /etc/passwd should be listed in /etc/ftpd/ftpusers because ftpd accesses local accounts without using their login shells. UUCP accounts should be ... |
|
gated-confi(4) -- GateDaemon Configuration Guide
|
|
Configuration Overview + Introduction + Statement Summary + Preferences and Route Selection + Trace Statements and Global Options + Directive Statements + Options Statements + Interface Statements and Configuration + Definition Statements |
|
gated.conf(4) -- GateDaemon Configuration Guide
|
|
Configuration Overview + Introduction + Statement Summary + Preferences and Route Selection + Trace Statements and Global Options + Directive Statements + Options Statements + Interface Statements and Configuration + Definition Statements |
|
gated.config(4) -- GateDaemon Configuration Guide
|
|
Configuration Overview + Introduction + Statement Summary + Preferences and Route Selection + Trace Statements and Global Options + Directive Statements + Options Statements + Interface Statements and Configuration + Definition Statements |
|
gettydefs(4) -- speed and terminal settings used by getty
|
|
The /etc/gettydefs file contains information used by getty to set up the speed and terminal settings for a line (see getty(1M)). It supplies information on what the login prompt should look like. It also supplies the speed to try next if the user indicates the current speed is not correct by typing a Break character. Each entry in /etc/gettydefs has the following format: label# # initial-flags # f... |
|
group(4) -- group file, grp.h
|
|
group contains for each group the following information: + group name + encrypted password + numerical group ID + comma-separated list of all users allowed in the group This is an ASCII file. Fields are separated by colons, and each group is separated from the next by a new-line. No spaces should separate the fields or parts of fields on any line. If the password field is null, no password is asso... |
|
hosts(4) -- host name data base
|
|
The file /etc/hosts associates Internet (IP) addresses with official host names and aliases. This allows a user to refer to a host by a symbolic name instead of an Internet address. Note: This file must contain all addresses for local interfaces that ifconfig needs at boot time (see ifconfig(1M)). When using the name server (see named(1M)), or Network Information Service (see ypserv(1M)), this fil... |
|
hosts.equiv(4) -- security files authorizing access by remote hosts and users on local host
|
|
The /etc/hosts.equiv file and files named .rhosts found in users' home directories specify remote hosts and users that are "equivalent" to the local host or user. Users from equivalent remote hosts are permitted to access a local account using rcp or remsh or to rlogin to the local account without supplying a password (see rcp(1), remsh(1), and rlogin(1)). The security provided by hosts.equiv i... |
|
inetd.conf(4) -- configuration file for inetd
|
|
On invocation, the inetd daemon reads its configuration information from the /etc/inetd.conf configuration file, and possibly at some later time in response to a SIGHUP signal (see inetd(1M)). Each line in the file is treated either as a comment or as configuration information for a given service Comments are denoted by a # at the beginning of a line. Noncomment lines contain seven or nine require... |
|
inetd.sec(4) -- optional security file for inetd
|
|
When inetd accepts a connection from a remote system, it checks the address of the host requesting the service against the list of hosts to be allowed or denied access to the specific service (see inetd(1M)). The file inetd.sec allows the system administrator to control which hosts (or networks in general) are allowed to use the system remotely. This file constitutes an extra layer of security in ... |
|
inetsvcs.conf(4) -- configuration file for secure internet services
|
|
The internet services, ftp, rcp, remsh, rlogin and telnet, use the /etc/inetsvcs.conf configuration file to decide their behavior (i.e., whether to allow network authentication using Kerberos V5 or not). The contents of the file decide whether the secure internet services are to be enabled or not. This configuration file is updated by the program inetsvcs_sec. The default entry in the file is as f... |
|
info(4) -- diskless client configuration information file
|
|
The info file is a POSIX shell sourceable file which contains parameter definitions used at boot time. Typically, it will be an empty file and default values will be used for all parameters. Following is the list of parameters which can be defined in the info file: ROOT_SERVER_IP Specifies the IP address of the client's private root server. If this is not specified, the client's private root ser... |
|
inittab(4) -- script for the boot init process
|
|
The /etc/inittab file supplies the script to the boot init daemon in its role as a general process dispatcher (see init(1M)). The process that constitutes the majority of boot init's process dispatching activities is the line process /usr/sbin/getty that initiates individual terminal lines. Other processes typically dispatched by boot init are daemons and shells. The inittab file is composed of e... |
|
inode_vxfs(4) -- format of a VxFS file system inode
|
|
A VxFS inode is typically 256 bytes in length, but an inode can also be 512 bytes. You specify the inode size with mkfs. An inode entry has the following format: i_mode The mode and type of file. i_nlink The number of links to the file. i_uid The inode owner. i_gid The inode group. i_size The size in bytes of the file. Eight bytes are allocated. i_atime Time of last access, in struct timeval forma... |
|
intro(4) -- introduction to file formats
|
|
This section outlines the formats of various files. The C struct declarations for the file formats are given where applicable. Usually, these structures can be found in directories /usr/include or /usr/include/sys. |
|
ioconfig(4) -- ioconfig entry format
|
|
The ioconfig file is used to retain information on system's IO configuration across reboots. It contains two types of information: + Mappings of dynamically allocated major numbers to drivers. + Mappings of instance numbers to hardware paths. At boot time this file is read and the information is stored in the io_tree kernel data structure. The ioconfig file is created by insf at install time; and... |
|
issue(4) -- issue identification file
|
|
The file /etc/issue contains the issue or project identification to be printed as a login prompt. This is an ASCII file which is read by the getty program then written to any terminal spawned or respawned from the inittab file. |
|
krb5.conf(4) -- Kerberos configuration file
|
|
The configuration file, krb5.conf, contains information needed by the Kerberos V5 library. This includes information describing the default Kerberos realm and the location of the Kerberos key distribution centers for known realms. The krb5.conf file uses an INI-style format. Sections are delimited by square braces, [ ]. Within each section, there are relations where tags can be assigned to have sp... |
|
libgss(4) -- shared library for GSSAPI (Generic Security Service Application Programming Interface)
|
|
libgss is a shared library which contains all the GSSAPIs as per the RFC 2743 and implemented as C-language interfaces as defined in the RFC 2744, Generic Security Service API : C-bindings. GSSAPI provides security services for applications independent of the various underlying security mechanisms. The services include authentication, integrity and/or confidentiality services. GSSAPI provides secu... |
|
lif(4) -- logical interchange format description
|
|
LIF (Logical Interchange Format) is a Hewlett-Packard standard massstorage format that can be used for interchange of files among various HP computer systems. A LIF volume contains a header (identifying it as a LIF volume) and a directory that defines the contents (i.e. files) of the volume. The size of the directory is fixed when the volume is initialized (see lifinit(1)) and sets an upper bound ... |
|
localedef(4) -- format and semantics of locale definition file
|
|
This is a description of the syntax and meaning of the locale definition that is provided as input to the localedef command to create a locale (see localedef(1M)). The following is a list of category tags, keywords and subsequent expressions which are recognized by localedef. The order of keywords within a category is irrelevant with the exception of the copy keyword and other exceptions noted und... |
|
logingroup(4) -- group file, grp.h
|
|
group contains for each group the following information: + group name + encrypted password + numerical group ID + comma-separated list of all users allowed in the group This is an ASCII file. Fields are separated by colons, and each group is separated from the next by a new-line. No spaces should separate the fields or parts of fields on any line. If the password field is null, no password is asso... |
|
lvmpvg(4) -- LVM physical volume group information file
|
|
lvmpvg is an ASCII file that stores the volume-group information for all of the physical volume groups in the system. The information is stored in a hierarchical format. First, it starts with a volume group under which multiple physical volume groups can exist. Under each physical volume group, a list of physical volumes can be specified. There must be at least one physical volume group in each vo... |
|
magic(4) -- magic numbers for HP-UX implementations
|
|
The magic.h file localizes all information about HP-UX ``magic numbers'' in one file, thus facilitating uniform treatment of magic numbers. This file specifies the location of the magic number in a file (always the start of the file) and the structure of the magic number: struct magic_number { unsigned short system_id; unsigned short file_type; }; typedef struct magic_number MAGIC; magic.h inclu... |
|
mnttab(4) -- mounted file system table
|
|
mnttab resides in directory /etc and contains a table of devices mounted by the mount command (see mount(1M)). The file contains a line of information for each mounted filesystem which is structurally identical to the contents of /etc/fstab described by fstab(4). There are a number of lines of the form: special_file_name dir type opts freq passno mount_time consisting of entries similar to: /dev/d... |
|
model(4) -- HP-UX machine identification
|
|
There are certain inevitable distinctions between HP-UX implementations due to hardware differences. Where such distinctions exist, conditional compilation or other definitions can be used to isolate the differences. Flags and typedefs to resolve these distinctions are collected in the header file which contains constants identifying various HP-UX implementations. For example, header fil... |
|
named.conf(4) -- configuration file for NameDaemon
|
|
BIND 9 configuration is broadly similar to BIND 8.x. However, there are a few new areas of configuration, such as views. BIND 8.x configuration files should work with few alterations in BIND 9.2, although more complex configurations need to be reviewed to check if they can be more efficiently implemented using the new features implemented in BIND 9.2. BIND 4.9.7 configuration files can be converte... |
|
netconfig(4) -- network configuration database
|
|
The network configuration database, /etc/netconfig, is a system file used to store information about networks that are connected to the system. The netconfig database and the routines that access it (see getnetconfig(3N)) are part of the Network Selection component. The Network Selection component also includes getnetpath() routines to provide application-specific network search paths. These routi... |
|
netgroup(4) -- list of network groups
|
|
File /etc/netgroup defines network-wide groups, and is used for permission checking when executing remote mounts, remote logins, and remote shells. For remote mounts, the information in netgroup classifies machines; for remote logins and remote shells, it classifies users. Each line of the netgroup file defines a group and has the format groupname member1 member2 ... where memberi is either anothe... |
|
netrc(4) -- login information for ftp and rexec
|
|
The .netrc file contains login and initialization information used by the ftp autologin process, by the rexec() library routine, and by the rexec command (see ftp(1), rexec(3N), and remsh(1)), respectively. This file is optional. It exists, if at all, in the user's home directory. If the .netrc file contains password or account information for use other than for anonymous ftp, its owner must matc... |
|
nettlgen.co(4) -- network tracing/logging and kernel logging configuration file
|
|
/etc/nettlgen.conf, the configuration file for Common Network Tracing/Logging and Kernel Logging commands commands, contains configuration information used by the nettl, kl, and netfmt commands (see nettl(1M), kl(1M), and netfmt(1M)). The nettlconf command (see nettlconf(1M)) maintains network and kernel log and subsystem data in this file, allowing subsystems to safely add, modify, or delete exis... |
|
nettlgen.conf(4) -- network tracing/logging and kernel logging configuration file
|
|
/etc/nettlgen.conf, the configuration file for Common Network Tracing/Logging and Kernel Logging commands commands, contains configuration information used by the nettl, kl, and netfmt commands (see nettl(1M), kl(1M), and netfmt(1M)). The nettlconf command (see nettlconf(1M)) maintains network and kernel log and subsystem data in this file, allowing subsystems to safely add, modify, or delete exis... |
|
networks(4) -- network name data base
|
|
The /etc/networks file associates Internet (IP) addresses with official network names and aliases. This allows the user to refer to a network by a symbolic name instead of using an Internet address. For each network, a single line should be present with the following information: Aliases are other names under which a network is known. For example:... |
|
nisfiles(4) -- NIS+ database files and directory structure
|
|
The Network Information Service Plus (NIS+) uses a memory-based, replicated database. This database uses a set of files in the /var/nis directory for checkpointing to stable storage and for maintaining a transaction log. Additionally, the NIS+ server and client use files in this directory to store binding and state information. The NIS+ service implements an authentication and authorization system... |
|
nlist(4) -- nlist and nlist64 structure formats
|
|
nlist() and nlist64() can be used to extract information from the symbol table in an object file (see nlist(3E)). They are basically the same tool, and both can process SOM and Elf files. Since symbol tables are machine dependent (as defined in each implementation's copy of ), a header file, nlist.h is defined to encapsulate the differences. The nlist function, either nlist() or nlist64(... |
|
nlist64(4) -- nlist and nlist64 structure formats
|
|
nlist() and nlist64() can be used to extract information from the symbol table in an object file (see nlist(3E)). They are basically the same tool, and both can process SOM and Elf files. Since symbol tables are machine dependent (as defined in each implementation's copy of ), a header file, nlist.h is defined to encapsulate the differences. The nlist function, either nlist() or nlist64(... |
|
nlist_ia(4) -- nlist and nlist64 structure formats
|
|
nlist() and nlist64() can be used to extract information from the symbol table in an object file (see nlist(3E)). They are basically the same tool, and both can process SOM and Elf files. Since symbol tables are machine dependent (as defined in each implementation's copy of ), a header file, nlist.h is defined to encapsulate the differences. The nlist function, either nlist() or nlist64(... |
|
nlist_pa(4) -- nlist and nlist64 structure formats
|
|
nlist() and nlist64() can be used to extract information from the symbol table in an object file (see nlist(3C)). They are basically the same tool except nlist() can only process SOM files on a PA-RISC 32-bit system while nlist64() can process SOM and ELF files on either a PA-RISC 32-bit or 64-bit system. Since symbol tables are machine dependent (as defined in each implementation's copy of |
|
nlspath(4) -- NLSPATH configuration file
|
|
The file /etc/default/nlspath allows the superuser to restrict the paths set by others through an environment variable NLSPATH to locate message catalogs for setuid or setgid root programs. This file contains only one entry with the following format: NLSPATH=pseudo-pseudo-pathname:pseudo-:pseudo-pseudo-pathname:... :... pseudo-pathnames must be separated by a colon. The paths which are available b... |
|
nondcesvc(4) -- file for dceping(8) that lists non-DCE services.
|
|
dceping will ping services named in nondcesvc. Supported naming conventions for this file are: + CDS Name. Example entry: /.:/hosts/foo/someService NAMESPACE PROMPT /.:/hosts/foo/someService NAMESPACE NOPROMPT You can find CDS namespace entries by using the cdsbrowser(8) command. + RPC String Binding. Example entry: ncacn_ip_tcp:foo.entity.company.com[1755] STRING_BINDING You can obtain string bin... |
|
nsswitch.conf(4) -- configuration file for the name-service switch
|
|
The operating system uses a number of "databases" of information about hosts, users (passwd), groups and so forth. Data for these can come from a variety of sources: host-names and -addresses, for example, may be found in /etc/hosts, NIS, NIS+, LDAP or DNS. One or more sources may be used for each database; the sources and their lookup order are specified in the /etc/nsswitch.conf file. The foll... |
|
pam.conf(4) -- configuration file for pluggable authentication modules
|
|
pam.conf is the configuration file for the Pluggable Authentication Module architecture, or PAM. A PAM module provides functionality for one or more of four possible services: authentication, account management, session management, and password management. An authentication service module provides functionality to authenticate a user and set up user credentials. An account management module provid... |
|
pam_user.conf(4) -- users configuration file for pluggable authentication modules
|
|
pam_user.conf is the user configuration file for the Pluggable Authentication Module architecture, or PAM. It is not designed to replace the PAM system configuration file, pam.conf. For PAM to work properly, pam.conf is mandatory (see pam.conf(4)). pam_user.conf is optional. It is used only when a user basis configuration is needed. It mainly specifies options to be used by service modules on a us... |
|
passwd(4) -- password file
|
|
/etc/passwd contains the following information for each user: + login name + encrypted password + numerical user ID + numerical group ID + reserved gecos ID + initial working directory + program to use as shell This is an ASCII file. Each field within each user's entry is separated from the next by a colon. Each user is separated from the next by a newline. This file resides in the /etc directory... |
|
pcf(4) -- port configuration file used by DDFA software
|
|
A port configuration file is used by the Datacommunications and Terminal Controller Device File Access (DDFA) software to configure individual terminal server ports. The generic name of the template file is pcf. In practice, it is renamed for each port that needs different configuration values and the values are altered appropriately for the device attached to the port. A port configuration file i... |
|
pfs(4) -- portable file system
|
|
The Portable File System, or PFS, allows access to a variety of CD-ROM file systems. Currently supported file systems include: iso9660, high sierra, RockRidge Interchange. The PFS package consists of 7 programs: pfs_mountd is responsible for maintaining local and remote mounts. It must be running on both PFS clients and PFS servers. The pfs_mountd program validates arguments, and spawns pfs_mountd... |
|
ppp.auth(4) -- PPP authentication file format
|
|
The file /etc/ppp/Auth contains values used by HP PPP's implementation of the link-level authentication protocols, CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol) and PAP (Password Authentication Protocol). This implementation of both CHAP and PAP conforms to RFC 1334, PPP Authentication Protocols. CHAP is a stronger authentication mechanism and should be used whenever possible, in preference ... |
|
ppp.Auth(4) -- PPP authentication file format
|
|
The file /etc/ppp/Auth contains values used by HP PPP's implementation of the link-level authentication protocols, CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol) and PAP (Password Authentication Protocol). This implementation of both CHAP and PAP conforms to RFC 1334, PPP Authentication Protocols. CHAP is a stronger authentication mechanism and should be used whenever possible, in preference ... |
|
PPP.AUTH(4) -- PPP authentication file format
|
|
The file /etc/ppp/Auth contains values used by HP PPP's implementation of the link-level authentication protocols, CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol) and PAP (Password Authentication Protocol). This implementation of both CHAP and PAP conforms to RFC 1334, PPP Authentication Protocols. CHAP is a stronger authentication mechanism and should be used whenever possible, in preference ... |
|
ppp.devices(4) -- PPP physical device description file format
|
|
The file /etc/ppp/Devices associates dialer types with physical devices and speeds. pppd examines it when placing a call to a neighboring machine. If no suitable speed is found, or if all devices associated with that speed are busy, pppd will try again later. |
|
ppp.Devices(4) -- PPP physical device description file format
|
|
The file /etc/ppp/Devices associates dialer types with physical devices and speeds. pppd examines it when placing a call to a neighboring machine. If no suitable speed is found, or if all devices associated with that speed are busy, pppd will try again later. |
|
PPP.DEVICES(4) -- PPP physical device description file format
|
|
The file /etc/ppp/Devices associates dialer types with physical devices and speeds. pppd examines it when placing a call to a neighboring machine. If no suitable speed is found, or if all devices associated with that speed are busy, pppd will try again later. |
|
ppp.dialers(4) -- PPP dialer description file format
|
|
The file /etc/ppp/Dialers describes how to dial each type of modem attached to the UNIX system that is to be made available for outbound PPP calls. pppd examines it when placing a call to a neighboring machine. When pppd selects a line from Systems, it uses the `speed' field to select an entry in Devices, from which it uses the `dialer' field to select an entry in Dialers. pppd then interprets t... |
|
ppp.Dialers(4) -- PPP dialer description file format
|
|
The file /etc/ppp/Dialers describes how to dial each type of modem attached to the UNIX system that is to be made available for outbound PPP calls. pppd examines it when placing a call to a neighboring machine. When pppd selects a line from Systems, it uses the `speed' field to select an entry in Devices, from which it uses the `dialer' field to select an entry in Dialers. pppd then interprets t... |
|
PPP.DIALERS(4) -- PPP dialer description file format
|
|
The file /etc/ppp/Dialers describes how to dial each type of modem attached to the UNIX system that is to be made available for outbound PPP calls. pppd examines it when placing a call to a neighboring machine. When pppd selects a line from Systems, it uses the `speed' field to select an entry in Devices, from which it uses the `dialer' field to select an entry in Dialers. pppd then interprets t... |
|
ppp.filter(4) -- PPP packet filter specification file format
|
|
The file /etc/ppp/Filter describes how on-demand PPP links are to be managed. By default, any type of packet causes the link (if down) to be brought up (connected to its remote end); any packet is allowed to traverse the link; and any packet is sufficient to reset the idle timer, expiration of which would cause the link to be shut down. This combination is not always appropriate behavior, so the f... |
|
ppp.Filter(4) -- PPP packet filter specification file format
|
|
The file /etc/ppp/Filter describes how on-demand PPP links are to be managed. By default, any type of packet causes the link (if down) to be brought up (connected to its remote end); any packet is allowed to traverse the link; and any packet is sufficient to reset the idle timer, expiration of which would cause the link to be shut down. This combination is not always appropriate behavior, so the f... |
|
PPP.FILTER(4) -- PPP packet filter specification file format
|
|
The file /etc/ppp/Filter describes how on-demand PPP links are to be managed. By default, any type of packet causes the link (if down) to be brought up (connected to its remote end); any packet is allowed to traverse the link; and any packet is sufficient to reset the idle timer, expiration of which would cause the link to be shut down. This combination is not always appropriate behavior, so the f... |
|
ppp.keys(4) -- PPP encryption keys file format
|
|
The keys file named in the gw-crypt option on the pppd command line contains key values used by HP PPP's implementation of link-level encryption. Before transmission, packets with source and destination addresses matching the endpoints on a keys file line are encrypted using DES with the key specified on that keys file line. Upon reception, packets with source and destination addresses matching t... |
|
ppp.Keys(4) -- PPP encryption keys file format
|
|
The keys file named in the gw-crypt option on the pppd command line contains key values used by HP PPP's implementation of link-level encryption. Before transmission, packets with source and destination addresses matching the endpoints on a keys file line are encrypted using DES with the key specified on that keys file line. Upon reception, packets with source and destination addresses matching t... |
|
PPP.KEYS(4) -- PPP encryption keys file format
|
|
The keys file named in the gw-crypt option on the pppd command line contains key values used by HP PPP's implementation of link-level encryption. Before transmission, packets with source and destination addresses matching the endpoints on a keys file line are encrypted using DES with the key specified on that keys file line. Upon reception, packets with source and destination addresses matching t... |
|
ppp.systems(4) -- PPP neighboring systems description file format
|
|
The file /etc/ppp/Systems describes how to connect with neighboring systems via PPP. |
|
ppp.Systems(4) -- PPP neighboring systems description file format
|
|
The file /etc/ppp/Systems describes how to connect with neighboring systems via PPP. |
|
PPP.SYSTEMS(4) -- PPP neighboring systems description file format
|
|
The file /etc/ppp/Systems describes how to connect with neighboring systems via PPP. |
|
pppoec.conf(4) -- PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) client configuration file
|
|
pppoec.conf is the configuration file for the pppoec daemon. This file is read by pppoec to initialize the client. The default file is /etc/ppp/pppoec.conf. Note that, you cannot run pppoec without this configuration file. Each entry in the pppoec.conf file is separated by a new line. Blank lines and lines that begin with # are ignored. |
|
pppoerd.conf(4) -- PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) relay configuration file
|
|
pppoerd.conf is the configuration file for the pppoerd daemon. This file is read by pppoerd to initailize the relay. The default file is /etc/ppp/pppoerd.conf. Note that, you cannot run pppoerd without this configuration file. Each entry in the pppoerd.conf file is separated by a new line. Blank lines and lines that begin with # are ignored. |
|
pppoesd.conf(4) -- PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) server configuration file
|
|
pppoesd.conf is the configuration file for the pppoesd daemon. This file is read by pppoesd to initialize the server. The default file is /etc/ppp/pppoesd.conf. You can use this file to set parameters for each network interface used by pppoesd during PPPoE sessions. Each entry in the pppoesd.conf file is of the following format: parameter=value Each entry in the configuration file is separated by ... |
|
privgrp(4) -- format of privileged values
|
|
setprivgrp() sets a mask of privileges, and getprivgrp(2) returns an array of structures giving privileged group assignments on a pergroup-ID basis (see getprivgrp(2)). setprivgrp() associates a kernel capability with a group ID. This allows subletting of superuser-like privileges to members of a particular group or groups. The constants and structures needed for these system calls are defined in ... |
|
profile(4) -- set up user's environment at login time
|
|
If the file /etc/profile exists, it is executed by the shell for every user who logs in. The file /etc/profile should be set up to do only those things that are desirable for every user on the system, or to set reasonable defaults. If a user's login (home) directory contains a file named .profile, that file is executed (via the shell's exec .profile) before the session begins. .profile files are... |
|
proto(4) -- prototype job file for at(1)
|
|
When a job is submitted to at or batch, the job is constructed as a POSIX shell script (see at(1)). The job file is created in /var/spool/cron/atjobs as follows: + at creates a header describing the job as an at job or a batch job. at jobs submitted to all queues other than queue a are listed as batch jobs. The header is: : at job for an at job, or : batch job for a batch job. + A set of POSIX she... |
|
protocols(4) -- protocol name data base
|
|
This file associates protocol numbers with official protocol names and aliases. This allows the user to refer to a protocol by a symbolic name instead of a number. For each protocol a single line should be present with the following information: These mappings are defined in RFC 1700 Assigned Numbers. Aliases are other names under which... |
|
prpwd(4) -- protected password authentication database files used for trusted systems
|
|
An authentication profile is maintained for each user on the system. A user profile is kept in a protected password database file that is accessible only to the System Administrator. The protected password database files contain among other things the encrypted password for the user account. On a trusted system, the passwords are hidden from normal users. The protected password database files do n... |
|
publickey(4) -- public key database
|
|
/etc/publickey is a local public key database that is used for secure RPC. The /etc/publickey file can be used in conjunction with or instead of other publickey databases, including the NIS publickey map and the NIS+ publickey map. Each entry in the database consists of a network user name (which may refer to either a user or a hostname), followed by the user's public key (in hex notation), a col... |
|
queuedefs(4) -- queue description file for at, batch, and crontab
|
|
The queuedefs file describes the characteristics of the queues managed by cron (see cron(1M)). Each non-comment line in this file describes one queue. The format of the lines are as follows: q.[.[njobj][j][nicen][n][nwaitw] The fields in this line are: w] The fields in this line are: q The name of the queue, such that a is the default queue for jobs started by at (see at(1)), b is the queue for jo... |
|
rc.config(4) -- files containing system configuration information
|
|
The system configuration used at startup is contained in files within the directory /etc/rc.config.d. The file /etc/rc.config sources all of the files within /etc/rc.config.d and /etc/TIMEZONE and exports their contents to the environment. /etc/rc.config The file /etc/rc.config is a script that sources all of the /etc/rc.config.d/* scripts, and also sources /etc/TIMEZONE. To read the configuration... |
|
rc.config.d(4) -- files containing system configuration information
|
|
The system configuration used at startup is contained in files within the directory /etc/rc.config.d. The file /etc/rc.config sources all of the files within /etc/rc.config.d and /etc/TIMEZONE and exports their contents to the environment. /etc/rc.config The file /etc/rc.config is a script that sources all of the /etc/rc.config.d/* scripts, and also sources /etc/TIMEZONE. To read the configuration... |
|
rcsfile(4) -- format of RCS files
|
|
An RCS file is an ASCII file. Its contents are described by the grammar below. The text is free format, i.e., spaces, tabs and newline characters have no significance except in strings. Strings are enclosed by @ symbols. If a string contains the @ symbol, the symbol must be doubled. The meta syntax uses the following conventions: | (bar) Separates alternatives. {...} (braces) Encloses optional phr... |
|
resolv.conf(4) -- resolver configuration file
|
|
The resolver is a set of routines in the C library (see resolver(3N)) that provide access to the Internet Domain Name System. The resolver configuration file contains information that is read by the resolver routines the first time they are invoked by a process. The file is designed to be human-readable, and contains a list of keywords with values that provide various types of resolver information... |
|
resolver(4) -- resolver configuration file
|
|
The resolver is a set of routines in the C library (see resolver(3N)) that provide access to the Internet Domain Name System. The resolver configuration file contains information that is read by the resolver routines the first time they are invoked by a process. The file is designed to be human-readable, and contains a list of keywords with values that provide various types of resolver information... |
|
rhosts(4) -- security files authorizing access by remote hosts and users on local host
|
|
The /etc/hosts.equiv file and files named .rhosts found in users' home directories specify remote hosts and users that are "equivalent" to the local host or user. Users from equivalent remote hosts are permitted to access a local account using rcp or remsh or to rlogin to the local account without supplying a password (see rcp(1), remsh(1), and rlogin(1)). The security provided by hosts.equiv i... |
|
rmtab(4) -- local file system mount statistics
|
|
File /etc/rmtab contains a record of all clients that mounted remote file systems from this machine. Whenever a remote mount is done, an entry is made in the rmtab file of the machine serving that file system. umount removes the entry of a remotely mounted file system. umount -a broadcasts to all servers that they should remove all entries from rmtab created by the sender of the broadcast message.... |
|
rndc.conf(4) -- rndc configuration file
|
|
The BIND utility for controlling the name server, rndc, has its own configuration file /etc/rndc.conf. This file has a structure and syntax similar to that of named's configuration file, named.conf. Statements are enclosed in braces and terminated with a semi-colon. Clauses in the statements are also semi-colon terminated. The usual comment styles supported are: C style: /* */ C++ style: // to en... |
|
rpc(4) -- rpc program number data base
|
|
File /etc/rpc contains user-readable names that can be used in place of RPC program numbers. Each line has the following information: + Name of server for the RPC program + RPC program number + Aliases Items are separated by any number of blanks and tab characters. A # anywhere in the file indicates a comment extending to the end of that line. |
|
rtradvd.conf(4) -- configuration file for router advertisement daemon
|
|
This file describes the information used by rtradvd(1M) when constructing IPv6 router advertisement packets for a specific interface as specified by RFC 2461 ("Neighbor Discovery for IP Version 6"). This file is read by rtradvd at initialization time or upon reception of signal SIGHUP. rtradvd configuration consists of two general statements (defaults, interface) and one substatement (prefixinfo... |
|
sccsfile(4) -- format of SCCS file
|
|
An SCCS file is an ASCII file consisting of six logical parts: checksum Sum of all characters in the file except the first line. delta table Contains information about each delta. user names Login names and/or numerical group IDs of users who are allowed to add deltas. flags Definitions of internal keywords. comments Arbitrary descriptive information about the file. body Actual text lines intermix... |
|
sd(4) -- all objects that Software Distributor (SD) uses, their attributes and storage formats
|
|
The SD commands create, install, distribute and manage software objects (bundles, products, subproducts and filesets). In addition, they define and manage other objects in support of the software administration tasks which users perform. This manual page describes the SD software object classes, their attributes, and the file formats used to store their definitions. For an overview of all SD comma... |
|
securenets(4) -- NIS map security file
|
|
The /etc/securenets file defines networks and hosts that may access the NIS maps on a server. Each line in the file gives a network mask and a net address, each in dotted quad format. For example: 255.255.255.255 133.33.33.33 The file may have any number of netmask/net pairs. When ypserv is started on the server, it checks for the existence of /etc/securenets and reads its contents into memory if ... |
|
security(4) -- security defaults configuration file
|
|
A number of system commands and features are configured based on certain parameters defined in the /etc/default/security configuration file. This file must be world readable and root writable. Each line in the file is treated either as a comment or as configuration information for a given system command or feature. Comments are denoted by a # at the beginning of a line. Noncomment lines are of the... |
|
services(4) -- service name data base
|
|
The file /etc/services associates official service names and aliases with the port number and protocol the services use. For each service a single line should be present with the following information: Port numbers 0 through 1023 are assigned by RFC 1700. This RFC also lists the conventional use of various ports with numbers greater tha... |
|
services.window(4) -- file containing applications and their associated memory window id
|
|
The files /etc/services.window is used by applications using memory windows. Each line in the /etc/services.window file associates an application with a memory window id. A line in the /etc/services.window file cannot start with a space or tab. The format is a unique name, defining the application, followed by a space/tab, followed by a unique window_id. See the sample file in EXAMPLES. Memory win... |
|
shadow(4) -- shadow password file
|
|
The /etc/shadow file is created from the /etc/passwd file by the pwconv command. It is readable only by a privileged user. It can be modified by the passwd, useradd, usermod, and userdel commands. Programs may use the interfaces described in the getspent(3C) manpage to access this information. These functions return a pointer to an spwd structure, which is defined in the header file. |
|
shells(4) -- list of allowed login shells
|
|
/etc/shells is an ASCII file containing a list of legal shells on the system. Each shell is listed in the file by its absolute path name. Lines or portions of lines beginning with # are assumed to be comments and are ignored. Blank lines are also ignored. |
|
slp.conf(4) -- Configuration file for SLP Agents
|
|
The /etc/slp.conf file contains various configuration options for the agents which include the clients that use SLP APIs, the Service Agent server and Directory agents. It determines the configuration of all the SLP agents running on that host. The SLP SA server and DA read the slp.conf file during their invocation and also when they are reconfigured by sending the SIGHUP signal. The properties sp... |
|
slp.reg(4) -- SLP static registration file
|
|
The /etc/slp.reg file provides a mechanism for old applications which are not SLP enabled and cannot be converted, and for portably exchanging registrations between SLP implementations. This file contains a list of service registrations that are read by slpd at startup time and advertised later by slpd which can be acting either as the service agent server or the directory agent. The character enc... |
|
sm(4) -- statd directory and file structures
|
|
/var/statmon/sm and /var/statmon/sm.bak are directories generated by statd (see statd(1M)). Each file in /var/statmon/sm represents one or more machines to be monitored by the statd daemon. Each file in /var/statmon/sm.bak represents one or more machines to be notified by the statd daemon upon its recovery. /var/statmon/state is a file generated by statd to record its version number. This version ... |
|
sm.bak(4) -- statd directory and file structures
|
|
/var/statmon/sm and /var/statmon/sm.bak are directories generated by statd (see statd(1M)). Each file in /var/statmon/sm represents one or more machines to be monitored by the statd daemon. Each file in /var/statmon/sm.bak represents one or more machines to be notified by the statd daemon upon its recovery. /var/statmon/state is a file generated by statd to record its version number. This version ... |
|
snmpd.conf(4) -- configuration file for the SNMP agent
|
|
When invoked, the SNMP agent reads its configuration information from the /etc/SnmpAgent.d/snmpd.conf configuration file. The SNMP agent is either the snmpd (included with HP-UX) or the snmpd.ea (purchased with the HP OpenView product). The SNMP agent will not be able to reply if no values are configured in /etc/SnmpAgent.d/snmpd.conf i.e. /etc/SnmpAgent.d/snmpd.conf is empty. |
|
softkeys(4) -- keysh softkey file format
|
|
|
|
state(4) -- statd directory and file structures
|
|
/var/statmon/sm and /var/statmon/sm.bak are directories generated by statd (see statd(1M)). Each file in /var/statmon/sm represents one or more machines to be monitored by the statd daemon. Each file in /var/statmon/sm.bak represents one or more machines to be notified by the statd daemon upon its recovery. /var/statmon/state is a file generated by statd to record its version number. This version ... |
|
switch(4) -- configuration file for the name-service switch
|
|
The operating system uses a number of "databases" of information about hosts, users (passwd), groups and so forth. Data for these can come from a variety of sources: host-names and -addresses, for example, may be found in /etc/hosts, NIS, NIS+, LDAP or DNS. One or more sources may be used for each database; the sources and their lookup order are specified in the /etc/nsswitch.conf file. The foll... |
|
swpackage(4) -- product specification file (PSF) format
|
|
Introduction The swpackage command packages software into: + a distribution directory (which can be accessed directly or copied onto a CD-ROM), + a distribution tape, such as DDS, nine-track or cartridge tapes. Both directory and tape distributions use the same format. SD can read both tar and cpio tape depots. See sd(4) for details on tape format. The software is organized into a four-level hiera... |
|
symlink(4) -- symbolic link
|
|
A symbolic (or soft ) link is a file whose name indirectly refers (points) to a relative or absolute path name. During path name interpretation, a symbolic link to a relative path name is expanded to the path name being interpreted, and a symbolic link to an absolute path name is replaced with the path name being interpreted. Thus, given the path name /a/b/c/d: If c is a symbolic link to a relativ... |
|
system(4) -- system description configuration files
|
|
The HP-UX system description file describes kernel configuration information used by the kconfig(1M) and mk_kernel(1M) commands. The system description file consists of the following information: + A line specifying the version of the system file. + The list of packaged and traditional kernel modules to be configured. + Planned values for system tunable parameters, and other system-wide configurat... |
|
tar(4) -- format of tar tape archive
|
|
The header structure produced by tar (see tar(1)) is as follows (the array size defined by the constants is shown on the right): struct { char name[NAMSIZ]; (100) char mode[MODE_SZ]; (8) char uid[UID_SZ]; (8) char gid[GID_SZ]; (8) char size[SIZE_SZ]; (12) char mtime[MTIME_SZ]; (12) char chksum[CHKSUM_SZ]; (8) char typeflag; char linkname[NAMSIZ]; (100) char magic[MAGIC_SZ]; (6) char version[VERSIO... |
|
tcpd.conf(4) -- configuration file for tcpd
|
|
When inetd invokes tcpd for a service, it will read /etc/tcpd.conf and perform access control checks (see tcpd(1M)). Each line in the file is treated either as a comment or as configuration information. Commented lines begin with #. Uncommented lines contain two required fields, key and value. The fields are separated by tabs and/or spaces. A line can be continued if it terminates with a backslash... |
|
term(4) -- format of compiled term file
|
|
Compiled terminfo descriptions are placed under the directory /usr/share/lib/terminfo. In order to avoid a linear search of a huge HP-UX system directory, a two-level scheme is used: /usr/share/lib/terminfo/c/name where c/name where /name where name where name is the name of the terminal, and c is the first character of name. Thus, hp110 can be found in the file /usr/share/lib/terminfo/h/hp110. Sy... |
|
TERM(4) -- terminal capabilities
|
|
The header contains definitions for each of the following symbolic constants and capability names in the following tables. In the following table, a Variable is the name by which a C programmer accesses a capability (at the terminfo level). A Capname is the short name for a capability specified in the terminfo source file. It is used by a person updating the source file and by the tput co... |
|
term.h(4) -- terminal capabilities
|
|
The header contains definitions for each of the following symbolic constants and capability names in the following tables. In the following table, a Variable is the name by which a C programmer accesses a capability (at the terminfo level). A Capname is the short name for a capability specified in the terminfo source file. It is used by a person updating the source file and by the tput co... |
|
terminfo(4) -- printer, terminal, and modem capability database
|
|
The requirements in this manpage are in effect only for implementations that claim Enhanced Curses compliance. |
|
term_c(4) -- terminal capabilities
|
|
The header contains definitions for each of the following symbolic constants and capability names in the following tables. In the following table, a Variable is the name by which a C programmer accesses a capability (at the terminfo level). A Capname is the short name for a capability specified in the terminfo source file. It is used by a person updating the source file and by the tput co... |
|
ttys(4) -- terminal control database file, for trusted systems
|
|
The system supports a single terminal control database containing entries for each local terminal that can log into the system. Authentication programs use information contained in the terminal control database to determine if login from the terminal is permitted. Additional fields are maintained for informational purposes. The format of the terminal control database file is identical to other sys... |
|
ttytype(4) -- data base of terminal types by port
|
|
ttytype is a database that identifies the kind of terminal that is attached to each tty port on the system. The file contains one line per port, and each line contains the terminal type (as a name listed in terminfo(4)), a space, and the name of the tty device file, less the initial /dev/. For example, for an HP 2622 terminal on tty02: 2622 tty02 This information is read by tset and by login (for ... |
|
tunefstab(4) -- VxFS file system tuning parameters table
|
|
The tunefstab file contains tuning parameters for VxFS file systems. tunefs sets the tuning parameters for mounted file systems by processing command line options or by reading parameters in the tunefstab file. Each entry in tunefstab is a line of fields in one of the following formats: block-device tunefs-options system-default tunefs-options block-device is the name of the device on which the fi... |
|
tztab(4) -- time zone adjustment table for date(1) and ctime(3C)
|
|
The tztab file describes the differences between Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) and local time. Several local areas can be represented simultaneously with historical detail. The file tztab consists of one or more time zone adjustment entries. The first line of the entry contains a unique string that may match the value of the TZ string in the user's environment. The format is tznamediffdstzname... |
|
udc(4) -- user-defined character raster font format
|
|
The UDC raster font format consists of a character index and character pattern. The code area and the maximum number of characters depend upon the device and the language. The size of the fonts depend upon the merged font file and the device. |
|
ups_conf(4) -- HP PowerTrust Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) monitor configuration file
|
|
The default configuration file for the HP PowerTrust UPS monitor daemon (ups_mond). Another file can be used as long as it complies with the specified format, and the monitor daemon is configured to use the alternate file (see the description of the -f option in ups_mond(1M)). Lines in the configuration file can contain a maximum of 256 characters, and the full pathname of a UPS-tty device file ca... |
|
utmp(4) -- utmp, wtmp, btmp entry format
|
|
These files, which hold user and accounting information for such commands as last, who, write, and login (see last(1), who(1), write(1), and login(1)), have the following structure as defined by : #define UTMP_FILE "/etc/utmp" #define WTMP_FILE "/var/adm/wtmp" #define BTMP_FILE "/var/adm/btmp" #define ut_name ut_user struct utmp { char ut_user[8]; /* User login name */ char ut_id[4];... |
|
utmps(4) -- user-accounting database
|
|
File utmps contains user accounting information for all users logged onto the system. This file will be accessed by getuts(3C) only if utmpd(1M) is not running. The following information is stored in the utmps file: + User login name (up to 256 characters) + /etc/lines id + Device name (console, lnxx; up to 64 characters) + Process id + Type of entry + Exit status of a process marked as DEAD_PROCE... |
|
utmpx(4) -- utmpx database storage file
|
|
File utmpx contains user accounting information for all users logged onto the system. This file will be used instead of the utmp file, which is being depreciated. The following information is stored in the utmpx file: - User login name (up to 24 characters) - /etc/lines id - device name (console, lnxx) - process id - type of entry - exit status of a process marked as DEAD_PROCESS - the time the en... |
|
uuencode(4) -- format of an encoded uuencode file
|
|
Files output by uuencode consist of a header line followed by a number of body lines, and a trailer line. The uudecode command ignores any lines preceding the header or following the trailer (see uuencode(1)). Lines preceding a header must not look like a header. The header line consists of the word begin followed by a space, a mode (in octal), another space, and a string which specifies the name ... |
|
vol_pattern(4) -- VERITAS Volume Manager disk group search specifications
|
|
The vol_pattern search expression language can be used in vxprint and vxedit, and with some VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) support library functions, to locate VERITAS Volume Manager configuration records with particular characteristics. Searches are limited to operation on one disk group at a time. In the current release, search expressions are limited to volume, plex, subdisk, DCO and snap record... |
|
vxmake(4) -- format of a vxmake description file
|
|
Descriptions of configuration records can be given to the vxmake utility either on the command line or in a file. Descriptions given on the command line can specify only one new record. Descriptions given in a description file can specify more than one record. The description file format is a convenient way of indicating record contents for other uses as well. For example, the vxprint utility can ... |
|
wellknownif(4) -- file for dceping(8) that contains the well-known interface IDs for core DCE and other services.
|
|
The default file contains core DCE services. Do not delete those entries. You can edit the file to include other services. The format of an entry is: server_name interface_id major_version_number minor_version_number You can obtain interface_id from the IDL header file for the server. Blank lines or lines beginning with # are ignored. You can use either spaces or tabs to separate items in a line. ... |
|
wtmp(4) -- utmp, wtmp, btmp entry format
|
|
These files, which hold user and accounting information for such commands as last, who, write, and login (see last(1), who(1), write(1), and login(1)), have the following structure as defined by : #define UTMP_FILE "/etc/utmp" #define WTMP_FILE "/var/adm/wtmp" #define BTMP_FILE "/var/adm/btmp" #define ut_name ut_user struct utmp { char ut_user[8]; /* User login name */ char ut_id[4];... |
|
wtmps(4) -- user login information
|
|
wtmps and btmps hold user and accounting information for such commands as last, who, write, and login (see last(1), who(1), write(1), and login(1)). File btmps contains bad login entries for each invalid logon attempt. File wtmps contains a record for all logins and logouts apart from accounting records. These files contain utmps-like structure, the key elements of the structure are given below: c... |
|
xtab(4) -- directories to export to NFS clients
|
|
File /etc/exports describes the directories that can be exported to NFS clients. The system administrator creates it using a text editor. mountd processes it each time a mount request is received (see mountd(1M)). /etc/exports is read automatically by the exportfs command (see exportfs(1M)). If this file is changed, exportfs must be run (exportfs -a) before the changes can affect the daemon's ope... |
|
ypfiles(4) -- Network Information Service database and directory structure
|
|
Remarks The Network Information Service (NIS) was formerly known as Yellow Pages (yp). Although the name has changed, the functionality of the service remains the same. The Network Information Service (NIS) network lookup service uses databases in the directory hierarchy under /var/yp. These databases exist only on machines that act as NIS servers. A database consists of two files created by maked... |
|
acctresume(5) -- suspend and resume accounting when available disk space reaches threshold
|
|
The acctsuspend and acctresume tunables control when accounting stops and resumes due to disk space constraints. When free disk space on the file system being used by accounting reaches the suspension threshold, which is the acctsuspend percentage relative to the percentage of disk space available only to the superuser, accounting is suspended until such time as the free disk space reaches the res... |
|
acctsuspend(5) -- suspend and resume accounting when available disk space reaches threshold
|
|
The acctsuspend and acctresume tunables control when accounting stops and resumes due to disk space constraints. When free disk space on the file system being used by accounting reaches the suspension threshold, which is the acctsuspend percentage relative to the percentage of disk space available only to the superuser, accounting is suspended until such time as the free disk space reaches the res... |
|
acl(5) -- introduction to HFS access control lists
|
|
Access control lists are a key enforcement mechanism of discretionary access control (see Definitions below), for specifying access to files by users and groups more selectively than traditional HP-UX mechanisms allow. HP-UX already enables non-privileged users or processes, such as file owners, to allow or deny other users access to files and other objects on a ``need to know'' basis, as determ... |
|
aclv(5) -- introduction to JFS access control lists (ACLs)
|
|
Access control lists (ACLs) are a key enforcement mechanism of discretionary access control (see Definitions below), for specifying access to files by users and groups more selectively than traditional HP-UX mechanisms allow. HP-UX already enables non-privileged users or processes, such as file owners, to allow or deny other users access to files and other objects on a ``need to know'' basis, as... |
|
aio(5) -- POSIX asynchronous I/O facility
|
|
The POSIX Asynchronous I/O facility implements Section 6.7 of IEEE Standard 1003.1b-1993, Standard for Information Technology, Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX), Part 1: System Application Program Interface (API), Amendment 1: Realtime Extensions (C Language). It allows a process or thread to start multiple simultaneous read and/or write operations to multiple files, to wait for or obtai... |
|
aio_listio_max(5) -- the maximum number of POSIX asynchronous I/O operations that can be specified in a listio() call
|
|
This parameter places a limit on the system resources that can be consumed if a large number of POSIX asynchronous I/O operations are requested in a single listio() call. The value should be set large enough to meet system programming needs while protecting the system against excessive asynchronous I/O operations initiated by a malfunctioning process. Who Is Expected to Change This Tunable? System... |
|
aio_max_ops(5) -- maximum number of POSIX async I/O operations that can be queued at any time
|
|
This parameter places a limit on the system resources that can be consumed if large numbers of POSIX asynchronous I/O operations are queued on the system at the same time. This parameter limits the ability of competing processes to overwhelm the system with large numbers of asynchronous I/O operations and the memory they require. Each enqueued asynchronous operation requires allocation of system m... |
|
aio_monitor_run_sec(5) -- frequency of AIO thread pool monitor execution (in seconds)
|
|
The implementation of POSIX AIO on HP-UX uses kernel threads to perform I/Os to filesystems that do not directly support true asynchronous I/O. (This distinction is transparent to the user.) The kernel threads are organized into worker-thread pools (called AIO thread pools) created on a per-process basis. Since a thread pool mechanism for I/Os introduces a variety of trade-offs concerning utilizat... |
|
aio_physmem_pct(5) -- percentage of physical memory lockable for request
|
|
This parameter places a limit on how much system memory can be locked by the total number of POSIX asynchronous I/O operations that are in progress at any given time. It is important to be aware that an operation remains on the active queue and memory is not released, even if the operation is complete, until it is properly terminated by an aio_return() call for that operation. Asynchronous I/O ope... |
|
aio_prio_delta_max(5) -- greatest delta (slowdown factor) allowed in POSIX async IO request priorities
|
|
This parameter places a limit on how much the priority of a POSIX asynchronous I/O operation can be reduced to slow it down. This is the maximum priority-offset value allowed for aio_reqprio in the asynchronous-I/O control block structure aiocb. Who Is Expected to Change This Tunable? System administrators that run applications requiring heavy usage of POSIX AIO to file systems. |
|
aio_proc_threads(5) -- maximum number of process threads allowed in AIO pool
|
|
The implementation of POSIX AIO on HP-UX uses kernel threads to perform I/Os to filesystems that do not directly support true asynchronous I/O. (This distinction is transparent to the user.) The kernel threads are organized into worker-thread pools (called AIO thread pools) created on a per-process basis. Since a thread pool mechanism for I/Os introduces a variety of trade-offs concerning utilizat... |
|
aio_proc_thread_pct(5) -- percentage of all process threads allowed in AIO pool
|
|
The implementation of POSIX AIO on HP-UX uses kernel threads to perform I/Os to filesystems that do not directly support true asynchronous I/O. (This distinction is transparent to the user.) The kernel threads are organized into worker-thread pools (called AIO thread pools) created on a per-process basis. Since a thread pool mechanism for I/Os introduces a variety of trade-offs concerning utilizat... |
|
aio_req_per_thread(5) -- desirable ratio between number of pending AIO requests and servicing threads
|
|
The implementation of POSIX AIO on HP-UX uses kernel threads to perform I/Os to filesystems that do not directly support true asynchronous I/O. (This distinction is transparent to the user.) The kernel threads are organized into worker-thread pools (called AIO thread pools) created on a per-process basis. Since a thread pool mechanism for I/Os introduces a variety of trade-offs concerning utilizat... |
|
aliases(5) -- aliases file for sendmail
|
|
The newaliases command (which is the same as sendmail -bi; see sendmail(1M)) builds the sendmail alias database from a text file. The default text file is /etc/mail/aliases. Local addresses (local user names) are looked up in the alias database and expanded as necessary, unless the user name is preceded by a backslash (\). When the aliases file contains multiple entries for a given alias, only th... |
|
allocate_fs_swapmap(5) -- determines when swapmap structures are allocated for filesystem swap
|
|
The allocate_fs_swapmap tunable is used to determine whether to allocate all needed filesystem swap structures during the initialization of the filesystem swap device or wait until they are needed. Pre-allocation of all filesystem swap structures upon initialization saves time during later usage of the filesystem swap, and prevents later allocation failure due to physical memory contention. Dynami... |
|
alwaysdump(5) -- defines which classes of kernel memory pages are dumped when a kernel panic occurs
|
|
On large systems, the time required to dump system memory when a kernel panic occurs can be excessive or even prohibitive, depending on how much physical memory is installed in the system. Fast-dump capabilities controlled by the dontdump and alwaysdump parameters Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: Sep 2004 alwaysdump(5) alwaysdump(5) Tunable Kernel Parameters provide a means for r... |
|
aries(5) -- family running HP-UX
|
|
Aries is a dynamic binary emulator which transparently emulates 32-bit and 64-bit PA-RISC HP-UX applications on Itanium-based HP-UX machines. The name ARIES expands to Automatic utomatic Recompilation and ecompilation and Integrated ntegrated Environment nvironment Simulation. Aries is transparent in the sense that: + The PA-RISC HP-UX application is not re-compiled. + The user does not explicitly... |
|
Aries(5) -- emulate PA-RISC HP-UX applications on Itanium-based processor
|
|
Aries is a dynamic binary emulator which transparently emulates 32-bit and 64-bit PA-RISC HP-UX applications on Itanium-based HP-UX machines. The name ARIES expands to Automatic utomatic Recompilation and ecompilation and Integrated ntegrated Environment nvironment Simulation. Aries is transparent in the sense that: + The PA-RISC HP-UX application is not re-compiled. + The user does not explicitly... |
|
ascii(5) -- map of ASCII character set
|
|
The /usr/share/lib/pub/ascii file provides a map of the ASCII character set, giving both octal and hexadecimal equivalents of each character. The file contains the following text: |000 nul|001 soh|002 stx|003 etx|004 eot|005 enq|006 ack|007 bel| |010 bs |011 ht |012 nl |013 vt |014 np |015 cr |016 so |017 si | |020 dle|021 dc1|022 dc2|023 dc3|024 dc4|025 nak|026 syn|027 etb| |030 can|031 em |032 s... |
|
audio(5) -- audio tools available through HP VUE
|
|
This man-page describes the audio tools available through HP VUE for playing, recording, and editing sound. These include Audio Setup, Audio Security, Audio Editor, Audio Control Panel, Audio File and Data Formats, and Audio Library. Audio(5) also provides information on using other audio tools from the HP-UX command line. |
|
Audio(5) -- audio tools available through HP VUE
|
|
This man-page describes the audio tools available through HP VUE for playing, recording, and editing sound. These include Audio Setup, Audio Security, Audio Editor, Audio Control Panel, Audio File and Data Formats, and Audio Library. Audio(5) also provides information on using other audio tools from the HP-UX command line. |
|
audit(5) -- introduction to HP-UX Auditing System
|
|
The purpose of the auditing system is to record instances of access by subjects to objects and to allow detection of any (repeated) attempts to bypass the protection mechanism and any misuses of privileges, thus acting as a deterrent against system abuses and exposing potential security weaknesses in the system. |
|
aud_audit_events(5) -- Auditable events for the audit services
|
|
Code is in place for auditing audit service-significant events. Among these events are: + Administrative operations These are subdivided into modify and query operations. + Filter operations These are subdivided into modify and query operations. Event class definitions, together with filters, control the auditing execution at these code points. Filters can be updated dynamically. Filter files are ... |
|
bufcache_max_pct(5) -- TO BE OBSOLETED
|
|
These tunables, traditionally used for sizing a static buffer cache, are deprecated. The recommended way to configure a static buffer cache is to set the tunables dbc_min_pct and dbc_max_pct to the same value. Please refer to dbc_min_pct(5) and dbc_max_pct(5), or consult HP support for more information. Note that bufpages and nbuf were specified in units of 4K physical pages, and dbc_min_pct and d... |
|
bufpages(5) -- TO BE OBSOLETED
|
|
These tunables, traditionally used for sizing a static buffer cache, are deprecated. The recommended way to configure a static buffer cache is to set the tunables dbc_min_pct and dbc_max_pct to the same value. Please refer to dbc_min_pct(5) and dbc_max_pct(5), or consult HP support for more information. Note that bufpages and nbuf were specified in units of 4K physical pages, and dbc_min_pct and d... |
|
chanq_hash_locks(5) -- size of hashed pool of spinlocks protecting the channel queue hash tables
|
|
This tunable should NOT be changed. The default value is the best choice for optimal system performance. This tunable controls the size of a pool of spinlocks (kernel data structures used for synchronization) that also protect channel queues. A very small value increases the probability of collisions in the channel queue hash tables and degrading performance. Very large values are unnecessary. Who... |
|
complex(5) -- complex functions and macros
|
|
This file contains declarations of all the functions in the Complex Library (described in Section (3M)). It defines the types extended The Itanium-based system 80-bit double-extended type. quad An IEEE 754-compliant, 128-bit floating-point type. On HP-UX, quad is a synonym for long double. It defines the macros complex Expands to _Complex, a keyword designating complex types. imaginary Expands to ... |
|
core_addshmem_read(5) -- determines the inclusion of readable shared memory in a process core dump
|
|
The core_addshmem_read tunable was added in response to a problem where a customer was limited in debugging a user-level process crash because shared memory segments were not written as part of the core file. Upon core dump, the sections of user memory labeled as shared readonly are written (along with the normal data sections) if this tunable is set to 1 (on), and left out if it is set to 0 (off)... |
|
core_addshmem_write(5) -- determines the inclusion of read/write shared memory in process core dump
|
|
The core_addshmem_write tunable was added in response to a problem where a customer was limited in debugging a user-level process crash because shared memory segments were not written as part of the core file. Upon core dump, the sections of user memory labeled as shared readwrite are written (along with the normal data sections) if this tunable is set to 1 (on), and left out if it is set to 0 (of... |
|
create_fastlinks(5) -- configure the system to use fast symbolic links
|
|
When create_fastlinks is nonzero, it causes the system to create HFS symbolic links in a manner that reduces the number of disk-block accesses by one for each symbolic link in a path name lookup. This involves a slight change in the HFS disk format, which makes any disk formatted for fast symbolic links unusable on Series 700 systems prior to HP-UX Release 9.0 and Series 800 systems prior to HP-UX... |
|
csacsa(5) -- calendar and appointment services definitions
|
|
The csa/csa.h header defines the following data types through typedef: typedef short int CSA_sint16; typedef long int CSA_sint32; typedef unsigned char CSA_uint8; typedef unsigned short int CSA_uint16; typedef unsigned long int CSA_uint32; typedef void * CSA_buffer; typedef CSA_uint32 CSA_entry_handle; typedef CSA_uint32 CSA_session_handle; typedef char * CSA_string; typedef CSA_string CSA_attribu... |
|
dbc_max_pct(5) -- maximum percentage of memory to be used for caching file I/O data and metadata
|
|
During file-system I/O operations, data is stored in a buffer cache, the size of which can be fixed or dynamically allocated. When the parameters dbc_min_pct and dbc_max_pct are different, the size of the buffer cache grows or shrinks dynamically depending on competing requests for system memory. The value of dbc_max_pct specifies the maximum percentage of physical memory that may be consumed by t... |
|
dbc_min_pct(5) -- minimum percentage of memory used for caching file I/O data and metadata
|
|
During file-system I/O operations, data is stored in a buffer cache, the size of which can be fixed or dynamically allocated. When the parameters dbc_min_pct and dbc_max_pct are different, the size of the buffer cache grows or shrinks dynamically depending on competing requests for system memory. The value of dbc_min_pct specifies the minimum percentage of physical memory that is reserved for use ... |
|
default_disk_ir(5) -- enable/disable the use of a device's write cache in the SCSI subsystem
|
|
This tunable enables (1) or disables (0) the Immediate Reporting behavior of the SCSI subsystem, also known as Write Cache Enable (WCE). With Immediate Reporting enabled, disk drives that have data caches return from a write() system call, including raw writes, when the data is cached, rather than returning after the data is written to the media. This sometimes improves write performance especiall... |
|
dirent(5) -- format of directory streams and directory entries
|
|
This header file defines data types used by the directory stream routines described in directory(3C). The following data types are defined: DIR A structure containing information about an open directory stream. struct dirent A structure defining the format of entries returned by the readdir() function (see directory(3C)). The struct dirent structure includes the following members: char d_name[MAXN... |
|
dld.sl(5) -- dynamic loader
|
|
The /usr/lib/pa20_64/dld.sl program is the PA-RISC 64-bit dynamic loader. The /usr/lib/dld.sl program is the PA-RISC 32-bit dynamic loader. In programs that use shared libraries, dld.sl is invoked automatically at startup time by exec on PA-RISC 64-bit systems and by the startup file crt0.o on PA-RISC 32-bit systems. Identical copies of crt0.o are kept in both /opt/langtools/lib and /usr/ccs/lib d... |
|
dld.so(5) -- dynamic loader
|
|
The /usr/lib/hpux64/dld.so shared library is the 64-bit dynamic loader. The /usr/lib/hpux32/dld.so shared library is the 32-bit dynamic loader. In programs that use shared libraries, dld.so is invoked automatically at startup time. /usr/ccs/lib/hpux64/crt0.o is the 64-bit run-time startup file. /usr/ccs/lib/hpux32/crt0.o is the 32-bit run-time startup file. The /usr/lib/hpux32/uld.so and /usr/lib/... |
|
dma32_pool_size(5) -- the amount of memory to reserve for the 32-bit DMA pool
|
|
This tunable specifies the amount of memory in the first 4GB of the physical address space to be reserved for DMA for 32-bit cards. The memory is set aside at boot time and cannot be used for other purposes. This is required only on some Itanium platforms. On platforms where the 32-bit pool is not needed, this value is ignored. The value of this tunable should be set based on the number of 32-bit ... |
|
dnlc_hash_locks(5) -- number of locks for the Directory Name Lookup Cache (DNLC)
|
|
To speed up the search through directories in the kernel, there is a memory resident cache of directories called the Directory Name Lookup Cache (DNLC). During a filename lookup in the kernel, any directories or files encountered are retained in the DNLC for future reference. The DLNC is managed in a Least Recently Used (LRU) fashion. The dnlc_hash_locks dictates the number of lock groups that wil... |
|
dontdump(5) -- defines which classes of kernel memory pages are not dumped when a kernel panic occurs
|
|
On large systems, the time required to dump system memory when a kernel panic occurs can be excessive or even prohibitive, depending on how much physical memory is installed in the system. Fast-dump capabilities controlled by the dontdump and alwaysdump parameters provide a means for restricting kernel dumps to specific types of information: Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: Sep 2... |
|
dst(5) -- difference between Universal (Greenwich mean) time and Local time
|
|
The timezone tunable is the difference between Greenwich mean time (Universal Time) and local time, expressed as minutes west of Greenwich, England. The dst tunable indicates whether the timezone tunable is to be interpreted as a standard or daylight savings time value. These tunables provide a way to convert between Grenwich Mean Time (or Universal Time) and local time. Although timezone is a tun... |
|
Dt(5) -- miscellaneous desktop definitions
|
|
The Dt/Dt.h header contains miscellaneous public constant and function declaration for the CDE library. The header defines several constants that can be used to determine the version of the library used to compile an application and the version of the library with which an application is currently linked. The header defines the following constants that represent the library compile-time version: D... |
|
DtAction(5) -- action service definitions
|
|
The Dt/Action.h header defines the following DtActionStatus constants: DtACTION_OK DtACTION_INVALID_ID DtACTION_INVOKED DtACTION_DONE DtACTION_CANCELED DtACTION_FAILED DtACTION_STATUS_UPDATE The header defines the following data type through typedef: typedef unsigned long DtActionInvocationID; The header defines the following callback prototypes: typedef void (*DtActionCallbackProc)(DtActionInvoca... |
|
dtactionaction(5) -- CDE action management actions
|
|
The CDE Action Creation Services support the following action management actions: Dtcreate Open an empty view of the desktop action and data type editor. Dtcreate file Open a view of the desktop action and data type editor and load the action and data type description file named by the pathname in the file argument. The description file must have been previously created by the desktop action and d... |
|
dtappaction(5) -- CDE application management actions
|
|
The CDE Application Integration Services support the following application management actions: Dtappmgr Open a view of the Application Manager. |
|
dtbuilderaction(5) -- CDE application builder actions
|
|
The CDE Application Builder Services support the following application builder actions: Dtbuilder Open an empty application builder view. Dtbuilder component Open an application builder view of the module or project named by the pathname in the component argument. Dtcodegen Prompt the user for the pathname of a project and generate code for the project specified by the user. Dtcodegen component Ge... |
|
dtcalcaction(5) -- CDE calculator actions
|
|
The CDE Action Creation Services support the following calculator actions: Dtcalc Open a view of the desktop calculator tool. These actions can be invoked from an application using the DtActionInvoke(3) function or invoked from a command line using the dtaction(1) utility. |
|
dtcalendaraction(5) -- CDE calendar and appointment management actions
|
|
The CDE Calendar and Appointment Services support the following calendar and appointment management actions: Dtcm Open a view of the user's default calendar. DtcmEdit appointment Edit the appointment named by the pathname in the appointment argument. DtcmInsert appointment Insert the appointment named by the pathname in the appointment argument into the user's default calendar. Open appointment ... |
|
DtComboBox(5) -- DtComboBox widget definitions
|
|
The Dt/ComboBox.h header defines the following structure: typedef struct { int reason; XEvent *event; XmString item_or_text; int item_position; } DtComboBoxCallbackStruct; The header declares the following constants: DtALIGNMENT_BEGINNING DtALIGNMENT_CENTER DtALIGNMENT_END DtCR_SELECT DtDROP_DOWN_COMBO_BOX DtDROP_DOWN_LIST The header declares the following as functions: void DtComboBoxAddItem(Widg... |
|
DtDnd(5) -- Drag and drop definitions
|
|
The Dt/Dnd.h header defines the following enumeration types: DtCR_DND_CONVERT_DATA DtCR_DND_CONVERT_DELETE DtCR_DND_DRAG_FINISH DtCR_DND_TRANSFER_DATA DtCR_DND_DROP_ANIMATE The header defines the following enumeration data types, with at least the following members: |
|
DtDts(5) -- data typing definitions
|
|
The Dt/Dts.h header declares the following structure: typedef struct _DtDtsAttribute { char *name; char *value; } DtDtsAttribute; The header declares the following as functions: DtDtsAttribute **DtDtsBufferToAttributeList(const void *buffer, const int size, const char *opt_name); char *DtDtsBufferToAttributeValue(const void *buffer, const int size, const char *attr_name, const char *opt_name); cha... |
|
DtEditor(5) -- editor widget definitions
|
|
The Dt/Editor.h header defines structures, enumerations and function prototypes for the Editor widget class. The header defines the DtEditorDataFormat enumeration data type, with at least the following members: DtEDITOR_TEXT The data being transferred is a pointer to a NULL-terminated string of characters (a char *). DtEDITOR_WCHAR The data being transferred is a wide character string (a wchar_t *... |
|
dtenvvar(5) -- CDE environment variables
|
|
The CDE desktop sets up and uses a number of environment variables to find certain files and do certain things. Components tied into CDE then use these environment variables to locate specific types of files. Environment variables used within the CDE desktop are: CEPATH Used by ToolTalk when in Classing Engine mode, where the Classing Engine where to find the databases. Refer to ttsession(1) and t... |
|
dtfileaction(5) -- CDE file management actions
|
|
The CDE File Management Services support the following file management actions: Dtfile Prompt the user for the pathname of a directory and open a folder view of the directory specified by the user. Dtfile directory Open a folder view of the directory named by the pathname in the directory argument. |
|
dtfilsys(5) -- CDE file system; directory tree structure
|
|
The CDE file system is divided into three parts: the root system, /usr/dt, the configuration directory, /etc/dt, and the temporary directory, /var/dt. The root system, /usr/dt, is a read-only directory. It contains all the files that comprise the CDE. The configuration directory, /etc/dt, is the directory CDE applications will search to locate configuration files that have been modified by the sys... |
|
DtHelp(5) -- help services definitions
|
|
The Dt/Help.h header defines the variables and function prototypes for help services. The header defines the following DtHelpDialogCallbackStruct windowHint constants: DtHELP_POPUP_WINDOW DtHELP_CURRENT_WINDOW DtHELP_NEW_WINDOW The header defines the following DtHelpDialogCallbackStruct hyperType constants: DtHELP_LINK_JUMP_NEW DtHELP_LINK_TOPIC DtHELP_LINK_MAN_PAGE DtHELP_LINK_APP_DEFINE DtHELP_L... |
|
dthelpaction(5) -- CDE help actions
|
|
The CDE Help Services support the following help actions: |
|
DtHelpDialog(5) -- DtHelpDialog definitions
|
|
The Dt/HelpDialog.h header defines the variables and function prototypes for help dialog services. The Dt/HelpDialog.h header declares the following variable: WidgetClass dtHelpDialogWidgetClass; The header declares the following as a function: Widget DtCreateHelpDialog(Widget parent, char *name, ArgList *arglist, Cardinal argcount); |
|
DtHelpQuickD(5) -- DtHelpQuickDialog definitions
|
|
The Dt/HelpQuickD.h header defines the variables and function prototypes for help quick dialog services. The Dt/HelpQuickD.h header declares the following variable: WidgetClass dtHelpQuickDialogWidgetClass; The header declares the following as a function: Widget DtCreateHelpQuickDialog(Widget parent, char *name, Arg *arglist, Cardinal argcount); |
|
dticonaction(5) -- CDE icon editing actions
|
|
The CDE Icon Editing Services support the following icon editing actions: Dticon Open an empty icon editor view. Dticon icon Open an icon editor view of the bitmap or pixmap named by the pathname in the icon argument. Open icon Open an icon editor view of the bitmap or pixmap named by the pathname in the icon argument. These actions can be invoked from an application using the DtActionInvoke(3) fu... |
|
dtimsstartaction(5) -- CDE input method server actions
|
|
The CDE Input Method Server Services support the following input method server actions: DtImsMode Change the IM Selection Mode. This action is located at Desktop_Tools in the Application Manager. |
|
dtinfoaction(5) -- CDE information management actions
|
|
The CDE Information Management Services support the following information management actions: DtLoadInfoLib filename Load the information library specified by filename, which can be either a relative or absolute file path. If filename is not specified, dtinfo displays the default information library(s). Open filename Load the information library specified by filename. Remaps to DtLoadInfoLib filen... |
|
dtinfoaf(5) -- dtinfo architectural forms
|
|
dtinfo.af provides entity definitions for the dtinfo architectural forms. While these are not required, using them minimizes updating your DTDs as features are added to the Dtinfo Toolkit. You can also find an ASCII file of the dtinfo.af in /usr/dt/infolib/%L/SGML/dtinfo.af. For information on applying dtinfo architectural forms to your DTDs, see "Modifying Your Existing DTD" in CDE: Information... |
|
dtinfoBookdtd(5) -- dtinfo bookcase document type definition
|
|
This is the document type definition for bookcases under dtinfo. You can also find an ASCII file of the dtinfoBook.dtd in /usr/dt/infolib/%L/SGML/dtinfoBook.dtd. The bookcase DTD is defined as follows: |
|
DtInfoLib(5) -- collection of book cases for browsing with dtinfo
|
|
DtInfoLib is a desktop object representing a collection of book cases of documents that can be accessed through the CDE Information Manager. DtInfoLib data criteria and data attributes are identified for use by desktop facilities. These are part of the CDE built-in data types. DtInfoLib is a directory that contains the collection of book cases available for a given information library. The content... |
|
dtinfoStyledtd(5) -- dtinfo style sheet document type definition
|
|
dtinfoStyle.dtd describes the SGML features available for specifying how a document should be rendered. Style sheets associate the elements in a given document hierarchy with on-line or print formatting characteristics, and are part of the DtInfo Toolkit. With dtinfo, you use a single style sheet to specify both print and online rendering of the elements in your DTD. The print and online feature s... |
|
dtinfoTOCdtd(5) -- dtinfo table of contents document type definition
|
|
This is the document type definition for tables of contents under dtinfo. You can also find an ASCII file of the dtinfoTOC.dtd in /usr/dt/infolib/%L/SGML/dtinfoTOC.dtd. The table of contents DTD is defined as follows:
|
